Sanskrit Dictionary

Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.

Amarakosha Search

6 results

Word	Reference	Gender	Number	Synonyms

anayaḥ	3.3.157	Masculine	Singular	saṅghātaḥ, sanniveśaḥ

karṇikā	3.3.15	Feminine	Singular	valayaḥ, cakraḥ, bhūbhrūnnitambaḥ

manojavasaḥ	3.1.12	Masculine	Singular	pitṛsannibhaḥ

vyañjanam	3.3.123	Neuter	Singular	udgamaḥ, pauruṣam, tantram, sanniviṣṭhaḥ

sanniveśaḥ		Masculine	Singular	nikarṣaṇaḥ

sannidhiḥ	2.4.23	Masculine	Singular	saṃnikarṣaṇam

Monier-Williams Search

939 results for nni

for words beginning thus See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order ab-indhana-, ab-ja-, etc.

ābālam

ind. down to or including children, beginning with infants

abhāva

m. annihilation, death.

abhidhāvaka

mfn. running up, hastening towards

abhidhāvana

n. running up, attack.

abhidipsu

mfn. (dips- Desiderative of dambh-),"wishing to deceive", inimical, cunning

abhikrama

m. undertaking, attempt, beginning.

abhipale

( i-) to follow after any one running away (accusative), PBr. (see pale-.)

abhipātin

mfn. running to the help of (in compound)

abhisaṃsāram

ind. running near in crowds

abhisaṃvṛtta

mfn. undertaking, beginning to (Inf.)

abhiskandam

ind. running near

abhisṛṣṭa

mfn. "let loose in a special direction", running towards (accusative or locative case)

abhiṣyand

( syand-), -syandate- (or also -ṣyandate-,if said intransitively of lifeless objects

) to run towards or along (generally said of liquids)

(perf. -siṣyade-,said of a plant growing or running along the stem and branches of a tree), etc.

abhiṣyanda

m. running at the eyes

abhisyanda

m. running at the eyes

abhitaḥsara

mfn. running on both sides

abhitaṣṭīya

n. Name (also title or epithet) of the hymn

(beginning abh/i- t-/ aṣte- va-),

abhitorātram

ind. near (id est either just at the beginning or end of) the night

abhrāgama

m. "cl-approach", beginning of the rainy season,

abhyādāna

n. beginning

abhyārambha

m. beginning

abhyārambha

m. rebeginning, repetition

abhyāsakta

mfn. ( sañj-), closely linked together (as days by beginning a day with the same ceremony which has been performed at the end of the preceding day)

commentator or commentary on

abhyudaya

m. beginning, commencing (as of darkness, etc.)

ābhyudayika

mfn. (fr. abhy-udaya-), connected with the beginning or rising of anything

abhyuddravaṇa

n. running forth,

, Scholiast or Commentator

abhyuddṛṣṭeṣṭi

f. Name of a ceremony (beginning only after the moon has become visible),

abuddhipūrva

mfn. beginning with non-intelligence

abuddhipūrvaka

mfn. beginning with non-intelligence

acatura

mfn. not cunning, not dexterous.

ādau

ind. in the beginning, at first.

ādhāv

P. /ā-dhāvati- (A1.only p. -dhāvamāna-

) to flow towards, run near

; to come running, run or hasten towards ; to return

ādi

m. beginning, commencement

ādi

m. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' beginning with, et caetera, and so on (exempli gratia, 'for example' indrādayaḥ surāḥ-,the gods beginning with indra- id est indra- etc.; gṛhādiyukta-,possessed of houses etc.; evamādīni vastūni-,such things and others of the same kind: śayyā khaṭvādih-[Comm. on

], śayyā- means a bed etc.;often with -ka-at the end exempli gratia, 'for example' dānadharmādikam-[

],liberality, justice, etc.)

ādi

mfn. beginning with ā-

ādibuddha

mfn. "perceived in the beginning"

ādidīpaka

n. Name of a figure in rhetoric (the verb standing at the beginning of the sentence)

ādikarman

n. the beginning of an action (in grammar)

ādimat

mfn. having a beginning

etc.

ādimattva

n. the state of having a beginning

āditā

f. the being the beginning of anything,

āditas

ind. from the beginning, from the first, at first, at the head of (with1. kṛ-,to put at the beginning

; in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' beginning with).

ādityavani

mfn. winning (the favour of) the āditya-s

ādru

P. -dravati-, to run towards, hasten towards, approach running

ādya

mf(ā-)n. ([

]) being at the beginning, first, primitive

etc.

ādyanta

n. or au- dual number plural beginning and end,

etc.

ādyanta

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' beginning and ending with

ādyantavat

mfn. "having beginning and end", finite

ādyantavat

ind. as if it were the beginning and the end

ādyantayamaka

n. "homophony in the beginning and end of a stanza", Name of a figure in poetry (occurring in

etc.)

adyāvadhi

mfn. beginning or ending to-day

agnihotraprāyaṇa

mfn. beginning with the agni-hotra-,

agra

n. the nearest end, the beginning

agrahāyaṇa

m. "commencement of the year", Name of a Hindu month (mārgaśīrṣa-,beginning about the 12th of November) .

agraśas

ind. from the beginning

agratas

ind. in the beginning, first

āgrayaṇāgra

mfn. beginning with the

agre

ind. in front, ahead of, in the beginning, first

agrimavatī

f. the verse

(beginning with p/avasva- vāc-/ o- agriy-/ aḥ-),

ahe

ind. a particle (implying reproach, rejection, separation

)

(only in a sacrificial formula beginning with /ahe daidhiṣavya-and reoccurring in several other texts) .

āhvṛti

mfn. crooked, cunning

āji

m. rarely f. only once in

, ( aj-), a running-match

āji

m. place for running, race-course

ājijityā

f. victory in a running-match

ājikṛt

mfn. fighting or running for a prize

akhilīkṛ

-kṛtya- ind.p. not having annihilated or rendered powerless

ākrandika

mf(ī-)n. running to where cries for help are heard

ākṣika

mfn. (fr. 2. akṣ/a-) relating or belonging to a die or to gambling etc., playing or winning or won at dice

alpārambha

m. a gradual beginning

āmamāṃsāśin

m. eater of raw flesh, a cannibal.

āmapīnasa

m. running at the nose, defluxion

amāya

mfn. not cunning, not sagacious

āmūlam

ind. from the beginning.

anādi

mfn. having no beginning, existing from eternity.

anādimadhyānta

mfn. having no beginning, middle or end.

anādimat

mfn. having no beginning.

anādinidhana

mfn. having neither beginning nor end, eternal.

anāditva

n. state of having no beginning.

anādyananta

mfn. without beginning and without end

anādyanta

mfn. without beginning and end

ananvavajaya

m. the not winning subsequently, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anapakrāmuka

mf(/ā-)n. not running away

anārambha

m. absence of beginning, non-commencement, not attempting or undertaking

anavarāgra

mfn. without beginning or end (?),

andhatāmisra

n. doctrine of annihilation after death.

āndola

m. fanning

antādi

ī- dual number m. end and beginning, (gaRa rājadantādi- q.v)

anubandha

m. commencement, beginning

anudhāvana

n. chasing, pursuing, running after

anupūrveṇa

ind. in regular order or succession, from the first, from the beginning, from above downwards.

anurodhana

n. means for winning the affection of.

anusaṃdhāna

n. investigation, inquiry, searching into, close inspection, setting in order, arranging, planning

anusaṃtṝ

to carry to the end, go on (in spinning)

anuśrath

cl.6 P. -śṛnthati-, to untie

: Causal P. (Aorist subjunctive 2. sg. -śiśrathaḥ-) to frighten ([

;"to abolish"

])

: A1. -śrathayate-, to annihilate or soften the effect of.

apadādi

m. not the beginning of a pāda-

apādadibhāj

mfn. not standing at the beginning of a pāda-

aparyāsita

mfn. (Causal perf. Pass. p. 2. as-), not thrown down or annihilated

apas

f. of the active or running waters

apas

mfn. (fr. 2. /ap-), watery. (So some passages of the ṛg-veda- [

] may (according to

and others) be translated where the word is applied to the running watersSee 2. ap/as-at end and ap/as-tama-.)

apāya

m. destruction, death, annihilation

api

na vāpi- or na apivā- or na nacāpi-, neither, nor, cāpi-, (and at the beginning of a sentence) api-ca-, moreover.

api

may be interrogative at the beginning of a sentence.

apināma

(in the beginning of a phrase) , perhaps, in all probability, I wish that

apiśarvara

mfn. "contiguous to the night", being at the beginning or end of the night

apratisaṃkhyānirodha

m. the unobserved annihilation of an object

apsu

for words beginning thus See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order apsu-.

ārabdha

mfn. one who has begun or commenced, beginning, commencing

ārabdhi

f. beginning, commencement

ārabhamāṇa

mfn. beginning, commencing resolutely (with a determination to finish).

ārabhya

beginning with.

ārambha

m. undertaking, beginning

etc.

ārambha

m. beginning, origin, commencement

etc.

ārambhaka

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' commencing, beginning

ārambhaṇa

n. beginning, undertaking, commencement.

ārambhatā

f. the condition of beginning or commencing

ārāvalī

f. "row of awl-shaped hills", Name of a chain of mountains (commonly called Aravalli, running for 300 miles in a north-easterly direction through Rajputana etc., the highest point being Mount Abu 5650 feet high).

ardana

mfn. annihilating, destroying

(see mahīṣārdana-)

ārdharātrika

m. plural Name of an astronomical school who reckoned the beginning of the motions of the planets from midnight.

arthet

mfn. ( i-), active, hasty (said of running waters)

arvan

mfn. running, quick (said of agni- and indra-)

arvasa

mfn. running, quick (said of indra- and of the gods)

arvaśa

mfn. running, quick (said of indra- and of the gods)

arvat

mfn. running, hasting

āsamāpti

ind. (from the beginning) to the end,

āsaṃsāram

ind. ( sṛ-), from the beginning of the world, ever

aśeṣita

mfn. completely annihilated,

āsṛ

P. -sarati-, to hasten towards, come running

: Causal Passive voice -śāryate-, to be undertaken or begun

āsrāva

m. flow, issue, running, discharge

asruva

n. granulation (of a running sore)

asti

ind. (3. sg. proper 1. as-; gaRa cādi-and svar-ādi- q.v) sometimes used as a mere particle at the beginning of fables

āśuheman

m. urged to fast course, running on quickly

asvarādi

mfn. not beginning with a vowel.

āśvināgra

mfn. beginning with a cup etc.,

asyavāmīya

n. the hymn beginning with the words asy/a vām/asya- (

)

ātapāpāya

m. passing away of the hot season, beginning of the rainy season

atidhvaṃs

to raise the dust in running through or over (3. plural Conj. Aorist ati-dhvas/an-)

atipātin

mfn. (in med.) running a rapid course, acute, neglecting.

aupākaraṇa

mfn. (fr. upākaraṇa-), relating to the preparatory ceremony before beginning the study of the veda-

auṣṇiha

mfn. in the uṣṇih- metre, beginning with an uṣṇih-

etc.

avacāraṇa

mfn. running, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

avajaya

m. overcoming, winning by conquest

avakhaṇḍ

-khaṇḍayati-, to break into pieces

; to annihilate, destroy commentator or commentary on

avakrāmin

mfn. running away

avalīna

mfn. "engaged in"(in compound), beginning to

avarārdhya

mfn. beginning from below

avaṣṭambha

m. beginning

āvid

f. technical designation of the formulas (in

) beginning with āvis- and āvitta-

avidāsin

mfn. not drying up (as a pond), perennial

avimocana

n. not liberating, not running to any one's help

ayāsomīya

n. Name of some verses of the

(so called from their beginning with the words ay/ā s/oma-).

ayoni

mfn. without origin or beginning (said of brahma-)

baka

m. (also written vaka-) a kind of heron or crane, Ardea Nivea (often figuratively = a hypocrite, cheat, rogue, the crane being regarded as a bird of great cunning and deceit as well as circumspection)

etc.

bata

ind. (later usually vata-; gaRa svar-ādi-) an interjection expressing astonishment or regret, generally = ah! oh! alas! (originally placed immediately after the leading word at the beginning of a sentence, or only separated from it by iva-;rarely itself in the first place exempli gratia, 'for example'

;in later language often in the middle of a sentence)

bha

(in gram.) Name of the weakest base of nouns (as opp. to pada-and aṅga- q.v) id est of the base before the vowel terminations except in strong cases, before feminine suffixes, and before taddhita-s beginning with vowels or y-

bhaṅga

m. (with jaina-s) a dialectical formula beginning with syāt- q.v

bhañjana

n. breaking, shattering, crushing, destroying, annihilating, frustrating

etc.

bharjana

mfn. parching id est destroying, annihilating, frustrating (with genitive case) 5

bharjita

mfn. destroyed, annihilated

bhavabhaṅga

m. annihilation of worldly existence, delivery from births or transmigration

bhavatpūrvam

ind. with bhavat- at the beginning

bheda

m. disuniting, winning over to one's side by sowing dissension (see upāya-)

bhedikā

f. the act of breaking down or asunder, destruction, annihilation

bhojadeva

m. Name of a celebrated king of dhārā- (who was a great patron of learning at the beginning of the 11th century, and is the reputed author of several works., especially of a commentator or commentary on the yoga-sūtra-s see

)

etc.

bhraṃśin

mfn. causing to fall, ruining, annihilating (see svārtha-bh-).

bhūtādika

mfn. beginning with the elements, the element etc.

brahmādya

mfn. (fr. 1. ādya-) beginning with brahmā-

brahmārambha

m. beginning to repeat the veda-

buddhaghoṣa

m. Name of a Buddhist scholar (who lived at the beginning of the 5th century A.D.;the name is not found in Sanskrit works)

cakravartin

m. a ruler the wheels of whose chariot roll everywhere without obstruction, emperor, sovereign of the world, ruler of a cakra- (or country described as extending from sea to sea; 12 princes beginning with bharata- are especially considered as cakravartin-s)

etc.

camara

m. a kind of ox called the Yak (Bos grunniens)

etc.

camarī

f. the Bos grunniens

etc.

carācara

mfn. ( car- reduplicated

Va1rtt. 6; vii, 4, 58

) moving, locomotive, running

cāturmāsya

n. beginning of a season of 4 months

cāturmāsya

n. plural Name of the 3 sacrifices performed at the beginning of the 3 seasons of 4 months (viz. vaiśvadev/am-, varuṇa-praghās/āḥ-, sākam-edh/āḥ-)

etc.

caturthiprabhṛti

mfn. (for thī-- p-) beginning with the fourth night,

ced

ind. (

ca id-) (never found at the beginning of a sentence or verse) equals ca-,"and"

(c/ed-ca-,"as well as")

ced

ind. na ced- (gaRa cādi-,also separated by the verb[

]or the verb preceded by na-placed at the end of the sentence[

] , rarely cen na-in reversed order beginning the apodosis

) "if not" (equals no ced-forming a sentence by itself.

)

ced

ind. no ced- exceptionally equals na ced- (beginning a sentence)

chāttragaṇḍa

m. a bad scholar (knowing only the beginnings of verses)

chid

cl.7. chin/atti-, chintte- (imperative n/attu-;2. sg. ndh/i-[ confer, compare

];2. dual number nt/am-; subjunctive 1. sg. n/adai-; Potential ndet-

; cl.9. 1. sg. chinnāmi-

; imperfect tense 2. sg. achinad-,or nas-

; perfect tense ciccheda-, cchide-; parasmE-pada cchidvas-,

; Aorist acchidat-or acchaitsīt-[ subjunctive ch-

etc.]

;2. sg. chitsi-

;1. plural chedma-

; A1. acchitta-and 2. sg. tthās-[ subjunctive ch-

; future chetsyati-,

; ind.p. chittvā- infinitive mood chettum-; Passive voice chidyate-;

See /a-cchidyamāna-; Aorist /acchedi-and chedi-

) to cut off, amputate, cut through, hew, chop, split, pierce

etc. ; to divide, separate from (ablative;exceptionally instrumental case

)

; to destroy, annihilate, efface, blot out

etc. ; (in mathematics) to divide

: Passive voice to be split or cut, break

: Causal chedayati- (Aorist acicchidat-) to cut off.

; to cause to cut off or through

: Desiderative See cicchitsu- : Intensive cecchidīti- (

), dyate- (

Va1rtt. 2

) ; future Ist ditā-,

Va1rtt. 2

; ([ confer, compare , etc.; Latin scindo; Gothic skeida.])

chid

mfn. destroying, annihilating, removing

(see darpa--, duḥkha--, paṅka--, bhava--)

chid

f. "annihilation of (in compound) " See bhava--.

chidura

mf(ā- )n. annihilating (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

cihaṇa

beginning a gaṇa- of

cikitsu

mfn. wise, cunning

citra

n. punning in the form of question and answer, facetious conversation, riddle, iv, 14/v

cūḍā

f. (beginning a gaṇa- of

: gaRa bhidādi-) the hair on the top of the head, single lock or tuft left on the crown of the head after tonsure

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

curādi

the class of roots beginning with cur-

daivādyanta

mfn. beginning and ending with a ceremony in honour of the gods (opp. to pitrādy-)

dakṣiṇopakrama

mfn. beginning on the right,

darpārambha

m. beginning of pride

daśasani

mfn. winning 10

devapūrvakam

ind. beginning with the gods

dhakk

cl.10 P. dhakkayati-, to destroy, annihilate

dhana

n. the prize of a contest or the contest itself (literally a running match, race, or the thing raced for; hit/aṃ- dhānam-,a proposed prize or contest; dhanaṃ-ji-,to win the prize or the fight)

dhanajit

mfn. winning a prize or booty, victorious, wealth-acquiring

dhanasani

mfn. granting or winning wealth

dhanutṛ

mfn. running, moving quickly

dhanva

n. equals dh/anvan- (

; especially at the beginning and at the end of compound; see iṣu--, tisṛ--, priya--.;alsof(ā-).in dhanvābhis-

varia lectio vībhis-)

dhanvin

mfn. cunning, shrewd

dharmatantra

n. sg. and plural the beginning and end of the law, summum jus

dhāvaka

mfn. running

dhāvamāna

mfn. running, going quickly

dhāvana

n. running

dhāvat

mf(ntī-)n. running, quick.

dhāvin

mfn. running, going quickly

dhāvita

mfn. running, having begun to run, kath-.

dhāvīyas

mfn. (compound) running fast

dhūrta

mfn. ( dhūrv-or dhvṛ-) cunning, crafty, fraudulent, subtle, mischievous

dhūrtajantu

m. "cunning creature", man

dhūrtaka

mfn. cunning, crafty

dhūti

m. shaking, moving to and fro, fanning

dinacchidrā

n. change of moon at the beginning or end of a half-day

dīrghasūtra

mfn. "spinning a long yarn", slow, dilatory, procrastinating

etc.

dīrghavālā

f. "long-tailed", the bos grunniens

divā

ind. especially in beginning of compound

divādi

(vādi-or vād/i-?) m. beginning of day, morning

drava

mfn. (fr.2. dru-) running (as a horse)

dravaka

mfn. running

dravamāṇa

mfn. running, flowing, fluid, melted

dravaṇa

n. running

dravara

mfn. running quickly

dravat

mfn. running, swift

etc.

dravitnu

mfn. running, quick

dru

mfn. running, going (see mita--, raghu--, śatā-.)

drutavarāhakula

n. a herd of running boars

drutayāna

n. swift going, running

duradhyavasāya

m. a bad or foolish beginning

duraḥprabhṛti

mfn. beginning with the doors

dūṣaṇa

mf(ī-)n. counteracting, sinning against (compound)

(see arā-ti-d-, kula-d-, kṛtyā-d-, khara-d-, loka-d-, viṣa-d-, viṣkandha-d-)

duṣṭa

mfn. sinning through or defiled with (see karma- mano--, yoni--, vāg--)

dvaivarṣika

mf(ī-)n. biennial, happening after 2 years

(see

) .

dvipravrājinī

f. running after 2 men

dvitīya

n. the half (at the beginning or end of a compound)

ekaśarīrārambha

m. beginning of consanguinity (by union of father and mother)

eṇajaṅgha

m. "deer-legged", Name of a running messenger

eṣa

mfn. gliding, running, hastening

etadādi

mfn. beginning with this, and so forth.

etatprabhṛti

mfn. beginning with this,

eva

ind. indeed, truly, really (often at the beginning of a verse in conjunction with other particles, as id-, hi-)

evamādi

mfn. beginning with such a one, of such qualities or kind, such

evamādya

mfn. beginning with such a one, of such qualities or kind, such

gambhīra

mfn. equals gabh-

(only in the beginning of pāda-s, six times)

etc. (in post-Vedic writings gambh-is more used than gabh-;the deepness of a man's navel, voice, and character are praised together

;hence a person who is said to have a deep navel, voice, and character is called trigambhīra tri-gambhīr/a- mf(ā-)n.

)

gaṇḍi

m. the trunk of a tree from the root to the beginning of the branches

garbhādi

mfn. beginning with conception

garbhavicyuti

f. abortion in the beginning of pregnancy

gatasattva

mfn. annihilated, lifeless, dead

gati

f. running wound or sore

gatvara

mf(ī-)n. beginning or undertaking (with dative case)

gava

mf(ī-)n. in compound before a word beginning with a vowel ([

]) and in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' ([

; f(ī-). see guru-gav/ī-, brahma-gavī-, brāhmaṇa--, bhilla--, strī--]) for g/o-, a cow, cattle (see ṣaḍ-gav/a-, dvādaśa-gav/a-etc.)

ghanodaya

m. "approach of clouds", the beginning of the rainy season

gharmānta

m. the end of the hot season, beginning of the rainy season

gharmāntakāmukī

f. "desirous of the beginning of the rainy season", a kind of crane

ghoṣavadādi

mfn. beginning with a sonant,

giripriyā

f. "fond of mountains", the female of Bos grunniens

gītagovinda

n. " govinda- (id est kṛṣṇa-) celebrated in song", Name of a lyrical drama by jayadeva- (probably written in the beginning of the twelfth century;it is a mystical erotic poem describing the loves of kṛṣṇa- and the gopī-s, especially of kṛṣṇa- and rādhā-, who is supposed to typify the human soul).

graha

m. the beginning of any piece of music

gṛbhāya

Nom. P. y/ati- (see

vArttika;only imperative y/a-and y/ata-; see anu--, ā-saṃ--, ud--, prati--, saṃ--, sam-ā-grah-;fr. gṛbhāya-are to be derived the forms of grah-(q.v)beginning with gṛbhī-, grabhī-, gṛhī-, grahī-), to grasp, seize

gṛhītadiś

mfn. running away, flying, escaped

gupta

m. (also) the era named after the gupta- dynasty (beginning

D. 319; hence the gupta- year 165 corresponds to

D. 484-85; in later times the years are called valabhī-- saṃvat- from the rulers of valabhi-, and the era is spoken of as the Gupta-Valabhi era).

guptaśila

mf(ā-)n. "of a hidden character", cunning (see śīla-g-.)

hālābhiyoga

m. application of a plough, the beginning of ploughing

hāva

m. calling, alluring, dalliance, blandishment (collective Name of ten coquettish gestures of women, beginning with līlā- q.v),

haviṣpāntīya

mfn. beginning with hav/iṣ-p/āntam- (

)

(varia lectio haviṣyantīya-).

haya

m. the Yak or Bos Grunniens

himāgama

m. approach of cold, beginning of winter

hiraṇyavarṇīya

mfn. beginning with hiraṇya-varṇa-

hita

mfn. going, running, speeding

hṛ

cl.1 P. A1. (

) h/arati-, te- (once in

harmi-,and once in Scholiast or Commentator on

-jiharti-; perfect tense P. jahāra-, jah/artha-, jahruḥ-[ -jaharuḥ-?]

etc.; A1. jahre-

etc.; Aorist ahār-, ahṛthās-

; ahārṣīt-

etc. etc.; 3. plural A1. ahṛṣata-

; preceding hriyāt-, hṛṣīṣṭa- grammar; future hartā-

etc.; hariṣyati-, te-

; Conditional ahariṣyat-

; infinitive mood h/artum-, tos-, tave-, tav/ai-

; haritum-

; ind.p. hṛtvā-, -h/āram-

etc.; -h/ṛtya-

etc.), to take, bear, carry in or on (with instrumental case), carry, convey, fetch, bring

etc. ; to offer, present (especially with balim-)

etc. ; to take away, carry off, seize, deprive of, steal, rob

; to shoot or cut or hew off, sever (the head or a limb)

etc. ; to remove, destroy, dispel, frustrate, annihilate

; to turn away, avert (the face)

; A1. (older and more correct than P.), to take to one's self, appropriate (in a legitimate way), come into possession of (accusative), receive (as an heir), raise (tribute), marry (a girl)

etc. ; to master, overpower, subdue, conquer, win, win over (also by bribing)

etc. ; to outdo, eclipse, surpass

; to enrapture, charm, fascinate

etc. ; to withhold, withdraw, keep back, retain

etc. ; to protract, delay (with kālam-,"to gain time")

; (in arithmetic) to divide

: Passive voice hriy/ate- (Epic also ti-; Aorist ahāri-), to be taken or seized etc.

etc. etc.: Causal hārayati-, te- (Aorist ajīharat-; Passive voice hāryate-), to cause to be taken or carried or conveyed or brought by (instrumental case or accusative; confer, compare

) or to (dative case)

etc. ; to cause to be taken away, appropriate, seize, rob

; to have taken from one's self, be deprived of, lose (especially at play)

; (harayate-) See pra-hṛ- ; (hārāpayati-), to lose (at play)

: Desiderative j/ihīrṣati-, te- (confer, compare jihīrṣā-, ṣu-), to wish to take to one's self or appropriate, covet, desire, long for

etc. ; (with kālam-), to wish to gain time

: Intensive jehrīyate-; jarharīti-, jarīharīti-, jarharti-, jarīharti- (confer, compare saṃ-hṛ-) grammar ([ confer, compare Greek .])

hṛdaṃsani

mfn. (fr. accusative of prec. or of a masc. or fem. hṛd-) winning the heart of (genitive case)

(others"giving heart to","encouraging","inspiring") .

hṛdayabandhana

mfn. captivating or winning the heart

hṛdayāvarjaka

mfn. winning the heart of any one

hūrchana

n. going crookedly, crookedness, cunning

ind. indeed, assuredly (especially, in strengthening an antithesis, exempli gratia, 'for example' y/athā v/aśanti dev/ās t/ah/ed asat-,as the gods wish it, thus indeed it will be

; d/ipsanta /id rip/avo n/āha debhuḥ-,the enemies wishing indeed to hurt were in nowise able to hurt

). id- is often added to words expressing excess or exclusion (exempli gratia, 'for example' viśva it-,every one indeed; śaśvad it-,constantly indeed; eka it-,one only) . At the beginning of sentences it often adds emphasis to pronouns, prepositions, particles (exempli gratia, 'for example' tvam it-,thou indeed; yadi it-,if indeed, etc.) id- occurs often in the ṛg-- veda- and atharva-- veda-, seldom in the brāhmaṇa-s, and its place is taken in classical Sanskrit by eva- and other particles.

idādika

(idādika-) mfn. beginning now or with this moment.

idam

ay/am-, iy/am-, id/am- (fr. id-

; gaRa sarvādi-

;a kind of neut. of the pronominal base 3. i-with am-[ confer, compare Latin is,ea,id,andidem];the regular forms are partly derived from the pronominal base a-;See grammar 224;the veda- exhibits various irregular formations exempli gratia, 'for example' fr. pronominal base a-,an inst. en/ā-, ay/ā-[used in general adverbially], and genitive case locative case dual number ay/os-,and perhaps also av/os-,in

[

];fr. the base ima-,a genitive case singular im/asya-,only

;the

has in a few instances the irregular accentuation /asmai-,

; /asya-,

; /ābhis-,

: the forms derived fr. a-are used enclitically if they take the place of the third personal pronoun, do not stand at the beginning of a verse or period, and have no peculiar stress laid upon them) , this, this here, referring to something near the speaker

īm

ind. (fr. pronominal base 3. i-), Ved. a particle of affirmation and restriction (generally after short words at the beginning of a period, or after the relative pronouns, the conjunction yad-,prepositions and particles such as āt-, uta-, atha-,etc.) īm- has also the sense"now" (equals idānīm-), and is by

sometimes considered as an accusative case for enam-

īśopaniṣad

f. Name of an upaniṣad- (so called from its beginning īśā-[

];the only instance of an upaniṣad- included in a saṃhitā-).

itiprabhṛti

mfn. thus beginning and so forth,

ityādi

mfn. having such (thing or things) at the beginning, thus beginning, and so forth, et caetera

jaḍa

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' stunning, stupefying

jaganmukha

(j/ag-) mfn. (faced by id est) beginning with the jagatī- metre

jālaka

n. a net, woven texture, web (also figuratively,"a multitude", e. gaRa of tears running down the cheeks etc.)

jalarāśi

m. "water-quantity", any running water

jālavat

mfn. cunning, deceptive

jaṅghābala

n. "strength of the shanks", running off, flight

jaṅghākara

mfn. "active with the shanks", running quickly

jaṅghāla

m. "running swiftly, runner", a class of animals (antelopes etc.)

jaṅghila

mfn. running swiftly, quick

janivid

m. knowing or winning women,

jarūtha

n. skinniness

javita

n. running

jaya

mfn. ( ji-) in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' conquering, winning See ṛtaṃ--, kṛtaṃ--, dhanaṃ-jay/a-, puraṃ--, śalruṃ--

jaya

m. (

) conquest, victory, triumph, winning, being victorious (in battle or in playing with dice or in a lawsuit)

(indriyāṇāṃj-victory over or restraint of the senses) and

jiṣṇu

mfn. ( ji-

) victorious, triumphant, winning

etc.

jiṣṇu

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') winning, conquering

jit

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' (

) winning, acquiring see go-- and svar-jit-, svarga-- etc.

juhotyādi

the (3rd) class of roots beginning with hu-

vā- and api- are not so common, but the latter is often found in classical Sanskrit (exempli gratia, 'for example' kaścid-,any one; kecid-,some; na kaścid-,no one; na kiṃcid api-,nothing whatsoever; yaḥ kaścid-,any one whatsoever; kecit-- kecit-,some - others; yasmin kasmin vā deśe-,in any country whatsoever; na ko 'pi-,no one; na kimapi-,nothing whatever) . ka- may sometimes be used, like 2. kad-, at the beginning of a compound. See ka-pūya-, etc.

kad

ind. at the beginning of a compound it may mark the uselessness, badness or defectiveness of anything, as in the following examples.

kalacurisaṃvatsara

(= cedi-- saṃvat-), a year of the kalacuri- (or cedi-) era (beginning on September 5,

D. 348).

kālayavana

m. of a tyrannical asura- (the foe of kṛṣṇa-, destroyed by him by a stratagem)

kaliṅga

mfn. clever, cunning

kalpa

m. a fabulous period of time (a day of brahmā- or one thousand yuga-s, a period of four thousand, three hundred and twenty millions of years of mortals, measuring the duration of the world;a month of brahmā- is supposed to contain thirty such kalpa-s.;according to the

, twelve months of brahmā- constitute his year, and one hundred such years his lifetime;fifty years of brahmā-'s are supposed to have elapsed, and we are now in the śvetavārāha-kalpa-of the fifty-first;at the end of a kalpa- the world is annihilated;hence kalpa-is said to be equal to kalpānta-below

;with Buddhists the kalpa-s.are not of equal duration)

etc.

kalpādi

m. the beginning of a kalpa-

kam

ind. (sometimes, like kim-and kad-,at the beginning of compounds) marking the strange or unusual character of anything or expressing reproach

kāmaga

mfn. following one's impulses, indulging one's passions, running after men or women

(of a woman equals kulaṭā- commentator or commentary)

kāṃdiś

mfn. (fr. kāṃ diśam-,"to which region shall I fly?") , put to flight, running away, flying

(see

)

kāṃdiśīka

mfn. running away

kāñcīyamaka

n. a kind of paronomasia or punning, exempli gratia, 'for example'

kāṇḍopakaraṇa

n. the beginning of (the study of) a kāṇḍa-, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

kapaṭaprabandha

m. continued series of frauds, machination, cunning contrivance, fraud, plot, trick

karahāṭaka

m. a series of six śloka-s with one sentence running through commentator or commentary on

karkaśa

m. Cassia or Sennia Esculenta

karmaghāta

m. annihilation or termination of work or activity

(see -kṣaya-above.)

karmakṣaya

m. annihilation or termination of all work or activity

karṇasaṃsrāva

m. running of the ear, discharge of pus or ichorous matter from the ear

kartana

n. (2. kṛt-), the act of spinning cotton or thread

kāṣṭhā

f. a place for running, race-ground, course (also the course, path or track of the wind and clouds in the atmosphere)

kathārambha

m. (kathāra-) beginning of a story or tale, story-telling

kathārambhakāla

m. story-beginning-time

kathodaya

m. the beginning of or introduction to a tale

kathodghāta

m. the beginning of a tale

kautomata

m. the mantra- beginning with kautomatam- (?)

kavi

mfn. (1. kū- see 2. kava-, /ākūta-, /ākūti-, kāvya-

) gifted with insight, intelligent, knowing, enlightened, wise, sensible, prudent, skilful, cunning

kavi

m. a cunning fighter

kāyamāna

mfn. (pr. p. A1.3. kā-?) shunning, avoiding

keneṣitopaniṣad

f. Name of an

(beginning with the word keneṣitam-).

keśa

m. (plural) the tail (of the Bos grunniens)

(varia lectio vāla-)

kesara

n. the tail of the Bos grunniens (used as a fan for driving away flies)

khaṇḍ

cl.1 A1. ṇḍate-, to break, divide, destroy

: cl.10 P. khaṇḍayati-, to break, tear, break into pieces, crush, cut, divide

(Aorist acakhaṇḍat-) ; to destroy, remove, annihilate

; to defeat, conquer

; to refute ; to interrupt, disturb

; to disregard (an order)

; "to disappoint, deceive, cheat" See khaṇḍita-.

khaṇḍana

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' breaking, dividing, reducing to pieces, destroying, annihilating, removing

khaṇḍin

mfn. "annihilating, removing"

khoṭi

f. a cunning or scheming woman (varia lectio khori-)

kim

is much used as a particle of interrogation like the Latin num, an, sometimes translatable by"whether?"but oftener serving only like a note of interrogation to mark a question (exempli gratia, 'for example' kiṃ vyādhā vane 'smin saṃcaranti-,"do hunters roam about in this wood?"In an interrogation the verb, if uncompounded with a preposition, generally retains its accent after kim-

) . To this sense may be referred the kim- expressing inferiority, deficiency, etc. at the beginning of compounds (exempli gratia, 'for example' kiṃ-rājan-,what sort of king? id est a bad king

)

kleda

m. running, discharge (from a sore)

klinna

mfn. running (as an eye)

Va1rtt. 2

klinnanetra

mfn. having running eyes

kṛśaśākha

m. "small-twigged", Hedyotis Burmanniana

kṛṣṇosyākhareṣṭhaka

mfn. (an adhyāya- or anuvāka-) beginning with the words k/ṛṣṇo 'sy ākhare-ṣṭh/aḥ-. (

) gaRa goṣad-ādi-.

kṛta

n. Name of the die or of the side of a die marked with four points or dots (this is the lucky or winning die)

etc.

kṛtnu

according to to some also,"winning the prize, victorious".

kṛtrimatā

f. shrewdness, cunningness

kryādi

m. plural the roots beginning with krī- id est those of the ninth class.

kṣayaṇa

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' "destroying, annihilating, driving away, dispersing" See arāya--, asura--, piśāca--, bhrātṛvya--, yātudhāna--, sadānvā-- and sapatna-kṣ/ayaṇa-.

kṣāyika

mfn. resulting from the (kṣayopa-śama-or) annihilation of the desire of being active

(

) .

kṣayitatā

f. the being destroyed or annihilated

kṣayopaśama

m. complete annihilation of the desire of being active

(

) .

kṣetrajña

mfn. cunning

kṣīṇakarman

m. "one whose desire of being active is completely annihilated", a jina-.

kṣīravaha

mf(ā-)n. running with milk (as a river)

kṣudrāpāmārga

m. Desmochaeta atropurpurea (= raktāp-,a biennial plant)

kṣudrāpāmārgaka

m. Desmochaeta atropurpurea (= raktāp-,a biennial plant)

kṣuttṛḍudbhava

mfn. beginning to feel hungry and thirsty

kuṭila

mf(ā-)n. bent, crooked, curved, round, running in curved lines, crisped, curled

etc.

laghumūla

mfn. having a small root or beginning, small in the beginning

lagna

m. (also with śubha-, śobhana-, anukūla-etc.) an auspicious moment or time fixed upon as lucky for beginning to perform anything

lagnadivasa

m. an auspicious day (fixed upon as favourable for beginning any undertaking)

lakṣmaṇasena

m. a king of the sena- dynasty of Eastern India (founder of an era, beginning on October 7,

D. 1119)

lokādi

m. the beginning. of the world id est the creator of the world

lokajit

mfn. winning or conquering any region

lokajit

mfn. winning Heaven (lokajit/aṃ- svarg/am- equals svarga-loka-jitam-)

lū

cl.9 P. A1. (

) lun/āti-, lunīte- (Ved. also lunoti- perfect tense lulāva-

;2. sg. lulavitha-

;2. plural luluvidhve-or viḍhve-

; Aorist alāvīt-, alaviṣṭa- grammar; future lavitā-, laviṣyati-, te-

; infinitive mood lavitum-

; ind.p. lūtvā-

; -lāvam-

), to cut, sever, divide, pluck, reap, gather

etc. ; to cut off, destroy, annihilate

: Passive voice lūyate- (Aorist alāvi-), to be cut grammar : Causal lāvayati- (Aorist alīlavat-, vata-), to cause to cut grammar : Desiderative of Causal lilāvayiṣati-

: Desiderative lulūṣati-, te-

: Intensive lauluyate-, loloti-

: Desiderative of Intensive lolūyiṣate- (ind.p. yam-)

[ confer, compare Greek ; Latin so-luo,solvo;Gothfra-liusan; German vir-lisosan,ver-lieren; Anglo-Saxon for-leo4san; English lose.]

lūna

mfn. destroyed, annihilated

lūnaduṣkṛta

mfn. one who has destroyed or annihilated his sins

lupta

mfn. suppressed, lost, destroyed, annihilated, disappeared

etc.

madhuvātīya

mf(ā-)n. beginning with the words m/adhu-vātāḥ- (

)

māgadha

m. Name of a mixed caste

etc. etc. (accord to

the son of a kṣatriya- mother and a vaiśya- father;he is the professional bard or panegyrist of a king, often associated with suta-and bandin-

etc.; according to to others one who informs a rāja- of what occurs in bazaars;also an unmarried woman's son who lives by running messages or who cleans wells or dirty clothes etc.;also opprobrious Name of a tribe still numerous in Gujarat, and called the Bhats

)

mahānāmnī

f. plural (scilicet ṛcas-), Name of 9 verses of the sāma-- veda- beginning with the words vidā maghavan-

etc.

mahāpralaya

m. the total annihilation of the universe at the end of a kalpa-

mahāśabda

m. any official title beginning with the word mahā- (5 such titles are enumerated)

māhendra

mf(ī-)n. eastern, running or flowing eastward

māhitra

n. (scilicet sūkta-) Name of the hymn

(beginning with the words mahi tṝṇām-)

māhīyatva

mfn. beginning with the word mahīya-tva- (gaRa vimuktādi-

māhīyala-).

makārādisahasranāman

n. Name of chapter of the rudra-yāmala- (containing 1000 names of rāma- beginning with m-).

makarasaṃkrānti

f. Name of a festival (which marks the beginning of the sun's northern course)

makhamukha

mfn. beginning a sacrifice

mānastokīya

n. the hymn beginning with mā nas toke-

mānastokīya

a particular text (beginning with mā- nas- toke-).

mandākṣa

n. bashfulness, excessive connivance

maṅgalakaraṇa

n. "luck-causing", the act of reciting a prayer for success before the beginning of any enterprise

maṅgalārambha

mfn. causing an auspicious beginning (said of gaṇeśa-)

manthyagra

mfn. beginning with mixed soma-

mānuṣādatva

n. cannibalism

manvādi

Name (also title or epithet) of particular tithi-s (which are anniversaries of the 14 Manus),

maryādādhāvana

n. running towards a mark

māsādi

(in the beginning of a compound) the beginning of a month

māsapraveśa

m. the beginning of a month

maurya

m. plural Name of a dynasty beginning with candra-gupta-

māyāvat

mfn. (māy/ā-.) having magical powers, employing deceit, sly, cunning

(-tara-

;more correctly māy/a-vattara-

)

māyin

mfn. artful, skilled in art or enchantment, cunning, deceptive, illusory ( māyitā yi-tā- f.)

etc.

mī

cl.9 P. A1. (

) mīnāti-, mīnīte- (Ved. also min/āti-and minoti-; m/īyate-or mīy/ate-[

]; mimītas-, mimīyāt-[?]; perfect tense mimāya-

; mīmaya-

; mamau-, mimye- grammar; Aorist amāsīt-, amāsta- grammar; meṣṭa-

; Aorist Passive voice /amāyi-

; preceding mīyāt-, māsīṣṭa- grammar; future mātā-, māsyati-, te- grammar; meṣyate-

; infinitive mood -m/iyam-, -miye-

; m/etos-

; ind.p. mītvā-, -mīya-, māya- grammar), to lessen, diminish, destroy (A. and Passive voice to perish, disappear, die)

; to lose one's way, go astray

; to transgress, violate, frustrate, change, alter

: Causal māpayati- Aorist amīmapat-. See pra-mī- ; Desiderative mitsati-, te- grammar : Intensive memīyate-, memayīti-, memeti-

[ confer, compare Greek ; Latin minuere; Slavonic or Slavonian mi8nij; German minniro,minre,minder; Anglo-Saxon min.]

mitadru

mfn. (mit/a-) strong-legged, running well

mitrayu

mfn. winning or acquiring friends, attractive

mlāta

mfn. (leather etc.) made soft by tanning

mṛdupūrva

mf(ā-)n. "beginning softly", gentle, tender (as a speech)

mṛgākhya

mf(ā-)n. named after a deer (yā vīthī-,a portion of the moon's course which comprises 3 constellations beginning with

)

mukha

n. introduction, commencement, beginning (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' = beginning with;also -mukhādi- see the use of ādi-)

etc.

mukhya

mf(ā-)n. being at the head or at the beginning, first, principal, chief, eminent (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' = the first or best or chief among, rarely equals mukha-or ādi- q.v)

etc.

mūla

n. basis, foundation, cause, origin, commencement, beginning (mūlād ārabhya-or ā- mūlāt-,from the beginning; mūlāt-,from the bottom, thoroughly; mūlaṃ- kramataś ca-,right through from beginning

)

etc. (in the beginning of a compound =chief principal see below; in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' = rooted in, based upon, derived from)

mūlasthāyin

mfn. existing from the beginning (said of śiva-)

mūlatas

ind. from the beginning

mūrdhan

m. (

) the forehead, head in general, skull, (figuratively) the highest or first part of anything, top, point, summit, front (of battle), commencement, beginning, first, chief (applied to persons)

etc., etc., (mūrdhni-with vṛt-etc., to be above everything, prevail;with dhṛ-,or ā-dā- equals mūrdhnā-1. kṛ-,to place on the head, hold in high honour)

muṣita

mfn. removed, destroyed, annihilated

muṣṭikāntaka

m. "annihilator of muṣṭika-", Name of bala-deva- (the brother of kṛṣṇa-)

the dental nasal (found at the beginning of words and before or after dental consonants as well as between vowels;subject to conversion into ṇa-

nada

m. Name of

(beginning with nadam-)

nāgara

mf(ī-)n. clever, dexterous, cunning

nāgaraka

mf(ikā-)n. clever, cunning

nāgarika

mfn. clever, cunning

nāma

ind. api n- at the beginning of a sentence = perhaps, I dare say, exempli gratia, 'for example' apy eṣa nāma phalam icchati-, this man wants perhaps a reward

nānāprabhṛti

(n/ānā--) mfn. beginning differently

narabhuj

mfn. man-eating, cannibal

narmasphañja

(

) m. (dramatic language) the first meeting of lovers beginning with joy but ending in alarm.

narmasphiñja

(

)m. (dramatic language) the first meeting of lovers beginning with joy but ending in alarm.

narmasphūrja

(

) m. (dramatic language) the first meeting of lovers beginning with joy but ending in alarm.

nāśa

m. (2. naś-) the being lost, loss, disappearance, destruction, annihilation, ruin, death

etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' destroying, annihilating see karma-nāśā-, graha-nāta-, duḥ-svapna.n-)

nāśaka

mf(ikā-)n. destroying, annihilating, removing (with genitive case or compound)

(see ku-n-, kṛta-n-)

nāsāpaisrāva

m. "nose-flow", running at the nose

nāsikāchinnī

f. (

) equals nāsā-chinnī-

natamaṃhas

the beginning of

(see

) .

netrābhiṣyanda

m. running of the eye

nibarhaṇa

n. destruction, annihilation

nidhana

n. conclusion, end, death, destruction, loss, annihilation

etc.

niras

P. A1. -asyati-, te-, (infinitive mood asitum-

; Aorist -āsthat-

) . to cast out, throw or drive away, expel, remove, banish from (ablative)

etc. ; to ward off, keep away

etc. ; to strip off (also A1.)

Va1rtt. 3

; to stretch out (hastau-,also A1.)

; to reject, refuse, decline (as a suitor, an offer, etc.)

; to destroy, annihilate

nirmūlaya

Nom. P. yati-, to uproot, eradicate, annihilate

nirnāṇaka

mfn. coinless, penniless

nirodha

m. (with

) suppression or annihilation of pain (one of the 4 principles)

nirvāṇa

n. (with Buddhists and jaina-s) absolute extinction or annihilation (= śūnya-

) of individual existence or of all desires and passions

nirvāpaṇa

n. extinguishing, extinction, annihilation

niśādi

(śādi-) m. "beginning of night", twilight

niśāgama

(śāg-) m. the beginning of night

niśāmukha

n. the face or the beginning of night

niṣpatiṣṇu

mfn. rushing or running or hastening out

niṣpavaṇa

n. winnowing, fanning

niyam

P. -yacchati-, to stop (trans.), hold back, detain with (locative case) ; (A1.) to stop (intrans.), stay, remain

; to keep back, refuse ; (A1.) to fail, be wanting

; to fasten, tie to (locative case), bind up (hair etc.)

etc. ; to hold over, extend (śarma-)

; to hold downwards (the hand)

; to bring near, procure, bestow, grant, offer, present (rain, gifts etc.)

etc. ; to hold in, keep down, restrain, control, govern, regulate (as breath, the voice, the organs of sense etc.)

etc. ; to suppress or conceal (one's nature)

; to destroy, annihilate (opp. to sṛj-)

; to restrict (food etc.; see below) ; to fix upon, settle, determine, establish

; (in gram.) to lower, pronounce low id est with the anudātta-

: Causal -yamayati-, to restrain, curb, check, suppress, restrict

ind. (in

also n/ū-; especially at the beginning of a verse, where often equals n/u-+ u-), now, still, just, at once

ind. ( av-

;originally oṃ- equals āṃ-,which may be derived from ā-

), a word of solemn affirmation and respectful assent, sometimes translated by "yes, verily, so be it"(and in this sense compared with Amen;it is placed at the commencement of most Hindu works, and as a sacred exclamation may be uttered [but not so as to be heard by ears profane] at the beginning and end of a reading of the veda-s or previously to any prayer;it is also regarded as a particle of auspicious salutation [Hail!]; om-appears first in the upaniṣad-s as a mystic monosyllable, and is there set forth as the object of profound religious meditation, the highest spiritual efficacy being attributed not only to the whole word but also to the three sounds a-, u-, m-,of which it consists;in later times om-is the mystic name for the Hindu triad, and represents the union of the three gods, viz. a (viṣṇu-), u-(śiva-), m-(brahmā-);it may also be typical of the three veda-s; om-is usually called praṇava-,more rarely akṣara-,or ekākṣara-,and only in later times oṃkāra-)

etc.

oṃkāra

m. a beginning, prosperous or auspicious beginning of (exempli gratia, 'for example' a science)

padādi

m. the beginning of a verse or of a word

pādādi

(in the beginning of a compound), the beginning of a verse

pādādimadhyayamaka

n. paronomasia at the beginning and in the middle of a verse (as

)

pādādiyamaka

n. paronomasia at the beginning of a verse (

)

pādādyantayamaka

n. paronomasia at the beginning and end of a verse (

) .

padādyavid

m. (or dya-vid-) a bad student (literally who does not know or who knows only the beginning of verses or words)

padvat

mfn. having feet, running

paṇḍ

(prob. invented to serve as the root of the words below) cl.1 A1. paṇḍate-, to go, move

; cl.10 P. paṇḍayati-, to heap together, pile up (varia lectio for piṇḍ-),

; cl.1. or cl.10. P. paṇḍati-, ḍayati-, to destroy, annihilate,

(varia lectio for paṃs-).

pāṅktakākubha

mf(ī-)n. (fr. paṅkti-kakubh-) beginning with the paṅkti- and ending with the kakubh- metre

paradrohin

mfn. tyrannizing over another

parāṅmukha

mf(ī-)n. averse from, hostile to, regardless of, shunning, avoiding (locative case; genitive case; accusative with prati-,or compound)

etc.

pari

ind. against, opposite to, in the direction of, towards, to

(see

;also at the beginning of a compound mfn.; see

Va1rtt. 4

and pary-adhyayana-)

pari

ind. outside of, except

(often repeated

;also at the beginning or the end of an ind. compound

)

paricarā

f. Name of particular verses which may be put at the beginning or middle or end of a hymn

paridhāvana

n. the running away from, escaping

paridhāvin

m. "running round", Name of the 46th (or 20th) of the 60 years ' cycle of Jupiter

parigraha

m. undertaking, beginning, commission or performance of, occupation with

parihāra

m. shunning, avoiding, excluding, abandoning, giving up, resigning

etc.

parīhāra

m. avoiding, shunning, caution

pariharaṇa

n. avoiding, shunning

parihārin

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') avoiding, shunning

parihṛti

f. shunning, avoiding

parijman

mfn. ( gam-) running or walking or driving round, surrounding, being everywhere, omnipresent (said of the sun, of the clouds, of several gods etc.)

(as locative case or ind.all around, everywhere

)

parijri

mfn. ( jri-) running round, spreading everywhere

parikramasaha

m. "one who bears running about", a goat

parilekhana

m. a sacred text beginning with parilikhitam-

pariplava

mfn. running about, unsteady, restless

parisaraṇa

n. running or moving about

parisārin

mfn. wandering or running about

parisarpaṇa

n. running to and fro, going or flying about, constantly changing one's place

pariṣkanda

m. (or skanda-) (

) a servant (especially one running by the side of a carriage)

etc.

paritakana

n. ( tak-) running round or about

parītoyoni

mfn. a sāman- (having the verse

(beginning with pari- to-) for its yoni-,

(Scholiast or Commentator)

parivarjaka

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') shunning, avoiding, giving up

parivṛt

A1. -vartate- (Epic also ti-; ind.p. -vṛtya-,or parī-vartam-), to turn round, revolve, move in a circle or to and fro, roll or wheel or wander about, circumambulate (accusative)

etc. ; (with hṛdi-or hṛdaye-) to run in a person's mind

; to return, go or come back to (accusative)

; to be reborn in (locative case)

; (also with anyathā-) to change, turn out different

; to abide, stay, remain

etc. ; to act, proceed, behave

: Causal -vartayati-, to cause to turn or move round or back or to and fro

etc. ; (A1.) to roll or bring near (subjunctive -vartayāte-)

; to overthrow, upset (a carriage)

; to invert, put in a reverse order

(read -vartya-for -vṛtya-) ; to change, barter, exchange

etc. ; to renew (an agreement)

; to understand or explain wrongly (words etc.)

; to turn topsy-turvy id est search thoroughly

; to destroy, annihilate

; to straiten, contract

; (A1.) to cause one's self to be turned round (in having one's head shaved all round)

(see -vartana-): Intensive -v/avartti-, to turn (intrans.) continually

parpaṭa

m. a species of medicinal plant

(Hedyotis Burmanniana or Mollugo Pentaphylla

)

paru

Bos Grunniens,

paryavapanna

mfn. ( pad-) broken down, destroyed, annihilated, frustrated

paṭaha

m. beginning

pāṭavika

mf(ī-)n. clever, cunning, fraudulent,

paṭīramāruta

m. wind that comes from sandal trees or is produced by fanning with a kind of sieve

pātraṭīra

m. mucus running from the nose

paṭu

mf(u-,or vī-)n. smart, clever, skilful, crafty, cunning

pauruṣāda

mfn. relating or peculiar to man-eaters or cannibals

phalāgra

n. "fruit-beginning", fruit-time,

pinvantyapīyā

f. (sc. ṛc-) Name of

(beginning pinvaty apo-).

pipīlikāmadhya

mfn. Name of a kind of fast (beginning on the day of full moon with 15 mouthfuls, decreasing by one daily until the day of new moon, and after that increasing by one daily until the next day of full moon)

pipīlikāparisarpaṇa

n. the running about of ants

pitrādyanta

mfn. beginning and ending with (a rite to) the pitṛ-s (as a śrāddha-),

prabhṛti

f. beginning, commencement

etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' ="commencing with"or"et caetera" exempli gratia, 'for example' munayaḥ somaśravaḥ-prabhṛtayaḥ-,"the muni-s beginning with somaśravaḥ-" id est"the muni-s, somaśravaḥ- etc.";in this sense also tika-)

prabhṛti

ind. (after an ablative adverb or in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') beginning with, from--forward or upward, since

(exempli gratia, 'for example' bālyāt prabhṛti-,"from boyhood upwards"; janma-pr-,"from birth"; adya pr-,"beginning from to-day, henceforth"; tataḥ-or tadā pr-,"thenceforth"etc.)

pracaraṇa

n. proceeding with, beginning, undertaking

prācyodañc

mf(īcī-)n. running from east to north

pradāha

m. destruction, annihilation

pradhvaṃsa

m. utter destruction, annihilation, perishing, disappearance

pradhvaṃsābhāva

m. non-existence in consequence of annihilation, ceasing to exist

pradhvaṃsana

mfn. destroying, annihilating

pradhvaṃsin

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') destroying, annihilating

pradhvaṃsita

mfn. (fr. Causal) destroyed, annihilated, dispelled

pradrāva

m. running away, flight

(

)

pradyutita

mfn. beginning to shine, illuminated

pragadita

mfn. ( gad-) spoken, speaking, beginning to speak

pragāyin

mfn. beginning to sing, singing

prāgdvāra

mfn. Name of the 7 lunar mansions beginning with kṛttikā-

pragraha

m. the seizure of the sun or moon, beginning of an eclipse (see graha-)

praiṣapratīkayājyā

f. a yājyā- beginning with a praiṣa-

prajavana

mfn. running very quickly

prakīrṇaka

m. a chowrie (the tail of the Bos Grunniens used as a fan or fly-flap and as an ornament for horses)

prākpaścimāyata

mf(ā-)n. running from east to west

prakrama

m. commencement, beginning, procedure, course

prakramaviruddha

mfn. stopped in the beginning

prakrāntatva

n. commencement, beginning

pralaya

m. dissolution, reabsorption, destruction, annihilation

pralayatā

f. dissolution (-tāṃ-gam-,to perish, be annihilated)

pralīnatā

f. dissolution, destruction, annihilation, the end of the universe

pralīnatva

n. dissolution, destruction, annihilation, the end of the universe

pralopa

m. destruction, annihilation

pramaṃhiṣṭhīya

n. Name of the hymn

(beginning with pr/a m/aṃhiṣṭhāya-)

pramī

P. -mināti- (-mīṇāti-

; -miṇoti-

;Ved. infinitive mood -m/iyam-, -m/iye-and -metos- see below) , to frustrate, annul, destroy, annihilate

; to change, alter

; to neglect, transgress, infringe

; to miss, lose (one's way or time), forget

; to cause to disappear, put out of sight

; to leave behind, outstrip, surmount, surpass

: (A1.or Passive voice -mīyate- Aorist subjunctive -meṣṭhāḥ-) to come to naught, perish, die

etc. etc.: Causal -māpayati-, to destroy, annihilate, kill, slay

etc. ; to cause to kill

pramiyamiye

(Ved. infinitive mood), to frustrate, annihilate

pramucyamānahoma

m. plural Name of particular oblations accompanied with prayers beginning with pramucyamānaḥ-

praṇāśana

n. destruction, annihilation

pranaṣṭa

mfn. (wrongly written pra-ṇaṣṭa-

) lost, disappeared, vanished, ceased, gone, perished, destroyed, annihilated

prāñc

mfn. running from west to east, taken lengthwise

praṇinīṣeṇya

mfn. (fr. Desiderative) forming the entrance or beginning (as a day)

prapalāyana

n. running away, flight, rout

prapalāyin

mfn. running away, flying, a fugitive

prapañcabuddhi

mfn. having a cunning mind, artful

prārabdhi

f. beginning, commencement

prārambha

m. commencement, beginning, undertaking, enterprise

prārambhaṇa

n. beginning, commencing

prasaraṇa

n. going forth, running away, escaping

praseka

m. running or watering of the mouth or nose, vomiting, nausea

prastāva

m. beginning, commencement

prastāvanā

f. introduction, commencement, beginning, preface, exordium

prastu

P. -stauti- (in

also A1. -stavate-,with act. and pass. sense, and 1. sg. -stuṣe-), to praise before (anything else) or aloud

etc. ; to sing, chant (in general, especially said of the prastotṛ-)

; to come to speak of introduce as a topic

; to undertake, commence, begin

; to place at the head or at the beginning

: Causal -stāvayati-, to introduce as a topic, suggest

prastuta

n. beginning, undertaking

praśukrīya

mfn. beginning with pra śukrā- (said of

)

prasvāra

m. the prolated syllable Om (repeated by a religious teacher at the beginning of a lesson)

prātarjit

mfn. winning, or conquering early

prathamādeśa

m. placing (a word) at the beginning of a sentence

prathamarātra

m. the beginning of night

pratihāra

m. Name of particular syllables in the sāman- hymns (with which the pratihartṛ- begins to join in singing, generally at the beginning of the last pada- of a stanza;also pratī-h-

)

etc.

pratiharaṇa

n. avoiding, shunning

pratilomā

f. a particular incantation (to be recited from the end to the beginning)

pratipad

f. beginning, commencement

pratipādana

n. beginning, commencement

pratipatti

f. beginning, action, procedure in or with (locative case genitive case or compound)

etc. (tatra kā pratipattiḥ syāt-,what is to be done there?

; kā tasya pratipattiḥ-.what is to be done with it?

)

pratisaṃhṛ

P. A1. -harati-, te-, to draw together, contract (with ātmānam-,"one's self" id est to shrink, return to its usual bed, said of the sea)

; to draw or keep back, withdraw (as a weapon, the eye etc.)

; to take away, put off

; to absorb, annihilate, destroy

; to check, stop, repress

etc. ; to change

: Causal -hārayati-, to retract

pratisaṃkhyānirodha

m. (with

) the conscious annihilation of an object (?)

(see a-prati-nirodha-).

pratyārambha

m. ( rabh-) beginning again, recommencement

pratyavakarśana

mfn. ( kṛś-) bringing down, baffling, annihilating

pravāha

mf. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) a stream, river, current, running water ( pravāhemūtrita he-mūtrita- n."making water in a river", doing a useless action

)

pravara

m. an invocation of agni- at the beginning of a sacrifice, a series of ancestors (so called because agni- is invited to bear the oblations to the gods as he did for the sacrificer's progenitors, the names of the 4 10 5 most nearly connected with the ancient ṛṣi-s being then added)

pravarṣaṇa

n. beginning to rain, raining, causing to rain

(Scholiast or Commentator"first rain") .

pravidruta

mfn. ( dru-) running or flowing asunder, scattered, dispersed

pravilāpana

n. (fr. Causal) complete absorption or annihilation

pravilāpayitavya

mfn. to be completely annihilated

pravilāpitatva

n. (fr. Causal) complete absorption or annihilation

pravilāpya

mfn. to be completely annihilated

praviśam

Caus. -śāmayati- to extinguish, destroy, annihilate (?)

pravrājin

mfn. running after (See dvi-pravrājinī-).

prāvṛṣīṇa

mfn. (day) beginning the rainy season

prayāṇa

n. onset, beginning, commencement

prāyaṇa

n. entrance, beginning, commencement

prāyaṇatas

ind. in the beginning

prāyaṇīya

mfn. relating to the entrance or beginning, introductory

prayoga

m. undertaking, beginning, commencement

prayuta

mfn. destroyed, annihilated

pretaśrāddha

n. the obsequial ceremonies performed for a relative at death and every month for a year and at every anniversary after death.

pronmāthin

mfn. destroying, annihilating

puṃścalī

f. "running after men", a harlot, courtezan

etc. ( puṃścalīcala -cala- m.a fornicator

)

punaḥsara

mf(/ā-)n. running back

punarādi

mfn. beginning afresh, repeated

punarupākaraṇa

n. repeated beginning of study

punaścara

mfn. running back, returning

purā

ind. at first, in the beginning

(opp. to paścā-, paścāt-

)

purastādagniṣṭoma

mfn. beginning with an agni-ṣṭoma- (sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order)

purastādudarka

mfn. beginning with the refrain

purastāllakṣaṇa

(r/ast-) mf(ā-)n. having one's characteristic in front or at the beginning

purastāllakṣman

(r/ast-) mfn. marked in front or at the beginning

purastāt

ind. before, forward, in or from the front, in the first place, in the beginning

etc.

pūrṇavaināśika

mfn. maintaining the doctrine of absolute annihilation

pūrṇikā

f. a species of bird described as having a double or cleft beak (also called nāsā-chinnī-)

puruṣāda

m. a cannibal, a rakṣas- ( puruṣādatva -tva- n.)

puruṣāda

m. (plural) Name of a race of cannibals in the east of madhya-deśa-

pūruṣāda

m. Name of a tribe of cannibals

puruṣādaka

mfn. (plural) Name of certain cannibals

pūrvādi

mfn. beginning with the word pūrva-

pūrvāditas

ind. beginning from the east

pūrvādya

mfn. beginning with the east

pūrvāparāyata

mf(ā-)n. running from east to west

pūrvapaścāyata

mfn. spreading or running from the east to the west

pūrvopakrama

mf(ā-)n. beginning from the east

ṝ

ind. a particle used at the beginning of a sentence

radh

or randh- cl.4 P. (

) r/adhyati- (perfect tense rarandha-,1. plural rarandhima-or redhma- grammar;3. plural rāradh/uḥ-

; Aorist aradhat-

; subjunctive randhīs- imperative randhi-for randdhi-

; future radhitā-, raddhā- grammar; radhiṣyati-, ratsyati-

; infinitive mood radhitum-

), to become subject to (dative case), be subdued or overthrown, succumb

; to be completed or matured

(see rādh-) ; to bring into subjection, subdue

; to deliver into the hand of (dative case)

; to hurt, torment

: Causal randh/ayati- (Ved. also te-; Aorist rīradhat-

; ararandhat- grammar), to make subject, deliver over to (dative case)

; to torment, afflict

; to destroy, annihilate

; to cook, prepare (food)

: Desiderative riradhiṣati-, riratsati- grammar : Intensive rāradhyate-, rāraddhi- grammar (in

rārandh/i-for rāranddh/i-,and

rāranta-for rārantta-) to hand over to, deliver.

raghudru

mfn. running like a race-horse

rāhu

m. an eclipse or (rather) the moment of the beginning of an occultation or obscuration

rājagavī

f. Bos Grunniens

rajanīmukha

n. "night-beginning", the evening

rāmalīlā

f. Name of the dramatic representation of sitā-'s abduction by rāvaṇa- and her recovery by rāma-candra- (performed at the annual festival which takes place in Northern India in the beginning of October and corresponds to the durgā-pūjā- of Bengal)

raṃhi

f. running, flowing, hastening, speed, velocity, eagerness, impetuosity

raṃhi

f. a running horse, courser

ratārambhāvasānika

mfn. relating to the beginning and end of sexual enjoyment

rathajit

mfn. (for 1.See under 1. ratha-) winning affection, charming, lovely

rathasaptamī

f. Name of the 7th day in the light half of the month āśvina- (so called as the beginning of a manv-antara- when a new Sun ascended his car)

rātri

f(i-or ī-). or (older) r/ātrī- (prob."bestower" , fr. rā-;or"season of rest", fr. ram-) night, the darkness or stillness of night (often personified)

etc. ( rātrau trau- ind.or rātryām tryām- ind.at night, by night; rātrau śayanam-,a festival on the 11th day of the first half of the month āṣāḍha-, regarded as the night of the gods, beginning with the summer solstice, when viṣṇu- reposes for four months on the serpent śeṣa-)

raudhādika

mf(ī-)n. (fr. rudh-ādi-) belonging to the class of roots beginning with rudh- (id est the 7th class)

rāya

m. (at the beginning or end of a proper N. used as a title of honour equals rājan-,of which it is a corruption) a king, prince

revatī

f. Name of the verse

(beginning with revatī-)

etc.

ṛgma

mfn. having the beginning of a ṛc-, beginning like a ṛc- ([

])

rit

mfn. ( ri-, rī-) running, flowing

(

equals gantṛ-).

ṛṣimukha

n. the beginning of a ṛṣi- or hymn.

ṛte

ind. (according to

locative case case of the past participle of ṛ-) under pain of, with the exclusion of, excepting, besides, without, unless (with ablative or accusative or a sentence beginning with yatas-)

etc.

ṛtumukha

n. beginning or first day of a season

ṛtuyājin

mfn. sacrificing at the beginning of every season

rudra

mfn. (prob.) crying, howling, roaring, dreadful, terrific, terrible, horrible (applied to the aśvin-s, agni-, indra-, mitra-, varuṇa-, and the sp/aśaḥ-)

(according to to others"red, shining, glittering", fr. a rud-or rudh-connected with rudhira-;others"strong, having or bestowing strength or power", fr. a rud- equals vṛd-, vṛdh-;native authorities give also the following meanings,"driving away evil";"running about and roaring", fr. ru-+ dra-= dru-2;"praiseworthy, to be praised";"a praiser, worshipper"equals stotṛ-

)

śabdādi

m. (scilicet viṣaya- q.v) the objects of sense beginning with sound

śabdārthārambhaṇa

mfn. beginning with the meaning or force of oral tradition

śabheda

m. Name of a treatise on the proper spelling of words beginning with ś-, ṣ-, or s.

ṣaḍgayā

f. the six things beginning with gayā- or ga- (and bestowing final emancipation)

sādi

mfn. having a beginning ( sāditva -tva- n.)

sādyanta

mfn. having beginning and end, complete, entire ( sādyantam am- ind.,"from beginning to end")

sahaja

mf(ā-)n. always the same as from the beginning

sahapūrvāhṇam

ind. simultaneously with the beginning of forenoon

sahārambha

mfn. beginning together

sahasrañit

mfn. conquering or winning a thousand

śaka

m. plural Name of a particular white-skinned tribe or race of people (in the legends which relate the contests between vasiṣṭha- and viśvāmitra- the śaka-s are fabled to have been produced by the Cow of vasiṣṭha-, from her sweat, for the destruction of viśvāmitra-'s army; in

, they are mentioned together with the pauṇḍraka-s, oḍra-s, draviḍa-s, kāmboja-s, javana-s or yavana-s, pārada-s, pahlava-s, cīna-s, kirāta-s, darada-s, and khaśa-s, described by

as degraded tribes of kṣatriya-s called after the districts in which they reside: according to the

,king sagara- attempted to rid his kingdom of these tribes, but did not succeed in destroying them all : they are sometimes regarded as the followers of śaka- or śāli-vāhana-, and are probably to be identified with the Tartars or Indo-Scythians [ Latin saca-]who overran India before the Aryans, and were conquered by the great vikramāditya- [q.v.]; they really seem to have been dominant in the north-west of India in the last century before and the first two centuries after the beginning of our era)

etc.

śakakāla

m. the śaka- era (beginning A.D.78, and founded by king śāli-vāhana-; anexpiredyear of the śaka- era is converted into the corresponding year A.D. by adding to it 78-79; exempli gratia, 'for example' 654expired= A.D. 732-733)

(

) .

sakhivid

mfn. winning friends

samabhidruta

mfn. running towards or against, rushing upon

samādāna

n. beginning, undertaking

samāhṛ

P. A1. -harati-, te- (ind.p. -h/ṛtya- q.v), to bring together, collect, assemble, contract, combine, unite

etc. ; to bring back, restore to its place (locative case)

; to draw back, withdraw

; to ravish, enrapture

; to take off, put aside

; to crush together, destroy, annihilate

; to Perform, offer (a sacrifice)

samākṣip

P. A1. -kṣipati-, te-, to throw together, heap or pile up

; to thrust or throw away, hurl

; to move violently, toss about (lips, arms etc.)

; to send forth, utter (words)

; to drive away, expel

; to throw down from, tear off

; to take away, withdraw

; to destroy, annihilate

; to insult, mock, ridicule

; to hint at, suggest, indicate

sāman

n. (m.only in

;prob. connected with sāntv-; according to to some fr.1. sā-; see 3. sāman-) calming, tranquillizing, (especially) kind or gentle words for winning an adversary, conciliation, negotiation (one of the 4 upāya-s or means of success against an enemy, the other 3 being dāna-, bheda-,and daṇḍa-, qq.vv.; in the beginning of a compound or instrumental case sg. and plural,"by friendly means or in a friendly way, willingly, voluntarily")

samānaprabhṛti

(n/a--) mfn. beginning equally

samārabh

A1. -rabhate- (rarely P. ti-), to take in hand, undertake, begin, commence (with accusative or infinitive mood; ind.p. -rabhya-with accusative ="beginning from")

etc. ; to try to get near to or propitiate

samārādhana

n. a means of propitiating or winning

samārambha

m. beginning, commencement,

sāmātsāmya

n. (fr. samāt-sama-) a series or succession of equal or similar beginnings and terminations

samāvarjana

n. attracting, winning

śambhucandra

m. Name of a Zamindar (who wrote the vikrama-bhārata- in the beginning of this century)

saṃdhanajit

mfn. (equals dhanasaṃ-jit-) winning booty together, accumulating booty by conquest

saṃdrāva

m. running together, a place where people run together

Va1rtt. 5

sāṃdrāviṇa

n. (fr. saṃ-drāvin-) running together from all sides

saṃgraha

m. attracting, winning, favouring, kind treatment, propitiation, entertaining, entertainment

etc.

saṃgrahaṇa

n. attraction, winning over, propitiation

saṃgrāhin

mfn. winning over, propitiating (See loka-s-)

saṃgranthana

n. (with kalahasya-) beginning a quarrel

saṃhṛ

P. A1. -harati-, te-, to bring or draw together, unite, compress, collect, contract, abridge

etc. ; to throw together, mix up

; to close, clench (the fist)

; to concentrate (the mind) on (locative case)

; to support, maintain

; to take or fetch from (ablative)

; to lay hold of, attract, take for one's self, appropriate

etc. ; to take away, carry off, rob

; to lay or draw aside, withdraw, withhold from (ablative)

etc. ; to restrain, curb, check, suppress

; to crush together, crumple up, destroy, annihilate (often opp. to sṛj-,"to emit or create")

etc. ; Passive voice -hriyate-, to be brought or put together etc.

etc.: Causal -hārayati-, te-, to bind together (A1."one's own hair etc.", also"cut")

: -jihīrṣati-, to wish to bring together etc.

: Intensive -jarīharti-, to destroy repeatedly

samīkṛ

P. A1. -karoti-, -kurute-, to make even, level

etc. ; to equalize

; to place on an equality with, declare to be equal to (instrumental case)

; to adjust, settle

; to raze to the ground, annihilate

samiti

ind. (for 1.See above) a sacred verse beginning with sam-

saṃjayat

mf(antī-)n. conquering, winning

saṃkṣi

P. -kṣiṇāti-4. to destroy completely, annihilate

: Passive voice -kṣīyate-, to be destroyed or exhausted, waste away, disappear, perish

: Causal -kṣapayati-, to cause to, disappear, destroy

; -kṣayayati- See -kṣayita-.

sammukha

mf(ī-rarely ā-)n. being about to begin or at the beginning of (compound)

sammukhe

ind. opposite, before, face to face, in front or in presence or in the beginning of (genitive case or compound;with bhū-,"to oppose, resist";with sthā-,"to look any one in the face")

saṃniyam

P. -yacchati-, to hold together, keep back, restrain, subdue, suppress

etc. ; to annihilate, destroy

sampranṛtta

mfn. ( nṛt-) beginning to dance or move about

sampratiṣṭhā

f. permanence, continuance (as opp. to,"beginning"or"end")

saṃrambha

m. beginning (equals ā-rambha-)

saṃsāra

m. course, passage, passing through a succession of states, circuit of mundane existence, transmigration, metempsychosis, the world, secular life, worldly illusion (ā saṃsārāt-,"from the beginning of the world")

etc.

saṃsarjana

n. attracting, winning over, conciliating

saṃsrāvaṇa

mfn. flowing or running together

samucchanna

mfn. equals sam-utsanna-, uncovered, destroyed, annihilated

(varia lectio)

samutkaca

mfn. beginning to bloom, blooming, expanded

saṃvargaṇa

n. attracting, winning (friends)

saṃvat

ind. (a contraction of saṃ-vatsara-below) a year, in the year (in later times especially of the vikrama- era [beginning in 58 B.C. See vikramāditya-]as opp. to the śaka- era [in modern times supposed to be founded by śāli-vāhana-;See 3. śaka-];sometimes = "in the year of the reign of")

etc.

sāṃvatsara

mf(ī-)n. (fr. saṃ-vatsara-) yearly, annual, perennial, lasting or occupying year (with bhṛti-,f. "annual wages")

saṃvīta

mfn. unseen id est connived at, permitted by (compound)

śaṃyorvāka

m. the sacred formula beginning with the words t/ac ch/aṃ-y/or ā- vṛṇīmahe-

saniṣyada

mf(ā-)n. (fr. Intensive) running, flowing manuscript

sanna

mfn. (equals prasanna-), appeased, satisfied (See sannī-kṛta-)

saprabhṛti

mfn. beginning in the same, way

saprabhṛti

m. the same or a like beginning

(see

) .

sāpta

n. (fr. sapti-) a horse-race, running-match for horses or the prize given for one

saptabhaṅginaya

m. (with jaina-s) the method of the 7 formulas of sceptical reasoning (each beginning with the word syāt-,"perhaps"see bhaṅga-)

sarala

mf(ā-)n. "running on", straight (not"crooked")

saraṇa

mfn. (for sa-raṇa-See p.1183) going, moving, running

saraṇa

n. running, quick motion (with ājeḥ-,"a foot-race","running-match")

saraṇa

n. running after, following

saraṇajīvin

mfn. living by running

sārasārin

mfn. running courses or races,

sarga

m. emission or creation of matter, primary creation (as opp. to pratisarga-"secondary creation"), creation of the world (as opp. to its pralaya-"dissolution", and sthiti-,"maintenance in existence"; 9 different creations are enumerated in

; ā sargāt-,"from the creation or beginning of the world"; sarge-"in the created world")

etc.

sārin

mfn. going, running, hastening

sarma

m. going, running, flowing

[ confer, compare Greek .]

sarvacohandaka

mfn. all-winning or all-captivating

("fulfilling all wishes"

)

sarvādi

m. the beginning or first of all things

sarvanāman

n. (in gram.) Name of a class of words beginning with sarva- (comprising the real pronouns and a series of pronominal adjectives, such as ubhaya-, viśva-, ekatara-etc.; see under sarva-)

etc.

sarvārambha

m. entire energy in the beginning of a work ( sarvārambheṇa bheṇa- ind."with all one's might")

sarvavaināśika

mfn. believing in complete annihilation

sarvavaināśika

m. Name of a class of Buddhist who hold the doctrine of total annihilation

sasni

mfn. gaining, winning

sasri

mfn. running rapidly, speeding along

ṣaṣṭhādi

mfn. (in Vedic gram.) beginning with the sixth letter id est with the vowel ī-.

sāti

f. gaining, obtaining, acquisition, winning of spoil or property

satti

f. sitting down, sitting (see n/i-ṣatti-), entrance, beginning

sauśravasa

n. a running match, contest (?)

savanamukha

n. the beginning of a libation

savyajana

mfn. with fanning

sāyārambha

mfn. beginning in the evening

śīghraga

mf(ā-)n. going or moving or running quickly

etc.

śīghrajava

mfn. moving or running rapidly

śīlagupta

mfn. hidden or crafty by character, cunning

(see gupta-śīla-).

śiras

n. the beginning (of a verse)

sisrat

mfn. running, swift, rapid

skandhaparinirvāṇa

n. complete annihilation of the elements of being (with Buddhists)

smārtabhaṭṭācārya

m. Name of raghu-nandana- (a celebrated Brahman who lived at the beginning of the 16th century and wrote 28 tattva-s,the general name of which is smṛti-tattva-)

smayādika

mfn. beginning with (id est based chiefly on) arrogance

somayāga

m. a great triennial sacrifice at which soma--juice is drunk

śoṇa

m. the river śoṇa- or Sone (alsof(ā-).;it rises in Gondwana in the district of Nagpore, on the table-land of amara-kaṇṭaka-, four or five miles east of the source of the narmadā- [Nerbudda], and running first northerly and then easterly for 500 miles falls into the Ganges above pāṭali-putra- or Patna)

etc.

sparśa

m. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) touch, sense of touch ( sparśatas -tas- ind. exempli gratia, 'for example' sparśa-taḥ sukhaṃ tat-,"that is pleasant to the touch") , contact (figuratively applied to the beginning of an eclipse or to any astronomy contact)

etc.

sphuṭāgas

mfn. sinning openly (in the sight of every one)

spṛt

mfn. gaining, winning (See dhana--and loka-spṛt-)

śrāddhadina

n. the day of a śrāddha-, anniversary of the death of a near relative

śrāvastī

f. Name of a city situated north of the Ganges and founded by king śrāvasta- (it was the ancient capital of kosala- and said to have been the place where the wealthy merchant anātha-piṇḍika- built the buddha- a residence in the jeta-vana- monastery which became his favourite retreat during the rainy seasons: other authorities derive the name from a ṛṣi- called sāvattha-, who is said to have resided there;it has been identified by General Cunningham with a place now called SahetMahet, about 58 miles north of ayodhyā- in Oudh)

(see

)

sravatha

m. or n. flowing, streaming, running

śravojit

mfn. winning renown, glorious

sṛgālikā

f. running away, flight

śrī

mfn. diffusing light or radiance, splendid, radiant, beautifying, adorning (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound';See agni--, adhvara--, kṣatra--, gaṇa--, jana-śrī-etc.)

[The word śrī-is frequently used as an honorific prefix (="sacred","holy") to the names of deities(exempli gratia, 'for example' śrī-durgā-, śrī-rāma-) , and may be repeated two, three, or even four times to express excessive veneration.(exempli gratia, 'for example' śrī-śrī-durgā- etc.);it is also used as a respectful title (like"Reverend") to the names of eminent persons as well as of celebrated works and sacred objects (exempli gratia, 'for example' śrī-jayadeva-, śrībhāgavata-), and is often placed at the beginning or back of letters, manuscripts, important documents etc.;also before the words caraṇa-and pāda-"feet", and even the end of personal names.]

sṛmara

m. a kind of animal frequenting damp places (according to to some the "Bos Grunniens"or"a young deer")

etc.

sṛṣṭi

f. production, procreation, creation, the creation of the world (ā sṛṣṭeḥ-,"from the beginning of the world"; sṛṣṭiṃ kuru-,"produce offspring"; see manoratha-sṛ-)

etc.

sṛt

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') running etc. (See adāra--, āji-sṛt-etc.)

sṛta

mfn. (see sūrta-) going, running etc. (See bhujaga-śiśu-sṛta-)

sṛtvan

mf(arī-)n. running, swift, nimble

sṛtya

n. running, flowing (See sindhu-s-).

śruta

n. anything heard, that which has been heard (especially from the beginning), knowledge as heard by holy men and transmitted from generation to generation, oral tradition or revelation, sacred knowledge (in the

personified as a child of dharma- and medhā-), the veda-

etc.

śruti

f. that which has been heard or communicated from the beginning, sacred knowledge orally transmitted by the Brahmans from generation to generation, the veda- (id est sacred eternal sounds or words as eternally heard by certain holy sages called ṛṣi-s, and so differing from sm/ṛti-or what is only remembered and handed down in writing by human authorsSee

;it is properly only applied to the mantra- and brāhmaṇa- portion of the veda-s, although afterwards extended to the upaniṣad-s and other Vedic works including the darśana-s; iti śruteḥ-,"because it is so taught in the veda-, according to a śruti-or Vedic text "; plural"sacred texts, the veda-s", also"rites prescribed by the veda-s")

etc.

sthaga

mfn. cunning, sly, fraudulent, dishonest

sthāyika

mfn. lasting, enduring (in ādy-anta-sth-,"lasting from the beginning to the end")

ind. (opp. to dus-and corresponding in sense to Greek ;perhaps connected with 1. v/asu-,and, according to to some, with pronoun base sa-,as ku-with ka-;in veda- also s/ū-and liable to become ṣu-or ṣū-and to lengthen a preceding vowel, while a following na-may become ṇa-;it may be used as an adjective (cf. mfn.) or adverb), good, excellent, right, virtuous, beautiful, easy, well, rightly, much, greatly, very, any, easily, willingly, quickly (in older language often with other particles; especially with u-,="forthwith, immediately";with mo- id est mā u-,="never, by no means"; s/u kam-often emphatically with an imperative exempli gratia, 'for example' t/iṣṭhā s/u kam maghavan m/ā parā gāḥ-,"do tarry O maghavan-, go not past"

; su-always qualifies the meaning of a verb and is never used independently at the beginning of a verse;in later language it is rarely a separate word, but is mostly prefixed to substantives, adjectives, adverbs and participles, exceptionally also to an ind.p. exempli gratia, 'for example' su-baddhvā-,"having well bound"

;or even to a finite verb exempli gratia, 'for example' su-nirvavau-

)

subhagaṃkaraṇa

n. fascinating, winning (a woman)

śucisaṃkṣaya

m. end of the hot season, beginning of the rains

sukha

mfn. (said to be fr. 5. su-+ 3. kha-,and to mean originally"having a good axle-hole";possibly a Prakrit form of su-stha- q.v; see duḥkha-) running swiftly or easily (only applied to cars or chariots, superl. sukh/a-tama-), easy

sukhādi

mfn. (for sukhādi-See) beginning with pleasure, pleasure etc. (See sukha-duḥkhādi-).

sukharatha

(sukh/a--) mfn. having an easily running chariot

sūktamukhīya

mf(ā-)n. standing at the beginning of a hymn

śunaṃhuvīyā

f. Name of the verse

(beginning with the words śuṇ/aṃ huvema-)

śūnyavat

ind. like a cypher, as if it were annihilated or vanished

suṣecana

mfn. flowing or running well

suṣeka

mfn. flowing or running well

suśīghraga

mfn. running very swiftly

sutaṃjaya

m. "son-winning", Name of a man (see sutaṃ-gama-)

sūtragaṇḍikā

f. a kind of stick used by weavers in spinning threads

sutuka

mf(ā-)n. (fr. tuk- equals tak-) running swiftly

suvarjit

mfn. winning heaven

suvidagdha

mfn. very cunning, astute

suvṛt

mfn. turning or running well (as a chariot)

svāduṣkilīyā

f. plural Name of the verses beginning with svāduṣ kila- (

)

svamāyā

f. own cunning or magical art or skill

svar

ind. the space above the sun or between the sun and the polar star, the region of the planets and constellations (regarded as the 3rd of the 7 worlds [see loka-]and the 3rd of the three vyāhṛti-s [i.e. bh/ur bh/uvaḥ sv/aḥ-]; svar-is pronounced after om-and before the gāyatrī- by every Brahman on beginning his daily prayers)

etc.

svargajit

mfn. winning heaven (superl. -tama-)

svarjeṣa

m. the winning of light etc.

svarjit

mfn. winning or procuring light or heaven

svarvid

mfn. winning or possessing or bestowing light or heaven, celestial

svasti

ind. well, happily, successfully (also ="may it be well with thee! hail! health! adieu! be it!"a term of salutation [ especially in the beginning of letters] or of sanction or approbation)

svastika

m. any lucky or auspicious object, (especially) a kind of mystical cross or mark made on persons and things to denote good luck (it is shaped like a Greek cross with the extremities of the four arms bent round in the same direction;the majority of scholars regard it as a solar symbol;that is, as representing a curtailed form of the wheel of the Solar viṣṇu-, consisting of four spokes crossing each other at right angles with short fragments of the periphery of the circle at the end of each spoke turning round in one direction to denote the course of the Sun; according to to the late Sir

Cunningham it has no connexion with sun-worship, but its shape represents a monogram or interlacing of the letters of the auspicious words su ast/i-[ svasti-]in the aśoka- characters;amongst jaina-s it is one of the 24 auspicious marks and is the emblem of the seventh arhat- of the present avasarpiṇī-)

svastimukha

m. a letter (beginning with svasti-)

syanda

m. flowing, running, streaming, trickling, oozing

syandana

mf(ā-)n. moving on swiftly, running (as a chariot)

syandin

mfn. flowing, running

syandra

mfn. running, rushing, swift, fleet

syanna

mfn. flowing, running

tadāmukha

n. beginning of that

tadevopaniṣad

f. Name of an

(beginning with the words tad eva-).

tamiṣīcī

īs- irregular ayas-, Ved. f. plural (fr. tamiṣy-ac-) oppressing, stunning, confusing

tamuṣṭuhīya

the, hymn

(beginning with t/am u ṣṭuhi-)

tanādi

mfn. beginning with tan- (the 8th cl. of roots) .

tānakarman

n. running over the notes to catch the key

tanni

nnī- varia lectio for nvī- q.v

tantukaraṇa

n. spinning,

tantukriyā

f. spinning work

tantuparvan

n. "thread-festival", the day of full moon in month śrāvaṇa- (anniversary of kṛṣṇa-'s investment with the Brahmanical cord)

tanu

m. Balanites Roxburghii (vv.ll. tannī-, nni-,"Hemionitis cordifolia"; tajvi-)

tāranātha

m. Name of a Tibetan (living in the beginning of the 17th century;author of a history of Buddhism).

taratsamandī

f. plural the hymn

(beginning with t/arat s/a mand/ī-)

tarkuṭa

n. spinning

tarutṛ

mfn. winning,

tasyāśitīya

mfn. beginning with tasyāśita- (an adhyāya-)

tatprabhṛti

mfn. beginning with that

tavaśravīya

n. Name of a sāman- (made of

,beginning with /agne t/ava śr/avo-)

tṝ

cl.1 P. (rarely A1.) t/arati- (subjunctive t/arat- imperfect tense /atarat-, parasmE-pada t/arat- infinitive mood tar/adhyai-, rīṣ/ani-

) cl.5. tarute- (

; Potential 1. plural turyāma-,

) cl.3. titarti- (

; parasmE-pada Nominal verb plural t/itratas-

; Potential tutury/āt-,

) , with prepositions Vedic or Veda chiefly cl.6 P. A1. (tir/ate- subjunctive tirāti- imperfect tense /atirat-, parasmE-pada tir/at- infinitive mood t/iram-, t/ire-

; Aorist /atārīt-,

;1. plural riṣma-

, rima-

; t/aruṣante-

, ta-i, ṣema-

[ confer, compare

]; A1.and Passive voice -tāri-

; P. atārṣīt-

; ṣam-

; perfect tense tatāra-

etc.;3. plural titirur-,

; teritha-, ratur-

; parasmE-pada titirv/as- genitive case tatar/uṣas-

; future tariṣyati-, rīṣ-, taritā-, rītā-[ confer, compare pra-t/ar-]

; t/arutā-

; preceding tīryāt-, tariṣīṣṭa-

; infinitive mood tartum-

; rīt-

rit-

; ind.p. tīrtv/ā-

; -t/ūrya-See vi--) to pass across or over, cross over (a river), sail across

etc. ; to float, swim

; to get through, attain an end or aim, live through (a definite period), study to the end

etc. ; to fulfil, accomplish, perform

; to surpass, overcome, subdue, escape

etc. ; to acquire, gain,

; A1. to contend, compete

; to carry through or over, save,

: Causal tārayati- (parasmE-pada r/ayat-) to carry or lead over or across

etc. ; to cause to arrive at

; to rescue, save, liberate from (ablative)

etc.: Desiderative titīrṣati- (also titariṣati-, rīṣ-

; parasmE-pada A1. titīrṣamāṇa-

) to wish to cross or reach by crossing

: Intensive tartarīti- (2. dual number rīthas-; parasmE-pada genitive case t/arilratas-[

];See also vi--; tātarti-,

Scholiast or Commentator) to reach the end by passing or running or living through

; ([ confer, compare t/ara-, tir/as-, tīrṇ/a-; Latin termo,trans; Gothic thairh.])

traisamika

mfn. (fr. samā-) triennial

Va1rtt. 2

traivarṣika

n. a triennial performance

trimadhu

mfn. knowing or reciting the 3 verses beginning with m/adhu- (

)

triṣṭuṇmukha

mfn. beginning with a tri-ṣṭubh-

ind. (never found at the beginning of a sentence or verse;metrically also t/ū-

; confer, compare

) pray! I beg, do, now, then

dum used (especially with the Imper.)

tudādi

the roots of cl.6. (beginning with tud-)

tūlasecana

n. "cotton-moistening", spinning

tur

mfn. running a race, conquering,

tūrṇaga

mfn. running quickly

tvacana

n. skinning

tyad

mfn. Nominal verb sy/a- (s-), sy/ā-, ty/ad-, (gaRa sarvādi-) that (often used like an article exempli gratia, 'for example' ty/at paṇīn/āṃ v/asu-,"that id est the wealth of the paṇi-s "

;sometimes strengthened by c/id-;often put after ut/a-,or after another demonstrative in the beginning of a sentence)

(ty/asya- equals m/ama-,

; n. ty/am-for ty/ad-,

[in the etymology of saty/am-]

)

ind. a particle used at the beginning of a sentence.

ubhayataḥpraṇava

mfn. having the syllable om- at the beginning and end,

ubhayataḥstobha

mfn. having a stobha- both at the beginning and end (as a sāman-)

uda

n. (only at the beginning or end of a compound) water.

udāhāra

m. the beginning of a speech

udaṅīṣa

(udaṅṅīṣa-) mfn. having the pole turned to the north (as a carriage) commentator or commentary on

udanta

mfn. reaching to the end or border, running over, flowing over

uddrāva

mfn. running away

uddruta

mfn. running away

uddrutya

ind.p. running up or away

udghāta

m. beginning, commencement

udvela

mfn. running over the brim or bank, overflowing

udyama

m. undertaking, beginning

ukthamukha

n. the beginning of an uktha- recitation

unnidraya

Nom. P. unnidrayati-, to make sleepless, awaken.

unnītaśuṣma

(/unnīta-) mfn. one whose breath goes upwards

upa

ind. sometimes forming with the nouns to which it is prefixed compound adverbs (exempli gratia, 'for example' upa-mūlam-,at the root; upa-pūrva-rātram-,towards the beginning of night; upa-kūpe-,near a well) which lose their adverbial terminations if they are again compounded with nouns (exempli gratia, 'for example' upakūpa-jalāśaya-,a reservoir in the neighbourhood of a well)

upadravin

mfn. tyrannical, violent

upadruta

mfn. run after, persecuted, attacked, oppressed, visited (by calamities), tyrannized over

etc.

upaka

m. a diminutive for all proper names of men beginning with upa-

upākaraṇa

n. setting about, preparation, beginning, commencing

etc.

upakrama

m. setting about, undertaking, commencement, beginning

etc.

upakrama

m. enterprise, planning, original conception, plan

etc.

upākṛti

f. setting about, beginning

upamṛd

P. -mṛdnāti-, to graze in passing (said of a heavenly body in its transit)

; to crush, destroy, annul

commentator or commentary on

: Causal -mardayati-, to destroy, devastate, annul, annihilate

commentator or commentary on

and

upasaṃgṛhya

winning over, conciliating, propitiating

upavatī

f. (scilicet ṛc-) a verse beginning with upa- (exempli gratia, 'for example'

)

upekṣ

( upa-īkṣ-) A1. -īkṣate- (rarely P.) to look at or on

; to perceive, notice

; to wait on patiently, expect

; to overlook, disregard, neglect, abandon

etc. ; to connive at, grant a respite to, allow

; to regard

upekṣaṇa

n. the act of disregarding, overlooking, disregard, indifference, connivance

etc.

upika

m. a diminutive for all proper names of men beginning with upa-

upoddhan

( upa-ud-han-), Causal -ghātayati-, to speak of at the beginning, introduce, begin, commence

commentator or commentary on

upodghāta

m. an introduction, preface, commencement, beginning

etc.

ūrdhvarāji

f. a line running from below upwards

uṣmāgama

m. beginning of the hot season

uṣmopagama

m. beginning of the hot season

uṣṇābhigama

m. approach or beginning of the hot season

uṣṇāgama

m. approach of the heat, beginning of the hot season

uṣṇopagama

m. the beginning of the hot season

uta

ind. often used for the sake of emphasis, especially at the end of a line after iti- or a verb (exempli gratia, 'for example' sarva-bhūtāni tam pārtha sadā paribhavanty uta-,all creatures, O king, certainly always despise him

)

etc. (As an interrogative particle, generally at the beginning of the second or following part of a double interrogation) or, utrum - an (exempli gratia, 'for example' katham nirṇīyate kiṃ syān niṣkāraṇo bandhur uta viśvāsa-ghātakaḥ-,how can it be decided whether he be a friend without a motive or a violator of confidence?

)

etc.

uta

ind. in this sense it may be strengthened by āho- (exempli gratia, 'for example' kaccit tvam asi mānuṣī utāho surāṅganā-,art thou a mortal woman or divine? nala-) , or by āho-svit- (exempli gratia, 'for example' śālihotraḥ kiṃ nu syād utāhosvid rājā nalaḥ-,can it be śālihotra- or king nala-?) Rarely kim- is repeated before uta- used in this sense (exempli gratia, 'for example' kim nu svargāt prāptā tasyā rūpeṇa kimutānyāgatā-,has she arrived from heaven or has another come in her form?

)

etc. (As a particle of wishing, especially at the beginning of a sentence followed by a potential) would that! utinam! (exempli gratia, 'for example' utādhīyīta-,would that he would read!) (uta-preceded by kim-) on the contrary, how much more, how much less (exempli gratia, 'for example' kam&iencoding=&lang=sans'>samartho 'si sahasram api jetuṃ kimutaikam-,thou art able to conquer even a thousand, how much more one

)

etc. (uta-preceded by prati-) on the contrary, rather (exempli gratia, 'for example' eṣa pṛṣṭo 'smābhir na jalpati hanti praty-uta pāṣāṇaih-,this one questioned by us does not speak, but rather throws stones at us)

utkhāta

mfn. destroyed, annihilated

utkṛt

(ud-kṛt-) P. -kṛṇatti-, to continue spinning

utsad

(ud-sad-) P. A1. -sīdati-, -te- (Ved. 3. plural /ut-sadan-) to sit upwards ; to raise one's self or rise up to (accusative), ([

])

; to withdraw, leave off, disappear ; to sink, settle down, fall into ruin or decay, be abolished

etc.: Causal -sādayati-, to put away, remove

etc. ; to abolish, destroy, annihilate

etc. ; to anoint, rub, chafe

utsarpiṇī

f. "the ascending cycle"(divided into six stages beginning with bad-bad time and rising upwards in the reverse order to ava-sarpiṇi-. q.v)

utsava

m. enterprise, beginning

vadha

m. annihilation, disappearance (of inanimate things)

etc.

vadhya

mfn. to be destroyed or annihilated

etc.

vaidagdhya

n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) dexterity, intelligence, acuteness, cunning in (locative case or compound)

vaināśika

mfn. believing in complete annihilation

vairānubandha

m. beginning of hostilities

vaiśākha

m. (fr. vi-śākhā-) one of the 12 months constituting the Hindu lunar year (answering to April-May and in some places, with caitra-, reckoned as beginning the year)

etc.

vaiśvānara

m. a particular sacrifice performed at the beginning of every year

vājabharman

(v/āja--) mfn. winning a prize or reward

vājajit

mfn. conquering in a contest, winning in a race, winning booty

vājaprasavīya

mfn. (

) beginning with the words vāja- and prasava-

vājaprasavīya

n. (scilicet karman-) a rite so beginning

vājaprasavīyahoma

m. a sacrifice so beginning

vājaprasavya

mfn. (

) beginning with the words vāja- and prasava-

vājaprasavya

n. (scilicet karman-) a rite so beginning

vājasani

mfn. winning a prize or booty or wealth, granting strength or vigour, victorious

vājasāta

n. (v/āja--) the winning of a prize or of booty, battle, victory

vājasāti

f. (v/āja--) the winning of a prize or of booty, battle, victory

vājayu

mfn. winning or bestowing wealth or booty

vakārabheda

m. Name of a treatise on the proper spelling of words beginning with v- or b-.

vakra

mf(ā-)n. crooked in disposition, cunning, fraudulent, dishonest, evasive, ambiguous

etc.

vakrabhāva

m. cunning, craft, deceit

vaktra

n. beginning, commencement

vāladhipriya

m. "fond of its tail", a buffalo, the Yak or Bos Grunniens

(see vāla-priya-).

vālamṛga

m. "tail-animal", the Yak or Bos Grunniens

vālapriya

m. the Yak or Bos Grunniens

vālavyajana

n. a chowrie (equals cāmara- q.v) made from the tail of the Yak or Bos Grunniens

vaṃśasthavila

n. Name of a species of jagatī- metre (used in the beginning of the ṛtu-saṃhāra-)

varaṇā

f. Name of a small river (running past the north of Benares into the Ganges and now called Barna)

vārivaha

mf(ā-)n. carrying water, running with water

(in ramya-vāri-vaha-, śiva-vāri-vaha-).

vārivāhin

mfn. carrying water, running with water

vārivāna

mf(ā-)n. carrying water, running with water (in kūlātikrānta-vāri-vāha-)

varjaka

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') shunning, avoiding

varjin

mfn. avoiding, shunning

varṣāgama

(varṣa-) m. beginning of the rainy season

vaśakara

mf(ī-)n. subjugating, winning

vasumadgaṇa

mfn. Name of

(as beginning with this word)

vedādi

m. the beginning of the veda-

vedādirūpa

mfn. having the beginning of the veda- for its form or substance (as the syllable Om)

vena

m. Name of the hymn

(beginning with ayaṃ venaḥ-)

vetālasādhana

n. winning or securing (the favour of) a vetāla-

vibhāvarīmukha

n. "beginning of night", evening

vibhraṃś

(sometimes written bhraṃs-) A1. -bhraṃśate-, to fall off (figuratively), be unfortunate, fail or be unsuccessful in (locative case)

; to be separated from, desert (ablative)

: Causal -bhraṃśayati-, to cause to fall

; to strike or break off

; to cause to disappear or vanish, destroy annihilate

; to divert from, deprive of (abl)

vidhāra

m. (prob.) a receptacle

(others"running through", fr.1. dhāv-).

vidhāvana

n. running hither and thither

vidhitsamāna

mfn. intending to do, scheming, planning, interested, selfish

vidhvaṃs

(or dhvas-) A1. -dhvaṃsate- (rarely ti-), to fall to pieces, crumble into dust or powder, be scattered or dispersed or destroyed, perish

etc. etc.: Causal -dhvaṃsayati- (ind.p. -dhvaṃsya-,or -dhvasya-), to cause to fall to pieces or crumble, dash to pieces, crush, destroy, annihilate

etc. ; to hurt, injure

vidrava

m. running asunder or away, flight

etc.

vidravaṇa

n. running away

vidrāvin

mfn. running away, fleeing, escaping

vidruta

mfn. run away or asunder, running to and fro, flown, fled (n. impersonal or used impersonally)

etc.

vidruti

f. running, course

vidyārambha

m. (yār-) beginning of study

vighaṭ

(often confounded with vi-ghaṭṭ-) A1. -ghaṭate-, to go or fly apart, become separate, disperse

; to be broken or interrupted or marred or frustrated or destroyed

: Causal -ghaṭayati-, to tear or rend asunder, separate, disperse

; to mar, frustrate, annihilate, destroy

vihan

(often wrong reading for ni-han-) P. -hanti-, to strike apart or asunder, disperse, shatter, break, destroy

; to beat asunder, extend (a skin)

; to tear off

; to unbind, loosen (hair)

; to ward off, repel

; to keep back, withhold, refuse

; to hinder, interrupt, disturb, prevent, frustrate, annihilate

etc.: Passive voice -hanyate-, to be frustrated or disappointed, exert one's self in vain

: Causal -ghātayati-, te-, to beat, vanquish, defeat

; (A1.) to afflict, distress, annoy

; to interrupt, disturb

: Desiderative -jighāṃsati-, to wish to interrupt or disturb

: Intensive (-jījahi-?), to harm, injure

vīj

(see 1. vij-) cl.1 P. A1. vījati-, te- (perfect tense vivyajuḥ-), to fan, cool by blowing upon or fanning,

; to sprinkle with water

(according to

only A1."to go"): Causal or cl.10. (

), vījayati- (Passive voice vījyate-), to fan, blow, kindle (fire)

etc. ; to stroke, caress

vījana

n. fanning, wafting

etc.

vikṛ

P. A1. -karoti-, -kurute-, to make different, transform, change the shape (or the mind), cause to alter or change (especially for the worse), deprave, pervert, spoil, impair

etc. ; (Passive voice and A1.,rarely P.) to become different, be altered, change one's state or opinions

etc. (see

) ; to develop, produce (especially variously)

; to embellish, decorate (in various manners)

; to distribute, divide

; to destroy, annihilate

; to represent, fill the place of (accusative)

; (A1.; see above) to move to and fro, wave, shake (hands or feet)

; to be or become restless (with netrābhyām-,"to roll the eyes")

; to utter (sounds)

; to become unfaithful to (locative case)

; to act in a hostile or unfriendly way towards (genitive case or locative case)

etc. ; to contend together

; to act in various ways

; Passive voice -kriyate-, to be changed etc. (see above) : Causal -kārayati-, to cause to change or be changed

vilomapāṭha

m. recitation in reverse order (id est from the end to the beginning)

vinaś

P. -naśati-, or -naśyati- (future -naśiṣyati-or -naṅkṣyati-; infinitive mood -naśitum-or -naṃṣṭum-), to be utterly lost, perish, disappear, vanish

etc. ; to come to nothing, be frustrated or foiled

; to be deprived of (ablative)

; to destroy, annihilate

: Causal -nāśayati- (Aorist vy-anīnaśat-), to cause to be utterly lost or ruined or to disappear or vanish

etc. etc. (once in

with genitive case for accusative) ; to frustrate, disappoint, render ineffective (a weapon)

; to suffer to be lost or ruined

; (Aorist) to be lost, perish

vināśa

m. utter loss, annihilation, perdition, destruction, decay, death, removal

etc.

vināśaka

mfn. (fr. Causal) annihilating, destroying a destroyer

vināśana

n. causing to disappear, removal, destruction, annihilation

vināśya

mfn. to be destroyed or annihilated ( vināśyatva -tva- n.)

vinipat

P. -patati-, to fall down, fall in or into (locative case)

; to flow down, alight upon (locative case)

; to fall upon, attack, assail

: Causal -pātayati- (Passive voice -pātyate-), to cause to fall down, strike off (a man's head)

; to throw down, kill, destroy, annihilate

vinirmath

(or manth-;only ind.p. -mathya-), to churn out

; to crush, annihilate

vipalāyana

n. running away or asunder

vipalāyin

mfn. running away, fleeing

viparidhāvaka

mfn. running about or in all directions

viparyaya

m. running off, coming to an end

viparyaya

m. shunning, avoiding

(Scholiast or Commentator)

vipathayamaka

n. a kind of yamaka- (q.v) in which the paronomasia is only at the beginning and end of the verse (exempli gratia, 'for example'

)

vipralaya

m. ( lī-) extinction, annihilation, absorption in (locative case)

vipralopa

m. destruction, annihilation

viralapātaka

mfn. rarely committing crimes, sinning rarely

viśālika

m. endearing forms of names beginning with viśāla-

viśālila

m. endearing forms of names beginning with viśāla-

viśāliya

m. endearing forms of names beginning with viśāla-

vivarjaka

mfn. avoiding, shunning, leaving

vivarjana

n. the act of avoiding, shunning, leaving, giving up or desisting from (genitive case ablative,or compound)

viyam

P. -yacchati- (3. plural perfect tense A1. -yemire-

), to spread out, extend

; to stretch out the legs, step out (as a running horse)

; to hold apart or asunder

: Causal -yāmayati- to stretch out, extend

vṛt

ind. finished, ended (a gram. term used only in the

and signifying that a series of roots acted on by a rule and beginning with a root followed by ādi-or prabhṛti-,ends with the word preceding vṛt-).

vyajana

n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) fanning

vyajana

n. a palm-leaf or other article used for fanning, fan, whisk (often dual number)

vyajanacāmara

n. the tail of the Bos Grunniens used as a whisk or fan, a chowry (see vyajanacāmara-).

vyajanakriyā

f. the act of fanning

vyajanin

m. the Yak (Bos Grunniens)

vyard

P. -ardati-, to flow away

; to oppress, harass, pain (See a-vyarṇa-): Causal -ardayati-, to cause to be scattered or dissolved, destroy, annihilate

vyatikramin

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') sinning against, wronging

vyavahāramātṛkā

f. the material or matter of ordinary judicature, legal process in general, any act or subject relating to the formation of legal courts or the administration of justice (arranged under thirty heads in the beginning of the second book or vyavahārādhyāya- of the mitākṣarā- exempli gratia, 'for example' 1. vyavahāra-darśanani-,2. vyavahāra-lakṣaṇam-,3. sabhā-sadaḥ-,4. prāḍ-vivākādiḥ-,5. vyavahāra-viṣayah-,6. rājñaḥ kāryānutpādakatvam-,7. kāryārthini praśnaḥ-,8. āhvānānāhvāne-,9. āsedhah-,10. pratyarthiny āgatelekhyādi-kartavyatā-,11. pañca-vidho hīnaḥ-,12. kīdṛśaṃ lekhyam-,13. pakṣābhāsāḥ-,14. anadeyāḥ-,15. ādeyaḥ-,and fifteen others)

vyāyatapātin

mfn. running far and wide (as horses)

vyāyuka

mfn. (5. i-) running away, escaping

yajñāyajñiya

n. (fr. yājñ/ā-yajñā-,the beginning of

) Name of various sāman-s (also called agniṣṭoma-s-,from coming at the end of an agni-ṣṭoma-)

yakārādipada

n. a word beginning with ya- (euphemistically applied to any form of yabh-)

yātaūtīya

n. the hymn

(beginning with yā ta ūtir-)

yathārambham

(thār-) ind. according to the beginning, in the same order or succession

yavasaprathama

(y/avasa--) mfn. beginning with or depending on good pasturage, well-nurtured (according to to

,"first or best of all kinds of food")

yeyajñenetisūkta

Name of the hymn

(beginning with ye yajñena-)

yoga

m. Name of a variable division of time (during which the joint motion in longitude of the sun and moon amounts to 13 degrees 20 minutes;there are 27 such yoga-s beginning with viṣkambha- and ending with vaidhṛti-)

yoganidrā

f. (according to to others) the great sleep of brahmā- during the period between the annihilation and reproduction of the universe

yugādi

m. the commencement of a yuga-, the beginning of the world

yugādyā

f. the anniversary of it

yukti

f. trick, contrivance, means, expedient, artifice, cunning device, magic

(yuktiṃ-kṛ-,to find out or employ an expedient; yukti- in the beginning of a compound; yuktyā tyā- ind., yuktibhis tibhis- ind.,and yuktitas ti-tas- ind.by device or stratagem, artfully, skilfully, under pretext or pretence; yuktyā-etc. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' = by means of)

Apte Search

385 results


a	अ The first letter of the alphabet; अक्षंराणामकारो$स्मि Bg.10.33. -अः [अवति, अतति सातत्येन तिष्ठतीति वा; अव्-अत् वा, ड Tv.] 1 N. of Viṣṇu, the first of the three sounds constituting the sacred syllable ओम्; अकारो विष्णुरुद्दिष्ट उकारस्तु महेश्वरः । मकारस्तु स्मृतो ब्रह्मा प्रणवस्तु त्रयात्मकः ॥ For more explanations of the three syllables अ, उ, म् see ओम्. -2 N. of Śiva, Brahmā, Vāyu, or Vaiśvānara.-- [अः कृष्णः शंकरो ब्रह्मा शक्रः सोमो$निलो$नलः । सूर्यः प्राणो यमः कालो वसन्तः प्रणवः सुखी ॥ Enm. अः स्याद् ब्रह्मणि विष्ण्वीशकूर्माणङ्करणेषु च। गौरवे$न्तःपुरे हेतौ भूषणे$ङ्घ्रावुमेज्ययोः ॥ Nm. अः शिखायां सिद्धमन्त्रे प्रग्राहे$र्के रथार्वणि । चक्रे कुक्कुटमूर्ध्नीन्दुबिम्बे ब्रह्मेशविष्णुषु ॥ ibid. Thus अः means Kṛiṣṇa, Śiva, Brahmā, Indra, Soma, Vāyu, Agni, the Sun, the life-breath, Yama, Kāla, Vasanta, Praṇava, a happy man, a tortoise, a courtyard, a battle, greatness, a female apartment in a palace, an object or a cause, an ornament, a foot, Umā, sacrifice, a flame, a particularly efficacious mantra, reins, the horse of chariot, a wheel, the head of a cock, the disc of the moon]; ind. 1 A Prefix corresponding to Latin in, Eng. in or un, Gr. a or an, and joined to nouns, adjectives, indeclinables (or rarely even to verbs) as a substitute for the negative particle ऩञ्, and changed to अन् before vowels (except in the word अ-ऋणिन्). The senses of न usually enumerated are six--(a) सादृश्य 'likeness' or 'resemblance', अब्राह्मणः one like a Brāhmaṇa (wearing the sacred thread &c.), but not a Brāhmaṇa; a Kṣatriya, or a Vaiśya; अनिक्षुः a reed appearing like इक्षु, but not a true इक्षु. (b) अभाव 'absence', 'negation', 'want', 'privation'; अज्ञानम् absence of knowledge, ignorance; अक्रोधः, अनङ्गः, अकण्टकः, अघटः &c. (c) अन्यत्व 'difference' or 'distinction'; अपटः not a cloth, something different from, or other than, a cloth. (d) अल्पता 'smallness', 'diminution', used as a diminutive particle; अनुदरा having a slender waist (कृशोदरी or तनुमध्यमा). (e) अप्राशस्त्य 'badness', 'unfitness', having a depreciative sense; अकालः wrong or improper time; अकार्यम् not fit to be done, improper, unworthy, bad act. (f) विरोध 'opposition', 'contrariety'; अनीतिः the opposite of morality; immorality; असित not white, black; असुर not a god, a demon &c. These senses are put together in the following verse :-- तत्सादृश्यमभावश्च तदन्यत्वं तदल्पता । अप्राशस्त्यं विरोधश्च ऩञर्थाः षट् प्रकीर्तिताः ॥ See न also. With verbal derivatives, such as gerunds, infinitives, participles, it has usually the sense of 'not'; अदग्ध्वा not having burnt; अपश्यन् not seeing; so असकृत् not once; अमृषा, अकस्मात् &c. Sometimes in बहुव्रीहि अ does not affect the sense of the second member : अ-पश्चिम that which has no last, i. e. best, topmost; e. g. विपश्चितामपश्चिमः cf. also R.19.1. अनुत्तम having no superior, unsurpassed, most excellent: (for examples see these words). -2 An interjection of (a) Pity (ah !) अ अवद्यं P.I.1.14 Sk. (b) Reproach, censure (fie, shame); अपचसि त्वं जाल्म P.VI.3.73 Vārt. See अकरणि, अजीवनि also. (c) Used in addressing; अ अनन्त. (d) It is also used as a particle of prohibition. -3 The augment prefixed to the root in the formation of the Imperfect, Aorist and Conditional Tenses. N. B.-- The application of this privative prefix is practically unlimited; to give every possible case would almost amount to a dictionary itself. No attempt will, therefore, be made to give every possible combination of this prefix with a following word; only such words as require a special explanation, or such as most frequently occur in literature and enter into compounds with other words, will be given; others will be found self-explaining when the English 'in', 'un', or 'not', is substituted for अ or अन् before the meaning of the second word, or the sense may be expressed by 'less', 'free from', 'devoid or destitute of' &c; अकथ्य unspeakable; अदर्प without pride, or freedom from pride; अप्रगल्भ not bold; अभग unfortunate; अवित्त destitute of wealth &c. In many cases such compounds will be found explained under the second member. Most compounds beginning with अ or अन् are either Tatpuruṣa or Bahuvrīhi (to be determined by the sense) and should be so dissolved.

aṃśaḥ	अंशः [अंश्-अच्] 1 A share, part, portion, division; member; सकृदंशो निपतति Ms.9.47; तुर्यांशः a fourth part; षष्ठ˚; ममैवांशो जीवलोके जीवभूतः सनातनः Bg.15.7; भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16; अंशेन दर्शितानुकूलता K.159 partly. -2 A share in property, inheritance; स्वतों$शतः Ms.8.48; अनंशौ क्लीबपतितौ 9.21; पत्न्यः कार्याः समांशिकाः Y.2.115. -3 the numerator of a fraction; अन्योन्यहाराभिहतौ हरांशौ Līlā.; sometimes used for fraction itself. -4 A degree of latitude (or longitude); अक्षस्यांशाः समाख्याताः षष्टयुत्तरशतत्रयम्; स च अंशः षष्टिकलात्मकः, कला तु षष्टिविकलात्मिका -5 The shoulder (more correctly written as अंस, q. v.). -6 N. of one of the Ādityas; Mb.1.227.25; cf. also the beginning of T. Ā. The senses of 'party', 'a share of booty', 'earnest money', which are said to occur in the Veda are traceable to 1 above. -7 The vital note in a Rāga. -Comp. - अंशः [ष. त.] a secondary incarnation; part of a portion. -अंशि adv. share by share. -अवतारः -तरणम् [ष. त.] descent (on earth) of parts of deities, partial incarnation; ˚तार इव धर्मस्य Dk.153; ˚रमिव कृतान्तस्य K.31; ˚उच्चैःश्रवसः 79; so अंशावतीर्णमिव 18; N. of a sub-parvan covering Adhyāyas 64-67 of Ādiparvan of Mb. Even without the compound अंश means partial incarnation, अंश, आवेश, and अवतार are the three kinds of Lord's manifestations. -कुण्डली (= नवांशकुण्डली) the horoscope prepared by taking into consideration the nine zodiacal divisions. (1/18th of a राशि = नवांश or नवमांश). -भाज्, -हर, -हारिन् a. [उप. समास] one who takes or has a share, one entitled to a share in the ancestral property, an heir, a co-heir; पिण्डदों?1?1$- शहरश्चैषां पूर्वाभावे परः परः Y.2.132; जातो$पि दास्यां शूद्रेण कामतों$शहरो भवेत् 133. -विवर्तिन् a. [स. त.] slightly turned away, or turned away towards the shoulder; मुखमंशविवर्ति पक्ष्मलाक्ष्याः Ś.3.24. v. l. for अंसविवर्ति. -सवर्णनम् [ष. त.] reduction of fractions to the same denominator (अतुल्यच्छेदयो राश्योः समच्छेदकरणम्) अन्योन्यहाराभिहतौ हरांशौ राश्योः समच्छेदविधानमेवम् Līlā. -स्वरः the keynote.

akiṃcana	अकिंचन a. [नास्ति किंचन यस्य] Without anything, quite poor, utterly destitute, indigent, penniless; अकिंचनः सन् प्रभवः स संपदां Ku.5.77; न द्वन्द्वदुःखमिह किंचिदकिंचनोपि Śi. 4.64 disinterested. -नम् That which is worth nothing.

akṣara	अक्षर a. [न क्षरतीति; क्षर् चलने अच्-न. त.] 1 Imperishable, indestructible, undecaying, epithet of the Supreme as well as the Individual soul; यमक्षरं क्षेत्रविदो विदुस्तमात्मानमात्मन्यवलोकयन्तम् Ku.3.5; द्वाविमौ पुरुषौ लोके क्षरश्चाक्षर एव च । क्षरः सर्वाणि भूतानि कूटस्थो$क्षर उच्यते Bg.15.16. यस्मात्क्षरमतीतो$हमक्षरादपि चोत्तमः । अतो$स्मि लोके वेदे च प्रथितः पुरुषोत्तमः Bg.15.18; the unconcerned (Spirit); अक्षरं ब्रह्म परमभ् Bg.8.3. -2 Fixed, firm, unalterable. -रः 1 Śiva. -2 Viṣṇu. -3 A sword. -रा Sound, word, speech (Ved.). -रम् [अश्-सरः Uṇ.3.7, अशेः सरः; अश्नुते व्याप्नोति वेदादिशास्त्राणि.] 1 (a) A letter of the alphabet; अक्षराणामकारो$स्मि Bg.1.33; मुद्राक्षराणि, मधुर˚, त्र्यक्षर &c. (b) a syllable; एकाक्षरं परं ब्रह्म Ms.2.83 the monosyllable; गिरामस्म्येकमक्षरम् Bg.1.25, Ms. 2.78,84,125 (sacred syllable). Hence (c) a word or words, speech collectively; प्रतिषेधाक्षरविक्लवाभिरामम् Ś.3.24; अहो संदापनान्यक्षराणि U.4; भर्तुरेतानि प्रणयमयान्यक्षराणि M.3 words; ब्राह्मणसंक्रमिताक्षरेण पितामहेन V.3; अक्षंर वर्णनिर्माणं वर्णमप्यक्षरं विदुः । अक्षरं न क्षरं विद्यादश्नोतेर्वा सरो$क्षरम् ॥ -2 A document (letter &c.), sacred writing; writing in general (in pl.); तत्र भुक्तिः प्रमाणं स्यान्न साक्षी नाक्षराणि च Pt.3.93; तत्रभवत्या अक्षराणि विसृष्टानि स्युः V.2. -3 The highest deity or Godhead, the indestructible spirit, Brahman (परमब्रह्मन्, मूलकारणम्); अक्षरं ब्रह्म परमम् Bg.8.3; कर्म ब्रह्मोद्भवं विद्धि ब्रह्माक्षरसमुद्भवम् 3.15; यथा सतः पुरुषात्केशलोमानि तथाक्षरात्संभवतीह विश्वम् Chān. Up. -4 Religious austerity, penance. -5 Sacrifice. -6 Water. ततः क्षरति अक्षरम् Rv. 1.164.42. -7 The sky. -8 Final beatitude, emancipation from further transmigration. -9 Continuance, permanence. -1 Right, justice (Ved. in these two senses). -11 N. of a plant, Achyranthes Aspera. (अपामार्ग Mar. अघाडा.) -12 A measure of time, equal to one-fifth of a Kāṣṭhā. -Comp -अक्षरः a kind of religious meditation; Kāraṇḍavyūha (Metrical recension) -अङ्गम् 1. a part of a syllable. -2. alphabet. -अर्थः [ष. त.] meaning (of words); किं तावत् गीत्या अवगतो$क्षरार्थः Ś.5. -च (ञ्चुं) ञ्चुः -ञ्चणः, -नः [अक्षरेण वर्णविन्यासलिप्या वित्तः अक्षर -चणप् or चु (ञ्चुं) ञ्चुप् तेन वित्तश्चुञ्चुप् चणपौ; P. V. 2.26.] a scribe, writer, copyist; so ˚जीवकः, -जीवी, अक्षरेण जीवति; जीव् णिनि or ण्वुल्; also ˚जीविकः. -च्युतकम् [अक्षरं च्युतं लुप्तं यत्र; ब कप्] getting out a different meaning by the omission of a letter (e. g. कुर्वन् दिवाकरश्लेषं दधच्चरणडम्बरम् । देव यौष्माकसेनयोः करेणुः प्रसरत्यसौ where another meaning may be got by omitting क in करेणुः i. e. by taking रेणुः). -छन्दस् n. -वृत्तम् a metre regulated by the number of syllables it contains; छन्दस्तु द्विविधं प्रोक्तं वृत्तं जातिरिति द्विधा । वृत्तमक्षरसंख्यातं जातिर्मात्राकृता भवेत् ॥ unshaken resolve, resolute (अक्षरं निश्चलं छन्दो$भिप्रायो यस्य); -जननी, -तूलिका [अक्षराणां जननीव; तल्लिपिलेखानां तूलिकेव वा साधनत्वात्] a reed or pen. -जीवकः or -जीविन् m. 'One who lives by writing', a scribe. -(वि) न्यासः [ष. त. भावे घञ्] 1 writing, arrangement of letters; भूर्जपत्रगतो ˚सः V.2. -2 the alphabet. -3 scripture. -4 हृदयाद्याधारस्पर्शपूर्वकं तदक्षराणां स्मरणोच्चारणरूपस्तन्त्रप्रसिद्धो वर्णन्यासः - पङ्क्ति a. 1. having 5 syllables (पङ्क्ति = Gr. pentas-five) सु मत् पद् वग दे इत्येष वै यज्ञो$क्षरपङ्क्तिः Ait. Br. (तान्येतान्यक्षराणि होतृज- पादौ प्रयोक्तव्यानि). -2 N. of a metre of four lines (द्विपदा विराज्) each having five syllables (one dactyl and one spondee). -भाज् a. having a share in the syllables (of a prayer ?). -भूमिका tablet; न्यस्ताक्षरामक्षरभूमिकायाम् R.18. 46. -मुखः [अक्षराणि तन्मयानि शास्त्राणि वा मुखे यस्य] a scholar, student. -खम् [ष. त.] the beginning of the alphabet; the letter अ. -मुष्टिका 'finger-speech', speaking by means of finger-signs. -वर्जित a. unlettered, illiterate, not knowing how to read or write. a. of an epithet of परमात्मन्. -व्यक्तिः f. [ष. त.] distinct articulation of syllables. -शिक्षा [ष. त.] the science of (mystic) syllables; theory of ब्रह्म (ब्रह्मतत्त्व); मह्यं ˚क्षां विधाय Dk.11. -संस्थानम् [अक्षराणां संस्थानं यत्र] arrangement of letters, writing, alphabet.

agra	अग्र a. [अङ्ग्-रन् नलोपः Uṇ.2.28] 1 First, foremost, chief, best, prominent, principal, pre-eminent; ˚महिषी chief queen; ˚वातमासेवमाना M.1. front (and hence, fresh) breeze; ˚आसनम् chief seat, seat of honour; माम- ग्रासनतो$वकृष्टमवशं ये दृष्टवन्तः पुरा Mu.1.12. -2 Excessive, over and above, surplus; supernumerary, projecting (अधिक). -ग्रः Setting mountain; अग्रसानुषु नितान्तपिशङ्गैः Ki.9.7. -ग्रम् 1 (a) The foremost or topmost point, tip, point (opp. मूलम्, मध्यम्); (fig.) sharpness, keenness; धर्मस्य ब्राह्मणो मूलम् मग्रं राजन्य उच्यते Ms.11.83; दर्व्याम् अग्रं मूलम् मध्यम् &c.; नासिका˚ tip of the nose; सूचि˚ &c.; समस्ता एव विद्या जिह्वाग्रे$भवन् K.346 stood on the tip of the tongue; अमुष्य विद्या रसनाग्रनर्तकी N.1.5. (b) Top, summit, surface; कैलास˚, पर्वत˚, &c. -2 Front, van; अग्रे कृ put in the front or at the head; तामग्रे कृत्वा Pt.4. See अग्रे. -3 The best of any kind; स्यन्दनाग्रेण with the best of chariots; प्रासादाग्रैः Rām. -4 Superiority, excellence (उत्कर्ष); अग्रादग्रं रोहति Tāṇḍya. -5 Goal, aim, resting place (आलम्बनम्); मनुमेकाग्रमासीनम् Ms.1.1, See ˚भूमि also. -6 Beginning, See अग्रे. -7 A multitude, assemblage. -8 Overplus, excess, surplus; साग्रं स्त्रीसहस्रम् Rām. 1 women and more; so साग्रकोटी च रक्षसाम्. -9 A weight = पल q. v. -1 A measure of food given as alms (ब्राह्मणभोजनम् occurring in अग्रहार); प्रयतो ब्राह्मणाग्रे यः श्रद्धया परया युतः । Mb.13.65.13. -11 (Astr.) Amplitude of the sun (˚ग्रा, अग्रका also). cf. ...अग्रमालम्बने$धिके । पुरोपरिप्रान्ताद्येषु न पुंसि प्रमिताशने । Nm. -12 Forepart of time; नैवेह किंचनाग्र आसीत् Bṛi. Up.1.2.1. In compounds as first member meaning 'the forepart', 'front', 'tip' &c.; e. g. ˚अक्चयः First procurement (cf. Daṇḍa-viveka G. O. S.52, p.43). ˚पादः -चरणः the forepart of the foot, toe; so ˚हस्तः, ˚करः, ˚पाणिः &c.; ˚सरोरूहम् the topmost lotus. पद्मानि यस्याग्रसरोरुहाणि Ku.1.16. ˚कर्णम् Tip-ear; top of the ear; Mātaṅga L.5.7. ˚कायः forepart of the body; so ˚नखम्, ˚नासिका tip of the nail, nose &c., -adv. In front, before, ahead. -Comp. -अंशुः [अग्रम् अंशोः] the focal point. -अक्षि n. [कर्म.] sharp or pointed vision, side-look (अपाङ्गवीक्षण); अग्राक्ष्णा वीक्षमाणस्तु तिर्यग् भ्रातरमब्रवीत् Rām. -अद्वन् a. having precedence in eating. -अनी (णी) कः (कम्) vanguard; दीर्घाल्लँघूंश्चैव नरानग्रानीकेषु योधयेत् Ms.7.193; [अग्राणीकं रघुव्याघ्रौ राक्षसानां बभञ्जतुः Rām. -अयणीयम [अग्रं श्रेष्टं अयनं ज्ञानं तत्र साधु छ]. 1 N. of a Buddhistic tenet (उत्पादपूर्वमग्रायणीयमथ वीर्यता प्रवादः स्यात् -हेमचन्द्रः). -2 title of the second of the fourteen oldest Jain books (Pūrvas). -अवलेहितम् [अग्रम् अव- लेहितम् आस्वादितं यस्य] food at a Śrāddha ceremony, the chief part of which has been tested. -आसनम् First seat of honour; मामग्रासनतो$वकृष्टमवशम् Mu.1.12. -उत्सर्गः taking a thing by leaving its first portion in conformity with the rule of laying by nothing for the next day (i. e. the rule of non hoarding); cf. Daṇḍaviveka G. O. S.52, pp.43-44. -उपहरणम् first supply. -उपहरणीय a. [अग्रे उपह्रियते कर्मणि अनीयर्] 1 that which is first offered or supplied. -2 [अग्रम् उपह्रियते यस्मै हृ- संप्रदाने अनीयर्] श्राद्धाद्यर्थमुपकल्पितस्य अन्नादेरग्रे दानोद्देश्यः वास्तु- देवादिः Tv. -करः 1 = अग्रहस्तः q. v. -2 the focal point. -केशः front line of hair; ˚शेषु रेणुः अपहरति K.86. -गः [अग्रे गच्छतीति, गम्-ड] a leader, a guide; taking the lead; marching foremost. -गण्य a. [अग्रे गण्यते$सौ] foremost, to be ranked first; शमनभवनयाने यद्भवानग्रगण्यः Mahān. -गामिन् a. [अग्रे गच्छति] a leader; प्रष्ठो$ग्रगामिनि P.VIII.3.92. -ज a. [अग्रे जायते; जन्-ड.] first born or produced; आनन्देनाग्रजेनेव R.1.78. (-जः) 1 the first born, an elder brother; सुमतिं ममाग्रजमवगच्छ M.5; अस्त्येव मन्युर्भरताग्रजे मे R.14.73. -2 a Brāhmaṇa. (-जा) an elder sister; so ˚जात, ˚जातक, ˚जाति. -जङ्घा the forepart of the calf. -जन्मन् m. [अग्रे जन्म यस्य सः] 1 the first-born, an elder brother; जनकाग्रजन्मनोः शासनमतिक्रम्य Dk.2. -2 a Brāhmaṇa (वर्णेषु मध्ये अग्रजातत्वात्, or अग्रात् प्रधानाङ्गात् मुखात् जातत्वात्, ब्राह्मणो$स्य मुखमासीत्, तस्मात् त्रिवृत् स्तोमानां मुखम... अग्निर्देवतानां ब्राह्मणो मनुष्याणाम्; तस्माद् ब्राह्मणो मुखेन वीर्यं करोति मुखतो हि सृष्टः Tāṇḍya); अतिवयसमग्रजन्मानम् K.12; अवो- चत् ˚न्मा Dk.13.3; N. of Brahmā, as he was the first to be born in the waters. cf. अग्रजन्मा द्विजे ज्येष्ठभ्रातरि ब्रह्मणि स्मृतम् Nm. -जिह्वा the tip of the tongue. -ज्या (astr.) the sign of the amplitude. -दानिन् [अग्रे दानम् अस्य; अग्र- दान-इनि] a (degraded) Brāhmaṇa who takes presents offered in honour of the dead (प्रेतोद्देशेन यद्दानं दीयते तत्प्रति- ग्राही); लोभी विप्रश्च शूद्राणामग्रेदानं गृहीतवान् । ग्रहणे मृतदानानां (ग्रहणात्तिलदानानां Tv.) अग्रदानी बभूव सः ॥ -दानीयः [अग्रे दानमर्हति छ] = अग्रदानिन्. -दूतः a harbinger; कृष्णाक्रोधा- ग्रदूतः Ve.1.22; ˚दूतिका Dk.2; महीपतीनां प्रणयाग्रदूत्यः R.6.12; -देवी the chief queen; समग्रदेवीनिवहाग्र- देवी... । Bu.ch.1.15. -धान्यम a cereal grain. (Mar. जोंधळा), Holcus soraghum or Holcus spicatus. (Mar. बाजरी). -निरूपणम् predestination; prophecy, determining beforehand. -नीः (णीः) [अग्रे नीयते असौ नी-क्विप्, णत्वम्] 1 a leader, foremost, first, chief; ˚णी- र्विरागहेतुः K.195; अप्यग्रणीर्मन्त्रकृतामृषीणाम् R.5.4. chief. -2 fire. -पर्णी [अग्रे पर्णं यस्याः सा-ङीप्] cowage, Carpopogon Pruriens (अजलोमन्). [Mar. कुयली]. -पातिन् a. [अग्रे आदौ पतति; पत्-णिनि] happening beforehand, antecedent; [˚तीनि शुभानि निमित्तानि K.65. -पादः the forepart of the foot; toes; नवकिसलयरागेणाग्रपादेन M.3.12; ˚स्थिता standing on tiptoe. Ś.5. -पाणिः = ˚हस्तः q. v. -पूजा the highest or first mark of reverence or respect; ˚जामिह स्थित्वा गृहाणेदं विषं प्रभो Rām. -पेयम् precedence in drinking. -प्रदायिन् a. giving in advance; तेषामग्र- प्रदायी स्याः कल्पोत्थायी प्रियंवदः Mb.5.135.35. -बीज a. [अग्रं शाखाग्रं बीजमुत्पादकं यस्य] growing by means of the tip or end of branches, growing on the stock or stem of another tree, such as 'कलम' in Mar. (-जः) a viviparous plant. -भागः [कर्म.] 1 the first or best part (श्राद्धादौ प्रथममुद्धृत्य देयं द्रव्यम्) -2 remnant, remainder (शेषभाग). -3 fore-part, tip, point. -4 (astr.) a degree of amplitude. -भागिन् a. [अग्र- भागो$स्यास्ति; अस्त्यर्थे इनि] first to take or claim (the remnant); अलङ्क्रियमाणस्य तस्य अनुलेपनमाल्ये ˚गी भवामि V. 5, claiming the first share of the remnant etc. -भावः precedence. उदारसंख्यैः सचिवैरसंख्यैः कृताग्रभावः स उदाग्रभावः Bu.ch.I.15. -भुज् a. 1 having precedence in eating. स तानग्रभुजस्तात धान्येन च धनेन च Mb.1.178.12. -2 gluttonous, voracious (औदरिक). -भूः [अग्रे भवति भू-क्विप्] = ˚ज. -भूमिः f. 1 goal of ambition or object aimed at; ततो$ग्रभूमिं व्यवसायासिद्धेः Ki.17.55; त्वमग्र- भूमिर्निरपायसंश्रया Śi.1.32 (प्राप्यस्थानम्). -2 the topmost part, pinnacle; विमान˚ Me.71. -महिषी the principal queen. -मांसम् [अग्रं भक्ष्यत्वेन प्रधानं मांसम्] flesh in the heart, the heart itself; ˚सं चानीतं Ve.3.2. morbid protuberance of the liver. -यणम् [अग्रम् अयनात् उत्तरायणात् णत्वं शकं˚ तद्विधानकालो$स्य अच् (?) Tv.] a kind of sacrificial ceremony. See आग्रयण. -यान a. [अग्रे यानं यस्य, या-ल्युट्] taking the lead, foremost. (-नम्) an army that stops in front to defy the enemy. मनो$ग्रयानं वचसा निरुक्तं नमामहे Bhāg.8.5.26. -यायिन् a. [अग्रे यास्यति या-णिनि] taking the lead, leading the van; पुत्रस्य ते रणशिरस्ययमग्रयायी Ś.7.26. मान- धनाग्रयायी R.5.3,5.62.18.1. -योधिन् [अग्रे स्थित्वा युध्यते] the principal hero, champion राक्षसानां वधे तेषां ˚धी भविष्यति Rām.; so ˚वीर; कर्मसु चाग्रवीरः. -रन्ध्रम् opening fore-part; त्रासान्नासाग्ररन्ध्रं विशति Māl.1.1. -लोहिता [अग्रं लोहितं यस्याः सा] a kind of pot-herb (चिल्लीशाक). -संख्या the first place or rank; पुत्रः समारोपयदग्रसंख्याम् R.18.3. -वक्त्रम् N. of a surgical instrument, Suśr. -वातः fresh breeze; अग्रवातमासेवमाना M.1. -शोमा towering beauty or the beauty of the peaks; कैलासशैलस्य यदग्रशोभाम् । Bu. ch.1.3. -संधानी [अग्रे फलोत्पत्तेः प्राक् संधी- यते ज्ञायते $नया कार्यम् Tv.] the register of human actions kept by Yama (यत्र हि प्राणिवर्गस्य प्राग्भवीयकर्मानुसारेण शुभा- शुभसूचकं सर्वं लिख्यते सा यमपञ्जिका). -सन्ध्या early dawn; कर्कन्धूनामुपरि तुहिनं रञ़्जयत्यग्रसन्ध्या Ś.4. v.1. -सर = यायिन् taking the lead; आयोधनाग्रसरतां त्वयि वीर याते R.5.71. -सारा [अग्रं शीर्षमात्रं सारो यस्याः सा] 1 a sprout which has tips without fruits. -2 a short method of counting immense numbers. -हर a. [अग्रे ह्रियते दीयते$सौ; हृ-अच्] 1 that which must be given first. -2 = अग्रहारिन्. -हस्त (˚कर; ˚पाणिः,) the forepart of the hand or arm; अग्रहस्तेन गृहीत्वा प्रसादयैनाम् Ratn.3; forepart of the trunk (of an elephant); often used for a finger or fingers taken collectively; शीतलस्ते ˚स्तः Mk.3; अतिसाध्वसेन वेपते मे ˚स्तः Ratn.1; कुसुमित इव ते ˚स्तः प्रतिभाति M.1.; प्रसारिते ˚स्ते M.4; ˚हस्तात्प्रभ्रष्टं पुष्पभाजनम् Ś.4. slipped from the fingers; also the right hand; अथ ˚हस्ते मुकुलीकृताङ्गुलौ Ku.5.63. (अग्रश्चासौ हस्तश्च Malli.). Ki.5.29. -हायनः (णः) [अग्रः श्रेष्ठः हायनो व्रीहिः अत्र, णत्वम्] the beginning of the year; N. of the month मार्गशीर्ष; (मासानां मार्गशीर्षो$हम् Bg. 1.35.); ˚इष्टिः नवशस्येष्टिर्यागभेदः. -हारः 1 a grant of land given by kings (to Brāhmaṇas) for sustenance (अग्रं ब्राह्मणभोजनं, तदर्थं ह्रियन्ते राजधनात् पृथक् क्रियन्ते ते क्षेत्रादयः- नीलकण्ठ; क्षेत्रोत्पन्नशस्यादुद्धृत्य ब्राह्मणोद्देशेन स्थाप्यं धान्यादि, गुरुकुला- दावृत्तब्रह्मचारिणे देयं क्षेत्रादि, ग्रामभेदश्च Tv.); अग्रहारांश्च दास्यामि ग्रामं नगरसंमितम् Mb.3.64.4. कस्मिंश्चिदग्रहारे Dk.8.9. -2 the first offering in वैश्वदेव Mb.3.234.47.

agre	अग्रे adv. 1 In front of, before (in time or space); अग्रे यान्ति स्थस्य रेणुपदवीं...घनाः V.1.5,2.7; R.2.56; Bh.3.36. -2 In the presence of, before; ममाग्रे स्तुवन्ति H.1; तं मे त्वमग्रहीरग्रे वृणोमि त्वामहं ततः Mb.1.81.21. -3 At the head, ahead; बलाग्रे तिष्ठते वीरो नलः Rām. -4 Further on, subsequently, in the sequel; एवमग्रे वक्ष्यते, एवमग्रे$पि द्रष्टव्यम् &c. -5 In the beginning; at first, first; प्रतापो$ग्रे ततः शब्दः परागस्तदनंतरम् R.4.3; आत्मैवेदमग्र आसीत् Bṛi. _x001F_+Ār. Up.4.1.1.; Ms.2.169. -6 First, in preference to others; सवर्णाग्रे द्विजातीनां प्रशस्ता दारकर्मणि Ms.3.12. अतिथिभ्यो$ग्र एवैतान् भोजयेत् 3.114. -Comp. -गः a leader; सेनाग्रगः Rām.7.35.6. -गाः going in front or before. -गूः Going in front. -दिधिषुः -षूः a man (of one of the first three castes) who marries a wife married before (पुनर्भूविवाहकारी). (-षूः) f. a married woman whose elder sister is still unmarried (ज्येष्ठायां यद्यनूढायां कन्यायामुह्यते$नुजा । सा चाग्रेदिधिषूर्ज्ञेया पूर्वा च दिधिषूः स्मृता); ˚पतिः the husband of such a woman. -पाः [अग्रे स्थित्वा पाति, अलुक्] first to protect. -पूः [अग्रे पूयते, पू-क्विप्] purifying in one's presence; having precedence in drinking. -वनम्-णम् [वनस्याग्रं राजदन्ता˚ ˚पूर्वनिपातः; अलुक् णत्वम् P.VIII.4.4.] the border or skirt of a forest. -सर a. [अग्रमग्रेणाग्रे वा सरति सृ. ट. अलुक्-पुरो$ग्रतो$ग्रेषु सर्त्तेः । P.III. 2.18.] going in front, taking the lead, a leader, foremost, first; निरपत्रपाणाम् अग्रेसरीकृतास्मि K.169; मरण˚रो भवामि Pt.1; Māl.9. first to die; मानमहतामग्रेसर: केसरी Bh.2.29. -सरिकः [अग्रेसरे अग्रगतौ प्रसृतः ठन्] 1 a servant (who precedes his master. -2 a leader.

aṅkaḥ	अङ्कः [अङ्क् कर्तरि करणे वा अच्] 1 The lap (n. also); अङ्काद्ययावङ्कमुदीरिताशीः Ku.7.5. passed from lap to lap. -2 A mark, sign; अलक्तकाङ्कां पदवीं ततान R.7.7; पदङ्क्तिरलक्ताङ्का Rām.; रतिवलयपदाङ्के कण्ठे Ku.2.64. marked with the signs or traces &c.: मद्गोत्राङ्कं गेयम् Me.86, a stain, spot, stigma, brand; इन्दोः किरणेष्विवाङ्कः Ku.1.3; कट्यां कृताङ्को निर्वास्यः Ms.8.281. -3 A numerical figure; a number; the number 9. -4 A side flank; proximity, reach (connected with 1 above); समुत्सुकेवाङ्कमुपैति सिद्धिः Ki.3. 4; प्रेम्णोपकण्ठं मुहुरङ्कभाजो रत्नावलीरम्बुधिराबबन्ध Śi.3.36; सिंहो जम्बुकमङ्कमागतमपि त्यक्त्वा निहन्ति द्विपम् Bh.2.3; Ki. 17.64, See- ˚आगत below. -5 An act of a drama, for its nature &c., See S. D.278. -6 A hook or curved instrument. -7 A species of dramatic composition, one of the ten varieties of रूपक, See S. D.519. -8 An ornament (भूषा). -9 A sham fight, military show (चित्रयुद्ध). -1 A coefficient. -11 A place; नानाङ्क- चिह्नैर्नवहेमभाण्डैः (तुरङ्गैः) Bu.ch.2.4. -12 A sin, misdeed. -13 A line, curved line; a curve or bend generally, the bend in the arm. -14 The body. -15 A mountain. अङ्कः स्थानान्तिकक्रोडभूषणोत्संगलक्ष्मसु । मन्तो नाटकविच्छेदे चित्रयुद्धे च रूपके ॥ Nm. [cf. L. uncus; Gr. ogkos] -Comp. -अङ्कमू [अङ्के मध्ये अङ्काः शतपत्रादिचिह्नानि यस्य Tv.] water. -अवतारः when an act, hinted by persons at the end of the preceding act, is brought in continuity with the latter, it is called अङ्कावतार (descent of an act), as the sixth act of Śākuntala or second of Mālavikāgnimitra (अङ्कान्ते सूचितः पात्रैस्तदङ्क- स्याविभागतः । यत्राङकोवतरत्येषो$ङ्कावतार इति स्मृतः S. D.311). The Daśarūpa defines it differently; अङ्कावतारस्त्वङ्कान्ते पातो$ङ्कस्याविभागतः । एभिः संसूचयेत्सूच्यं दृश्यमङ्कैः प्रदर्शयेत् 3.56. -आगत, -गत a. [द्वि. त.] come within the grasp; सिंहत्वं ˚सत्त्ववृत्तिः R.2.18; श्रियं युवाप्यङ्कगतामभोक्ता R.13.67. -करणम् marking, branding &c. -तन्त्रम् the science of numbers (arithmetical or algebraical). -धारणम्-णा 1 bearing or having marks, such as those on the body of a Vaiṣṇava. -2 manner of holding the person. -परिवर्तः [स. त] 1 turning on the other side. -2 rolling or dallying in the lap or on the person; अपि कर्णजाहविनिवेशिताननः प्रियया तदङ्कपरिवर्तमाप्नुयाम् Māl.5.8. (an occasion for) embrace (अङ्के क्रोडे सर्वतो- भावेन वर्तनं हृदयालिङ्गनम् इत्यर्थः -Jagaddhara); so ˚परिवर्तिन्; भर्तुः ˚नी भव M.3. -पादव्रतम् N. of a Vrata; title of a chapter in the भविष्योत्तरपुराण. -पालिः -ली [पा-अलि ष. त. वा. ङीप्] 1 the extremity of region of the lap (क्रोडप्रान्त or प्रदेश); a seat in the lap; hence, an embrace; तावद्गाढं वितर सकृदप्यङ्कपालीं प्रसीद Māl.8.2. स्पृश हस्तेन मे हस्तमेहि देह्यङ्कपालिकाम् । Śivabhārata 21.33. -2 [अङ्केन पालयति पाल्-इ. तृ. त.] a nurse. -3 (-ली) a variety of plant, Piring or Medicago Esculenta; (Mar. धोत्रा-निघण्टुरत्नाकर) [वेदिकाख्यगन्धद्रव्यम्] -पाशः [अङ्कः पाश इव बन्धनेनेव पातनहेतुर्यत्र Tv.] an operation in arithmetic by which a peculiar concatenation or chain of numbers is formed by making the figures 1, 2 &c. exchange places (स्थानान्तमेकादिचयाङ्कघातः संख्याविभेदा नियतैः स्युरङ्कैः । भक्तो$ङ्कमित्याङ्कसमासनिघ्नः स्थानेषु युक्तो मितिसंयुतिः स्यात् ॥ See Līlā.24); (न गुणो न हरो न कृतिर्न घनः पृष्टस्तथापि दुष्टानाम् । गर्वितगणकबहूनां स्यात् पातो$वश्यमङ्कपाशे$स्मिन्). -पूरणम् multiplication of number of figures. -बन्धः. forming the lap, bending the thighs into a curve and squatting down. -2 branding with a mark that resembles a headless trunk (अशिरःपुरुषाकरो$ङ्कः). --भाज् [अङ्कं भजते उप. स.] 1 seated in the lap or carried on the hip, as an infant. -2 being within easy reach, drawing near, soon to be obtained; अविरहितमनेकेनाङ्कभाजा फलेन Ki. 5. 52. -3 premature, early ripe, forced fruit. -मुखम् (or आस्यम्) that part of an act, wherein the subject of all the acts is intimated, is called अङ्कमुख, which suggests the germ as well as the end; e. g. in Māl.1 कामन्दकी and अवलोकिता hint the parts to be played by भूरिवसु and others and give the arrangement of the plot in brief (यत्र स्यादङ्क एकस्मिन्नङ्कानां सूचनाखिला । तदङ्क- मुखमित्याहुर्बीजार्थख्यापकं च तत् ॥ S. D.322.) The Daśarūpa defines it thus: अङ्कान्तपौत्ररङ्कास्यं छिन्नाङ्कस्यार्थसूचनात् । i. e. where a character at the end of an act cuts short the story and introduces the beginning of another act; as in the second of Mv. -लोड्यः [अङ्केन लोड्यते असौ] a kind of tree (Mar. चिंचोट), ginger. -लोपः subtraction of numbers. -विद्या the science of numbers, arithmetic.

aṅgam	अङ्गम् [अम् गत्यादौ बा˚ -गन्; according to Nir. अङ्ग, अङ्ग- नात् अञ्चनात् वा] 1 The body. -2 A limb or member of the body; शेषाङ्गनिर्माणविधौ विधातुः Ku.1.33; क्लेशस्याङ्गमदत्वा Pt.5. 32 without undergoing troubles; इति स्वप्नोपमान्मत्वा कामान्मा गास्तदङ्गताम् । Ki.11.34 do not be influenced or swayed by them (do not be subject to them) -3 (a.) A division or department (of anything), a part or portion, as of a whole; as सप्ताङ्गम् राज्यम्, चतुरङ्गम् बलम्, चतुःषष्ट्ष्ट्यङ्गम् ज्योतिः- शास्त्रम् see the words; गीताङ्गानाम् Pt.5.56; यज्ञश्चेत्प्रतिरुद्धःस्या- देकेनाङ्गेन यज्वनः Ms.11.11. (Hence) (b.) A supplementary or auxiliary portion, supplement; षडङ्ग or साङ्ग वेदः A peculiar use of the word अङ्ग in masculine gender may here be noted वेदांश्चैव तु वेदाङ्गान् वेदान्तानि तथा स्मृतीः । अधीत्य ब्राह्मणः पूर्वं शक्तितो$न्यांश्च संपठेत् Bṛhadyogiyājñaval-kya Smṛiti 12.34. (c.) A constituent part, essential requisite or component; सर्वैर्बलाङ्गैः R.7.59; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतो R.3.46. (d.) An attributive or secondary part; secondary, auxiliary or dependent member (serving to help the principal one) (opp. प्रधान or अङ्गिन्); अङ्गी रौद्र- रसस्तत्र सर्वे$ङ्गानि रसाः पुनः S. D.517; अत्र स्वभावोक्तिरुत्प्रेक्षाङ्गम् Malli. on Ki 8.26. (e.) An auxiliary means or expedient (प्रधानोपयोगी उपायः or उपकरणम्); सर्वकार्यशरीरेषु मुक्त्वा- ङ्गस्कन्धपञ्चकम् । मन्त्रो योध इवाधीर सर्वाङ्गैः संवृतैरपि ॥ Śi.2.28-29; See अङ्गाङ्गि, पञ्चाङ्ग also (the angas of the several sciences or departments of knowledge will be given under those words). -4 (Gram.) A name for the base of a word; यस्मात्प्रत्ययविधिस्तदादिप्रत्यये अङ्गम् P.I.4.13; यः प्रत्ययो यस्मात्क्रियते तदादिशब्दस्वरूपं तस्मिन्प्रत्यये परे अङ्गसंज्ञं स्यात् Sk. The अङ्ग terminations are those of the nominative, and accusative singular and dual. -5 (Drama) (a.) One of the sub-divisions of the five joints or sandhis in dramas; the मुख has 12, प्रतिमुख 13, गर्भ 12, विमर्ष 13 and उपसंहार 14, the total number of the angas being thus 64; for details see the words. (b.) The whole body of subordinate characters. -6 (astr.) A name for the position of stars (लग्न), See अङ्गाधीश. -7 A symbolical expression for the number six (derived from the six Vedāngas). -8 The mind; हिरण्यगर्भाङ्गभुवं मुनिं हरिः Śi.1.1, See अङ्गज also. -9 N. of the chief sacred texts of the jainas. -ङ्गः (pl.) N. of a country and the people inhabiting it, the country about the modern Bhāgalpur in Bengal. [It lay on the south of Kauśikī Kachchha and on the right bank of the Ganges. Its capital was Champā, sometimes called Aṅgapurī Lomapādapurī, Karṇapurī or Mālinī. According to Daṇḍin (अङ्गेषु गङ्गातटे बहिश्चम्पायाः) and Hiouen Thsang it stood on the Ganges about 24 miles west of a rocky island. General Cunningham has shown that this description applies to the hill opposite Pātharghāṭā, that it is 24 miles east of Bhāgalpur, and that there are villages called Champanagar and Champapura adjoininng the last. According to Sanskrit poets the country of the Aṅgas lay to the east of Girivraja, the capital of Magadha and to the north-east or south-east of Mithilā. The country was in ancient times ruled by Karṇa] cf. अङ्गं गात्रा- न्तिकोपाय प्रतीकेष्वप्रधानके । देशभेदे तु पुंसि स्यात्...॥ Nm. -a. 1 Contiguous. -2 Having members or divisions. -Comp. -अङ्गि, [अङ्गीभावः -अङगस्य अङ्गिनो भावः] the relation of a limb to the body, of the subordinate to the principal, or of that which is helped or fed to the helper or feeder (गौणमुख्यभावः, उपकार्येपकारकभावश्च); e. g. प्रयाज and other rites are to दर्श as its angas, while दर्श is to them the aṅgi; अङ्गाङ्गिभावमज्ञात्वा कथं सामर्थ्यनिर्णयः । पश्य टिट्टिभमात्रेण समुद्रो व्याकुलीकृतः ॥ H.2.138; अत्र वाक्ये समास- गतयोरुपमयोः साध्यसाधनभावात् ˚वेन सम्बन्धः Malli. on Ki.6.2; अविश्रान्तिजुषामात्मन्यङ्गाङ्गित्वं तु संकरः K.P.1. (अनुग्राह्यानुग्राह- कत्वम्). -अधिपः, -अधीशः 1 lord of the Aṅgas, N. of Karṇa (cf. ˚राजः, ˚पतिः, ˚ईश्वरः, ˚अधीश्वरः). -2 'lord of a लग्न', the planet presiding over it; (अङ्गाधिपे बलिनि सर्वविभूतिसम्पत्; अङ्गाधीशः स्वगेहे बुधगुरुकविभिः संयुतो वीक्षितो वा Jyotiṣa). -अपूर्वम् effect of a secondary sacrificial act. -कर्मन् n. -क्रिया 1 besmearing the body with fragrant cosmetics, rubbing it &c. Dk.39. -2 a supplementary sacrificial act. -क्रमः the order of the performance with reference to the अङ्गs. The rule in this connection is that the अङ्गक्रम must conform to the मुख्यक्रम. cf. MS. 5.1.14. -ग्रहः spasm; seizure of the body with some illness. -ज-जात a. [अङ्गात् जायते जन्-ड] 1 produced from or on the body, being in or on the body, bodily; ˚जं रजः, ˚जाः अलङ्काराः &c. -2 produced by a supplementary rite. -3 beautiful, ornamental. (-जः) -जनुस् also 1 a son. -2 hair of the body (n. also); तवोत्तरीयं करिचर्म साङ्गजम् Ki.18.32. -3 love, cupid (अङ्गं मनः तस्मा- ज्जातः); intoxicating passion; अङ्गजरागदीपनात् Dk.161. -4 drunkenness, intoxication. -5 a disease. (-जा) a daughter. (-जम्) blood, अङ्गजं रुधिरे$नङ्गे केशे पुत्रे मदे पुमान् । नागरे नखरे$पि स्यात्... । Nm. -ज्वरः [अङ्गमङ्गम् अधिकृत्य ज्वरः] the disease called राजयक्ष्मा, a sort of consumption. -दूष- णम् 1 the defects of the limbs; the penalties of a defective construction; Māna. -2 name of the 79th chapter. -द्वीपः one of the six minor Dvīpas. -न्यासः [अङ्गेषु मन्त्र- भेदस्य न्यासः] touching the limbs of the body with the hand accompanied by appropriate Mantras. -पालिः f. [अङ्गं पाल्यते सम्बध्यते$त्र, अङ्ग-पाल्-इ] an embrace (probably a corruption of अङ्कपालि). -पालिका = अङ्कपालि q. v. -प्रत्यङ्गम् [समा. द्वन्द्व] every limb, large and small; ˚गानि पाणिना स्पृष्ट्वा K.167,72. -प्रायश्चित्तम् [अङ्गस्य शुद्ध्यर्थं प्राय- श्चित्तम्] expiation of bodily impurity, such as that caused by the death of a relative, consisting in making presents (पञ्चसूनाजन्यदुरितक्षयार्थं कार्यं दानरूपं प्रायश्चित्तम् Tv.). -भूः a. [अङ्गात् मनसो वा भवति; भू-क्विप्] born from the body or mind. (-भूः) 1 a son. -2 Cupid. -3 [अङ्गानाम् अङ्गमन्त्राणां भूः स्थानम्] one who has touched and purified, and then restrained, his limbs by repeating the Mantras pertaining to those limbs; ब्रह्माङ्गभूर्ब्रह्मणि योजितात्मा Ku.3.15 (सद्योजातादिमन्त्राणाम् अङ्गानां हृदयादिमन्त्राणां भूः स्थानं, कृतमन्त्रन्यासः Malli.). -भङ्गः 1 palsy or paralysis of limbs; ˚विकल इव भूत्वा स्थास्यामि Ś.2. -2 twisting or stretching out of the limbs (as is done by a man just after he rises from sleep); साङ्गभङ्गमुत्थाय Vb.; जृम्भितैः साङ्गभङ्गैः Mu.3.21, K.85. -3 The middle part of the anus and testicles. -मन्त्रः N. of a Mantra. -मर्दः [अङ्ग मर्दयति; मृद्-णिच्] 1 one who shampoos his master's body. -2 [भावे घञ्] act of shampooing; so ˚मर्दका or ˚मर्दिन्, मृद्- णिच् ण्वुल् or णिनि) one who shampoos. -मर्षः [ष. त.] rheumatism; ˚प्रशमनम् the curing of this disease. ˚मेजयत्वम् subtle throbbing of the body; Pātañjala 1.31. -यज्ञः, -यागः [अङ्गीभूतः यज्ञः] a subordinate sacrificial act which is of 5 sorts; समिधो यजति, तनूनपातं यजति, इडो यजति, बर्हिर्यजति, स्वाहाकारं यजति इति पञ्चविधाः । एतेषां सकृदनुष्ठा- नेनैव तन्त्रन्यायेन प्रधानयागानामाग्नेयादीनामुपकारितेति मीमांसा Tv. -रक्तः, -क्तम् [अङ्गे अवयवे रक्तः] N. of a plant गुडारोचनी found in काम्पिल्य country and having red powder (रक्ताङ्गलोचनी). -रक्षकः [अङ्गं रक्षति; रक्ष्-ण्वुल्] a bodyguard, personal attendant Pt.3. -रक्षणी [अङ्ग रक्ष्यते अनया] a coat of mail, or a garment. (-णम्) protection of person. -रागः [अङ्गं रज्यते अनेन करणे घञ्] 1 a scented cosmetic, application of perfumed unguents to the body, fragrant unguent; पुष्पगन्धेन अङ्गरागेण R.12.27, 6.6, स्तनाङ्गरागात् Ku.5.11. -2 [भावे ल्युट्] act of anointing the body with unguents. -रुहम् [अङ्गे रोहति; रुह्-क स. त. P.III.9.135.] hair; मम वर्णो मणिनिभो मृदून्य- ङ्गरुहाणि च Rām.6.48.12. विहङ्गराजाङ्गरुहैरिवायतैः Śi.1.7. -लिपिः f. written character of the Aṅgas. -लेपः [अङ्गं लिप्यते अनेन; लिप्-करणे घञ्] 1 a scented cosmetic. -2 [भावे घञ्] act of anointing. -लोड्यः (लोड ण्यत्) a kind of grass, ginger or its root, Amomum Zingiber. -वस्त्रोत्था f. A louse. -विकल a. [तृ. त.] 1 maimed, paralysed. -2 fainting, swooning. -विकृतिः f. 1 change _x001F_2of bodily appearance; collapse. -2 [अङ्गस्य विकृतिश्चालनादिर्यस्मात् प. ब.] an apoplectic fit, swooning, apoplexy (अपस्मार). -विकारः a bodily defect. -विक्षेपः 1 movement of the limbs; gesticulation. -2 a kind of dance. -विद्या [अङ्गरूपा व्याकरणादिशास्त्ररूपा विद्या ज्ञानसाधनम्] 1 the science of grammar &c. contributing to knowledge. -2 the science of foretelling good or evil by the movements of limbs. Kau. A.1.12; N. of chapter 51 of Bṛhat Saṁhitā which gives full details of this science; न नक्षत्राङ्गविद्यया...भिक्षां लिप्सेत कर्हिचित् Ms.6.5. -विधिः [अङ्गस्य प्रधानोपकारिणः विधिः विधानम् [a subordinate or subsidiary act subservient to a knowledge of the principal one (प्रधान- विधिविधेयकर्मणो$ङ्गबोधकतया अङ्गविधिः). -वीरः chief or principal hero. -वैकृतम् [अङ्गेन अङ्गचेष्टया वैकृतं हृदयभावो ज्ञाप्यते यत्र बहु.] 1 a sign, gesture or expression of the face leading to a knowledge of internal thoughts (आकार) -2 a nod, wink. -3 changed bodily appearance. -वैगुण्यम् a defect or flaw in the performance of some subordinate or subsidiary act which may be expiated by thinking of Viṣṇu); श्राद्धादिपद्धतौ कर्मान्ते यत्किञ्चिदङ्गवैगुण्यं जातं तद्दोषप्रशमनाय विष्णुस्मरणमहं करिष्ये इत्यभिलापवाक्यम् Tv.). -संस्कारः, -संस्क्रिया [अङ्गं संस्क्रियते अनेन; कृ-करणे or भावे- घञ्) 1 embellishment of person, personal decoration, doing whatever secures a fine personal appearance, such as bathing, rubbing the body, perfuming it with cosmetic &c. -2 [कर्त्रर्थे अण्] one who decorates or embellishes the person. -संहतिः f. compactness, symmetry; body; स्थेयसीं दधतमङ्गसंहतिम् Ki.13.5; or strength of the body. -संहिता The phonetic relation between consonants and vowels in the body of a word Ts. Prāt. -सङ्गः bodily contact, union; coition. -सुप्तिः f. Benumbing of the body. -सेवकः a personal attendant, body-guard. -स्कन्धः [कर्मधा.] a subdivision of a science. -स्पर्शः fitness or qualification for bodily contact or being touched by others. -हानिः f. 1. a defect or flaw in the performance of a secondary or subsidiary act (= ˚वैगुण्यम्); दैवाद् भ्रमात् प्रमादाच्चेदङ्गहानिः प्रजायते । स्मरणादेव तद्विष्णोः संपूर्णं स्यादिति श्रुतिः ॥ -हारः [अङ्गं ह्रियते इतस्ततः चाल्यते यत्र, हृ-आधारे or भावे घञ्] gesticulation, movements of the limbs, a dance; अङ्गहारैस्तथैवान्या कोमलै- र्नृत्यशालिनी Rām.5.1.36. संसक्तैरगुरुवनेषु साङ्गहारम् Ki.7.37. Ku.7.91. -हारिः [अङ्गं ह्रियते$त्र; हृ-बा˚णि] 1 gesticulation. -2 stage; dancing hall. -हीन a. [तृ. त.] 1 mutilated, deprived of some defective limb (अङ्गं हीनं यथो- चितप्रमाणात् अल्पं यस्य) according to Suśruta a man is so born, if the mother's दोहद has not been duly fulfilled (सा प्राप्तदौर्हृदा पुत्रं जनयेत गुणान्वितम् । अलब्धदौर्हृदा गर्भे लभेता- त्मनि वा भयम् ॥ येषु येष्विन्द्रियार्थेषु दौर्हृदे वै विमानना । जायते तत्सुतस्यार्तिस्तस्मिंस्तस्मिंस्तथेन्द्रिये ॥).

atipātin	अतिपातिन् a. 1 Acute, running a rapid course. -2 Surpassing in speed, swifter than (in comp.); ततार विद्याः पवनातिपातिभिर्दिशो हरिद्भिर्हरिताभिवेश्वरः R.3.3. अतिपाति कार्यमिदम् । पञ्चरात्रम् 2.

atri	अत्रि a. [properly अ, Uṇ.4.68, अदेस्त्रिनिश्च, अद्-त्रिन्] Devourer; अत्रिमनु स्वराज्यमग्निभ् Rv.2.8.5. -त्रिः N. of a celebrated sage and author of many Vedic hymns. [He appears in the Vedas in hymns addressed to Agni, Indra, the Aśvins and the Viśve-devas. In the Svāyambhuva Manvantara, he appears as one of the ten Prajāpatis or mind-born sons of Brahmā, being born from his eye. These sons having died by the curse of Śiva, Brahmā performed a sacrifice, at the beginning of the present Vaivasvata Manvantara, and Atri was born from the flames of Agni. Anasūyā was his wife in both lives. In the first, she bore him three sons, Datta, Durvāsas and Soma; in the second, she had two additional children, a son by name Aryaman and a daughter called Amalā. In the Rāmāyaṇa an account is given of the visit paid by Rāma and Sītā to Atri and Anasūyā in their hermitage, when they both received them most kindly. (See Anasūyā.) As a Riṣi or sage he is one of the seven sages who were all sons of Brahmā, and represents in Astronomy one of the stars of the Great Bear situated in the north. He is also the author of a code of laws known as अत्रिस्मृति or अत्रिसंहिता. In the Purāṇas he is said to have produced the moon from his eye, while he was practising austere penance, the moon being in consequence called अत्रिज, -जात, -दृग्ज, अत्रिनेत्रप्रसूत, -˚प्रभव, ˚भव &c.; cf. also अथ नयनसमुत्थं ज्योतिरत्रेरिव द्यौः R.2.75. and अत्रेरिवेन्दुः V.5.21] - (pl.) descendants of Atri. -अत्री wife of अत्रि; अत्रिरञ्य नमस्कर्ता Mb.13.17.38. -Comp. -चतुरहः N. of a Sacrifice. -जातः 1 The moon. -2 Datta. -3 Durvāsas. -भारद्वाजिका Marriage of descendants of Atri with those of Bhāradvāja.

atha	अथ (Ved. अथा) ind. [अर्थ्-ड, पृषोद˚ रलोपः Tv.] A particle used at the beginning (of works) mostly as a sign of auspiciousness, and translated by 'here', 'now' (begins) (मङ्गल, आरम्भ, अधिकार) (Properly speaking 'auspiciousness' or मङ्गल is not the sense of अथ, but the very utterance or hearing of the word is considered to be indicative of auspiciousness, as the word is supposed to have emanated from the throat of Brahmā ओंकारश्चाथशब्दश्च द्वावेतौ ब्रह्मणः पुरा । कण्ठं भित्त्वा विनिर्यातौ तेन माङ्गलिकावुभौ ॥ and therefore we find in Śāṅkara Bhāṣya अर्थान्तरप्रयुक्तः अथशब्दः श्रुत्या मङ्गलमारचयति); अथ निर्वचनम्; अथ योगानुशासनम्; अथेदं प्रारभ्यते द्वितीयं तन्त्रम् Pt.2. (usually followed by इति at the end, इति प्रथमो$ङ्कः here ends &c.). -2 Then, afterwards (आनन्तर्य) अथ प्रजानामधिपः प्रभाते R.2.1; often as a correlative of यदि or चेत्; न चेन्मुनिकुमारो$यं अथ को$स्य व्यपदेशः Ś.7; मुहूर्तादुपरि उपाध्याय- श्चेदागच्छेत् अथ त्वं छन्दो$धीष्व P.III.3.9. Sk. -3 If, supposing, now if, in case, but if (पक्षान्तर); अथ कौतुक- मावेदयामि K.144, अथ तु वेत्सि शुचि व्रतमात्मनः पतिकुले तव दास्यमपि क्षमम् ॥ Ś.5.27; अथ मरणमवश्यमेव जन्तोः किमिति मुधा मलिनं यशः कुरुध्वे Ve.3.6. अथ गृह्णाति Ś.7; Ku.5.45; Mu.3.25; Ki.1.44; अथ चास्तमिता त्वमात्मना R.8.51 while, but, on the other hand; oft followed by ततः or तथापि, Bg.2.26;12.9,11; अथ चेत् but if Bg.2. 33;18.58. -4 And, so also, likewise (समुच्चय); गणितमथ कलां वैशिकीम् Mk.1. मातृष्वसा मातुलानि श्वश्रूरथ पितृष्वसा । संपूज्या गुरुपत्नीवत् समास्ता गुरुभार्यया ॥ Ms.2.1.31; भीमो$थार्जुनः G.M. -5 Used in asking or introducing questions (प्रश्न) oft. with the interrogative word itself; अथ सा तत्रभवती किमाख्यम्य राजर्षेः पत्नी Ś.7; अर्थवान् खलु मे राजशब्दः । अथ भगवाँल्लोकानुग्रहाय कुशली काश्यपः Ś.5; अथ शक्नोषि भोक्तुम् G. M.; अथात्रभवति कथमित्थंभूता M.5; अथ केन प्रयुक्तो$यं पापं चरति पूरुषः । Bg.3.36; अथ भवन्तमन्तरेण कीदृशो$स्या दृष्टिरागः Ś.2; अथ माडव्यं प्रति किमेवं प्रयुक्तम् Ś.6 (अथ may in these two sentences mean 'but'). -6 Totality, entirety (कार्त्स्न्य); अथ धर्मं व्याख्यास्यामः G. M. we shall explain the whole धर्म (धर्म in all its details.) Śi;7.75. -7 Doubt, uncertainty (संशय, विकल्प); शब्दो नित्यो $थानित्यः G. M. The senses of अथ usually given by lexicographers are :-अथो$थ स्यातां समुच्चये । मङ्गले संशयारम्भा- धिकारानन्तरेषु च । अन्वादेशे प्रतिज्ञायां प्रश्नसाकल्ययोरपि ॥ Some of these senses are indentical with those in (1), while some are not in general use. -Comp. -अतः -अनन्तरम् now, therefore; अथा$तो धर्मजिज्ञासा Ms.1.1.1. -अपि moreover, and again &c. (= अथ in most cases); ˚च likewise, also. -किम् what else, yes, exactly so, quite so, certainly; सर्वथा अप्सरःसंभवैषा । अथ किम् Ś.1; अपि वृषलमनुरक्ताः प्रकृतयः अथ किम् Mu.1. -किमु how much more, so much more. -तु but, on the contrary. अथ तु वेत्सि शुचि व्रतमात्मनः । Ś.5.27. -वा 1 or (used like the English disjunctive conjunction 'or' and occupying the same place); व्यवहारं परिज्ञाय वध्यः पूज्यो$थवा भवेत् H.1.55; समस्तैरथवा पृथक् Ms.7.198; अथवा-अथवा either-or; वाथ is often used in the same sense with वा; कार्तिके वाथ चैत्रे वा Pt.3.38; साम्ना दानेन भेदेन समस्तैरथवा पृथक् । विजेतुं प्रयतेतारीन्न युद्धेन कदाचन ॥ Ms.7.182; अथापि वा also used in the same sense; एतदेव व्रतं कुर्यु- श्चान्द्रायणमथापि वा 11.117;8.287. -2 or rather, or why, or perhaps, is it not so (correcting or modifying a previous statement); why should there be any thought or hesitation about it, or it is no wonder; अपि नाम कुलपतेरियमसवर्णक्षेत्रसंभवा स्यात् । अथवा कृतं सन्देहेन Ś.1.,1.16; गमिष्याम्युपहास्यताम्...अथवा कृतवाग्द्वारे वंशे$स्मिन् R.1.3-4; अथवा मृदु वस्तु हिंसितुम् R.8.45.; दीर्ये किं न सहस्रधाहमथवा रामेण किं दुष्करम् U.6.4; अधोधो गङ्गेयं पदमुपगता स्तोकमथवा । विवेकभ्रष्टानां भवति विनिपातः शतमुखः Bh.2.1.

aditi	अदिति a. [न दीयते खण्ड्यते बध्यते बृहत्त्वात्; दो-क्तिच्] Free, not tied. आदित्यासो अदितयः स्याम Rv.7.52.1. boundless, unlimited, inexhaustible; entire, unbroken; happy, pious (mostly Ved. in all these senses). -तिः [अत्ति प्राणिजातम्; अद्इतिच्] 1 Devourer i. e. death; यद्यदेवासृज तत्तदत्तुमध्रियत, सर्वं वा अत्तीति तददितेरदितित्वम् Bṛi. Ār. Up.1.2.5. -2 An epithet of God. -तिः f. [न दातुं शक्तिः] 1 Inability to give, poverty. -2 [दातुं छेत्तुम् अयोग्या] (a) The earth. (b) The goddess Aditi, mother of the Ādityas, in mythology represented as the mother of gods; see further on. (c) Freedom, security; boundlessness, immensity of space (opp. to the earth). (d) Inexhaustible abundance, perfection. (e) The lunar mansion called पुनर्वसु. (f) Speech; या प्राणेन संभवत्यदितिर्देवतामयी (शब्दादीनां अदनात् अदितिः Śaṅkara). (g) A cow. cf. ŚB. on MS. 1-3-49. (h) Milk; wife (?). -ती (dual) Heaven and earth. [अदिति literally means 'unbounded', 'the boundless Heaven', or according to others, 'the visible infinite, the endless expanse beyond the earth, beyond the clouds, beyond the sky'. According to Yāska अदिति- रदीना देवमाता, and the verse beginning with अदितिर्द्यौः &c. Rv.1.89.16. he interprets by taking अदिति to mean अदीन i. e. अनुपक्षीण, न ह्येषां क्षयो$स्ति इति. [In the Ṛigveda Aditi is frequently implored 'for blessing on children and cattle, for protection and for forgiveness'. She is called 'Devamātā' being strangely enough represented both as mother and daughter of Dakṣa. She had 8 sons; she approached the gods with 7 and cast away the 8th (Mārtaṇḍa, the sun.) In another place Aditi is addressed as 'supporter of the sky, sustainer of the earth, sovereign of this world, wife of Viṣṇu', but in the Mahābhārata, Rāmāyaṇa and Purāṇas, Viṣṇu is said to be the son of Aditi, one of the several daughters of Dakṣa and given in marriage of Kaśyapa by whom she was the mother of Viṣṇu in his dwarf incarnation, and also of Indra, and she is called mother of gods and the gods her sons, 'Aditinandanas'; See Dakṣa and Kaśyapa also]. -Comp. -जः, -नन्दनः a god, divine being.

anati	अनति ind. Not very much; compounds beginning with अनति may be analysed by referring to अति; e. g. अनतिक्रमः moderation; अनतिक्रमणीय not to be transgressed, inviolable, अनतिदृश्य opaque; अनातेद्भुत unsurpassed, real, true, proper, ब्रह्मा त इन्द्र गिर्वणः क्रियन्ते अनतिद्भुता Rv.8.9.3. अनतिव्याध्य invulnerable; अनत्यन्तगति P.V. 4.4 sense of diminutive words; अनत्यय imperishable, undecaying &c.; अनतिप्रश्न not to be asked to excess; अनतिविलम्बिता absence of delay; fluency as a speaker's qualification, one of the 35 Vāgguṇas, q. v.

anādi	अनादि a. [आदिः कारणं पूर्वकालो वा नास्ति यस्य सः] Having no beginning, eternal, existing from eternity, epithet of परमेश्वर; जगदादिरनादिस्त्वम् Ku.2.9; अनादिरादि- र्गोविन्दः सर्वकारणकारणम्; also of हिरण्यगर्भ. -Comp. -अनन्त, -अन्त a. without beginning and end; eternal. (-अन्तः) N. of Śiva. -निधन a. having neither beginning nor end, eternal. -मध्यान्त a. having no beginning, middle or end; eternal.

anāditā	अनादिता त्वम् State of having no beginning.

anādimat	अनादिमत् a. Not produced or effected, having no beginning.

anudhāvanam	अनुधावनम् 1 Going or running after, following, pursuing; तुरग ˚कण्डितसन्धेः Ś.2. -2 Close pursuit of an object (for the knowledge of truth); research, investigation. -3 Seeking a mistress, though unattainable. -4 Cleansing, purification.

anunāsika	अनुनासिक a. [अनुगतो नासिकाम्] 1 Nasal, pronounced through the nose; मुखसहितनासिकया उच्चार्यमाणो वर्णो$- नुनासिकसंज्ञः स्यात् Sk.; मुखनासिकावचनो$नुनासिकः P.I.1.8; अमो$नुनासिका न ह्रौ Śikṣā; अनुनासिक being a name for the 5 nasal consonants, the vowels or the consonants य्, व्, ल् (under certain circumstances); i. e. the letters included in the प्रत्याहार अम् except ह् and र्. -2 The sign used to mark the nasalization in the case of य्, व् or ल्. -कम् The nasal twang. -Comp. -आदिः a conjunct consonant beginning with a nasal.

anupūrva	अनुपूर्व a. [अनुगतः पूर्वं परिपाटीं क्रमं वा] 1 Regular, having a suitable measure, regularly shaped, symmetrical; वृत्तानुपूर्वे च न चातिदीर्घे Ku.1.35; ततोनुपूर्वायत- वृत्तबाहुः Ki.17.5 (गोपुच्छाकार Malli.); जङ्घे अनुपूर्ववृ Dk.131; ˚ताम्राङ्गुली बाहुलते ibid.; ˚केश who has regular hair; ˚गात्र having regularly shaped limbs; so ˚दंष्ट्र, ˚नाभि, ˚पाणि. -2 Orderly, successive, in due order or succession; coming in order, following. -3 The lowest (निकृष्टप्रमाण); अनुपूर्वा इतरे Kāty. -Comp. -ज a. descended in a regular line. -वत्सा a cow that calves regularly. अनुपूर्वशः anupūrvaśḥ पूर्वेण pūrvēṇa अनुपूर्वशः पूर्वेण adv. In regular order, one by one, successively, from above, downwards; from the beginning or first; वर्णानामनुपूर्वशः Ms.8.142;3.39,7.35.

anubandhaḥ	अनुबन्धः 1 Binding or fastening on, connection, attachment, tie (lit. & fig.); यस्यां मनश्चक्षुषोरनुबन्धस्तस्या- मृद्धिः Māl.2; एतस्येदृशेन दर्शनेन कीदृशो मे हृदयानुबन्धः इति न जानासि U.3 state of feeling; K.257. -2 Uninterrupted succession, unbroken sequence, continuous flow, continuity; series, chain; बाष्पं कुसु स्थिरतया विरतानुबन्धम् Ś.4. 15; मरण˚ K.236 following up death, desire for dying; अनुबन्धाद्विरमेद्वा K.28; यदा नात्याक्षीदेवानुबन्धम् 39 (persistence in) following me, 317; वैर˚, मत्सर˚, Dk.63,161; मुच्यतां देवि शोकानुबन्धः K.63 continuous sorrow; दुर्लभजन- प्रार्थना˚ Ratn.1; विरम विरम वह्ने मुञ्च धूमानुबन्धम् 4.16; सानु- बन्धाः कथं न स्युः संपदो मे निरापदः R.1.64 continuous, uninterrupted; परिवृद्धरीगमनुबन्धसेवया R.9.69 continuous enjoyment; अयं सो$र्थो$नर्थानुबन्धः संवृत्तः V.5 giving rise to a chain of evils. -3 Descendants, posterity; सानुबन्धा हता ह्यसि Rām. relation, भूमेः सुतां भूमिभृतो$नुबन्धात् Viś. Guṇā.475. -4 Consequence, result (good or bad); आत्मदोषानुबन्धेन K.319 in consequence of; यदग्रे चानुबन्धे च सुखम् Bg.18.39,25; अनुबन्धमजानन्तः कर्मणामविचक्षणाः Rām. 3.51.26; नार्थानां प्रकृतिं वेत्सि नानुबन्धमवेक्षसे Mb.4.49.1. -5 Intention; design, motive, cause; अनुबन्धानपेक्षेत सानु- बन्धेषु कर्मसु Mb.5.34.8. अनुबन्धं परिज्ञाय देशकालौ च तत्त्वतः । सारापराधौ चालोक्य दण्ड दण्डयेषु पातयेत् Ms.8.126; पाप˚ of evil designs. -6 An adjunct of a thing, a secondary member (मुख्यानुयायि, अप्रधानम्); (उल्का) दृश्यते सानुबन्धा च Rām.5.1.63. a secondary symptom, symptomatic affection, attendant on the principal disease (वातपित्तादि- दोषाणामप्राधान्यम्); मूर्छानुबन्धा विषमज्वराः Suśr. -7 Connecting link or adjunct of a subject or topic; theme, matter of discussion; introductory reasons; (विषयप्रयोजनाधिकारि- संबन्धः अनुबन्धः) (an indispensable element of the Vedānta). -8 (Gram.) An indicatory syllable or letter intended to denote some peculiarity in the inflection, accent &c. of the word to which it is attached; as the लृ in गम्लृ, ण् in इण्; रिपुराप पराभवाय मध्यं प्रकृति- प्रत्यययोरिवानुबन्धः Ki.13.19. -9 Offence, fault. -1 An obstacle, impediment; also the clog or encumbrance of a family; domestic ties or attachment. -11 A child or pupil who follows the example set by his parent or teacher (मुख्यानुयायी शिशुः). -12 Beginning, commencement. -13 Repeated application or devotion (पौनःपुन्येन अभिनिवेशः). -14 Course, pursuit. -15 A small bit or part, a trifle. -16 The junction of a fraction (with an integer), as भागानुबन्धपूर्णाङ्कः. -17 Base, stem (प्रकृति). cf. अनुबन्धः प्रकृत्यादौ दोषोत्पादे विनश्वरे । मुख्यानुयायिनि शिशौ प्रकृतस्यानुवर्तने । अनुबन्धे$पि हिक्कायां भ्रष्टायामपि कथ्यते । Nm. -धी [अनुबध्यते अतिश्वासेन व्याप्रियते अनया] 1 Thirst. -2 Hickup. अनुबन्धी तु हिक्कायां तृष्णायामपि योषिति-Medinī.

anusaṃdhānam	अनुसंधानम् 1 Inquiry, investigation; close inspection or scrutiny, examination; Mv.7. -2 Aiming at. H. -3 Planning, arranging, getting ready &c.; दुर्गानुसंधाने को नियुज्यताम् H.3 equipping with the necessary materials. -4 A plan, scheme. -5 Suitable connection. -6 (In the Vaiś. Phil.) The 4th step in a syllogism, the उपनय or application. अनुसंधानिन् anusandhānin संधायिन् sandhāyin अनुसंधानिन् संधायिन् a. Investigating, looking after; skilful in concerting plans.

andha	अन्ध a. 1 Blind (lit. and fig.); devoid of sight, unable to see (at particular times); दिवान्धाः प्राणिनः केचिद्रात्रावन्धास्तथापरे; D. Bhāg. made blind, blinded; स्रजमपि शिरस्यन्धः क्षिप्तां धुनोत्यहिशङ्कया Ś.7.24; मदान्धः blinded by intoxication; so दर्पान्धः, क्रोधान्धः; काम˚ लोभ˚ अज्ञान˚ अज्ञाना- न्धस्य दीपस्य ज्ञानाञ्जनशलाकया । चक्षुरुन्मीलितं येन तस्मै श्रीगुरवे नमः ॥; सहजान्धदृशः स्वदुर्नये Śi.16.29 blind to his own wicked acts. -2 Making blind, preventing the sight; utter, pitchy; complete, thick (darkness) प्रधर्षितायां वैदेह्यां बभूव सचराचरम् । जगत्सर्वममर्यादं तमसान्धेन संवृतम् ॥ Rām 3.52. 9. Ms.8.94; सीदन्नन्धे तमसि U.3.33; Māl.9.8.2; See ˚कूप, ˚तामसम् infra. -3 Afflicted. आर्यः पर्युषितं तु नाभ्य- वहरत्यन्धः क्षुधान्धो$प्यसौ Viś. Guna.11. -4 Soiled, tarnished; निःश्वासान्ध इवादर्शश्चन्द्रमा न प्रकाशते Rām.3.16.13. -न्धम् Darkness. अन्धः स्यादन्धवेलायां बाधिर्यमपि चाश्रयेत् Mb. 1.14.12. -2 Spiritual ignorance; अज्ञान or अविद्या q.v. -3 Water; also, turbid water. -धः 1 A kind of mendicant (परिव्राजक) who has completely controlled his organs; तिष्ठतो व्रजतो वापि यस्य चक्षुर्न दूरगम् । चतुष्पदां भुवं मुक्त्वा परिव्राडन्ध उच्यते ॥ -2 An epithet of the zodiacal signs at particular periods; (नष्टद्रव्यलाभालाभोपयोगयुक्तो राशिभेदः); मेषो वृषा मृगेन्द्रश्च रात्रावन्धाः प्रकीर्तिताः । नृयुक्कर्कटकन्याश्च दिवान्धाः परिकीर्तिताः ॥ -न्धाः (pl.) N. of a people; see अन्ध्र. -Comp. -अलजी a blind boil or abscess in the eyes (one that does not open or suppurate). (Ved. अलजि विसल्पस्य विद्रधस्य वातीकारस्य वालजेः Av.9.8.2.) -अहिः, -अहिकः a blind serpent, i. e. one that is not poisonous. (-हिः, -हिकः) N. of a fish (कुचिका). -कारः [अन्धं करोति] darkness (lit. and fig.); लीनं दिवाभीतमिवान्धकारम् Ku. 1.12; काम˚, मदन˚; अन्धकारतामुपयाति चक्षुः K.36 grows dim; बाष्पजलधारान्धकारितमुखी K.161,286. -कूपः [अन्धयतीत्यन्धः, अन्धः कूपः] 1 a well, the mouth of which is hidden; a well overgrown with plants &c. -2 [अन्धस्य दृष्टयभावस्य कूप इव] mental darkness, infatuation. -3 N. of a hell, to which those who tease and kill harmless creatures are condemned. -तमसम् (P.V.4. 79.) -तामसम्, -न्धातमसम् deep or complete darkness; लोकमन्धतमसात्क्रमोदितौ R.11.24; अन्धतमसमिव प्रविशामि U.7 the gloom of hell; प्रध्वंसितान्धतमसस्तत्रोदाहरणं रविः Śi.2.33. (-सा) night. -तामिस्रः, श्रः (-स्रम् also) 1 complete or deep darkness (especially of the soul); तामिस्रोष्टदशधा तथा भवत्यन्धतामिस्रः Sāṅ K.48 (भयविशेषविषयको$भिनिवेशः); तस्यामन्धतामिस्रमभ्यध्यायत् Mv.1. -2 spiritual ignorance (देहे नष्टे अहमेव नष्टः इति रूपमज्ञानम्); enveloped in utter darkness. (-स्रः, स्रम्) 1 N. of a division of Tartarus or infernal regions, the second of the 21 hells to which those who seduce the wives of others and enjoy them are condemned. According to Bhavabhūti persons committing suicide were condemned to this hell; cf. अन्धतामिस्रा ह्यसूर्या नाम ते लोकास्तेभ्यः प्रतिविधीयन्ते य आत्मघातिन इत्येवमृषयो मन्यन्ते U.4; तामिस्रमन्धतामिस्रं महारौरवरौरवौ । नरकं कालसूत्रं च महानरकमेव च ॥ Ms.4.88,197; Y.3.224; doctrine of annihilation after death. -2 Death मोहो$प्रकाशस्तामिस्रमन्धतामिस्रसंज्ञितम् । मरणं चान्धतामिस्रं तामिस्रं क्रोध उच्यते ॥ Mb.12.313.25. -धी a. mentally blind. -पूतना a demoness supposed to cause diseases in children; यो द्वेष्टि स्तनमतिसारकासहिक्काछर्दीभिर्ज्वर- सहिताभिरर्द्यमानः । दुर्वर्णः सततमधःशयो$म्लगन्धिस्तं ब्रूयुर्वरभिषजोन्ध- पूतनार्तम् Suśr. -मूषा a small covered crucible with a hole in the side. -मूषिका [अन्धं दृष्ट्यभावं मुष्णाति, मुष्-ण्वुल्] N. of a plant or grass देवताड (तत्सेवनेन चक्षुष्मत्ता भवतीति वैद्यकप्रसिद्धिः). -रात्री dark night (Ved). -वर्त्मन् m. [अन्धं सूर्यप्रकाशराहित्याद्वर्त्म यत्र] the seventh skandha or region of wind.

apakṣi	अपक्षि 1.5.9 P. To bring to an end, destroy; annihilate. -pass. To decline, decay, waste away; wane (as the moon).

apas	अपस् n. [आप् असुन् ह्रस्वश्च; आपः कर्माख्यायां ह्रस्वो नुट् च वा स्यात् Uṇ.4.27. अप्नः, अपः] 1 Work, action; अपसा सन्तु नेमे Rv.1.54.8. -2 Sacred act or rite, sacrificial work. -3 Water. -a. (अपाः) 1 Active, engaged in any act (कर्मयुक्त). -2 Got or obtained. According to B. and R. अपसः f. pl. stands in the Veda for (1) the hands and fingers busy in kindling the sacred fire and performing the sacrificial rites; (2) the three goddesses of sacred speech or the three divinities, fire, wind and sun; and (3) the active or running waters. [cf. L. opus.]

apahṛ	अपहृ 1 P. 1 (a) To take off, bear or snatch away, carry off; पश्चात्पुत्रैरपहृतभरः V.3.1 relieved of the burden; तन्त्रादचिरापहृतः पटः brought; तन्त्रादचिरापहृते P.V.2.7 Sk. (b) To avert, turn away; वदनमपहरन्तीम् (गौरीम्) Ku.7.95 averting or turning away her face. (c) To rob, plunder, steal. -2 To sever, separate, cut off; R.15.52. v. l. -3 To overpower, overcome, subdue; attract, ravish, captivate; affect, influence (in a good or bad sense); अपह्रिये खलु परिश्रमजनितया निद्रया U.1 overpowered; उत्सवा- पहृतचेतोभिः Ratn.1; यथा नापह्रियसे सुखेन K.19 seduced, led away, 277; न...प्रियतमा यतमानमपाहरत् R.9.7 did not subdue i. e. did not divert his mind. -4 To remove, take away, destroy, annihilate, deprive (one) of; कीर्तिं˚ R.11.74; प्रिया मे दत्ता वाक् पुनर्मे$पहृता Dk.52. -5 To take back, resume; देयं प्रतिश्रुतं चैव दत्त्वा नापहरेत्पुनः Y.2.176. -6 To subtract, deduct. -Caus. To cause (others) to take away; परैस्त्वदन्यः क इवापहारयेन्मनोरमाम् Ki.1.31.

api	अपि ind. (Sometimes with the अ dropped according to the opinion of Bhāguri; वष्टि भागुरिरल्लोपमवाप्योरुपसर्गयोः; पिधा, पिधान &c.) 1 (Used with roots and nouns in the sense of) Placing near or over, taking towards, uniting with; reaching or going up to, proximity, nearness &c. [cf. Gr. epi, Zend api, Germ. and Eng. be]. (Note :- अपि, as a prefix to roots, occurs mostly in Veda, its place being taken by अभि in classical literature). -2 (As a separable adverb or conjunction) And, also, too, moreover, besides, in addition, having a cumulative force (समुच्चय); अस्ति मे सोदरस्नेहो$प्येतेषु; Ś.1 on one's part, in one's turn; विष्णुशर्मणा$पि राजपुत्राः पाठिताः Pt.1; राजा$पि मुनिवाक्यमङ्गीकृत्यातिष्ठत् Dk.2; अपि-अपि or अपि च as well as, and also; अपि स्तुहि, अपि सिञ्च P.I.4.46 Sk., न नापि-न चैव, न वा$पि, नापि वा चापि neither-nor; न चापि काव्यं नवमित्यवद्यम् M.1.2 nor; वा$पि or; अल्पो$प्येवं महान् वा$पि Ms.3.53 whether small or great. -3 It is often used to express emphasis in the sense of 'too', 'even', 'very'; विधुरपि विधियोगाद् ग्रस्यते राहुणा$सौ H.1.19 the very moon; यूयमप्यनेन कर्मणा परिश्रान्ताः Ś.1 even you, you also; अन्यदपि also another; अद्यापि even, yet, still, even now; इदानीमपि even now; मुहूर्तमपि even for a moment, for one moment at least; नाद्यापि not yet; यद्यपि though, although, even if; तथापि still, यद्यपि बहु नाधीषे तथापि पठ पुत्र व्याकरणम्; nevertheless, notwithstanding, yet; sometimes यद्यपि is understood, तथा$पि only being used; as in भवादृशेषु प्रमदाजनोदितं भवत्यधिक्षेप इवानुशासनम् । तथा$पि वक्तुं व्यवसाययन्ति मां निरस्तनारीसमया दुराधयः Ki 1.28. -4 Though (oft. translatable by 'even', 'even if'); सरसिजमनुविद्धं शैवलेनापि रम्यम् Ś.1.2 though over-spread &c.; इयमधिकमनोज्ञा वल्कलेनापि तन्वी ibid. though in her bark dress; बलवदपि शिक्षितानाम् 1.2 though ever so learned. In this sense अपि is most frequently used by writers to show real or imaginary opposition (विरोध); कृष्णमपि असुदर्शनम्, पुष्पवत्यपि पवित्रा &c. -5 But however. -6 Used at the beginning of sentences अपि introduces a question; अपि सन्निहितो$त्र कुलपतिः Ś.i; अपि क्रियार्थं सुलभं समित्कुशं...अपि स्वशक्त्या तपसि प्रवर्तसे Ku.5.33,34,35; अप्यग्रणीर्मन्त्रकृतामृषीणां कुशाग्रबुद्धे कुशली गुरुस्ते R.5.4. -7 Hope, expectation (usually with the potential mood); कृतं रामसदृशं कर्म । अपि जीवेत्स ब्राह्मणशिशुः U.2 I hope the Brāhmaṇa boy comes to life. Note-- In this sense अपि is frequently used with नाम and has the sense of (a) 'is it likely', 'may it be'; (b) 'perhaps', 'in all probability' or (c) 'would that', 'I wish or hope that'; अपि नाम कुलपतेरियमसवर्णक्षेत्रसंभवा स्यात् Ś.1; Ś.7; तदपि नाम मनागवतीर्णो$सि रतिरमणबाणगोचरम् Māl.1 perhaps, in all probability; अपि नाम तयोः कल्याणिनोः अभिमतः पाणिग्रहः स्यात् ibid.; अपि नाम रामभद्रः पुनरपीदं वनमलङ्कुर्यात् U.2; 'is it likely', 'I wish'; यथा वनज्योत्स्नानुरूपेण पादपेन संगता अपि नाम एवमहमप्यात्मनो$नुरूपं वरं लभेयेति Ś.1 would that; अपि नामाहं पुरूरवा भवेयम् V.2 I wish I were P. -8 Affixed to interrogative words, अपि makes the sense indefinite, 'any', 'some'; को$पि some one; कीमपि something; कुत्रापि somewhere; कदा$पि at any time; कथमपि any how &c. के$पि एते प्रवयसः त्वां दिदृक्षवः U.4 some people. It may often be translated by 'unknown', 'indescribable', 'inexpressible' (अनिर्वाच्य); व्यतिषजति पदार्थानान्तरः को$पि हेतुः U.6.12. तत्तस्य किमपि द्रव्यं यो हि यस्य प्रियो जनः 2.19; Mu.3.22; K.143; को$पि महिमा स्यात् U.6,6.11,7.12; Māl.1.26; R.1.46. -9 After words expressing number, अपि has the sense of 'totality', 'all'; चतुर्णामपि वर्णानाम् of all the 4 castes; सर्वैरपि राज्ञां प्रयोजनम् Pt.1. -1 It sometimes expresses 'doubt' or 'uncertainty', 'fear' (शङ्का); अपि चोरो भवेत् G. M. there is perhaps a thief. -11 (with pot. mood) It has the sense of संभावना 'possibility', 'supposition'; P.I.4.96;III.3.154; अपि स्तुयाद्विष्णुम्, अपि स्तुयाद्राजानम्, अपि गिरिं शिरसा भिन्द्यात् Sk.; सो$यमपि सिञ्चेत्सहस्रं द्राक्षाणां क्षणेनैकेन Dk.127. -12 Contempt, censure, or reproof; P.I.4.96,III.3.142; धिग्देवदत्तमपि स्तुयाद् वृषलम्; धिग्जाल्मं देवदत्तमपि सिञ्चेत् पलाण्डुम्; अपि जायां त्यजसि जातु गणिका- माधत्से गर्हितमेतत् Sk. shame to &c. or fie upon, Devadatta &c. -13 It is also used with the Imperative mood to mark 'indifference on the part of the speaker', where he permits another to do as he likes, (अन्ववसर्ग or काम- चारानुज्ञा, the imperative being softened;) अपि स्तुहि Sk. you may praise (if you like); अपि स्तुह्यपि सेधा$स्मांस्तथ्यमुक्तं नराशन Bk.8.92. -14 अपि is sometimes used as a particle of exclamation, -15 Rarely in the sense of 'therefore', 'hence' (अत एव). -16 Used as a separable preposition with gen. it is said to express the sense of a word understood (पदार्थ), and is treated as a कर्म- प्रवचनीय P.I.4.96; the example usually given is सर्पि- षो$पि स्यात् where some word like बिन्दुरपि 'a drop,' 'a little' &c. has to be understood, 'there may perhaps be a drop of ghee', 'I presume there may be at least a drop' &c. अपि संभावनाप्रश्नशङ्कागर्हासमुच्चये । तथायुक्तपदार्थेषु कामचारक्रियासु च ॥ Viśva.; अपिः पदार्थसंभावनान्ववसर्गगर्हासमुच्चयेषु P.I.4.96. G. M. adds the sense of आशिस् 'blessing' (भद्रमपि), मृति 'death' (मरणमपि) and भूषा 'decoration' (अपि नह्यति हारं). cf. also...अपिः प्रश्नविरोधयोः । संभावनायां गर्हायां समुच्चयवितर्कयोः । Nm.

apiśarvara	अपिशर्वर a. Ved. Close to the night, being at the beginning (or end) of the night. -रम् Early or untimely morning, evening (or morning) time (प्रदोषमुखम्).

apāyaḥ	अपायः [इ-अच्] 1 Going away, departure. -2 Separation; ध्रुवमपाये$पादानम् P.I.4.24. (अपायो विश्लेषः Sk.); येन जातं प्रियापाये कद्वदं हंसकोकिलम् Bk.6.75. -3 Disappearance, vanishing, absence; सूर्यापाये Me.82 at the time of sunset; क्षणदापायशशाङ्कदर्शनः R.8.74 close of night; जलापाय- विपाण़्डुराणि Śi.4.5;4.54;18.1. -4 Destruction, loss, death, annihilation; करणापायविभिन्नवर्णया R.8.42 loss, 83; मालत्यपायमधिगम्य Māl.1.9 death or disappearance of M. -5 An evil, ill, misfortune, risk, calamity, danger (oft. opp. उपाय); तदपि मरणापायचकितः Bh.3.9; तदनेन पापबुद्धिनोपायश्चिन्तितो नापायः Pt.1 not the danger (resulting from the plan); उपायं चिन्तयेत्प्राज्ञस्तथापायं च चिन्तयेत् Pt.1.46; अपायसंदर्शनजां विपत्तिमुपायसंदर्शनजां च सिद्धिप् 1.61; बह्वपाये वने Pt.1 exposed to many dangers, dangerous; कायः संनिहितापायः H.4.65 exposed to dangers or calamities; सत्ये$प्यपायमपेक्षते H.4.12; Ki.14.19. -6 Loss, detriment, injury. -7 The end (of a word).

apratisaṃkhya	अप्रतिसंख्य a. Unobserved, unnoticed; ˚आख्य(ख्या)- निरोधः unobserved nullity, annihilation of an object; one of the three topics included by the Buddhas under the category of निरूप, the other two being प्रतिसंख्या- निरोध wilful destruction, as of a jar by a mallet, and आकाश the ethereal element.

abuddhiḥ	अबुद्धिः f. 1 Want of understanding (अविद्या); अबुद्धिरज्ञानकृता प्रबुद्धया कृष्यते मनः Mb.12.24.4. -2 Ignorance, stupidity; ˚मत् foolish, ignorant. a. Ignorant, dull-witted, stupid. -Comp. -पूर्व, -पूर्वक a. 1 not preceded by knowledge or consciousness; not wanton or intentional. -2 beginning with non-intelligence. (-र्वम् -र्वकम्) adv. unconsciously, ignorantly.

abhāva	अभाव a. [न. ब.] Without love or affection. कच्चिन्ना- भिहतो$भावैः शब्दादिभिरमङ्गलैः Bhāg.1.14.4. -2 Nonexistent. -वः 1 Not being or existing, non-existence; गतो भावो$भावम् Mk.1 has disappeared. -2 Absence, want, failure; सर्वेषामप्यभावे तु ब्राह्मणा रिक्थभागिनः Ms.9.188; mostly in comp.; सर्वाभावे हरेन्नृपः 189 in the absence of all, failing all; तोय˚, अन्न˚, आहार˚ &c. -3 Annihilation, death, destruction; (वचो...पथ्यमुक्तम्) राक्षसानामभावाय त्वं वा न प्रतिपद्यसे Rām.5.21.1. non-entity; नाभाव उपलब्धेः Ś B.; क्षणमात्रभवामभावकाले Śi.2.64; Ki.18.1. -4 (In phil.) Privation, non-existence, nullity or negation, supposed to be the seventh category or पदार्थ in the system of Kaṇāda. (Strictly speaking अभाव is not a separate predicament, like द्रव्य, गुण, but is only a negative arrangement of those predicaments; all nameable things being divided into positive (भाव) and negative (अभाव), the first division including द्रव्य, गुण, कर्म, सामान्य, विशेष and समवाय; and the second only one अभाव; cf. अत्र सप्तमस्याभावकथनादेव षण्णां भावत्वं प्राप्तं तेन भावत्वेन पृथगुपन्यासो न कृतः Muktā.) अभाव is defined as भावभिन्नो$भावः (प्रतियोगिज्ञानाधीनविषयत्वम्) that whose knowledge is dependent on the knowledge of its प्रतियोगी. It is of two principal kinds संसर्गाभाव and अन्योन्याभाव; the first comprising three varieties प्रागभाव, प्रध्वंसाभाव, and अत्यन्ताभाव. -Comp. -संपत्तिः f. false attribution (= अध्यास q. v.)

abhikramaḥ	अभिक्रमः 1 Beginning, attempting, an undertaking; नेहाभिक्रमनाशो$स्ति प्रत्यवायो न विद्यते Bg.2.4. -2 A determined attack or onset, assault, onslaught. -3 Ascending, mounting. अभिक्रमणम् abhikramaṇam क्रान्तिः krāntiḥ अभिक्रमणम् क्रान्तिः f. Approaching, attacking &c. = अभिक्रम above; पुण्ड्रदेश˚ Dk.92.

abhitas	अभितस् ind. (Used as an adverb or preposition with acc.) 1 Near to, to, towards; अभितस्तं पृथासूनुः स्नेहेन परितस्तरे Ki.11.8. संनद्धा निर्ययुस्तूर्णं राक्षसानभितः पुरान् Rām.7.27.22. -2 (a) Near, hard by, close by, in the proximity of; ततो राजाब्रवीद्वाक्यं सुमन्त्रमभितः स्थितम् Rām.; sometimes with gen.; निषसादाभितस्तस्य ibid. (b) Before, in the presence of; तन्वन्तमिद्धमभितो गुरुमंशुजालम् Ki. 2.59. -3 Opposite to, facing, in front of; त्रिपथगामभितः Ki.6.1,5.14. -4 On both sides; चूडाचुम्बितकङ्कपत्रमभि- तस्तूणीद्वयं पृष्ठतः U.4,2; Mv.1.18; पादपैः पुष्प- पत्राणि सृजद्भिरभितो नदीम् Rām. Ś.6.17; Bk.9.137. -5 Before and after. -6 On all sides, कीर्त्याभितः सुरभितः Dk.1; round, round about (with acc. or gen.); परिजनो यथाव्यापारं राजानमभितः स्थितः M.1; Ś.7; यस्याभितः U.6.36; everywhere; Ki.8.1. -7 Entirely, thoroughly, completely, throughout. -8 Quickly. -Comp. -अस्थि a. surrounded by bones. -भाविन् a. being all round, surrounding; P.VI.2.182. -रात्रम् Ved. near the night; just at the beginning or end.

abhimukha	अभिमुख a. (-खी f.) [अभिगतं मुखं यस्य अभेर्मुखम् P.VI.2. 185] 1 With the face turned or directed towards, in the direction of, towards, turned towards, facing; अभिमुखे मयि संहृतमीक्षितम् Ś.2.12. ˚खा शाला Sk.; गच्छन्नभिमुखो वह्नौ नाशं याति पतङ्गवत् Pt.1.237; with the acc.; राजानमेवाभि- मुखा निषेदुः; पम्पामभिमुखो ययौ Rām.; Bg.11.28; K.264; sometimes with dat., or gen. or loc.; आश्रमायाभिमुखा बभूवुः Mb.; यस्ते तिष्ठेदभिमुखे रणे Rām.; मथ्यभिमुखीभूय Dk. 124; also in comp. शकुन्तलाभिमुखो भूत्वा Ś. 1 turning towards Ś.; Ku.3.75,7.9. -2 Coming or going near, approaching, near or close at hand; अभिमुखीष्विव वाञ्छित- सुद्धिषु व्रजति निर्वृतिमेकपदे मनः V.2.9.; यौवनाभिमुखी संजज्ञे Pt.4; R.17.4. -3 Disposed or intending to, inclined to; ready for, about (to do something), in comp.; चन्द्रापीडाभिमुखहृदया K.198,233; अस्ताभिमुखे सूर्ये Mu.4.19; प्रसादाभिमुखो वेधाः प्रत्युवाच दिवौकसः Ku.2.16;5.6; U.7.4, Māl.1.13; कर्मण्यभिमुखेन स्थेयम् Dk.89; अनभिमुखः सुखानाभ् K.45; प्रातः प्रयाणाभिमुखाय तस्मै R.5.29; निद्रा चिरेण नयना- भिमुखी वभूव 5.64; sometimes as first member of comp. in this sense; फलमभिमुखपाकं राजजम्बूद्रुमस्य; V.4.27. -4 Favourable, friendly or favourably disposed; आनीय झटिति घटयति विधिरभिमतमभिमुखीभूतः Ratn.1.5. -5 Taking one's part, nearly related to. -6 With the face turned upwards. -खः Forepart (अग्र); तस्येषुपाताभिमुखं (विसृज्य) Bhāg.9.6.18. -खी One of the 1 earths according to Buddhists. -खम्, -खे ind. Towards, in the direction of, facing, in front or presence of, near to; with acc., gen. or in comp. or by itself; स दीप्त इव कालाग्निर्जज्वालाभिमुखं खगम् Rām.5.67.12. आसीताभिमुखं गुरोः Ms.2.193; तिष्ठन्मुनेरभिमुखं स विकीर्णधाम्नः Ki.2.59; Śi.13.2; Ki.6. 46; नेपथ्याभिमुखमवलोक्य Ś.1; स पुराभिमुखं प्रतस्थे Pt.3; Me. 7; कर्णं ददात्यभिमुखं मयि भाषमाणे Ś.1.3; also at the beginning of comp.; अभिमुखनिहतस्य Bh.2.112 killed in the front ranks of battle.

abhiṣyand	अभिष्यन्द् 1 A. (स् changed to ष् by P.VIII.3.72) 1 To ooze, flow, trickle; अभिस्य-ष्य-न्दते दुग्धम् Sk.; सतत- मभिष्यन्दमानमेघमेदुरितनीलिमा (गिरिः) U. 1 raining or pouring down water. -2 (fig.) To be melted (with pity, love &c.), to overflow with; यदि त्वामीदृशं रामभद्रः पश्येत् तदास्य हृदयं स्नेहेनाभिष्यन्देत U.5. अभिष्य abhiṣya (स्य sya) न्दः ndḥ अभिष्य (स्य) न्दः 1 Oozing, flowing, trickling. -2 Weakness of, or running at, the eyes. -3 Great increase, or enlargement, surplus, excess, superfluous portion; -Comp. -वमनम्; स्वर्गाभिष्यन्दवमनं कृत्वेवोपनिवेशितम् (ओषधिप्रस्थम्) Ku.6.37 by drawing off the surplus population i. e. by emigration (अभिष्यन्दः अतिरेकः अति- रिक्तजन इति यावत् तस्य वमनं निःसारणं कृत्वा स्थितमिव); cf. also R.15.29 Hemachandra's remarks thereon. also स्वदेशा- भिष्यन्दवमनम् Kau. A.2.1. अभिष्य abhiṣya (स्य sya) न्दिन् ndin अभिष्य (स्य) न्दिन् a. 1 Oozing, flowing, trickling, -2 Laxative, opening the bowels. -3 Causing defluxions or watery effusion. -Comp. -रमणम् a suburb, smaller city appended to and regarded as part of a larger one; cf. शाखानगरम्.

abhūmiḥ	अभूमिः f. 1 Non-earth, anything but earth, -2 An unfit place or object, no proper object for, beyond the reach or scope of; अभूमिरियं मालविकायाः M.3; अभूमिरियमविनयस्य Ś7; स खलु मनोरथानामप्यभूमिर्वि- सर्जनावसरसत्कारः ibid. far exceeded or transcended my (highest) expectations; Śi.1.42; Śānti.4.22. K. 45,196,24. -Comp. -ज 1 produced in a bad or improper place. -2 not produced in earth. अभूयःसंनिवृत्तिः abhūyḥsannivṛttiḥ अभूयःसंनिवृत्तिः f. No return any more i. e. absolution; त्वय्यावेशितचित्तानां त्वत्समर्पितकर्मणाम् । गतिस्त्वं वीत- रागाणामभूयःसंनिवृत्तये ॥ R.1.27.

abhyādānam	अभ्यादानम् 1 Beginning, commencement, first beginning; ओमभ्यादाने P.VIII.2.87 (˚ने = आरम्भे Sk.).

abhyudaya	अभ्युदय a. Rising. -यः 1 Rise (of heavenly bodies); sunrise. -2 Rise, prosperity, good fortune, elevation, success; स्पृशन्ति नः स्वामिनमभ्युदयाः Ratn.1 success; भवो हि लोकाभ्युदयाय तादृशाम् R.3.14; Ms.3.254; Bh. 2.63; R.12.3, V.5. -3 A festival; any religious or festive celebration, festive occasion; ˚कालः joyous or festive occasion; Ś.7; प्रतिषिद्धा पिवेद्या तु मद्यमभ्युदयेष्वपि Ms.9.84. -4 Beginning, commencement. -5 Occurrence, happening. -6 Accomplishment of a desired object (which is the cause of festivity). -7 The tonsure ceremony. -8 A Śrāddha performed on account of child-birth (वृद्धिश्राद्धम्) -Comp. -अर्थकम् Śrāddha for prosperity or elevation. -इष्टिः f. N. of a particular expiatory sacrifice.

amāya	अमाय a. 1 Not cunning or sagacious, guileless, sincere, honest. -2 Immeasurable. -या 1 Absence of fraud or deceit, honesty, sincerity. -2 (In Vedānta Phil.) Absence of delusion or error, knowledge of the supreme truth. -यम् The Supreme Spirit (ब्रह्म).

ayana	अयन a. [अय्-ल्युट्] Going (at the end of comp.); यथेमा नद्यः स्यन्दमानाः समुद्रायणाः Praśn. Up. 1 Going, moving, walking; as in रामायणम्. -2 A walk, path, way, road; आयन्नापो$यनमिच्छमानाः Rv.3.33.7. अगस्त्य- चिह्नादयनात् R.16.44. -3 A place, site, abode, place of resort; Bṛi. Up.2.4.11. ता यदस्यायनं पूर्वम् Ms. 1.1 (occurring in the derivation of the word नारायण). -4 A way of entrance, an entrance (to an array of troops or व्यूह); अयनेषु च सर्वेषु यथाभागमव- स्थिताः Bg.1.11. -5 Rotation, circulation period; अङ्गिरसां अयनम्; इष्टि˚, पशु˚. -6 A particular period in the year for the performance of particular sacrificial or other religious works; N. of certain sacrificial performances; as गवामयनम्. -7 The sun's passage, north and south of the equator. -8 (Hence) The period of this passage, half year, the time from one solstice to another; see उत्तरायण and दक्षिणायन; cf. also सायन and निरयण. -9 the equinoctial and solstitial points; दक्षिणम् अयनम् winter solstice; उत्तरम् अयनम् summer solstice; -1 Method, manner, way. -11 A Śāstra, scripture or inspired writing. -12 Final emancipation; नान्यः पन्था विद्यते$यनाय Śvet. Up. -13 A commentary; treatise. -14 The deities presiding over the ayanas. -Comp. -अंशः, -भागः the arc between the vernal equinoctial point and beginning of the fixed zodiac or first point of Aries. -कलाः The correction (in minutes) for ecliptic deviation. Sūryasiddhānta. -कालः the interval between the solstices. -ग्रहः A planet's longitude as corrected for ecliptic deviation; ibid. -जः a month caused by ayanāṁśa. -परिवृत्तिः Change of the अयन; sun's passage from one side of the equator to the other; अयनपरिवृत्ति- र्व्यस्तशब्देनोच्यते । ŚB. on MS.6.5.37. -संक्रमः, -संक्रान्तिः f. passage through the zodiac. -वृत्तम् the ecliptic.

ard	अर्द् 1 P. [अर्दति, आनार्द, आर्दीत्, अर्दितुम्, अर्दित or अर्ण] 1 To afflict, torment; strike, hurt, kill; रक्षःसहस्राणि चतुर्दशार्दीत् Bk.12.56, see caus. below. -2 to beg, request, ask; निर्गलिताम्बुगर्भं शरद्घनं नार्दति चातको$पि R. 5.17. -3 To go, to move, be agitated or moved; be scattered (as dust); आर्दन् धन्वानि सरयन्त आपः Rv.4. 17.2; fly in pieces, dissolve; श्लोणया काटमर्दति Av.12.4.3. (The past participle is usually अर्दित, but अर्ण when the root is preceded by अभि, नि, वि, सम्; cf. अर्देः संनिविभ्यः अभेश्चाविदूर्ये P.VII.2.24-5). -Caus. or 1 P. 1 (a) To afflict, torment, distress; तत एनं महावेगैरर्दयामास तोमरैः Mb.; कामार्दित, कोप˚, भय˚ &c. (b) To strike, hurt, injure, kill; येनार्दिदत् दैत्यपुरं पिनाकी Bk.2.42;9.19; 15.9. -2 To stir up, rouse, agitate, shake vehemently, make agitated or restless; अभि क्रन्द स्तनयार्दयोदधिम् Av.4.15.6. -3 To distort; अर्दयित्वानिलो वक्त्रमर्दितं जनयत्यतः Suśruta. With -अति to torment excessively, fall upon or attack; अत्यार्दीत् वालिनः पुत्रम् (v. l. अभ्यार्दीत्) Bk.15.115. -अभि to distress, afflict, pain, oppress; अभ्यर्दितो वृषलः (शीतेन पीडितः) P.VII.2.25 Sk. -नि Ved. to stream forth, flow out. -प्र to overwork, to work or exert oneself beyond measure; to cause to flow away. -प्रति to oppress or press hard in return, assail in raturn, return an attack. -वि Ved. to go or move away; to oppress, harass, pain. -caus. to cause to be scattered or dissolved, destroy, annihilate. -सम् caus. to pain greatly, wound, distress.

arvan	अर्वन् a. [ऋ-वनिप्] 1 Going, moving, running. -2 Mean, unworthy, censurable (गर्ह्य Uṇ.4.112; कुत्सित 5.54). m. (अर्वा, अर्वन्तौ, अर्वन्तः &c.) 1 A horse; चित्रध्वजपताकाग्रैरभेन्द्रस्यन्दनार्वभिः Bhāg.1.75.11; अर्वासुरान् Bṛi. Up.1.1.2. श्लथीकृतप्रग्रहमर्वतां व्रजाः Śi.12.31. -2 An epithet of a horse or its driver. -3 One of the ten horses of the moon. -4 Indra. -5 A short span (गोकर्णपरिमाण). -ती 1 A mare. -2 A bawd, procuress. -3 A nymph. -Comp. -वसुः one of the principal seven rays of the Sun. -वाहः A horseman; आगच्छन् गुरुतरगर्वमर्ववाहैः Śiva. B.24.64. and 25.9.

ādi	आदि a. 1 First, primary, primitive; निदानं त्वादिकारणम् Ak. -2 Chief, first, principal, pre-eminent; oft. at the end of comp. in this sense; see below. -3 First in time existing before. -दीः 1 Beginning, commencement (opp. अन्त); अप एव ससर्जादौ तासु बीजमवासृजत् Ms.1.8; Bg.3.41; अनादि &c.; जगदादिरनादिस्त्वम् Ku.2.9; oft. at the end of comp. and translated by 'beginning with', 'et cætera', 'and others', 'and so on' (of the same nature or kind), 'such like'; इन्द्रादयो देवाः the gods Indra and others (इन्द्रः आदिर्येषां ते); एवमादि this and the like; भ्वादयो धातवः भू and others, or words beginning with भू, are called roots; oft. used by Pāṇini to denote classes or groups of grammatical words; अदादि, दिवादि, स्वादि &c. -2 First part of portion. -3 A firstling, first-fruits. -4 Prime cause. -5 Nearness. -6 One of the seven parts of Sāma; अथ सप्तविधस्य वाचि सप्तविधं सामोपासीत यत्किंच वाचो हुमिति स हिंकारो यत्प्रेति स प्रस्तावो यदेति स आदिः Ch. Up.2.8.1. -Comp. -अन्त a. 1 having beginning and end. -2 first and last. (-तम्) beginning and end. -˚यमकम् N. of a figure in poetry. cf. Bk.1.21. ˚वत् having beginning and end, finite. ˚अन्तर्वर्तिन् a. having a beginning, end and middle; being all-in-all. -उदात्त a. having the acute accent on the first syllable. -उपान्तम् ind. from first to last. -करः, -कर्तृ, -कृत् m. the creator, an epithet of Brahmā or Viṣnu; गरीयसे ब्रह्मणो$प्यादिकर्त्रे Bg.11.37; विशेषणे द्वे य इहादिकर्तुर्वदेदधीती स हि कैयटीयः Śab. Kau. -कर्मन् n. the beginning of an action. -कविः 'the first poet', an epithet of Brahmā and of Vālmīki; the former is so called because he first produced and promulgated the Vedas; (तेने ब्रह्म हृदा य आदिकवये मुह्यन्ति यत्सूरयः Bhāg.1.1.1.) and the latter, because he was the first to show to others 'the path of poets'; when he beheld one of a pair of Krauñcha birds being killed by a fowler, he cursed the wretch, and his grief unconsciously took the form of a verse (श्लोकत्वमापद्यत यस्य शोकः); he was subsequently told by Brahmā to compose the life of Rāma, and he thus gave to the world the first poem in Sanskrit, the Rāmāyaṇa; cf. U.2. Viṣkambhaka. -काण्डम् the first book of the Rāmāyaṇa. -कारणम् the first or primary cause (of the universe), which, according to the Vedāntins, is Brahman; while, according to the Naiyāyikas and particalarly the Vaiśeṣikas, atoms are the first or material cause of the universe, and not God. -2 analysis. -3 algebra. -काव्यम् the first poem; i. e. the Rāmāyaṇa; see आदिकवि. -केशवः N. of Viṣṇu. -जिनः N. of Ṛiṣabha, the first तीर्थंकर. -तालः a sort of musical time or ताल; एक एव लघुर्यत्र आदितालः स कथ्यते. -दीपकम् N. of a figure in rhetoric (the verb standing at the beginning of the sentence). cf. Bk.1.23. -देवः 1 the first or Supreme God; पुरुषं शाश्वतं दिव्यं आदिदेव- मजं विभुम् Bg.1.12,11.38. -2 Nārāyaṇa or Viṣṇu. -3 Śiva. -4 Brahmā; Mb.12.188.2. -5 the sun. -दैत्यः an epithet of Hiraṇyakaśipu. -नाथः N. of Ādibuddha. -पर्वन् n. 'the first section or chapter', N. of the first book of the Mahābhārata. -पुराणम् the first Purāṇa, N. of the Brahma-Purāṇa. N. of a Jaina religious book. -पु (पू) रुषः 1 the first or primeval being, the lord of the creation. -2 Viṣṇu, Kṛiṣṇa, or Nārāyaṇa; ते च प्रापुरुदन्वन्तं बुबुधे चादिपूरुषः R.1.6; तमर्घ्यमर्घ्यादिकयादिपूरुषः Śi.1.14. -बलम् generative power; first vigour. -बुद्ध a. perceived in the beginning. (-द्धः) the primitive Buddha. -भव, -भूत a. produced at first. (-वः, -तः) 1 'the first-born', primeval being, an epithet of Brahmā; इत्युक्त्वादिभवो देवः Bhāg.7.3.22. -2 also N. of Viṣṇu; रसातलादादि. भवेन पुंसा R.13.8. -3 an elder brother. (-तम्) minute five elements (पञ्चमहाभूतानि); नष्टे लोके द्विपरार्धावसाने महा- भूतेष्वादिभूतं गतेषु Bhāg.1.3.25. -मूलम् first foundation, primeval cause. -योगाचार्यः 'the first teacher of devotion', an epithet of Śiva. -रसः the first of he 8 Rasas, i. e. शृङ्गार or love. -राजः the first king पृथु; an epithet of Manu. -रूपम् Symptom (of disease). -वंशः primeval race, primitive family. -वराहः 'the first boar', an epithet of Visṇu, alluding to his third or boar-incarnation. -विद्वस् m. the first learned man; कपिल. -विपुला f. N. of an Āryā metre. -वृक्षः N. of a plant (Mar. आपटा). -शक्तिः f. 1 the power of माया or illusion. -2 an epithet of Durgā. -शरीरम् 1. the primitive body. -2 ignorance. -3 the subtle body. -सर्गः the first creation.

ādika	आदिक a. (At the end of comp.) Beginning with, and so on.

āditaḥ	आदितः आदौ ind. From the first or beginning, at first; तद्दैवेनादितो हतम् U.5.2. पतीन् प्रजानामसृजन् महर्षी- नादितो दश Ms. आदौ रामतपोवनाधिगमनम्.

ādimat	आदिमत् a. Having a beginning.

ādya	आद्य a. [आदौ भवः यत्] 1 First, primitive, being at the beginning. -2 Being at the head, excellent, unparalleled, pre-eminent, foremost; योगी परं स्थानमुपैति चाद्यम् Bg.8.28;11.31;11.47;15.4. आसीन्महीक्षितामाद्यः प्रणवश्छन्दसामिव R.1.11. -3 (At the end of comp.) Beginning with, and so on; see आदि. -4 Immediately preceding; एकादशाद्यम् Śrut.27 immediately before the 11th, i. e. 1th; so संयुक्ताद्यम् 2. -5 Eatable (अद्ण्यत्); वयमाद्यस्य दातारः Praṣna Up.2.11; हितं च परिणामे यत्तदाद्यं भूतिमिच्छता Pt.4.22. -द्याः m. (pl.) A class of deities. -द्या 1 An epithet of Durgā. -2 The first day (तिथि) of a month. -द्यम् 1 The beginning. -2 Grain, food. -3 A kind of funeral obsequial ceremony (पितृश्राद्धभेद). -Comp. -कविः 'the first poet,' an epithet of Brahmā or Vālmīki; see आदिकवि. -कालिक a. Seeing only the present (वर्तमान- मात्रदर्शिन्); आद्यकालिकया बुद्ध्द्ध्या दूरे श्व इति निर्भयाः Mb.12. 321.14. -बीजम् the primary or material cause of the universe, which, according to the Sāṅkhyas, is प्रधान or the inanimate principle. -माषकः a measure of five guñjas (about. 17 1/2 grains Troy).

ādaraḥ	आदरः [आ-दृ-कप्] 1 Respect, reverence, honour; निर्माणमेव हि तदादरलालनीयम् Māl.9.5; न जातहार्देन न विद्धि- षादरः Ki.1.33; Ku.6.2. -2 Attention, care, notice, close application; आदरप्रयत्न Māl.7 careful efforts; तां प्रणामादरस्रस्तजाम्बूनदवतंसकाम् Ku.6.91. -3 (a) Eagerness, desire, regard; भूयान्दारार्थमादरः Ku.6.13; आदरादुपसर्पित- तुरंङ्गः K.119 eagerly; यत्किंचनकारितायामादरः 12; अन्वेष्टु- मादरमकरवम् 152 made up my mind; Ki.8.26,41; 13.58. (b) Earnest desire, request; Ś.6. -4 Effort, endeavour; गृहयन्त्रपताकाश्रीरपौरादरनिर्मिता Ku.6.41. -5 Commencement, beginning. -6 Love, attachment. -7 Acceptance; तस्मादेषां व्यर्थहिंसानिवृत्त्यै स्यादुत्कृष्टः पिष्टपश्वा- दरो$पि Viś. Guṇā.182.

āptiḥ	आप्तिः f. [आप्-क्तिन्] 1 Gettting obtaining, gain, acquisition; ध्यायन्ति वेदहृदया मुनयस्तदाप्त्यै Bhāg.12.8.42. मित्र˚, काम˚ &c. -2 Reaching, overtaking, meeting with; केन यजमानो मृत्योराप्तिमतिमुच्यते Bṛi. Up.3.1.3. -3 Binding, connection, relation. -4 Union; especially with a woman (Med.). -5 Fitness, aptitude, propriety. -6 Completion, fulfilment; कामस्याप्तिं जगतः प्रतिष्ठाम् Kaṭh. 1.2.11. -7 Future time. -pl. N. of 12 sacrificial verses beginning with Āpaye. Vāj.9.2.

ābālam	आबालम् ind. 1 Down to or including children; -2 Beginning with infants.

ābhyudayika	आभ्युदयिक a. (-की f.) [अभ्युदय-ठक्] 1 Tending to good, granting prosperity; अनाभ्युदयिकं श्रमणकदर्शनम् Mk.8. -2 Relating to the rise or beginning of anything; सुख˚ Ms.12.88. -3 High, exalted, important. -कम् A Śrāddha or offering to ancestors; an occasion of rejoicing.

āma	आम a. [आम्यते ईषत् पच्यते; आ अम् कर्मणि घञ् Tv.] 1 Raw, uncooked, undressed (opp. पक्व) (oft. applied to the cow in the Veda; Rv.3.3.14.); आमान्नम् Ms.4.223; Y.1.287. -2 Unripe, immature; तुदन्त्या- मत्वचं दंशा मशका मत्कुणादयः Bhāg.3.31.27. -3 Unbaked, unannealed (as a jar); आमकुम्भ इवाम्भःस्थो विशीर्णः H.4.66. -4 Undigested. -म् 1 State of being raw; शनैः शनैर्जहुः पङ्कं स्थलान्यामं च वीरुधः Bhāg.1.2.39. -2 Constipation, passing hard excretion. -3 Grain freed from chaff. -मः 1 Disease; sickness. -2 Indigestion; आहारस्य रसः सारः यो न पक्वो$ग्निलाघवात् । आमसंज्ञां स लभते महाव्याधिसमाश्रयः ॥ Suśr. -Comp. -अतिसारः dysentery or diarrhœa caused by vitiated mucus in the abdomen (the excretion being in this case mixed with hard and fetid matter). आमातिसारे नो कार्य- मादौ संग्रहणं नृणाम् Suśr. -अद् a. eating raw flesh or food; आमादः क्ष्विङ्कास्त मदन्त्वेनीः Rv.1.87.7. -अन्नम् undressed rice. -आशयः [आमस्यापक्वान्नस्याशयः] 'receptacle of undigested food', the upper part of the belly to the navel, stomach. -कुम्भः a jar of unbaked clay; H.4.66. -गन्धि n. smelling of raw meat of a burning corpse. -गन्धिकम् the smell of raw meat. -ज्वरः a kind of fever; cf. स्वेद्यमामज्वरं प्राज्ञः को$म्भसा परिषिञ्चति Śi.2.54. -त्वच् a. of tender skin. -पाकः1 a preliminary stage of the disease called dropsy. -2 A method of mellowing or ripening a tumour; Suśr.. -पात्रम् an unannealed vessel; Av.8.1.28; विनाशं व्रजति क्षिप्रमाम- पात्रमिवाम्भसि Ms.3.179. -पीनसम् running at the nose, defluxion. -पेशाः Grains pounded in a raw condition. -मांसाशिन् m. a cannibal, an eater of raw flesh. -रक्तम् dysentery. -रसः imperfect chyme. -वातः constipation, torpor of the bowels attended with flatulence and intumescence. -शूलः pain of indigestion, colic. -श्राद्धम् a Śrāddha performed with uncooked food; आपद्यनग्नौ तीर्थे च चन्द्रसूर्यग्रहे तथा । आमश्राद्धं द्विजैः कार्यं शूद्रेण च सदैव हि ॥ Prāchetasa.

ārabdha	आरब्ध p. p. Begun, commenced; आरब्धे हि सुदुष्करे$पि महतां मध्ये विरामः कुतः Subh. Ratn. -ब्धम् Beginning.

ārabdhiḥ	आरब्धिः f. Beginning, commencement.

ārabhya	आरभ्य ind. Having begun, beginning with, ever since, since, with a prepositional force (with abl.); मालत्याः प्रथमावलोकदिवसादारभ्य Māl.6.3; Ś.3; K.12,134, 196; sometimes with acc. also; प्रतिपद्दिनमारभ्य Bhāg.

ārambhaḥ	आरम्भः [आ-रभ्-घञ् मुम्] 1 Beginning, commencement; ˚उपायः plan of commencement; नृत्तारम्भे हर पशुपते- रार्द्रनागाजिनेच्छाम् Me.38. -2 An introduction. -3 (a) An act, undertaking, deed, work; आगमैः सदृशारम्भः R.1.15; Ku.7.71; V.3; Bh.2.69; R.7.31; Bg.12.16. cf. also आरम्भस्य शब्दपूर्वत्वात् । MS.11.1.1 (शबर writes आरम्भो व्यापारः क्रियेत्यनर्थान्तरम् ।). (b) Preparation; U.4. (c) A thing begun; U.4. -4 Haste, speed, velocity; चण्डारम्भः समीरः Ve.2.19. -5 Effort, exertion; Bg.14.12. -6 Scene, action; चित्रार्पितारम्भ इवावतस्थे R.2.31. -7 Pride. -8 Killing, slaughter. -9 The first act that is done. -1 The first movement or activity on the part of man; आरम्भो हि प्रथमः पदार्थः स्यात् । प्रथमं वा पुरुषस्य प्रवर्तनम् । (= प्रथमप्रवर्तन- मारम्भः औदासीन्याद् व्यावृत्तिः पुरुषस्य व्यापृतता) ŚB. on MS. 1.14. -Comp. -भाव्यत्वम् The fact of being produced through activity; कर्मणि आरम्भभाव्यत्वात् कृषिवत् प्रत्यारम्भं फलानि स्युः । MS.11.1.2. -रुचि a. Enjoying new undertakings. आरम्भरुचिता$धैर्यमसत्कार्यपरिग्रहः । Ms.12.32.

ārambhaka	आरम्भक a. [आ-रभ् ण्वुल् मुम्] undertaking, beginning.

āruh	आरुह् 1 P. 1 To ascend, mount, bestride, get upon (with acc., sometimes loc.); सिंहासनमारुरोह K.111; आरुरुह् रथादिषु Bk.14.8; आरूढकुलालचक्रमिव Mu.5.5; mounted on a potter's wheel; 7.12. -2 To ride upon, get ascendancy over, domineer over (fig.); वृषल भृत्यमिव मामारोढुमिच्छसि Mu.3; Pt.1.36. -3 To venture upon, undertake, enter upon, make; प्रतिज्ञामारोढुं पुनरपि चलत्येष चरणः Mu.3.3,27; so यौवनारूढ, योगारूढ. -4 To attain, gain, get to, reach; सौन्दर्यस्य पारमारूढा न वा Dk.88; Ki.2.13; तुलां यदारोहति दन्तवाससा Ku.5.34; आरुरोह कुमदाकरोपमाम् R.19,34. The senses of this root are modified according to the noun with which it is joined; आरूढरुषा Ku.7.67 excited to anger; तदागमारूढगुरुप्रहर्षः R. 5.61; मन्त्रिपदमारूढः Mu.6; तर्कारूढा 6.19 engaged in guessing; Ś.5.9; शीघ्रं बुद्धिमारोहति Ś. B. strikes the mind; यौवनपदवीमारूढः attained his majority; अवस्थान्तर- मारूढा M.3; संशयं पुनरारुह्य H.1.7 running a risk; संशयमारुरोह शैलः Ki.13.16. -Caus. (रोह-प-यति) 1 To cause to go up or ascend, raise up, elevate; अमात्यो$- स्मान्पुरातनीमवस्थामारोपयिष्यति Mu.2 will raise or elevate; शूलानारोपयेत् Y.2.273; आरोपिता मनोविषयमात्मनः Ku.6.17. -2 To cause to mount or sit (on oneself) (Ātm.); करेणुरारोहयते निषादिनम् Śi.12.5. -3 To cause to grow, plant (lit). -4 To establish, instal, seat (fig.); राज्ये चारोपिता वयम् Mu.7.18; इत्यारोपितपुत्रास्ते R.15.91. -5 To cause, produce, bring out; उष्माणम् K.15; प्रणयम् 134,142; आरोपितप्रीतिरभूत् 173,212; प्रतापमारोपयितुम् 11, 119 show or exhibit. -6 To place, fix, direct; अङ्कमा- रोप्य placing in the lap; R.3.26,14.27; Ku.1.37; चक्षुः˚ cast a look at; Pt.1.243; आशीर्वादमारोपयन्तः Ki.18.46 conferring or pronouncing; आभरणभारमङ्गेषु नारोपयन्ति K.23 put or wear; पत्रे आरोपितं कुरु Ś.6. commit to paper; आरोप्यते शिला शैले H.2.46. -7 To entrust to, appoint to, charge with; मन्त्रिणि राज्यभार- मारोप्य K.57; अमात्यपदे आरोपितः Pt.1. -8 To cause to go to or attain a particular state; करतलं कर्णपूरता- मारोपितम् K.6; आरोपय गरीयस्त्वम् 27 raise to greatness 315; Dk.118. -9 To ascribe, attribute, impute; आत्मन्या- रोपिताभिमानाः K.18,185; छाया हि भूमेः शशिनो मलत्वेनारो- पिता शुद्धिमतः प्रजाभिः R.14.4. -1 To string (as a bow); धनुरारोपयन् U.4; तं देशमारोपितपुष्पचापे Ku.3.35; Bk.14.8.

ārdha	आर्ध a. (Only used at the beginning of comp.) Half. -Comp. -धातुक a. (-की f.) (In gram.) applicable to half the root or to the shorter form of the verbal base. (-कम्) a name given to those terminations and affixes which belong to the six non-conjugational or general tenses (opp. सार्व. धातुक); cf. P.III.4.114,I.1.4; II.4,35;VII.2.35 &c. -नारीश्वरम् The story of the lord Śiva in his form as अर्धनारीश्वर. -प्रस्थिक, -कंसिक a. (-की f.) bought with half a Prastha or Kaṁsa. -मासिक a. (-की f.) lasting for half a month, observing or practising (penance &c.) for a fortnight. -रात्रिकाः (pl.) N. of an astronomical school who reckoned the beginning of the motions of the planets from midnight.

āvid	आविद् a. Ved. 1 Knowledge. -2 A technical name of the Vedic formulas (in Vāj.1.9.) beginning with आविस् and आवित्त.

āvarjanam	आवर्जनम् 1 Bending down &c. -2 Giving. -3 Winning over; Dk.139,172.

āśu	आशु a. [अश्-व्याप्तौ उण्] Fast, quick -शुः Ved. 1 'The quick one', a horse. -2 Rice (ripening quickly in the rainy season). -शु ind. Fast, quickly, immediately, directly; Bg.2.65; वर्त्म भानोस्त्यजाशु Me.41,22. [cf. L. acu; Gr. okus.] -Comp. -आपस् a. obtaining quickly. -कारिन्, -कृत् a. 1 doing anything quickly, smart, active. -2 operating quickly (as a medicine). -कोपिन् a. irascible, irritable. -क्रिया quick operation of a medicine. -ग a. swift, quick. (-गः) 1 the wind. -2 the sun. -3 an arrow; पपावनास्वादितपूर्वमा- शुगः R.3.54,11.83,12.91 -गामिन् a. going quickly. m. the sun. -तोष a. easily appeased or pleased. (--षः) an epithet of Śiva. -पत्री a tree which yields frankincense (शल्लकीलता). -पत्वन् a. flying quickly. -फलः A kind of weapon. -बोध a. teaching quickly, N. of a treatise of grammar. -या a. going quickly. -ind. quickly. -व्रीहिः rice ripening in the rainy season. -षेण a. Ved. having swift arrows. नम आशुषेणाय चाशुरथाय च Rudra. -संधेय a. Easy to be joined together or reconciled. -हेमन् a. running on quickly, urging the horses. -हेषस् a. Ved. quickly neighing; having quick horses, quickly praised; (शीघ्रशब्दायमान) N. of the Aśvins.

āsravaḥ	आस्रवः [आस्रू-अप्] 1 Pain, affliction, distress. -2 Flowing, running. -3 Discharge, emission. -4 Fault, transgressing. -5 The foam on boiling rice. -6 (With Jainas) The impulse called योग or attention which the soul participates in the movement of its various bodies; it is defined as the 'action of the senses which impels the soul towards external objects'; it is good or evil according as it is directed towards good or evil objects.

āsrāva	आस्राव a. Flowing, running. -वः 1 A wound; कण्टको ह्यपि दुच्छिन्न आस्रावं जनयेच्चिरम् Mb.1.14.9. -2 Flow, issue, discharge. -3 Spittle, saliva. -4 Pain, affliction. -5 A disease of the body; तदास्रावस्य भेषजं तदु रोगमनीनशत् Av.2.3.3. -Comp. -भेषजम् medicament, medicine; श्रेष्ठमास्रावभेषजम् Av.6.44.2.

iti	इति ind. 1 this particle is most generally used to report the very words spoken or supposed to be spoken by some one, as represented by quotation marks in English. The speech reported may be (1) a single word used merely to express what the form of the word is, when it is used as it is (शब्दस्वरूपद्योतक); कूजन्तं रामरामेति मधुरं मधुराक्षरम् Rāmarakṣā. अत एव गवित्याह Bhartṛi.; (2) or a substantive, which must be put in the nominative case when its meaning is to be indicated (प्रतिपदिकार्थद्योतक); चयस्त्विषामित्यवधारितं पुरा ... क्रमादमुं नारद इत्यबोधि सः Śi.1.3.; अवैमि चैनामनघेति R.14.4; दिलीप इति राजेन्दुः R.1.12; sometimes with acc. कैवर्तमिति यं प्राहुः Ms.1.34.; Bg.6.2; (3) or a whole sentence when इति is merely used at the end of that sentence; (वाक्यार्थद्योतक); ज्ञास्यसि कियद् भुजो मे रक्षति भौंर्वीकिणाङ्क इति Ś.1.13; तयोर्मुनिकुमारयोरन्यतरः कथयति अक्षमालामुपयचितुमागतो- स्मीति K.151. -2 Besides this general sense इति has the following senses:-(a) Cause, as expressed by 'because', 'since', 'on the ground that', in English; वैदेशिको$स्मीति पृच्छामि U.; पुराणमित्येव न साधु सर्वम् M.1.2, oft. with किम् q. v. (b) Purpose or motive, as expressed by 'that', 'in order that' शरीरस्य विनाशो मा भूदिति मयेदमु- त्क्षिप्य समानीतम् K.32; R.1.37. (c) Thus, to mark the conclusion (opp. अथ); इति प्रथमो$ङ्कः thus or here ends the first Act. (d) It is often used to include under one head a number of separate objects grouped together; पृथिव्यापस्तेजो वायुराकाशं कालो दिगात्मा मन इति द्रव्याणि T. S. (e) So, thus, in this manner; इत्युक्तवन्तं परिरभ्य दोर्भ्याम् Ki.11.8. (f) Of this nature or description; गौरश्वः पुरुषो हस्तीति जातिः. (g) As follows, to the following effect; रामाभिधानो हरिरित्युवाच R.13.1. (h) As for, in the capacity of, as regards, showing capacity or relation; पितेति स पूज्यः, अध्यापक इति निन्द्यः, शीघ्रमिति सुकरं, निभृतमिति चिन्तनीयं भवेत् Ś.3. (i) It is often used with the name of an author to form an Avyayibhāva comp. इतिपाणिनि thus according to Pāṇini. (j) Illustration (usually with आदि); इन्दुरिन्दुरिव श्रीमानित्यादौ तदनन्वयः Chandr.; गौः शुश्चलो डित्थ इत्यादौ K. P.2. (k) A quotation or an opinion accepted; इति पाणिनिः, इत्यापिशलिः, इत्यमरः, विश्वः &c. (l) It is often used by commentators after quoting a rule in the sense of 'according to such a rule'; शकि लिङ् च (P.III.3.172) इति शक्यार्थे लिङ् Malli. Other senses mentioned are:- (m) Manifestation. (n) Order. (o) Arrangement. (p) Identity. (q) Proximity. (r) Visibility. (s) Excess or superiority. (t) Requiring. (इति स्वरूपे सान्निध्ये विवक्षानियमे मते । हेतौ प्रकार- प्रत्यक्षप्रकाशेप्यवधारणे, एकमर्थे समाप्तौ च ॥ Hem.). -Comp. -अर्थः sum and substance, meaning in short (often) used by commentators). -अर्थम् ind. for this purpose, hence. -आदि a. having such a thing or things at the beginning, so forth, et cætera (&c.). इत्यादिप्रचुराः पुरातन- कथाः सर्वेभ्य एवं श्रुताः Udb. -उक्तम् information, report. -कथ a. 1 not fit to be believed, untrustworthy. -2 wicked, lost. (-था) a meaningless or nonsensical talk. -कर्तव्य, -करणीय, -कार्य, -कृत्य a. proper or necessary to be done according to certain rules. (-कर्तव्यम्, -णीयम्) duty, obligation; श्रूयतामितिकर्तव्यं सर्वानेव ब्रवीमि वः Rām.2.68.5. एवं सर्वं विधायेदमितिकर्तव्यमात्मनः Ms.7.14 2. संसिद्धावितिकरणीयसंनिबद्धैरालापैः Ki.7.17. ˚ता, -कार्यता, -कृत्यता any proper or necessary duty, obligation; स मुहूर्तमिव घ्यात्वा विनिश्चित्येतिकृत्यताम् Mb.3.36.4. इति- कर्तव्यतामूढः wholly at a loss what to do, embarrassed, perplexed. -पाणिनि ind. Thus according to Pāṇini's very words. -मात्र a. of such extent or quality. -वृत्तम् 1 occurrence, event. -2 a tale, story.

id	इद् ind. 1 A particle of affirmation, even, just, only; यथा वशन्ति देवास्तथेदसद् Rv.8.28.4. especially in strengthening a statement; अर्थज्ञ इत्सकलं भद्रमश्नुते Nir. -2 It is often added to words expressing excess or exclusion; विश्व इत् एक इत् &c. -3 At the beginning of sentences it often adds emphasis to pronouns, prepositions &c. (its place is taken by एव in classical Sanskrit.

īm	ईम् ind. [ई-बा˚ मुच्] Ved. 1 A particle of affirmation or restriction; usually after short words at the beginning of a sentence, after यत्, relative pronouns prepositions and particles like उत, अथ &c.; प्र यदीमुवाचेति Bṛi. Up.2.5.16. -2 Now. -3 This, here (एनम्).

ujji	उज्जि 1 P. 1 To win, acquire by conquest, conquer. -2 To be victorious, triumph. -Caus. (जापयति) 1 To cause to conquer. -2 To help one in winning.

uṇādiḥ	उणादिः A class of terminations beginning with उण्. m. pl. The class of कृत् affixes which begin with उण्. -Comp. -सूत्राणि The सूत्रs (Pāṇini iii. 3,I.4.75) treating of the उणादि affixes. ˚वृत्ति f. a commentary on the उणादि Sūtras.

uta	उत ind. 1 A particle expressing (a) doubt, uncertainty, guess (or); तत्किमयमातपदोषः स्यादुत यथा मे मनसि वर्तते Ś.3; स्थाणुरयमुत पुरुषः G. M. वीरो रसः किमयमित्युत दर्प एषः Veeracharitam. (b) alternative; usually a correlative of किं (whether, or); किमिदं गुरुभिरुपदिष्टमुत धर्मशास्त्रेषु पठितमुत मोक्षप्राप्तियुक्तिरियम् K.155; किं येन सृजसि व्यक्तमुत येन बिभर्षि तत् Ku.6.23; the place of उत is also taken by आहो or आहोस्वित्; sometimes आहो, आहोस्वित् or स्वित् are joined to उत. (c) association, connection, (having a cumulative force, 'and', 'also'); उत बलवानुताबलः; (d) interrogation; उत दण्डः पतिष्यति; (e) deliberation; (f) intensity; (g) wishing (especially at the beginning of a sentence followed by a potential 'would that'); (h) sometimes used as an expletive; (i) oft. used for the sake of emphasis especially at the end of a line after इति or a verb; तदा विद्याद्विवृद्धं सत्त्वमित्युत Bg.14.11; धर्मे नष्टे कुलं कृत्स्नमधर्मो$भिभवत्युत 1.4. -2 With a preceding प्रति = on the contrary, on the other hand; but; सामवादाः सकोपस्य तस्य प्रत्युत दीपकाः Śi.2.55; न केवलं ध्रियते प्रत्युत पर्युपास्यमानस्तिष्ठति Nāg.5. -3 With a preceding किं = how much more or how much less; see किम्. उत, -उत Either-or; एकमेव वरं पुंसामुत राज्यमुताश्रमः G. M. उत वा or else, and; वा-उतवा, उताहोवा पि-वा either-or; -आहो, -आहोस्वित् Used for the sake of emphasis; उताहो हत- वीर्यास्ते बभूवुः पृथिवीक्षितः Rām.7.31.4. शालिहोत्रः किं नु स्याद् उताहोस्विद् राजा नलः.

utkhāta	उत्खात p. p. 1 Excavated, dug up. उत्खातं निधिशङ्कया क्षितितलं ध्माता गिरेर्धातवः Bh.3.4. -2 Extracted, drawn out; उत्खातं परित्यागशल्यम् U.3. -3 Uprooted, plucked up by the roots (lit.); लीला˚ uprooted in sport U.3. 16; Māl.9.34. -4 (fig.) (a) Eradicated, totally destroyed, annihilated; किमुत्खातं नन्दवंशस्य Mu.1; ˚लवणो मधुरेश्वरः प्राप्तः U.7. (b) Deposed, deprived of power or authority; फलैः संवर्धयामासुरुत्खातप्रतिरोपिताः R.4.37 (where उत्खात means 'uprooted' also). -तम् A hole, cavity, hollow, uneven ground; अनुत्खातस्तिमित not stopped by uneven ground; Ś.7.33. -Comp. -केलिः f. digging out earth in sport (by means of horns, tusks &c.); उत्खात- केलिः शृङ्गाद्यैर्वप्रक्रीडा निगद्यते.

utsad	उत्सद् 1 P. 1 To sink (fig. also), fall into ruin or decay; उत्सीदेयुरिमे लोकाः Bg.3.24. -2 To leave off, quit. -3 To rise up. -Caus. 1 To destroy, annihilate, bring to ruin; उत्साद्यन्ते जातिधर्माः Bg.1.43; Ms.9.267. -2 To overturn, upset (pots &c.) -3 To rub in, anoint (as with oil, perfumes &c.); गौरसर्षपकल्केन साज्येनोत्सादितस्य च Y.1.277.

utsavaḥ	उत्सवः [उद्-सू-अप्] 1 A festival, joyous or festive occasion, jubilee; रत˚ Ś.6.2; ताण्डव˚ festive or joyous dance. U.3.18 (v. l.); Ms.3.59. -2 Joy, merriment, delight, pleasure; स कृत्वा विरतोत्सवान् R.4.78,16.1; Mv.3.41; Ratn.1.23; Śi.2.61; पराभवोप्युत्सव एव मानिनाम् Ki.1.41. -3 Height, elevation. -4 Wrath, -5 Wish, rising of a wish. तावुभौ नरशार्दूलौ त्वद्दर्शनकृतोत्सवौ Rām.5.35.23. -6 A section of a book. -7 Enterprise. -8 An undertaking, beginning. -Comp. -उदयम् The height of the vehicle animal in comparison with that of the principal idol; मूलबेरवशं मानमुत्सवोदयमीरितम् (Māna-sāra.64.91-93). -विग्रहः Image for procession (Kondividu Inscription of Kriṣṇarāya). -सङ्केताः (m. pl.) N. of a people, a wild tribe of the Himālaya; शरैरुत्सवसङ्केतान् स कृत्वा विरतोत्सवान् R.4.78.

udānaḥ	उदानः [अन्-घञ्] 1 Breathing upwards. -2 Breathing, breath in general. -3 One of the five vital airs or life-winds which rises up the throat and enters into the head); the other four being प्राण, अपान, समान and व्यान; स्पन्दयत्यधरं वक्त्रं गात्रनेत्रप्रकोपनः । उद्वेजयति मर्माणि उदानो नाम मारुतः ॥ -4 (With Buddhists) An expression of praise or joy. -5 The navel. -6 An eye-lash. -7 A kind of snake. 2. उदन् n. [उन्द्-कनिन् P.VI.1.63] Water (usually occurring in compounds either at the beginning or at the end, and as an optional substitute for उदक after the acc. dual. It has no forms for the first five inflections. In comp. it drops its न्); e. g. उदधि, अच्छोद, क्षीरोद &c. -Comp. -आशयः A lake, tank; शरदुदाशये साधुजातसत्सरसिजोदरश्रीमुषा दृशा Bhāg.1.31.2. -ओदनः water-meal. -कीर्णः-र्यः N. of a tree (महाकरंज) the bark of which is rubbed and thrown in water to stun the fishes). -कुम्भः a water-jar; Ms.2.182,3.68. तपःकृशः शान्त्युदकुम्भहस्तः Bk. -ग्राभः Holding water, a cloud (Ved.) उदग्राभस्य नमयन् वधस्नैः Rv.9.97.15. -कोष्ठः A water-jar. -ज a. aquatic, watery, produced in or by water. -जम् A lotus; एतद्धृषीकचषकैरसकृत्पिबामः शर्वादयो$ङजमध्वमृतासवंध्ऱ्यु ते Bhāg.1.14.33. -धानः [उदकं धीयते अत्र] 1 a water-jar. -2 a cloud. -धिः [उदकानि धीयन्ते$त्र धा-कि उदादेशः] 1 the receptacle of waters, ocean; उदधेरिव निम्नगाशतेष्वभवन्नास्य विमानना क्वचित् R.8.8. -2 a cloud. -3 a lake, any large reservoir of water. -4 a water-jar. -5 a symbolical expression for the number 4 or 7. ˚कन्या, तनया, सुता Lakṣmī, the daughter of the ocean (produced from the ocean among the 14 jewels). ˚क्रमः, -क्राः m. a voyager, mariner. ˚मलः 1 cuttle-fish-bone. -2 the foam of the ocean. ˚मेखला or ˚वस्त्रा the earth (girdled by the ocean, sea-girt). ˚राजः the king of waters, i. e. the chief ocean. ˚संभवम् sea-salt. ˚सुता N. of Lakṣmī; and of Dvārakā, the capital of Kṛiṣṇa (said to have been reclaimed from the ocean). -नेमि a. Rimmed by the ocean. -प a. crossing the water (as a boat). -पात्रम्, -त्री a water-jug, vessel; Ms.3.96. -पानः, -नम् a small pool or pond near a well, or the well itself; K.5. यावानर्थ उदपाने सर्वतः संप्लुतोदके Bg.2.46. ˚मण्डूकः (lit.) a frog in a well; (fig.) one who has had no experience of the world at large, a man of limited ideas who knows only his own neighbourhood; cf. कूपमण्डूक. -पीतिः f. A place for drinking water. -पेषम् a paste, anything ground with water. (-पम्) ind. P.III.4.38 and P.VI.3.28. by grinding in water. -प्रुत् a. Ved. causing water to flow; swimming or splashing in water (?). -प्लवः Waterflood (जलप्रलय); Bhāg 12.4.13. (v. l. for उपप्लव). -प्लुत a. swimming in water. उदप्लुतमिव दार्वहीनाम् Av.1.4.3. -बिन्दुः a drop of water; (प्रपेदिरे) चिरेण नाभि प्रथमोद- बिन्दवः Ku.5.24. -भारः 1 a water-carrier, i. e. a cloud. -2 Water current (पूर); यमस्वसुश्चित्र इवोदभारः (रराज) Śi.3.11. -मन्थः barley-water; a particular mixture; Mb.13.64.26. -मानः, -नम् a fiftieth part of an आढक q. v. -मेघः 1 a watery cloud. -2 a shower of rain; तुग्रो ह भुज्युमश्विनोदमेघे Rv.1.116.3. -मेहिन् a. Having watery urine or diabetes. -लाव- णिक a. salted, prepared with brine, briny. -वज्रः 1 a thunder shower; water-spout. -2 thunderbolt in the form of water; भिन्दानो हृदयमसाहि नोदवज्रः Śi.8.39. -वाप one who offers waters to the manes. -वासः standing or residence in water; सहस्यरात्रीरुदवासतत्परा Ku.5.26. (-सम्) a house on the borders of a stream or pond. -वासिन् a. standing in water; K.23. -वाह a. bringing water; दिवा चित् तमः कृण्वन्ति पर्जन्येनोदवाहेन Rv.1.38.9. (-हः) a cloud. -वाहनम् 1 a water-vessel. -2 A cloud. -वावधः a yoke for carrying water. -शरावः a jar filled with water; उदशराव आत्मानवेक्ष्य. -शुद्धः a water-jar. -श्वित् n. [उदकन जलेन श्वयति] butter-milk containing fifty per cent water; (i. e. 2 parts of butter-milk and 1 part of water); श्रेयस्तैलं हि पिण्याकाद् घृतं श्रेय उदश्वितः Mb.12.167.35. -स्थानम् 1 a place full of water. -4 residence in water. -स्थाली a kettle, vessel for holding water. -हरणः a vessel for drawing water. -हार a. fetching or carrying water. (-रः) a cloud (watercarrier).

udārahaṇam	उदारहणम् 1 Relating, declaration, saying, utterance. -2 Narration, recital, opening a conversation; अथा- ङ्गिरसमग्रण्यमुदाहरणवस्तुपु Ku.6.65; अद्भुतोदाहरणानि Mv.5 stories or narrations. -3 A declaratory song or poem, a sort of panegyric beginning with words like जयति and full of alliteration; पत्रे निवेशितमुदाहरणं प्रियायाः V.2.14; चारणेभ्यस्त्वदीयं जयोदाहरणं श्रुत्वा V.1; जयोदाहरणं बाह्वोर्गापयामास किन्नरान् R.4.78; (येन केनापि तालेन गद्यपद्यसमन्वितम् । जयत्युप- क्रमं मालिन्यादिप्रासविचित्रितम् ॥ तदुदाहरणं नाम विभक्त्यष्टाङ्गसंयुतम् । Pratāparudra.) -4 An instance, example, illustration; समूलघातमव्नन्तः परान्नोद्यन्ति मानिनः । प्रध्वंसितान्धतमसस्त- त्रोदाहरणं रविः ॥ Śi.2.33. किमुदाहरणम् Kāśi. पुराणमितिवृत्ता- ख्यायिकोदाहरणम् ...। Kau. A.1.5. -5 (In Nyāya) The third member of an Indian syllogism (which has five members). -6 Beginning, commencement, introduction. -7 Exhibition, illustration; U.1. -8 (In Rhet.) An illustration reckoned as a figure of speech by some rhetoricians. It resembles अर्थान्तरन्यास; e. g. अमितगुणो$पि वदार्थो दोषेणैकेन निन्दितो भवति । निखिलरसायनराजो गन्धेनोग्रेण लशुन इव ॥ R. G. (For a clear distinction between the two figures see R. G., under उदाहरण).

udāhāraḥ	उदाहारः 1 An example or illustration. -2 The beginning of a speech.

udaya	उदय a. (In gram.) Following, coming after or upon (as a letter, accent &c.); उदयशब्दः परशब्दसमानार्थः प्रातिशाख्येषु प्रसिद्धः. -यः 1 Rise (fig. also); चन्द्रोदय इवोदधेः R.12.36,2.73; going upwards, ascending (as of the sun, stars &c.). -2 (a) Rising up, coming forth; द्रविण˚ acquisition of wealth; Pt.2; so भाग्य˚ dawn of fortune; Amaru.25; स्वगुणोदयेन Pt.1.94. (b) Appearance, becoming visible, production; घनोदयः प्राक् Ś.7.3; मेघ˚ Ku.6.54; हसितमन्यनिमित्तकृतोदयम् Ś.2.12 raised from some other cause; Amaru.88; Ś.7.8; फलोदय R.1.5; rising or accomplishment of the fruit; Ms.3.169; K.3.18. -3 Creation (opp. प्रलय); यः सिन्धूनामुपोदये Rv.8.41.2. यौ तौ स्वप्नावबोधौ तौ भूतानां प्रलयो- दयौ Ku.2.8. -4 The eastern mountain (behind which the sun is supposed to rise); ददर्श पिङ्गाधिपतेरमात्यं वाता- त्मजं सूर्यमिवोदयस्थम् Rām.5.31.18. यौर्यत्र दृश्यते भास्वान्स तेषामुदयः स्मृतः; उदयगूढशशाङ्कमरीचिभिः V.3.6. -5 Advance- ment, prosperity, rise; (opp. व्यसन), तेजोद्वयस्य युगपद्- व्यसनोदयाभ्याम् Ś.4.2; उदये मदावाच्यमुञ्झता R.8.84; K.5; importance, celebrity; ˚उन्मुखे त्वयि R.11.73. -6 Elevation, exaltation, rise; growth; उदयमस्तमयं च रघू- द्वहात् R.9.9; तमुदयाय नवा नवयौवना 7; आत्मोदयः परग्लानिः Śi 2.3,11.6. -7 Result, consequence; असुखोदयं कर्म Ms.4.7; Amaru.47; following; नोदात्तस्वरितोदयम् P.VIII.4.67. -8 Accomplishment, fulfilment; उपस्थितो- दयम् R.3.1; प्रारम्भसदृशोदयः 1.15. -9 Profit, advantage. -1 Income, revenue; Ms.7.55; Y.2.43. -11 Interest, consideration paid for the use of money; Y.2.67,146. -12 Light, splendour. -13 Outlet, exit. -14 Beginning; अभिगम्योदयं तस्य कार्यस्य प्रत्यवेदयत् Mb.3.282.22. -15 Efficacy, influence; पर्याप्तः परवीरघ्न यशस्यस्ते बलोदयः Rām. 5.56.11. -16 Birthday celebration; हस्ते गृहीत्वा सहराम- मच्युतं नीत्वा स्ववाटं कृतवत्यथोदयम् Bhāg.1.11.2. -17 The first lunar mansion; the orient sine. -Comp. -अचलः, -अद्रिः, -गिरिः, -पर्वतः, -शैलः the eastern mountain behind which the sun, moon &c are supposed to rise; उदयगिरिवनालीबालमन्दारपुष्पम् Udb.; श्रितोदयाद्रेरभिसा- यमुच्चकैः Śi.1.16; तत उदयगिरेरिवैक एव Māl.2.1. -इन्दुः The town इन्द्रप्रस्थ; पुरे कुरूणामुदयेन्दुनाम्नि Mb.7.23.29. -उन्मुख a. About to rise, expecting prosperity. -क्रमः Gradual rise; नाडीनाम् Māl.5.2. by gradually inflating or filling with wind the Nādīs, (as in the act of restraining the wind). -ज्या f. See उदय (17). -पुरम् N. of the capital of Mārwār. -प्रस्थः the plateau of the mountain behind which the sun is supposed to rise. -प्राणः (pl.) A particular measure of time. -राशिः The constellation in which the planet is seen when on the horizon.

udghātaḥ	उद्घातः 1 P.VII.3.54. Beginning, commencement; उद्घातः प्रणवो यासाम् Ku.2.12; आकुमारकथोद्घातं शालिगोप्यो जगुर्यशः R.4.2. -2 Allusion, reference; कथोद्घाताः U.2. -3 Striking, wounding, inflicting an injury. -4 A stroke, blow, wound. -5 Tripping, slipping, jolting, shaking (as of a carriage); ययावनुद्घातसुखेन सो$ध्वना Śi.12.2; R.2.72; Ve.2.28; चक्र˚ V.1; U.5.1. v. l. -6 Rising, elevation. -7 A club, mallet. -8 A weapon (in general). -9 Breathing through the nostrils as a religious exercise (Wilson). -1 A division of a book, chapter; section.

uddrāva	उद्द्राव a. Running away; स्वाहोद्द्रावाय Vāj.22.8. -वः Flight, retreat; P.III.3.49.

udrekaḥ	उद्रेकः 1 Increase, excess, preponderance, abundance; ज्ञानोद्रेकाद्विघटिततमोग्रन्थयः सत्त्वनिष्ठाः Ve.1.23; गत्वोद्रेकं जघनपुलिने Śi.7.74; so मोह˚, धन˚, मद˚; सुकृतोद्रेकः Bh.3.87. -2 Commencement, outset. -3 Prosperity (ऐश्वर्य); Mb.12.313.17. -का The plant (महानिंब). -Comp. -भङ्गः discouraging a thing at the very beginning.

udvījanam	उद्वीजनम् Fanning.

unnidra	उन्निद्र a. [उद्गता निद्रा यस्य] 1 Sleepless, awake, without one wink of sleep; तामुन्निद्रामवनिशयनां सौधवाताय- नस्थः Me.9; विगमयत्युन्निद्र एव क्षपाः Ś.6.5; Mu.4.2; Māl.3. -2 Expanded, full-blown, budded (as lotuses); ˚अरविन्दम् K.22; उन्निद्रपुष्पाक्षिसहस्रभाजा Śi.4.13,31;8.28. -3 Shining (as the moon). -4 Bristling (as hair). उन्निद्रकम् unnidrakam उन्निद्रता unnidratā उन्निद्रकम् उन्निद्रता f. Sleeplessness.

upa	उप ind. 1 As a prefix to verbs and nouns it expresses towards, near to, by the side of, with, under, down (opp. अप). According to G. M. the following are its senses :--उप सामीप्यसामर्थ्यव्याप्त्याचार्यकृतिमृतिदोषदानक्रियावीप्सा- रम्भाध्ययनबुजनेषु :--(1) nearness, contiguity उपविशति, उपगच्छति goes near; (2) power, ability उपकरोति; (3) pervasion उपकीर्ण; (4) advice, instructing as by a teachar उपदिशति, उपदेश; (5) death, extinction, उपरत; (6) defect, fault उपघात; (7) giving उपनयति, उपहरति; (8) action, effort उप त्वानेष्ये; (9) beginning, commencement उपक्रमते, उपक्रम; (1) study उपाध्यायः; (11) reverence, worship उपस्थानम्, उपचरति पितरं पुत्रः. It is also said to have the senses of disease, ornament, command, reproof, killing, wish, resemblance &c. -2 As unconnected with verbs and prefixed to nouns, it expresses direction towards, nearness, resemblance, relationship, contiguity in space, number, time, degree &c., but generally involving the idea of subordination or inferiority; उपकनिष्ठिका the finger next to the little finger; उपपुराणम् a secondary Purāṇa; उपगुरुः an assistant master; उपाध्यक्षः a vice-president. It usually, however, forms Avyayī. comp. in these senses; उपगङ्गम् = गङ्गायाः समीपे; उपकूलम्, ˚वनम् &c.; these are again compounded with other words; उपकूपजलाशयः; उपकण्ठ- निवासिनी. Prefixed to proper nouns it means a 'younger brother'; उपेन्द्रः. -3 With numerals it forms संख्याबहुव्रीहि and means 'nearly', 'almost'; उपत्रिंशाः nearly thirty; उपविंशाः about twenty &c. -4 As a separable preposition (a) with acc. when it means inferiority उपोधिकेच (P.I. 4.87) उपहरिं सुराः Sk. the gods are under i. e. are inferior to Hari; शक्रादय उपाच्युतम् Vop. (b) With loc. it expresses (1) over, above, superior to; उपनिष्के कार्षापणम्, उपपरार्धे हरेर्गुणाः; (2) addition; (3) near to, towards, in the direction of, under; (4) at, on, upon; (5) upto, in, above; e. g. उप सानुषु on or above the peaks; वयो न वसतीरुप; or sometimes (c) with the instr.; with, at the same time with, according to. -5 As a separable adverb it is rarely used in the senses of further, moreover. उपसन्ने$धिके हीने सादृश्यप्रतियत्नयोः ॥ तद्योगव्याप्तिपूजासु शक्तावारम्भदानयोः ॥ दक्षिणाचार्यकरणदोषाख्यानात्ययेषु च । [cf. Gr. hupo; L. sub; Goth. up; Germ. ob.].

upakramaḥ	उपक्रमः 1 Beginning, commencement; रामोपक्रम- माचख्यौ रक्षःपरिभवं नवम् R.12.42 begun by Rāma; किमुपक्रमो रावणः Mv.2. -2 Approach, advance; साहस˚ forcible advance Māl.7; so योषितः सुकुमारोपक्रमाः ibid. -3 An undertaking, work, enterprize. -4 A plan, contrivance, means, expedient, stratagem, remedy; सामादि- भिरुपक्रमैः Ms.7.17,159; M.3; R.18.15; Y.1.345; Śi.2.76. -5 Attendance on a patient, treatment, practice of medicine, physicking. -6 A test of honesty, trying the fidelity of a friend &c.; see उपधा. -7 A kind of ceremony preparatory to reading the Vedas. -8 Heroism, Courage. -9 Flight. -1 Behaviour, action; यद्यप्यकृतकृत्यानामीदृशः स्यादुपक्रमः Rām.5.64.3. -11 The rim of a wheel; Hch.

upadravin	उपद्रविन् a. 1 Attacking, oppressive, tyrannical, factious. m. 1 A tyrant, an oppressor. -2 A rebel.

upadhmānin	उपध्मानिन् a. Blowing upon, fanning.

upavahanam	उपवहनम् (In music) Preliminary singing, humming a tune before beginning to sing it aloud; M.2.

upasaṃhṛ	उपसंहृ 1 P. 1 To draw or bring together, collect. -2 To sum or wind up, conclude; इदानीमुपसंहरति; प्रकृत- मुपसंहरति Kull. on Ms.1.57. -3 To contract; as कूर्मो$- ङ्गानि. -4 To withdraw, take away, withhold; छेत्तुः मार्श्वगतां छायां नोपसंहरते द्रुमः H.1.59. -5 To check, stop, curb. -6 To absorb, destroy, annihilate.

upākaraṇam	उपाकरणम् 1 An invitation to begin, bringing near; पवमान˚, प्रातरनुवाक˚ &c. -2 A term given to certain sentences called Praiṣas (with which one priest calls another to perform a sacrifice). -3 Immolation, sacrifice of an animal consecrated according to rites. -4 Preparation, beginning, commencement. -5 Commencement of reading the Veda after the performance of the preparatory rite; cf. उपाकर्मन्; वेदोपाकरणाख्यं कर्म करिष्ये Srāvaṇī-mantra.

upākarman	उपाकर्मन् n. 1 Preparation, beginning, commencement; अध्याय˚. -2 A ceremony performed before commencing to read the Veda after the monsoons (cf. श्रावणी); अध्यायानामुपाकर्म श्रावण्यां श्रवणेन वा । हस्तेनौषधिभावे वा पञ्चम्यां श्रावणस्य तु ॥ Y.1.142; Ms.4.119.

upākṛta	उपाकृत p. p. 1 Brought near; उपाकृतं शशमानं यदस्था- त्प्रियं देवानामप्येतु पाथः Av.2.34.2. -2 Invited, called with प्रैष sentences. -3 Killed at a sacrifice (an animal). -4 Begun, commenced. -5 Ominous, disastrous, calamitous. -6 Consecrated with mantras; इति बालकमादाय सामर्ग्यजुरुपाकृतैः Bhāg.1.7.14. -7 Prepared, used for; यज्ञेषूपाकृतं विश्वं प्राहुरुत्तमसंज्ञितम् Mb.12.268.22. -तः 1 A sacrificial animal killed during the recitation of prescribed prayers. -2 A misfortune, portent. -तम् 1 Beginning, commencement. -2 the performance of the usual rites (संस्कार) over the sacrificial animal. -3 Invitation.

upārambhaḥ	उपारम्भः Beginning, commencement.

upāyaḥ	उपायः 1 (a) Means, an expedient, remedy; शक्यो- वाप्तुमुपायतः Bg.6.36. उपायं चिन्तयेत्प्राज्ञस्तथापायं च चिन्तयेत् Pt.1.46; मयि क्षीणोपाये प्रणिपतनमात्रैकशरणे Amaru.25; Bhāg.1.48.2; Ms.8.48,7.177. (b) A plan, contrivance; ˚निलया Mu.1.5. (c) A mode, way, stratagem. उपायेन तु यच्छक्यं न तच्छक्यं पराक्रमैः । H. -2 A fact, circumstance; U.7. -3 Beginning, commencement. -4 Effort, exertion; वश्यात्मना तु यतता शक्यो$वाप्तुमुपायतः (योगः) Bg.6.36; Ms.9.248;1.2. -5 A means of success against an enemy; (these are four:- सामन् conciliation or negotiation, दानम् bribery; भेदः sowing dissensions; and दण्डः punishment (open attack); some authorities add three more :- माया deceit; उपेक्षा trick, deceit or neglect; इन्द्रजाल conjuring, thus making the total number 7); चतुर्थोपायसाध्ये तु रिपौ सान्त्वमपक्रिया Śi.2.54; सामादीना- मुपायानां चतुर्णामपि पण्डिताः Ms.7.19. -6 Joining (as in singing). -7 Approach. -8 Initiation, thread ceremony (= उपनयन); अपि वा वेदतुल्यत्वाद् उपायेन प्रवर्तेरन् MS.6.2.22 (where शबर explains उपायेन प्रवर्तेरन् as उप- नयनेन सह प्रवर्तेरन् ।). -Comp. -आक्षेपः (In Rhet.) Deprecatory speech making mention of the remedy; Kāv..2.151. -चतुष्टयम् the four expedients against an enemy; see above (5). -चिन्ता devising an expedient or scheme. -ज्ञ a. fertile in expedients. -तुरीयः the 4th expedient, i. e. दण्ड or punishment. -योगः application of means or remedy; एतैरुपाययोगैस्तु शक्यास्ताः परिरक्षितुम् Ms.9.1. -विकल्पः Alternative strategic means; Kau. A.9.

upāyanam	उपायनम् 1 Going near, approach. -2 Becoming a pupil of. -3 Engaging in any religious rite. -4 Undertaking, beginning; व्रत˚. -5 A present, gift; मालविकोपायनं प्रेषिता M.1; तस्योपायनयोग्यानि वस्तूनि सरितां पतिः Ku.2.37; R.4.79; शरीरिणां श्रेय उपायनं वपुः Bhāg.1.2.34.

upekṣ	उपेक्ष् 1 Ā. 1 To neglect, overlook, disregard, connive at; किमात्मनिर्वादकथामुपेक्षे R.14.34; उपेक्षते यः श्लघ- लम्बिनीर्जटाः Ku.5.47. -2 To let escape or let go; नोपेक्षेत क्षणमपि राजा साहसिकं नरम् Ms.8.344. -3 To quit, abandon. -4 To despise, slight. -5 To notice, consider, have regard to; एवमुच्चावचानर्थान् प्राहुः ते उपेक्षितव्याः Nir. -6 To look at, regard, perceive; प्रासादस्था हपुपैक्षत Nala.22.5.

upodghātaḥ	उपोद्घातः 1 A beginning, commencement. -2 An introduction, a preface. -3 An example, an apposite argument or illustration. -4 An occasion, medium, means; तत्प्रतिच्छन्दकमुपोद्घातेन माधवान्तिकमुपेयात् Māl.1. -5 Analysis, ascertaining the elements of anything. -6 Alluding to, mentioning; Mu.3. -Comp. -पादः N. of the third part of the Vāyu P.

ullāsaḥ	उल्लासः 1 Joy, delight; सोल्लासम् U.6; सकौतुकोल्लासम् U. 2; उल्लासः फुल्लपङ्केरुहपटलपतन्मत्तपुष्पंधयानाम् S. D. -2 Light, splendour. -3 (In Rhet.) A figure of speech in which a reference is made to the merits or demerits of one thing by comparing or contrasting the merits or demerits of another; अन्यदीयगुणदोषप्रयुक्तमन्यस्य गुणदोषयोराधान- मुल्लासः R. G. for example see R. G. ad. loc.; cf. Chandr.5.131.133. -4 A division of a book, such as chapter, section &c.; as the ten Ullāsas of the Kāvya-prakāśa. -5 Beginning, commencement. -6 Growth, increase; न तेषां युगपद्राजन् ह्लास उल्लास एव वा Bhāg.7.1.7. -a. Pleasing, delightful; मुक्ताफलैश्चिदुल्लासैः Bhāg.9.11.33.

uhraḥ	उह्रः A bull. Ms.9.123. -5 Minus (in this sense used with numerals); एकोन less by one; ˚विंशतिः 2 minus 1 = 19; so ˚त्रिंशत् 29; ˚पञ्चाशत् 49; अष्टोनं शतम् 1 minus 8 = 92. -Comp. -अतिरिक्त a. Too little or too much. -अब्दिकम् The श्राद्ध ceremony on the previous day before the anniversary ceremony. -रात्रः, -रात्रिः N. applied to a particular lunar day (which is omitted if two lunar days end in one solar day); Sūrya 1.4.

ṛ	ऋ ind. An interjection of (1) calling; (2) ridicule; (3) censure or abuse; (4) used at the beginning of a sentence. -ऋः cf. ऋनि- र्ऋतिर्नलो नाकः खगराडथ वासुकिः । शालः पितृस्वसुः पुत्रो$दितिर्दितिरुमा रमा ॥ Ek.

ṛñjasāna	ऋञ्जसान a. 1 Running towards. -2 Striving after. -नः A cloud.

ṛtuḥ	ऋतुः [ऋ-तु-किच्च Uṇ1.71] 1 A season, period of the year, commonly reckoned to be six; शिशिरश्च वसन्तश्च ग्रीष्मो वर्षाः शरद्धिमः; sometimes only five; शिशिर and हिम or हेमन्त being counted together; cf. पञ्चर्तवो हेमन्तशिशिरयोः समासेन Ait. Br. वसन्तश्चैत्रवैशाखौ ज्येष्ठाषाढौ च ग्रीष्मकौ । वर्षा श्रावणभाद्राभ्यां शरदश्विनकार्तिकौ ॥ मार्गपौषौ च हेमन्तः शिशिरो माघफाल्गुनौ ॥ गोरक्षसंहिता. -2 An epoch, a period, any fixed or appointed time. -3 Menstruation, courses, menstrual discharge. -4 A period favourable for conception; वरमृतुषु नैवाभिगमनम् Pt.1; ऋतुः स्वाभाविकः स्त्रीणां रात्रयः षोडश स्मृताः Ms.3.46,9.7; Y.1.11,79. -5 Any fit season or right time. -6 Fixed order or rule; द्वा यन्तारा भवतस्तथ ऋतुः Rv.1.162.19. -7 Light, splendour. -8 A month. -9 N. of Viṣṇu. -1 A symbolical expression for the number 'six'. -11 A kind of collyrium. -Comp. -अन्तः 1 the close of a season. -2 termination of menstruation. -कालः, -समयः, -वेला 1 the time of menstruation, time favourable for conception, i. e. 16 nights from menstrual discharge; see ऋतु above. -2 the duration of a season. -गणः the seasons taken collectively. -गामिन् a. having intercourse with a wife (at the time fit for conception, i. e. after the period of menstruation). -ग्रहः a libation offered to the seasons, a kind of sacrifice. -चर्या f. seasonal proceeding; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि ऋतुचर्यास्तु वाजिनाम् Bhoja's Śālihotra 92. -जुष् f. A woman enjoying intercourse at the time fit for procreation; Ks. -धामन् m. N. of Viṣṇu -पतिः 1 the lord of seasons, i. e. the spring. -2 N. of Agni; Rv.1.2.1. -3 N. of other deities; Av.3.1.9. -पर्णः N. of a king of Ayodhyā; son of Ayutāyu, a descendant of Ikṣvāku. [Nala, king of Niṣadha, entered into his service after he had lost his kingdom and suffered very great adversity. He was 'profoundly skilled in dice'; and he exchanged with Nala this skill for his skill in horsemanship; and by virtue of it the king succeeded in taking Nala to Kuṇḍinapura before Damayantī had put into execution her resolve of taking a second husband]. -पर्यायः, -वृत्तिः the revolution of the seasons; cf. Ms.1.29. -पशुः An animal to be sacrificed at a particular season. -पाः m. N. of Indra. -पात्रम् the cup in which the libation is offered. -प्राप्त a. fertile, fruitful. -प्रैषः N. of particular invocations spoken before the sacrifice to the seasons. Ait. Br.5.9.3,4. -मुखम् the beginning or first day of a season. -याजः a sacrifice offered to the seasons. -राजः the spring. -लिङ्गम् 1 a characteristic or sign of the season (as the blossom of the mango tree in spring); यथर्तुलिङ्गान्यृतवः स्वयमेवर्तुपर्यये Ms. 1.3. -2 a symptom of menstruation. -लोका f. N. of particular bricks; Śat. Br.1. -ष्ठा (स्था) a. fixed at the proper seasons; Vāj.17.3. -संहारः 'collection of the seasons, N. of Kālidāsa's work on the six seasons. -सन्धिः 1 the junction of two seasons. -2 the last day in the bright fortnight (पौर्णमासी) and in the dark one (दर्श). -सात्म्यम् diet &c. suited to the season. -स्तोमः a kind of sacrifice. -स्नाता a woman who has bathed after menstruation and who is, therefore, fit for sexual intercourse; धर्मलोपभयाद्राज्ञीमृतुस्नाताभिमां स्मरन् R.1.76. -स्नानम् bathing after menstruation.

ṛṣiḥ	ऋषिः [cf. Uṇ.4.119] 1 An inspired poet or sage, a singer of sacred hymns, (e. g कुत्स, वसिष्ठ, अत्रि, अगस्त्य &c.). (These Ṛiṣis form a class of beings distinct from gods, men, Asuras &c. (Av.1.1.26). They are the authors or seers of the Vedic hymns; ऋषयो मन्त्रद्रष्टारो वसिष्ठादयः; or, according to Yāska, यस्य वाक्यं स ऋषिः, i. e. they are the persons to whom the Vedic hymns were revealed. In every Sūkta the ऋषि is mentioned along with the देवता, छन्दस् and विनियोग. The later works mention seven Ṛiṣis or saptarṣis whose names, according to Śat. Br., are गौतम, भरद्वाज, विश्वामित्र, जमदग्नि, वसिष्ठ, कश्यप and अत्रि; according to Mahābhārata, मरीचि, अत्रि, अङ्गिरस्, पुलह, क्रतु, पुलस्त्य and वसिष्ठ; Manu calls these sages Prajāpatis or progenitors of mankind, and gives ten names, three more being added to the latter list, i. e. दक्ष or प्रचेतस्, भृगु and नारद. In astronomy the seven Ṛiṣis form the constellation of "the Great Bear"); यत्रा सप्त ऋषीन् पर एकमाहुः Rv.1.82.2. -2 A sanctified sage, saint, an ascetic, anchorite; (there are usually three classes of these saints; देवर्षि, ब्रह्मर्षि and राजर्षि; sometimes four more are added; महर्षि, परमर्षि, श्रुतर्षि and काण्डर्षि. -3 A ray of light. -4 An imaginary circle. -5 A hymn (मन्त्र) composed by a Ṛiṣi; एतद्वो$स्तु तपोयुक्तं ददामीत्यृषि- चोदितम् Mb.12.11.18; -6 The Veda; P.III.2.186. -7 A symbolical expression for number seven. -8 Life; Bhāg.1.87.5. -9 The moon. -Comp. -ऋणम् A debt due to Ṛiṣis. -कुल्या 1 a sacred river. -2 N. of महानदी, N. of सरस्वती; अथ तस्योशतीं देवीमृषिकुल्यां सरस्वतीम् Bhāg. 3.16.13. -कृत् a. making one's appearance; Rv.1.31. 16. -गिरिः N. of a mountain in Magadha. -चान्द्रायणम् N. of a particular observance. -च्छन्दस् n. the metre of a Ṛiṣi, -जाङ्गलः, -जाङ्गलिका the plant ऋक्षगन्धा, (Mar. म्हैसवेल). -तर्पणम् libation offered to the Ṛiṣis. -धान्यम् The grain Coix barbata (Mar. वरी). -पञ्चमी N. of a festival or ceremony on the fifth day in the first half of Bhādrapada (observed by women). -पुत्रकः Southern wood, Artemisia abrotanum (Mar. दवणा). -प्रोक्ता the plant माषपर्णी (Mar. रानउडीद). -बन्धु a. connected or related to the Ṛiṣi; Rv.8.1.6. -मनस् a. inspired; far-seeing, enlightened; Rv.9.96.18. -मुखम् the beginning of a Maṇḍala composed by a Ṛiṣi. -यज्ञः a sacrifice offered to a Ṛiṣi (consisting of a prayer in low voice). Ms.4.21. -लोकः the world of the Ṛiṣis. -श्राद्धम् Funeral oblations for the Ṛiṣis. a figurative expression for insignificant acts which are preceded by great preparation. -श्रेष्ठः (ष्ठम्) The pod of Helicteres isora : also the shrub of tree (Mar. मुरुड- शेंग). -स्तोमः 1 praise of the Ṛiṣis. -2 a particular sacrifice completed in one day.

eṣa	एष a. 1 Desirable, to be desired. -2 Gliding, running; epithet of Viṣṇu. -षः 1 Running or hastening towards. -2 Seeking. -3 Wish, choice. -षा Wish, desire. -Comp. -वीरः N. of a despised Brāhmaṇa family.

om	ओम् ind. 1 The sacred syllable om, uttered as a holy exclamation at the beginning and end of a reading of the Vedas, or previous to the commencement of a prayer or sacred work. -2 As a particle it implies (a) solemn affirmation and respectful assent (so be it, amen !); (b) assent or acceptance (yes, all right); ओमित्युच्यताममात्यः Māl.6; ओमित्युक्तवतो$थ शार्ङ्गिण इति Śi. 1.75; द्वितीयश्चेदोमिति ब्रूमः S. D.1; (c) command; (d) auspiciousness; (e) removal or warding off. -3 Brahman. [This word first appears in the Upaniṣads as a mystic monosyllable, and is regarded as the object of the most profound religious meditation. In the Maṇḍūkya Upaniṣad it is said that this syllable is all what has been, that which is and is to be; that all is om, only om. Literally analysed, om is taken to be made up of three letters or quarters; the letter a is Vaiśvānara, the spirit of waking souls in the waking world; u is Taijasa, the spirit of dreaming souls in the world of dreams; and m is Prajñā, the spirit of sleeping and undreaming souls; and the whole om is said to be unknowable, unspeakable, into which the whole world passes away, blessed above duality; (for further account see Gough's Upaniṣads pp.69-73). In later times om came to be used as a mystic name for the Hindu triad, representing the union of the three gods a (Viṣṇu), u (Śiva), and m (Brahmā). It is usually called Praṇava or Ekakṣaram; cf. अकारो विष्णुरुद्दिष्ट उकारस्तु महेश्वरः । मकारेणोच्यते ब्रह्मा प्रणवेन त्रयो मताः ॥ -Comp. -कारः 1 the sacred syllable ओम्; त्रिमात्रमोकारं त्रिमात्रमोंकारं वा विदधति Mbh.VIII.2.89. -2 the exclamation ओम्, or pronunciation of the same; प्राणायामैस्त्रिभिः पूतस्तत ओंकारमर्हति Ms.2.75. -3 (fig.) commencement; एष तावदोंकारः Mv.1; B. R.3.78. -रा N. of a Buddhist śakti (personification of divine energy).

kakudmat	ककुद्मत् a. [अस्त्यर्थे मतुप्] 1 Furnished with a hump; अरंहत पद्याभिः ककुद्मान् Rv.1.12.7. Pt.1. -2 Running high (as a wave). m. 1 A mountain (having peaks). -2 A buffalo; मदोदग्राः ककुद्मन्तः R.4.22; a humped bull; 13.47; तुपारसंघातशिलाः खुराग्रैः समुल्लिखन् दर्पकलः ककुद्मान् Ku.1.56. -3 N. of a medicinal plant (ऋषभ). -ती The hip and the loins.

kathā	कथा [कथ् नि˚ अ] A tale, story; ˚प्रावीण्यम् U.4. historical knowledge. -2 A fable, feigned story; कथाच्छलेन बालानां नीतिस्तदिह कथ्यते H. Pr.8. -3 An account, allusion, mention; कथापि खलु पापानामलमश्रेयसे यतः Śi.2. 4. -4 Talk, conversation, speech; प्रथमं कृतां कथाम् Ś. 4.1. -5 A variety of prose composition, often distinguished from आख्यायिका; (प्रबन्धकल्पनां स्तोकसत्यां प्राज्ञाः कथां विदुः । परंपराश्रया या स्यात् सा मताख्यायिका बुधैः ॥); see under आख्यायिका also. -6 (In phil.) Disputation. का कथा or कथा with प्रति (what mention) is often used in the sense of 'what need one say of', 'not to mention', 'to say nothing of', 'how much more', or 'how much less'; का कथा बाणसंधाने ज्याशब्देनैव दूरतः । हुंकारेणेव धनुषः स हि विघ्नानपोहति Ś.3.1; अभितप्तमयो$पि मार्दवं भजते कैव कथा शरीरिषु R.8.43; आप्तवागनुमानाभ्भ्यां साध्यं त्वां प्रति का कथा 1.28; Ve.2.25. -Comp. -अनुरागः taking pleasure in conversation; स्मर्तव्यो$स्मि कथान्तरेषु भवता Mk.7.7. -2 another tale. -अवशेष or कथाशेष a. one of whom only the narrative remains, i. e. deceased, dead. -आक्रमः the commencement of a conversation. -आरम्भः commencement of a tale. -आरामः garden of fable. -आलापः speech, conversation. -उदयः the beginning of a tale. -उद्धातः 1 the second of the five kinds of प्रस्तावना, where the first character enters the stage after overhearing and repeating either the words of the manager (सूत्रधार) or their sense; see S. D.29; e. g. in Ratn., Ve. or Mudrārākṣasa. -2 commencement of a tale or narration; आकुमारकथोद्धातं शालिगोप्यो जगुर्यशः R.4.2. -उपकथनम्, -उपाख्यानम् narration, relation, telling a story. -छलम् 1 the guise of a fable. -2 giving a false account. -नायकः, -पुरुषः the hero or leading character of a story; रामायण˚ U.4,6. -पीठम् 1 the introductory part of a tale or story. -2 N. of the first लम्बक or book of the कथासरित्सागर. -प्रबन्धः a tale, fiction, fable. -प्रसङ्ग a. 1 talkative, talking much and foolishly. -2 mad, foolish. (-ङ्गः) 1 conversation, talk or course of conversation; नानाकथाप्रसङ्गावस्थितः H.1; कथाप्रसङ्गेन विवादं किल चक्रतुः Ks.22.181; N.1.35. -2 a curer of poisons (विषवैद्य); कथाप्रसङ्गो वार्तायां विषवैद्ये$पि वाच्यवत् Viśvakoṣa. कथाप्रसंगेन जनैरुदाहृताम् Ki.1.24 (where the word is used in sense 1 also). -प्राणः an actor. -2 a professional story-teller. -मात्र a. One of whom nothing but the narrative is left; deceased, dead. कालेन ते कृताः सर्वे कथामात्राः कथासु च Bhāg.12.2.44. -मुखम् the introductory portion of a story; Pt.1 -योगः course of conversation, talk, discourse. -विपर्यासः changing the course of a story. -विरक्त a. reserved, taciturn, disliking conversation. -शेष a. see कथावशेष.

karṇa	कर्ण a. Ved. 1 Having long ears. -2 Furnished with chaff (as grain). -र्णः 1 The ear; अहो खलभुजङ्गस्य विपरीतवधक्रमः । कर्णे लगति चान्यस्य प्राणैरन्यो वियुज्यते ॥ Pt.1. 35, 34 also; -कर्णे दा to listen; कर्णमागम् to come to the ear, become known; तद्गुणैः कर्णमागत्य R.1.9; कर्णे कृ to put round the ear; Ch. P.1; कर्णे कथयति whispers in the ear; cf. षट्कर्ण, चतुष्कर्ण &c. also. -2 The handle or ear of a vessel; उभा कर्णा हिरण्यया Rv.8.72.12. -3 The helm or rudder of a ship; सेना भ्रमति संख्येषु हत- कर्णेव नौर्जले Rām.6.48.26. -4 The hypotenuse of a triangle. -5 The diameter of a circle; Sūrya. -6 An intermediate region or quarter (उपदिग्भाग); Mb.6. 6.1. -7 (In prosody) A spondee. -8 N. of a tree (Mar. बाहवा, रुइमांदार) Rām.5.56.34. -2 N. of a celebrated warrior on the side of the Kauravas mentioned in the Mahābhārata. भवान् भीष्मश्च कर्णश्च Bg.1.8;11.34. [He was the son of Kuntī begotten on her by the god Sun while she was yet a virgin residing at her father's house (see Kuntī). When the child was born, Kuntī, afraid of the censure of her relatives and also of public scandal, threw the boy into the river where he was found by Adhiratha, charioteer of Dhṛitrāṣṭra, and given over to his wife Rādhā, who brought him up like her own child; whence Karṇa is often called Sūtaputra, Rādheya &c. Karṇa, when grown up, was made king of Aṇga by Duryodhana, and became by virtue of his many generous acts a type of charity. On one occasion Indra (whose care it was to favour his son Arjuna) disguised himself as a Brāhmaṇa and cajoled him out of his divine armour and ear-rings, and gave him in return a charmed javelin. With a desire to make himself proficient in the science of war, he, calling himself a Brāhmaṇa went to Parasurāma and learnt that art from him. But his secret did not long remain concealed. On one occasion when Parasurāma had fallen asleep with his head resting on Karṇa's lap, a worm (supposed by some to be the form assumed by Indra himself to defeat Karṇa's object) began to eat into his lap and made a deep rent in it; but as Karṇa showed not the least sign of pain, his real character was discovered by his preceptor who cursed him that the art he had learnt would avail him not in times of need. On another occasion he was curse by a Brāhmaṇa (whose cow he had unwittingly slain in chase) that the earth would eat up the wheel of his chariot in the hour of trial. Even with such disadvantages as these, he acquitted himself most valiantly in the great war between the Paṇḍavas and Kauravas, while acting as generalissimo of the Kaurava forces after Bhīṣma and Droṇa had fallen. He maintained the field against the Paṇḍavas for three days, but on the last day he was slain by Arjuna while the wheel of his chariot had sunk down into the earth. Karṇa was the most intimate friend of Duryodhana, and with Śakuni joined him in all the various schemes and plots that were devised from time to time for the destruction of the Paṇ&dvas.] -Comp. -अञ्चलः (लम्) Ear-lobe; (Mātaṅga L.5.12.) -अञ्जलिः 1 The auditory passage of the outer ear. -2 The ears pricked up; आपीय कर्णाञ्जलिभिर्भवापहाम् Bhāg.3.13.5. -अनुजः Yudhiṣṭhira. -अन्तिक a. close to the ear; स्वनसि मृदु कर्णान्तिकचरः Ś.1.23. -अन्दुः, -न्दू f. an ornament for the ear, ear-ring. -अर्पणम् giving ear, listening. -आरा (= -वेधनी). -आस्फालः the flapping of the elephant's ears. -इन्दुः f. a semicircular ear-ring. -उत्तंसः an ear-ornament or merely an ornament (according to some authorities). (Mammaṭa says that here कर्ण means कर्णंस्थितत्व; cf. also his remark ad hoc:- कर्णावतंसादिपदे कर्णादिध्वनिनिर्मितः । सन्निधानार्थबोधार्थं स्थितेष्वेत- त्समर्थनम् ॥ K. P.7). -उपकर्णिका rumour; (lit. 'from ear to ear'). प्रागेव कर्णोपकर्णिकया श्रुतापवादक्षुभितहृदयः Pt. -ऊर्णः a kind of deer; कर्णोर्णैकपदं चास्मै निर्जुष्टं वृकनाभिभिः Bhāg. -कषायः Dirt in the ears; आपीयतां कर्णकषायशोषाननुक्रमिष्ये न इमान्सुपेशान् Bhāg.2.6.46. -कीटा, -टी 1 a worm with many feet and of a reddish colour, -2 a small centipede. -कुमारी N. of Bhavānī. -कूटः The tower at the corner of the roof; Māna.19.54-55. -क्ष्वेडः (in Medic.) a constant noise in the ear. -गूथम् earwax. (-थः) -गूथकः hardening of the wax of the ear. -गोचर a. audible. -ग्राहः a helmsman. -चूलिका f. An ear-ring; उत्कृत्तकर्णचूलिकेन मुखेन ...... Svapna.2. -जप a. (also कर्णेजप) a secret traducer, talebearer, informer. कर्णेजपः सूचकः Mbh. on P.III.2.13. -जपः, -जापः slandering, tale-bearing, calumniating. -जलूका a small centipede. (also -जलौकस्, -जलौका) -जाहम् the root of the ear; cf. तस्य पाकमूले पील्वादिकर्णादिभ्यः कुणब्जाह चौ Pān. V.2.24. अपि कर्णजाहविनिवेशिताननः Māl.5.8. -जित् m. 'conqueror of Karṇa', epithet of Arjuna, the third Pāṇḍava prince. -ज्वरः pain to the ear; U.5.6. -तालः the flapping of the elephant's ears, the noise made by it; विस्तारितः कुञ्जरकर्ण- तालैः R.7.39,9.71; Śi.17.37. -दर्पणः an ear-ring. -दुन्दुभिः = कर्णकीटा. -धारः a helmsman, a pilot; अकर्णधारा जलधौ विप्लवेतेह नौरिव H.3.2; अविनयनदीकर्णधार- कर्ण Ve.4. -धारिणी a female elephant. -पत्रकः The lobe of the ear; Y.3.96. -पथः the range of hearing. -परम्परा from ear to ear, hearsay; इति कर्णपरंपरया श्रुतम् Ratn.1. -पर्वन् n. the eighth (i. e. Karṇa) section of the Mahābhārata. -पाकः inflammation of the outer ear. -पालिः, -ली f. 1 the lobe of the ear. -2 the outer edge of the ear. (-ली) an ornament of the ear. -पाशः a beautiful ear; U.6.27. -पिशाची f. a type of goddess. -पुटम् the auditory passage of the ear. -पूरः 1 an ornament (of flowers &c.) worn round the ear, an ear-ring; इदं च करतलं किमिति कर्णपूरतामारोपितम् K.6. प्रचुरसमरशोभासुभ्रुवः कर्णपूरः Śiva. B.3.46. -2 the Aśoka tree. -3 the Śirīṣa tree. -4 the blue lotus. -पूरकः 1 an ear-ring. -2 the Kadamba tree. -3 the Aṣoka tree. -4 the blue lotus. -प्रणादः, -प्रतिनाहः a disease of the ear. -प्रान्तः the lobe of the ear. -फलः a kind of fish. -भूषणम्, -भूषा an ear-ornament. -मुकुरः an ear-ornament. -मूलम् the root of the ear; तं कर्णमूलमागत्य रामे श्रीर्न्यस्यतामिति R.12.2. -मोटी a form of Durgā. -योनि a. having the ear as a source. तस्य साध्वीरिषवो याभिरस्यति नृचक्षसो दृशये कर्णयोनयः Rv.2.24.8. -लता, -लतिका the lobe of the ear; मन्ये$मुना कर्णलतामयेन N.7.64. -वंशः a raised platform or dais of bamboo. -वर्जित a. earless. (-तः) a snake. -विवरम्, -छिद्रम्, -पुरम्, -रन्ध्रम् the auditory passage of the ear. -विष् f. ear-wax; Ms.5.135. -विषम् 'poisoning the ear', slandering, backbiting. -वेधः piercing the ears to put ear-rings on; a religious ceremony (संस्कार). -वेधनी, -वेधनिका an instrument for piercing the ear. -वेष्टः, -वेष्टनम् an ear-ring; सुकृतौ कर्णवेष्टौ च Rām.5.15.42. -शष्कुली the outer part of the ear (leading to the auditory passage); AV.9.8.1. अवलम्बितकर्णशष्कुलीकलसीकं रचयन्नवोचत N.2.8. -शूलः, -लम् ear-ache. -श्रव a. audible, loud; कर्णश्रवे$- निले Ms.4.12. -श्रावः, -संश्रवः 'running of the ear', discharge of pus or ichorous matter from the ear. -सूः f. Kuntī, mother of Karṇa. -स्रोतस् n. excretion of the ear (कर्णमल) कर्णस्रोतोभवं चापि मधुं नाम महासुरम् Mb.6. 67.14. -हर्म्यम् a tower, a side-tower. -हीन a. earless. (-नः) a snake.

kartana	कर्तन a. Cutting. -नम् 1 Cutting, lopping off; Y.2.229,286. -2 Spinning cotton or thread (तर्कुः कर्तनसाधनम्).

kaliḥ	कलिः [कल्-इनि] 1 Strife, quarrel, dissension, contention; शठ कलिरेष महांस्त्वयाद्य दत्तः Śi.7.55; कलिकामजित् R.9.33, Amaru.23. -2 War, battle. अविषह्यैस्तमाक्षेपैः क्षिपन्संजनयन् कलिम् । Bhāg.1.55.17. -3 The fourth age of the world, the iron age (consisting of 432, years of men and beginning from the 13th of February 312 B. C.); दानमेकं कलौ युगे Ms.1.86,9.31; कलिवर्ज्यानि इमानि &c. -4 Kali age personified (this Kali persecuted Nala). -5 The worst of any class. -6 The Bibhītaka tree. -7 The side of a die which is marked with one point. घृतेन कलिं शिक्षामि Av.7.19.1. -8 A hero. -9 An arrow. -f. A bud. -Comp. -कारः, -कारकः, -क्रियः 1 an epithet of Nārada. -2 the karanja tree. -3 a kind of bird. -द्रुमः, -वृक्षः the Bibhītaka tree. -प्रिय a. quarrelsome. (-यः) 1 N. of Nārada. -2 a monkey, ape; Ms.1.85. -मारकः a kind of karanja tree. -युगम् the Kali age; Ms.1.85. -संतरणम् N. of an Upaniṣad. -हारी f. a kind of medicine (विषलाङ्गली).

kaliṅga	कलिङ्ग a. 1 Clever. -2 Cunning. -गाः (pl.) N. of a country and its inhabitants; (a district on the Coromandel coast); नो खण्डिकाञ्जगाम नो कलिङ्गाञ्जगाम Mbh. on P.III.2.115. उत्कलादर्शितपथः कलिङ्गाभिमुखो ययौ R.4. 38; (its position is thus described in Tantras :-- जगन्नाथात्समारभ्य कृष्णातीरान्तगः प्रिये । कलिङ्गदेशः संप्रोक्तो वाम- मार्गपरायणः ॥). -ङ्गः 1 The fork-tailed shrike. -2 N. of several plants; (as शिरीष, प्लक्ष &c.) -ङ्गा A beautiful woman. -ङ्गम् Indra grain (इन्द्रयव).

kāñciḥ	काञ्चिः ची f. [काञ्च् बन्धने इनि] 1 A woman's girdle or zone furnished with small tinkling bells or other ornaments; एतावता नत्वनुमेयशोभि काञ्चीगुणस्थानमनिन्दितायाः Ku.1.37,3.55; Me.28. Śi.9.82; R.6.43. -2 N. of an ancient city in the south of India, regarded as one of the sacred cities of the Hindus; (for the names of seven cities see अवन्ति). -Comp. -कलापः, कालापा a. girdle; जघनमरुणरत्नग्रन्थिकाञ्चीकलापं कुवलयनयनानां को विहातुं समर्थः Bh.1.71. -गुणस्थानम् The hips, haunches; Ku. 1.37. -पुरी, -नगरी the same as काञ्ची (2). -पदम् the hips and loins. -यमकम् a kind of paronomasia or punning; cf. Bk.1.8.

kāndiś	कान्दिश् a. [काम् दिशम्] Put to flight, running away, flying; Mb.12.

kāndiśīka	कान्दिशीक a. 1 Put to flight, running away, fugitive; मृगजनः कान्दिशीकः संवृत्तः Pt.1. -2 (Hence) Terrified, afraid; Bv.2.178; येदिलस्यापि पृतना कान्दिशीकतमा$भवत् Śiva. B.4.52.

kāraṇam	कारणम् [कृ-णिच् ल्युट्] 1 A cause, reason; कारणकोपाः कुटुम्बिन्यः M.1.18; R.1.74; Bg.13.21; oft. with loc. of the effect; Bh.2.84. -2 Ground, motive, object; प्रव्राज्य चीरवसनं किं नु पश्यसि कारणम् Rām.2.73. 12. किं पुनः कारणम् Mbh.; Y.2.23; Ms.8.347; कारण- मानुषीं तनुम् R.16.22. -3 An instrument, means; गर्भस्रावे मासतुल्या निशाः शुद्धेस्तु कारणम् Y.3.2,65. -4 (In Nyāya phil.) A cause, that which is invariably antecedent to some product and is not otherwise constituted; or, according to Mill, 'the antecedent or concurrence of antecedents on which the effect is invariably and unconditionally consequent'; according to Naiyāyikas it is of three kinds; (1) समवायि (intimate or inherent); as threads in the case of cloth; (2) असमवायि (non-intimate or non-inherent), as the conjunction of the threads in the case of cloth; (3) निमित्त (instrumental) as the weaver's loom. -5 The generative cause, creator, father; Ku.5.81. -6 An element, elementary matter; Y.3.148; Bg.18. 13. -7 The origin or plot of a play, poem &c. -8 An organ of sense; हित्वा तनुं कारणमानुषीं ताम्. -9 The body. -1 A sign, document, proof or authority; प्रमाणं चैव लोकस्य ब्रह्मात्रैव हि कारणम् Ms.11.84. -11 That on which any opinion or judgment is based. -12 Action; आत्मना कारणैश्चैव समस्येह महीक्षितः Mb.12.59.13. -13 A legal instrument or document. -14 Agency, instrumentality. -15 A deity (as the proximate or remote cause of creation) -16 Killing, injuring. -17 A desire (वासना) created formerly (as पूर्ववासना); पूर्वं नित्यं सर्वगतं मनोहेतुम- लक्षणम् । अज्ञानकर्मनिर्दिष्टमेतत्कारणलक्षणम् ॥ Mb.12.211.6. -णा 1 Pain, agony. -2 Casting into hell. -3 Urging, instigation. (-कारणात् for the reason that; द्वेष˚ on account of hatred; मत्कारणात् for my sake; Pt.1.22.) -4 Action; निमित्ते कारणात्मके Mb.12.289.7. -Comp. -अन्तरम् 1 a particular reason; प्रविष्टो$स्मि दुराधर्षं वालिनः कारणान्तरे Rām.4.1.28; -2 instrumental cause; येन वैश्रवणो भ्राता वैमात्राः कारणान्तरे Rām.3.48.4. -अन्वित a. having a cause or reason. -आख्या a. N. of the organ of perception and action, of बुद्धि, अहंकार and मनस्. -उत्तरम् a special plea, denial of the cause of complaint; admission of the charge generally, but denial of the actual issue (in law). -कारणम् an elementary or primary cause; an atom; त्वं कारणं कारणकारणानाम् Ki.18. 35. -कारितम् ind. in consequence of; यदि प्रव्राजितो रामो लोभकारणकारितम् Rām.2.58.28. -गत a. referred to its cause, resolved into its principles. -गुणः a quality of the cause; Sāṅ. K.14. -बलवत् a. strong by motives; Pt.5.29. -भूत a. 1 caused. -2 forming the cause. -माला a figure of speech, 'a chain of causes'; यथोत्तरं चेत् पूर्वस्य पूर्वस्यार्थस्य हेतुता । तदा कारणमाला स्यात् K. P.1; e. g. Bg.2.62,63; also S. D.728. -मूलम् (in Rhet.) a law of causation. -वादिन् m. a complainant, plaintiff. -वारि n. the original water produced at the beginning of the creation. -विहीन a. without a cause. -शरीरम् (in Vedānta phil.) the inner rudiment of the body, causal frame.

kāla	काल a. (-ली f.) 1 Black, of a dark or dark-blue colour; Rām.5.17.9. Mb.8.49.48. -2 Injuring, hurting. -लः 1 The black or dark-blue colour. -2 Time (in general); विलम्बितफलैः कालं निनाय स मनोरथैः R.1.33; तस्मिन्काले at that time; काव्यशास्त्रविनोदेन कालो गच्छति धीमताम् H.1.1 the wise pass their time &c. -3 Fit or opportune time (to do a thing), proper time or occasion; (with gen., loc., dat., or inf.); R.3.12,4.6,12.69; पर्जन्यः कालवर्षी Mk.1.6; काले वर्षतु पर्जन्यः &c. -4 A period or portion of time (as the hours or watches of a day); षष्ठे काले दिवसस्य V.2.1. Ms.5.153. -5 The weather. -6 Time considered as one of the nine dravyas by the Vaiśeṣikas. -7 The Supreme Spirit regarded as the destroyer of the Universe, being a personification of the destructive principle; कालः काल्या भुवनफलके क्रीडति प्राणिशारैः Bh.3.39. -8 (a) Yama, the god of death; कः कालस्य न गोचरान्तरगतः Pt.1.146. (b) Death, time of death; स हि कालो$स्य दुर्मतेः Rām.7.64.1. -9 Fate, destiny. -1 The black part of the eye. -11 The (Indian) cuckoo. -12 The planet Saturn. -13 N. of Śiva; N. of Rudra; उग्ररेता भवः कालो वामदेवो धृतव्रतः Bhāg.3.12.12. -14 A measure of time (in music or prosody). -15 A person who distils and sells spirituous liquor. -16 A section, or part. -17 A red kind of plumbago. -18 Resin, pitch. -19 N. of an enemy of Śiva. -2 (with the Jainas) One of the nine treasures. -21 A mystical name for the letter म्. -22 N. of the one of four contentments mentioned in साङ्ख्यकारिका; प्रकृत्युपादानकालभागाख्याः Śāṅ. K.5. -ला 1 N. of several plants. -2 N. of a daughter of Dakṣa. -3 An epithet of Durgā. -ली 1 Blackness. -2 Ink, black ink. -3 An epithet of Pārvatī, Śiva's wife. -4 A row of black clouds. -5 A woman with a dark complexion. -6 N. of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa. जनयामास यं काली शक्तेः पुत्रात्पराशरात् Mb.1.6.2; Bu. ch.4.76. -7 Night. -8 Censure, blame. -9 One of the seven tongues of Fire : काली कराली च मनोजवा च सुलोहिता या च सुधूम्रवर्णा । स्फुलिङ्गिनी विश्वरुची च देवी लेलायमाना इति सप्तजिह्वाः ॥ Muṇḍ.1.2.4. -1 A form of Durgā कालि कालि महा- कालि सीधुमांसपशुंप्रिये Mb.4.6.17. कालीतनयः a buffalo. -11 One of the Mātṛis or divine mothers. -12 N. of a wife of Bhīma. -13 A sister of Yama. -14 A kind of learning (महाविद्या) -15 A small shrub used as a purgative. -16 A kind of insect. -लम् 1 Iron. क्षुरो भूत्वा हरेत्प्राणान्निशितः कालसाधनः Mb.1.14.89. -2 A kind of perfume. -Comp. -अयसम् iron. -अक्षरिकः a scholar, one who can read and decipher. -अगरु n. a kind of sandal tree, black kind of aloe; कालागुरुर्दहनमध्यगतः सम- न्ताल्लोकोत्तरं परिमलं प्रकटीकरोति Bv.1.7, R.4.81. (-n.) the wood of that tree. शिरांसि कालागुरुधूपितानि Ṛs.4.5;5.5. -अग्निः, -अनलः 1 the destructive fire at the end of the world. -2 an epithet of Rudra. -3. a kind of bead (रुद्राक्ष). -अङ्ग a. having a dark-blue body (as a sword with a dark-blue edge) Mb.4.8.1.; -अजिनम् the hide of a black antelope. -अञ्जनम् a sort of collyrium; न चक्षुषोः कान्तिविशेषबुद्ध्या कालाञ्जनं मङ्गलमित्युपात्तम् Ku.7.2,82. (-नी) a small shrub used as a purgative (Mar. काळी कापशी). -अण्डजः the (Indian) cuckoo. -अतिक्रमः, -क्रमणम् delay, being late; कालातिक्रमणं वृत्तेर्यो न कुर्वति भूपतिः Pt.1.154. -अतिपातः, -अतिरेकः loss of time, delay; Māl.2. -अतीत a. elapsed, passed by. -अत्ययः 1 delay, lapse of time. -2 loss by lapse of time. -अध्यक्षः 1 'presiding over time', epithet of the sun. -2 the Supreme Soul. -अनुनादिन् m. 1 a bee. -2 a sparrow. -3 the Chātaka bird. -अनुसारकः 1 Tagara tree. -2 yellow sandal. -अनुसारिः, -अनु- सारिन्, -अनुसारिवा, -अनुसार्यः, -र्यकः benzoin or benjamin. (-र्यम्) 1 a yellow fragrant wood (पीतचन्दन). -2 Sissoo wood. -अन्तकः time, regarded as the god of death, and the destroyer of every thing. -अन्तरम् 1 an interval. -2 a period of time. -3 another time or opportunity. ˚आवृत a. hidden or concealed in the womb of time. ˚क्षम a. able to bear delay; अकालक्षमा देव्याः शरीरावस्था K.263; Ś.4. ˚प्रेक्षिन् Pt.3.172. ˚विषः an animal venomous only when enraged, as a rat. -अभ्रः a dark, watery cloud. -अयनम् See कालचक्र Bhāg.5.22.11. -अवधिः appointed time. -अवबोधः knowledge of time and circumstances; Māl.3.11. -अशुद्धिः f. -अशौचम् period of mourning, ceremonial impurity caused by the birth of a child or death of a relation in the family; see अशौच. -अष्टकम् 1 first to eighth days of the dark half of the month आषाढ (festival period of कालभैरव) -2 a stotra of कालभैरव by Śhaṅkarāchārya. -आकृष्ट a. 1 led to death. -2 produced or brought by time. -आत्मक a. depending on time or destiny. -आत्मन् m. the Supreme Spirit. -आदिकः The month चैत्र. -आम्रः 1 a mango-kind; कालाम्ररसपीतास्ते नित्यं संस्थित- यौवनाः Mb.6.7.18. -2 N. of a Dvīpa; Hariv. -आयसम् iron. -a. made of iron; ततः कालायसं शूलं कण्टकैर्बहुभिश्च तम् Rām.7.8.15. -उप्त a. sown in due season. -कञ्जम् a blue lotus. -कटम्, -कटः an epithet of Śiva; Mb.13. -कण्ठः 1 a peacock. -2 a sparrow. -3 a wagtail. -4 a gallinule. -5 an epithet of Śiva; कालिन्दीकालकण्ठः कलयतु कुशलं को$पि कापालिको नः Udb.; U.6. -कण्ठी Pārvatī, the wife of कालकण्ठ i. e. शिव. नृत्यन्तीमिव रजनी नटीं प्रतीमो गानश्री- र्विलसति नाथ कालकण्ठी Rām Ch.7.23. -कण्टक, -कण्ठकः a gallinule. -कण़्डकः a water-snake. -करणम् appointing or fixing time. -कर्णिका, -कर्णी misfortune. -कर्मन् n. 1 death. -2 destruction; त्रैलोक्यं तु करिष्यामि संयुक्तं काल- कर्मणा Rām.3.64.62. -कलायः dark pulse. -कल्प a fatal, deadly. -कल्लकः A water-snake. -कालः Supreme Being. -कीलः noise. -कुण्ठः Yama. -कुष्ठः a myrrh. -कूटः, -टम् (a) a deadly poison; अहो बकी यं स्तनकाल- कूटं अपाययत् Bhāg.3.2.23; Ś.6. (b) the poison churned out of the ocean and drunk by Śiva; अद्यापि नोज्झति हरः किल कालकूटम् Ch. P.5. कालकूटस्य जननीं तां स्तुवे वामलोचनाम् Vb. -कूटकः a poison; Mb.1. -कृत् m. 1 the sun. -2 a peacock. -3 Supreme Spirit. -कृत 1 produced by time. -2 fixed, appointed. -3 lent or deposited, -4 done for a long time. (-तः) the sun. -क्रमः lapse of time, course of time; कालक्रमेण in course or process of time; Ku.1.19. -क्रिया 1 fixing a time. -2 death. -क्षेपः 1 delay, loss of time; कालक्षेप ककुभसुरभौ पर्वते पर्वते ते (उत्पश्यामि) Me.22; मरणे कालक्षेपं मा कुरु Pt.1. -2 passing the time. -खञ्जम्, -खञ्जनम् -खण्डम् the liver; स्वादुकारं कालखण्डोपदंशम् Śi.18.77. -गङ्गा the river Yamunā. -ग्रन्थिः a year. -घातिन् a. killing by degrees or slowly (as a poison). -चक्रम् 1 the wheel of time (time being represented as a wheel always moving). -2 a cycle. -3 (hence fig.) the wheel of fortune, the vicissitudes of life. (-क्रः) an epithet of the sun. -चिह्नम् a symptom of approaching death. -चोदित a. summoned by the angel of death. -जोषकः One who is satisfied with sparse food at the proper time. -ज्येष्ठः a. senior in years, grown up; U.5.12. -ज्ञ a. knowing the proper time or occasion (of any action); अत्यारूढो हि नारीणामकालज्ञो मनोभवः R.12.33; Śi.2.83. (-ज्ञः) 1 an astrologer. -2 a cock. -ज्ञानिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -तिन्दुकः a kind of ebony. -त्रयम् the three times; the past, the present, and the future; ˚दर्शी K.46. -दण्डः death; श्रेयस्त्रैविक्रमस्ते वितरतु विबुधद्वेषिणां कालदण्डः Dk. -दमनी an epithet of Durgā. -दष्ट a. doomed to death; कालदष्टं नृपं ज्ञात्वा Bm.1.18. -धर्मः, -धर्मन् m. 1 the line of conduct suitable to any particular time. -2 the law or rule of time. -3 effects proper to the time. -4 fated time, death; कालधर्मं गते सगरे Rām.1.42.1. न पुनर्जीवितः कश्चित्कालधर्ममुपागतः Mb.; परीताः काल- धर्मणा &c. -धारणा prolongation of time. -नरः (in astrology) the figure of a man's body. -नाथः; -निधिः Śiva. -नियोगः decree of fate or destiny; लङ्घ्यते न खलु काल- नियोगः Ki.9.13. -निरूपणम् determination of time, chronology. -निर्यासः Bdellium (Mar. गुग्गुळ). -नेमिः 1 the rim of the wheel of time. -2 N. of a demon, uncle of Rāvaṇa, deputed by him to kill Hanūmat. -3 N. of a demon with 1 hands killed by Viṣṇu. ˚अरिः, रिपुः, हरः, हन् m. epithets of Kṛiṣṇa. -पक्व a. ripened by time; i. e. spontaneously; Ms.6.17,21; Y.3.49. -परिवासः standing for a time so as to become stale. -पर्णः the flower plant (Mar. नगर). -पर्ययः a delay (कालातिक्रम); वक्तुमर्हसि सुग्रीवं व्यतीतं कालपर्यये Rām.4.31.8. -पर्यायः the revolution or course of time; मन्ये लोकविनाशो$यं कालपर्यायनोदितः Mb.11.15.41. -पाशः the noose of Yama or death. -पाशिकः a hangman. -पु (पू) रुषः an attendant of Yama. -पृष्ठम् 1 a species of antelope. -2 a heron. (-कम्) 1 N. of the bow of Karṇa; Ve.4. -2 a bow in general. -प्रभातम् autumn or Śarad; (the two months following the rainy season considered as the best time). -बन्धन a. being under control of death (काल); प्रत्यक्षं मन्यसे कालं मर्त्यः सन् कालबन्धनः Mb.3.35.2. -भक्षः an epithet of Śiva. -भृत् m. the sun. -भैरवः an epithet of Śiva. -मल्लिका, -मान (लः) the plant ocimum (Mar. तुळस). -मालम् a measure of time. -मुखः a species of ape; Mb.3.292.12. -मेषी, -मेशिका, -मेषिका f. the Manjiṣṭha plant. -यवनः a kind of yavanas and enemy of Kṛiṣṇa and an invincible foe of the Yādavas. Kṛiṣṇa, finding it impossible to vanquish him on the field of battle, cunningly decoyed him to the cave where Muchakunda was sleeping who burnt him down. -यापः, -यापनम् procrastination, delay, putting off. -योगः fate, destiny. -योगतः according to the requirements of the time; Pt.1.184. -योगिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -रात्रिः, -रात्री f. 1 a dark night. -2 a sister of Yama. -3 the Amāvasyā on which lamps are lighted (in the Divali holidays). -4 the night of destruction at the end of the world (identified with Durgā); कालरात्रीति तां (सीतां) विद्धि सर्वलङ्का- विनाशिनीम् Rām.5.51.34. -5 a particular night in the life of man, on the 7th day of the 7th month of the 77th year. -रुद्रः Rudra regarded as the fire that is to destroy the world. -लवणम् the बिड salt. (Mar. संचळखार) -लोहक्, -लौहम् steel. -वलनम् the armour. -विप्रकर्षः prolongation of time. विषयबाहुल्यं कालविप्रकर्षश्च स्मृतिं प्रमुष्णाति Mv.5.9. -विभक्तिः f. a section or part of time; Ms.1.24. -वृद्धिः f. periodical interest (payable monthly, quarterly, or at stated times); Ms.8.153. -वृन्तः a kind of pulse (कुलत्थ). -वेला the time of Saturn, i. e. a particular time of the day (half a watch every day) at which any religious act is improper. -संकर्षा a girl nine years old personating Durgā at a festival. -संकर्षिन् a. shortening time (as a mantra); कालसंकर्षिणीं विद्यां दीक्षापूर्वमुपादिशत् Ks.68.65. -संगः a. delay; जानामि कार्यस्य च कालसंगम् Rām.4.33.53. -संरोधः 1 keeping back for a long time; Ms.8.143. -2 lapse of a long period of time; Ms.8.143. -सदृश a. opportune, timely. -समन्वित, -समायुक्त a. dead; Rām.2.65.16. -संपन्न a. dated, bearing a date. -सर्पः the black and most poisonous variety of the snake; Gīt.1.12. -सारः the black antelope. (-रम्) a yellow sort of sandal wood. a. having a black centre or pupil; न कालसारं हरिणं तदक्षिद्वयं प्रभुर्बुद्धुमभून्मनोभूः N.6.19. -सूत्रम्, -सूत्रकम् 1 thread of time or death. -2 N. of a particular hell; Y.3.222; Ms.4.88. -स्कन्दः the Tamāla tree. -स्वरूप a. terrible as death, (deathlike in form). -हरः an epithet of Śiva. -हरणम् loss of time, delay; Ś.3; U.5; यात्वन्येन (वरेण) विहाय कालहरणं रामो वनं दण्डकाम् Mv.4.41. -हानिः f. delay; मामक्षमं मण्डनकालहानेर्वेत्तीव बिम्बाधरबद्धतृष्णम् R.13.16.

kinnara	किन्नर See under किम्. 1 किम् ind. Used for कु only at the beginning of comp. to convey the senses of 'badness', 'deterioration', 'defect', 'blame' or 'censure'; e. g. किंसखा a bad friend; किन्नरः a bad or deformed man &c.; see comp. below. -Comp. -ज a. born somewhere (not in a noble family) मन्ये किंजमहं घ्नन्तं त्वामक्षत्रियजे रणे Bk.6.133. -दासः a bad slave, or servant. -नरः a bad or deformed man; a mythical being with a human figure and the head of a horse (अश्वमुख); चयोदाहरणं बाह्वोर्गापयामास किन्नरान् R.4.78; उद्गास्य- तामिच्छति किन्नराणां तानप्रदायित्वमिवोपगन्तुम् Ku.1.8. ˚ईशः, ˚ईश्वरः 1 an epithet of Kubera. -2 a kind of musical instrument. (-री f.) 1 a female Kinnara; Me.58. -2 a kind of lute. -पुरुषः 'a low or despicable man', a mythical being with a human head and the form of a horse; Ku.1.14; किंपुरुषाणां हनुमान् Bhāg.11.16.29. ˚ईश्वरः an epithet of Kubera. -प्रभुः a bad master or king; हितान्न यः संशृणुते स किंप्रभुः Ki.1.5. -राजन् a. having a bad king. (-m.) a bad king. -विवक्षा Slandering; Rām.5. -सखि m. (nom. sing. किंसखा) a bad friend; स किंसखा साधु न शास्ति यो$धिपम् Ki.1.5. 2 किम् pron. a. (nom. sing. कः m., का f., किम् n.) 1 Who, what, which used interrogatively); प्रजासु कः केन पथा प्रयातीत्यशेषतो वेदितुमस्ति शक्तिः Ś.6.26; करुणाविमुखेन मृत्युना हरता त्वां वद किं न मे हृतम् R.8.67; का खल्वनेन प्रार्थ्यमानात्मना विकत्थते V.2; कः को$त्र भोः. कः कौ के कं कौ कान् हसति च हसतो हसन्ति हरणाक्ष्यः Udb. The pronoun is often used to imply 'power or authority to do a thing'; i. e. के आवां परित्रातुं दुष्यन्तमाक्रन्द Ś.1; 'who are we &c.', i. e. what power have we &c.; नृपसद्मनि नाम के वयम् Bh.3.27; who are we, i. e. what position have we &c. Sometimes किम् means 'long' as applied to time especially in combination with खलु or अपि or इव; का खलु वेला पत्रभवत्याः प्राप्तायाः Ve.1; 'what a time' i. e. a long time has elapsed, &c.; so को$पि कालस्तस्या आगत्य गतायाः Ratn 3; or क इव कालः Māl.3. -2 The neuter (किम्) is frequently used with instr. of nouns in the sense of 'what is the use of'; किं स्वामिचेष्टानिरूपणेन H.1; लोभश्चेदगुणेन किम् &c. Bh.2.55; किं तया दृष्ट्या Ś.3; किं कुलेनोपदिष्टेन शीलमेवात्र कारणम् Mk.9.7. अपि, चित्, चन, चिदपि or स्वित् are often added to किम् to give it an indefinite sense; विवेश कश्चिज्जटिलस्तपोवनम् Ku.5.3. a certain ascetic; दमघोषसुतेन कश्चन प्रतिशिष्टः प्रतिभानवानथ Śi.16.1; कश्चित्कान्ताविरहगुरुणा स्वाधिकारात्प्रमत्तः Me.1. &c.; का$पि तत एवागतवती Māl.1; a certain lady; कस्या$पि को$पिति निवेदितं च 1.33; किमपि, किमपि ... जल्पतोरक्रमेण U.1.27; कस्मिंश्चिदपि महाभागधेयजन्मनि मन्मथ- विकारमुपलक्षितवानस्मि Māl.1; किमपि, किंचित् 'a little', वस्तु- सिद्धिर्विचारेण न किंचित् कर्मकोटिभिः Vivekachūdamaṇi; 'somewhat' Y.2.116; U.6.35. किमपि also means 'indeseribable'; see अपि. इव is sometimes added to किम् in the sense of 'possibly', 'I should like to know'; (mostly adding force and elegance to the period); विना सीतादेव्या किमिव हि न दुःखं रघुपतेः U.6.3; किमिच हि मधुराणां मण्डनं नाकृतीनाम् Ś.1.2; see इव also. -ind. 1 A particle of interrogation; जातिमात्रेण किं कश्चिद्धन्यते पूज्यते क्वचित् H.1.55 'is any one killed or worshipped' &c.; ततः किम् what then. -2 A particle meaning 'why', 'wherefore'; किमकारणमेव दर्शनं बिलपन्त्यै रतये न दीयते Ku.4.7. -3 Whether (its correlatives in the sense of 'or' being किं, उत, उताहो, आहोस्वित्, वा, किंवा, अथवा; see these words). -Comp. -अपि ind. 1 to some extent, somewhat, to a considerable extent. -2 inexpressibly, indescribably (as to quality, quantity, nature &c.). -3 very much, by far; किमपि कमनीयं वपुरिदम् Ś.3; किमपि भीषणम्, किमपि करालम् &c. -अर्थ a. having what motive or aim; किमर्थोयं यत्नः. -अर्थम् ind. why, wherefore. -आख्य a. having what name; किमाख्यस्य राजर्षेः सा पत्नी. Ś.7. -इति ind. why, indeed, why to be sure, for what purpose (emphasizing the question); तत्किमित्युदासते भरताः Māl.1; किमित्यपास्याभरणानि यौवने धृतं त्वया वार्धकशोभि वल्कलम् Ku.5.44. -उ, -उत 1 whether-or (showing doubt or uncertainty); किमु विष- विसर्पः किमु मदः U.1.35; Amaru.12. -2 why (indeed) कं च ते परमं कामं करोमि किमु हर्षितः Rām.1.18.52. प्रियसुहृ- त्सार्थः किमु त्यज्यते. -3 how much more, how much less; यौवनं धनसंपत्तिः प्रभुत्वमविवेकिता । एकैकम यनर्थाय किमु यत्र चतुष्टयम् ॥ .II Pr.11; सर्वाविनयानामेकैकमप्येषामायतनं किमुत समवायः K.13; R.14.35; Ku.7.65. -कथिका f. A doubt or hesitation; यत्र कर्मणि क्रियमाणे किंकथिका न भवति तत्कर्तव्यम् । यत्र तु हृदयं न तुष्यति तद्वर्जनीयम् ॥ Medhātithi's gloss on Ms.4.161. -करः a servant, slave; अवेहि मां किंकरमष्टमूर्तेः R.2.35. (-रा) a female servant. (-री) the wife of a servant. -कर्तव्यता, -कार्यता any situation in which one asks oneself what should be done; यथा किंकार्यतामूढा वयस्यास्तस्य जज्ञिरे Ks.1.11. किंकर्तव्यतामूढः 'being at a loss or perplexed what to do'. -कारण a. having what reason or cause, -किल ind. what a pity (expressing displeasure or dissatisfaction न संभावयामि न मर्षयामि तत्रभवान् किंकिल वृषलं याजयिष्यति Kāshika on P.III.3.146. -कृते ind. what for ? कामस्य किंकृते पुष्पकार्मुकारोपणग्रहः Ks.71.79. -क्षण a. one who says 'what is a moment', a lazy fellow who does not value moments; H.2.89. -गोत्र a. belonging to what family; किंगोत्रो नु सोम्यासि Ch. Up.4.4.4. -च ind. moreover, and again, further. -चन ind. to a certain degree, a little; -चित् ind. to a certain degree, somewhat, a little; किंचिदुत्क्रान्तशैशवौ R.15.33, 2.46,12.21. ˚ज्ञ a. 'knowing little', a smatterer. ˚कर a. doing something useful. ˚कालः sometime, a little time. ˚प्राण a. having a little life. ˚मात्र a. only a little. -छन्दस् a. conversant with which Veda. -स्तनुः a species of spider. -तर्हि ind. how then, but, however. -तु ind. but, yet, however, nevertheless; अवैमि चैनामनघेति किंतु लोकापवादो बलवान्मतो मे R.14.43,1.65. -तुघ्नः one of the eleven periods called Karaṇa. -दवः an inferior god, demi-god; किंदेवाः किन्नराः नागाः किम्पुरुषादयः Bhāg.11.14.6. -देवत a. having what deity. -नामधेय, -नामन् a. having what name. -निमित्त a. having what cause or reason, for what purpose. -निमित्तम् ind. why, wherefore, -नु ind. 1 whether; किं नु मे मरणं श्रेयो परित्यागो जनस्य वा Nala.1.1. -2 much more, much less; अपि त्रैलोक्यराज्यस्य हेतोः किं नु महीकृते Bg.1.35. -3 what indeed; किं नु मे राज्येनार्थः -4 but, however; किं नु चित्तं मनुष्याणामनित्यमिति मे मतम् Rām.2.4.27. -नु खलु ind. 1 how possibly, how is it that, why indeed, why to be sure; किं नु खलु गीतार्थमाकर्ण्य इष्टजनविरहा- दृते$पि बलवदुत्कण्ठितो$स्मि Ś.5. -2 may it be that; किं नु खलु यथा वयमस्यामेवमियमप्यस्मान् प्रति स्यात् Ś.1. -पच, -पचान a. miserly, niggardly. -पराक्रम a. of what power or energy. -पाक a. not mature, ignorant, stupid. -कः a. medical plant, Strychnos nux vomica (Mar. कुचला); न लुब्धो बुध्यते दोषान्किंपाकमिव भक्षयन् Rām.2.66.6. -पुनर् ind. how much more, how much less; स्वयं रोपितेषु तरुषूत्पद्यते स्नेहः किं पुनरङ्गसंभवेष्वपत्येषु K.291; Me.3.17; Ve.3. -पुरुषः an inferior man, Bhāg.11.14.6. -प्रकारम् ind. in what manner. -प्रभाव a. possessing what power. -भूत a. of what sort of nature. -रूप a. of what form or shape. -वदन्ति, -न्ती f. rumour, report; स किंवदन्तीं वदतां पुरोगः (पप्रच्छ) R.14.31. मत्संबन्धात्कश्मला किंवदन्ती U.1.42; U.1.4. -वराटकः an extravagant man. -वा ind. 1 a particle of interrogation; किं वा शकुन्तलेत्यस्य मातुराख्या Ś.7. -2 or (corr. of किं 'whether'); राजपुत्रि सुप्ता किं वा जागर्षि Pt.1; तत्किं मारयामि किं वा विषं प्रयच्छामि किं वा पशुधर्मेण व्यापादयामि ibid.; Ś. Til.7. -विद a. knowing what. -व्यापार a. following what occupation. -शील a. of what habits, -स्वित् ind. whether, how; अद्रेः शृङ्गं हरति पवनः किंस्विदित्युन्मुखीभिः Me.14.

kuṭaṅgakaḥ	कुटङ्गकः 1 An armour formed by creeping plants overrunning a tree. -2 A small house, hut or cottage.

klinna	क्लिन्न a. 1 Wet, moistened; running (as an eye). -2 Rotted, putrified; Charak 1.11,27. -3 Soft, moved (as heart); क्लिन्नधियं च मातरम् Bhāg.4.3.1;9.11.5. -Comp. -अक्ष a. blear-eyed. -वर्त्मन् n. watering of the eyes. -हृद् a. tender-hearted.

kledaḥ	क्लेदः [क्लिद्-भावे घञ्] 1 Wetness, moisture, dampness; Śānti 1.29; तदञ्जनक्लेदसमाकुलाक्षम् R.7.27. -2 Running, discharge from a sore; Ms.7.55.23. -3 Distress, suffering; कुशलवोन्मृष्टगर्भक्लेदः R.15.32. (= उपद्रव Malli.)

kṣayaḥ	क्षयः [क्षि-अच्] 1 A house, residence, abode; यातनाश्च यमक्षये Ms.6.61; निर्जगाम पुनस्तस्मात्क्षयान्नारायणस्य ह Mb. -2 Loss, decline, waste, wane, decay, diminution; आयुषः क्षयः R.3.69; धनक्षये वर्धति जाठराग्निः Pt.2.186; so चन्द्रक्षयः, क्षयपक्षः &c. -3 Destruction, end, termination; निशाक्षये याति ह्रियैव पाण्डुताम् Ṛs.1.9; Amaru.6. -4 Pecuniary loss; Ms.8.41. -5 Fall (as of prices.) -6 Removal. -7 Universal destruction (प्रलय). -8 Consumption. -9 A disease in general. -1 The negative sign or quantity, minus (in algebra). -11 Family, race. -12 The house of Yama. -13 A part of the elephant's knee (गजजानुभागविशेषः); Mātaṅga L.5.15. -14 Power (क्षी क्षयैश्वर्ययोरित्यैश्वर्यार्थस्य क्षिधातो रूपम् -Com. on Mb.12.33.2); उपपद्यति संयोगाद् गुणैः सह गुणक्षयात् ibid. -यम् N. of the last year in the sixty years cycle. -Comp. -उपशमः complete annihilation of the desire of being active (Jaina). -कर (also क्षयंकर) a. causing decay or destruction, ruinous. -कालः 1 time of universal destruction. -2 the period of decline. -कासः consumptive cough. -तिथिः, f. -क्षयाहः the lunar day not beginning with the sun-rise, hence omitted in the calendar. -पक्षः the dark fortnight. क्षयपक्ष इवैन्दवीः कलाः सकला हन्ति स शक्तिसंपदः Ki.2.37. -2 a fortnight of 13 days. -मासः the month in which two संक्रान्तिs occur and which is omitted in the adjustment of the lunar-solar calender. -युक्तिः f., -योगः an opportunity of destroying; Ki.2.9. -रोगः consumption. -वायुः the wind that is to blow at the destruction of the world. -संपद् f. total loss, ruin.

khaṇḍana	खण्डन a. [खण़्ड्-ल्युट्] 1 Breaking, cutting, dividing. -2 Destroying, annihilating; स्मरगरलखण्डनं मम शिरसि मण्डनम् Gīt.1; भवज्वरखण्डन 12. -नम् 1 Breaking or cutting. -2 Biting; injuring, hurting; अधरोष्ठखण्डनम् Pt.1; घटय भुजबन्धनं जनय रदखण्डनम् Gīt.1; Ch. P.12; दर्शनेन कृतखण्डनव्यथाः R.19.21. -3 Disappointing, frustrating (as in love). -4 Interrupting; रसखण्डनवर्जितम् R.9.36. -5 Cheating, deceiving. -6 Refuting (in argument); N.6.113. -7 Rebellion, opposition. -8 Dismissal. -Comp. -खण्डखाद्यम् N. of a work on logic by Harṣa. -रतम् Skilful in cutting or destroying. खण्डनीय khaṇḍanīya खण्डयितव्य khaṇḍayitavya खण्डनीय खण्डयितव्य pot. p. 1 To be broken, fragile, brittle. -2 Destructible. -3 Refutable &c.

khaṇḍita	खण्डित p. p. [खण्ड्-क्त] 1 Cut, broken in pieces. -2 Destroyed, annihilated, lost, decayed; खण्डिते च वसुनि Bh.3.33. -3 Refuted (in argument), controverted. -4 Rebelled. -5 Disappointed, betrayed, abandoned; खण्डितयुवतिविलापम् Gīt.8. -6 Disregarded (in order); मण्डले खण्डिताज्ञत्वं दिद्दायाः समजृम्भत Rāj. T.6.229. -ता A woman whose husband or lover has been guilty of infidelity, and who is therefore angry with him; one of the 8 principal Nāyikas in Sanskrit; निद्रावशेन भवता- प्यनवेक्षमाणा पर्युत्सुकत्वमबला निशि खण्डितेव R.5.67; Me.41. She is thus described :-- पार्श्वमेति प्रियो यस्या अन्यसंभोगचिह्नितः । सा खण्डितेति कथिता धीरैरीर्ष्याकषायिता ॥ S. D.114. -Comp. -विग्रह a. maimed, mutilated; खण्डितविग्रहं बलभिदो धनुरिह विविधाः पूरयितुं भवन्ति विभवः शिखरमणिरुचः Ki.5.43. -वृत्त a. immoral, dissolute, abandoned; Mk.2. -व्रत a. One who has violated his vow.

khoṭiḥ	खोटिः f. A cunning or shrewd woman.

gaṇḍiḥ	गण्डिः 1 The trunk of a tree from the root to the beginning of the branches. -2 Goitre.

gata	गत p. p. [गम्-क्त] 1 Gone, departed, gone for ever; Mu.1.25; किं गते सलिले सेतुबन्धेन, किं गते विवाहे नक्षत्रपरीक्षया Vb.4. 'what is the use of locking the stable-door when the steed is stolen ?' -2 Passed away, elapsed, past; गदायां रात्रौ. -3 Dead, deceased, departed to the next world; गत एव न ते निवर्तते Ku.4.3. -4 Gone to, arrived at, reaching to. -5 Being in, situated in, resting on, contained in; usually in comp.; प्रासादप्रान्तगतः Pt.1 seated on &c.; सदोगतः R.3.66 seated in the assembly; भर्तारं गता Ś.4.13 united to a husband; so आद्य˚; सर्वगत existing everywhere. -6 Fallen into, reduced to; e. g. आपद्गतः -7 Referring or relating to, with regard to, about, concerning, connected with (usually in comp.); राजा शकुन्तलागतमेव चिन्तयति Ś.5; भर्तृगतया चिन्तया Ś4; वयमपि भवत्यौ सखीगतं किमपि पृच्छामः Ś1; so पुत्रगतः स्नेहः &c. -8 Frequented, resorted to; सुहृद्˚ Ku.4.24. -9 Known, celebrated. -1 Directed towards, belonging to. -11 Known, understood. -तम् 1 Motion, going; गतमुपरि घनानां वारिगर्भोदराणाम् Ś.7.7; Śi.1.2, 7.4. -2 Gait, manner of going; Ku.1.34; हंस प्रयच्छ मे कान्ता गतिरस्यास्त्वया हृता V.4.16. -3 An event. -4 The place where one has gone. -5 Celebration, being known, diffusion; यावन्नाम्नो गतम् Ch. Up.7.1.5. -6 Manner. (As first member of comp. translated by 'free from', 'bereft of', 'deprived of', 'without'.) -Comp. -अक्ष a. sightless, blind. -अध्वन् a. 1 one who has accomplished or finished a journey; बलैरध्युषि- तास्तस्य विजिगीषोर्गताध्वनः R.4.46,11.33. -2 conversant, familiar (with anything); त्रिविधे मोक्षधर्मे$स्मिन्गताध्वा छिन्नसंशयः Mb.12.32.25. (-f.) the time immediately preceding new moon when a small streak of the moon is still visible; (चतुर्दशीयुक्ता$मावास्या). -अनुगतम् following custom or precedent. -अनुगतिक a. doing as others do, a blind follower; गतानुगतिको लोको न लोकः पार- मार्थिकः Pt.1.342 'people are blind followers or servile imitators'; Mu.6.5. -अन्त a. one whose end has arrived. -अर्थ a. 1 poor. -2 meaningless (the meaning being already expressed). -असु, -जीवित, -प्राण a. expired, dead; गतासूनगतासूंश्च नानुशोचन्ति पण़्डिताः Bg.2.11. -आगतम् 1 going and coming, frequent visits; आदित्यस्य गतागतैरहरहः संक्षीयते जीवितम् Bh.3.7; Bg.9.21; Mu.2.3; 4.1. -2 interchange of place; कष्टं स्मरामि तव तानि गता- गतानि Māl.9.47. -3 the flight of a bird backward and forward. -4 irregular course of the stars (in astronomy). -5 Narration of past and future; स सर्वमखिलं राज्ञो वंशस्याह गतागतम् Rām.7.51.23. -आधि a. free from anxiety, happy. -आयुस् a. decrepit, infirm, very old. -आर्तवा 1 a woman past her child-bearing. -2 a barren woman. -उत्साह a. disspirited, dejected. -ओजस् a. bereft of strength or energy. -कल्मष a. freed from crime or sin, purified. -क्लम a. refreshed; संविशेत्तु यथाकालमुत्तिष्ठेच्च गतक्लमः Ms.7.225. -चेतन a. deprived of sense or consciousness, insensible, senseless. -त्रप a. bold, without fear or shame; Bhāg.8.8.29. -दिनम्, -दिवसः the past day, yesterday. -दिनम् ind.. yesterday. -प्रत्यागत a. returned after having gone away; Ms.7.186. -प्रभ a. bereft of splendour, dim, obscured, faded. -प्राण a. lifeless, dead. -प्राय a. almost gone, nearly passed away; गतप्राया रजनी. -भर्तृका 1 a widow. -2 (rarely) a woman whose husband has gone abroad (= प्रोषितभर्तृका); किमु मुहुर्मुहुर्गतमर्तृकाः Śi. -मनस्क a. thinking of (loc.); सपदि गतमनस्कः (प्रियायाः केशपाशे) R. 9.67. -लक्ष्मीक a. 1 bereft of lustre or splendour, faded. -2 deprived of wealth, impoverished, suffering losses. -वयस्, -वयस्क a. advanced in years, aged, old; गतवयसामपि पुंसां येषामर्था भवन्ति ते तरुणाः Pt.1.1. -वर्षः, -र्षम् the past year. -वैर a. at peace (with), reconciled. -व्यथ a. free from pain; प्रत्तां दुहितरं सम्राट् सदृक्षाय गत- व्यथः Bhāg.3.22.24. -शैशव a. past child-hood. -श्रम a. unmindful of troubles; आदित्यपथमाश्रित्य जगाम स गतश्रमः Rām.6.74.5. -सङ्ग a. 1 free from attachment; गतसङ्गस्य युक्तस्य Bg.4.23. -2 adverse or indifferent to. -सत्त्व a. 1 dead, annihilated, lifeless. -2 base. -सन्नकः an elephant out of rut. -स्पृह a. indifferent to worldly attachments; गतस्पृहो धैर्यधरः कृपालुः Vaidyajīvanam.

gatiḥ	गतिः f. [गम्-भावे क्तिन्] 1 Motion, going, moving, gait; गतिर्विगलिता Pt.4.78; अभिन्नगतयः Ś.1.14; (न) भिन्दन्ति मन्दां गतिमश्वमुख्यः Ku.1.11 do not mend their slow gait (do not mend their pace); so गगनगतिः Pt.1; लघुगतिः Me.16; U.6.23. -2 Access, entrance; मणौ वज्रसमुत्कीर्णे सूत्रस्येवा- स्ति मे गतिः R.1.4. -3 Scope, room; अस्त्रगतिः Ku.3.19; मनोरथानामगतिर्न विद्यते Ku.5.64; नास्त्यगतिर्मनोरथानाम् V.2. -4 Turn, course; दैवगतिर्हि चित्रा, Mu.7.16. -5 Going to, reaching, obtaining; वैकुण्ठीया गतिः Pt.1 obtaining Heaven. -6 Fate, issue; भर्तुर्गतिर्गन्तव्या Dk.13. -7 State, condition; दानं भोगो नाशस्तिस्रो गतयो भवन्ति वित्तस्य Bh.2.43; Pt.1.16. -8 Position, station, situation, mode of existence; परार्ध्यगतेः पितुः R.8.27; कुसुमस्तबकस्येव द्वे गती स्तो मनस्विनाम् Bh.2.14; Pt.1.41,42. -9 A means, expedient, course, alternative; अनुपेक्षणे द्वयी गतिः Mu.3; का गतिः what help is there, can't help (often used in dramas) Pt.1.319; अन्या गतिर्नास्ति K.158; cf. also अगतिका हि एषा गतिः यत् कृत्स्नसंयोगे सति विकल्पसमुच्चयौ स्याताम् ŚB. on MS.1.5.47. -1 Recourse, shelter, refuge, asylum, resort; विद्यमानां गतिर्येषाम् Pt.1.32,322; आसयत् सलिले पृथ्वीं यः स मे श्रीहरिर्गतिः Sk. -11 Source, origin, acquisition; क्रियाविशेषबहुलां भोगैश्वर्यगतिं प्रति Bg.2.43; Ms.1.5. -12 a way, path. -13 A march, procession. -14 An event, issue, result. -15 The course of events, fate, fortune. -16 Course of asterisms. -17 The diurnal motion of a planet in its orbit. -18 A running wound or sore, fistula. -19 Knowing; अपेन पूर्वं न मयेति का गतिः Ki.14.15; knowledge, wisdom. -2 Transmigration, metempsychosis; Ms.6.73;12.3,23,4-45; त्यज बुद्धिमिमां गतिप्रवृत्ताम् Bu. Ch.5.36; Bhāg.1.17.1. -21 A stage or period of life, (as शैशव, यौवन, वार्धक). -22 (In gram.) A term for preposition and some other adverbial prefixes (such as अलम्, तिरस् &c.) when immediately connected with the tenses of a verb or verbal derivatives. -23 Position of a child at birth. -Comp. -अनुसरः following the course of another. -ऊन a. impassable, desert. -भङ्गः stoppage. -हीन a. without refuge, helpless, forlorn.

gatimat	गतिमत् a. 1 In motion, moving; गिरिरिव गतिमानपक्ष- लोपात् V.3.3. -2 Having running sores, fistulous. -3 Possessing means (such as wealth, books &c.); अगाधाश्चाप्रतिष्ठाश्च गतिमन्तश्च नारद Mb.12.286.7. com. -4 Learned.

garbhaḥ	गर्भः [गॄ-भन् Uṇ.3.152] 1 The womb, the belly; गर्भेषु वसतिः Pt.1; पुनर्गर्भे च संभवम् Ms.6.63. -2 A fœtus, embryo; act of conception, pregnancy; conception; नरपतिकुलभूत्यै गर्भमाधत्त राज्ञी P.2.75; गर्भो$भवद्भूधरराज- पत्न्याः Ku.1.19; गर्भं वहति Pt.1.3 bears a child in the womb. -3 The time of conception; गर्भाष्टमे$ब्दे कुर्वित ब्राह्मणस्योपनायनम् Ms.2.36. -4 The child (in the womb); Ś.6; ततः कुमारं सुरगर्भकल्पम् Bu. Ch.2.19; cf. 'गर्भो भ्रूणे$- र्भके कुक्षौ' Medinī. -5 A child, brood or offspring of birds. -6 The inside, middle, or interior of anything (in comp. in this sense and translated by 'full of', 'filled with', 'containing' &c); हिमगर्भैर्मयूखैः Ś.3.4; शुक˚ कोटर 1.14;7.7; ˚पत्रम् U.3.5. inwardly situated; अग्निगर्भां शमीमिव Ś.4.4; R.3.9;5.17;9.55; Śi.9.62; Māl.3.12; Mu.1.12. -7 The offspring of the sky, i. e. the vapours and fogs drawn upwards by the rays of the sun during 8 months and sent down again in the rainy season; cf. Ms.9.35; नवमासधृतं गर्भं भास्करस्य गभस्तिभिः Rām.4.28.3. -8 An inner apartment, a lying-in-chamber. -9 Any interior chamber. -1 A hole. -11 Fire. -12 Food. -13 The rough coat of the jack-fruit (पनसकण्टक). -14 the bed of a river, especially of the Ganges on the fourteenth day of the dark half of Bhādrapada or in the very height of the rains when the river is fullest. -15 The fruit (of plants). -16 Joining, union. -17 The calyx of the lotus. -18 (In dramas) One of the Sandhis q. v. -Comp. -अङ्कः (also गर्भे$ङ्कः) an interlude during an act, as the scene of the birth of Kuśa and Lava in U.7, or the सीतास्वयंवर in Bālarāmāyaṇa. The S. D. thus defines it :-- अङ्कोदर- प्रविष्टो यो रङ्गद्वारामुखादिमान् । अङ्को$परः स गर्भाङ्कः सबीजः फलवानपि ॥ 279. -अवक्रान्तिः f. descent of the soul into the womb. -अवटः see गर्भभाजनम्. -अष्टमः 1 the eighth month from conception. -2 the eighth year from conception. -अस्पन्दनम् non-quickening of the fœtus. -आगारम् 1 uterus. -2 an inner and private room, the female apartments. -3 a lying-in-chamber. -4 the body or sanctuary of a temple, the chamber where the image of a deity is placed; एकैव देवं द्रष्टुं च गर्भागारमथाविशत् Ks.7.71. -आधानम् 1 impregnation; गर्भाधानक्षणपरिच- यान्नूनमाबद्धमालाः (बलाकाः) Me.9. -2 one of the Saṁskāras or purificatory ceremonies performed after menstruation to ensure or facilitate conception; (this ceremony legalizes in a religious sense the consummation of marriage); Y.1.11. -आशयः the uterus, the womb. -आस्रावः mis-carriage, abortion. -ईश्वरः one born rich (cf. 'born in the purple'); a sovereign or rich man by birth. ˚ता sovereignty attained by inheritance; प्राप्तैश्वर्यो भवेन्मूढो गर्भेश्वरतयान्यथा Rāj. T.5.199. -उत्पत्तिः f. the formation of the embryo. -उपघातः miscarriage of the embryo (applied to the sky); Bṛi. S.21.25. -उपघातिनी a cow or female miscarrying from unseasonable gestation. -उपपत्तिः f. formation of the embryo. -कर, -कार a. impregnating, procreative. -कालः 1 time of impregnation. -2 the time when the vapour collected in the air shows the first signs of life. -कोशः, -षः uterus. -क्लेशः pains caused by the embryo, the throes of parturition or childbirth. -क्षयः miscarriage. -गृहम्, -भवनम्, -वेश्मन् n. 1 an inner apartment, the body of a house; Mb.5.118.19; R.19.42. -2 a lying-in-chamber. -3 the sanctuary or body of a temple; निर्गत्य गर्भभवनात् Māl.1. -ग्रहणम् impregnation, conception. -ग्राहिका a midwife; Ks.34. -घातिन् a. causing abortion. -चलनम् quickening, motion of the fœtus in the uterus. -चेटः a servant by birth; नर्मभिर्गर्भचेटानां द्वास्थानां विक्रियाक्रमैः Rāj. T.3.153. -च्युत a. 1 fallen from the womb (as a child). -2 miscarrying. -च्युतिः f. 1 birth; delivery. -2 miscarriage. -दासः, -सी a slave by birth; (often used as a term of abuse or reproach.); यथा गर्भदासः कर्मार्थ एव स्वामिनो$नड्वाँश्च क्रीयते । ŚB. on MS.3.1.2. -दिवसाः certain days on which the vapours collected in the air show signs of life; Bṛi.21.5. -द्रुह् a. (nom. sing. ˚ध्रुक्-ड्) causing abortion. -धम् Ved. semen virile. -धरा pregnant. -धारणम्, -धारणा gestation, impregnation. -धिः Ved. 1 a breeding place, a nest; कपोत इव गर्भधिम् Rv.1.3.4. -2 cohabitation. -ध्वंसः abortion. -नाडी the umbilical cord. -नुद् a. causing abortion. -न्यासः 1 laying the foundation. -2 the foundations. -परिस्रवः secundines or fœtal membranes collectively. -पाकिन् m. rice ripening in sixty days. -पातः miscarriage after the fourth month of pregnancy. -पोषणम्, -भर्मन् n. nourishment of the fœtus, gestation; अनुष्ठिते भिषग्भिराप्तैरथ गर्भभर्मणि R.3.12. -भाजनम् the foundation pit, the excavation. -मण्डपः an inner apartment, a bed-chamber. -मासः month of pregnancy. -मोचनम् delivery, birth. -योपा a pregnant woman; (fig.) the Ganges overflowing its banks. -रक्षणम् protecting the fœtus. -रन्धिः complete cooking; स्थाल्य- ग्नितापात्पयसो$मितापस्तत्तापतस्तण्डुलगर्भरन्धिः Bhāg.5.1.22. -रूप a. childish, youthful, juvenile. -रूपः, -रूपकः a child, an infant, a youth. -लक्षण a. observing the signs of the rainy season. (-णम्) a symptom of pregnancy. -लम्भनम् a ceremony performed for the sake of facilitating and developing pregnancy. -वसतिः f., -वासः 1 the womb; असकृद्गर्भवासेषु वासं जन्म च दारुणम् Ms.12.78. -2 being in the womb. -विच्युतिः f. abortion in the beginning of pregnancy. -विपत्तिः death of the fœtus. -वेदना throes of child-birth. -व्याकरणम् the formation of the embryo. -शङ्कुः a kind of instrument for extracting the dead fœtus. -शय्या the abode of the fœtus or uterus. -संभवः, -संभूतिः f. becoming pregnant; वर्षद्वयं प्रविष्टस्य वर्तत$न्तःपुरे$त्र मे । तदेषा गर्भसंभूतिः कुतः संप्रति कथ्यताम् Ks.5.61. -संभवा a kind of cardamoms (Mar. एलची). -स्थ a. 1 situated in the womb. -2 interior, internal. -स्रावः abortion, miscarriage; वरं गर्भस्रावः Pt.1; Y.3.2; Ms.5.66.

gava	गव (A substitute for गो at the beginning of certain compounds, especially before words beginning with vowels or as the second member of Dvigu comp.; पञ्चगवम् five cows; गवाकृति cow-shaped). -Comp. -अक्षः 1 an air hole, a round window; विलोलनेत्रभ्रमरैर्गवाक्षाः सहस्रपत्राभरणा इवासन् R.7.11; कुवलयितगवाक्षां लोचनैरङ्गनानाम् 11.93; Ku. 7.58; Me.1. ˚जालम् a lattice. -2 the mesh of a shirt of mail. -अक्षकः an air-hole. -अक्षित a. furnished with windows. -अग्रम् a multitude of cows; (written as गो$ग्रम्, गोअग्रम् and गवाग्रम्). -अदनम् pasture or meadow grass. -अदनी 1 a pasture. -2 a manger, a trough for holding grass &c. for feeding cattle. -अधिका lac. -अनृतम् a lie on cow's oath (अनृतगोशपथस्य पापम्); तस्या- धर्मो गवानृतम् Mb.13.23.33; Ms.8.98. -अमृतम् 1 the beverage or nectar consisting of rays of light. -2 cow's milk. -अर्ह a. of the value of a cow. -अविकम् cattle and sheep. -अशनः 1 a shoe-maker. -2 an out-cast. -अश्वम् bulls and horses. -आकृति a. cow-shaped. -आलम्भः the cow-killing in मधुपर्क rite. -आह्निकम् the daily measure of food given to a cow; a kind of व्रत; निरुद्विग्नस्तु यो दद्यान्मासमेकं गवाह्निकम् Mb.13.133.3. -इन्द्रः 1 an owner of kine. -2 an excellent bull. -ईशः, -ईश्वरः an owner of cows. -उद्धः an excellent cow or bull; Rām.4.28.43; Mb.13.78.14. -राजः a bull.

giri	गिरि a. [गॄ-इ किच्च Uṇ.4.142] Venerable, respectable, worshipful. -रिः 1 A hill, mountain, an elevation; पश्याधः खनने मूढ गिरयो न पतन्ति किम् Subhāṣ.; ननु प्रवाते$पि निष्कम्पा गिरयः Ś.6. -2 a huge rock. -3*** A disease of the eyes. -4 An honorific title given to Saṁnyāsins; e. g. आनन्दगिरिः -5 (In math.) The number 'eight'. -6 A ball with which children play (गेन्दुक). -7 A cloud. -8 A peculiar defect in quicksilver. -रिः f. 1 Swallowing. -2 A rat; mouse (written also गिरी in this sense). -Comp. -इन्द्रः 1 a high mountain. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -3 the Himālaya mountain. -4 a term for the number 'eight'. -ईशः 1 an epithet of the Himālaya mountain. -2 an epithet of Śiva; सुतां गिरीशप्रतिसक्तमानसाम् Ku.5.3. -कच्छपः a species of tortoise living in mountains. -कण्टकः Indra's thunderbolt. -कदम्बः, -म्बकः a species of the Kadamba tree. -कन्दरः a cave, cavern. -कर्णिका the earth. -काणः a blind or one-eyed man. -काननम् a mountain-grove. -कूटम् the summit of a mountain. -गङ्गा N. of a river. -गुडः a ball for playing with. -गुहा a mountain-cave. -चर a. roaming or wandering on a mountain; गिरिचर इव नागः प्राणसारं बिभर्ति Ś.2.4. (-रः) a thief. -ज a. mountain-born. (-जम्) 1 talc. -2 red chalk. -3 benzoin. -4 bitumen. -5 iron. (-जा) 1 N. of Pārvatī (the daughter of Himālaya). -2 the hill plantain (पर्वतकदली) -3 the Mallikā creeper. -4 an epithet of the Ganges. -तनयः, -नन्दनः, -सुतः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya. -2 of Gaṇeśa. ˚धवः, ˚पतिः an epithet of Śiva; Ks.56.43. ˚मलम् talc. -जालम् a range of mountains. -ज्वरः Indra's thunderbolt. -त्रः N. of Śiva; अहं गिरित्रश्च Bhāg.8.6.15. -दुर्गम् a hill-fort, any stronghold among mountains; नृदुर्गं गिरिदुर्गं वा समाश्रित्य वसेत्पुरम् Ms.7.7,71. -द्वारम् a mountain-pass. -धातुः red chalk; बालार्कसमवर्णेन तेजसा गिरिधातुना Rām.2.95.19. (v. l.) -ध्वजम् Indra's thunderbolt. -नगरम् N. of a district in Dakṣiṇāpatha. -णदी or नदी a mountain-torrent, rill. -णद्ध (नद्ध) a. enclosed by a mountain. -नन्दिनी 1 N. of Pārvatī. -2 of the Ganges. -3 a river in general (flowing from a mountain;) कलिन्दगिरिनन्दिनी- तटसुरद्रुमालम्बिनी Bv.4.3. -णितम्बः (नितम्बः) the declivity of a mountain. -पीलुः N. of a fruit-tree. -पुष्पकम् bitumen. -पृष्ठः the top of a hill; Ms.7.147. -प्रपातः the declivity or slope of a mountain; -प्रस्थः the tableland of a mountain; Rām.2. -प्रिया a female of the Bos Grunniens. -बान्धवः an epithet of Śiva -भिद् m. an epithet of Indra. (-f.) a river (breaking through a mountain). -भू a. mountain-born. (-भूः f.) 1 an epithet of the Ganges. -2 of Pārvatī. -मल्लिका the Kuṭaja tree. -मानः an elephant, especially a large and powerful one. -मृद् f., -मृद्भवम् 1 red chalk. -2 mountain soil. -राज् m. 1 a high mountain. -2 an epithet of the Himālaya. -राजः the Himālaya mountain. -व्रजम् N. of a city in Magadha. -शालः a kind of bird. -शृङ्गः an epithet of Gaṇeśa. (-गम्) the peak of a mountain. -षद् (सद्) m. an epithet of Śiva. -सानु n. table-land. -सारः 1 iron. -2 tin. -3 an epithet of the Malaya mountain. -सुतः the Maināka mountain. -सुता an epithet of Pārvatī. -स्रवा a mountaintorrent; गिरिस्रवाभिः सर्वाभिः पृष्ठतो$नुगता शुभा Mb.13.14.25.

grāha	ग्राह a. (-ही f.) [ग्रह् भावे घञ्] Seizing, clutching; taking, holding, receiving &c. -हः 1 Seizing, grasping; हस्तग्राहं तु तं मत्वा Rām.7.34.2. -2 A crocodile, shark; रागग्राहवती Bh.3.45. -3 A prisoner. -4 Accepting. -5 Understanding, knowledge. -6 Persistence, importunity; तव मातुरसद्ग्राहं विद्म पूर्वं यथा श्रुतम् Rām.2.35.18. -7 Determination, resolve; मूढग्राहेणात्मनो यत्पीडया क्रियते तपः Bg. 17.19. -8 A disease. -9 Any large fish or marine animal; जग्राहाजगरो ग्राहो भुजयोरुभयोर्बलात् Mb.3.178.28; Ki.13.24. -1 Morbid affection, disease. -11 Beginning, undertaking. -12 The handle (of a sword &c.). -13 Paralysis. -ही A female crocodile.

catur	चतुर् num. a. [चत्-उरन् Uṇ.5.58] (always in pl.; m. चत्वारः; f. चतस्रः; n. चत्वारि) Four; चत्वारो वयमृत्विजः Ve.1.25; चतस्रो$वस्था बाल्यं कौमारं यौवनं वार्धकं चेति; चत्वारि शृङ्गा त्रयो अस्य पादाः &c.; शेषान् मासान् गमय चतुरो लोचने मील- यित्वा Me.11. -ind. Four times. [cf. Zend chathru; Gr. tessares; L. quatuor.] [In Comp. the र् of चतुर् is changed to a Visarga (which in some cases becomes श्, ष् or स्, or remains unchanged) before words beginning with hard consonants.] -Comp. -अंशः a fourth part. -अङ्ग a. having 4 members, quadripartite. (-ङ्म्) 1 a complete army consisting of elephants, chariots, cavalry and infantry; चतुरङ्गसमायुक्तं मया सह च तं नय Rām.1.2. 1; एको हि खञ्जनवरो नलिनीदलस्थो दृष्टः करोति चतुरङ्गबलाधिपत्यम् Ś. Til.4; चतुरङ्गबलो राजा जगतीं वशमानयेत् । अहं पञ्चाङ्गबलवाना- काशं वशमानये ॥ Subhāṣ. -2 a sort of chess. -अङ्गिकः A kind of horse, having four curls on the forehead; यस्य ललाटे भ्रमरचतुष्टयं स चतुरङ्किको नाम । Śālihotra of Bhoj.25. -अङ्गिन् a. having four parts. (-नी) a complete army, see चतुरङ्ग. -अङ्गुलम् 1 the four fingers of the hand. -2 four fingers broad. -अन्त a. bordered on all sides; भूत्वा चिराय चतुरन्तमहीसपत्नी Ś.4.19. -अन्ता the earth. -अशीत a. eighty-fourth. -अशीति a. or f. eighty four. -अश्र, -अस्र a. (for अश्रि-स्रि) 1 four cornered, quardrangular; R.6.1. A quality of gems; Kau. A.2.11. -2 symmetrical, regular or handsome in all parts; बभूव तस्याश्चतुरस्रशोभि वपुः Ku.1.32. (-श्रः, स्रः) 1 a square. -2 a quardrangular figure. -3 (in astr.) N. of the fourth and eighth lunar mansions. -अहन् a period of four days. -आत्मन् m. N. of Viṣṇu. -आननः, -मुखः an epithet of Brahmā; इतरतापशतानि यथेच्छया वितर तानि सहे चतुरानन Udb. -आश्रमम् the four orders or stages of the religious life of a Brāhmaṇa. -उत्तर a. increased by four. -उषणम् the four hot spices, i. e. black pepper, long pepper, dry ginger, and the root of long pepper. -कर्ण (चतुष्कर्ण) a. heard by two persons only; Pt.1.99. -ष्काष्ठम् ind. In four directions. चतुष्काष्ठं क्षिपन् वृक्षान् ... Bk.9.62. -कोण (चतुष्कोण) a. square, quadrangular. (-णः) a square, tetragon, any quadrilateral figure. -गतिः 1 the Supreme Soul. -2 a tortoise. -गवः a carriage drawn by four oxen. -गुण a. four times, four-fold, quadruple. -चत्वारिंशत् (चतुश्च- त्वारिंशत्) a. forty-four; ˚रिंश, ˚रिंशत्तम forty-fourth. -चित्यः A pedestal, a raised square; चतुश्चित्यश्च तस्यासी- दष्टादशकरात्मकः Mb.14.88.32. -णवत (चतुर्नवत) a. ninety-fourth, or with ninety-four added; चतुर्णवतं शतम् 'one hundred and ninety four'. -दन्तः an epithet of Airāvata, the elephant of Indra. -दश a. fourteenth. -दशन् a. fourteen. ˚रत्नानि (pl.) the fourteen 'jewels' churned out of the ocean; (their names are contained in the following popular Maṅgalāṣṭaka :-- लक्ष्मीः कौस्तुभपारिजातकसुरा धन्वन्तरिश्चन्द्रमा गावः कामदुघाः सुरेश्वरगजो रम्भादिदेवाङ्गनाः । अश्वः सप्तमुखो विषं हरिधनुः शङ्खो$मृतं चाम्बुधे रत्नानीह चतुर्दश प्रतिदिनं कुर्युः सदा मङ्गलम् ॥). ˚विद्या (pl.) the fourteen lores; (they are:-- षडङ्गमिश्रिता वेदा धर्मशास्त्रं पुराणकम् । मीमांसा तर्कमपि च एता विद्याश्चतुर्दश ॥). -दशी the fourteenth day of a lunar fortnight. -दिशम् the four quarters taken collectively. -दिशम् ind. towards the four quarters, on all sides. -दोलः, -लम् a royal litter. -द्वारम् 1 a house with four entrances on four sides. -2 four doors taken collectively. -नवति a. or f. ninety-four. -पञ्च a. (चतुपञ्च or चतुष्पञ्च) four or five. -पञ्चाशत् f. (चतुःपञ्चाशत् or चतुष्पञ्चाशत्) fifty-four. -पथः (चतुःपथः or चतुष्पथः) (-थम् also) a place where four roads meet, a crossway; Ms.4.39,9,264. (-थः) a Brāhmaṇa. -पद or -पद् a. (चतुष्पद) 1 having four feet; यथा चतुष्पत्सु च केसरी वरः Rām.4.11.93. -2 consisting of four limbs. (-दः) a quadruped. (-दी) a stanza of four lines; पद्यं चतुष्पदी तच्च वृत्तं जातिरिति द्विधा Chand. M.1. -पाटी A river. L. D. B. -पाठी (चतुष्पाठी) a school for Brāhmaṇas in which the four Vedas are taught and repeated. -पाणिः (चतुष्पाणिः) an epithet of Viṣṇu. -पाद्-द (चतुष्पद्-द) a. 1. quadruped. -2 consisting of four members or parts. (-m.) 1 a quadruped. -2 (in law) a judicial procedure (trial of suits) consisting of four processes; i. e. plea, defence, rejoinder, and judgment. -3 The science of archery consisting of ग्रहण, धारण, प्रयोग and प्रतिकारः; यो$स्त्रं चतुष्पात् पुनरेव चक्रे । द्रोणः प्रसन्नो$भिवाद्यस्त्वया$सौ Mb.5.3.12-13; प्रतिपेदे चतुष्पादं धनुर्वेदं नृपात्मजः ibid 192.61. -पार्श्वम् the four sides of a square. -बाहुः an epithet of Viṣṇu. (-हु n.) a square. -भद्रम् the aggregate of the four ends of human life (पुरुषार्थ); i. e. धर्म, अर्थ, काम and मोक्ष. -भागः the fourth part, a quarter. -भावः N. of Viṣṇu. -भुज a. 1 quadrangular. -2 having four arms; Bg.11.46. (-जः) 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu; R.16.3. -2 a quadrangular figure. -3 square. (-जम्) a square. -मासम् a period of four months; (reckoned from the 11th day in the bright half of आषाढ to the 11th day in the bright half of कार्तिक). -मुख having four faces. (-खः) an epithet of Brahmā; त्वत्तः सर्वं चतु- र्मुखात् R.1.22. (-खम्) 1. four faces; Ku.2.17. -2 a house with four entrances. -मण्डलम् a four-fold arrangement (of troops &c.) -मेधः One who has offered four sacrifices, namely अश्वमेध, पुरुषमेध, सर्वमेध, and पितृमेध. -युगम् the aggregate of the four Yugas or ages of the world. -युज् a. Consisting of four; चतुर्युजो रथाः सर्वे Mb.5.155.13. -रात्रम् (चतूरात्रम्) an aggregate of four nights. -वक्त्रः an epithet of Brahmā. -वर्गः the four ends of human life taken collectively (पुरुषार्थ); i. e. धर्म, अर्थ, काम and मोक्षः; चतुर्वर्गफलं ज्ञानं कालावस्थाश्चतुर्युगाः R.1.22. -वर्णः 1. the four classes or castes of the Hindus; i. e. ब्राह्मण, क्षत्रिय, वैश्य and शूद्र; चतुर्वर्णमयो लोकः R.1.22. -2 four principal colours. -वर्षिका a cow four years old. -विंश a. 1 twenty fourth. -2 having twenty-four added; as चतुर्विंशं शतम् (124). -विंशति a. or f. twenty-four. -विंशतिक a. consisting of twenty-four. -विद्य a. one who has studied the four Vedas. -विद्या the four Vedas. -विध a. of four sorts or kinds, four-fold. -वेद a. familiar with the four Vedas. (-दः) the Supreme Soul. -व्यूङः N. of Viṣṇu. (-हम्) medical science. a. having four kinds of appearance; hence ˚वादिन् 'asserting the four forms of पुरुषोत्तम viz. वासुदेव, संकर्षण, प्रद्युम्न and अनिरुद्ध.' -शालम् (चतुःशालम्, चतुश्शालम्, चतुःशाली, चतुश्शाली) a square of four buildings, a quadrangle enclosed by four buildings; अलं चतु शालमिमं प्रवेश्य Mk.3.7; देवीनां चतुःशालमिदम् Pratimā 6. -षष्टि a. or f. 1 sixty-four. -2 N. for the Ṛigveda consisting 64 Adhyāyas. ˚कलाः (pl.) the sixty-four arts. -सनः N. of Viṣṇu having four embodiments of सनक, सनन्दन, सनत्कुमार and सनातन; आदौ सनात् स्वतपसः स चतुःसनो$भूत् Bhāg.2.7.5. -सप्तति a. or f. seventy-four. -समम् an unguent of four things, sandal, agallochum, saffron and musk; L. D. B. -सीमा the boundaries on all four sides. -हायन, -ण a. four years old; (the f. of this word ends in आ if it refers to an inanimate object, and in ई if it refers to an animal). -होत्रकम् the four priests taken collectively.

cāturmāsyam	चातुर्मास्यम् [चतुर्षु मासेषु भवो यज्ञः, ण्य] N. of a sacrifice performed every four months; i. e. at the beginning of कार्तिक, फाल्गुन and आषाढ.

cāmaraḥ	चामरः रम् [चमर्याः विकारः तत्पुच्छनिर्मितत्वात्] also -रा -री sometimes. 1 A chowrie or bushy tail of the Chamara (Bos Grunniens) used as a fly-flap or fan, and reckoned as one of the insignia of royalty (and sometimes used as a sort of streamer on the heads of horses); व्याधूयन्ते निचुलतरुभिर्मञ्जरीचामराणि V.4.4; अदेय- मासीत् त्रयमेव भूपतेः शशिप्रभं छत्रमुभे च चामरे R.3.16; Ku.7.42; H.2.29; Me.35; चित्रन्यस्तमिवाचलं हयशिर- स्यायामवच्चामरम् V.1.4; Ś.1.8. -Comp. -ग्राहः, -ग्राहिन् m. a person who carries a chowrie. -ग्राहिणी a waiting girl who carries in her hand a chowrie and waves it over the head of a king &c; पृष्ठे लीलावलयरणितं चामर- ग्राहिणीनाम् Bh.3.61. -पुष्पः, -पुष्पकः 1 the betel-nut tree. -2 the Ketaka plant. -3 the mango tree.

cikitsu	चिकित्सु a. 1 Wise, cunning; या कल्पयन्ति... चिकित्सवः Av.1.1.1. -2 treating medically; सिद्धागदंकारचये चिकित्सौ N.3.111.

citra	चित्र a. [चित्र्-भावे अच्; चि-ष्ट्रन् वा Uṇ.4.163] 1 Bright, clear. -2 Variegated, spotted, diversified. -3 amusing, interesting, agreeable; Māl.1.4. -4 Various, different, manifold; Pt.1.136; Ms.9.248; Y.1.288. -5 Surprising, wonderful, strange; किमत्र चित्रम् R.5.33; Ś.2.15. -6 Perceptible, visible. -7 Conspicuous, excellent, distinguished; न यद्वचश्चित्रपदं हरेर्यशो जगत्पवित्रं प्रगृणीत कर्हिचित् Bhāg.1.5.1. -8 Rough, agitated (as the sea, opp सम). -9 Clear, loud, perceptible (as a sound). -त्रः 1 The variegated colour. -2 A form of Yama. -3 The Aśoka tree. -4 = चित्रगुप्त q. v. below. -त्रम् 1 A picture, painting, delineation चित्रे निवेश्य परिकल्पितसत्त्वयोगा Ś.2.9; पुनरपि चित्रीकृता कान्ता Ś.6.2,13,21 &c. -2 A brilliant ornament or ornament. -3 An extraordinary appearance, wonder. -4 A sectarial mark on the forehead. -5 Heaven, sky. -6 A spot. -7 The white or spotted leprosy. -8 (In Rhet.) The last of the three main divisions of Kāvya (poetry). (It is of two kinds शब्दचित्र and अर्थ-वाच्य-चित्र, and the poetical charm lies mainly in the use of figures of speech dependent on the sound and sense of words. Mammaṭa thus defines it :-- शब्दचित्रं वाज्यचित्रमव्यङ्ग्यं त्ववरं स्मृतम् K. P.1. As an instance of शब्दचित्र may be cited the following verse from R. G. मित्रात्रिपुत्रनेत्राय त्रयीशात्रवशत्रवे । गोत्रारिगोत्रजैत्राय गोत्रात्रे ते नमो नमः ॥ -9 Anything bright which strikes the eye. -1 Playing upon words, punning, using conundrums, riddles &c. -11 A lotus. ...... मङ्गले तिलके हेम्नि व्योम्नि पद्मे नपुंसकम् । Nm. -त्रम् ind. Oh !, how strange !, what a wonder ! चित्रं बधिरो नाम व्याकरणमध्येष्यते Sk. -Comp. -अक्षी, -नेत्रा, -लोचना a kind of bird commonly called Sārikā. -अङ्ग a. striped, having a spotted body. (-ङ्गः) 1 a kind of snake. -2 N. of Arjuna. (-ङ्गम्) 1 vermilion. -2 yellow orpiment. -अङ्गद a. decked with brilliant bracelets. (-दा) N. of a wife of Arjuna and mother of Babhruvāhana. -अङ्गदसूः f. an epithet of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa. -अन्नम् rice dressed with coloured condiments; Y.1.34. -अपूपः a kind of cake. -अर्पित a. committed to a picture, painted. ˚आरम्भ a. painted; चित्रार्पितारम्भ इवावतस्थे R.2.31; Ku.3.42. -आकृतिः f. a painted resemblance, portrait. -आयसम् steel. -आरम्भः a painted scene, outline of a picture; V.1.4. v. l. -उक्तिः f. 1 agreeable or frequent discourse; जयन्ति ते पञ्चममित्रचित्रोक्तिसंदर्भविभूषणेषु Vikr.1. -2 a voice from heaven. -3 a surprising tale. -ओदनः boiled rice coloured with turmeric &c. -कण्ठः pigeon. -कथालापः telling agreeable or charming stories. -कम्बलः 1 painted cloth used as an elephant's housing -2 a variegated carpet. -कर 1 a painter. -2 an actor. -कर्मन् n. 1 an extraordinary act; धीर्न चित्रीयते कस्माद- भित्तौ चित्रकर्मणा Ks.6.5. -2 ornamenting, decorating. -3 a picture; Mu.2.4. -4 magic. (-m.) 1 a magician, one who works wonders. -2 a painter. ˚विद् m. 1 a painter. -2 a magician. -कायः 1 a tiger in general. -2 a leopard or panther. -कारः 1 a painter. -2 N. of a mixed tribe; (स्थपतेरपि गान्धिक्यां चित्रकारो व्यजायत Parāśara). -कूटः N. of a hill and district near Prayāga; दृप्तः कुकुद्मानिव चित्रकूटः R.12;15;13.47, U.1. -कृत् a. astonishing, surprising. (-m.) a painter. -कोलः a kind of lizard. -क्रिया, -कृत्यम् painting; आहूय स्वसुता- वासे चित्रकृत्ये न्ययुङ्क्त माम् Ks.71.82. -क्षत्र a. Ved. having manifold power, or one whose wealth is visible; चित्रक्षत्र चित्रतमं वयोधाम् Rv.6.6.7. -ग, -गत a. 1 painted, drawn in a picture; संपूर्णलक्षणा देवी प्रतिभाति स्म चित्रगा Ks.5.31. -2 coloured, variegated. -गन्धम् yellow orpiment. -गुप्तः one of the beings in Yama's world recording the vices and virtues of mankind; नामान्येषां लिखामि ध्रुवमहम- धुना चित्रगुप्तः प्रमार्ष्टु Mu.1.2. -गृहम् a painted room. -जल्पः a random or incoherent talk, talk on various subjects. -तण्डुलम् a medicinal plant said to possess anthelmintic virtues. -त्वच् m. the Bhūrja tree. -दण्डकः the cotton-plant. -धा ind. in many ways; तर्कयामास चित्रधा Bhāg.3.13.2. -न्यस्त a. painted, drawn in a picture; Ku.2.24. -पक्षः the francoline partridge. -पटः, -ट्टः 1 a painting, a picture. -2 a coloured or chequered cloth. -पद a. 1 divided into various parts. -2 full of graceful expressions. -पादा the bird called Sārikā. -पिच्छकः a peacock. -पुङ्खः a kind of arrow. -पृष्ठः a sparrow. -प्रतिकृतिः f. representation in colours, a painting, a picture. -फलः, -फलकः A kind of large flat fish; L. D. B. -फला 1 A smaller kind of flat fish. -2 N. of several plants. -फलकम् a tablet for painting, a picture-board. -बर्हः a peacock; -भानु a. of a variegated colour, shining with light; चित्रभानुरुषसां भात्यग्रे R.7.9.3; प्रपूर्वगौ पूर्वजौ चित्रभानू Mb.1.3.57. (-नुः) 1 fire; पुच्छैः शिरोभिश्च भृशं चित्रभानुं प्रपेदिरे Mb.1.53. 5. -2 the sun; (चित्रभानुर्विभातीति दिने रवौ रात्रौ वह्नौ K. P. 2 given as an instance of one of the modes of अञ्जन). -3 N. of Bhairava. -4 the Arka plant. -5 Śiva. -6 an epithet of the Aśvins. -7 the first year of the first cycle of Jupiter. -भाष्यम् A diplomatic speech; Mb. 5.35.71. -भूत a. painted. -मण्डलः a kind of snake. -मृगः the spotted antelope. -मेखलः a peacock. -योधिन् a. fighting in a wonderful manner; लब्धास्त्रश्चित्रयोधी च मनस्वी च दृढवतः 5.17.3. (-m.) an epithet of Arjuna. -रथः 1 the sun. -2 N. of a king of the Gandharvas, one of the sixteen sons of Kaśyapa by his wife Muni; अत्र मुनेस्तनयश्चित्रसेनादीनां पञ्चदशानां भ्रातॄणामधिको गुणैः षोडश- श्चित्ररथो नाम समुत्पन्नः K.136; V.1. -लिखनम् painting. -लिखित a. 1 painted. -2 dumb, motionless (as in a picture). -लेख a. of beautiful outlines, highly arched; रुचिस्तव कलावती रुचिरचित्रलेखे श्रुवौ Gīt.1. (-खा) 1 a portrait, picture. -2 N. of a friend and companion of Uṣā, daughter of Bāṇa. [When Uṣā related to her her dream, she suggested the idea of taking the portraits of all young princes in the neighbourhood; and on Uṣā's recognising Aniruddha, Chitralekhā, by means of her magical power, conveyed him to her palace.] -लेखकः a painter. -लेखनिका a painter's brush. -वदालः the sheat-fish. -वनम् N. of a forest near the Gaṇḍakī. -वाजः a cock. -विचित्र a. 1 variously coloured, variegated. -2 multiform. -विद्या the art of painting. -शाला a painter's studio. -शिखण्डिन् m. an epithet of the seven sages :--मरीचि, अङ्गिरस्, अत्रि, पुलस्त्य, पुलह, क्रतु and वसिष्ठ; मरीचिरत्र्यङ्गिरसौ पुलस्त्यः पुलहः क्रतुः । वसिष्ठश्च महातेजास्ते हि चित्रशिखण्डिनः ॥ Mb.12.335.29. ˚जः an epithet of Bṛihaspati. -शिरस् m. -शीर्षकः a kind of venomous insect. -श्रीः great or wonderful beauty. -संस्थ a. painted. -हस्तः a particular position of the hands in fighting.

cūlikā	चूलिका [चुल् समुच्चये ण्वुल् पृषो ˚ दीर्घः] 1 The crest or comb of a cock. -2 The root of an elephant's ear. Mātaṅga. L.6.9. -3 (In dramas) The hinting or indication of the occurrence of any event by characters behind the stage; अन्तर्जवनिकासंस्थैः सूचनार्थस्य चूलिका S. D. 31; e. g. in the beginning of the 4th Act of Mv. -4 The crest (?) of a bow; प्रथमं चापमारोप्य चूलिकां बन्धयेत्ततः । स्थानकं तु ततः कृत्वा बाणोपरि करं न्यसेत् ॥ Dhanur.118.

ced	चेद् ind. If, provided that, although (never used at the beginning of a sentence); अयि रोषमुरीकरोषि नो चेत्किमपि त्वां प्रति वारिधे वदामः Bv.1.44; Ku.4.9; इति चेद् -न 'if it be urged that ......(we reply) not so' (frequently used in controversial works); सन्निधानमात्रेण राजप्रभृतीनां दृष्टं कर्तृत्वमिति चेन्न Ś. B; अथ चेद् but if.

chātraḥ	छात्रः [छत्रं गुरोर्वैगुण्यावरणं शीलमस्य Sk.; छत्रा˚ ण] A pupil, disciple. -त्रम् A kind of honey. -Comp. -गण्डः an indifferent poetical scholar, knowing only the beginnings of stanzas. -दर्शनम् fresh butter prepared from milk one day old. -व्यंसकः a roguish or dullwitted pupil.

chid	छिद् 7 U. (छिनत्ति, छिन्ते, चिच्छेद, अच्छिदत्, अच्छैत्सीत्, अच्छित्त, छेत्तुम्, छिन्न) 1 To cut, cut or lop off, hew, mow, tear, pierce, break asunder, rend, split, divide; नैनं छिन्दन्ति शस्त्राणि Bg.2.23; R.12.8; Ms.4.69,7;9. 276; Y.2.32. -2 To disturb, interrupt (as sleep). -3 To remove, drive off, destroy, quell, annihilate; तृष्णां छिन्द्धि Bh.2.77; एतन्मे संशयं छिन्द्धि मतिर्मे संप्रमुह्यति Mb; राघवो रथमप्राप्तां तामाशां च सुरद्विषाम् । अर्धचन्द्रमुखैर्बाणैश्चि- च्छेद कदलीमुखम् ॥ R.12.96; Ku.7.16. -4 To take away, remove, deprive of; न नः किंचिद् छिद्यते Ś. B. we do not lose anything [cf. L. scindo].

jaṅgālaḥ	जङ्गालः A ridge of earth running along the edge of a field to collect water and to form a passage over it, land-mark.

jaṅghā	जङ्घा [जङ्घन्यते कुटिलं गच्छति हन् यङ् - लुकि अच् पृषो˚; cf. Uṇ.5.31] 1 Leg from the ankle to the knee, the shank. -2 The upper part of the leg, the part about the loins. -3 A part of a bed-stead. -Comp. -करः, करिकः, -कारः, -कारिकः a runner, courier, an express. Kau. A.2.1. -त्राणम् an armour for the legs. -पथः A foot-path. गङ्घापथश्चतुष्पादस्त्रिपादं च गृहान्तरम् Brahmāṇḍa P., part 1, second अनुषङ्गपाद. Ch.7.5.115. -बलम् 'Strength of the shanks', running away किमन्यत् । जङ्घाबलमेव M.3 (between 19th and 2th verses.)

jaṅghāla	जङ्घाल a. [जङ्घा वेगवती अस्त्यस्य लच्] Running swiftly, rapid. जङ्घालजनसङ्कुलम् Śiva. B.22.23. -लः 1 A courier -2 A deer, an antelope.

jaṅghila	जङ्घिल a. [जङ्घा-इलच्] Running swiftly, rapid, quick.

jaḍa	जड a. [जलति घनीभवति जल् अच् लस्य डः Tv.] 1 Cold, frigid, chilly; Māl.9.13; U.6.13. -2 Dull, paralysed, motionless, benumbed; चिन्ताजडं दर्शनम् Ś.4.5; U.3.41; 6.28;6.39; परामृशन् हर्षजडेन पाणिना R.3.68;2.42. -3 Dull, senseless, stupid, irrational, dull-witted; जडा- नन्धान् पङ्गून ... त्रातुम् G. L.15, so जडधी, जडमति &c. Y.2. 25; Ms.2.11; जडबुद्धिः, जडप्रकृतिः, Ratn.2 (between verses 12 and 13); also जडाशयः Ks.6.58,132. -4 Dulled made senseless or apathetic, devoid of appreciation or taste; वेदाभ्यासजडः कथं नु विषयव्यावृत्त- कौतूहलः V.1.9. -5 Stunning, benumbing, stupefying. -6 Dumb. -7 Unable to learn the Vedas (Dāyabhāga). -डः 1 Cold, frost, winter. -2 Idiocy, stupidity. -3 Dulness, apathy, sluggishness. -डम् 1 Water. -2 Lead. -Comp. -क्रिय a. slow, dilatory. -भरतः 1 an idiot. -2 N. of a man simulating stupidity; Jābāla Up.

jāṅghika	जाङ्घिक a. [जङ्घाभ्यां जीवति वेतना˚ ठञ्] Running. -कः 1 A courier, an express; अथोच्चबले भग्ग्ने विदद्रुः के$पि जाङ्घिकाः Rāj. T.7.1335. -2 A camel.

jālavat	जालवत् a. 1 Furnished with a net, reticulated. -2 Covered with iron network. -3 Cunning, deceptive (मायाविन्).

jayaḥ	जयः [जि भावे अच्] 1 Conquest, triumph, victory, success, winning (in battle, game or a law-suit); सप्त वित्तागमा धर्म्या दायो लाभः क्रयो जयः Mb.1.115. -2 Restraint, curbing, conquest as in इन्द्रियजय. -3 N. of the sun. -4 N. of Jayanta, son of Indra; जगृहे च धनुधीता मुसलं तु जयस्तथा Mb.1.227.34. -5 N. of Yudhiṣṭhira, the first Pāndava prince. -6 N. of an attendant of Visnu. -7 An epithet of Arjuna; संस्मरन् भ्रातरं जयम् Mb.3.158.2. -8 N. of the Mahābhārata; देवीं सरस्वतीं चैव ततो जयमुदीरयेत् Mb.1.1.1; Bhāg.1.2.4; -9 The heroic sentiment; सहजेतरौ जयशमौ दधती Ki.6.22. -1 Words of victory; जयेन वर्धयित्वा च मारीचप्रमुखास्ततः Rām.7.23.3. -या 1 N. of Durgā. -2 N. of an attendant of the goddess Durgā. -3 A kind of banner. -4 The third, eighth or thirteenth lunar days of any of the two lunar fortnights. -Comp. -अजयौ Victory and defeat; सुखदुःखे समे कृत्वा लाभालाभौ जयाजयौ Bg.2.38. -आवह a. conferring victory. -आशिस् f. 1 a prayer for victory. -2 congratulations after victory; a cheer of victory. -उद्धुर a. exulting in victory. -कुञ्जरः a victorious elephant; आक्षिप्तो जयकुञ्जरेण Ratn.4.12. -कोलाहलः 1 a shout of victory. -2 a kind of game with dice. -गतः a. Conquering, victorious; उक्तविपरीत- लक्षणसंपन्नो जयगतो विनिर्दिष्टः Bṛi. S.17.1. -घोषः, -घोषणम्, -णा a proclamation of victory. -ढक्का a kind of drum beaten as a sign of victory. -दम् A height which is 1 1/2 of the breadth; Māna.35.22-26. -दत्तः N. of Jayanta, Indra's son. -देवः N. of the author of Gītagovinda; यावच्छृङ्गारसारस्वतमिह जयदेवस्य विष्वग्वचांसि Gīt. last stanza. -पत्रम् a record of victory. -पालः 1 a king. -2 an epithet of Brahmā. -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -पुत्रकः a kind of dice. -मङ्गलः 1 a royal elephant. -2 a remedy for fever. (-लम्) a cheer of victory; ततो$ ब्धिवीचिनिर्घोषैरुद्गीतजयमङ्गलः Rāj. T.4.158. -यज्ञः the अश्वमेध sacrifice -लक्ष्मीः, -श्रीः the goddess of victory; जयलक्ष्म्या बबन्धास्थां श्वश्रूः Rāj. T.5.246; बभार यद्भुजस्तम्भो जयश्री- सालभञ्जिकाम् ibid 2.64; Ku.2.52. -लेखम् record of victory; ...... रतिजयलेखम् Gīt.8.3. -वाहिनी an epithet of Śachī. -शब्दः 1 a shout of victory. -2 the exclamation 'jaya' (hail ! glory !) uttered by bards &c. -शृङ्गम् a horn blown to announce a victory. -स्तम्भः a trophy, a column erected to commemorate a victory, a triumphal column; निचखान जयस्तम्भान् गङ्गास्रोतो$न्तरेषु सः R.4.36; यस्याद्यापि जयस्तम्भाः सन्ति ते पूर्ववारिधौ Rāj. T.3. 479. -स्थलम् N. of a village, ibid 5.121. -स्वामिन् m. an epithet of Śiva.

jayin	जयिन् a. [जि शीलार्थे इनि] 1 Conquering, vanquishing; विरूपाक्षस्य जयिनीस्ताः स्तुवे वामलोचनाः Vb.1.2. -2 Successful, winning a law-suit, Y.2.79. -3 Fascinating, captiating, subduing the heart; जगति जयिनस्ते ते भावा नवेन्दु- कलादयः Māl.1.36. -m. A victor, a conqueror; पौरस्त्यानेव- माक्रामंस्तांस्ताञ्जनपदाञ्जयी R.4.34.

jit	जित् a. [जि-क्विप्] (At the end of comp.) Conquering, defeating, winning &c.; तारकजित्, कंसजित्, सहस्रजित् &c.

jiṣṇu	जिष्णु a. [जि-गृत्स्नु] 1 Victorious, triumphant, R.4. 85;1.18. -2 Winning, gaining. -3 (At the end of comp.) Conquering, excelling; अलिनीजिष्णुः कचानां चयः Bh.1.5; Śi.13.21. -ष्णुः 1 The sun. -2 N. of Indra; असौ जिष्णु- रभवत् तत्र स म्लेच्छो$भून्महीधरः Śiva. B.21.52. -3 N. of Viṣṇu. -4 N. of Arjuna; जातस्पृहः पुण्यजनः स जिष्णौ Ki.3. 31; ...... द्युतिजिष्णु जिष्णुरभृतोष्णवारणम् Śi.13.21.

jūrṇi	जूर्णि a. Ved. 1 Swift, speedy, quick. -2 Running, proceeding quickly. -3 Praising, invoking. -र्णिः f. 1 Speed. -2 An epithet of Āditya or sun. -3 The body. -4 The Brahman (n.). -5 Anger. -6 A fiery weapon.

ḍamaraḥ	डमरः 1 Riot, tumult, affray. -2 Petty warfare between villages. -3 Terrifying an enemy by shouts and gestures. -रम् Running away through fear, rout.

ṇa	ण [There are hardly any words in real use in Sanskrit beginning with ण. Many roots which, in the Dhātupāṭha, are written with an initial ण really begin with न. They are so written to show that the न is liable to be changed to ण when preceded by prepositions, like प्र, परि, अन्तर् &c.]

tadā	तदा ind. 1 Then, at that time. -2 Then, in that case; (corr. of यदा); Bg.2.52-53; Ms.1.52, 54-56; -3 Therefore, hence; अनुभूय तदा कामं ततः प्राप्स्याम्यहं जराम् Rām.7.5.3; यदा यदा-तदा तदा 'whenever'; तदाप्रभृति 'since then', 'thenceforward;' तदाप्रभृत्येव विमुक्तसङ्गः पतिः पशूनामपरिग्रहो$भूत् Ku.1.53. -Comp. -मुख a. begun, commenced. (-खम्) beginning.

tadātvam	तदात्वम् The time being, present time; आयत्यां च तदात्वे च Mb.12.16.6. तदादितदन्तन्यायः tadāditadantanyāyḥ तदादितदन्तन्यायः The rule according to which when an उत्कर्ष of a detail is laid down what is meant is that one should have उत्कर्ष not of that particular detail alone but of all the details beginning with that detail. In the case of अपकर्ष, however, there will be अपकर्ष not of that particular detail alone, but of all the details ending with it; तदादि उत्कर्षे तदन्तमपकर्षे गम्येत । SB. on MS.5.1.24.

tantuḥ	तन्तुः [तन्-तुन्] 1 A thread, cord, wire, string, line; चिन्तासंततितन्तु Māl.5.1; Me.7. -2 A cob-web R.16.2. -3 filament; विसतन्तुगुणस्य कारितम् Ku.4. 29. -4 An offspring, issue, race; स्वमायया$वृणोद्गर्भं वैराट्याः कुरुतन्तवे Bhāg.1.8.14; Mb.6.43.98. -5 A shark. -6 The Supreme Being; Bhāg.8.16.31. -7 A snare, fetter (पाश); ते तानावारयिष्यन्ति ऐणेयानिव तन्तुना Mb.5. 57.41. -Comp. -करणम् spinning. -कार्यम् a web. -काष्ठम् a piece of wood or brush used by weavers for cleaning threads. -कीटः a silk-worm. -कृन्तनम् cutting off the propagation of a family; तन्तुकृन्तन यन्नस्त्वमभद्रमचरः पुनः Bhāg.6.5.43. -नागः a (large) shark. -निर्यासः the palmyra tree. -नाभः a spider. -पर्वन् n. the anniversary of the day of full-moon in the month of Srāvaṇa when Krisna was invested with the sacred thread. -भः 1 the mustard seed. -2 a calf. -वर्धनः 'increasing the race', N. of Viṣṇu, also of Śiva. -वाद्यम् any stringed musical instrument. -वानम् weaving. -वापः 1 a weaver. -2 a loom. -3 weaving. -वायः 1 a spider. -2 a weaver; तन्तुवायो दशपलं दद्यादेकपलाधिकम् Ms.8.397; तन्तुवायास्तुन्नवायाः ... Śiva. B.31.19. -3 weaving. ˚दण्डः a loom. -विग्रहा a plantain. -शाला a weaver's workshop. -संतत a. woven, sewn. (तम्) woven cloth. -संततिः f., -संतानः weaving. -सारः the betel-nut tree.

tapa	तप a. [तप्-अच्] 1 Burning, warming, consuming by heat. -2 Causing pain or trouble, distressing. -पः 1 Heat, fire, warmth. -2 The sun; तपतपनसहस्रद्योतवद्- दुर्निरीक्ष्यम् (तेजः) Rām. Ch.2.85. -3 The hot season; Śi.1.66. -4 Penance, religious austerities. -Comp. -अत्ययः, -अन्तः the end of the hot season and the beginning of the rainy season; रविपीतजला तपात्यये पुनरोघेन हि युज्यते नदी Ku.4.44;5.23; Ś.3.11. -आत्मक a. practising austerities. -ऋतुः the hot seson; तपर्तुपूर्तावपि मेदसां भरा N.1.41.

tānaḥ	तानः [तन्-घञ्] 1 A thread, fibre. -2 (In music) A protracted tone, a key-note; यथा तानं बिना रागः Bv. 1.119; तानप्रदायित्वमिवोपगन्तुम् Ku.1.8. (the number of tānas is said to be 49). -3 A monotonous tone. -नम् 1 Expanse, extension. -2 An object of sense. -Comp. -कर्मन् n. 1 tuning the voice as a preparatory step to singing. -2 running over the notes to catch the key.

tāntava	तान्तव a. (-वी f.) [तन्तोर्विकारः अञ्] Made of threads; चर्मजैस्तान्तवैः पाशैर्बद्ध्वा पतितमर्भकाः Bhāg.1.64.4. -वम् 1 Spinning, weaving. -2 A web. -3 A woven cloth; Ms.1.87. तान्तुवायिः tāntuvāyiḥ तान्तुवाय्यः tāntuvāyyḥ तान्तुवायिः तान्तुवाय्यः The son of a weaver; P.IV.1.152 Kāśi.

tu	तु ind. (Never used at the beginning of a sentenece, but usually after the first word) 1 An adversative particle meaning 'but', 'on the contrary', 'on the other hand', 'nevertheless'; स सर्वेषां सुखानामन्त ययौ । एकं तु सुतमुखदर्शनसुखं न लेभेK.59; विपर्यये तु पितुरस्याः समीपनयन- मवस्थितमेव Ś.5. (in this sense तु is often added to किं and परम्, and किंतु and परंतु are, unlike तु, always used at the beginning of a sentence). -2 And now, on one's part, and; एकदा तु प्रतीहारी समुपसृत्याब्रवीत् Ks.8; राजा तु तामार्यां श्रुत्वा$ब्रवीत् 12. -3 As to as regards, as for; प्रवर्त्यतां ब्राह्मणानुद्दिश्य पाकः ।, चन्द्रोपरागं प्रति तु केनापि विप्र- लब्धासि Mu.1; Māl.8.4. -4 It sometimes marks a difference (भेद) or superior quality; मृष्टं पयो मृष्टतरं तु दुग्धम् G. M. -5 Sometimes it is used as an emphatic particle; बालानां तु शुभं वाक्यं ग्राह्यम् Rām.7.83.2. भीमस्तु पाण्डवानां रौद्रः G. M. -6 And sometimes it is used as a mere expletive; निरर्थकं तु हीत्यादि पूरणैकप्रयोजनम् Chandr. 2.6. -7 when used as an indeclinable it means, 'undoubtedly'; तुशब्दः संशयव्यावत्त्यर्थः । न खलु संशयो$स्ति । ŚB. on MS.1.3.74. तुक्खारः, 1 तुखारः, तुषारः N. of a people inhabiting the in Vindhya mountain; cf. Vikr.18.93. -2 Tukhār horse; निशम्य तुक्खारखुरक्षतायाः क्षितेस्तनुत्वादिव यस्य कीर्तिम् Vikr.9.116.

tūlaḥ	तूलः लम् [तल्-अच्] Cotton. -लम् 1 The atmosphere, sky, air. -2 A tuft of grass. -3 The mulberry. -4 The panicle of a flower or plant. -5 The thorn-apple. -ला 1 The cotton tree. -2 The wick of a lamp. -ली 1 Cotton. -2 The wick of a lamp. -3 A weaver's fibrous stick or brush. -4 A painter's brush. -5 The Indigo plant. -Comp. -कार्मुकम्, -चापः, -धनुस् n. a cotton-bow, i. e. a bow used for cleaning cotton. -दाहम् ind. Like cotton (consuming by fire); तूलदाहं पुरं लङ्कां दहतैव हनूमता Mv.6.5. -नाली (लिः) f., -नालिका a thick roll of cotton drawn out in spinning. -पटिका, -पटी a cotton quilt. -पिचुः cotton. -पीठी, -लासिका spindle. -शर्करा a seed of the cotton plant. -सेचनम् the act of spinning.

tṛd	तृद् 1 P., 7 U. (तर्दति, तृणत्ति, तृन्त्ते, तृण्ण) 1 To cleave, split, pierce. -2 To kill, destroy, annihilate; भूतिं तृणद्मि यक्षाणाम् Bk.6.38,14.13,18;15.36,44. -3 To set free. -4 To disregard.

tvacanam	त्वचनम् 1 Covering with a skin. -2 Skinning.

darathaḥ	दरथः 1 A cavity, hollow cave. -2 Fleeing away, taking flight. -3 Over-running the country for forage.

dagdha	दग्ध p. p. [दह्-क्त] 1 Burnt, consumed by fire. -2 (Fig.) Consumed by grief, tormented, distressed; (मही) न शक्यते द्रष्टुमपि प्रवासिभिः प्रियावियोगानलदग्धमानसैः Ṛs.1.1. -3 Famished. -4 Inauspicious, as in दग्धयोग. -5 Dry, tasteless, insipid -6 Wretched, accursed, vile, (used as a term of abuse before a word); नाद्यापि मे दग्धदेहः पतति U.4; अस्य दग्धोदरस्यार्थे कः कुर्यात् पातकं महत् H.1.68; so दग्धजठरस्यार्थे Bh.3.8. -7 Cunning (विदग्ध). -ग्धा 1 The quarter where the sun remains overhead. -2 A lunar day or तिथि on which it is considered inauspicious or unlucky to do any act. -ग्धम् 1 Burning; Mb. 12.33.6. -2 Cauterizing. -Comp. -काकः a raven. -जठरम् the hungry stomach; Bh.3. -व्रणः a burn, singe.

dinaḥ	दिनः नम् [द्युति तमः, दो दी वा नक् ह्रस्व; Uṇ.2.49.] 1 Day (opp. रात्रि); दिनान्ते निहितं तेजः सवित्रेव हुताशनः R.4.1; यामिनयन्ति दिनानि च सुखदुःखवशीकृते मनसि K.P.1; दिनान्ते निलयाय गन्तुम् R.2.15. -2 A day (including the night), a period of 24 hours; दिने दिने सा परिवर्धमाना Ku.1.25; सप्त व्यतीयुस्त्रिगुणानि तस्य दिनानि R.2.25. -Comp. -अंशः any portion of a day, i. e. an hour, a watch, &c. -अण्डम् darkness. -अत्ययः, -अन्तः, -अवसानम् evening, sunset; R.2.15,45; दिनान्तरभ्यो$भ्युपशान्तमन्मथः Ṛs.1.1; Ki.9.8. -अधीशः the sun. -अर्धः mid-day, noon. -अन्तकः darkness. -आगमः, -आदिः, -आरम्भः daybreak, morning; Ki.11.52. -ईशः, ईश्वरः the sun. ˚आत्मजः 1 an epithet of Saturn. -2 of Karṇa. -3 of Sugrīva. -करः, -कर्तृ, -कृत् m. the sun; तुल्योद्योगस्तव दिनकृतश्चाधिकारो मतो नः V.2.1; दिनकरकुलचन्द्र चन्द्रकेतो U.6. 8; R.9.23. ˚तनयः N. of (1) Saturn; (2) Sugrīva; (3) Karṇa; (4) Yama. ˚तनया N. of (1) the river Yamunā, (2) the river Tāptī. -कर्तव्यम्, -कार्यम्, -कृत्यम् ceremonies to be performed daily; Ks. -केशरः, -केसरः, -केशवः darkness. -क्षयः, -पातः evening. -चर्या daily occupation, daily routine of business. -च्छिद्रम् 1 a constellation or lunar mansion. -2 a change of the moon at the beginning or end of a half-day; Hch. -ज्योतिस् n. sunshine. -दुःखितः the Chakravāka bird. -नक्तम् ind. by day and night. -नाथः, -पः, -पतिः, -बन्धः, -प्रणीः, -मणिः, -मयूखः, -रत्नम् the sun; दिनमणिमण्डलमण्डन Gīt.; पस्पृशुर्न पृथिवीं तुरङ्गमाः स्पर्धयेव दिननाथवाजिनाम् Vikr.14.64;11.1. -पाटिका a day's wages; Vet.4. -बलम् N. of the fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, eleventh, and twelfth signs of the zodiac taken collectively. -मलम् a month. -मुख morning; तुल्यतां दिनमुखेन दिनान्तः Ki.9.8; दिनमुखानि रविर्हिमनिग्रहै- र्विमलयन् मलयं नगमत्यजत् R.9.25. -मूर्द्धन् m. the eastern mountain behind which the sun is supposed to rise. -यौवनम् mid-day, noon (the youth of day). -वारः a week-day. -व्यास-दलम् the radius of a circle made by an asterism in its daily revolution; Sūrya S.2.6. -स्पृश् n. a lunar day coinciding with 3 week-days; Hch.

diś	दिश् f. [दिशति ददात्यवकाशं दिश्-क्विप्] (Nom. sing. दिक्- ग्) 1 A direction, cardinal point, point of the compass, quarter of the sky; दिशः प्रसेदुर्मरुतो वबुः सुखाः R.3.14; दिशि दिशि किरति सजलकणजालम् Gīt.4. -2 (a) The mere direction of a thing, hint, indication (of the general lines); इति दिक् (often used by commentators &c.); इत्थं लौकिक- शब्दानां दिङ्मात्रमिह दर्शितम् Sk. (b) (Hence) Mode, manner, method; मुनेः पाठोक्तदिशा S. D.; दिगियं सूत्रकृता प्रदर्शिता; दासीसभं नृपसभं रक्षःसभमिमा दिशः Ak. -3 Region, space, place in general. -4 A foreign or distant region. -5 A point of view, manner of considering a subject. -6 A precept, order. -7 The number 'ten'. -8 A side or party. -9 The mark of a bite. 'दिग्दष्टे वर्तुलाकारे करिका नखरेखिका' इति वैजयन्ती; परिणतदिक्करिकास्तटीर्बिभर्ति Śi.4.29. [N. B. In comp. दिश् becomes दिग् before words beginning with vowels and soft consonants, and दिक् before words beginning with hard consonants; e. g. दिगम्बर, दिग्गज, दिक्पथ, दिक्करिन्, &c.] -Comp. -अन्तः end of the direction or horizon, remote distance, remote place; दिगन्ते श्रूयन्ते मदमलिनगण्डाः करटिनः Bv.1.2; Māl.2.9; R.3.4;5.67; 16.87. नानादिगन्तागता राजानः &c. -अन्तरम् 1 another direction. -2 the intermediate space, atmosphere, space. -3 a distant quarter, another or foreign country; संचारपूतानि दिगन्तराणि कृत्वा दिनान्ते निलयाय गन्तुम् R.2.15. -अम्बर, -वासस् a. having only the directions for his clothing, stark naked, unclothed; दिगम्बरत्वेन निवेदितं वसु Ku.5.72; एकाकी गृहसंत्यक्तः पाणिपात्रो दिगम्बरः Pt.5.15; Ms.11.21. (-रः) 1 a naked mendicant (of the Jaina or Buddha sect.) -2 a mendicant, an ascetic. -3 an epithet of (1) Śiva; (2) Skanda. -4 darkness. (-री) an epithet of Durgā. -अम्बरकः a naked mendicant (of the Jaina sect). -अवस्थानम् the air -आगत a. Come from a distance; Y.2.254. -इभः See दिक्करिन् &c. दिगिभाः पूर्णकलशैः Bhāg.8.8.14;5.14.4. -ईशः -ईश्वरः regent of a quarter; चतुर्दिगीशानवमत्य मानिनी Ku.5.53; see अष्टदिक्पाल. -कन्या, -कान्ता, -कामिनी, -वधू a region of the sky (considered as a virgin). -करः 1 a youth, youthful man. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -करिका, -करी a young girl or woman. -करिन्, -गज, -दन्तिन्, -वारणः m. one of the eight elephants said to guard and preside over the eight cardinal points; (see अष्टदिग्गज); दिग्दन्तिशेषाः ककुभश्चकार Vikr.7.1. -ग्रहणम्, -बन्धः observation of the quarters of the compass; Bṛi. S.24.9. संपूज्य शारिकांदेवीं दिग्बन्धादिपुरःसरम् Ks.73.116. -चक्रम् 1 the horizon; Ratn.3.5. -2 the whole world. -जयः, -विजयः 'conquest of the directions, the conquest of various countries in all directions, conquest of the world; सुनिश्चितपुरं चक्रे दिग्जये कृतनिश्चयः Rāj. T. 4.183; स दिग्विजयमव्याजवीरः स्मरः इवाकरोत् Vikr.4.1. -तटम् the horizon. -दर्शनम् 1 showing merely the direction, pointing out only the general mode or manner. -2 a general outline or survey. -3 a compass. -दर्शिन् a. looking on all sides, having a general view. -दाहः preternatural redness of the horizon; दैग्दाहः 'a conflagration of the regions of the sky' (regarded as an evil omen) N.12.92; cf. Ms.4.115. -देशः 1 a distant region or country; दृश्यन्ते कुलनिम्नगा अपि परं दिग्देशकालाविमौ Rāj. T.4.38,417. -2 region, country; H.1. -नागः 1 an elephant of the quarter of the compass; see दिग्गज. -2 N. of a poet said to be a contemporary of Kālidāsa. (This interpretation is based on Mallinātha's gloss on दिङ्नागानां पथि परिहरन् स्थूल- हस्तावलेपान् Me.14; which is, however, very doubtful.) -पतिः, -पालः the regent or guardian of a quarter; Rāj. T.4.225 (for the names of the several regents, see अष्टदिक्पालः cf. Ms.5.96;7.33 also); सूर्यः शुक्रः क्षमापुत्रः सैंहिकेयः शनिः शशी । सौम्यस्त्रिदशमन्त्री च प्राच्यादिदिगधीश्वराः ॥ -Jyotistattvam. -पथः the surrounding region; सैन्यैर्नाना- पथायातैर्नदद्भिर्व्याप्तदिक्पथः Rāj. T.5.342. -भागः a point of the compass, direction. -भ्रमः perplexity about points of the compass, mistaking the way or direction; Vikr.5.66. -मण्डलम् = दिक्चक्रम् q.v. -मात्रम् the mere direction or indication. -मुखम् any quarter or part of the sky; हरति मे हरिवाहनदिङ्मुखम् V.3.6; Amaru.5. -मोहः mistaking the way or direction. -यात्रा a procession in different directions. -वसन, -वस्त्र a. stark naked, unclothed. (-स्त्रः) 1 a Jaina or Buddhist mendicant of the दिगम्बर class. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -विभा- वित a. renowned or celebrated in all quarters. -शूलम् a bad yoga in Astronomy; cf. शुक्रादित्यदिने न वारुणदिशं न ज्ञे कुजे चोत्तरां मन्देन्दोश्च दिने न शक्रककुभं याम्यां गुरौ न व्रजेत् । शूलानीति विलङ्घ्य यान्ति मनुजा ये वित्तलाभाशया भ्रष्टाशाः पुनरापतन्ति यदि ते शुक्रेण तुल्या अपि ॥ Jyotissārasaṅgraha. -साधनम् a means to make the journey in various quarters successful.

dur	दुर् ind. (A prefix substituted for दुस् before words beginning with vowels or soft consonants in the sense of 'bad'. 'hard' or 'difficult to do a certain thing'; for compounds with दुस् as first member see दुस् s. v.). -Comp. -अक्ष a. 1 weak-eyed. -2 evileyed. (-क्षः) 1 a loaded or false die. -2 dishonest gambling. -अक्षरम् an evil word; श्रुतिं ममाविश्य भवद्दुरक्षरं सृजत्यदः कीटकवदुत्कटा रुजः N.9.63. -अतिक्रम a. difficult to be overcome or conquered, unconquerable; सर्वं तु तपसा साध्यं तपो हि दुरति- क्रमम् Ms.11.2.38; स्वभावो दुरतिक्रमः 'nature cannot be changed'; स्वजातिर्दुरतिक्रमा Pt.1. -2 insurmountable, impassable; B. R.6.18-19. -3 inevitable. (-मः) an epithet of Viṣṇu. -अत्यय a. 1 difficult to be overcome; स्वर्गमार्गपरिघो दुरत्ययः R.11.88. -2 hard to be attained or fathomed; स एष आत्मा स्वपरेत्यबुद्धिभिर्दुरत्यया- नुक्रमणो निरूप्यते Bhāg.7.5.13. -अदृष्टम् ill-luck, misfortune. -अधिग, -अधिगम a. 1 hard to reach or attain, unattainable; Bhāg.3.23.8; दुरधिगमः परभागो यावत्पुरुषेण पौरुषं न कृतम् Pt.1.33. -2 insurmountable. -3 hard to be studied or understood; इह दुरधिगमैः किञ्चि- देवागमैः Ki.5.18. -अधिष्ठित a. badly performed, managed, or executed. (-तम्) improper stay at a place. -अधीत a. badly learnt or read. -अध्यय a. 1 difficult of attainment; सहस्रवर्त्मा चपलैर्दुरध्ययः Śi.12.11. -2 hard to be studied. -अध्यवसायः a foolish undertaking. -अध्वः a bad road; स्वयं दुरध्वार्णवनाविकाः कथं स्पृशन्तु विज्ञाय हृदापि तादृशीम् N.9.33. -अन्त a. 1 whose end is difficult to be reached, endless, infinite; संकर्षणाय सूक्ष्माय दुरन्तायान्तकाय च Bhāg. -2 ending ill or in misery, unhappy; अहो दुरन्ता बलवद्विरोधिता Ki.1.23; नृत्यति युवति- जनेन समं सखि विरहिजनस्य दुरन्ते (वसन्ते) Gīt.1; इयमुदरदरी- दुरन्तधारा यदि न भवेदभिमानभङ्गभूमिः Udb. -3 hard to be understood or known. -4 insurmountable. -अन्तक a. = दुरन्त q. v. (-कः) an epithet of Śiva. -अन्वय a. 1 difficult to be passed along; Mb.14.51.17. -2 hard to be carried out or followed. -3 difficult to be attained. or understood; बुद्धिश्च ते महाप्राज्ञ देवैरपि दुरन्वया Rām.3. 66.18. -4 not suitable, improper; वचो दुरन्वयं विप्रास्तूष्णी- मासन्भ्रमद्धियः Bhāg.1.84.14. (-यः) 1 a wrong conclusion, one wrongly inferred from given premisses. -2 (in gram.) a false agreement. -अपवादः ill report. slander. -अभिग्रह a. difficult to be caught. -अभि- मानिन् a. vain-glorious, disagreeably proud. -अवगम a. incomprehensible; Bhāg.5.13.26. -अवग्रह a. 1 difficult to be restrained or subjugated; भक्ता भजस्व दुरवग्रह मा त्यजास्मान् Bhāg.1.29.31. -2 disagreeable. -अवग्राह a. difficult to be attained; Bhāg.7.1.19. -अवच्छद a. difficult to be hidden; हेतुभिर्लक्षयांचक्रुराप्रीतां दुरवच्छदैः Bhāg.1.62.28. -अवबोध a. unintelligible. Bhāg.1.49.29. -अवसित a. unfathomed, difficult to be ascertained, द्युपतिभिरजशक्रशंकराद्यैर्दुरवसितस्तवमच्युतं नतो$स्मि Bhāg.12.12.67. -अवस्थ a. ill off, badly or poorly circumstanced. -अवस्था, -स्थानम् a wretched or miserable state; Bhāg.5.3.12. -अवाप a. difficult to be gained or fulfilled; Ś.1. -अवेक्षितम् an improper look. -अह्नः a bad day. -आकृति a. ugly, mis-shaped. -आक्रन्द a. crying bitterly or miserably; किं क्रन्दसि दुराक्रन्द स्वपक्ष- क्षयकारक Pt.4.29. -आक्रम a. 1 invincible, unconquerable. -2 difficult to be passed. -आक्रमणम् 1 unfair attack. -2 difficult approach. -आगमः improper or illegal acquisition. -आग्रहः foolish obstinacy, headstrongness, pertinacity; ममाहमित्यूढदुराग्रहाणां पुंसाम् Bhāg.3. 5.43. -आचर a. 1 hard to be performed. -2 incurable (as a disease). -आचार a. 1 ill-conducted, badly behaved. -2 following bad practices, wicked, depraved; अपि चेत्सुदुराचारो भजते मामनन्यभाक् Bg.9.3. (-रः) bad practice, ill-conduct, wikedness. -आढ्य a. not rich, poor. -आत्मता vileness, baseness, wickedness. -आत्मन् a. evil-natured, low, wicked, vile, base, mean; ये च प्राहुर्दुरात्मानो दुराराध्या महीभुजः Pt.1.39. (-m.) a rascal, villain, scoundrel. -आधर a. difficult to be withstood or overpowered, irresistible. -आधर्ष a. hard to be approached or assailed, unassailable जगन्नाथो दुराधर्षो गङ्गां भागीरथीं प्रति Mb. -2 not to be attacked with impunity. -3 haughty. (-र्षः) white mustard. -आधारः an epithet of Śiva. -आधिः (m.) 1 distress or anxiety of mind; निरस्तनारीसमया दुराधयः Ki.1.28. -2 indignation. -आधी a. Ved. malignant, thinking ill of. -आनम a. difficult to bend or draw; स विचिन्त्य धनुर्दुरानमम् R.11.38. -आप a. 1 difficult to be obtained; श्रिया दुरापः कथमीप्सितो भवेत् Ś.3.13; R.1.72;6.62. -2 difficult to be approached; Pt.1.67. -3 hard to be overcome. -आपादन a. difficult to be brought about; किं दुरापादनं तेषाम् Bhāg.3.23.42. -आपूर a. difficult to be filled or satisfied; Bhāg.7.6.8. -आबाध a. hard to be molested. (-धः) N. of Śiva. -आमोदः bad scent, stench; शवधूमदुरामोदः शालिभक्ते$त्र विद्यते Ks.82.22. -आराध्य a. difficult to be propitiated, hard to be won over or conciliated; दुराराध्याः श्रियो राज्ञां दुरापा दुष्परिग्रहाः Pt.1.38. -आरुह a. difficult to be mounted. (-हः) 1 the Bilva tree. -2 the cocoanut tree. -3 the date tree. -आरोप a. difficult to be strung (bow); दुरारोपमैन्दुशेखरं धनुर्दुर्निवारा रावणभुजदण्डाः B. R.1.46-47. -आरोह a. difficult of ascent. (-हः) 1 The cocoanut tree. -2 the palm tree. -3 the date tree. -आलापः 1 a curse, imprecation. -2 foul of abusive language. -आलोक a. 1 difficult to be seen or perceived. -2 painfully bright, dazzling; दुरालोकः स समरे निदाघाम्बररत्नवत् K. P.1. (-कः) dazzling splendour. -आव(वा)र a. 1 difficult to be covered or filled up; दुरावरं त्वदन्येन राज्यखण्डमिदं महत् Rām.2.15.5. -2 difficult to be restrained, shut in, kept back or stopped. -आवर्त a. difficult to be convinced or set up; भवन्ति सुदुरावर्ता हेतुमन्तो$पि पण्डिताः Mb.12.19.23. -आशय a. 1 evil-minded, wicked, malicious, स्फुटनिर्भिन्नो दुराशयो$धमः Śi. उपेयिवान् मूलमशेषमूलं दुराशयः कामदुघाङ्घ्रिपस्य Bhāg.3.21.15. -2 having a bad place or rest. (-m.) the subtle body which is not destroyed by death (लिङ्गदेह); एतन्मे जन्म लोके$स्मिन्मुमुक्षूणां दुराशयात् Bhāg.3.24. 36. -आशा 1 a bad or wicked desire. -2 hoping against hope. -आस a. difficult to be abided or associated with; संघर्षिणा सह गुणाभ्यधिकैर्दुरासम् Śi.5.19. -आसद a. 1 difficult to be approached or overtaken; स सभूव दुरासदः परैः R.3.66; 8.4; Mv.2.5; 4.15. -2 difficult to be found or met with. -3 unequalled, unparalleled. -4 hard to be borne, insupportable. -5 difficult to be conquered, unassailable, unconquerable; जहि शत्रुं महाबाहो कामरूपं दुरासदम् Bg.3.43. (-दः) an epithet of Śiva. -इत a. 1 difficult. -2 sinful. (-तम्) 1 a bad course, evil, sin; दरिद्राणां दैन्यं दुरितमथ दुर्वासनहृदां द्रुतं दूरीकुर्वन् G. L.2; R.8.2; Amaru.2; Mv.3.43. -2 a difficulty, danger. -3 a calamity, evil; अपत्ये यत्तादृग्- दुरितमभवत् U.4.3. -इतिः f. Ved. 1 a bad course. -2 difficulty. -इष्टम् 1 a curse, imprecation. -2 a spell or sacrificial rite performed to injure another person. -ईशः a bad lord or master. -ईषणा, -एषणा 1 a curse, an imprecation. -2 an evil eye. -उक्त a. harshly uttered; Pt.1.89. -उक्तम्, -उक्तिः f. offensive speech, reproach, abuse, censure; लक्ष्मि क्षमस्व वचनीयमिदं दुरुक्तम् Udb. -उच्छेद a. difficult to be destroyed. -उत्तर a. 1 unanswerable. -2 difficult to be crossed; दुरुत्तरे पङ्क इवान्धकारे Bk.11.2; प्राप्तः पङ्को दुरुत्तरः Ki.15.17. -उदय a. appearing with difficulty, not easily manifested; यो$ नात्मनां दुरुदयो भगवान्प्रतीतः Bhāg.3.16.5. -उदर्क a. having bad or no consequences; N.5.41. -उदाहर a. difficult to be pronounced or composed; अनुज्झितार्थसंबन्धः प्रबन्धो दुरुदाहरः Śi.2.73. -उद्वह a. burdensome, unbearable. -उपसद a. difficult of approach; Ki.7.9. -उपसर्पिन् a. approaching incautiously; एकमेव दहत्यग्निर्नरं दुरुपसर्पिणम् Ms.7.9. -ऊह a. abstruse; जानीते जयदेव एव शरणः श्लाघ्ये दुरूहद्रुते Gīt. -एव a. Ved. 1 having evil ways. -2 irresistible, unassailable. (-वः) a wicked person. -ओषस् a. Ved. slow, lazy. -ग 1 difficult of access, inaccessible, impervious, impassable; दुर्गस्त्वेष महापन्थाः Mb.12.3. 5; दुर्गं पथस्तत्कवयो वदन्ति Kaṭh.1.3.14. -2 unattainable. -3 incomprehensible. -4 following wicked path, vicious; Rām.2.39.22. (-गः, -गम्) 1 a difficult or narrow passage through a wood or over a stream, mountain &c., a defile, narrow pass. -2 a citadel. fortress, castle; न दुर्गं दुर्गमित्येव दुर्गमं मन्यते जनः । तस्य दुर्गमता सैव यत्प्रभुस्तस्य दुर्गमः ॥ Śiva. B.16.61. -3 rough ground. -4 difficulty, adversity, calamity, distress, danger; निस्तारयतिं दुर्गाच्च Ms.3.98;11.43; मच्चित्तः सर्व- दुर्गाणि मत्प्रसादात्तरिष्यसि; Bg.18.58. (-गः) 1 bdellium. -2 the Supreme Being. -3 N. of an Asura slain by Durgā (thus receiving her name from him). ˚अध्यक्षः, ˚पतिः, ˚पालः the commandant or governor of a castle. ˚अन्तः The suburb of a fort; दुर्गान्ते सिद्धतापसाः Kau. A. 1.12. ˚कर्मन् n. fortification. ˚कारक a. making difficult. (-कः) the birch tree. ˚घ्नी N. of Durgā. ˚तरणी an epithet of Sāvitrī. सावित्री दुर्गतरणी वीणा सप्तविधा तथा Mb. ˚मार्गः a defile, gorge. ˚लङ्घनम् surmounting difficulties. (-नः) a camel. ˚संचरः 1 a difficult passage as to a fort &c., a bridge &c. over a defile. ˚संस्कारः Repairs to the old forts; अतो दुर्गसंस्कार आरब्धव्ये किं कौमुदीमहोत्सवेन Mu. ˚सिंहः N. of the author of कलापपरिशिष्ट. ˚व्यसनम् a defect or weak point in a fortress. (-र्गा) an epithet of Pārvatī, wife of Śiva. -2 the female cuckoo -3 N. of several plants. ˚नवमी the 9th day of the bright half of कार्तिक. ˚पूजा the chief festival in honour of दुर्गा in Bengal in the month of Āśvina. -गत a. 1 unfortunate, in bad circumstances; समाश्वसिमि केनाहं कथं प्राणिमि दुर्गतः Bk.18.1. -2 indigent, poor. -3 distressed, in trouble. -गतता ill-luck, poverty, misery; तावज्जन्मातिदुःखाय ततो दुर्गतता सदा Pt.1.265. -गतिः f. 1 misfortune, poverty, want, trouble, indigence; न हि कल्याणकृत्कश्चिद् दुर्गतिं तात गच्छति Bg.6.4. -2 a difficult situation or path. -3 hell. -गन्ध a. ill-smelling. (-न्धः) 1 bad odour, stink -2 any ill-smelling substance. -3 an onion. -4 the mango tree. (-न्धम्) sochal salt. -गन्धि, -गन्धिन् a. ill-smelling. -गम a. 1 impassable, inaccessible, impervious; कामिनीकायकान्तारे कुचपर्वतदुर्गमे Bh.1.86; Śi. 12.49. -2 unattainable, difficult of attainment. -3 hard to be understood. (-मम्) a difficult place like hill etc; भ्राम्यन्ते दुर्गमेष्वपि Pt.5.81. -गाढ, -गाध, -गाह्य a. difficult to be fathomed or investigated, unfathomable. -गुणितम् not properly studied; चिराम्यस्तपथं याति शास्त्रं दुर्गुणितं यथा Avimārakam.2.4. -गोष्ठी evil association; conspiracy. वृद्धो रक्कः कम्पनेशो दुर्गोष्ठीमध्यगो$भवत् Rāj. T.6. 17. -ग्रह a. 1 difficult to be gained or accomplished. -2 difficult to be conquered or subjugated; दुर्गाणि दुर्ग्रहाण्यासन् तस्य रोद्धुरपि द्विषाम् R.17.52. -3 hard to be understood. (-हः) 1 a cramp, spasm. -2 obstinacy. -3 whim, monomania; कथं न वा दुर्ग्रहदोष एष ते हितेन सम्य- ग्गुरुणापि शम्यते N.9.41. -घट a. 1 difficult. कार्याणि घटयन्नासीद् दुर्घटान्यपि हेलया Rāj. T.4.364. -2 impossible. -घण a. 1 closely packed together, very compact. -घुरुटः An unbeliever; L. D. B. -घोषः 1 a harsh cry. -2 a bear. -जन a. 1 wicked, bad, vile. -2 slanderous, malicious, mischievous; यथा स्त्रीणां तथा वाचां साधुत्वे दुर्जनो जनः U.1.6. (-नः) a bad or wicked person, a malicious or mischievous man, villain; दुर्जनः प्रियवादी च नैतद्विश्वास- कारणम् Chāṇ.24,25; शाम्येत्प्रत्यपकारेण नोपकारेण दुर्जनः Ku.2.4. (दुर्जनायते Den. Ā. to become wicked; स्वजनो$पि दरिद्राणां तत्क्षणाद् दुर्जनायते Pt.1.5.). (दुर्जनीकृ [च्वि] to make blameworthy; दुर्जनीकृतास्मि अनेन मां चित्रगतां दर्शयता Nāg.2). -जय a. invincible. (-यः) N. of Viṣṇu. -जर a. 1 ever youthful; तस्मिन्स्तनं दुर्जरवीर्यमुल्बणं घोराङ्कमादाय शिशोर्दधावथ Bhāg.1.6.1. -2 hard (as food), indigestible. -3 difficult to be enjoyed; राजश्रीर्दुर्जरा तस्य नवत्वे भूभुजो$भवत् Rāj. T.5.19. -जात a. 1 unhappy, wretched. -2 bad-tempered, bad, wicked; Rāj. T.3. 142. -3 false, not genuine. ˚जीयिन् a. one who is born in vain; यो न यातयते वैरमल्पसत्त्वोद्यमः पुमान् । अफलं जन्म तस्याहं मन्ये दुर्जातजायिनः ॥ Mb. (-तम्) 1 a misfortune, calamity, difficulty; त्वं तावद् दुर्जाते मे$त्यन्तसाहाय्यकारिणी भव M.3; दुर्जातबन्धुः R.13.72. 'a friend in need or adversity.' -2 impropriety. -जाति a. 1 bad natured, vile, wicked; रुदितशरणा दुर्जातीनां सहस्व रुषां फलम् Amaru.96. -2 outcast. (-तिः f.) misfortune, ill condition. -ज्ञान, -ज्ञेय a. difficult to be known, incomprehensible. उच्चावचेषु भुतेषु दुर्ज्ञेयामकृतात्मभिः Ms.6.73. (-यः) N. of Śiva. -णयः, -नयः, -नीतिः 1 bad conduct. -2 impropriety -3 injustice. -णामन्, -नामन् a. having a bad name. -णीत a. 1 ill-behaved. -2 impolitic. -3 forward. (-तम्) misconduct; दुर्णीतं किमिहास्ति किं सुचरितं कः स्थानलाभे गुणः H. -दम, -दमन, -दम्य a. difficult to be subdued, untamable, indomitable. -दर्श a. 1 difficult to be seen. -2 dazzling; सुदुर्दर्शमिदं रूपं दृष्टवानसि यन्मन Bg.11.52. -दर्शन a. ugly, ill-looking; दुर्दर्शनेन घटतामियमप्यनेन Māl.2.8. -दशा a misfortune, calamity. -दान्त a. 1 hard to be tamed or subdued, untamable; Śi.12.22. -2 intractable, proud, insolent; दुर्दान्तानां दमनविधयः क्षत्रियेष्वायतन्ते Mv.3.34. (-तः) 1 a calf. -2 a strife, quarrel. -3 N. of Śiva. -दिन a. cloudy, rainy. (-नम्) 1 a bad day in general; तद्दिनं दुर्दिनं मन्ये यत्र मित्रागमो हि न Subhāṣ. -2 a rainy or cloudy day, stormy or rainy weather; उन्नमत्यकालदुर्दिनम् Mk.5; Ku.6 43; Mv.4.57. -3 a shower (of anything); द्विषां विषह्य काकुत्स्थस्तत्र नाराचदुर्दिनम् ॥ सन्मङ्गलस्नात इव R.4.41,82;5.47; U.5.5. -4 thick darkness; जीमूतैश्च दिशः सर्वाश्चक्रे तिमिरदुर्दिनाः Mb. (दुर्दिनायते Den. Ā. to become cloudy.) -दिवसः a dark or rainy day; Pt.1.173. -दुरूटः, -ढः 1 an unbeliever -2 an abusive word. -दृश a. 1 disagreeable to the sight, disgusting; दुर्दृशं तत्र राक्षसं घोररूपमपश्यत्सः Mb.1.2.298. -2 difficult to be seen; पादचारमिवादित्यं निष्पतन्तं सुदुर्दृशम् Rām.7.33.5. -दृष्ट a. illjudged or seen, wrongly decided; Y.2.35. -दैवम् ill-luck, misfortune. -द्यूतम् an unfair game. -द्रुमः onion (green). -धर a. 1 irresistible, difficult to be stopped. -2 difficult to be borne or suffered; दुर्धरेण मदनेन साद्यते Ghat.11; Ms.7.28. -3 difficult to be accomplished. -4 difficult to be kept in memory. (-रः) quicksilver. -धर्ष a. 1 inviolable, unassailable. -2 inaccessible; संयोजयति विद्यैव नीचगापि नरं सरित् । समुद्रमिव दुर्धर्षं नृपं भाग्य- मतः परम् ॥ H. Pr.5. -3 fearful, dreadful. -4 haughty. -धी a. stupid, silly. -नयः 1 arrogance. -2 immorality. -3 evil strategy; उन्मूलयितुमीशो$हं त्रिवर्गमिव दुर्नयः Mu.5.22. -नामकः piles. ˚अरिः a kind of bulbous root (Mar. सुरण). -नामन् m. f. a cockle. (-n.) piles. -निग्रह a. irrepressible, unruly; मनो दुर्निग्रहं चलम् Bg.6.35. -निमित a. carelessly put or placed on the ground; पदे पदे दुर्निमिते गलन्ती R.7.1. -निमित्तम् 1 a bad omen; R.14.5. -2 a bad pretext. -निवार, -निवार्य a. difficult to be checked or warded off, irresistible, invincible. -नीतम् 1 misconduct, bad policy, demerit, misbehaviour; दुर्णीतं किमि- हास्ति Pt.2.21; H.1.49. -2 ill-luck. -नीतिः f. maladministration; दुर्नीतिं तव वीक्ष्य कोपदहनज्वालाजटालो$पि सन्; Bv.4.36. -नृपः a bad king; आसीत् पितृकुलं तस्य भक्ष्यं दुर्नृप- रक्षसः Rāj. T.5.417. -न्यस्त a. badly arranged; दुर्न्यस्त- पुष्परचितो$पि Māl.9.44. -बल a. 1 weak, feeble. -2 enfeebled, spiritless; दुर्बलान्यङ्गकानि U.1.24. -3 thin, lean, emaciated; U.3. -4 small, scanty, little; स्वार्थोप- पत्तिं प्रति दुर्बलाशः R.5.12. -बाध a. Unrestrained (अनिवार); दुर्बाधो जनिदिवसान्मम प्रवृद्धः (आधिः); Mv.6.28. -बाल a. 1 bald-headed. -2 void of prepuce. -3 having crooked hair. -बुद्धि a. 1 silly, foolish, stupid. -2 perverse, evil-minded, wicked; धार्तराष्ट्रस्य दुर्बुद्धेर्युद्धे प्रियचिकीर्षवः (समा- गताः) Bg.1.23 -बुध a. wicked-minded, silly; Mb. 11.4.18. -बोध a. unintelligible, unfathomable, inscrutable; निसर्गदुर्बोधमबोधविक्लवाः क्व भूपतीनां चरितं क्व जन्तवः Ki. 1.6. -भग a. 1 unfortunate, unlucky; श्रीवल्लभं दुर्भगाः (निन्दन्ति) Pt.1.415. -2 not possessed of good features, ill-looking. -भगा 1 a wife disliked by her husband; दुर्भगाभरणप्रायो ज्ञानं भारः क्रियां विना H.1.17. -2 an ill-tempered woman, a shrew. -3 a widow; -भर a. insupportable, burdensome, heavily laden with (comp.); ततो राजाब्रवीदेतं बहुव्यसनदुर्भरः Ks.112.156. -भाग्य a. unfortunate, unlucky. (ग्यम्) ill-luck. -भावना 1 an evil thought. -2 a bad tendency. -भिक्षम् 1 scarcity of provisions, dearth, famine; Y.2.147; Ms.8.22; उत्सवे व्यसने चैव दुर्भिक्षे... यस्तिष्ठति स बान्धवः H.1.71; Pt.2. -2 want in general. -भिद, -भेद, -भेद्य a. firm; सुजनस्तु कनकघटवद् दुर्भेद्यश्चाशु संध्येयः Subhāṣ. -भृत्यः a bad servant. -भिषज्यम् incurability; Bṛi. Up.4.3.14. -भ्रातृ m. a bad brother. -मङ्कु a. obstinate, disobedient. -मति a. 1 silly, stupid, foolish, ignorant. -2 wicked, evilminded; न सांपरायिकं तस्य दुर्मतेर्विद्यते फलम् Ms.11.3. -मद a. drunken, ferocious, maddened, infatuated; Bhāg.1.15.7. -दः foolish pride, arrogance. -दम् the generative organ; ग्रामकं नाम विषयं दुर्मदेन समन्वितः Bhāg.4.25.52. -मनस् a. troubled in mind, discouraged, disspirited, sad, malancholy; अद्य बार्हस्पतः श्रीमान् युक्तः पुष्येण राघवः । प्रोच्यतै ब्राह्मणैः प्राज्ञैः केन त्वमसि दुर्मनाः ॥ Rām. [दुर्मनायते Den. Ā. to be troubled in mind, be sad, meditate sorrowfully, to be disconsolate, become vexed or fretted; Māl.3]. -मनुष्यः a bad or wicked man. -मन्त्रः, -मन्त्रितम्, -मन्त्रणा evil advice, bad counsel; दुर्मन्त्रान्नृपतिर्विनश्यति; Pt.1.169. -मरम् a hard or difficult death; Mb.14.61.9. -मरी a kind of दूर्वा grass. -मरणम् violent or unnatural death. -मर्ष a. 1 unbearable; Bhāg.6.5.42. -2 obstinate, hostile. -मर्षणः N. of Viṣṇu. -मर्षित a. provocated, encouraged; एवं दुर्मर्षितो राजा स मात्रा बभ्रुवाहनः Mb.14. 79.13, -मर्याद a. immodest, wicked. -मल्लिका, -मल्ली a minor drama, comedy, farce; S. D.553. -मित्रः 1 a bad friend. -2 an enemy. -मुख a. 1 having a bad face, hideous, ugly; Bh.1.9. -2 foul-mouthed, abusive, scurrilous; Bh.2.69. (-खः) 1 a horse. -2 N. of Śiva. -3 N. of a serpent king (Nm.) -4 N. of a monkey (Nm.) -5 N. of a year (29th year out of 6 years cycle). -मूल्य a. highly priced, dear. -मेधस् a. silly, foolish, dull-headed, dull; Pt.1. (-m.) a dunce, dull-headed man, blockhead; ग्रन्थानधीत्य व्याकर्तु- मिति दुर्मेधसो$प्यलम् Śi.2.26. -मैत्र a. unfriendly, hostile; Bhāg.7.5.27. -यशस् n. ill-repute, dishonour. -योगः 1 bad or clumsy contrivance. -2 a bad combination. -योध, -योधन a. invincible, unconquerable. (-नः) the eldest of the 11 sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Gāndhārī. [From his early years he conceived a deep hatred for his cousins the Pāṇḍavas, but particularly Bhīma, and made every effort he could to compass their destruction. When his father proposed to make Yudhiṣṭhira heir-apparent, Duryodhana did not like the idea, as his father was the reigning sovereign, and prevailed upon his blind father to send the Pāṇḍavas away into exile. Vāraṇāvata was fixed upon as their abode, and under pretext of constructing a palatial building for their residence, Duryodhana caused a palace to be built mostly of lac, resin and other combustible materials, thereby hoping to see them all destroyed when they should enter it. But the Paṇḍavas were forewarned and they safely escaped. They then lived at Indraprastha, and Yudhiṣṭhira performed the Rājasuya sacrifice with great pomp and splendour. This event further excited the anger and jealousy of Duryodhana, who was already vexed to find that his plot for burning them up had signally failed, and he induced his father to invite the Pāṇḍavas to Hastināpura to play with dice (of which Yudhiṣṭhira was particularly fond). In that gambling-match, Duryodhana, who was ably assisted by his maternal uncle Śakuni, won from Yudhiṣṭhira everything that he staked, till the infatuated gambler staked himself, his brothers, and Draupadī herself, all of whom shared the same fate. Yudhiṣṭhira, as a condition of the wager, was forced to go to the forest with his wife and brothers, and to remain there for twelve years and to pass one additional year incognito. But even this period, long as it was, expired, and after their return from exile both the Pāṇḍavas and Kauravas made great preparations for the inevitable struggle and the great Bhāratī war commenced. It lasted for eighteen days during which all the Kauravas, with most of their allies, were slain. It was on the last day of the war that Bhīma fought a duel with Duryodhana and smashed his thigh with his club.] मोघं तवेदं भुवि नामधेयं दुर्योधनेतीह कृतं पुरस्तात् न हीह दुर्योधनता तवास्ति पलायमानस्य रणं विहाय Mb.4.65.17. -योनि a. of a low birth, न कथंचन दुर्योनिः प्रकृतिं स्वां नियच्छति Ms.1.59. -लक्ष्य a. difficult to be seen or perceived, hardly visible. -क्ष्यम् bad aim; मनः प्रकृत्यैव चलं दुर्लक्ष्यं च तथापि मे Ratn.3.2. -लभ a. 1 difficult to be attained, or accomplished; R.1.67;17.7; Ku.4.4;5.46,61; दुर्लभं भारते जन्म मानुष्यं तत्र दुर्लभम् Subhāṣ. -2 difficult to be found or met with, scarce, rare; शुद्धान्तदुर्लभम् Ś.1.17. -3 best, excellent, eminent. -ग्रामः a village situated close to a large village and inhabited by the free-holders (अग्र- हारोपजीविनः); Māna.1.79-8. -4 dear, beloved. -5 costly. -ललित a. 1 spoilt by fondling, fondled too much, hard to please; हा मदङ्कदुर्ललित Ve.4; V.2.8; Māl.9. -2 (hence) wayward, naughty, illbred, unruly; स्पृहयामि खलु दुर्ललितायास्मै Ś.7. (-तम्) waywardness, rudeness. -लेख्यम् a forged document. Y.2.91. -वच a. 1 difficult to be described, indescribable. अपि वागधिपस्य दुर्वचं वचनं तद् विदधीत विस्मयम् Ki.2.2. -2 not to be talked about. -3 speaking improperly, abusing. (-चम्) abuse, censure, foul language. -वचस् n. abuse, censure; असह्यं दुर्वचो ज्ञातेर्मेघा- न्तरितरौद्रवत् Udb. -वर्ण a. bad-coloured. -र्णः 1 bad colour. -2 impurity; यथा हेम्नि स्थितो वह्निर्दुवर्णं हन्ति धातु- जम् Bhāg.12.3.47. (-र्णम्) 1 silver. दुर्वर्णभित्तिरिह सान्द्रसुधासुवर्णा Śi.4.28. -2 a kind of leprosy. -वस a. difficult to be resided in. -वसतिः f. painful residence; R.8.94. -वह a. heavy, difficult to be borne; दुर्वहगर्भखिन्नसीता U.2.1; Ku.1.11. -वाच् a. speaking ill. (-f.) 1 evil words, abuse. -2 inelegant language or speech. -वाच्य a. 1 difficult to be spoken or uttered. -2 abusive, scurrilous. -3 harsh, cruel (as words). (-च्यम्) 1 censure, abuse. -2 scandal, ill-repute. -वातः a fart. ˚वातय Den. P. to break wind or fart; इत्येके विहसन्त्येनमेके दुर्वातयन्ति च Bhāg.11.23.4. -वादः slander, defamation, calumny. -वार, -वारण a. irresistible, unbearable; R.14.87; किं चायमरिदुर्वारः पाणौ पाशः प्रचेतसः Ku.2.21. -वासना 1 evil propensity, wicked desire; कः शत्रुर्वद खेददानकुशलो दुर्वासनासंचयः Bv. 1.86. -2 a chimera. -वासस् a. 1 ill-dressed. -2 naked. (-m.) N. of a very irascible saint or Ṛiṣi, son of Atri and Anasūyā. (He was very hard to please, and he cursed many a male and female to suffer misery and degradation. His anger, like that of Jamadagni, has become almost proverbial.) -वाहितम् a heavy burden; उरोजपूर्णकुम्भाङ्का सदुर्वाहितविभ्रमा Rāj. T.4.18. -विगाह, -विगाह्य a. difficult to be penetrated or fathomed, unfathomable. -विचिन्त्य inconceivable, inscrutable -विद a. difficult to be known or discovered; नूनं गतिः कृतान्तस्य प्राज्ञैरपि सुदुर्विदा Mb.7.78. 2. -विदग्ध 1 unskilled, raw, foolish, stupid, silly. -2 wholly ignorant. -3 foolishly puffed up, elated. vainly proud; वृथाशस्त्रग्रहणदुर्विदग्ध Ve.3; ज्ञानलवदुर्विदग्धं ब्रह्मापि नरं न रञ्जयति Bh.2.3. -विद्ध a. Badly perforated (a pearl); Kau. A.2.11. -विद्य a. uneducated; Rāj. T.1.354. -विध a. 1 mean, base, low. -2 wicked, vile. -3 poor, indigent; विदधाते रुचिगर्वदुर्विधम् N.2.23. -4 stupid, foolish, silly; विविनक्ति न बुद्धिदुर्विधः Śi.16.39. -विनयः misconduct, imprudence. -विनीत a. 1 (a) badly educated, ill-mannered; ill-behaved, wicked; शासितरि दुर्विनीतानाम् Ś.1.24. (b) rude, naughty, mischievous. -2 stubborn, obstinate. (-तः) 1 a restive or untrained horse. -2 a wayward person, reprobate. -विपाक a. producing bad fruit; श्रितासि चन्दनभ्रान्त्या दुर्विपाकं विषद्रुमम् U.1.46. (-कः) 1 bad result or consequence; U.1.4; किं नो विधिरिह वचने$प्यक्षमो दुर्विपाकः Mv. 6.7. -2 evil consequences of acts done either in this or in a former birth. -विभाव्य a. inconceivable; also दुर्विभाव; असद्वृत्तेरहो वृत्तं दुर्विभावं विधेरिव Ki.11.56. -विमर्श a. difficult to be tried or examined; यो दुर्विमर्शपथया निजमाययेदं सृष्ट्वा गुणान्विभजते तदनुप्रविष्टः Bhāg.1.49.29. -विलसितम् a wayward act, rudeness, naughtiness; डिम्भस्य दुर्विलसितानि मुदे गुरूणाम् B. R.4.6. -विलासः a bad or evil turn of fate; U.1. -विवाहः a censurable marriage; इतरेषु तु शिष्टेषु नृशंसानृतवादिनः । जायन्ते दुर्विवाहेषु ब्रह्मधर्मद्विषः सुताः ॥ Ms.3.41. -विष a. ill-natured, malignant. (-षः) N. of Śiva. -विषह a. unbearable, intolerable, irresistible. (-हः) N. of Śiva. -वृत्त a. 1 vile, wicked, ill-behaved. -2 roguish. (-त्तम्) misconduct, ill-behaviour. दुर्वृत्तवृत्तशमनं तव देवि शीलम् Devīmāhātmya. -वृत्तिः f. 1 misconduct. -2 misery, want, distress. -3 fraud. -वृष्टिः f. insufficient rain, drought. -वेद a. difficult to be known or ascertained. -व्यवहारः a wrong judgment in law. -व्यवहृतिः f. ill-report or rumour. -व्यसनम् 1 a fond pursuit or resolve; Mu.3. -2 bad propensity, vice; तेन दुर्व्यसनेनासीद्भोजने$पि कदर्थना Ks.73.73. -व्रत a. not conforming to rules, disobedient. -हुतम् a badly offered sacrifice. -हृद् a. wicked-hearted, ill-disposed, inimical; अकुर्वतोर्वां शुश्रूषां क्लिष्टयोर्दुर्हृदा भृशम् Bhāg.1.45.9. (-m.) an enemy. -हृदय a. evil-minded, evil-intentioned, wicked. -हृषीक a. having defective organs of sense.

dṛṣṭa	दृष्ट p. p. [दृश्-कर्मणि-क्त] 1 Seen, looked, perceived, observed, beheld; उभयोरपि दृष्टो$न्तः Bg.2.16. -2 Visible, observable. -3 Regarded, considered; दृष्टो विवृत्य बहुशो$प्यनया सतृष्णम् Ś.3.1. -4 Occurring, found. -5 Appearing, manifested. -6 Known, learned, understood. -7 Determined, decided, fixed; तदहं यष्टुमिच्छामि शास्त्रदृष्टेन कर्मणा Rām.1.8.9. -8 Valid. -9 Allotted. -1 Experienced, suffered, endured, felt. -11 Treated of; see दृश्. -ष्टम् 1 Perception, observation. -2 Danger from dacoits. -Comp. -अदृष्ट a. 1 seen for the first time. -2 scarcely or hardly seen. -3 relating to the present and future life; दृष्टादृष्टक्रियासिद्धिर्न् भवेत्तादृगन्यथा Rāj. T.1. 13. -अन्तः, -तम् 1 an example, illustration, parable; पूर्णश्चन्द्रोदयाकाङ्क्षी दृष्टान्तो$त्र महार्णवः Śi.2.31; साध्यसाधर्म्यात् तद्धर्मभावो दृष्टान्त उदाहरणम् Gautamasutra. -2 (in Rhet.) a figure of speech in which an assertion or statement is illustrated by an example (distinguished from उपमा and प्रतिवस्तूपमा; see K. P.1 and R. G. ad. loc.). -3 a Śāstra or science; शोभार्थं विहितास्तत्र न तु दृष्टान्तः कृताः Mb.2.3.13. -4 death (cf. दिष्टान्त). -अर्थ a. 1 having the object or meaning obvious or quite apparent. -2 practical. -3 having a clear idea about anything. ˚आपत्तिः (see अर्थापत्तिः). -कष्ट, -दुःख &c. a. one who has experienced or suffered misery, inured to hardships. -कूटम् a riddle, an enigma. -दोष a. 1 found fault with, considered to be faulty; Ś.2. -2 vicious. -3 exposed, detected. -पृष्ठ a. running from a battlefield. -प्रत्यय a. 1 having confidence manifested. -2 convinced. -रजस् f. a girl arrived at puberty. -व्यतिकर a. 1 one who has experienced a misfortune. -2 one who foresees evil.

dyu	द्यु n. 1 A day. -2 The sky. -3 Brightness. -4 Heaven. -5 Sharpness; cf. अद्यु -m. Fire. (द्यु is a substitute for दिव् f. before terminations beginning with consonants and in compounds.) -Comp. -गः a bird. -चरः 1 a planet. -2 a bird. -जयः attainment or gaining of heaven. -ज्या the diameter of a circle made by an asterism in its daily revolution. -दलः noon. -धुनिः f., -नदी the heavenly Ganges; सिद्धैर्नुतो द्युधुनिपातशिवस्वनासु रेमे चिरं धनदवल्ललनावरूथी Bhāg.3.23.39. -निवासः a deity, god; शोकाग्निना$गाद् द्युनिवासभूयम् Bk.3.21. -निवासिन् m. 1 a deity. -2 a virtuous man. -पतिः 1 the sun. -2 an epithet of Indra. -पथः the upper part of the sky. -मणिः 1 the sun; कृष्णद्युमणिनिम्लोचे ...... Bhāg.3.2.7. -2 Calcined copper. -योषित् f. an apsaras. -रत्नम् the sun. -लोकः heaven. -षद्, -सद् m. 1 a god, deity; मनःसु येषां द्युसदां न्यधीयत Si.1.43. -2 a planet. -सरित् f. the Ganges.

drava	द्रव a. [द्रु गतौ-भावे अप्] 1 Running (as a horse); सत्यो द्रवो द्रवरः पतङ्गरः Rv.4.4.2. -2 Dropping, oozing, wet, dripping; आक्षिप्य काचिद् द्रवरागमेव (पादम्) R.7.7. -3 Flowing, fluid. -4 Liquid (opp. कठिन); द्रवः संघातकठिनः (असि) Ku.2.11. -5 Melted, liquefied. -वः 1 Going, walking about, motion. -2 Dropping, trickling, oozing, exudation. -3 Flight, retreat. -4 Play, amusement, sport. -5 Fluidity, liquefaction -6 A liquid substance, fluid; द्रव इव हृदयस्य प्रस्तरोद्भेदयोग्यः U.3.25;2.16. -7 Juice, essence; पिबत भागवतं रसमालयम् Bhāg.1.1.3. -8 Decoction. -9 Speed, velocity. -1 (in drama) The flying out against one's superior. (द्रवीकृ means 'to melt, liquefy'. द्रवीभू to be melted, as with pity &c.; द्रवीभवति मे मनः Mv.7.34; द्रवीभूतं प्रेम्णा तव हृदयमस्मिन् क्षण इव U.3.13; द्रवीभूतं मन्ये पतति जलरूपेण गगनम् Mk.5.25. -Comp. -आधारः 1 a small vessel or receiver. -2 the hands joined together and hollowed (= चुलुक q. v.). -इतर a. solid, hard; ससर्ज वृष्टिं परिरुग्णपादपां द्रवेतरेषां पयसामिवाश्मनाम् Ki.17.6. -उत्तर a. very fluid. -जः treacle. -द्रव्यम् a fluid substance. -रसा 1 lac. -2 gum. -3 extract.

dravaka	द्रवक द्रवण a. 1 Running. -2 Oozing, trickling.

dravat	द्रवत् a. 1 Running, swift. -2 Trickling, oozing.

drāṇa	द्राण a. 1 Flown, run away. -2 Sleeping, sleepy. -णम् 1 Running away, flight, retreat. -2 Sleep.

drāvaḥ	द्रावः [द्रु-भावे-घञ्] 1 Flight, retreat. -2 Speed. -3 Running, flowing. -4 Heat. -5 Liquefaction, melting. -Comp. -करम् a flux.

druta	द्रुत p. p. [द्रु-क्त] 1 Quick, swift, speedy. -2 Flown, run away, escaped. -3 Melted, liquid, dissolved; जाता- नुरागो द्रुतचित्त उच्चैः Bhāg.11.2.4. -4 Scattered, diffused. -5 Indistinct. -6 Moved, softened; द्रुतं करुणया Māl.5.28; see द्रु. -तः 1 A scorpion. -2 A tree. -3 A cat. -तम् 1 the act of running; अलं द्रुतेन वः शूरा इति द्रोणो$भ्यभाषत Mb.7.16.18. -2 A particular faulty pronunciation of vowels. -तम् ind. Quickly, swiftly, speedily, immediately. -Comp. -गति a. going quickly, hastening. -पद a. 1 going quickly. -2 a form of metre. -मध्या ibid. -विलम्बितम् N. of a metre; see App. I.

drutiḥ	द्रुतिः f. 1 Melting, dissolving. -2 Going, running away.

dvaivārṣika	द्वैवार्षिक a. (-की f.) Biennial.

dhakk	धक्क् 1 U. (धक्कयति-ते) To destroy or annihilate.

dhanvin	धन्विन् a. (-नी f.) [धन्वं चापो$स्त्यस्य इनि] 1 Armed with a bow. -2 Cunning, shrewd. -m. 1 An archer; के मम धन्विनो$न्ये Ku.3.1; उत्कर्षः स च धन्विनां यदिषवः सिध्यन्ति लक्ष्ये चले Ś.2.5. यस्य तृणसमा बाणा यस्येन्धनसमं धनुः । यस्य प्राणसमा मौर्वी स धन्वी धन्विनां वरः ॥ Dhanur.147. -2 An epithet of Arjuna. -3 Of Śiva. -4 Of Viṣṇu. -5 The sign Sagittarius of the zodiac. -Comp. -स्थानम् A posture of an archer; वैक्लवं समपादं च वैशाखं मण्डलं तथा । प्रत्यालीढं तथा लीढं स्थानान्येतानि धन्विनाम् ॥

dhāvaka	धावक a. [धाव्-ण्वुल्] 1 Running, flowing. -2 Quick, swift. -3 Washing. -कः 1 A washerman. -2 N. of a poet (said to have composed the Ratnāvalī for King Srīharṣa); श्रीहर्षादेर्धावकादीनामिव यशः K. P.1. (v. l.); प्रथितयशसां धावकसौमिल्लकविपुत्रादीनां प्रबन्धानतिक्रम्य M.1 (v. l.).

dhāvanam	धावनम् [धाव्-भावे ल्युट्] 1 Running, galloping. -2 Flowing. -3 Attacking. -4 Cleansing, purifying, rubbing, washing off. -5 Rubbing with anything.

dhāvita	धावित p. p. 1 Purified, cleansed. -2 Running towards, or against. -3 Running, going quickly.

dhūtiḥ	धूतिः f. 1 Shaking, moving. -2 Fanning.

dhūrta	धूर्त a. [धूर्व्-धूर् वा क्त, उणा ˚तन् वा Tv.] 1 Cunning, knavish, roguish, crafty, fraudulent. -2 Mischievous, injurious. -3 Hurt, injured. -4 Gay, licentious; धूर्तै- रन्वीयमानाः स्फुटचतुरकथाकोविदैर्वेशनार्यः Mu.3.1. -र्तः 1 A cheat, rogue, swindler. -2 A gamester. -3 A lover, gallant, gay deceiver; नारीजने धूर्तता Bh.; तत्ते धूर्त हृदि स्थिता प्रियतमा काचिन्ममैवापरा Pt.4.6; धूर्तो$परां चुम्बति Amaru.19; so धूर्तानामभिसारसत्वरहृदाम् Gīt.11. -4 The thorn apple (धत्तूर). -5 Hurting, injuring. -र्तम् 1 Rust, iron-filings. -2 Black-salt. -Comp. -कितवः a gamester. -कृत् a. crafty, dishonest. (-m.) the Dhattūra plant. -जन्तु a man. -मानुषा N. of a plant (Mar. रास्ना). -रचना a roguery.

dhruva	ध्रुव a. 1 (a) Fixed, firm, immovable, stable, permanent, constant, unchangeable; इति ध्रुवेच्छाम- नुशासती सुताम् Ku.5.5. (b) Perpetual, everlasting, eternal; ध्रुवेण भर्त्रा Ku.7.85; Ms.7.28. -2 Fixed (in astrology). -3 Certain, sure, inevitable; जातस्य हि ध्रुवो मृत्युर्ध्रुवं जन्म मृतस्य च Bg.2.27; यो ध्रुवाणि परित्यज्य अध्रुवं परिषेवते Chāṇ.63; Pt.1.419. -4 Retentive, tenacious; as in ध्रुवा स्मृति Ch. Up.7.26.2. -5 Strong, fixed, settled (as a day). -वः 1 The polar star; शरत्प्रसन्नैर्ज्योतिर्भिर्विभावर्य इव ध्रुवम् (अन्वयुः) R.17.35; 18.34; ध्रुवेण भर्त्रा ध्रुवदर्शनाय प्रयुज्यमाना प्रियदर्शनेन (सा दृष्टा) Ku.7.85. -2 The pole of any great circle. -3 The distance of a planet from the beginning of the sidereal zodiac, polar longitude. -4 The Indian figtree. -5 A post, stake. -6 The stem or trunk (of a tree lopped off). -7 The introductory stanza of a song (repeated as a kind of chorus; see Gīt.). -8 Time, epoch, era. -9 An epithet of Brahmā. -1 Of Viṣṇu. -11 Of Śiva. -12 A constant arc. -13 The tip of the nose. -14 A sacrificial vessel. -15 N. of the son of Uttānapāda and grandson of Manu. [Dhruva is the polar star, but personified in mythology as the son of Uttānapāda. The account of the elevation of an ordinary mortal to the position of the polar star runs thus: Uttānapāda had two wives, Suruchi and Sunīti, but the latter was disliked by him. Suruchi had a son named Uttama, and Sunīti gave birth to Dhruva. One day the boy tried, like his elder brother, to take a seat in his father's lap, but he was contemptuously treated both by the King and his favourite wife. The poor child went sobbing to its mother who told him in consolatory terms that fortune and favour were not attainable without hard exertions. At these words the youth left the paternal roof, retired to the woods, and, though quite a lad, performed such rigorous austerities that he was at last raised by Viṣṇu to the position of the Polar Star.] -16 Peg Nm. -17 N. of an astrological yoga (Nm.). -वम् 1 The sky, atmosphere. -2 Heaven. -3 The fixed point (from which a departure takes place); P.I.4.24. -4 A certain Yoga (अमृतसिद्धि); सेनामाज्ञापयामासुर्नक्षत्रे$हनि च ध्रुवे Mb.14.63.18. (Com. रोहिण्यामुत्तररात्रये च अहनि वारे ध्रुवे रविवारे उत्तरार्के$मृतसिद्धि- योगे). -वा 1 A sacrificial ladle (made of wood); साधारण्यान्न ध्रुवायां स्यात् Jaiminisūtras. -2 A virtuous woman. -3 A cow who stands still when being milked; सहस्रं धारा द्रविणस्य मे दुहां ध्रुवेव धेनुरनपस्फुरन्ती Av.12.1.45. -4 A bow-string. -5 clapping the hands together to show a particular measure of time in music; स्रुचि मौर्व्यां तालभेदे स्त्रियाम् Nm. -6 The upper quarter (ऊर्ध्व); किंदेवतो$स्यां ध्रुवायां दिशि Bṛi. Up.3.9.24. (MW's meaning is अधर- दिशा?) -वम् ind. Certainly, surely, verily; R.8.49; ध्रुवं स नीलोत्पलपत्रधारया समिल्लतां छेत्तुमृषिर्व्यवस्यति Ś.1.18. -Comp. -अक्षरः an epithet of Viṣṇu (ओम्). -आयर्तः the point on the crown of the head from which the hair radiate. -केतुः a kind of meteor. -गतिः a firm position. -तारा, -तारकम् the Polar star. -भागः the unchangeable longitude of fixed stars. -मण्डलम् the polar region. -यष्टिः the axis of the poles. -योनि a. having a firm resting place. -रत्ना N. of one of the मातृकाs (attending on Skanda). -शीलः a. having a fixed residence.

dhvṛ	ध्वृ 1 P. (ध्वरति) 1 to bend. -2 To kill [ध्वृ हूर्च्छने । हूच्छी कौटिल्ये]; ध्वृषीष्ठा युधि मायाभिः ...... Bk.9.27. requesting, or commanding, but not in prohibition before the imperative mood. (b) Used with the potential mood न may sometimes have the force of 'lest', 'for fear lest', 'that not'; क्षत्रियैर्धार्यते शस्त्रं नार्तशब्दो भवेदिति Rām. (c) In agrumentative writings न often comes after इति चेत् and means 'not so.' (d) When a negative has to be repeated in successive clauses of the same sentence or in different sentences, न may be simply repeated or may be used with particles like उत, च, अपि, चापि, वा &c.; नाधीयीताश्वमारूढो न वृक्षं न च हस्तिनम् । न नावं न खरं नोष्ट्रं नेरिणत्थो न यानगः ॥ Ms.4.12; प्रविशन्तं न मां कश्चिदपश्यन्नाप्यवारयत् Mb.; Ms.2.195; 3.8,9;4.15; न वा शरच्चन्द्रमरीचिकोमलं मृणालसूत्रं रचितं स्तनान्तरे Ś.16.17. Sometimes न may not be expressed in the second and other clauses, but represented only by च, वा, अपि वा; संपदि यस्य न हर्षो विपदि विषादो रणे च धीरत्वम् Pt.2.175. (c) न is frequently joined with a second न or any other negative particle to intensify or emphasize an assertion; प्रत्युवाच तमृषिर्न तत्त्वतस्त्वां न वेद्मि पुरुषं पुरातनम् R. 11.85; न च न परिचितो न चाप्यगम्यः M.1.11; न पुनरलंकार- श्रियं न पुष्यति Ś1.19/2; नादण्ड्यो नाम राज्ञो$स्ति Ms.8.335; Me.65,18; नासो न काम्यो न च वेद सम्यग् द्रष्टुं न सा R. 6.3; Śi.1.55; Ve.2.1. (f) In a few cases न is retained at the beginning of a negative Tatpuruṣa compound; as नाक, नासत्य, नकुल; see P.VI.3.75. (g) न is often joined with other particles; नच, नवा, नैव, नतु, न चेद्, न खलु &c. (h) It is also used, especially in early Vedic literature, in the sense of 'like', 'as', 'as it were'; यद्वां नरा सनये दंस उग्रमाविष्कृणोमि तन्यतुर्न वृष्टिम् Bṛi. Up.2.5.16; गावो न गव्यूतीरनु; Śi.2.4. (v. l.) -Comp. -अधीत a. unread. -अनुरक्त a. unkind, not loving; Pt.2.46 (v. l.). -आदरः disrespect. -एकः a. 1 'not one', more than one, several, various; नैकः सुप्तेषु जागृयात् Viduranīti. -2 Not anyone, nobody; नैको मुनिर्यस्य वचः प्रमाणम् Pt. (-कः) an epithet of Viṣṇu. ˚आत्मन् a. of a manifold or diverse nature. (-m.) N. of the Supreme Being. ˚चर a. 'not living alone', gregarious, living in society. ˚जः the Supreme Being. ˚धा ind. in many ways, diversely. ˚भेद, ˚रूप a. various, multiform. -माय a. using many artifices or stratagems. ˚शस् ind. repeatedly, often. -किंचन a. very poor, beggarly. सर्वकामरसैर्हीनाः स्थानभ्रष्टा नकिंचनाः Mb.

naraḥ	नरः [नॄ-नये-अच्] 1 A man, male person; संयोजयति विद्यैव नीचगापि नरं सरित् । समुद्रमिव दुर्धर्षं नृपं भाग्यमतः परम् ॥ H. Pr.5; Ms.1.96;2.213. -2 A man or piece at chess. -3 The pin of a sun-dial. -4 The Supreme Spirit, the original or eternal man. -5 Man's length (= पुरुष. q. v.). -6 N. of a primitive sage. -7 N. of Arjuna; see नरनारायण below. -8 A horse. -9 (In gram.) A personal termination. -1 The individual soul (जीवात्मा); Mb.12.28.5. -Comp. -अङ्गः 1 the penis. -2 eruption on the face. -अधमः a wretch, miscreant. -अधिपः, अधिपतिः, -ईशः, -ईश्वरः, -देवः, -पतिः, -पालः a king; नरपतिहितकर्ता द्वेष्यतां याति लोके Pt. नराणां च नराधिपम् Bg.1.27; Ms.7.13; R.2.75;3.42;7.62; Me.39; Y.1.311. -अन्तकः death. -अयनः an epithet of Viṣṇu. नराणामयनं यस्मात् तेन नारायणः स्मृतः Brav.P. -अशः a demon, goblin. -आधारः N. of Śiva. (-रा) the earth. -इतरः 1 a being higher than a man, a god; Bhāg.4.6.9. -2 an animal. -इन्द्रः 1 a king; R.2.18. नरेन्द्रकन्यास्तमवाप्य सत्पतिं तमोनुदं दक्षसुता इवाबभुः 3.33;6.8; Ms.9.253. -2 a physician, dealer in antidotes, curer of poisons; तेषु कश्चि- न्नरेन्द्राभिमानी तां निर्वर्ण्य Dk.51; सुनिग्रहा नरेन्द्रेण फणीन्द्रा इव शत्रवः Śi.2.88. (where the word is used in both senses). ˚मार्गः a high street, main road. -3 a mineralogist; L. D. B. -उत्तमः 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 of Buddha. -ऋषभः 'the chief of men', a prince, king. -कपालः a man's skull. -कीलकः the murderer of a spiritual preceptor. -केश(स)रिन् m. 1 Viṣṇu in his fourth incarnation; cf. नरसिंह below. -2 the chief of men. -चिह्नम् the moustaches. -देवः 1 the warrior class (क्षत्रिय); शिष्ट्वा वा भूमि- देवानां नरदेवसमागमे Ms.11.82. -2 a king. -धिः the world. -द्विष् m. a demon, goblin; तेन मूर्धानमध्वंसन्नरद्विषः Bk.15. 94. -नारायणः N. of Kṛiṣṇa. (-णौ dual) originally regarded as identical, but in mythology and epic poetry, considered as distinct beings, Arjuna being identified with Nara and Kṛiṣṇa with Nārāyaṇa. [In some places they are called देवौ, पूर्वदेवौ, ऋषी or ऋषिसत्तमौ. They are said to have been practising very austere penance on the Himālaya, which excited the fear of Indra, and he sent down several damsels to disturb their austerities. But Nārāyaṇa put all of them to shame by creating a nymph called Urvaśī from a flower placed on his thigh who excelled them in beauty; cf. स्थाने खलु नारायणमृषिं विलोभयन्त्यस्तदूरुसंभवामिमां दृष्ट्वा व्रीडिताः सर्वा अप्सरस इति V.1.] -पशुः 'a beast-like man', a beast in human form. -पुङ्गवः 'best of men', an excellent man; शैब्यश्च नरपुङ्गवः Bg.1.5. -बलिः a human sacrifice. -भुज् a. man-eating, cannibal. -भूः f. the Bharatavarṣa, i. e. India. -मानिका, मानिनी, -मालिनी 'manlike woman', a woman with a beard, masculine woman or an amazon. -माला a girdle of skulls. -मेधः a human sacrifice. -यन्त्रम् sun-dial. -यानम्, -रथः, -वाहनम् a vehicle drawn by men, a palanquin; नरयानादवातीर्य Parṇāl.4.17; Bhāg.1.59.37. -लोकः 1 'the world of men', the earth, terrestrial world. -2 mankind. -वाहनः an epithet of Kubera; विजयदुन्दुभितां ययुरर्णवा घनरवा नर- वाहनसंपदः R.9.11. -विष्वणः a demon, goblin. -वीरः a brave man, hero. -व्याघ्रः, -शार्दूलः an eminent man. -शृङ्गम् 'man's horn', an impossibility, a chimera, non-entity. -संसर्गः human society. -सखः an epithet of Nārayaṇa; ऊरूद्भवा नरसखस्य मुनेः सुरस्त्री V.1.3. -सिंहः, -हरिः 'man-lion', Viṣṇu in his fourth incarnation; cf. तव करकमलवरे नखमद्भुतशृङ्गं दलितहिरण्यकशिपुतनुभृङ्गम् । केशव धृत- नरहरिरूप जय जगदीश हरे ॥ Gīt.1. -सिंहद्वादशी the 12th day in the light half of फाल्गुन. -स्कन्धः a multitude or body of men. -हयम् a fight or enmity between man and horse.

narman	नर्मन् n. [नॄ-मनिन्] 1 Sport, amusement, diversion, merriment, pleasure, amorous pastime or sport; जित- कमले विमले परिकर्मय नर्मजनकमलकं मुखे Gīt.12. (कौतुकजनक); R.19.28. -2 Jest, joke, humour, wit; सुहृत्प्रयुक्ता इव नर्मवादाः Ki.17.33. नर्मप्रायाभिः कथाभिः K.7; 'jocular, humorous'. -Comp. -आलापः a jocular conversation. -उक्तिः a facetious expression. -कीलः a husband. -गर्भ a. humorous, full of humour, witty. (-र्भः) 1 a secret lover. -2 an action of the hero in an unrecognizable form. -द a. delighting, making happy; नन्दसूनुरनघे तव वत्सो नर्मदः प्रणयिनां विजहार Bhāg.1.35.2. (-दः) a jester (= नर्मसचिव q. v.). -दा N. of a river which rises in the Vindhya mountain, and falls into the gulf of Cambay. -द्युति a. bright with joy, cheerful, merry. (-तिः f.) enjoyment of a joke. -सचिवः, -सुहृद् m. 'a pleasure-companion', an associate of the amusements of a prince or a man of rank; न नर्मसचिवैः सार्धं किञ्चिदप्य- प्रियं वदेत् Kām. इदं त्वैदंपर्यं यदुत नृपतेर्नर्मसचिवः सुतादाना- न्मित्रं भवतु Māl.2.7; तां याचते नरपतेर्नर्मसुहृन्नन्दनो नृपमुखेन 1.11; Śi.1.59. -साचिव्यम् 1 amusement; flattery. -2 superintendence of a prince's amusements. -स्फूर्जः (in drama) the first meeting of lovers beginning with joy but ending alarm. -स्फोटः the first symptoms of love.

nahuṣaḥ	नहुषः N. of a king of the lunar race, son of Āyus and grandson of Purūravas and father of Yayāti. [He was a very wise and powerful king, and when Indra lay concealed under waters to expiate the sin of having killed the demon Vṛitra, a Brāhmaṇa, he was asked to occupy his seat. While there he thought of winning the love of Indrāṇī and caused the seven sages to convey him in a palanquin to her house. On his way he asked each of them to be quick using the words 'sarpa', 'sarpa', (move on, move on), when one of the sages (Agastya ?) cursed him to be a 'sarpa' (serpent). He fell down from the sky, and remained in that wretched state till he was relieved from it by Yudhiṣttod;hira.]

nāga	नाग a. (-गी f.) Serpentine, formed of snakes, snaky. -2 Elephantine. -गः [न गच्छति इत्यगः न अगो नागः] 1 A snake in general, particularly the cobra; नासुरो$यं न वा नागः Ki.15.12. -2 A fabulous serpentdemon or semi-divine being, having the face of a man and the tail of a serpent, and said to inhabit the Pātāla; अनन्तश्चास्मि नागानाम् Bg.1.29; R.15.83. -3 An elephant; दिङ्नागानां पथि परिहरन् स्थूलहस्तावलेपान् Me.14,36; Si.4.63; V.4.25. -4 A shark. -5 A cruel or tyrannical person. -6 (At the end of comp.) Any pre-eminent or distinguished person, e. g. पुरुषनागः . -7 A cloud. -8 A peg projecting from a wall to hang anything upon. -9 N. of several plants as Mesua Roxburghii, Rottlera Tictoria, Piper betel; (Mar. नागचाफा, नागकेशर, पानवेल, नागरमोथा etc.); Bhāg.8.2.18; Rām.7. 42.4. -1 One of the five vital airs of the body, that which is expelled by eructation. -11 The number 'seven'. -12 A trumpet (see नागवेला). -गम् 1 Tin. -2 Lead. -3 One of the astronomical periods (Karaṇas) called ध्रुव -4 The effects of that period on anything done during it. -5 The asterism called आश्लेषा. -6 A captivating act of females (स्त्रीबन्धः), gesticulation; L. D. B. -7 A kind of coitus; Nm. -गी 1 A female Nāga. -2 A female elephant; -Comp. -अङ्गम् Hastināpura. -अङ्गना 1 a female elephant. -2 the proboscis of an elephant. -अञ्चला, -अञ्जना = नागयष्टि q. v. -अञ्जना a female elephant. -अधिपः an epithet of Śeṣa. -अन्तकः, -अरातिः, -अरिः 1 an epithet of Garuḍa. -2 a peacock. -3 a lion. -अशनः 1 a peacock; Pt.1.159. -2 an epithet of Garuḍa. -3 a lion. -आख्यः = नागकेसर q. v. -आननः an epithet of Ganeśa. -आनन्दम् a drama by Śrīharṣa. -आरूढ a. Riding upon an elephant. -आह्वः Hastināpura. -इन्द्रः 1 a lordly or superior elephant; नागेन्द्रहस्तास्त्वचि कर्कशत्वात... कदलीविशेषाः Ku. 1 36. -2 Airāvata, Indra's elephant; कुथेन नागेन्द्रमिवेन्द्रवाहनम् Śi. -3 an epithet of Śeṣa. -ईशः 1 an epithet of Śeṣa. -2 N. of the author of Paribhāṣenduśekhara and several other works. -3 N. of Patañjali. -उदम्, -उदरम् 1 a breast-plate. -2 a peculiar disease of pregnancy (गर्भोपद्रवभेद). -कन्यका, -कन्या a serpent-virgin. -कर्णः the castor-oil plant. -किंजल्कः = नागकेसर q. v. -कुमारी Rubia Munjiṣṭā (Mar. मंजिष्ठ). -केतुः An epithet of Karṇa (?); समरमधि- गतार्थः प्रस्थितो नागकेतुः Karṇabhāra 1.3. -केसरः N. of a tree with fragrant flowers, Mesua Roxburghii; कतकं नक्रनखरं नलदं नागकेसरम् Śiva B.3.14. -रम् a kind of steel. -गर्भम् red lead. -चूडः an epithet of Śiva. -जम् 1 red lead. -2 tin. -जिह्विका red arsenic. -जीवनम् tin. (-नः) orpiment. -दन्तः, -दन्तकः 1 ivory. -2 a peg or bracket projecting from a wall and used to hang things upon; N.18.15. -दन्ती 1 a kind of sun-flower. -2 a harlot. -द्वीपम् N. of a द्वीप in Bharatavarṣa. -नक्षत्रम्, -नायकम् the constellation called Āśleṣā. (-कः) the lord of serpents; अनन्तो वासुकिः पद्मो महापद्मो$पि नक्षकः । कर्कोटः कुलिकः शङ्ख इत्यष्टौ नागनायकाः ॥ Trikāṇdaśeṣa. -नामकम् Tin. -नामन् m. holy basil (तुलसी). -नासा the proboscis of an elephant. -निर्यूहः a large pin or bracket projecting from a wall. -पञ्चमी 1 N. of a festival on the fifth day in the bright half of Śrāvaṇa. -2 the fifth day in the dark half of Āsāḍha. -पतिः an epithet of (1) Airāvata. (2) Śesa. -पदः a mode of sexual enjoyment (रतिबन्ध). पादौ स्कन्धे तथा हस्ते क्षिपेल्लिङ्गं भगे लघु । कामयेत् कामुको नारीं बन्धो नागपदो मतः ॥ Ratimañjarī. -पर्णी the betel plant. -पाशः 1 a sort of magical noose used in battle to entangle an enemy. -2 N. of the noose or weapon of Varuṇa. -पाशकः a kind of coitus (रतिबन्ध). स्वजङ्घाद्वयमध्यस्थां हस्ताभ्यां धारयन् कुचौ । रमेन्निःशङ्कितो नारीं बन्धो$यं नागपाशकः ॥ Ratimañjarī. -पुरम् 1 Hastināpura. -2 N. of a city in Pātāla. -पुष्पः 1 the Champaka tree. -2 the Punnāga tree. -बन्धः 1 a snake as a chain. -2 N. of a metre, resembling the coilings of a snake. -बन्धकः an elephant-catcher. -बन्धुः the holy fig-tree. -बलः an epithet of Bhīma. -भूषणः an epithet of Śiva. -मण्डलिकः 1 a snake-keeper. -2 a snake-catcher. -मल्लः an epithet of Airāvata. -मारः a species of pot-herb (Mar. माका). -यष्टिः f., -यष्टिका 1 a graduated pole or post for showing the depth of water in a newly-dug pond. -2 a boring-rod driven into the earth. -रक्तम्, -रेणुः red lead. -रङ्गः the orange. -राजः 1 an epithet of Śeṣa. -2 a large elephant; अधस्तान्नागराजाय सोमायोर्ध्वं दिशं ददौ Hariv. -रिपुः (see नागान्तकः) Garuḍa; शार्ङ्गचक्रायुधः खड्गी सर्वनागरिपुध्वजः Mb.13.147.15. -रुकः the orange tree. -लता 1 the penis. -2 the piper betel. -वल्लरी, -वल्ली piper betel. -वेला the hour when a serpent-like instrument is blown; नागवेलायामागन्तव्य...... । यस्मिन् ग्रामे न नागाः...... तस्मिन्नपि स एव कालः । तत्र हि आगमनं क्रियते । ŚB. on MS.1.8.69. -लोकः the world of serpents, the race of serpents collectively, one of the regions below the earth called Pātāla. -वारिकः 1 a royal elephant. -2 an elephant-driver. -3 a peacock. -4 an epithet of Garuḍa. -5 the chief of a herd of elephants. -6 the chief person in an assembly. -वीथी that part of the moon's path which contains the asterisms अश्विनी, भरणी and कृत्तिका; अश्विनी कृत्तिका याम्या नागवीथीति शब्दिता V. P. -संभवम्, -संभूतम् red lead. ...... मञ्जिष्ठां नागसंभवम् Śiva. B.3.19. -साह्वयम् Hastināpura.

nāgaraka	नागरक नागरिक a. [नगरे भवः वुञ्] 1 Town-bred, town-born. -2 Polite, courteous, courtly; नागरिकवृत्त्या संज्ञापयैनाम् Ś.5; साधु आर्य नागरिको$सि V.2. -3 Clever, shrewd, cunning (विदग्ध). -कः 1 A citizen. -2 A polite or courteous man, a gallant, one who shows exaggerated attention to his first mistress while he is courting some one else. -3 One who has contracted the vices of a town. -4 A thief. -5 An artist. -6 The chief of the police; V.5; Ś.6. -7 A city-superintendent; cf. नागरिक- प्रणिधिः Kau. A. -8 A kind of coitus; ऊरुमूलोपरि स्थित्वा योषिदूरुद्वयं रमेत् । ग्रीवां धृत्वा कराभ्यां च बन्धो नागरको मतः ॥ Ratimañjarī. -9 (pl.) planets opposite to each other. -कम् 1 Dry ginger. (-रिकम्) The toll levied from a town. -Comp. -वृत्तिः a courtly manner or style; नागरिकवृत्त्या संज्ञापयैनाम् Ś.5.1/2.

nānā	नाना ind. 1 In different places, in different ways, manifoldly, variously; मृत्योः स मृत्युमाप्नोति य इह नानेव पश्यति । -2 Distinctly, separately. -3 Without (= विना; with acc., instr. or abl.); नाना नारीं निष्फला लोकयात्रा Vop.; (विश्वं) न नाना शंभुना रामात् वर्षेणाधोक्षजोवर ibid. -4 (Used as an adjective at the beginning of comp.) Manifold, various, sundry, different, diverse; नानाफलैः फलति कल्पलतेव भूमिः Bh.2.46; नानाशस्त्रप्रहरणाः सर्वे युद्धविशारदाः Bg.1.9; Ms.9.148. -Comp. -अत्ययः a. of different kinds, manifold, diverse. -अर्थ a. 1 having different aims or objects. -2 having different meanings, homonymous (as a word). -आत्मवादिन् a. maintaining the Sāṅkhya doctrine that each individual has a soul distinct from the universal spirit. -आश्रय a. of many abodes; नानाश्रया प्रकृतिः Sāṅ. K.62. -कारम् ind. having done variously; P.III.4.62. Kāśi. -ग्रहः taking separately. -जातीय a. of diverse kinds or sorts. -धर्मन् a. having different customs. -ध्वनिः a musical instrument producing more than one sound. -भाव a. various, manifold. -रस a. of different or varying tastes; त्रैगुण्यो- द्भवमत्र लोकचरितं नानारसं दृश्यते M.1.4. -रूप a. of different forms, diverse, multiform, various. -वर्ण a. of different colours. -विध a. of various sorts, diverse, manifold. -विधम् ind. in various ways. -वीर्य a. having manifold energy.

nāndī	नान्दी [नन्दन्ति देवा अत्र नन्द्-घञ् पृषो˚ वृद्धिः ङीप्] 1 Joy, satisfaction, delight. -2 Prosperity; ततो राजकुले नान्दी संजज्ञे भूयसा पुनः Mb.12.82.66. -3 Praise of a deity at the commencement of a religious rite or observance. -4 Particularly, the benedictory verse or verses recited as a sort of prologue at the beginning of a drama, benediction; आशीर्वचनसंयुक्ता नित्यं यस्मात् प्रयुज्यते । देवद्विजनृपा- दीनां तस्मान्नान्दीति संज्ञिता ॥ or देवद्विजनृपादीनामाशीर्वचनपूर्विका । नन्दन्ति देवता यस्यां तस्मान्नान्दीति कीर्तिता ॥ -5 Loud noise of a dozen drums; L. D. B. -Comp. -करः see -नान्दिन्. -निनादः, -नादः, -रवः a shout of joy or rejoicing; नान्दीनादप्रभृति हि कृतं मङ्गलं तैस्तदानीम् Mv.2.4. (v. l.) -पटः the lid or cover of a well. -मुख a. (the class of manes or deceased ancestors) to whom the नान्दीमुख- श्राद्ध is offered. (-खम्), ˚श्राद्धम् a Śrāddha ceremony performed in memory of the manes, preliminary to any festive occasion such as marriage &c. (-खः) the cover or lid of a well. (-खी) a female ancestor entitled to a share in the above Śrāddha. -वादिन् m. 1 the speaker of a prologue to a drama. -2 a drummer. -श्राद्धम् see -नान्दीमुखम् above.

nārācaḥ	नाराचः [नरान् आचामति आ-चम्-ड स्वार्थे अण् , नारम् आचामति वा Tv.] 1 An iron arrow; तत्र नाराचदुर्दिनम् R.4.41. -2 An arrow in general; सर्वलोहास्तु ये बाणाः नाराचास्ते प्रकीर्तिताः । पञ्चभिः पृथुलैः पक्षैर्युक्ताः सिध्यन्ति कस्यचित् ॥ Dhanur. 73; Rām.3.25.25; कनकनाराचपरंपराभिरिव K.57. -3 Water-elephant. -4 A road running towards the east; Kāmikāgama 25.3.

nāsā	नासा [नास्-भावे अ] 1 The nose; स्फुरदधरनासापुटतया U.1.29; प्राणापानौ समौ कृत्वा नासाभ्यन्तरचारिणौ Bg.5.27. -2 The trunk of an elephant. -3 The upper timber of a door. -4 A sound. -Comp. -अग्रम् the tip of the nose; त्रासान्नासाग्ररन्ध्रं विशति फणिपतौ Māl.1.1. -अन्तिक a. reaching to the nose (a stick); स्यात्तु नासान्तिको विशः (दण्डः) Ms.2.46. -छिद्रम्, -रन्ध्रम्, -विवरम्, -विरोकः a nostril; नासाविरोकपवनोल्लसितं तनीयः Śi.5.54. -छिन्नी f. N. of a bird with a divided beak. -दक्षिणावर्तः Wearing the nose ornament in the right nostril (showing abundant wealth and progeny). -दारुः n. the upper timber of a door-frame. -नाहः the thickening of the membrane of the nose. -परिस्रावः running at the nose, a running cold. -पुटः, -पुटम् a nostril. ˚मर्यादा the septum of the nose. -वंशः the bridge of the nose. -वामावर्तः Wearing the nose-ornament in the left nostril (as a mark of sorrow or childlessness). -वेधः perforation of the nose. -स्रावः a running cold. नासिकः (-कम्) N. of a sacred place in the Bombay state.

niḥśiṣ	निःशिष् Caus. 1 To reduce to nothing, annihilate, destroy completely. -2 To leave no remainder.

nikartanam	निकर्तनम् 1 Cutting down or off, tearing; निकर्तनमिवा- त्युग्रं लाङ्गूलस्य महाहरिः Mb.7.17.25. -2 Annihilation, wiping out completely; उत्सादनममित्राणां परसेनानिकर्तनम् Mb.3.167.55.

nidhana	निधन a. [निवृत्तं धनं यस्मात्; Uṇ.2.81] Poor, indigent; अहो निधनता सर्वापदामास्पदम् Mk.1.14. -नः, नम् 1 Destruction, annihilation, death, loss; स्वधर्मे निधनं श्रेयः Bg.3.35; म्लेच्छनिवहनिधने कलयसि करवालम् Gīt.1; कल्पान्ते- ष्वपि न प्रयाति निधनं विद्याख्यमन्तर्धनम् Bh.2.16; Pt.1.21; 5.95. -2 The concluding passage at the end of a Sāman sung in chorus, the fifth of the five parts of Sāman; लोकेषु पञ्चविधं सामोपासीत ...... द्यौर्निधनम् Ch. Up.2. 2.1. -3 The finale (in music). -4 N. of the eighth lunar mansion. -5 Conclusion, end, termination; अस्य वाक्यस्य निधने प्रादुरासीच्छिवो$निलः Mb.6.119.38. -6 Ved. Residence; receptacle. -नः The head of a family. -नम् Family, race. -Comp. -कारिन् a. fatal, destructive. -क्रिया a funeral ceremony.

niba	निब (व) र्हण a. Destroying, destroyer, enemy (in comp.); अनपायि निबर्हणं द्विषां न तितिक्षासममस्ति साधनम् Ki.2.43; Mv.3.37. -नम् Killing, destruction, annihilation, slaughter; निबर्हणं धर्मधनैर्विगर्हितं विशिष्य विश्वास- जुषां द्विषामपि N.1.131; इहैव तु त्वया स्थेयं ताम्रानननिबर्हणे Śiva. B.29.61.

nimīlā	निमीला निमीलिका 1 Shutting the eyes. -2 Winking, blinking, conniving at anything. -3 Fraud, pretence, trick.

nir	निर् ind. A substitute for निस् before vowels and soft consonants conveying the senses of 'out of', 'away from'. 'without', 'free from', and be frequently expressed by 'less', 'un', used with the noun; see the compounds given below; see निस् and cf. अ also. -Comp. -अंश a. 1 whole, entire. -2 not entitled to any share of the ancestral property. -अक्षः the place of no latitute; i. e. the terrestrial equator (in astronomy). ˚देशः 1 a first meridian, as Laṅkā. -2 a place where the sun is always vertical and the days and nights are equal. -3 the equatorial region. -अक्षर a. Not knowing the letters, illiterate. -अग्नि a. having lost or neglected the consecrated fire; स संन्यासी च योगी च न निरग्निर्न चाक्रियः Bg.6.1. -अग्र (क) a. divisible without remainder. -अङ्कुश a. 'not curbed by a hook', unchecked, uncontrolled; unruly, independent, completely free, unfettered; निरङ्कुश इव द्विपः Bhāg.; कामो निकामनिरङ्कुशः Gīt.7; निरङ्कुशाः कवयः Sk.; Bh.3.15; Mv.3.39; विनयरुचयः सदैव निरङ्कुशाः Mu.3.6. ˚ता self-will, independence. -अघ a. sinless, blameless. -अङ्ग a. 1 having no parts. -2 deprived of expedients or resources. -अजिन a. skinless. -अञ्जन a. 1 without collyrium; निरञ्जने साचिविलोलिकं दृशौ Ki.8.52. -2 unstained, untinged. -3 free from falsehood; तदा विद्वान् पुण्यपापे विधूय निरञ्जनं परमं साम्यमुपैति Munda 3.1.3. -4 simple, artless. (-नः) 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 N. of the Supreme Being. (-ना) 1 the day of full moon. -2 an epithet of Durgā. -अतिशय a. unsurpassed, matchless, unrivalled; निरतिशयं गरिमाणं तेन जनन्याः स्मरन्ति विद्वांसः Pt.1.3. (-यः) the Supreme Being. -अत्यय a. 1 free from danger, secure, safe; तद्भवान् वृत्तसंपन्नः स्थितः पथि निरत्यये Rām.4.29.12; R.17.53. -2 free from fault, unblamable, faultless, disinterested; Ki.1.12, शक्तिरर्थपतिषु स्वयंग्रहं प्रेम कारयति वा निरत्ययम् 13.61. -3 completely successful. -अधिष्ठान a. 1 supportless. -2 independent. -अध्व a. one who has lost one's way. -अनुक्रोश a. pitiless, merciless, hard-hearted. (-शः) mercilessness, hard-heartedness. -अनुग a. having no followers. -अनुग्रह a. Ungracious, unkind; Bhāg.5. 12.7. -अनुनासिक a. not nasal. -अनुमान a. not bound to conclusions or consequences. -अनुयोज्य a. unblamable, faultless. -अनुरोध a. 1 unfavourable, unfriendly. -2 unkind, unamiable; Māl.1. -अन्तर a. -1 constant, perpetual, uninterrupted, incessant; निरन्त- राधिपटलैः Bv.1.16; निरन्तरास्वन्तरवातवृष्टिषु Ku.5.25. -2 having no intervening or intermediate space, having no interval, close, closely contiguous, in close contact; मूढे निरन्तरपयोधरया मयैव Mk.5.15; हृदयं निरन्तरबृहत्कठिनस्तन- मण्डलावरणमप्यभिदन् Śi.9.66. -3 compact, dense; परितो रुद्धनिरन्तराम्बराः Śi.16.76. -4 coarse, gross. -5 faithful, true (as a friend). -6 not hidden from view. -7 not different, similar, identical. -8 sincere, sympathetic; सुहृदि निरन्तरचित्ते (निवेद्य दुःखं सुखीभवति) Pt.1.341. -9 abounding in, full of; निपात्यमानैर्ददृशे निरन्तरम् Rām.7.7. 54; गुणैश्च निरन्तराणि Mv.4.12. (-रम्) ind. 1 without interruption, constantly, continually, incessantly. -2 without intervening space or interval. -3 closely, tightly, firmly; (परिष्वजस्व) कान्तैरिदं मम निरन्तरमङ्गमङ्गैः Ve.3.27; परिष्वजेते शयने निरन्तरम् Ṛs.2.11. -4 immediately. ˚अभ्यासः constant study, diligent exercise or practice. -अन्तराल a. 1 without an intervening space, close. -2 narrow. -अन्धस् a. foodless, hungry. -अन्वय a. 1 having no progeny, childless. -2 unconnected, unrelated; Ms.8.198. -3 not agreeing with the context (as a word in a sentence). -4 without logical connection or regular sequence, unmethodical. -5 without being seen, out of sight; निरन्वयं भवेत् स्तेयम् Ms.8. 332. -6 without retinue, unaccompanied, see अन्वय. -7 sudden, unexpected; U.7. -8 exterminatory, without leaving any species or trace; प्रागाधारनिरन्वयप्रमथनादुच्छेदमे- वाकरोः... Mv.3.13; (com. नाशो द्विविधः--स्वान्वयविनाशः, निरन्वयविनाशश्चेति......निर्वापणादिना सजातीयज्वालोदयानर्हविनाशस्तु निरन्वयविनाशः ।). -अपत्रप a. 1 shameless, impudent. -2 bold. -अपराध a. guiltless, innocent, faultless, blameless. (-धः) innocence. -अपवर्त a. 1 not turning back. -2 (in arith.) leaving no common divisor, reduced to the lowest terms. -अपवाद a. 1 blameless. -2 not admitting of any exception. -अपाय a. 1 free from harm or evil. -2 free from decay, imperishable. -3 infallible; उपायो निरपायो$यमस्माभिरभिचिन्तितः Rām.1.1.2. -अपेक्ष a. 1 not depending on, irrespective or independent of, having no need of (with loc.); न्यायनिर्णीतसारत्वा- न्निरपेक्षमिवागमे Ki.11.39. -2 disregarding, taking no notice of. -3 free from desire, secure; निरपेक्षो न कर्तव्यो भृत्यैः स्वामी कदाचन H.2.82. -4 careless, negligent, indifferent -5 indifferent to worldly attachments or pursuits; समुपोढेषु कामेषु निरपेक्षः परिव्रजेत् Ms.6.41. -6 disinterested, not expecting any reward from another; दिशि दिशि निरपेक्ष- स्तावकीनं विवृण्वन् Bv.1.5. -7 without purpose. (-क्षा) indifference, disregard. -अपेक्षित a. 1 disregarded. -2 regardless. -अपेक्षिन् a. disregarding, indifferent. -अभिभव a. 1 not subject to humiliation or disgrace. -2 not to be surpassed, unrivalled. -अभिमान a. 1 free from self-conceit, devoid of pride or egotism. -2 void of self-respect. -3 unconscious. -अभिलाष a. not caring for, indifferent to; स्वसुखनिरभिलाषः खिद्यसे लोकहेतोः Ś.5.7. -अभिसंधानम् absence of design. -अभ्र a. cloudless. -अमर्ष a. 1 void of anger, patient. -2 apathetic. -अम्बर a. naked. -अम्बु a. 1 abstaining from water. -2 waterless, destitute of water. -अर्गल a. without a bolt, unbarred, unobstructed, unrestrained, unimpeded, completely free; M.5; मरणसमये त्यक्त्वा शङ्कां प्रलापनिरर्गलम् Māl.5.26. (-लम्) ind. freely. -अर्थ a. 1 void of wealth, poor, indigent; स्त्रियः कृतार्थाः पुरुषं निरर्थं निष्पीडितालक्तकवत्त्यजन्ति Pt.1.194. -2 meaningless, unmeaning (as a word or sentence). -3 non-sensical. -4 vain, useless, purposeless. (-र्थः) 1 loss, detriment. -2 nonsense. -अर्थक a. 1 useless, vain, unprofitable. -2 unmeaning, nonsensical, conveying no reasonable meaning; इत्थं जन्म निरर्थकं क्षितितले$रण्ये यथा मालती S. D. -3 (a consonant) not followed by a vowel. (-कम्) an expletive; निरर्थकं तु हीत्यादि पूरणैकप्रयोजनम् Chandr.2.6. -अलंकृतिः (in Rhet.) want of ornament, simplicity. -अवकाश a. 1 without free space. -2 without leisure. -अवग्रह a. 1 'free from restraint', unrestrained, unchecked, uncontrolled, irresistible. -2 free, independent. -3 self-willed, head-strong. (-हम्) ind. 1 uninterruptedly. -2 intensely, strongly. -अवद्य a. 1 blameless, faultless, unblameable, unobjectionable; हृद्य- निरवद्यरूपो भूपो बभूव Dk.1. -2 an epithet of the Supreme Being (having no passions). -अवधि a. having no end, unlimited; कथं तूष्णीं सह्यो निरवधिरयं त्वप्रतिविधः U. 3.44;6.3; Māl.1.6. -2 continuous; महानाधिव्याधि- र्निरवधिरिदानीं प्रसरतु Māl.4.3. -अवयव a. 1 without parts. -2 indivisible. -3 without limbs. -अवलम्ब a. 1 unsupported, without support; Ś.6. -2 not affording support. -3 not depending or relying on. -अवशेष a. whole, complete, entire, (निरवशेषेण ind. completely, entirely, fully, totally). -अवसाद a. cheerful; Gīt. -अव्यय a. eternal, immutable. -अशन a. abstaining from food. (-नम्) fasting. -अश्रि a. even; Kau. A.2.11. -अष्ट a. Ved. driven away, scattered. (-ष्टः) a horse twentyfour years old. -अस्त्र a. weaponless, unarmed. -अस्थि a. boneless. -अहंकार, -अहंकृति a. free from egotism or pride, humble, lowly; Bg.12.13. -अहंकृत a. 1 having no egotism or self-consciousness. -2 without individuality. -3 unselfish. -अहम् a. free from egotism or self-conceit; ह्यनामरूपं निरहं प्रपद्ये Bhāg. 5.19.4. -आकाङ्क्ष a. 1 wishing nothing, free from desire. -2 wanting nothing to fill up or complete (as the sense of a word or sentence). -आकार a. 1 devoid of form, formless, without form. -2 ugly, deformed. -3 disguised. -4 unassuming, modest. (-रः) 1 the universal spirit, Almighty. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -3 of Viṣṇu. ˚ज्ञानवादः the doctrine that the perception of the outer world does not arise from images impressed on the mind; Sarva. S. -आकृति a. 1 formless, shapeless. -2 deformed. (-तिः) 1 a religious student who has not duly gone through a course of study, or who has not properly read the Vedas. -2 especially, a Brāhmaṇa who has neglected the duties of his caste by not going through a regular course of study; a fool; ग्रामधान्यं यथा शून्यं यथा कूपश्च निर्जलः । यथा हुतमनग्नौ च तथैव स्यान्निराकृतौ ॥ Mb.12.36.48. -3 one who neglects the five great religious duties or yajñas; Ms.3.154. -आकाश a. leaving no free space, completely filled or occupied, -आकुल a. 1 unconfused, unperplexed, unbewildered; Ki.11.38. -2 steady, calm; सुपात्रनिक्षेपनिरा- कुलात्मना (प्रजासृजा) Śi.1.28. -3 clear. -4 perspicuous; अलिकुलसङ्कुलकुसुमसमूहनिराकुलबकुलकलापे Gīt.1. (-लम्) 1 calmness serenity. -2 perspicuity, clearness. -आक्रन्द a. not crying or complaining. (-दः) a place where no sound can be heard. -आक्रोश a. unaccused, unreviled. -आगम a. not founded on revelation or scripture, not derived from the Vedas. -आगस् a. faultless, innocent, sinless; कथमेकपदे निरागसं जनमाभाष्यमिमं न मन्यसे R.8.48. -आचार a. without approved customs or usages, lawless, barbarian. -आडम्बर a. 1 without drums. -2 without show, unostentatious. -आतङ्क a. 1 free from fear; R.1.63; निरातङ्को रङ्को विहरति चिरं कोटिकनकैः Śaṅkara (देव्यपराधक्षमापनस्तोत्रम् 6). -2 without ailment, comfortable, healthy. -3 not causing pain. -4 unchecked, unhampered; निरातङ्कः पङ्केष्विव पिशितपिण्डेषु विलसन् Māl. 5.34. (-कः) an epithet of Śiva. -आतप a. sheltered from heat, shady, not penetrated by the sun's rays. (-पा) the night. -आदर a. disrespectful. -आदान a. 1 taking or receiving nothing; Mb.3. -2 an epithet of Buddha. -आधार a. 1 without a receptacle. -2 without support, supportless (fig. also); निराधारो हा रोदिमि कथय केषामिह पुरः G. L.4.39. -आधि a. secure, free from anxiety. -आनन्द a. cheerless, sad, sorrowful. -आन्त्र a. 1 disembowelled. -2 having the entrails hanging out. -आपद् a. free from misfortune or calamity. (-f.) prosperity. -आबाध a. 1 unvexed, unmolested, undisturbed, free from disturbance. -2 unobstructed. -3 not molesting or disturbing. -4 (in law) frivolously vexatious (as a suit or cause of complaint); e. g. अस्मद्- गृहप्रदीपप्रकाशेनायं स्वगृहे व्यवहरति Mitā. -आमय a. 1 free from disease or illness, sound, healthy, hale. -2 untainted, pure. -3 guileless. -4 free from defects or blemishes. -5 full, complete. -6 infallible. -7 not liable to failure or miscarriage. (-यः, यम्) freedom from disease or illness, health, well-being, welfare, happiness; कुरूणां पाण्डवानां च प्रतिपत्स्व निरामयम् Mb.5.78.8. (-यः) 1 a wild goat. -2 a hog or boar. -आमिष a. 1 fleshless; निरुपमरसप्रीत्या खादन्नरास्थि निरामिषम् Bh. -2 having no sensual desires or covetousness; Ms.6.49. -3 receiving no wages or remuneration. -आय a. yielding no income or revenue, profitless. -यः an idler living from hand to mouth. -आयत a. 1 full-stretched or extended; निरायतपूर्वकायाः Ś.1.8. -2 contracted, compact. -आय- -तत्वम् shortness, compactness; निरायतत्वादुदरेण ताम्यता Ki.8.17. -आयति a. one whose end is at hand; नियता लघुता निरायतेः Ki.2.14. -आयास a. not fatiguing, easy. -आयुध a. unarmed, weaponless. -आरम्भ a. abstaining from all work (in good sense); Mb.3.82.11. -आलम्ब a. 1 having no prop or support (fig. also); ऊर्ध्वबाहुं निरालम्बं तं राजा प्रत्यभाषत Rām.7.89.1; निरालम्बो लोकः कुलमयशसा नः परिवृतम् Mv.4.53. -2 not depending on another, independent. -3 self-supported, friendless, alone; निरालम्बो लम्बोदरजननि कं यामि शरणम् Jag. (-म्बा) spikenard. (-म्बम्) Brahman. -आलोक a. 1 not looking about or seeing. -2 deprived of sight. -3 deprived of light, dark; निरालोकं लोकम् Māl.5.3; Bhāg.8.24.35. -5 invisible. (-कः) an epithet of Śiva. -आवर्ण a. manifest, evident. -आश a. 1 devoid of hope, despairing or despondent of; मनो बभूवेन्दुमतीनिराशम् R.6.2. -2 depriving (one) of all hope. -आशक, -आशिन् a. hopeless; अद्य दुर्योधनो राज्याज्जीविताच्च निराशकः (भविष्यति) Mb.8.74.13. -आशङ्क a. fearless. -आशा hopelessness, despair. -आशिस् a. 1 without a boon or blessing, without virtues; आश्रमा विहिताः सर्वे वर्जयित्वा निराशिषम् Mb.12.63.13. -2 without any desire, wish or hope, indifferent; निराशीर्यतचित्तात्मा Bg.4.21; जगच्छ- रण्यस्य निराशिषः सतः Ku.5.76. -आश्रय a. 1 without a prop or support, supportless, unsupported; न तिष्ठति निराश्रयं लिङ्गम् Sāṅ. K.41. -2 friendless, destitute, alone, without shelter or refuge; निराश्रयाधुना वत्सलता. -3 not deep (as a wound). -आस्वाद a. tasteless, insipid, unsavoury. -आहार a. 'foodless', fasting, abstaining from food. (-रः) fasting; कालो$ग्निः कर्म मृद् वायुर्मनो ज्ञानं तपो जलम् । पश्चात्तापो निराहारः सर्वे$मी शुद्धिहेतवः ॥ Y.3.31. -इङ्ग a. immovable, stationary; यथा दीपो निवातस्थो निरिङ्गो ज्वलते पुनः Mb.12.46.6. -इच्छ a. without wish or desire, indifferent. -इन्द्रिय a. 1 having lost a limb or the use of it. -2 mutilated, maimed. -3 weak, infirm, frail; Kaṭh.1.1.3. -4 barren. -5 without प्रमाण or means of certain knowledge; निरिन्द्रिया ह्यमन्त्राश्च स्त्रियो$नृत- मिति स्थितिः Ms.9.18. -6 destitute of manly vigour, impotent (Ved.). -इन्धन a. destitute of fuel. -ईति a. free from the calamities of the season; निरातङ्का निरीतयः R.1.63; see ईति. -ईश्वर a. godless, atheistic. -˚वाद atheistic doctrine. -ईषम् the body of a plough. -ईह a. 1 desireless, indifferent; निरीहाणामीशस्तृणमिव तिरस्कारविषयः Mu.3.16. -2 inactive; निरीहस्य हतद्विषः R.1.24. (-हा), -निरीहता, -त्वम् 1 inactivity. -2 indifference. -उच्छ्वास a. 1 breathless, without breathing; निरुच्छ्वासं हरिं चक्रुः Rām.7.7.6. -2 narrow, contracted; उपेयुषो वर्त्म निरन्तराभिरसौ निरुच्छ्वासमनीकिनीभिः Śi.3.32. -3 dead; निरुच्छ्वासाः पुनः केचित् पतिता जगतीतले Rām.6.58.13. (-सः) absence of breath; लोका निरुच्छ्वासनिपीडिता भृशम् Bhāg.4. 8.8. -उत्तर a. 1 answerless, without a reply. -2 unable to answer, silenced. -3 having no superior. -उत्थ a. irrecoverable. -उद्धति a. not jolting (a chariot); अभूतल- स्पर्शतया निरुद्धतिः Ś.7.1. (v. l.) -उत्सव a. without festivities; विरतं गेयमृतुर्निरुत्सवः R.8.66. -उत्साह a. 1 inactive, indolent. -2 devoid of energy. (-हः) 1 absence of energy. -2 indolence. -उत्सुक a. 1 indifferent. -2 calm, tranquil. -उदक a. waterless. -उदर a. 1 having no belly or trunk. -2 thin (अतुन्दिल); श्रीमान्निरुदरो महान् Rām.3.16.31. -उद्यम, -उद्योग a. effortless, inactive, lazy, idle. उद्विग्न, -उद्वेग a. free from excitement or perturbation, sedate, calm. -उपक्रम a. 1 without a commencement. -2 incurable. -उपद्रव a. 1 free from calamity or affliction, not visited by danger or adversity, lucky, happy, undisturbed, unmolested, free from hostile attacks. -2 free from national distress or tyranny. -3 causing no affliction. -4 auspicious (as a star). -5 secure, peaceful. -उपधि a. guileless, honest; U.2.2. ˚जीवन a. leading an honest life. (v. l.). -उपपत्ति a. unsuitable. -उपपद a. 1 without any title or designation; अरे आर्यचारुदत्तं निरुपपदेन नाम्नालपसि Mk.1.18/19. -2 unconnected with a subordinate word. -उपप्लव a. 1 free from disturbance, obstacle or calamity, unharmed; निरुपप्लवानि नः कर्माणि संवृत्तानि Ś3. -2 not causing any affliction or misery. -3 an epithet of Śiva. -उपभोग a. without enjoyment; संसरति निरुपभोगं भावैरधिवासितं लिङ्गम् Sāṅ. K.4. -उपम a. peerless, matchless, incomparable. -उपसर्ग free from portents. -उपस्कृत a. not corrupted, pure; of self-denying temperament; शमेन तपसा चैव भक्त्या च निरुपस्कृतः । शुद्धात्मा ब्राह्मणो रात्रौ निदर्शनमपश्यत ॥ Mb.12.271.14. -उपहत a. 1 not injured, unhurt. -2 auspicious, lucky. -उपाख्य a. 1 unreal, false, non-existent (as वन्ध्यापुत्र). -2 immaterial. -3 invisible. (-ख्यम्) the supreme Brahman. -उपाधि (क) a. without qualities, absolute. -उपाय a. 1 without expedients, helpless. -2 unsuccessful. -उपेक्ष a. 1 free from trick or fraud. -2 not neglectful. -उष्मन् a. devoid of heat, cold. -गन्ध a. void of smell, scentless, unfragrant, inodorous; निर्गन्धा इव किंशुकाः. ˚पुष्पी f. the Śālmali tree. -गर्व a. free from pride. -गवाक्ष a. windowless. -गुण a. 1 stringless (as a bow). -2 devoid of all properties. -3 devoid of good qualities, bad, worthless; निर्गुणः शोभते नैव विपुलाड- म्बरो$पि ना Bv.1.115. -4 without attributes; साकारं च निराकारं सगुणं निर्गुणं विभुम् Brahmavai. P. -5 having no epithet. (-णः) the Supreme Spirit. ˚आत्मक a. having no qualities. -गृहः a. houseless, homeless; सुगृही निर्गृही- कृता Pt.39. -गौरव a. 1 without dignity, undignified. -2 devoid of respect. -ग्रन्थ a. 1 freed from all ties or hindrances; आत्मारामाश्च मुनयो निर्ग्रन्था अप्युरुक्रमे । कुर्वन्त्यहैतुकीं भक्तिम् Bhāg.1.7.1. -2 poor, possessionless, beggarly. -3 alone, unassisted. (-न्थः) 1 an idiot, a fool. -2 a gambler. -3 a saint or devotee who has renounced all worldly attachments and wanders about naked and lives as a hermit. -4 A Buddha Muni. -ग्रन्थक a. 1 clever, expert. -2 unaccompanied, alone. -3 deserted, abandoned. -4 fruitless. (-कः 1 a religious mendicant. -2 a naked devotee. -3 a gambler. -ग्रन्थिक a. clever. (-कः) a naked mendicant, a Jaina mendicant of the Digambara class. -घटम् 1 a free market. -2 a crowded market. -घण्टः See निघण्टः. -घृण a. 1 cruel, merciless, pitiless. -2 shameless, immodest. -घृणा cruelty. -घोष a. noiseless, still, calm. -जन a. 1 tenantless, uninhabited, unfrequented, lonely, desolate. -2 without any retinue or attendants; भूयश्चैवाभिरक्षन्तु निर्धनान्निर्जना इव Mb.12.151.7. (-नम्) a desert, solitude, lonely place. -जन्तु a. free from living germs; H. Yoga. -जर a. 1 young, fresh. -2 imperishable, immortal. (-रः) a deity, god; (nom. pl. निर्जराः -निर्जरसः) (-रम्) ambrosia, nectar. -जरायु a. Ved. skinless. -जल a. 1 waterless, desert, destitute of water. -2 not mixed with water. (-लः) a waste, desert. ˚एकादशी N. of the eleventh day in the bright half of Jyeṣṭha. -जाड्य free from coldness. -जिह्वः a frog. -जीव a. 1 lifeless. -2 dead; चिता दहति निर्जीवं चिन्ता दहति जीवितम्. -ज्ञाति a. having no kinsmen, alone. -ज्वर a. feverless, healthy. -दण्डः a Śūdra. -दय a. 1 merciless, cruel, pitiless, unmerciful, unkind. -2 passionate. -3 very close, firm or fast, strong, excessive, violent; मुग्धे विधेहि मयि निर्दयदन्तदंशम् Gīt.1; निर्दयरति- श्रमालसाः R.19.32; निर्दयाश्लेषहेतोः Me.18. -4 unpitied by any; निर्दया निर्नमस्कारास्तन्मनोरनुशासनम् Ms.9.239. -दयम् ind. 1 unmercifully, cruelly. -2 violently, excessively; न प्रहर्तुमलमस्मि निर्दयम् R.11.84. -दश a. more than ten days old; यदा पशुर्निर्दशः स्यादथ मेध्यो भवे- दिति Bhāg.9.7.11. -दशन a. toothless. -दाक्षिण्य a. uncourteous. -दुःख a. 1 free from pain, painless. -2 not causing pain. -दैन्य a. happy, comfortable. -दोष a. 1 faultless, defectless; न निर्दोषं न निर्गुणम् -2 guiltless, innocent. -द्रव्य a. 1 immaterial. -2 without property, poor. -द्रोह a. not hostile, friendly, well-disposed, not malicious. -द्वन्द्व a. 1 indifferent in regard to opposite pairs of feelings (pleasure or pain), neither glad nor sorry; निर्द्वन्द्वो निर्ममो भूत्वा चरिष्यामि मृगैः सह Mb.1.85.16; निर्द्वन्द्वो नित्यसत्त्वस्थो निर्योगक्षेम आत्मवान् Bg.2.45. -2 not dependent upon another, independent. -3 free from jealousy or envy. -4 not double. -5 not contested, undisputed. -6 not acknowledging two principles. -धन a. without property, poor, indigent; शशिनस्तुल्यवंशो$पि निर्धनः परिभूयते Chāṇ.82. (-नः) an old ox. ˚ता, ˚त्वम् poverty, indigence. -धर्म a. unrighteous, impious, unholy. -धूम a. smokeless. -धौत a. cleansed, rendered clean; निर्धौत- दानामलगण्डभित्तिर्वन्यः सरित्तो गज उन्ममज्ज R.5.43. -नमस्कार a. 1 not courteous or civil, not respecting any one. -2 disrespected, despised. -नर a. abandoned by men, deserted. -नाणक a. coinless, penniless; Mk.2. -नाथ a. without a guardian or master. ˚ता 1 want of protection. -2 widowhood. -3 orphanage. -नाभि a. going or reaching beyond the navel; निर्नाभि कौशेयमुपात्तबाणम् Ku.7.7. -नायक a. having no leader or ruler, anarchic. -नाशन, -नाशिन् a. expelling, banishing. -निद्र a. sleepless, wakeful. -निमित्त a. 1 causeless. -2 disinterested. -निमेष a. not twinkling. -बन्धु a. without kindred or relation, friendless. -बल n. powerless, weak, feeble. -बाध a. 1 unobstructed. -2 unfrequented, lonely, solitary. -3 unmolested. (-धः) 1 a part of the marrow. -2 a knob. -बीज a. seedless, impotent. (-जा) a sort of grape (Mar. बेदाणा). -बुद्धि a. stupid, ignorant, foolish. -बुष, -बुस a. unhusked, freed from chaff. -भक्त a. taken without eating (as a medicine). -भय a. 1 fearless, undaunted. -2 free from danger, safe, secure; निर्भयं तु भवेद्यस्य राष्ट्रं बाहुबलाश्रितम् Ms.9.255. -भर a. 1 excessive, vehement, violent, much, strong; त्रपाभरनिर्भर- स्मरशर &c. Gīt.12; तन्व्यास्तिष्ठतु निर्भरप्रणयिता मानो$पि रम्यो- दयः Amaru.47. -2 ardent. -3 fast, close (as embrace); कुचकुम्भनिर्भरपरीरम्भामृतं वाञ्छति Gīt.; परिरभ्य निर्भरम् Gīt.1. -4 sound, deep (as sleep). -5 full of, filled with (at the end of comp.); आनन्द˚, गर्व˚ &c. (-रः) a servant receiving no wages. (-रम्) excess. (-रम् ind.) 1 excessively, exceedingly, intensely. -2 soundly. -भाग्य a. unfortunate, unlucky. -भाज्य a. to be separated; स निर्भाज्यः स्वकादंशात् किंचिद्दत्वोपजीवनम् Ms.9.27. -भृतिः a. without wages, hireless. -भोगः a. not fond of pleasures. -मक्षिक a. 'free from flies', undisturbed, private, lonely. (-कम्) ind. without flies, i. e. lonely, private; कृतं भवतेदानीं निर्मक्षिकम् Ś.2,6. -मज्ज a. fatless, meagre. -मत्सर a. free from envy, unenvious; निर्मत्सरे मत्समे वत्स... वसुन्धराभारमारोप्य Rāmāyaṇachampū. -मत्स्य a. fishless. -मद a. 1 not intoxicated, sober, quiet. -2 not proud, humble. -3 sad, sorry. -4 not in rut (as an elephant). -मनुज, -मनुष्य a. tenantless, uninhabited, deserted by men. -मन्तु a. faultless, innocent. -मन्त्र a. 1 a ceremony, unaccompanied by holy texts. -2 not familiar with holy texts; Mb.12.36.43. -मन्यु, -मन्युक a. free from anger; Mb.5.133.4. -मम a. 1 free from all connections with the outer world, who has renounced all worldly ties; संसारमिव निर्ममः (ततार) R.12.6; Bg.2.71; निराशीर्निर्ममो भूत्वा युध्यस्व विगतज्वरः 3.3. -2 unselfish, disinterested. -3 indifferent to (with loc.); निर्ममे निर्ममो$र्थेषु मथुरां मधुराकृतिः R.15.28; प्राप्तेष्वर्थेषु निर्ममाः Mb. -4 an epithet of Śiva. -मर्याद a. 1 boundless, immeasurable. -2 transgressing the limits of right or propriety, unrestrained, unruly, sinful, criminal; मनुजपशुभिर्निर्मर्यादैर्भवद्भिरुदायुधैः Ve.3.22. -3 confused. -4 insolent, immodest. (-दम्) ind. confusedly, topsyturvy. (-दम्) confusion, disorder. -मल a. 1 free from dirt or impurities, clear, pure, stainless, unsullied (fig. also); नीरान्निर्मलतो जनिः Bv.1.63. -2 resplendent, bright; Bh.1.56. -3 sinless, virtuous; निर्मलाः स्वर्गमायान्ति सन्तः सुकृतिनो यथा Ms.8.318. (-लम्) 1 talc. -2 the remainings of an offering made to a deity. ˚उपलः a crystal. -मशक a. free from gnats. -मांस a. fleshless; स्वल्प- स्नायुवसावशेषमलिनं निर्मांसमप्यस्थिकम् Bh.2.3. -मान a. 1 without self-confidence. -2 free from pride. -मानुष a. uninhabited, desolate. -मार्ग a. roadless, pathless. -मिथ्य a. not false, true; H. Yoga. -मुटः 1 a tree bearing large blossoms. -2 the sun. -3 a rogue. (-टम्) a large free market or fair. -मूल a. 1 rootless (as a tree). -2 baseless, unfounded (statement, charge &c.). -3 eradicated. -मेघ a. cloudless. -मेध a. without understanding, stupid, foolish, dull. -मोह a. free from illusion. (-हः) an epithet of Śiva. -यत्न a. inactive, lazy, dull. -यन्त्रण a. 1 unrestrained, unobstructed, uncontrolled, unrestricted. -2 unruly, self-willed, independent. (-णम्) 1 squeezing out. -2 absence of restraint, independence. -यशस्क a. without fame, discreditable, inglorious. -युक्त a. 1 constructed, built. -2 directed. -3 (in music) limited to metre and measure. -युक्ति f. 1 disunion. -2 absence of connection or government. -3 unfitness, impropriety. -युक्तिक a. 1 disjoined, unconnected. -2 illogical, unmeaning. -3 unfit, improper. -यूथ a. separated from the herd, strayed from the flock (as an elephant). -यूष = निर्यास. -योगक्षेम a. free from care (about acquisition); Bg.2. 45. -रक्त a. (-नीरक्त) colourless, faded. -रज, -रजस्क a. (-नीरज, नीरजस्क) 1 free from dust. -2 devoid of passion or darkness. (-जः) an epithet of Śiva. -रजस् (नरिजस्) a. see नीरज. (-f.) a woman not menstruating. ˚तमसा absence of passion or darkness. -रत (नीरत) a. not attached to, indifferent. -रन्ध्र a. (नीरन्ध्र) 1 without holes or interstices, very close or contiguous, thickly situated; नीरन्ध्रनीरनिचुलानि सरित्तटानि U.2.23. -2 thick, dense. -3 coarse, gross. -रव a. (-नीरव) not making any noise, noiseless; गतिविभ्रमसाद- नीरवा (रसना) R.8.58. -रस a. (नीरस) 1 tasteless, unsavoury, flavourless. -2 (fig.) insipid, without any poetic charm; नीरसानां पद्मानाम् S. D.1. -3 sapless, without juice, withered or dried up; Ś. Til.9. -4 vain, useless, fruitless; अलब्धफलनीरसान् मम विधाय तस्मिन् जने V.2.11. -5 disagreeable. -6 cruel, merciless. (-सः) the pomegranate. -रसन a. (नीरसन) having no girdle (रसना); Ki.5.11. -रुच् a. (नीरुच्) without lustre, faded, dim; परिमलरुचिराभिर्न्यक्कृतास्तु प्रभाते युवतिभिरुप- भोगान्नीरुचः पुष्पमालाः Śi.11.27. -रुज्, -रुज a. (नीरुज्, नीरुज) free from sickness, healthy, sound; नीरुजस्य किमौषधैः H.1. -रूप a. (नीरूप) formless, shapeless. (-पः) 1 air, wind. -2 a god. (-पम्) ether. -रोग a. (नीरोग) free from sickness or disease, healthy, sound; यथा नेच्छति नीरोगः कदाचित् सुचिकित्सकम् Pt.1.118. -लक्षण a. 1 having no auspicious marks, ill-featured. -2 undistinguished. -3 unimportant, insignificant. -4 unspotted. -5 having a white back. -लक्ष्य a. invisible. -लज्ज a. shameless, impudent. -लाञ्छनम् the marking of domestic animals (by perforating the nose &c.). -लिङ्ग a. having no distinguishing or characteristic marks. -लिप्त a. 1 unanointed. -2 undefiled, unsullied. -3 indifferent to. (-प्तः) 1 N. of Kṛiṣṇa. -2 a sage. -लून a. cut through or off. -लेप a. 1 unsmeared, unanointed; निर्लेपं काञ्चनं भाण्डमद्भिरेव विशुध्यति Ms.5.112. -2 stainless, sinless. (-पः) a sage. -लोभ a. free from desire or avarice, unavaricious. -लोमन् a. devoid of hair, hairless. -वंश a. without posterity, childless. -वचन a. 1 not speaking, silent. -2 unobjectionable, blameless; (for other senses see the word separately). -नम् ind. silently; माल्येन तां निर्वचनं जघान Ku.7.19. -वण, -वन a. 1 being out of a wood. -2 free from woods. -3 bare, open. -वत्सल a. not loving or fondling (esp. children); निर्वत्सले सुतशतस्य विपत्तिमेतां त्वं नानुचिन्तयसि Ve.5.3. -वर = निर्दरम् q. v. -वसु a. destitute of wealth, poor. -वाच्य a. 1 not fit to be said. -2 blameless, unobjectionable; सखीषु निर्वाच्य- मधार्ष्ट्यदूषितं प्रियाङ्गसंश्लेषमवाप मानिनी Ki.8.48. -वात a. free or sheltered from wind, calm, still; हिमनिष्यन्दिनी प्रातर्निर्वातेव वनस्थली R.15.66. (-तः) a place sheltered from or not exposed to wind; निर्वाते व्यजनम् H.2.124. -वानर a. free from monkeys. -वायस a. free from crows. -वार्य a. 1 irresistible. -2 acting fearlessly or boldly. -विकल्प, -विकल्पक a. 1 not admitting an alternative. -2 being without determination or resolution. -3 not capable of mutual relation. -4 conditioned. -5 undeliberative. -6 recognizing no such distinction as that of subject and object, or of the knower and the known; as applied to समाधि or contemplation, it is 'an exclusive concentration upon the one entity without distinct and separate consciousness of the knower, the known, and the knowing, and without even self-consciousness'; निर्विकल्पकः ज्ञातृज्ञानादिविकल्पभेद- लयापेक्षः; नो चेत् चेतः प्रविश सहसा निर्विकल्पे समाधौ Bh.3.61; आत्मारामा विहितरतयो निर्विकल्पे समाधौ Ve.1.23. -7 (in phil.) not arising from the relation of the qualifier and the qualified, (विशेषणविशेष्यसंबन्धानवगाहि प्रत्यक्षं ज्ञानम्) said of knowledge not derived from the senses, as घटत्व. (-ल्पम्) ind. without hesitation or wavering. -विकार a. 1 unchanged, unchangeable, immutable. -2 not disposed; तौ स्थास्यतस्ते नृपती निदेशे परस्परावग्रहनिर्विकारौ M.5.14. -3 disinterested; तरुविटपलतानां बान्धवो निर्विकारः Ṛs.2.28. (-रः) the Supreme deity. -विकास a. unblown. -विघ्न a. uninterrupted, unobstructed, free from impediments; निर्विघ्नं कुरु मे देव सर्वकार्येषु सर्वदा. (-घ्नम्) absence of impediment. -विचार a. not reflecting, thoughtless, inconsiderate; रे रे स्वैरिणि निर्विचारकविते मास्मत्प्रकाशीभव Chandr. 1.2. (-रम्) ind. thoughtlessly, unhesitatingly. -वि- चिकित्स a. free from doubt or reflection. -विचेष्ट a. motionless, insensible; यो हि दिष्टमुपासीनो निर्विचेष्टः सुखं शयेत् Mb.3.32.14. -वितर्क a. unreflecting. -विनोद a. without amusement, void of pastime, diversion or solace; शङ्के रात्रौ गुरुतरशुचं निर्विनोदां सखीं ते Me.9. -विन्ध्या N. of a river in the Vindhya hills; निर्विन्ध्यायाः पथि भव रसाभ्यन्तरः सन्निपत्य Me.28. -विमर्श a. 1 void of reflection, thoughtless. -2 not having विमर्श Sandhi. -विवर a. 1 having no opening or cavity. 2 without interstices or interval, close, compact; घटते हि संहततया जनितामिदमेव निर्विवरतां दधतोः Śi.9.44. -विवाद a. 1 not contending or disagreeing. -2 undisputed, not contradicted or disputed, universally acknowledged. -विवेक a. indiscreet, void of judgment, wanting in discrimination, foolish. -विशङ्क a. fearless, undaunted, confident; Ms.7.176; यस्मिन्कृत्यं समावेश्य निर्विशङ्केन चेतसा । आस्यते सेवकः स स्यात् कलत्रमिव चापरम् ॥ Pt.1.85. -विशेष a. showing or making no difference, indiscriminating, without distinction; निर्विशेषा वयं त्वयि Mb.; निर्विशेषो विशेषः Bh.3.5. 'a difference without distinction'. -2 having no difference, same, like, not differing from (oft. in comp.); निर्विशेषाकृति 'having the same form'; प्रवातनीलो- त्पलनिर्विशेषम् Ku.1.46; स निर्विशेषप्रतिपत्तिरासीत् R.14.22. -3 indiscriminate, promiscuous. (-षः) absence of difference. (निर्विशेषम् and निर्विशेषेण are used adverbially in the sense of 'without difference', 'equally', indiscriminately'; क्रुद्धेन विप्रमुक्तो$यं निर्विशेषं प्रियाप्रिये Rām.7.22.41. स्वगृहनिर्विशेषमत्र स्थीयताम् H.1; R.5.6.). -विशेषण a. without attributes. -विष a. poisonless (as a snake); निर्विषा डुण्डुभाः स्मृताः. -विषङ्ग a. not attached, indifferent. -विषय a. 1 expelled or driven away from one's home, residence or proper place; मनोनिर्विषयार्थकामया Ku.5.38; R.9.32; also -निर्विषयीकृत; वने प्राक्कलनं तीर्थं ये ते निर्विषयी- कृताः Rām.2.14.4. -2 having no scope or sphere of action; किंच एवं काव्यं प्रविरलविषयं निर्विषयं वा स्यात् S. D.1. -3 not attached to sensual objects (as mind). -विषाण a. destitute of horns. -विहार a. having no pleasure. -वीज, -बीज a. 1 seedless. -2 impotent. -3 causeless. -वीर a. 1 deprived of heroes; निर्वीरमुर्वीतलम् P. R.1.31. -2 cowardly. -वीरा a woman whose husband and children are dead. -वीर्य a. powerless, feeble, unmanly, impotent; निर्वीर्यं गुरुशापभाषितवशात् किं मे तवेवायुधम् Ve.3.34. -वीरुध, -वृक्ष a. treeless. -वृत्ति f. accomplishment, achievement; अत आसां निर्वृत्त्या अपवर्गः स्यात् । आतण्डुलनिर्वृत्तेः आ च पिष्टनिर्वृत्तेरभ्यास इति ॥ ŚB. on MS.11.1.27. -a. having no occupation, destitute. See निर्वृति. -वृष a. deprived of bulls. -वेग a. not moving, quiet, calm. -वेतन a honorary, unsalaried. -वेद a. not acknowledging the Vedas, an atheist, infidel. -वेष्टनम् a. a weaver's shuttle. -वैर a. free from enmity, amicable, peaceable. (-रम्) absence of enmity. -वैलक्ष्य a. shameless. -व्यञ्जन a. 1 straight-forward. -2 without condiment. (-नम् ind.) plainly, in a straight-forward or honest manner. -व्यथ, -न a. 1 free from pain. -2 quiet, calm. -व्यथनम् a hole; छिद्रं निर्व्यथनम् Ak. -व्यपेक्ष a. indifferent to, regardless of; मृग्यश्च दर्भाङ्कुरनिर्व्यपेक्षास्तवागतिज्ञं समबोधयन् माम् R.13.25;14.39. -व्यलीक a. 1 not hurting or offending. -2 without pain. -3 pleased, doing anything willingly. -4 sincere, genuine, undissembling. -व्यवधान a. (ground) uncovered, bare. -व्यवश्थ a. moving hither and thither. -व्यसन a. free from bad inclination. -व्याकुल a. calm. -व्याघ्र a. not haunted or infested by tigers. -व्याज a. 1 candid, upright, honest, plain. -2 without fraud, true, genuine. -3 got by heroism or daring deeds (not by fraud or cowardly conduct); अशस्त्रपूतनिर्व्याजम् (महामांसम्) Māl.5.12. (v. l.) -4 not hypocritical; धर्मस्य निर्व्याजता (विभूषणम्) Bh.2.82. (-जम् ind.) plainly, honestly, candidly; निर्व्याजमालिङ्गितः Amaru.85. -व्याजीकृत a. made plain, freed from deceit. -व्यापार a. 1 without employment or business, free from occupation; तं दधन्मैथिलीकण्ठनिर्व्यापारेण बाहुना R.15.56. -2 motionless; U.6. -व्यावृत्ति a. not involving any return (to worldly existence). -व्रण a. 1 unhurt, without wounds. -2 without rents. -व्रत a. not observing vows. -व्रीड a. shameless, impudent. -हिमम् cessation of winter. -हेति a. weaponless. -हेतु a. causeless, having no cause or reason. -ह्रीक a. 1 shameless, impudent. -2 bold, daring.

niras	निरस् 4 P. 1 To cast out, throw or drive away, give up, quit, drive or send back; निरस्तगाम्भीर्यमपास्त- पुष्पकम् Śi.1.55;9.63. -2 To destroy, ward off, defeat, annihilate, dispel; अह्नाय तावदरुणेन तमो निरस्तम् R.5.7; रक्षांसि वेदीं परितो निरास्थत् Bk.1.12;2.36. -3 To turn out, remove, expel, banish; गृहान्निरस्ता न तेन वैदेहसुता मनस्तः R.14.84. -4 To throw out, discharge (as arrows). -5 To reject, repudiate, decline. -6 To refute, confute, controvert (as arguments). -7 To eclipse, obscure, throw into the back-ground; यशांसि सर्वेषुभृतां निरास्थत् Bk.1.3. -8 To tear out, strip off. -9 To stretch out (as a hand).

nirākṛ	निराकृ 8 U. 1 To expel, drive away, repudiate; उग्रंपश्येन सुग्रीवस्तेन भ्राता निराकृतः Bk.6.1; R.14.57. -2 To refute (as an opinion). -3 To give up, abandon. -4 To destroy completely, annihilate. -5 To revile, contemn, slight. -6 To oppose, obstruct, contradict. -7 To refuse, decline, reject. -8 To omit. -9 To disappoint, frustrate.

niruddha	निरुद्ध p. p. 1 Obstructed, hindered, checked, restrained, curbed; निरुद्धो$प्यावेगः स्फुरदधरनासापुटतया परेषामु- न्नेयो भवति च भराध्मातहृदयः U.1.29. -2 Confined, imprisoned; जामातृयज्ञेन वयं निरुद्धाः U.1.11. -3 Covered, veiled. -4 Filled with, full of. -Comp. -कण्ठ a. having one's breath obstructed, choked, suffocated. -गुदः obstruction of the rectum. -प्रकशः stricture of the urethra. निरोधः nirōdhḥ निरोधनम् nirōdhanam निरोधः निरोधनम् 1 Confinement, locking up, imprisonment; Bhāg.1.58.58; निरोधनेन बन्धेन विविधेन वधेन च (निगृह्णीयात्) Ms.8.31; वैश्यः सर्वस्वदण्डः स्यात् संवत्सरनिरोधतः 375. -2 Enclosing, covering up; Amaru.87. -3 Restraint, check, suppression, control; योगश्चित्तवृत्तिनिरोधः Yoga. S.; अन्तश्चराणां मरुतां निरोधान्निवातनिष्कम्पमिव प्रदीपम् Ku.3.48. -4 Hindrance, obstruction, opposition. -5 Hurting, punishing, injuring. -6 Annihilation, complete destruction; जन्मनिरोधं प्रवदन्ति यस्य Śvet. Up.3.21. -7 Aversion, dislike. -8 Disappointment, frustration of hopes (in dramatic language). -9 (With the Buddhists) Suppression of pain. -1 Extinction (लय), निरोधो$स्यानुशयनमात्मनः सह शक्तिभिः Bhāg.2.1.6.

nirvahaṇam	निर्वहणम् 1 End, completion; यान्ति निर्वहणमस्य संसृति- क्लेशनाटकडम्बनाविधेः Ś.14.63. -2 Maintaining, carrying to the end, sustaining; मानस्य निर्वहणम् Amaru.24. -3 Destruction, annihilation. -4 (In dramas) The catastrophe, the last stage in which the action of the play is brought to a head, the denouement; तत्किंनिमित्तं कुकवि- कृतनाटकस्येव अन्यन्मुखे$न्यन्निर्वहणे Mu.6.

nirvāṇa	निर्वाण p. p. 1 Blown or put out, extinguished (as a lamp or fire); निर्वाणवैरदहनाः प्रशमादरीणाम् Ve.1.7; Ku.2.23. -2 Lost, disappeared. -3 Dead, deceased. -4 Liberated from existence. -5 Set (as the sun). -6 Calmed, quieted. -7 Plunged. -णम् 1 Extinction; अपि निर्वाणमायाति नानलो याति शीतताम् H.1.131; शनैर्निर्वाणमाप्नोति निरिन्धन इवानलः Mb. -2 Vanishing from sight, disappearance. -3 Dissolution, death. -4 Final liberation or emancipation from matter and reunion with the Supreme Spirit, eternal bliss; निर्वाणं नाधिगच्छेयुर्जीवेयुः पशु- जीविकाम् Mb.3.31,26; निर्वाणमपि मन्ये$हमन्तरायं जयश्रियः Ki.11.69; R.12.1. -5 (With Buddhists) Absolute extinction or annihilation, complete extinction of individual or worldly existence. -6 Perfect and perpetual calm, repose; निर्वाणं समुपगमेन यच्छते ते (नमः) Ki.18.39. -7 Complete satisfaction or pleasure, supreme bliss, highest felicity; स योगी ब्रह्मनिर्वाणं ब्रह्मभूतो$धिगच्छति Bg.5.24; अये लब्धं नेत्रनिर्वाणम् Ś.3; M.3.1; Śi.4.23; V.3.21. -8 Cessation, desisting. -9 Vacuity. -1 Union, association, confluence. -11 The bathing of an elephant; as in अनिर्वाण R.1.71. -12 Instruction in sciences. -13 Finis, completion; प्राप्य संकल्पनिर्वाणं नातिप्रीतो$भ्यगात् पुरम् Bhāg.4.9.27. -Comp. -पुराणम् offering oblations to the dead (?); Rāj. T. -भूयिष्ट a. almost vanished or departed; see under निर्वा (3) above. -मस्तकः final emancipation or deliverance, final beatitude.

nirvāpaṇam	निर्वापणम् 1 An offering, oblation, a funeral oblation. -2 A gift, donation. -3 Putting out, extinguishing. -4 Pouring out, scattering, sowing (as seed). -5 (a) Offering, giving. (b) Offering oblations (especially funeral). -6 Allaying, alleviation, pacification; कर्तव्यानि दुःखितैर्दुःखनिर्वापणानि U.3. -7 Annihilation. -8 Killing, slaughter. -9 Cooling, refreshing; शरीरनिर्वापणाय Ś.3. -1 A refrigerant or cooling application; तप्तायःपिण्ड- सिकतानां वा निर्वापणं प्रसाधनं च कर्तव्यम्.

niśā	निशा [नितरां श्यति तनूकरोति व्यापारान् शो-क Tv.] 1 Night या निशा सर्वभूतानां तस्यां जागर्ति संयमी Bg.2.69. -2 Turmeric. -3 A dream. -4 A collective name for the zodiacal signs Aries, Taurus, Gemini, Cancer, Sagittarius, and Capricorn. -5 A species of plant (Mar. कचरा or उपळसरी). -Comp. -अटः, -अटनः 1 an owl. -2 a demon, ghost, goblin; ईश्वरस्य निशाटानां विलोक्य निखिलां पुरीम् Bk. 8.115; Rām. Ch.1.34 -अटकः bdellium. -अतिक्रमः, -अत्ययः, -अन्तः, -अवसानम् 1 the passing away of night. -2 daybreak; ये मां स्तुवन्त्यनेनाङ्ग प्रतिबुध्य निशात्यये Bhāg.8.4.25. -अदः = Niṣāda q. v. -अन्ध a. blind at night. (-न्धा) the creeper called जतुका. -अधीशः, -ईशः, -नाथः, -पतिः, -मणिः, -रत्नम् 1 the moon. -2 camphor. -अर्धकालः the first part of the night. -आख्या -आह्वा turmeric. -आदिः the evening twilight. -उत्सर्गः end of night, day break. -उषित a. having remained overnight (Mar. शिळे). -एतः a crane. -करः 1 the moon; बहुले$पि गते निशाकरस्तनुतां दुःखमनङ्ग मोक्ष्यति Ku.4.13; द्विजावली बालनिशाकरांशुभिः. -2 a cock. -3 camphor. -4 N. of the numeral 1. -केतुः the moon -गुह a bed-chamber. -क्षयः close of night. -चर a. (-रा, री f.) moving about by night, night stalker. -(रः) 1 a fiend, goblin, an evil spirit; तस्मै निशाचरैश्वर्यं प्रतिशुश्राव राघवः R.12.69. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -3 a jackal. -4 an owl. -5 a snake. -6 the ruddy goose. -7 a thief. ˚पतिः 1 an epithet of (1) Śiva; (2) of Rāvaṇa. (-री) 1 a female fiend. -2 a woman going to meet her lover at night by appointment; राममन्मथशरेण ताडिता दुःसहेन हृदये निशाचरी R.11.2 (where the word is used sense 1 also). -3 a harlot. -चर्मन् m. darkness. -जलम् dew, frost. -दर्शिन् m. an owl. -निशम् ind. every night, always; ऋषेस्तस्योटज- स्थस्य कालो$गच्छन्निशानिशम्. -पुष्पम् 1 the white water-lily (opening at night). -2 hoar-frost, dew. -बलम् see निशा (4). -मुखम् the beginning of night, cf. प्रदोषो रजनीमुखम्. -मृगः a jackal -रत्नम् 1 the moon -2 camphor. -वनः hemp (शण). -विहारः a demon. goblin, a Rākṣasa; प्रचक्रतू रामनिशाविहारौ Bk.2.36. -वेदिन् m. a cock. -हसः the white water-lily (opening at night).

niṣkṛṣ	निष्कृष् 1 P. 1 To draw or pull out, extract. -2 To extort, exact, snatch or take by force; निष्क्रष्टुमर्थं चकमे कुबेरात् । R.5.26. -3 To tear asunder, cut in pieces. -Caus. To destroy, annihilate.

niṣpat	निष्पत् 1 P. 1 To issue or come out of, issue from, fly out of; अयमरविवेरभ्यश्चातकैर्निष्पतद्भिः Ś.7.7; एषा विदूरी- भवतः समुद्रात् सकानना निष्पततीव भूमिः R.13.18; Ms.8.55; Y.2.16; Ku.3.71; Me.71. -2 To fall away. -Caus. To annihilate, destroy.

nis	निस् ind. 1 As a prefix to verbs it implies separation (away from, outside of), certainty, completeness or fulness, enjoyment, crossing over, transgressing &c.; (for examples see under (निर्). -2 As a prefix to nouns, not directly derived from verbs, it forms nouns or adjectives, and has the sense of (a) 'out of', 'away from'; as in निर्वन, निष्कौशाम्बि; or (b) more usually, 'not', 'without', 'devoid of' (having a privative force); निःशेष 'without a remainder'; निष्फल, निर्जल, &c. N. B. In compound the स् of निस् is changed to र् before vowels and soft consonants (see निर्), to a visarga before sibilants, to श् before च् and छ्, and to ष् before क् and प्; cf. दुस्. -Comp. -कण्टक (निष्कण्टक) a. 1 thornless. -2 free from thorns or enemies, free from danger or nuisance. (-कः) N. of Śiva. -कन्द (निष्कन्द) a. without edible roots. -कपट (निष्कपट) a. guileless, sincere. -कम्प (निष्कम्प) a. motionless, steady, immovable; निष्कम्पचामरशिखाः Ś.1.8; Ku.3.48. -करुण (निष्करुण) a. merciless, pitiless, cruel. -करूष (निष्क रूष) a. free from dirt. -कर्मन् (निष्कर्मन्) a. inactive. -कल (निष्कल) a. 1 without parts, undivided, whole. -2 waned, decayed, diminished. -3 impotent, barren. -4 maimed. -5 inarticulate (a musical term); N.21.16. -6 Without attributes, or qualities; निष्कलं निष्क्रियं शान्तं निरवद्यं निरञ्जनम् Śvet. Up; Bhāg.1.9.44; तद् ब्रह्म निष्कलमहं (स्मरामि). -(लः) 1 a receptacle. -2 the pudendum muliebre. -3 N. of Brahmā. (-ला, -ली) an elderly woman, one who is past child-bearing, or one in whom menstruation has ceased. -कलङ्क, (निष्कलङ्क) -कल्मष a. stainless, spotless. -कषाय (निष्कषाय) a. free from dirt or impure passions. -कान्त (निष्कान्त) a. not lovely, ugly. -काम (निष्काम) a. 1 free from wish or desire, desireless, disinterested, unselfish. -2 free from all worldly desires; विशिष्टफलदाः पुंसां निष्कामाणां विमुक्तिदाः Viṣṇu. P. (-मम् ind.) 1 without wish or desire. -2 unwillingly. -कारण (निष्कारण) a. 1 causeless, unnecessary. -2 disinterested, free from any motive; निष्कारणो बन्धुः. -3 groundless, not proceeding from any cause. (-णम् ind.) without any cause or reason, causelessly, needlessly. -कालकः (निष्कालकः) a penitent shaven and smeared with clarified butter. -कालिक (निष्कालिक) a. 1 one whose term of life is over or elapsed, whose days are numbered. -2 one who has no conqueror, invincible (अजय्य). -किञ्चन (निष्किञ्चन) a. penniless, poor, indigent; प्रज्ञानं शौचमेवात्र शरीरस्य विशेषतः । तथा निष्कि- ञ्चनत्वं च मनसश्च प्रसन्नता ॥ Mb. -किल्विष (निष्किल्विष) a. sinless, faultless. -कुल (निष्कुल) a. having no kindred, left alone in the world. (निष्कुलं कृ 'to cut off completely, exterminate'; निष्कुला कृ 1 to exterminate one's family -2 to shell, strip off the husk; निष्कुलाकरोति दाडिमम् Sk.; N.22.15.) -कुलीन (निष्कुलीन) a. of low family. -कूज (निष्कूज) a. still, silent; U.2.16. -कूट (निष्कूट) a. pitiless, merciless, cruel. -कैवल्य (निष्कैवल्य) a. 1 mere, pure, absolute. -2 deprived of final beatitude (मोक्षहीन). -कोश (निष्कोश) a. unsheathed. -कौशाम्बि (निष्कौशाम्बि) a. who has gone out of Kauśāmbī. -क्रिय (निष्क्रिय) a. 1 inactive. -2 not performing ceremonial rites; Ms.1.58. -3 knowing higher knowledge as a sage, Saṁnyāsin; न्यासे कुटीचकः पूर्वं बह्वोदो हंस- निष्क्रियौ Bhāg.3.12.43. -यम् the Supreme Spirit (ब्रह्म). -क्षत्र (निःक्षत्र), -क्षत्रिय (निःक्षत्रिय) a. destitute of the military tribe. -क्षेपः (निःक्षेपः) = निक्षेप q. v. -चक्रम् (निश्चक्रम्) ind. completely; निश्चक्रं हतराक्षसः पुनरगाद्ब्रह्मत्व- माद्यं स्थिराम् A. Rām.1.1.1. -चक्रिक (निश्चक्रिक) a. without tricks, honest. -चक्षुस् (निश्चक्षुस्) a. blind, eyeless. -चत्वारिंशः (निश्चत्वारिंश) a. past forty. -चिन्त (निश्चिन्त) a. 1 free from anxiety, unconcerned, secure. -2 thoughtless, unthinking. -चेतन (निश्चेतन) a. unconscious. -चेतस् (निश्चेतस्) a. not in one's right senses, mad. -चेष्ट (निश्चेष्ट) a. motionless, powerless. -चेष्टाकरण (निश्चेष्टाकरण) a. depriving (one) of motion, causing motionlessness (said of one the arrows of Cuhid). -छन्दस् (निश्छन्दस्) a. not studying the Vedas (छन्दस्) Ms.3,7. -छिद्र (निश्छिद्र) a. 1 without holes. -2 without defects or weak points. -3 uninterrupted, unhurt. -तन्तु a. 1 having no offspring, childless. -2 a Brahmachārin; मुण्डा निस्तन्तवश्चापि वस- त्यर्थार्थिनः पृथक् Mb.12.167.16. -तन्द्र, -तन्द्रि a. not lazy, fresh, healthy. -तमस्क -तिमिर a. 1 free from darkness, bright; तस्य द्वितीयहरिविक्रमनिस्तमस्कं वायोरिमं परि- वहस्य वदन्ति मार्गम् Ś.7.6. -2 freed from sin or moral impurities. -तर्क्य a. unimaginable, inconceivable. -तल a. 1 round, globular; मुक्ताकलापस्य च निस्तलस्य Ku.1.42. Kau. A.2.9. -2 moving, trembling, shaking. -3 bottomless. -4 down, below. (-ला) a pill, round ball. -तुल a. matchless, incomparable. -तुष a. 1 freed from chaff. -2 purified, cleansed. -3 simplified. ˚क्षीरः wheat. ˚रत्नम् a crystal. -4 faultless, pure; शशंस गुणैररीणैरुदयास्तनिस्तुषम् N.15.8. -तुषत्वम् faultlessness; कवेः पुष्यति निस्तुषत्वम् Maṅkhaka.2.7. -तुषित a. 1 husked. -2 made thin. -3 abandoned. -तेजस् a. destitute of fire, heat or energy, powerless, impotent; न भेतव्यं भृशं चैते मात्रा निस्ते- जसः कृताः Mārk. P. -2 spiritless, dull. -3 obscure. -त्रप a. impudent, shameless. -त्रिंश a. 1 more than thirty; निस्त्रिंशानि वर्षाणि चैत्रस्य P.V.4.73; Sk. -2 pitiless, merciless, cruel; हे निस्त्रिंश विमुक्तकण्ठकरुणं तावत् सखी रोदितु Amaru.6. (-शः) a sword; निजध्नुः शरनिस्त्रिंशकुन्ततोमरशक्तिभिः Śiva B.3.19; शूरौर्निस्त्रिंशपाणिभिः Parnāl 1.5. ˚भृत् m. a sword-bearer. -त्रैगुण्य a. destitute of the three qualities (सत्त्व, रजस् and तमस्); निस्त्रैगुण्यो भवार्जुन Bg.2.45. -पक्व (निष्पक्व) well cooked, boiled. -पङ्क (निष्पङ्क) a. free from mud, clear, pure. -पताक (निष्पताक) a. having no flag or banner. -पतिसुता (निष्पतिसुता) a woman having no husband and no sons. -पत्र (निष्पत्र) a. 1 leafless. -2 unfeathered, featherless. [निष्पत्राकृ 'to pierce with an arrow so that the feathers come through on the other side'; to cause excessive bodily pain (fig.); निष्पत्राकरोति मृगं व्याधः (सपुङ्खस्य शरस्य अपर- पार्श्वे निर्गमनान्निष्पत्रं करोति Sk.); एकश्च मृगः सपत्राकृतो$न्यश्च निष्पत्राकृतो$पतत् Dk.165; so यान्ती गुरुजनैः साकं स्मयमानानना- म्बुजा । तिर्यग्ग्रीवं यदद्राक्षीत्तन्निष्पत्राकरोज्जगत् Bv.2.132.] -पथ्य (निष्पथ्य) a. unwell, ill -पद (निष्पद) a. having no foot. (-दम्) a vehicle moving without feet (as a ship). -पराक्रम (निष्पराक्रम) a. weak, powerless. -परामर्श (निष्परामर्श) a. without advice, helpless; M.4.2/3 -परिकर (निष्परिकर) a. without preparations. -परिग्रह (निष्परिग्रह) a. having no property or possessions; Mu.2. (-हः) an ascetic without family, dependents, or other belongings. -परिच्छद (निष्परिच्छद) a. having no retinue or train. -परिदाह (निष्परिदाह) a. incombustible. -परिहार्य (निष्परिहार्य) a. To be applied by all means. -परीक्ष (निष्परीक्ष) a. not examining or testing accurately. -परीहार (निष्परीहार) a. 1 not avoiding. -2 not observing caution. -परुष (निष्परुष) a. (in music) soft. -पर्यन्त (निष्पर्यन्त), -पार (निष्पार) a. boundless, unbounded. -पर्याय (निष्पर्याय) a. out of order. -पाप (निष्पाप) sinless, guiltless, pure. -पुत्र (निष्पुत्र) a. sonless, childless. -पुराण (निष्पुराण) a. not existing before, unheard of, new. -पुरुष (निष्पुरुष) 1 unpeopled, tenantless, desolate. -2 without male issue; Ms.3.7. -2 not male, feminine, neuter. -षः 1 a eunuch. -2 a coward. -पुलाक (निष्पुलाक) a. freed from chaff. -पौरुष (निष्पौरुष) a. unmanly. -प्रकम्प (निष्प्रकम्प) a. steady, immovable, motionless. -प्रकारक (निष्प्रकारक) 1 a. without ditinction of species, without specification, absolute. -2 without the relation of the qualifier and the qualified, see निर्विकल्प (7); निष्प्रकारकं ज्ञानं निर्विकल्पकम् T. S. -प्रकाश (निष्प्रकाश) a. not transparent, not clear, dark. -प्रचार (निष्प्रचार) a. 1 not moving away, remaining in one place. -2 concentrated, intently fixed; निष्प्रचारेण मनसा परं तदधिगच्छति Mb.12.215.17. -प्रज्ञ (निष्प्रज्ञ) a. ignorant, stupid. -प्रणय (निष्प्रणय) a. cold. -प्रताप (निष्प्रताप) a. destitute of glory, mean, base; शङ्क- नीया हि सर्वत्र निष्प्रतापा दरिद्रता Pt.2.94. -प्रति(ती)कार (निष्प्रति(ती)कार), -प्रतिक्रिय (निष्प्रतिक्रिय) a. 1 incurable, irremediable; सर्वथा निष्प्रतीकारेयमापदुपस्थिता K. 151. -2 unobstructed, uninterrupted. (-रम्) ind. uninterruptedly. -प्रतिग्रह (निष्प्रतिग्रह) a. not accepting gifts. -प्रतिघ (निष्प्रतिघ) a. unhindered, unobstructed, unimpeded; स हि निष्प्रतिघेन चक्षुषा त्रितयं ज्ञानमयेन पश्यति R.8.78. -प्रतिद्वन्द्व (निष्प्रतिद्वन्द्व) a. without enemies, unopposed. -2 matchless, unrivalled, unequal- led. -प्रतिभ (निष्प्रतिभ) a. 1 devoid of splendour. -2 having no intelligence, not ready-witted, dull, stupid. -3 apathetic. -प्रतिभान (निष्प्रतिभान) a. cowardly, timid. -प्रतीप (निष्प्रतीप) a. 1 looking straightforward, not turned backwards. -2 unconcerned (as a look). -प्रत्याश (निष्प्रत्याश) a. hopeless, despondent. -प्रत्यूह (निष्प्रत्यूह) a. unobstructed, unimpeded; निष्प्रत्यूहाः प्रियसखि यदा दुःसहाः संबभूवुः Māl.9.45; निष्प्र- त्यूहमुपास्महे भगवतः कौमोदकीलक्ष्मणः Murārināṭakam. -प्रपञ्च (निष्प्रपञ्च) a. 1 without extension. -2 without deceit, honest. -प्रभ (निःप्रभ or -निष्प्रभ) a. 1 lustreless, pale-looking; निष्प्रभश्च रिपुरास भूभृताम् R.11.81. -2 powerless. 3 gloomy, obscure, dim, dark. -प्रमाणक (निष्प्रमाणक) a. without authority. -प्रयत्न (निष्प्र- यत्न) a. inactive, dull. -प्रयोजन (निष्प्रयोजन) a. 1 without motive, not influenced by any motive. -2 causeless, groundless, -3 useless. -4 needless, unnecessary. (-नम्) ind. causelessly, without reason, without any object; Mu.3. -प्रवणि, प्रवाण, प्रवाणि (निष्प्रवणि, -ष्प्रवाण, -ष्प्रवाणि) a. fresh from loom, quite new (cloth, &c.) -प्राण (निष्पाण) a. 1 lifeless, dead. -2 Weak (निर्बल); निष्प्राणो नामिहन्तव्यः Mb.12.95.12. -फल (निष्फल) a. 1 bearing no fruit, fruitless (fig. also), unsuccessful, futile; निष्फलारम्भयत्नाः Me.56. -2 useless, profitless, vain; Ku.4.13. -3 barren (as a tree). -4 meaningless (as a word). -5 seedless, impotent. (-ला, -ली) a woman past child-bearing. -फेन (निष्फेन) a. foamless. n. opium. -शङ्क (निःशङ्क) a. free from fear or risk, secure, fearless. (-निःशङ्कः) (in music) a kind of dance. -f. (निःशङ्का) absence of fear. -ind. fearlessly, securely, easily. -शब्द (निःशब्द) a. not expressed in words, inaudible; निःशब्दं रोदितुमारेभे K.135. (-ब्दः, ब्दम्) silence, a calm. -शमः (निःशमः) uneasiness, anxiety. -शरण a. (-निःशरण) helpless, forlorn. -शर्कर (-निःशर्कर) a. free from pebbles (as a bathing place). -शलाक (निःशलाक) a. lonely, solitary, retired. (-कम्) a retired place, solitude; अरण्ये निःशलाके वा मन्त्रयेदविभावितः Ms.7.147. -शल्य a. 1 free from arrows. -2 free from thorns or darts. -शूक (निःशूक) a. merciless, cruel. (-कः) beardless rice. -शेष (निःशेष) a. without remainder (either finished or passed away). -शोध्य (निःशोध्य) a. washed, pure, clean. -श्रीकः a. 1 deprived of lustre, beauty. -2 unhappy. -श्रेयस a. the best, most excellent. (-सः) an epithet of Śiva. (-सम्) final beatitude, absolution; यः करोति वधोदर्का निःश्रेयसकरीः क्रियाः Ki.11.19; see निःश्रेयस also. -2 devotion, faith, belief. -3 apprehension, conception. -4 happiness (in general), welfare; इदं निःश्रेयसं परम् Ms. 1.16. -संशय (निःसंशय) a. 1 undoubted, certain. -2 not doubtful, not suspecting or doubting; कुरु निः- संशयं वत्से स्ववृत्ते लोकमित्यशात् R.15.79. (-यम्) ind. doubtlessly, undoubtedly, surely, certainly. -संस्कार (निःसंस्कार) a. uneducated, ill-mannered. -संख्य (निःसंख्य) a. innumerable. -संग (निःसंग) a. 1 not attached or devoted to, regardless of, indifferent to; यन्निःसंगस्त्वं फलस्यानतेभ्यः Ki.18.24. -2 one who has renounced all worldly attachments; भर्तुर्ये प्रलये$पि पूर्वसुकृता- सङ्गेन निःसङ्गया भक्त्या कार्यधुरं वहन्ति कृतिनस्ते दुर्लभास्त्वादृशाः Mu.1.14. -3 unconnected, separated, detatched. -4 unobstructed; निःसङ्गं प्रतिभिरुपाददे विवृत्तिः Ki.7.12. (-गम्) ind. unselfishly. -संचारः (निःसंचारः) not taking a walk; Māl. -संज्ञ (निःसंज्ञ) a. unconscious. -सत्त्व (निःसत्त्व) a. 1 unenergetic, weak, impotent. -2 mean, insignificant, low. -3 non-existent, unsubstantial. -4 deprived of living beings. (-त्त्वम्) 1 absence of power or energy. -2 non-existence. -3 insignificance. -संतति (निःसंतति), -संतान (निःसंतान) a. childless. -संदिग्ध (निःसंदिग्ध), -संदेह (निःसंदेह) a. see निःसंशय. -संधि (निस्संधि), निःसंधि) a. having no joints perceptible, compact, firm, close, -सपत्न (निःसपत्न) a. 1 having no rival or enemy; घनरुचिरकलापो निःसपत्नो$द्य जातः V.4.1. -2 not claimed by another, belonging exclusively to one possessor. -3 having no foes. -समम् (निःसमम्) ind. 1 unseasonably, at a wrong time. -2 wickedly. -संपात (निःसंपात) a. affording no passage, blocked up. (-तः) the darkness of midnight, thick darkness. -संबाध (निःसंबाध) a. not contracted, spacious, large. -संभ्रम (निःसंभ्रम) a. not perplexed, unembarrassed. -सरणि (निःसरणि) a. pathless. -सह (निःसह) a. 1 Exhausted, powerless; कुसुमावचयपरिश्रमनिःसहं मे शरीरम् Nāg.2. -2 intolerable, irresistible. -सार (निःसार) a. 1 sapless, pithless. -2 worthless, vain, unsubstantial. ˚ता 1 sapless, pithlessness; निःसारत्वाल्लघीयसः (तृणस्य च समा गतिः) Pt.1.16. -2 worthlessness. -3 vanity, unsubstantial or transitory nature. -सीम (निःसीम), -सीमन् (निःसीमन्) a. immeasurable, boundless; अहह महतां निःसीमानश्चरित्रविभूतयः Bh.2.35; निःसीमशर्मप्रदम् 3.97. -स्तम्भ (निःस्तम्भ) a. having no pillars. -2 having no support. -3 not proud; निःस्तम्भो भ्रष्टसंकल्पः स्वान् मेघान् स न्यवारयत् Bhāg.1.25.24. -सूत्र a. helpless; निःसूत्रमास्ते घनपङ्कमृत्सु N.7.69. -स्नेह (निःस्नेह) a. 1 not unctuous or greasy, without unction or oil, dry. -2 not showing affection, unfeeling, unkind, indifferent. -3 not loved, not cared for; केशा अपि विरज्यन्तो निःस्नेहाः किं न सेवकाः Pt.1. 82. -4 not longing for, indifferent to. (-हा) lin-seed. -स्पन्द (निःस्पन्द or निस्स्पन्द) a. motionless, steady; ज्याबन्धनिस्स्पन्दभुजेन यस्य R.6.4. -स्पर्श (निःस्पर्श) a. hard, rough. -स्पृह (निःस्पृह) a. free from desire; निःस्पृहस्य तृणं जगत्. -2 regardless of, indifferent to; ननु वक्तृविशेषनिःस्पृहाः Ki.2.5; R.8.1; भोगेभ्यः स्पृहयालवो न हि वयं का निःस्पृहाणामसि Bh. -3 content, unenvious. -4 free from any worldly ties. -स्व (निःस्व) a. poor, indigent; निस्वो वष्टि शतम् Śānti.2.6; त्यक्त्वा जनयितारं स्वं निःस्वं गच्छति दूरतः Pt.1.9. -स्वन (निःस्वन) a. soundless. -स्वभावः (निःस्वभावः) poverty. -a. void of peculiarities. -स्वादु (निःस्वादु) a. tasteless, insipid.

netram	नेत्रम् [नयति नीयते वा अनेन नी-ष्ट्रन्] 1 Leading, conducting, directing; कर्मणा दैवनेत्रेण जन्तुदेहोपपत्तये Bhāg.3.31.1. -2 The eye; प्रायेण गृहिणीनेत्राः कन्यार्थेषु कृटुम्बिनः Ku.6.85; 2.29,3;7.13. -3 The string of a churning-stick; मन्थानं मन्दरं कृत्वा तथा नेत्रं च वासुकिम् Mb.1.18.13; Bhāg. 8.6.22. -4 Woven silk, a fine silken garment; नेत्र- क्रमेणोपरुरोध सूर्यम् R.7.39. (where some commentators take नेत्रम् in its ordinary sense of the 'eye'). -5 The root of a tree. -6 An enema pipe. -7 A carriage, conveyance in general. -8 The number 'two'. -9 A leader; सूर्योदये सञ्जय के नु पूर्वं युयुत्सवो हृष्यमाणा इवासन् । मामका वा भीष्मनेत्राः समीपे पाण्डवा वा भीमनेत्रास्तदानीम् ॥ Mb.6.2.1. -1 A constellation, star. (said to be m. only in these two senses). -11 A river; Nm. -12 A kind of vein; Nm. -13 A bug; Nm. -14 A bark of a tree; Nm. -Comp. -अञ्जनम् a collyrium for the eyes; Ś. Til.7. -अतिथि a. One who has become visible. -अन्तः the outer corner of the eye. -अम्बु, -अम्भस् n. tears. -अभिष्यन्दः running of the eyes, a kind of eye-disease -अरिः Euphorbia Antiquorum (Mar. निवडुंग, शेर). -आमयः ophthalmia. -उत्सवः any pleasing or beautiful object. -उपमम् the almond fruit. -औषधम् 1 collyrium -2 green sulphate of iron (Mar. हिराकस). -कार्मणम् a spell for the eyes; Vikr. -कनीनिका the pupil of the eye. -कूटः, -टम् a front apartment, a side-hall, a corner tower; प्रधानावासनेत्रस्थनेत्रकूटद्वयं न्यसेत् Kāmikāgama 35.75. -कोषः 1 the eye-ball. -2 the bud of a flower. -गोचर a. within the range of sight, perceptible, visible. -चपल a. restless with the eyes, winking; न नेत्रचपलो$नृजुः Ms.4.177. -छदः the eyelid. -जम्, -जलम्, -वारि n. tears. -र्निसिन् a. kissing or touching the eye (sleep). -पत्रम् the eye-brows. -पर्यन्त a. as far as the eye, up to the eye. (-तः) the outer corner of the eye. -पाकः inflammation of the eye; Suśr. -पिण़्डः 1 the eye-ball. -2 a cat. -बन्धः hood-winking, playing at hide-and-seek; Bhāg. -भवः, -मलम् the mucus of the eyes. -मुष् a. stealing or captivating the eye. -योनिः 1 an epithet of Indra (who had on his body a thousand marks resembling the female organ inflicted by the curse of Gautama). -2 the moon. -रञ्जनम् a collyrium. -रोमन् n. the eyelash. -वस्तिः m., f. a clyster-pipe with a bag. -वस्त्रम् a veil over the eye, the eyelid. -विष् f. excretion of the eyes. -विष a. having poison in the eyes (the Brāhmaṇa); Mb.2. -स्तम्भः rigidity of the eyes.

pañcaka	पञ्चक a. 1 Consisting of five. -2 Relating to five. -3 Made of five. -4 Bought with five. -5 Taking five percent. -कः, -कम् 1 A collection or aggregate of five; अम्लपञ्चकम्. -2 the pentad of five नक्षत्रs beginning from धनिष्ठा and ending in रेवती. -कम् A field of battle.

pañjikā	पञ्जिका 1 A perpetual or running commentary which explains and analyses every word; टीका निरन्तर- व्याख्या पञ्जिका पदनक्तिका. -2 A journal, a book in which accounts of receipts and expenditure are entered. -3 The record or register of human actions kept by Yama. (For other senses see पञ्जि above). -Comp. -कारकः 1 a scribe. -2 a man of the Kāyastha tribe. -3 an almanac-maker.

paṭahaḥ	पटहः 1 A kettle-drum, a war-drum, drum, tabor; कुर्वन् संध्याबलिपटहतां शूलिनः श्लाघनीयाम् Me.36; पटुपटह- ध्वनिभिर्विनीतनिद्रः R.9.71. -2 Beginning, undertaking. -3 Injuring, killing. -Comp. -घोषकः a crier (who beats a drum and then makes the proclamation). -भ्रमणम् going about with a drum to call people together. -वेला the hour at which a drum is beaten every day.

paṭu	पटु a. (टु or ट्वी f.; compar. पटीयस्, superl. पटिष्ठ) 1 Clever, skilful, dexterous, proficient; पाटीर तव पटीयान् कः परिपाटीमिमामुरीकर्तुम् Jagannātha; cf. also अघटितघटना- पटीयसी; (usually with a loc.) वाचि पटुः &c. -2 Sharp, acrid, pungent. -3 Sharp, smart (as intellect), intelligent. -4 Violent, strong, sharp, intense; अयमपि पटुर्धारासारो न बाणपरंपरा V.4.1; U.4.3. -5 Shrill, clear, sharp-sounding; किमिदं पटुपटहशङ्खमिश्रो नान्दीनादः Mu.6; पटुपटहध्वनिभिर्विनीतनिद्रः R.9.71,73; Māl.5.4. -6 Apt, disposed; स्मर्तुमधिगतगुणस्मरणाः पटवो न दोषमखिलं खलूत्तमा; Śi. 15.43. -7 Harsh, cruel, hard-hearted. -8 Sly, cunning, crafty, roguish. -9 Healthy, sound; मृदुसूर्याः सुनीहाराः पटुशीताः समाहिताः (शून्यारण्याः) Rām.3.16.12. -1 Active, busy. -11 Eloquent, talkative, -12 Blown, expanded. -13 Hard, rough, fierce. -14 Contumelious (as a speech). -टुः, -टु n. A mushroom (छत्रा). -टु n. Salt. -Comp. -करण a. having sound organs. -कल्प, -देशीय a. Pretty clever, tolerably sharp. -घण्टा a shrill bell; Mb. -तृणम् -तृणकम् a kind of pungent grass. -त्रयम् a collection of three salts (Mar. सैंधव, बिडलोण व संचळखार). -मति a. clever-minded. -रूप a. very clever.

padam	पदम् [पद्-अच्] 1 A foot (said to be m. also in this sense); पदेन on foot; शिखरिषु पदं न्यस्य Me.13; अपथे पदमर्पयन्ति हि R.9.74 'set foot on (follow) a wrong road'; 3.5;12.52; पदं हि सर्वत्र गुणैर्निधीयते 3.62 'good qualities set foot everywhere' i. e. command notice or make themselves felt; जनपदे न गदः पदमादधौ 9.4. 'no disease stepped into the country'; यदवधि न पदं दधाति चित्ते Bv.2.14; पदं कृ (a) to set foot in, on or over (lit.); शान्ते करिष्यसि पदं पुनराश्रमे$स्मिन् Ś.4.2. (b) to enter upon or into, take possession of, occupy (fig.); कृतं वपुषि नवयौवनेन पदम् K.137; कृतं हि मे कुतूहलेन प्रश्नाशया हृदि पदम् 133; so Ku.5.21; Pt.1.24; कृत्वा पदं नो गले Mu.3.26 'in defiance of us'; (lit. planting his foot on our neck); मूर्ध्नि पदं कृ 'to mount on the head of', 'to humble'; पदं मूर्ध्नि समाधत्ते केसरी मत्तदन्तिनः Pt.1.327; आकृतिविशेषेष्वादरः पदं करोति M.1 'good forms attract attention (command respect); जने सखी पदं कारिता Ś.4; 'made to have dealings with (to confide in)'; धर्मेण शर्वे पार्वतीं प्रति पदं कारिते Ku.6.14. -2 A step, pace, stride; तन्वी स्थिता कतिचिदेव पदानि गत्वा Ś.2.13; पदे पदे 'at every step'; अक्षमालामदत्त्वा पदात् पदमपि न गन्तव्यम् or चलितव्यम् 'do not move even a step' &c.; पितुः पदं मध्यममुत्पतन्ती V.1.19 'the middle pace or stride of Viṣṇu.'; i. e. the sky (for mythologically speaking, the earth, sky, and lower world are considered as the three paces of Viṣṇu in his fifth or dwarf incarnation वामनावतार); so अथात्मनः शब्दगुणं गुणज्ञः पदं विमानेन विगाहमानः R.13.1. -3 A foot-step, footprint, foot-mark; पदपङ्क्तिः Ś.3.7; or पदावली foot-prints; पदमनुविधेयं च महताम् Bh.2.28 'the foot-steps of the great must be followed'; पदैगृर्ह्यते चौरः Y.2.286. -4 A trace, mark, impression, vestige; रतिवलयपदाङ्के चापमासज्य कण्ठे Ku.2.64; Me.37,98; M.3. -5 A place, position, station; अधो$धः पदम् Bh.2.1; आत्मा परिश्रमस्य पदमुपनीतः Ś.1, 'brought to the point of or exposed to trouble'; तदलब्धपदं हृदि शोकघने R.8.91, 'found no place in (left no impression on) the heart'; अपदे शङ्कितो$स्मि M.1, 'my doubts were out of place', i. e. groundless; कृशकुटुम्बेषु लोभः पदमधत्त Dk.162; Ku.6.72;3.4; R.2.5;9.82; कृतपदं स्तनयुगलम् U.6.35, 'brought into relief or bursting forth'. -6 Dignity, rank, office, station or position; भगवत्या प्रश्निकपदमध्यासितव्यम् M.1; यान्त्येवं गृहिणीपदं युवतयः Ś.4.18, 'attain to the rank or position, &c.; स्थिता गृहिणीपदे 4.19; so सचिव˚, राज˚ &c. -7 Cause, subject, occasion, thing, matter, business, affair; व्यवहारपदं हि तत् Y.2.5; 'occasion or matter of dispute, title of law, judicial proceeding'; Ms.8.7; सतां हि सन्देहपदेषु वस्तुषु Ś.1.22; वाञ्छितफलप्राप्तेः पदम् Ratn.1.6. -8 Abode, object, receptacle; पदं दृशः स्याः कथमीश मादृशाम् Śi.1.37; 15.22; अगरीयान्न पदं नृपश्रियः Ki.2.14; अविवेकः परमापदां पदम् 2.3; के वा न स्युः परिभवपदं निष्फलारम्भयत्नाः Me.56; संपदः पदमापदाम् H.4.65. -9 A quarter or line of a stanza, verse; विरचितपदम् (गेयम्) Me.88,15; M.5.2; Ś.3.14. -1 A complete or inflected word; सुप्तिडन्तं पदम् P.I. 4.14. वर्णाः पदं प्रयोगार्हानन्वितैकार्थबोधकाः S. D.9; R.8.77; Ku.4.9. -11 A name for the base of nouns before all consonantal case-terminations except nom. singular. -12 Detachment of the Vedic words from one another, separation of a Vedic text into its several constituent words; वेदैः साङ्गपदक्रमोपनिषदैर्गायन्ति यं सामगाः Bhāg.12.13.1. -13 A pretext; अनिभृतपदपातमापपात प्रियमिति कोपपदेन कापि सख्या Śi.7.14. -14 A sqare root. -15 A part, portion or division (as of a sentence); as त्रिपदा गायत्री. -16 A measure of length. -17 Protection, preservation; ते विंशतिपदे यत्ताः संप्रहारं प्रचक्रिरे Mb.7.36.13. -18 A square or house on a chessboard; अष्टापदपदालेख्यैः Rām. -19 A quadrant. -2 The last of a series. -21 A plot of ground. -22 (In Arith.) Any one in a set of numbers the sum of which is required. -23 A coin; माता पुत्रः पिता भ्राता भार्या मित्रजनस्तथा । अष्टापदपदस्थाने दक्षमुद्रेव लक्ष्यते ॥ Mb.12.298.4. (com. अष्टापदपदं सुवर्णकार्षापणः). -24 A way, road; षट्पदं नवसंख्यानं निवेशं चक्रिरे द्विजाः Mb.14.64.1. -25 Retribution (फल); ईहोपरमयोर्नॄणां पदान्यध्यात्मचक्षुषा Bhāg.7.13.2. -दः A ray of light. -Comp. -अङ्कः, चिह्नम् a foot-print. -अङ्गुष्ठः the great toe, thumb (of the foot). -अध्ययनम् study of the Vedas according to the पदपाठ q. v. -अनुग a. 1 following closely, being at the heels of (gen.). -2 suitable, agreeable to. (-गः) a follower, companion; एतान्निहत्य समरे ये चृ तस्य पदानुगाः । तांश्च सर्वान् विनिर्जित्य सहितान् सनराधिपान् ॥ Mb.3.12.6. -अनुरागः 1 a servant. -2 an army. -अनुशासनम् the science of words, grammar. -अनुषङ्गः anything added to a pada. -अन्तः 1 the end of a line of a stanza. -2 the end of a word. -अन्तरम् another step, the interval of one step; पदान्तरे स्थित्वा Ś.1; अ˚ closely, without a pause. -अन्त्य a. final. -अब्जम्, -अम्भोजम्, -अरविन्दम्, -कमलम्, -पङ्कजम्, -पद्मम् a lotus-like foot. -अभिलाषिन् a. wishing for an office. -अर्थः 1 the meaning of a word. -2 a thing or object. -3 a head or topic (of which the Naiyāyikas enumerate 16 subheads). -4 anything which can be named (अभिधेय), a category or predicament; the number of such categories, according to the Vaiśeṣikas, is seven; according to the Sāṅkhyas, twentyfive (or twenty-seven according to the followers of Patañjali), and two according to the Vedāntins. -5 the sense of another word which is not expressed but has to be supplied. ˚अनुसमयः preforming one detail with reference to all things or persons concerned; then doing the second, then the third and so on (see अनुसमय). Hence पदार्थानुसमयन्याय means: A rule of interpretation according to which, when several details are to be performed with reference to several things or persons, they should be done each to each at a time. -आघातः 'a stroke with the foot', a kick. -आजिः a foot-soldier. -आदिः 1 the beginning of the line of a stanza. -2 the beginning or first letter of a word. ˚विद् m. a bad student (knowing only the beginnings of stanzas). -आयता a shoe. -आवली a series of words, a continued arrangement of words or lines; (काव्यस्य) शरीरं तावदिष्टार्थव्यवच्छिन्नापदावली Kāv. 1.1; मधुरकोमलकान्तपदावलीं शृणु तदा जयदेवसरस्वतीम् Gīt.1. -आसनम् a foot-stool. -आहत a. kicked. -कमलम् lotus-like foot. -कारः, -कृत् m. the author of the Padapāṭha. -क्रमः 1 walking, a pace; न चित्रमुच्चैः श्रवसः पदक्रमम् (प्रशशंस) Śi.1.52. -2 a particular method of reciting the Veda; cf. क्रम. -गः a foot-soldier. -गतिः f. gait, manner of going. -गोत्रम् a family supposed to preside over a particular class of words. -छेदः, -विच्छेदः, -विग्रहः separation of words, resolution of a sentence into its constituent parts. -च्युत a. dismissed from office, deposed. -जातम् class or group of words. -दार्ढ्यम् fixedness or security of text. -न्यासः 1 stepping, tread, step. -2 a foot-mark. -3 position of the feet in a particular attitude. -4 the plant गोक्षुर. -5 writing down verses or quarters of verses; अप्रगल्भाः पदन्यासे जननीरागहेतवः । सन्त्येके बहुलालापाः कवयो बालका इव ॥ Trivikramabhaṭṭa. -पङ्क्तिः f. 1 a line of foot-steps; द्वारे$स्य पाण्डुसिकते पदपङ्क्तिर्दृश्यते$भिनवा Ś.3.7; V.4.6. -2 a line or arrangement of words, a series of words; कृतपदपङ्क्तिरथर्वणेव वेदः Ki.1.1. -3 an iṣtakā or sacred brick. -4 a kind of metre. -पाठः an arrangement of the Vedic text in which each word is written and pronounced in its original form and independently of phonetic changes (opp. संहितापाठ). -पातः, विक्षेपः a step, pace (of a horse also). -बन्धः a foot-step, step. -भञ्जनम् analysis of words, etymology. -भञ्जिका 1 a commentary which separates the words and analyses the compounds of a passage. -2 a register, journal. -3 a calendar. -भ्रंशः dismissal from office. -माला a magical formula. -योपनम् a fetter for the feet (Ved.). -रचना 1 arrangement of words. -2 literary composition. -वायः Ved. a leader. -विष्टम्भः a step, footstep. -वृत्तिः f. the hiatus between two words. -वेदिन् a linguist, philologist. -व्याख्यानम् interpretation of words. -शास्त्रम् the science of separately written words. -संघातः (टः) 1 connecting the words which are separated in the संहिता. -2 a writer, an annotator. -संधिः m. the euphonic combination of words. -स्थ a. 1 going on foot. -2 being in a position of authority or high rank. -स्थानम् a foot-print.

parāc	पराच् पराञ्च् a. (-ची f.) 1 Situated beyond or on the other side; ये चामुष्मात् पराञ्चो लोकाः Ch. Up; दिग्देश- कालवचनो हि पराक्शब्दो भवति ŚB. on MS.1.5.47. -2 Having the face turned away; आत्मीयास्ते ये पराञ्चः पुरस्तात् (पराङ्मुख); Śi.18.18. -3 Unfavourable, adverse; दैवे पराचि Bv.1.15; or दैवे पराग्वदनशालिनि हन्त जाते 3.1. -4 Distant. -5 Directed outwards; पराङ् पश्यति नान्तरात्मन् Kaṭh.2.1.1; Bhāg.8.19.9. -6 Turned away, averted. -7 Departing or returning from. -8 Inverted, reversed. -9 Not repeated; अनभ्यासे पराक्शब्दस्य तादर्थ्यात् MS.1.5.45; अनभ्यासे पराक्शब्दो वर्तते ŚB. On MS. 1.5.45. -n. The body; यदात्मानं पराग्गृह्य पशुवद्भूतवैशसम् Bhāg.4.11.1. -ind. 1 Away, off. -2 Outwards. -Comp. -दृश् a. having the eyes turned towards the outer world. -पुष्पः The कदम्ब tree. -पुष्पी The अपामार्ग. tree (Mar. आघाडा). -मुख a. (पराङ्मुख) 1 having the face turned away or averted, turning the back upon; विग्रहाच्च शयने पराङ्मुखीर्नानुनेतुमबलाः स तत्वरे R.19.38; Amaru.9; Ms.2.195;1.119. -2 (a) averse from; मातुर्न केवलं स्वस्याः श्रियो$प्यासीत् पराङ्मुखः R.12.13. (b) not disposed towards, shunning, avoiding; प्रवृत्तिपराङ्मुखो भावः V.4.2; Ś.5.28. -3 adverse, unfavourable; तनुरपि न ते दोषो$स्माकं विधिस्तु पराङ्मुखः Amaru.3. -4 not caring about, regardless of; मर्त्येष्वास्थापराङ्मुखः R.1.43. (-खः) a magical formula pronounced over weapons. -खम्, -मुखता, -मुखत्वम् Turning away, aversion.

pari	परि ind. (Sometimes changed to परी, as परिवाह or परीवाह, परिहास or परीहास) 1 As a prefix to verbs and nouns derived from them, it means (a) round, round about, about; (b) in addition to, further; (c) opposite to, against; (d) much, excessively. -2 As a separable preposition it means (a) towards, in the direction of, to, opposite to (with an acc.); वृक्षं परि विद्योतते विद्युत्; (b) successively, severally (with an acc.); वृक्षं वृक्षं परि सिञ्चति 'he waters tree after tree'; (c) to the share or lot of (showing भाग or participation) (with acc.); यदत्र मां परि स्यात् 'what may fall to my lot'; or लक्ष्मीर्हरिं परि Sk.; (d) from, out of; (e) expect, outside of, with the exception of (with abl.); परि त्रिगर्तेभ्यो वृष्टो देवः or पर्यनन्तात् त्रयस्तापाः Vop.; (f) after the lapse of; परि संवत्सरात् (g) in consequence of; (h) beyond, more than; भृत्याः परि चतुर्दश Mb.3.1.11 (com. अधिकचतुर्दशाः पञ्चदशेत्यर्थः; (i) according to, in accordance with; (j) above, over. -3 As an adverbial prefix to nouns not directly connected with verbs, it means 'very', 'very much, 'excessively'; as in पर्यश्रु 'bursting into tears'; so परिचतुर्दशन्, परिदौर्बल्य. -4 At the beginning of adverbial compounds परि means (a) without, except, outside, with the exception of; as in परित्रिगर्तं वृष्टो दिवः P.II.1.12; VI.2.33. (According to P.II. 1.1. परि may be used at the end of adverbial comp. after अक्ष, शलाका, and a numeral to denote loss or defeat in a game by an unlucky or adverse cast of dice' (द्यूतव्यवहारे पराजये एवायं समासः) e. g. अक्षपरि, शलाका- परि, एकपरि; cf. अक्षपरि; (b) round about, all round, surrounded by; as in पर्यग्नि 'in the midst of flames'. -5 At the end of an adjectival comp. परि has the sense of 'exhausted by', or 'feeling repugnance for'; as in पर्यध्ययनः = परिग्लानो$ध्ययनाय.

parikaraḥ	परिकरः 1 Retinue, train, attendants, followers. -2 A multitude, collection, crowd; संध्याकृष्टावशिष्टस्वकर- परिकरस्पृष्टहेमारपङ्क्तिः Ratn.3.5. -3 A beginning, commencement; गतानामारम्भः किसलयितलीलापरिकरः Bh.1.6. -4 A girth, waist-band, cloth worn round the loins; अहिपरिकरभाजः Śi.4.65; परिकरं बन्ध् or कृ 'to gird up one's loins, to make oneself ready, prepare oneself for any action'; बध्नन् सवेगं परिकरम् K.17; कृतपरिकरः कर्मसु जनः Śivamahimna 2; कृतपरिकरस्य भवादृशस्य त्रैलोक्यमपि न क्षमं परिपन्थीभवितुम् Ve.3; G. L.47; बद्धो मानपरिग्रहे परिकरः सिद्धिस्तु दैवे स्थिता Amaru.97; U.5.12. -5 A sofa. -6 (in Rhet.) N. of a figure of speech which consists in the use of significant epithets; विशेषणैर्यत् साकूतैरुक्तिः परिकरस्तु सः K. P.1; e. g. सुधांशुकलितोत्तंसस्तापं हरतु वः शिवः Chandr.5.59. -7 (In dramaturgy) Covet or indirect intimation of coming events in the plot or a drama, the germ or the बीज q. v; see S. D.34. -8 Judgment. -9 A helper, colleague, co-worker.

parijman	परिज्मन् a. Ved. 1 Running or walking round. -2 Omnipresent. -m. 1 The moon. -2 Fire.

parijri	परिज्रि a. Running round.

paridhāvin	परिधाविन् a. Running round. -m. N. of a year (संवत्सर), the 46th of the 6 years cycle.

parisaraṇam	परिसरणम् Running about. परि(री)सर्या, परि(री)सारः Wandering or moving about, perambulation.

parisarpaṇam	परिसर्पणम् 1 Walking or creeping about; युधिष्ठिर- स्तत् परिसर्पणं बुधः पुरे च राष्ट्रे च गृहे तदात्मनि. -2 Running to and fro, flying about, constantly moving; पतगपतेः परिसर्पणे च तुल्यः Mk.3.21.

pariharaṇam	परिहरणम् 1 Leaving, quitting, abandoning. -2 Avoiding, shunning. -3 Refuting. -4 Seizing, taking away. -5 Ved. Carrying or placing round.

pari	परि (री) हारः 1 Leaving, quitting, giving up, abandoning. -2 Removing, taking away; as in विरोध- परिहार; तेषां गुप्तिपरीहारैः कच्चित्ते भरणं कृतम् Rām.2.1.48. -3 Shunning, avoiding. -4 Refuting, repelling. -5 Omitting to mention, omission, leaving out. -6 Resrve, concealment. -7 A tract of common land round a village or town; धनुःशतं परीहारो ग्रामस्य स्यात् समन्ततः Ms.8. 237. -8 A special grant, immunity, privilege, exemption from taxes; प्रदद्यात् परिहारांश्च Ms.7.21; अनुग्रहपरि- हारौ चैभ्यः कोशवृद्धिकरौ दद्यात् Kau. A.2.1.19. Hence ˚लेखः a writ of remission as a favour; तथा परीहारनिसृष्टिलेखौ Kau. A.2.1.28; cf. जाते विशेषेषु परेषु चैव, ग्रामेषु देशेषु च तेषु तेषु । अनुग्रहो यो नृपतेर्निदेशात्, तज्ज्ञः परीहार इति व्यवस्येत् ॥ Kau. A.2.1.28. -9 Contempt, disrespect -1 An objection. -11 Seizing, keeping back. -12 Bounty. -13 (In gram.) The repetition of a word before and after इति; cf. परिग्रह. -14 (In dram.) Atoning for any improper action. -Comp. -विशुद्धिः (with Jainas) purification by mortification and penance. -सू (a cow) bearing a calf only after a long time.

parihṛtiḥ	परिहृतिः f. Avoiding, shunning.

paryāsita	पर्यासित a. Thrown down, annihilated; परैरपर्यासित- वीर्यसंपदां पराभवो$प्युत्सव एव मानिनाम् Ki.1.41; Māl.5.23.

palāyanam	पलायनम् 1 Running away, retreat, flight, escape; युद्धे चाप्यपलायनम् (क्षत्रकर्म स्वभावजम्) Bg.18.43; R.19.31. -2 A saddle.

palāyin	पलायिन् a. Fleeing, running away, a fugitive.

pāṭavika	पाटविक a. (-की f.) 1 Clever, sharp, skilful; रणे रभसनिर्भिन्नद्विपपाटविकासिनि । न तत्र गतभीः कश्चिद् विपपाट विकासिनि ॥ Śi.19.56. -2 Cunning, fraudulent, crafty.

pātraṭīraḥ	पात्रटीरः 1 A competent minister. -2 A vessel of iron, brass or silver. -3 Fire. -4 A crow. -5 A heron. -6 Rust of iron. -7 Mucus running from the nose. पात्रता pātratā पात्रत्वम् pātratvam पात्रता पात्रत्वम् 1 Capacity, worthiness. -2 Dignity, honour.

pāpa	पाप a. [पाति रक्षत्यस्मादात्मानम्, पा-अपादाने प; Uṇ.3.23] 1 Evil, sinful, wicked, vicious; पापं कर्म च यत् परैरपि कृतं तत् तस्य संभाव्यते Mk.1.36; साधुष्वपि च पापेषु समबुद्धि- र्विशिष्यते Bg.6.9. -2 Mischievous, destructive, accursed; पापेन मृत्युना गृहीतो$स्मि M.4. -3 Low, vile, abandoned; Ms.3.52; अधार्मिकाणां पापानामाशु पश्यन् विपर्ययम् 4.171. -4 Inauspicious, malignant, foreboding evil; as in पापग्रहः. -पम् 1 Evil, bad fortune or state; पापं पापाः कथयथ कथं शौर्यराशेः पितुर्मे Ve.3.6; शान्तं पापम् 'may the evil be averted', 'god forbid' (often used in dramas). -2 Sin, crime, vice, guilt; अपापानां कुले जाते मयि पापं न विद्यते Mk.9.37; Ms.11.231;4 181; R.12.19. -पम् ind. badly, sinfully, wrongly. -पः A wretch, sinful person, wicked or profligate person; पापस्तु दिग्देवतया हतौजास्तं नाभ्यभूदवितं विष्णुपत्न्या Bhāg.6.13.17. -पा 1 A beast of prey. -2 A witch. -Comp. -अङ्कुशा N. of the Ekādaśī in the light half of Āśvina. -अधम a. exceedingly wicked, vilest. -अनुबन्धः bad result or consequences. -अनुवसित a. sinful. -अपनुत्तिः f. expiation. -अहः an unlucky day. -आख्या one of the seven divisions of the planetary courses. -आचार a. following evil or sinful courses, leading a sinful life, vicious, wicked. -आत्मन् a. evil-minded, sinful, wicked; पापात्मा पापसंभवः Purāna. (-m.) a sinner. -आरम्भ a. wicked, villainous, committing murderous deeds; पापारम्भवतोर्मृगीव वृकयोर्भीरुर्गता गोचरम् Māl.5.24. -आशय, -चेतस् a. evil-intentioned, wicked-minded. -उक्त addressed in ill-omened words. -कर, -कारिन्, -कृत्, -कर्म(र्मि)न् &c. a. sinful, a sinner, villain. -क्षयः removal or destruction of sin. -गतिः ill-fated. -ग्रहः a planet of evil or malignant aspect, such as Mars, Saturn, Rāhu or Ketu. -घ्न a. destroying sin, expiating; मत्समः पातकी नास्ति पापघ्नी त्वत्समा न हि Śaṅkarāchārya. (-घ्नः) the sesamum plant. (-घ्नी) the Tulasī plant. -चर्यः 1 a sinner. -2 demon. -चेलिका, -चेली Clypea Hernandifolia (Mar. पहाडमूळ). -चैलम् an inauspicious garment. -जीव a. wicked, sinful. -दर्शन्, -दर्शिन् looking at faults, malevolent. -दृष्टि a. evileyed. -धी a. evil-minded, wicked. -नक्षत्रम् an inauspicious constellation. -नापितः a cunning or vile barber. -नाशन a. destroying or expiating sin. (-नः) 1 N. of Śiva. -2 of Viṣṇu. (-नम्) expiation, atonement. (-नी, -नाशिनी) 1 the wild Tulasī plant or Śamī. -2 N. of a river. -निरति a. wicked, sinful. -f. wickedness. -निष्कृतिः atonement for sin. -पतिः a paramour. -पुरुषः a villainous person. -फल a. evil, inauspicious; पापफल- नरकादिमांस्तु शुभकर्मफलस्वर्गमस्त्विति काङ्क्षते Maṅḍala Brā. Up.2.4. -बुद्धि, -भाव, -मति a. evil-minded, wicked, depraved. -भक्षणः N. of Kālabhairava. -भाज् a. sinful, a sinner; न केवलं यो महतो$पभाषते शृणोति तस्मादपि यः स पापभाक् Ku.5.83. -मित्रम् a bad counsellor or friend. -मुक्त a. freed from sin, purified. -मोचनम्, -विनाशनम् destruction of sin. -योनि a. lowborn. (-निः f.) vile birth, birth in an inferior condition. -रोगः 1 any bad disease. -2 small-pox. -लोक्य a. 1 infernal. -2 belonging to the wicked. -वशीयस् a. 1 inverted -2 confused. (-m.) inversion, confusion. -वंश a. born in a degraded family; शशाप तान् न राज्यार्हाः पापवंशा भविष्यथ Bm.1.349. -विनिग्रहः restraining wickedness. -शमन a. removing crime. -शील a. prone to evil, wicked by nature, evil minded. -संकल्प a. evil-minded, wicked. (-ल्पः) a wicked thought. -हन् a. destroying sin; यत्र श्यामो लोहिताक्षो दण्डश्चरति पापहा । प्रजास्तत्र न मुह्यन्ति नेता चेत् साधु पश्यति ॥ Ms.7.25.

pitṛ	पितृ m. [पाति रक्षति, पा-तृच् नि˚] A father; तेनास लोकः पितृमान् विनेत्रा R.14.23;1.24;11.67. -रौ (dual) Parents, father and mother; जगतः पितरौ वन्दे पार्वतीपरमे- श्वरौ R.1.1; Y.2.117. -रः (pl.) -1 Fore-fathers, ancestors, fathers; नूनं प्रसूतिविकलेन मया प्रसिक्तं धौताश्रुशेष- मुदकं पितरः पिबन्ति Ś.6.24. -2 Paternal ancestors taken collectively; अध्यापयामास पितॄन् शिशुराङ्गिरसः कविः Ms.2.151. -3 The Manes; R.2.16;3.2; पितॄणामर्यमा चास्मि Bg. 1.29; Ms.3.81,192. -Comp. -अर्जित a. acquired by a father, paternal (as property). -कर्मन् n., -कार्यम्, -कृत्यम्, -क्रिया oblations or sacrifice offerd to deceased ancestors, obsequial rites; स्वधाकारः परा ह्याशीः सर्वेषु पितृकर्मसु Ms.3.252. -कल्पः 1 performance of the Śrāddha ceremony in honour of the Manes. -2 Brahma's day of new moon. -काननम् a cemetery; अभ्यभावि भरताग्रजस्तया वात्य- येव पितृकाननोत्थया R.11.16. -कुल्या N. of a river rising in the Malaya mountain. -क्षयः the death anniversary; आनन्त्याय भवेद् दत्तं खड्गमांसं पितृक्षये Mb.13.88.1. -गणः 1 the whole body of ancestors taken collectively. -2 a class of Manes or deceased progenitors who were sons of the Prajāpati; मनोर्हैरण्यगर्भस्य ये मरीच्यादयः सुताः । तेषा- मृषीणां सर्वेषां पुत्राः पितृगणाः स्मृताः ॥ विराट्सुताः सोमसदः साध्यानां पितरः स्मृताः । अग्निष्वात्ताश्च देवानां मारीचा लोकविश्रुताः ॥ Ms.3. 194-195. -गणा N. of of Durgā. -गामिन् a. devolving on, or belonging to a father. -गृहम् 1 a paternal mansion. -2 a cemetery, burial-ground. -घातकः, -घातिन्, -घ्नः m. a parricide. -तर्पणम् 1 an oblation to the Manes. -2 the act of throwing water out of the right hand (as at the time of ablutions) as an offering to the Manes or deceased ancestors; नित्यं स्नात्वा शुचिः कुर्याद् देवर्षिपितृतर्पणम् Ms.2.176. -3 sesamum. -4 gifts given at Srāddhas or funeral rites. -5 the part of the hand between the thumb and the fore-finger (sacred to the Manes). -तिथिः f. the day of new-moon (अमावास्या). -तीर्थम् 1 N. of the place called Gayā where the performance of funeral rites, such as Srāddhas in honour of the Manes, is held to be particularly meritorious. -2 the part of the hand between the fore-finger and the thumb (considered to be sacred to the Manes). -त्रयम् father, grand-father and great grand-father. -दत्त a. given by a father (as a woman's peculiar property). -दानम् an offering to the Manes. -दायः patrimony. -दिनम् the day of new-moon (अमावास्या). -देव a. 1 worshipping a father. -2 relating to the worship of the Manes. (-वाः) the divine Manes. -दे(दै)वत a. 1 presided over by the Manes. -2 relating to the worship of the Manes. (-तम्) N. of the tenth lunar mansion (मघा). -दे(दै)वत्य a. belonging to the worship of the Manes. (-त्यम्) a sacrifice offered to the Manes on the day called अष्टका; अष्टकापितृदेवत्यमित्ययं प्रसृतो जनः Rām.2.18.14. -द्रव्यम् patrimony; पितृद्रव्याविरोधेन यदन्यत् स्वयमर्जितम् Y.2.118. -पक्षः 1 the paternal side, paternal relationship. -2 a relative by the father's side. -3 'the fortnight of the Manes'; N. of the dark half of Bhādrapada which is particularly appointed for the celebration of obsequial rites to the Manes. -पतिः an epithet of Yama. -पदम् the world of the Manes. -पितृ m. a paternal grandfather. -पुत्रौ (पिता-पुत्रौ dual) father and son. (पितुः पुत्रः means 'the son of a well-known and renowned father'). -पूजनम् worship of the manes; पतिव्रता धर्म- पत्नी पितृपूजनतत्परा Ms.3.262. -पैतामह a. (-ही f.) inherited from ancestors, ancestral, hereditary. (-हाः pl.) ancestors. -प्रसूः f. 1 a paternal grand-mother. -2 evening twilight; तारावलीराजतबिन्दुराजत् पितृप्रसूभासुरपत्रपाश्यः, वियद्द्विपस्तिष्ठति Rām. Ch.6.38. -प्राप्त a. 1 inherited from a father. -2 inherited patrimonially. -बन्धुः a kinsman by the father's side; they are:- पितुः पितुःस्वसुः पुत्राः पितुर्मातुःस्वसुः सुताः । पितुर्मातुलपुत्राश्च विज्ञेयाः पितृबन्धवः ॥ (न्धुम् n.) relationship by the father's side. -भम् The Maghā star; Śabda Ch. -भक्त a. dutifully attached to a father. भक्तिः f. filial duty. -भोजनम् food offered to the Manes. -भ्रातृ m. a father's brother, paternal uncle. -मन्दिरम् 1 a paternal mansion. -2 a cemetery. -मेधः a sacrifice offered to the Manes, obsequial offerings; गुरोः प्रेतस्य शिष्यस्तु पितृमेधं समाचरन् Ms.5.65; Mb.16.7.23. -यज्ञः 1 obsequial offerings. -2 offering libations of water every day to the deceased ancestors, it is one of the five daily Yajñas enjoined to be performed by a Brāhmaṇa; पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् Ms.3.1; also 122,283. -यानम् the way of the Manes (to their world). -राज् m., -राजः, -राजन् m. an epithet of Yama. -रूपः an epithet of Siva. -लोकः the world of the Manes. -वंशः the paternal family. -वनम् 1 a cemetery; वसन् पितृवने रौद्रे शौचे वर्तितुमिच्छसि Mb.12.111.9. -2 death, the abode of death; सर्वे पितृवनं प्राप्य स्वपन्ति विगतज्वराः Mb.11.3.5. (पितृवनेचरः 1 a demon, goblin. -2 an epithet of Śiva). -वसतिः f., -सद्मन् n. a cemetery; त्रिलोकनाथः पितृसद्मगोचरः Ku.5.77. -वासरपर्वन् the period of performing the obsequious rites for the Manes; Gaṇeśa P.2. -व्रतः a worshipper of the Manes. (-तम्) obsequial rites. -श्राद्धम् obsequial rites in honour of a father or deceased ancestor. -स्वसृ f. (also पितृष्वसृ as well as पितुः स्वसृ or पितुःष्वसृ) a father's sister; Ms.2.131. -ष्वस्रीयः a paternal aunt's son. -संनिभः a. fatherly, paternal. -सूः 1 a paternal grandmother. -2 evening twilight. -स्थानः, -स्थानीयः a guardian (who is in the place of a father). -नम् The abode of death; see पितृवन; आनिन्यथुः पितृस्थानाद् गुरवे गुरुदक्षिणाम् Bhāg.1.85.32. -हत्या parricide. -हन् m. a parricide. -हू m. the right ear; पितृहूर्नृप पुर्या द्वार्दक्षिणेन पुरञ्जनः Bhāg.4.25.5.

pipīlikā	पिपीलिका A female ant; मणिमयमन्दिरमध्ये पश्यति पिपीलिका छिद्रम्. -Comp. -परिसर्पणम् the running about of ants. -मध्य a. N. of a kind of fast; cf. Kull. on Ms.11.216. पिप्पटा (-डा) 1 A kind of sweetmeat. -2Sugar.

piśitam	पिशितम् [पिश्-क्त; Uṇ.3.95] 1 Flesh; कुत्रापि नापि खलु हा पिशितस्य लेशः Bv.1.15; R.7.5. -2 A small piece or part. -Comp. -अशनः, -आशः, -आशिन्, -भुज् m. 1 flesh-eater, a demon, goblin; (छायाः) संध्यापयोद- कपिशाः पिशिताशनानां चरन्ति Ś.3.26; Mb.3.142.37. -2 a man-eater, cannibal. -3 a wolf. -पिण्डः a piece of flesh. -प्ररोहः a fleshy excrescence.

puth	पुथ् I. 4 P. (पुथ्यति) To injure, hurt. -Caus. 1 To destroy completely, annihilate. -2 To over power, drown (as a sound). -3 To speak. -4 To shine. -II. 1 U. (पोथयति-ते) To shine.

purastāt	पुरस्तात् ind. 1 Before, in front of (oft. with gen. or abl.); गुरोरपीदं धनमाहिताग्नेर्नश्यत् पुरस्तादनुपेक्षणीयम् R.2.44; Ku.7.3; Me.15; or used by itself; अभ्युन्नता पुरस्तात् Ś.3.7. -2 At the head of, foremost; यः पुरस्ताद् यतीनाम् M.1.1. -3 In the first place, at the beginning; पुरस्ताद् दारुणो भूत्वा Mb.12.152.2. -4 Formerly, previously. -5 Eastward, in or towards the east; द्यां निरुन्धदतिनील- घनाभं ध्वान्तमुद्यतकरेण पुरस्तात् Ki.9.2. -6 Later or further on, in the sequel.

puru	पुरु a. (-रु -र्वी f.) [पृ-पालनपोषणयोः कु; Uṇ.1.24] Much, abundant, excessive, many; (in classical literature पुरु occurs usually at the beginning of proper names); इन्द्रो मायाभिः पुरुरूप ईयते Bṛi. Up.2.5.19; स्त्रीणां प्रियतमो नित्यं मत्तस्तु पुरुलम्पटः Bhāg.7.15.7. -रुः 1 The pollen of flowers. -2 Heaven, the world of the immortals. -3 N. of a demon killed by Indra. -4 N. of a prince, the sixth monarch of the lunar race. [He was the youngest son of Yayāti and Śarmiṣṭhā. When Yayāti asked his five sons if any one of them would exchange his youth and beauty for his own decrepitude and infirmities, it was Puru alone who consented to make the exchange. After a thousand years Yayāti restored to Puru his youth and beauty and made him successor to the throne. Puru was the ancestor of the Kauravas and Pāṇḍavas.] -ind. 1 Much, exceedingly. -2 Repeatedly, often. -Comp. -कृत, -कृत्वन् a. efficacious. -जित् m. 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 N. of king Kuntibhoja of his brother. -दम् gold. -दंशकः a goose. -दंश (-स) -सा, -दत्रः, -द्रुह् m. epithets of Indra (Ved.). -निष्ठ a. excelling among many. -प्रौढ a. possessing much self-confidence. -भोजस् m. a cloud. -लम्पट a. very lustful or lascivious. -ह, -हु much, many. -हूत a. invoked by many; प्रादुश्चकर्थ यदिदं पुरुहूतरूपम् Bhāg.3.15.5. (-तः) an epithet of Indra; पुरुहूतध्वजः R.4.3;16.5; पुरुहूतमुख्याः (लोकपालाः) Ku.7.45. Ms.11.122. ˚द्विष् m. an epithet of Indrajit. -हूतिः m. an epithet of Viṣṇu. -f. manifold invocation.

puruṣaḥ	पुरुषः [पुरि देहे शेते शी-ड पृषो˚ Tv.; पुर्-अग्रगमने कुषन् Uṇ. 4.74] 1 A male being, man; अर्थतः पुरुषो नारी या नारी सार्थतः पुमान् Mk.3.27; Ms.1.32;7.17;9.2; R.2.41. -2 Men, mankind. -3 A member or representative of a generation. -4 An officer, functionary, agent, attendant, servant. -5 The height or measure of a man (considered as a measure of length); द्वौ पुरुषौ प्रमाणमस्य सा द्विपुरुषा-षी परिखा Sk. -6 The soul; द्वाविमौ पुरुषौ लोके क्षरश्चाक्षर एव च Bg.15.16 &c. -7 The Supreme Being, God (soul of the universe); पुरातनं त्वां पुरुषं पुराविदः (विदुः) Śi.1.33; R.13.6. -8 A person (in grammar); प्रथम- पुरुषः the third person, मध्यमपुरुषः the second person, and उत्तमपुरुषः the first person, (this is the strict order in Sk.). -9 The pupil of the eye. -1 (In Sāṅ. phil.) The soul (opp. प्रकृति); according to the Sāṅkhyas it is neither a production nor productive; it is passive and a looker-on of the Prakṛiti; cf. त्वामामनन्ति प्रकृतिं पुरुषार्थप्रवर्तिनीम् Ku.2.13 and the word सांख्य also. -11 The soul, the original source of the universe (described in the पुरुषसूक्त); सहस्रशीर्षः पुरुषः सहस्राक्षः सहस्रपात् &c. -12 The Punnāga tree. -13 N. of the first, third, fifth, seventh, ninth, and eleventh signs of the zodiac. -14 The seven divine or active principles of which the universe was formed; तेषामिदं तु सप्तानां पुरुषाणां महौजसाम् Ms.1.19. -षी A woman. -षम् An epithet of the mountain Meru. -Comp. -अङ्गम् the male organ of generation. -अदः, -अद् m. 'a man-eater', cannibal, goblin; अवमेने हि दुर्बुद्धिर्मनुष्यान् पुरुषादकः Mb.3.275.27. -अधमः the vilest of men, a very low or despicable man. -अधिकारः 1 a manly office or duty. -2 calculation or estimation of men; संसत्सु जाते पुरुषाधिकारे न पूरणी तं समुपैति संख्या Ki.3.51. -अन्तरम् another man. -अयणः, -अर्थः 1 any one of the four principal objects of human life; i. e. धर्म अर्थ, काम and मोक्ष. -2 human effort or exertion (पुरुषकार); धर्मार्थकाममोक्षाश्च पुरुषार्था उदाहृताः Agni P.; H. Pr.35. -3 something which when done results in the satisfaction of the performer; यस्मिन् कृते पदार्थे पुरुषस्य प्रीतिर्भवति स पुरुषार्थः पदार्थः ŚB. on MS.4.1.2. -अस्थिमालिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -आद्यः 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 a demon. -आयुषम्, -आयुस् n. the duration of a man's life; अकृपणमतिः कामं जीव्याज्जनः पुरुषायुषम् Ve.6.44; पुरुषायुषजीविन्यो निरातङ्का निरीतयः R.1. 63. -आशिन् m. 'a man-eater', a demon, goblin. -इन्द्रः a king. -उत्तमः 1 an excellent man. -2 the highest or Supreme Being, an epithet of Viṣṇu or Kṛiṣṇa; यस्मात् क्षरमतीतो$हमक्षरादपि चोत्तमः । अतो$स्मि लोके वेदे च प्रथितः पुरुषोत्तमः ॥ Bg.15.18. -3 a best attendant. -4 a Jaina. -5 N. of a district in Orissa sacred to Viṣṇu. -कारः 1 human effort or exertion, manly act, manliness, prowess (opp. दैव); एवं पुरुषकारेण विना दैवं न सिध्यति H. Pr.32; दैवे पुरुषकारे च कर्मसिद्धिर्व्यवस्थिता Y.1.349; cf. 'god helps those who help themselves'; अभिमतसिद्धिर- शेषा भवति हि पुरुषस्य पुरुषकारेण Pt.5.3; Ki.5.52. -2 manhood, virility. -3 haughtiness, pride. -कुणपः, -पम् a human corpse. -केसरिन् m. man-lion, an epithet of Viṣṇu. in his fourth incarnation; पुरुषकेसरिणश्च पुरा नखैः Ś.7.3. -ज्ञानम् knowledge of mankind; Ms.7.211. -तन्त्र a. subjective. -दध्न, -द्वयस् a. of the height of a man. -द्विष् m. an enemy of Viṣṇu. -द्वेषिणी an illtempered woman (who hates her husband). -नाथः 1 a general, commander. -2 a king. -नियमः (in gram.) a restriction to a person. -पशुः a beast of a man, brutish person; cf. नरपशु. -पुङ्गवः, -पुण्डरीकः a superior or eminent man. -पुरम् N. of the capital of Gāndhāra, q. v. -बहुमानः the esteem of mankind; निवृत्ता भोगेच्छा पुरुषबहुमानो विगलितः Bh.3.9. -मानिन् a. fancying oneself a hero; कथं पुरुषमानी स्यात् पुरुषाणां मयि स्थिते Rām.2.24.35. -मेधः a human sacrifice. -वरः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -वर्जित a. desolate. -वाहः 1 an epithet of Garuḍa. -2 an epithet of Kubera. -व्याघ्रः -शार्दूलः, -सिंहः 'a tiger or lion among men', a distinguished or eminent man. उद्योगिनं पुरुषसिंहमुपैति लक्ष्मीः H. -2 a hero, brave man. -समवायः a number of men. -शीर्षकः A kind of weapon used by burglars (a sham head to be inserted into the hole made in a wall); Dk.2.2. -सारः an eminent man; Bhāg.1.16.7. -सूक्तम् N. of the 9th hymn of the 1th Maṇḍala of the Ṛigveda (regarded as a very sacred hymn).

pūrva	पूर्व a. (Declined like a pronoun when it implies relative position in time or space, but optionally so in nom. pl.; and abl. and loc. sing.) 1 Being in front of, first, foremost. -2 Eastern, easterly, to the east of; ग्रामात् पर्वतः पूर्वः Sk.; पूर्वापरौ तोयनिधी वगाह्य Ku.1.1. -3 Previous to, earlier than; ब्राह्मणे साहसः पूर्वः Ms.8.276. -4 Old, ancient; पूर्वसूरिभिः R.1.4; इदं कविभ्यः पूर्वेभ्यो नमोवाकं प्रशास्महे U.1.1. -5 Former, previous, anterior, prior, antecedent (opp. उत्तर); in this sense often at the end of comp. and translated by 'formerly.' or 'before'; श्रुतपूर्व &c.; व्यतीता या निशा पूर्वा पौराणां हर्षवर्धिनी Rām.7.37.1. -6 Aforesaid, before-mentioned. -7 Initial. -8 Established, customary, of long standing -9 Early, prime, पूर्वे वयसि Pt.1.165 'in early age or prime of life. -1 Elder (ज्येष्ठ); रामः पूर्वो हि नो भ्राता भविष्यति महीपतिः Rām.2.79.8. -11 (At the end of comp.) Preceded by, accompanied by, attended with; संबन्धमा भाषणपूर्वमाहुः R.2.58; पुण्यः शब्दो मुनिरिति मुहुः केवलं राजपूर्वः Ś2.17; तान् स्मितपूर्वमाह Ku.7.47; बहुमानपूर्वया 5.31; दशपूर्वरथं यमाख्यया दशकण्ठारिगुरुं विदुर्बुधाः R.8.29; so मतिपूर्वम् Ms.11.147 'intentionally', 'knowingly'; 12.89; अबोधपूर्वम् 'unconsciously', Ś.5.2. &c. -र्वः An ancestor, a forefather; पूर्वैः किलायं परिवर्धितो नः R.13.3; पयः पूर्वैः सनिश्वासैः कवोष्णमुपभुज्यते 1.67;5.14; अनुकारिणि पूर्वेषां युक्तरूपमिदं त्वयि Ś.2.17. -र्वम् The forepart; अनवरतधनुर्ज्यास्फालनक्रूरपूर्वम् (गात्रम्) Ś.2.4. -र्वा 1 The east -2 N. of a country to the east of Madhyadeśa. -र्वम् ind. 1 Before (with abl.); मासात् पूर्वम्. -2 Formerly, previously, at first, antecedently, beforehand; तं पूर्वमभिवादयेत् Ms.2.117;3.94;8.25;; R. 12.35; प्रणिपातपूर्वम् K; भूतपूर्वखरालयम् U.2.17 'which formerly was the abode', &c.; समयपूर्वम् Ś.5. 'after a formal agreement.' -3 Immemorially. (पूर्वेण 'in front', 'before', 'to the east of', with gen. or acc.; अद्य पूर्वम् 'till-now', 'hitherto'; पूर्वः -ततः -पश्चात् -उपरि 'firstthen, first-afterwards', 'previously, subsequently', पूर्वम् -अधुना or -अद्य 'formerly-now.' -Comp. -अग्निः the sacred fire kept in the house (आवसथ्य). -अङ्गः the first day in the civil month. -अचलः, -अद्रिः the eastern mountain behind which the sun and moon are supposed to rise. -अधिकारिन् m. the first occupant, a prior owner. -अन्तः the end of a preceding word. -अपर a. 1 eastern and western; कतमो$यं पूर्वापर- समुद्रावगाढः सानुमानालोक्यते Ś.7; पूर्वापरौ तोयनिधी वगाह्य Ku. 1.1. -2 first and last. -3 prior and subsequent, preceding and following. -4 connected with another. (-रम्) 1 what is before and behind. -2 connection; न च पूर्वापरं विद्यात् Ms.8.56. -3 the proof and the thing to be proved. ˚विरोधः inconsistency, incongruity. -अभि- मुख a. turned towards or facing the east. -अभ्यासः former practice or experience. -अम्बुधिः the eastern ocean. -अर्जित a. attained by former works. (-तम्) ancestral property. -अर्धः, -र्धम् 1 the first half; दिनस्य पूर्वार्धपरार्धभिन्ना छायेव मैत्री खलसज्जनानाम् Bh.2.6; समाप्तं पूर्वार्धम् &c. -2 the upper part (of the body); शकुन्तला पूर्वार्धेन शयनादुत्थाय Ś.3; R.16.6. -3 the first half of a hemistich. -अवसायिन् a. what occurs first or earlier; पूर्वावसायिनश्च बलीयांसो जघन्यावसायिभ्यः ŚB. on MS.12.2.34. -अह्णः the earlier part of the day, forenoon; Ms.4. 96,152. श्वः कार्यमद्य कुर्वीत पूर्वाह्णे चापराह्णिकम् (पूर्वाह्णतन, पूर्वा- ह्णिकः, पूर्वाह्णेतन a. relating to the forenoon). -आवेदकः a plaintiff. -आषाढा N. of the 2th lunar mansion consisting of two stars. -इतर a. western. -उक्त, -उदित a. beforementioned, aforesaid, -उत्तर a. north-eastern. (-रा) the north-east. (-रे dual) the preceding and following, antecedent and subsequent. -कर्मन् n. 1 a former act or work. -2 the first thing to be done, a prior work. -3 actions done in a former life. -4 preparations, preliminary arrangements. -कल्पः former times. -कायः 1 the fore-part of the body of animals; पश्चार्धेन प्रविष्टः शरपतनभयाद् भूयसा पूर्वकायम् Ś.1.7. -2 the upper part of the body of men; स्पृशन् करेणानतपूर्वकायम् R.5.32; पर्यङ्कबन्धस्थिरपूर्वकायम् Ku.3.45. -काल a. belonging to ancient times. (-लः) former or ancient times. -कालिक, -कालीन a. ancient. -काष्ठा the east, eastern quarter. -कृत a. previously done. (-तम्) an act done in a former life. -कोटिः f. the starting point of a debate, the first statement or पूर्वपक्ष q. v. -क्रिया preparation. -गा N. of the river Godāvarī. -गङ्गा N. of the river Narmadā; रेवेन्दुजा पूर्वगङ्गा नर्मदा मेकलीद्रिजा Abh. Chin.183. -चोदित a. 1 aforesaid, above-mentioned. -2 previously stated or advanced (as an objection. -ज a. 1 born or produced before or formerly, first-produced, first-born; यमयोः पूर्वजः पार्थः Mb.3.141. 11. -2 ancient, old. -3 eastern. (-जः) 1 an elder brother; अपहाय महीशमार्चिचत् सदसि त्वां ननु भामपूर्वजः; Śi. 16.44; R.15.36. -2 the son of the elder wife. -3 an ancestor, a forefather; स पूर्वजानां कपिलेन रोषात् R.16.34. -4 (pl.) the progenitors of mankind. -5 the manes living in the world of the moon. (-जा) an elder sister. -जन्मन् n. a former birth. (-m.) an elder brother; स लक्ष्मणं लक्ष्मणपूर्वजन्मा (विलोक्य) R.14.44.;15.95. -जातिः f. a former birth. -ज्ञानम् knowledge of a former life. -तापनीयम् N. of the first half of नृसिंहतापनीयोपनिषद्. -दक्षिण a. south-eastern. (-णा) the south-east. -दिक्पतिः Indra, the regent of the east. -दिनम् the forenoon. -दिश् f. the east. -दिश्य a. situated towards the east, eastern. -दिष्टम् the award of destiny. -दृष्ट a. 1 primæval. -2 declared by the ancients; यथा ब्राह्मण- चाण्डालः पूर्वदृष्टस्तथैव सः Ms.9.87. -देवः 1 an ancient deity. -2 a demon or Asura; भूमिदेवनरदेवसंगमे पूर्वदेवरिपुरर्हणां हरिः Śi.14.58. -3 a progenitor (पितृ). -4 (du.) an epithet of Nara-Nārāyaṇa; सव्यसाचिन् महाबाहो पूर्वदेव सनातन Mb.3. 41.35. (com. पूर्वदेव नरनारायणसख). -देवता a progenitor (पितृ) of gods or of men; अक्रोधनाः शौचपराः सततं ब्रह्म- चारिणः । न्यस्तशस्त्रा महाभागाः पितरः पूर्वदेवताः ॥ Ms.3.192. -देशः the eastern country, or the eastern part of India. -द्वार a. favourable in the eastern region. -निपातः the irregular priority of a word in a compound; cf. परनिपात. -निमित्त an omen. -निविष्ट a. made formerly, in past; यस्तु पूर्वनिविष्टस्य तडागस्योदकं हरेत् Ms.9.281. -पक्षः 1 the fore-part or side. -2 the first half of a lunar month; सर्वं पूर्वपक्षापरपक्षाभ्यामभिपन्नम् Bṛi. Up.3.1.5. -3 the first part of an argument, the prima facie argument or view of a question; विषयो विशयश्चैव पूर्वपक्षस्तथोत्तरम्. -4 the first objection to an argument. -5 the statement of the plaintiff. -6 a suit at law. -7 an assertion, a proposition. ˚पादः the plaint, the first stage of a legal proceeding. -पदम् the first member of a compound or sentence. -पर्वतः the eastern mountain behind which the sun is supposed to rise. -पश्चात्, -पश्चिम ind. from the east to the west. -पाञ्चालक a. belonging to the eastern Pañchālas. -पाणिनीयाः m. (pl.) the disciples of Pāṇini living in the east. -पालिन् m. an epithet of Indra. -पितामहः a forefather, an ancestor; अब्रवीद् हि स मां क्रुद्धस्तव पूर्वपितामहः । मूत्रश्लेष्माशनः पाप निरयं प्रतिपत्स्यसे ॥ Mb.12.3.21. -पीठिका introduction. -पुरुषः 1 an epithet of Brahmā. -2 anyone of the first three ancestors, beginning with the father (पितृ, पितामह, and प्रपितामह); Pt.1.89. -3 an ancestor in general. -पूर्व a. each preceding one. (-र्वाः) m. (pl.) forefathers. -प्रोष्ठपदा = पूर्वभाद्रपदा; Mb.13.89.13. -फल्गुनी the eleventh lunar mansion containing two stars. ˚भवः an epithet of the planet Jupiter. -बन्धुः first or best friend; Mk. -भवः a former life. -भागः 1 the forepart. -2 the upper part. -भा(भ)द्रपदा the twentyfifth lunar mansion containing two stars. -भावः 1 priority. -2 prior or antecedent existence; येन सहैव यस्य यं प्रति पूर्वभावो$वगम्यते Tarka K. -3 (Rhet.) disclosing an intention. -भाषिन् a. willing to speak first; hence polite, courteous. -भुक्तिः f. prior occupation or possession; Ms.8.252. -भूत a. preceding, previous. -मध्याह्नः the forenoon. -मारिन् a. dying before; एवंवृत्तां सवर्णां स्त्रीं द्विजातिः पूर्वमारिणीम् (दाहयेत्) Ms.5.167. -मीमांसा 'the prior or first Mīmāṁsā', an inquiry into the first or ritual portion of the Veda, as opposed to the उत्तरमीमांसा or वेदान्त; see मीमांसा. -मुख a. having the face turned towards the east. -याम्य a. south-eastern. -रङ्गः the commencement or prelude of a drama, the prologue; यन्नाठ्यवस्तुनः पूर्वं रङ्गविघ्नोपशान्तये । कुशीलवाः प्रकुर्वन्ति पूर्वरङ्गः स उच्यते ॥ D. R; पूर्वरङ्गं विधायैव सूत्रधारो निवर्तते S. D.283; पूर्वरङ्गः प्रसंगाय नाटकीयस्य वस्तुनः Śi.2.8. (see Malli. thereon). -रागः the dawning or incipient love, love between two persons which springs (from some previous cause) before their meeting; श्रवणाद् दर्शनाद् वापि मिथः संरूढरागयोः । दशाविशेषोयो$प्राप्तौ पूर्वरागः स उच्यते ॥ S. D.214. -रात्रः the first part of the night (from dusk to midnight). -रूपम् 1 indication of an approaching change; an omen. -2 a symptom of occuring disease. -3 the first of two concurrent vowels or consonants that is retained. -4 (in Rhet.) a figure of speech which consists in describing anything as suddenly resuming its former state. -लक्षणम् a symptom of coming sickness. -वयस् a. young. (-n.) youth. -वर्तिन् a. existing before, prior, previous. -वाक्यम् (in dram.) an allusion to former utterance. -वादः the first plea or commencement of an action at law; पूर्ववादं परित्यज्य यो$न्यमालम्बते पुनः । पदसंक्रमणाद् ज्ञेयो हीनवादी स वै नरः ॥ Mitā. -वादिन् m. the complainant or plaintiff. -विद् a. knowing the events of the past; historian; पृथोरपीमां पृथिवीं भार्यां पूर्वविदो विदुः Ms.9.44. -विप्रतिषेधः the conflict of two statements contrary to each other. -विहित a. deposited before. -वृत्तम् 1 a former event; पूर्ववृत्तकथितैः पुराविदः सानुजः पितृ- सखस्य राघवः (अह्यमानः) R.11.1. -2 previous conduct. -वैरिन् a. one who first commences hostilities, an aggressor. -शारद a. relating to the first half of autumn. -शैलः see पूर्वपर्वत. -सक्थम् the upper part of the thigh. P. V.4.98. -संचित a. gathered before (as in former birth); त्यजेदाश्वयुजे मासि मुन्यन्नं पूर्वसंचितम् Ms.6.15. -सन्ध्या daybreak, dawn; रजनिमचिरजाता पूर्वसंध्या सुतैव (अनुपतति) Si.11.4. -सर a. going in front. -सागरः the eastern ocean; स सेनां महतीं कर्षन् पूर्वसागरगामिनीम् R.4.32. -साहसः the first of the three fines; स दाप्यः पूर्वसाहसम् Ms.9.281. -स्थितिः f. former or first state.

pra	प्र ind. 1 As a prefix to verbs it means 'forward', 'forth', 'in front', 'onward', 'before', 'away', as in प्रगम्, प्रस्था, प्रचर्, प्रया &c. -2 With adjectives it means 'very', 'excessively', 'very much' &c.; प्रकृष्ट, प्रमत्त &c., see further on. -3 With nouns whether derived from verbs or not, it is used in the following senses according to G. M. :-- (a) beginning, commencement; (प्रयाणम्, प्रस्थानम्, प्राह्ण); (b) length (प्रवालभूषिक); (c) power (प्रभु); (d) intensity, excess (प्रवाद, प्रकर्ष, प्रच्छाय प्रगुण); (e) source or origin (प्रभव, प्रपौत्र); (f) completion, perfectness, satisfaction (प्रभुक्तमन्नम्); (g) destitution, separation, being without (प्रोषिता, प्रपर्णवृक्षः); (h) apart (प्रज्ञु); (i) excellence (प्राचार्यः); (j) purity (प्रसन्नं जलम्); (k) wish (प्रार्थना); (l) cessation (प्रशम); (m) adoration, respect (प्राञ्जलिः who respectfully folds his hands together); (n) prominence (प्रणस, प्रवाल). In the Veda it is often used as a separable adverb; cf. प्र आदिकर्मदीर्घेशभृशसंभवतृप्तिवियोगशुद्धिशक्तीच्छाशान्तिपूजाग्रहर्शनेषु.

prakramaḥ	प्रक्रमः 1 A step, stride. -2 A pace considered as a measure of distance. -3 Commencement, beginning. -4 (a) Stepping forward, proceeding. (b) Procedure, course; को$यं विधेः प्रक्रमः Māl.5.24. -5 The case in question. -6 Leisure, opportunity. -7 Regularity, order, method. -8 Degree, proportion, measure. -9 The reading of the Kramapāṭha. -1 Discussing any point in question. -Comp. -तृतीयम् the third of a square pace. -भङ्गः want of symmetry of regularity, the breaking of arrangement, regarded as a fault of composition. (It is the same as भग्नप्रक्रमता mentioned in K. P.7, the break of symmetry being either in expresion or construction; नाथे निशाया नियतेर्नियोगादस्तं गते हन्त निशापि याता is an instance of the former, where गता निशापि would relieve the irregularity of expression; and विश्रब्धं क्रियतां वराहततिभिर्मुस्ताक्षतिः पल्वले is an instance of the latter, where the symmetry of the verse requires the active instead of the passive construction, and the fault may be removed by reading the line as विश्रब्धा रचयन्तु शूकरवरा मुस्ताक्षतिं पल्वले; see K. P.7 under भग्नप्रक्रमता for further datails. -निरुद्ध a. stopped in the beginning.

prakramaṇam	प्रक्रमणम् 1 Stepping forward, proceeding. -2 Issuing. -3 Beginning.

pracaraṇam	प्रचरणम् 1 Going forth, proceeding. -2 Being current, circulating. -3 Undertaking, beginning. -4 Employing, using. -णी A wooden-ladle.

praṇāśana	प्रणाशन a. Destroying, annihilating, removing. -नम् Destruction, annihilation; प्रणाशनाय प्रबलस्य विद्विषः R.3.6.

pranaṣṭa	प्रनष्ट p. p. 1 Disappeared, vanished, not to be seen. -2 Lost; Pt.4.35. -3 Perished, dead. -4 Ruined, destroyed, annihilated. -5 Escaped. -Comp. -स्वामिक a. प्रनष्टस्वामिकं रिक्थं राजा त्र्यब्दं निधापयेत् Ms.8.3.

prati	प्रति ind. 1 As a prefix to verbs it means (a) towards, in the direction of; (b) back, in return, again; तष्ठेदानीं न मे जीवन् प्रतियास्यसि दुर्मते Rām.7.18.13; (c) in opposition to, against, counter; (d) upon, down upon; (see the several roots with this preposition). -2 As a prefix to nouns not directly derived from verbs it means (a) likeness, resemblance, equality; (b) opposite, of the opposite side; प्रतिबल Ve.3.5. 'the opposing force'; so प्रतिद्विपाः Mu.2.13; (c) rivalry; as in प्रतिचन्द्रः 'a rival moon'; प्रतिपुरुषः &c. -3 As a separable preposition (with acc.) it means (a) towards, in the direction of, to; तौ दम्पती स्वां प्रति राजधानीं प्रस्थापयामास वशी वसिष्ठः R.2.7;1. 75; प्रत्यनिलं विचेरु Ku.3.31; वृक्षं प्रति विद्योतते विद्युत् Sk.; (b) against, counter, in opposition to, opposite; तदा यायाद् रिपुं प्रति Ms.7.171; प्रदुदुवुस्तं प्रति राक्षसेन्द्रम् Rām.; ययावजः प्रत्यरिसैन्यमेव R.7.55; (c) in comparison with, on a par with, in proportion to, a match for; त्वं सहस्राणि प्रति Ṛv.2.1.8; (d) near, in the vicinity of, by, at, in, on; समासेदुस्ततो गङ्गां शृङ्गवेरपुरं प्रति Rām.; गङ्गां प्रति; (e) at the time, about, during; आदित्यस्योदयं प्रति Mb; फाल्गुनं वाथ चैत्रं वा मासौ प्रति Ms.7.182; (f) on the side of, in favour of, to the lot of; यदत्र मां प्रति स्यात् Sk.; हरं प्रति हलाहलं (अभवत्) Vop.; (g) in each, in or at every, severally (used in a distributive sense); वर्षं प्रति, प्रतिवर्षम्; यज्ञं प्रति Y.1.11; वृक्षं वृक्षं प्रति सिञ्चति Sk.; (h) with regard or reference to, in relation to, regarding, concerning, about, as to; न हि मे संशीतिरस्या दिव्यतां प्रति K.132; चन्द्रोपरागं प्रति तु केनापि विप्रलब्धासि Mu.1; धर्मं प्रति Ś.5.18; मन्दौत्सुक्यो$स्मि नगरगमनं प्रति Ś.1; Ku.6.27; 7.83; त्वयैकमीशं प्रति साधु भाषितम् 5.81; Y.1.218; R.6. 12;1.29;12.51; (i) according to, in conformity with; मां प्रति in my opinion; (j) before, in the presence of; (k) for, on account of. -4 As a separable preposition (with abl.) it means either (a) a representative of, in place of, instead of; प्रद्युम्नः कृष्णात् प्रति Sk.; संग्रामे यो नारायणतः प्रति Bk.8.89; or (b) in exchange or return for; तिलेभ्यः प्रति यच्छति माषान् Sk.; भक्तेः प्रत्यमृतं शंभोः Vop. -5 As the first member of Avyayībhāva compound it usually means (a) in or at every; as प्रतिसंवत्सरम् 'every year', प्रतिक्षणम्, प्रत्यहम् &c.; (b) towards, in the direction of; प्रत्यग्नि शलभा डयन्ते. -6 प्रति is sometimes used as the last member of Avyayī. comp. in the sense of 'a little'; सूपप्रति, शाकप्रति. [Note:-In the compounds given below all words the second members of which are words not immediately connected with verbs, are included; other words will be found in their proper places.] -Comp. -अंशम् ind. on the shoulders. -अक्षरम् ind. in every syllable or letter; प्रत्यक्षरश्लेषमयप्रबन्ध Vās. -अग्नि ind. towards the fire. -अग्र = प्रत्यग्र q. v. -अङ्गम् 1 a secondary or minor limb (of the body), as the nose. -2 a division, chapter, section. -3 every limb. -4 a weapon. (-ङ्गम्) ind. 1 on or at every limb of the body; as in प्रत्यङ्ग- मालिङ्गितः Gīt.1. -2 for every subdivision. -3 in each case (in grammar). -अधिदेवता a tutelary deity who stays in front or near one; Hch. -अधिष्ठानम्, -आधानम् the principal place of residence; Bṛi. Up.2.2.1. -2 repository. -अनन्तर a. 1 being in immediate neighbourhood; दानमानादिसत्कारैः कुरुष्व प्रत्यनन्तरम् Rām.4.15.27. (com. प्रत्यनन्तरं स्वाधीनम्). -2 standing nearest (as an heir). -3 immediately following, closely connected with; जीवेत् क्षत्रियधर्मेण स ह्यस्य (ब्राह्मणस्य) प्रत्यनन्तरः; Ms.1. 82;8.185. (-रम्) ind. 1 immediately after. -2 next in succession. -रीभू to betake oneself close to; P. R. -अनिलम् ind. towards or against the wind. -अनीक a 1 hostile, opposed, inimical. -2 resisting, opposing. -3 opposite. -4 equal, vying with. (-कः) an enemy. (-कम्) 1 hostility, enmity, hostile attitude or position; न शक्ताः प्रत्यनीकेषु स्थातुं मम सुरासुराः Rām. -2 a hostile army; यस्य शूरा महेष्वासाः प्रत्यनीकगता रणे Mb.; ये$वस्थिताः प्रत्यनीकेषु योधाः Bg.11.32. (प्र˚ may have here sense 1 also). -3 (in Rhet.) a figure of speech in which one tries to injure a person or thing connected with an enemy who himself cannot be injured; प्रतिपक्षमशक्तेन प्रतिकर्तुं तिरस्क्रिया । या तदीयस्य तत्स्तुत्यै प्रत्यनीकं तदुच्यते K. P.1. -अनुप्रासः a kind of alliteration. -अनुमानम् an opposite conclusion. -अन्त a. contiguous, lying close to, adjacent, bordering. (-न्तः) 1 a border, frontier; स गुप्तमूलप्रत्यन्तः R.4.26. -2 a bordering country; especially, a country occupied by barbarian or Mlechchhas. ˚देशः a bordering country. ˚पर्वतः an adjacent hill; पादाः प्रत्यन्तपर्वताः Ak. -अन्धकार a. spreading shadow; Buddh. -अपकारः retaliation, injury in return; शाम्येत् प्रत्यप- कारेण नोपकारेण दुर्जनः Ku.2.4. -अब्दम् ind. every year -अमित्र a. hostile. (-त्रः) an enemy. (-त्रम्) ind. towards as enemy. -अरिः 1 a well-matched opponent. -2 the 9th, 14th or 23rd asterism from the जन्मनक्षत्र. -3 a particular asterism; दारुणेषु च सर्वेषु प्रत्यरिं च विवर्जयेत् Mb.13.14.28 (com. प्रत्यरिं स्वनक्षत्राद् दिननक्षत्रं यावद् गणयित्वा नवभिर्भागे हृते पञ्चमी तारा प्रत्यरिः ।). -अर्कः a mock sun; parhelion. -अर्गलम् the rope by which a churning stick is moved. -अवयवम् ind. 1 in every limb. -2 in every particular, in detail. -अवर a. 1 lower, less honoured; पुरावरान् प्रत्यवरान् गरीयसः Mb.13.94.12. -2 very low or degrading, very insignificant; Ms.1.19. -अश्मन् m. red chalk. -अष्ठीला a kind of nervous disease. -अहम् ind. every day, daily; day by day; गिरिशमुपचचार प्रत्यहं सा सुकेशी Ku.1.6. -आकारः a scabbard, sheath. -आघातः 1 a counter-stroke. -2 reaction. -आचारः suitable conduct or behaviour. -आत्मम् ind. singly, severally. -आत्मक a. belonging to oneself. -आत्म्यम् similarity with oneself. -आत्मेन ind. after one's own image; स किंनरान् कुंपुरुषान् प्रत्यात्म्येना- सृजत् प्रभुः Bhāg.3.2.45. -आदित्यः a mock sun. -आरम्भः 1 recommencement, second beginning. -2 prohibition. -आर्द्र a. fresh. -आशा 1 hope, expectation; न यत्र प्रत्याशामनुपतति नो वा रहयति Māl.9.8. -2 trust, confidence. -आसङ्गः Connection, contact; अथ प्रत्यासङ्गः कमपि महिमानं वितरति Mv.1.12. -आस्वर 1 returning. -2 reflecting; Ch.Up.1.3.2. -आह्वयः echo, resonance; छाया प्रत्याह्वयाभासा ह्यसन्तो$प्यर्थकारिणः Bhāg.11.28.5. -उत्तरम् a reply, rejoinder. -उलूकः 1 a crow; मृत्युदूतः कपोतो$यमुलूकः कम्पयन्मनः । प्रत्युलूकश्च कुह्वानैरनिद्रौ शून्यमिच्छतः ॥ Bhāg.1.14.14. -2 a bird resembling an owl. -ऋचम् ind. in each Rik. -एक a. each, each one, every single one. (-कम्) ind. 1 one at a time, severally; singly, in every one, to every one; oft. with the force of an adjective; विवेश दण्डकारण्यं प्रत्येकं च सतां मनः R.12.9. 'entered the mind of every good man'; 12.3;7.34; Ku.2.31. -एनस् m. 1 an officer of justice (who punishes criminals); Bṛi. Up.4.3.7. -2 a heir responsible for the debts of the deceased; surety. -कञ्चुकः 1 an adversary. -2 a critic. -कण्ठम् ind. 1 severally, one by one. -2 near the throat. -कलम् ind. constantly, perpetually. -कश a. not obeying the whip. -कष्ट a. comparatively bad. -कामिनी a female rival; Śi. -कायः 1 an effigy, image, picture, likeness. -2 an adversary; स वृषध्वजसायकावभिन्नं जयहेतुः प्रतिकाय- मेषणीयम् Ki.13.28. -3 a target, butt, mark. -कितवः an opponent in a game. -कुञ्जरः a hostile elephant. -कूपः a moat, ditch. -कूल a. 1 unfavourable, adverse, contrary, hostile, opposite, प्रतिकूलतामुपगते हि विधौ विफलत्व- मेति बहुसाधनता Śi.9.6; Ku.3.24. -2 harsh, discordant. unpleasant, disagreeable; अप्यन्नपुष्टा प्रतिकूलशब्दा Ku.1. 45. -3 inauspicious. -4 contradictory. -5 reverse, inverted. -6 perverse, cross, peevish, stubborn. ˚आचार- णम्, ˚आचरितम् any offensive or hostile action or conduct; प्रतिकूलाचरितं क्षमख मे R.8.81. ˚उक्तम्, -क्तिः f. a contradiction. ˚कारिन्, -कृत, -चारिन्, -वत्ति a. opposing. ˚दर्शन a. having an inauspicious or ungracious appearance. ˚प्रवर्तिन्, -वर्तिन् a. acting adversely, taking an adverse course. ˚भाषिन् a. opposing, contradicting. ˚वचनम् disagreeable or unpleasant speech. ˚वादः contradiction. (प्रतिकूलता, -त्वम् adverseness, opposition, hostility. प्रति- कूलयति 'to oppose'.). -कूल ind. 1 adversely, contrarily. -2 inversely, in inverted order. -कूलय Den. P. to resist, oppose. -कूलिक a. hostile, inimical. -क्षणम् ind. at every moment or instant, constantly; प्रतिक्षणं संभ्रमलोलदृष्टि- र्लीलारविन्देन निवारयन्ती Ku.3.56. -क्षपम् ind. everynight. -गजः a hostile elephant -गात्रम् ind. in very limb. -गिरिः 1 an opposite mountain. -2 an inferior mountain. -गृहम्, -गेहम् ind. in every house. -ग्रामम् ind. in every village. -चक्रम् a hostile army. -चन्द्रः a mock moon; paraselene. -चरणम् ind. 1 in every (Vedic) school or branch. -2 at every foot-step. -छाया, -यिका 1 a reflected image, reflection, shadow; रूपं प्रतिच्छायिक- योपनीतम् N.6.45. -2 an image, picture. -जङ्घा the forepart of the leg. -जिह्वा, -जिह्विका the soft palate, -तन्त्रम् ind. according to each Tantra or opinion. -तन्त्र- सिद्धान्तः a conclusion adopted by one of the disputants only; (वादिप्रतिवाद्येकतरमात्राभ्युपगतः). -त्र्यहम् ind. for three days at a time. -दण्ड a. Ved. disobedient. -दिनम् ind. every day; राशीभूतः प्रतिदिनमिव त्र्यम्बकस्याट्टहासः Me.6. -दिशम् ind. in every direction, all round, everywhere. -दूतः a messenger sent in return. -देवता a corresponding deity; गताः कलाः पञ्चदश प्रतिष्ठा देवाश्च सर्वे प्रतिदेवतासु Muṇḍa.3.2.7. -देशम् ind. in every country. -देहम् ind. in every body. -दैवतम् ind. for every deity. -द्वन्द्वः 1 an antagonist, opponent, adversary, rival. -2 an enemy. (-द्वम्) opposition, hostility. -द्वन्द्विन् a. 1 hostile, inimical. -2 adverse (प्रतिकूल); कृतान्तदुर्वृत्त इवापरेषां पुरः प्रतिद्वन्द्विनि पाण्डवास्त्रे Ki.16.29. -3 rivalling, vying with; किसलयोद्भेदप्रतिद्वन्दिभिः (करतलैः) Ś.4.5. (-m.) an opponent, adversary, rival; तुल्यप्रति- द्वन्द्वि बभूव युद्धम् R.7.37.;15.25. -द्वारम् ind. at every gate. -धुरः a horse harnessed by the side of another. -नप्तृ m. great-grandson, a son's grandson. -नव a. 1 new, young, fresh. -2 newly blown budded; सान्ध्यं तेजः प्रतिनवजपापुष्परक्तं दधानः Me.38. -नाडी a branch-vein. -नायकः the adversary of the hero of any poetic composition; धीरोद्धतः पापकारी व्यसनी प्रतिनायकः S. D., as रावण in the Rāmāyaṇa, शिशुपाल in Māgha-Kāvya &c. -नारी, -पत्नी, -युवतिः a female rival; Śi.7.45. -निनादः = प्रतिध्वनिः q. v. -न्यायम् ind. in inverted order; पुनः प्रतिन्यायं प्रतियोन्याद्रवति स्वप्नायैव Bṛi. Up.4.3.15. -पक्ष a. like, similar. (-क्षः) 1 the opposite side, party or faction, hostility; विमृश्य पक्षप्रतिपक्षाभ्यामवधारणं नियमः Gaut. S, -2 an adversary, enemy, foe, rival; प्रति- पक्षकामिनी, -लक्ष्मी 'a rival wife'; Bv.2.64; दासीकृतायाः प्रति- पक्षलक्ष्याः Vikr.1.73; प्रतिपक्षमशक्तेन प्रतिकर्तुम् K. P.1; Vikr.1.7; often used in comp. in the sense of 'equal' or 'similar'. -3 remedy, expiation; यादवस्य पापस्य प्रतिपक्षमुपदिशामि Nāg.5. -4 a defendant or respondent (in law). ˚ता 1 hostility, opposition. -2 obstacle. -पक्षित a. 1 containing a contradiction. -2 nullified by a contradictory premise; (as a hetu in न्याय); cf. सत्प्रतिपक्ष. -पक्षिन् m. an opponent, adversary. -पण्यम् merchandise in exchange; Buddh. -प्रथम् ind. along the road, towards the way; प्रतिपथगतिरासीद् वेगदीर्घीकृताङ्गः Ku.3.76. -पदम् ind. 1 at evry stop. -2 at every place, everywhere. -3 expressly. -4 in every word; प्रतिपदाख्याने तु गौरवं परिहरद्भिर्वृत्तिकारैः सर्वसामान्यः शब्दः प्रति- गृहीतः प्रकृतिवदिति ŚB. on MS.8.1.2. -पल्लवः an opposite or outstretched branch; R. -पाणः 1 a stake. -2 a counter-pledge. -3 a counter-stake; Mb.3. -पादम् ind. in each quarter. -पात्रम् ind. with regard to each part, of each character; प्रतिपात्रमाधीयतां यत्नः Ś.1 'let care be taken of each character'. -पादपम् ind. in every tree. -पाप a. returning sin for sin, requiting evil for evil. -पु(पू)रुषः 1 a like or similar man. -2 a substitute, deputy. -3 a companion. -4 the effigy of a man pushed by thieves into the interior of a house before entering it themselves (to ascertain if any body is awake). -5 an effigy in general. (-षम्) ind. man by man, for each man. -पुस्तकम् a copy of an original manuscript. -पूर्वाह्णम् ind. every forenoon. -प्रति a. counter-balancing, equal to. -प्रभातम् ind. every morning. -प्रसवः 1 (As opposed to अनुप्रसव) tracing causes back to the origin as -a pot, a lump of mud, mud, clay, Pātañjala Yogadarśana. -2 Negation of (or exception to) a negation. The force of a प्रतिप्रसव is positive, limiting as it does the scope of a प्रतिषेध or negation. Hence it is just the opposite of परिसंख्या whose force is negative or exclusive since it limits the scope of a positive statement. प्रतिप्रसवो$यं न परिसंख्या ŚB. on MS.1.7.45. -प्रकारः an outer wall or rampart. -प्रियम् a kindness or service in return; प्रतिप्रियं चेद् भवतो न कुर्यां वृथा हि मे स्यात् स्वपदोपलब्धिः R.5.56. -बन्धुः an equal in rank or station; Mb.5.121.13. -बलः a. 1 able, powerful. -2 equal in strength, equally matched or powerful. (-लम्) 1 a hostile army; अस्त्रज्वालावलीढप्रतिबलजलधेरन्तरौर्वायमाणे Ve.3.7. -2 strength. -बाहु 1 the forepart of the arm. -2 an opposite side (in a square or polygon). -बि (वि) म्बः, -म्बम् 1 a reflection, reflected image; ज्योतिषां प्रतिबिम्बानि प्राप्नु- वन्त्युपहारताम् Ku.6.42; Śi.9.18. -2 an image, a picture. -बीजम् a rotten seed. -भट a. vying with, rivalling; घटप्रतिभटस्तनि N.13.5. (-टः) 1 a rival, an opponent; निवासः कन्दर्पप्रतिभटजटाजूटभवने G. L.21. -2 a warrior on the opposite side; समालोक्याजौ त्वां विदधति विकल्पान् प्रतिभटाः K. P.1. -भय a. 1 fearful, formidable, terrible, frightful. -2 dangerous; स्वगृहोद्यानगते$पि स्निग्धैः पापं विशङ्क्यते मोहात् । किमु दृष्टबह्वपायप्रतिभयकान्तारमध्यस्थे ॥ Pt.2.171; Nāg.5.1.; Bhāg.1.6.14. (-यम्) a danger; सुनन्द, श्रुतं मया संनिहितगरुडप्रतिभयमुद्देशं जामाता जीमूतवाहनो गतः Nāg.5. -भैरव a. dreadful. -मञ्चः a kind of measure (in music.) -मञ्चाः Platforms opposite to each other; दशभागिकौ द्वौ प्रतिमञ्चौ Kau. A.2.3.21. -मण्डलम् 1 a secondary disc (of the sun &c.). -2 an eccentric orbit. -मन्दिरम् ind. in every house. -मल्लः an antagonist, a rival; उपेयिवांसं प्रतिमल्लतां रयस्मये जितस्य प्रसभं गरुत्मतः N.1.63; पातालप्रतिमल्लगल्ल &c. Māl.5.22. -मानना worship (पूजा); स्पर्शमशुचिवपुरर्हति न प्रतिमाननां तु नितरां नृपोचिताम् Śi.15.35. -माया a counter-spell or charm; प्रतिमाया कृतं च तत् Mb.1.34.22. -मार्गः the way back; Mb.4. -मार्गम् ind. back, backwards. -माला capping verses (Mar. भंडी). -मासम् ind. every month, monthly. -मित्रम् an enemy, adversary. -मुख a. standing before the face, facing; प्रतिमुखागत Ms.8.291. -2 near, present. (-खम्) a secondary plot or incident in a drama which tends either to hasten or retard the catastrophe; see S. D.334 and 351-364. (-खम्) ind. 1 towards. -2 in front, before. -मुखरी a particular mode of drumming. -मुद्रा 1 a counterseal. -2 the impression of a seal. -मुहूर्तम् ind. every moment. -मूर्तिः f. an image, a likeness. -मूषिका f. a musk-rat (Mar. चिचुंदरी). -यूथपः the leader of a hostile herd of elephants. -रथः an adversary in war (lit. in fighting in a war-chariot); दौष्यन्तिमप्रतिरथं तनयं निवेश्य Ś.4.2. -रथ्यम् in every road; अस्मिन् नगरे प्रतिरथ्यं भुजङ्गबद्धसंचारे Udb. -रवः, -ध्वनिः 1 an echo; प्रतिरवविततो वनानि चक्रे Ki.1.4. -2 quarrel; controversy. -3 (Ved.) life (प्राण). -रसितम् an echo; केनास्मत् सिंह- नादप्रतिरसितसखो दुन्दुभिस्ताड्यते$यम् Ve.1.22. -राजः a hostile king. -रात्रम् ind. every night. -रूप a. 1 corresponding, similar, having a counter-part in; अग्निर्यथैको भुवनं प्रविष्टो रूपं रूपं प्रतिरूपो बभूव Kaṭh.2.2.9. -2 beautiful. -3 suitable, proper; इदं न प्रतिरूपं ते स्त्रीष्वदाक्षिण्यमीदृशम् Bu. Ch.4.66; आत्मनः प्रतिरूपं सा बभाषे चारुहासिनी Rām.4. 19.17. -4 facing (अभिमुख); प्रतिरूपं जनं कुर्यान्न चेत् तद् वर्तते यथा Mb.12.97.16 (com. प्रतिरूपं युद्धाभिमुखम्). (-पम्) 1 a picture, an image, a likeness. -2 a mirror-like reflecting object; अदर्शनं स्वशिरसः प्रतिरूपे च सत्यपि Bhāg. 1.42.28. -4 an object of comparison (उपमान); भवान्मे खलु भक्तानां सर्वेषां प्रतिरूपधृक् Bhāg.7.1.21. -रूपक a. resembling, similar (at the end of comp.); जहीमान् राक्षसान् पापानात्मनः प्रतिरूपकान् Mb.3.29.11; चेष्टाप्रतिरूपिका मनोवृत्तिः Ś.1. (-कम्) 1 a picture, an image; अग्निदैर्गर- दैश्चैव प्रतिरूपककारकैः Mb.12.59.49. -2 a forged edict; जर्जरं चास्य विषयं कुर्वन्ति प्रतिरूपकैः Mb.12.56.52. -3 a reflection. -लक्षणम् a mark, sign, token. -लिपिः f. a transcript, a written copy. -लेखः a writ of reply; प्रावृत्तिकश्च प्रतिलेख एव Kau. A.2.1.28. -लोम a. 1 'against the hair or grain', contray to the natural order, inverted, reverse (opp. अनुलोम); नववर्षसहस्राक्षः प्रतिलोमो$भवद् गुरुः Bhāg.12.14.15. -2 contrary to caste (said of the issue of a woman who is of a higher caste than her husband). -3 hostile. -4 low, vile, base. -5 left (वाम). -6 obstinate, perverse; अपरिचितस्यापि ते$प्रतिलोमः संवृत्तः Ś.7. -7 disagreeable, unpleasant. (-मम्) any injurious or unpleasant act. (-मम्) ind. 'against the hair or grain', inversely, invertedly. ˚ज a. born in the inverse order of the castes; i. e. born of a mother who is of a higher caste than the father; cf. Ms.1.16,25. -लोमक a. reverse, inverted; राजन्यविप्रयोः कस्माद् विवाहः प्रतिलोमकः Bhāg.9.18.5. -कम् inverted order. -लोमतः ind. 1 in consequence of the inverted order or course; Ms.1.68. -2 in an unfriendly manner; यदा बहुविधां वृद्धिं मन्येत प्रतिलोमतः Mb.12.13.39. -वत्सरम् ind. every year. -वनम् ind. in every forest. -वर्णिक a. similar, corresponding. -वर्धिन् a. being a match for. -वर्षम् ind. every year. -वस्तु n. 1 an equivalent, a counterpart. -2 anything given in return. -3 a parallel. ˚उपमा a figure of speech thus defined by Mammaṭa:-- प्रतिवस्तूपमा तु सा ॥ सामान्यस्य द्विरेकस्य यत्र वाक्यद्वये स्थितिः । K. P.1; e. g. तापेन भ्राजते सूर्यः शूरश्चापेन राजते Chandr.5. 48. -वातः a contrary wind; प्रतिवाते$नुवाते च नासीत गुरुणा सह Ms.2.23. (-तम्) ind. against the wind; चीनांशुक- मिव केतोः प्रतिवातं नीयमानस्य Ś.1.33. -वारणः a hostile elephant. -वासरम् ind. every day. -विटपम् ind. 1 on every branch. -2 branch by branch. -विषम् an antidote. (-षा) a birch tree. -विष्णुकः a Muchakunda tree. -वीरः an opponent, antagonist. -वीर्यम् being equal to or a match for. -वृषः a hostile bull. -वेलम् ind. at each time, on every occasion. -वेशः 1 a neighbouring house, neighbourhood. -2 a neighbour. -वेशिन् a. a neighbour; दृष्ट्वा प्रभातसमये प्रतिवेशिवर्गः Mk.3.14. -वेश्मन् n. a neighbour's house. -वेश्यः a neighbour. -वैरम् requital of hostilities revenge. -शब्दः 1 echo, reverberation; वसुधाधरकन्दराभिसर्पी प्रतिशब्दो$पि हरेर्भिनत्ति नागान् V. 1.16; Ku.6.64; R.2.28. -2 a roar. -शशिन् m. a mock-moon. -शाखम् ind. for every branch or school (of the Veda). -शाखा a side-branch; महाभूतविशेषश्च विशेषप्रतिशाखवान् Mb.14.35.21. -संवत्सरम् ind. every year. -सङ्गक्षिका 1 a cloak to keep off the dust; Buddh. -संदेशः a reply to the message; दर्पसारस्य प्रति- संदेशमावेदयत् D. K.2.1. -सम a. equal to, a match for. -सव्य a. in an inverted order. -सामन्तः an enemy. -सायम् ind. every evening. -सूर्यः, -सूर्यकः 1 a mock-sun. -2 a lizard, chameleon; 'कृकलासस्तु सरटः प्रतिसूर्यः शयानकः ।' Hemchandra; तृष्यद्भिः प्रतिसूर्यकैरजगरस्वेदद्रवः पीयते U.2.16. -सेना, सैन्यम् a hostile army; निहतां प्रतिसैन्येन वडवामिव पातिताम् Rām.2.114.17. -स्थानम् ind. in every place, everywhere. -स्मृतिः N. of particular kind of magic; गृहाणेमां मया प्रोक्तां सिद्धिं मूर्तिमतीमिव । विद्यां प्रतिस्मृतिं नाम Mb.3.36.3. -स्रोतस् ind. against the stream; सरस्वतीं प्रतिस्रोतं ययौ ब्राह्मणसंवृतः Bhāg.1.78. 18. -a. going against the stream; अथासाद्य तु कालिन्दी प्रतिस्रोतः समागताम् Rām.2.55.5. -हस्तः, -हस्तकः a deputy, an agent, substitute, proxy; आश्रितानां भृतौ स्वामिसेवायां धर्मसेवने । पुत्रस्योत्पादने चैव न सन्ति प्रतिहस्तकाः ॥ H.2.33. -हस्तीकृ to take; Pratijñā 3. -हस्तिन् the keeper of a brothel; Dk.2.2.

pratipattiḥ	प्रतिपत्तिः f. 1 Getting; acquirement, gain; चन्द्रलोक- प्रतिपत्तिः; स्वर्ग˚ &c. -2 Perception, observation, consciousness, (right) knowledge; वागर्थप्रतिपत्तये R.1.1; तयोरभेदप्रतिपत्तिरस्ति मे Bh.3.99; गुणिनामपि निजरूपप्रतिपत्तिः परत एव संभवति Vās. -3 Assent, compliance, acceptance; प्रतिपत्तिपराङ्मुखी Bk.8.95 'averse from compliance, unyielding'. -4 Admission, acknowledgment. -5 Assertion, statement. -6 Undertaking, beginning, commencement. -7 Action, proceeding, course of action, procedure; वयस्य का प्रतिपत्तिरत्र M.4; Ku.5.42; विषाद- लुप्तप्रतिपत्तिविस्मितं सैन्यम् R.3.4 'which did not know what course of action to follow through dismay'. -8 Performance, doing, proceeding with; प्रस्तुतप्रतिपत्तये R.15.75. -9 Resolution, determination; कैकेय्याः प्रतिपत्तिर्हि कथं स्यान्मम वेदने Rām.2.22.16; व्यवसायः प्रतिपत्तिनिष्ठुरः R.8.65. -1 News, intelligence; कर्मसिद्धावाशु प्रतिपत्तिमानय Mu.4; Ś.6. -11 Honour, respect, mark of distinction, respectful behaviour; सामान्यप्रतिपत्तिपूर्वकमियं दारेषु दृश्या त्वया Ś.4.17;7.1; R.14.22;15.12; तत् कस्मादेतस्मिन् महानुभावे प्रतिपत्तिमूढा तिष्ठसि Nāg.1; यत्स महानुभावो वाङ्मात्रेणापि अकृतप्रतिपत्तिः अदक्षिणेति मां संभावयिष्यति Nāg.2. -12 A method, means. -13 Intellect, intelligence. -14 Use, application. -15 Promotion, preferment, exaltation. -16 Fame, renown, reputation. -17 Boldness, assurance, confidence. -18 Conviction, proof. -19 A rite from which no advantage accrues. -2 The concluding portion of an action. (In Daṇḍaviveka, G. O. S.52, p.259, it means punishment of an offence.) -21 Disposing of a matter or a thing which has served the purpose of something else; यद् येन प्रयोजनेन सम्बद्ध- मुत्पद्यते तत् तदर्थमेव न्याय्यम् । तस्यान्यत्र गमने प्रतिपत्तिरित्येतदुपपद्यते ŚB. on MS.4.2.19. Also cf. यष हि न्यायो यदन्यत्र कृतार्थ- मन्यत्र प्रतिपाद्यत इति ŚB. on MS.4.2.22; cf. also प्रतिपत्तिश्च विविक्तकरणेन उपकरोति ŚB. on MS.6.4.3. Hence प्रतिपत्ति- कर्मन् means 'a mere disposal' (as opposed to अर्थकर्मन्); किं शाखाप्रहरणं प्रतिपत्तिकर्म उतार्थकर्मेति ŚB. on MS.4.2.1. -22 giving (दान); अपात्रे प्रतिपत्तिः; Mb.12.26.31; दानवारि- रसिकाय विभूतेर्वश्मि ते$स्मि सुतरां प्रतिपत्तिम् N.21.63. -23 Remedy (प्रतिविधान); प्रतिपत्तिं कां प्रत्यपद्यन्त मामकाः Mb.7.46. 3. -Comp. -दक्ष a. knowing how to act. -पटहः a kind of kettle drum. -पराङ्मुख a. obstinate, unyielding; Bk. -प्रदानम् Conferring promotion. -भेदः difference of view. -विशारद a. knowing how to act, skilful, clever; वायव्यमभिमन्त्र्याथ प्रतिपत्तिविशारदः Mb.1.227.16.

pratipad	प्रतिपद् f. 1 Access, entrance, way. -2 Beginning, commencement. -3 Intelligence, intellect. -4 The first day of a lunar fortnight. -5 A kettle-drum. -6 An introductory stanza. -7 Rank. -Comp. -चन्द्रः the new moon (the moon on the first day) particularly revered and saluted by people; प्रतिपच्चन्द्रनिभो$यमात्मजः R.8. 65. -तूर्यम् a kind of kettle-drum.

pratiharaṇam	प्रतिहरणम् 1 Avoiding, shunning. -2 Striking back, repelling.

pratyavakarśana	प्रत्यवकर्शन a. Baffling, annihilating; Bhāg. प्रत्यवमर्शः pratyavamarśḥ र्षः rṣḥ प्रत्यवमर्शः र्षः 1 Profound meditation or reflection. -2 Counsel, advice. -3 A counter-conclusion. -4 Patience, forbearance.

prathama	प्रथम [प्रथ्-अमच्] (Nom. pl. m. प्रथमे or प्रथमाः) 1 First, foremost; मखांशभाजां प्रथमो मनीषिभिस्त्वमेव देवेन्द्र सदा निगद्यसे R.3.44; H.2.39; Ki.2.44. -2 First, chief, principal, most excellent or eminent, matchless, incomparable; Śi.15.42; एष वै प्रथमः कल्पः प्रदाने हव्यकव्ययोः Ms.3.147. -3 Earliest, most ancient, primary. -4 Prior, previous, former, earlier; प्रथमसुकृता- पेक्षया Me.17; नामधेयं गुरुश्चक्रे जगत्प्रथममङ्गलम् R.1.67. -5 (In gram.) The first person (= third person according to European phraseology). -मः 1 The first (third) person. -2 The first consonant of a class. -3 (In math.) The sum of the products divided by the difference between the squares of the cosine of the azimuth and the sine of the amplitude. -मा The nominative case. -मम् ind. 1 first, firstly, at first; उमास्तनो- द्भेदमनुप्रवृद्धो मनोरथो यः प्रथमं बभूव Ku.7.24; R.3.4. -2 Already, previously, formerly; प्रथमोदितम् aforesaid; तमभ्यनन्दत् प्रथमं प्रबोधितः प्रजेश्वरः शासनहारिणा हरेः R.3.68. -3 At once, immediately. -4 Before; यात्रायै चोदयामास तं शक्तेः प्रथमं शरत् R.4.24; उत्तिष्ठेत् प्रथमं चास्य चरमं चैव संविशेत् Ms.2.194. -5 Newly, recently, प्रथमम्-अनन्तरम् or ततः or पश्चात् first, afterwards; प्रथमात् firstly, for the first time; प्रथमतः 1 At first, firstly. -2 previously. -3 immediately. -4 before, in preference to (gen.) -Comp. -अर्धः, -र्धम् the first half. -आगामिन् a. first mentioned. -आदेशः placing at the beginning. -आश्रमः the first of the four stages in the religious life of a Brāhmaṇa; i. e. Brahmacharya; शरीरबद्धः प्रथमाश्रमो यथा Ku.5.3. -इतर a. 'other than first', the second. -उदित a. first uttered; उवाच धात्र्या प्रथमोदितं वचः R.3.25. -उत्पन्न a. first-born. -कल्पः 1 the best course to adopt. -2 an excellent suggestion or idea. -कल्पित a. 1 first thought out. -2 first in rank or importance. -कुसुमः white marjoran. -गर्भः a. pregnant for the first time, -गिरिः the Eastern mountain; द्वित्रेषु द्युमणिकरेषु शेखरत्वं प्राप्तेषु प्रथमगिरिः प्रयाति सो$यम् Rām. Ch.7.49. -ज a. 1 first-born. -2 original, primary. -दर्शनम् first sight. -दिवसः the first day; आषाढस्य प्रथमदिवसे Me.2. -नवनीतम् 1 the butter which appears first after churning. -2 the milk of a cow at the time when hundred days have elapsed after her delivery. -निर्दिष्ट p. p. first mentioned. -पुरुषः the first person (= third person according to the English system of treating Sanskrit grammar); अथवा अस्तिर्भवतीतिपरः प्रथमपुरुषे प्रयुज्यमानो$प्यस्तीति ŚB. on MS.11.2.2. -मङ्गल a. highly auspicious. -यौवनम् early youth or age, youthful state. -वयस् n. early age, youth. -वसतिः the original home. -वित्ता Ved. a first wife. -विरहः separation for the first time. -वृत्तान्तः antecedents, former circumstances. -वैयाकरणः 1 the most distinguished grammarian. -2 a beginner in grammer. -श्री a. One who has just become rich or fortunate. -श्रुत a. heard for the first time; न हि प्रथम- श्रुताच्छब्दात् कश्चिदर्थं प्रत्येति ŚB. on MS.1.1.6. -साहसः the first or lowest of the three degrees of punishment or fine; पणानां द्वे शते सार्धे प्रथमः साहसः स्मृतः Ms.8.138. -सुकृतम् former kindness or service.

pradāhaḥ	प्रदाहः 1 Burning, heating. -2 Destruction; annihilation.

pradrava	प्रद्रव a. Fluid, liquid. -वः Running.

pradrāvaḥ	प्रद्रावः 1 Running away, flight, retreat, escape. -2 Going quickly or fast.

pradrāvin	प्रद्राविन् a. 1 Running away; fugitive. -2 Retreating, flying.

pradhvaṃs	प्रध्वंस् 1 Ā. 1 To fall in ruins, waste, decay. -2 To perish, be destroyed -Caus. To cause to perish, destroy, annihilate.

pradhvaṃsaḥ	प्रध्वंसः Utter destruction, annihilation. -Comp. -अभावः 'non-existence caused by destruction', one of the four kinds of अभाव or non-existence, in which the non-existence of a thing is caused by destruction, as of an effect subsequently to its production.

pradhvaṃsin	प्रध्वंसिन् a. 1 Transitory, perishable. -2 Destroying, annihilating.

pradhvasta	प्रध्वस्त p. p. Annihilated, completely destroyed.

prapañcaḥ	प्रपञ्चः 1 Display, manifestation; रागप्रायः प्रपञ्चः K.151. -2 Development, expansion, extension; भरतज्ञकविप्रणीत- काव्यग्रथिताङ्का इव नाटकप्रपञ्चाः Śi.2.44. -3 Amplification, expatiation, explanation, elucidation. -4 Prolixity, diffuseness, copiousness; अलं प्रपञ्चेन. -5 Manifoldness, diversity. -6 Heap, abundance, quantity. -7 An appearance, phenomenon. -8 Illusion, fraud. -9 The visible world or universe, which is illusory and the scene of manifold action. -1 Reciprocal false praise. -11 Opposition, inversion. -12 Analysis. -13 (In dram.) Ludicrous dialogue. -14 (In gram.) The repetition of an obscure rule in a clearer form. -Comp. -चतुर a. skilful in assuming different forms; Amaru. -बुद्धि a. cunning, deceitful. -वचनम् a prolix discourse, diffuse talk.

prabuddha	प्रबुद्ध p. p. 1 Awakened, roused; तथा लिखितवान् प्रातः प्रबुद्धो बुधकौशिकः Rāma-rakṣā.15. -2 Wise, learned, clever; Pt.1. -3 Knowing, conversant with. -4 Fullblown, expanded; पुष्पैः समं निपतिता रजनीप्रबुद्धैः Ve.2.7. -5 Beginning to work or take effect (as a charm). -6 Enlivened, lively.

prabhṛtiḥ	प्रभृतिः f. 1 Beginning, commencement; generally used in this sense as the last member of Bah. compound; इन्द्रप्रभृतयो देवाः &c. -2 Ved. An oblation. -3 Throwing or casting (Ved.). -ind. From, ever since, beginning with (with abl.); शैशवात् प्रभृति पोषितां प्रियाम् U.1.45; Ku.3.26. R.2.38; अद्यप्रभृति henceforward; ततः प्रभृति, अतः प्रभृति &c.

pramī	प्रमी 9 U. 1 To destroy, annihilate, kill, slay. -2 To diminish. -3 To surmount, get over. -4 To surpass, outstrip. -5 Ved. To transgress, infringe. -6 Ved. To lose or miss (one's way). -7 To perish, die. -Caus. To destroy, annihilate &c.

pramukha	प्रमुख a. 1 Facing, turning the face towards. -2 Chief, principal, foremost, first. -3 Respectable, honourable. -4 (At the end of comp.) (a) Headed by, having as chief or at the head; वासुकिप्रमुखाः Ku. 2.38. (b) Accompanied with; प्रीतिप्रमुखवचनं स्वागतं व्याजहार Me.4. -खः 1 A respectable man. -2 A heap, multitude. -3 The tree called Punnāga. -खम् 1 The mouth. -2 The beginning of a chapter or section. -3 The time being, the present. (प्रमुखतस् and प्रमुखे are used adverbially in the sense of 'in front of', 'before', 'opposite to'; भीष्मद्रोणप्रमुखतः सर्वेषां च महीक्षिताम् Bg.1.25; Ś.7.22.).

prayāṇam	प्रयाणम् 1 Setting out, starting, departure. -2 A march, journey; मार्गं तावच्छृणु कथयतस्त्वत्प्रयाणानुरूपम् Me.13; Mb.7.166.1. -3 Progress, advance. -4 The march (of an enemy), an attack, invasion, expedition; कामं पुरः शुक्रमिव प्रयाणे Ku.3.43; R.6.33; प्रयाणपटहध्वनिं प्रथयति स्म ताराध्वनि Rāmāyaṇachampū. -5 Beginning, commencement. -6 Death, departure (from the world); प्रयाण- काले$पि च मां ते विदुर्युक्तचेतसः Bg.7.3. -7 The back of a horse; Mb.3.71.16. -8 The hinder part of any animal. -Comp. -कालः, -समयः time of departure. -भङ्गः a break in a journey, halt; Pt.1.

prayogaḥ	प्रयोगः 1 Use, application, employment; as in शब्दप्रयोगः, अयं शब्दो भूरिप्रयोगः- अल्पप्रयोगः 'this word is generally or rarely used'. -2 A usual form, general usage. -3 Hurling, throwing, discharging, (opp. संहारः); प्रयोगसंहारविभक्तमन्त्रम् R.5.57. -4 Exhibition, performance, representation (dramatic), acting; देव प्रयोगप्रधानं हि नाट्यशास्त्रम् M.1; नाटिका न प्रयोगतो दृष्टा Ratn.1 'not seen acted on the stage'; आ परितोषाद्विदुषां न साधु मन्ये प्रयोग- विज्ञानम् Ś.1.2. -5 Practice, experimental portion (of a subject); (opp. शास्त्र 'theory'); तदत्रभवानिमं मां च शास्त्रे प्रयोगे च विमृशतु M.1. -6 Course of procedure, ceremonial form. -7 An act, action. -8 Recitation, delivery. -9 Beginning, commencement. -1 A plan, contrivance, device, scheme. -11 A means, instrument; नयप्रयोगाविव गां जिगीषोः Ki.17.38. -12 Consequence, result. -13 Combination, connection. -14 Addition. -15 (In gram.) A usual form. -16 Offering, presenting. -17 (a) Principal, loan bearing interest. (b) Lending money on usury; प्रतिबन्धः प्रयोगो व्यवहारो$वस्तारः ...... कोशक्षयः Kau. A.2.7.26; also कोशद्रव्याणां वृद्धिप्रयोगः -18 Appointment. -19 A sacred text or authority. A text which brings together the various धर्मs of a विकृति. A प्रयोगवचन, however, does this only when धर्मs are made available by the चोदक which, therfore, is said to be the stronger of the two. चोदको हि प्रयोग- वचनाद् बलवत्तरः । ŚB. on MS.5.1.8. -2 A cause; motive. -21 An example. -22 Application of magic, magical rites. -23 A horse. -Comp. -अतिशयः One of the five kinds of प्रस्तावना or prologue, in which a part of performance is superseded by another in such a manner that a character is suddenly brought on the stage; i. e. where the Sūtradhāra goes out hinting the entrance of a character and thus performs a part superseding that which he has apparently intended for his own, viz. dancing; the S. D. thus defines it:-- यदि प्रयोग एकस्मिन् प्रयोगो$न्यः प्रयुज्यते । तेन पात्रप्रवेशश्चेत् प्रयोगातिशयस्तदा ॥ 29. -अर्थः (= प्रत्युत्क्रमः q. v.). -ग्रहणम् acquirement of practice. -चतुर, -निपुण a. 1 skilled in practice; M.3; चतुःषष्टिकलागमप्रयोगचतुरः Dk.2. 5. -2 practically experienced. -वीर्यम् (with Buddhists) energy in practice. -शास्त्रम् the कल्पसूत्र, which lays down the प्रयोग of various sacrificial acts; प्रयोगशास्त्रमिति चेत् MS.1.3.11.

pralayaḥ	प्रलयः 1 Destruction, annihilation, dissolution; स्थानानि किं हिमवतः प्रलयं गतानि Bh.3.7,69; प्रलयं नीत्वा Si.11.66. 'causing to disappear'. -2 The destruction of the whole universe (at the end of a kalpa), universal destruction; Ku.2.8; अहं कृत्स्नस्य जगतः प्रभवः प्रलय- स्तथा Bg.7.6. -3 Any extensive destruction or devastation. -4 Death, dying, destruction; प्रारब्धाः प्रलयाय मांसवदहो विक्रेतुमेते वयम् Mu.5.21;1.14; यदा सत्त्वे प्रवृद्धे तु प्रलयं याति देहभृत् Bg.14.14. -5 Swoon, fainting, loss of consciousness, syncope; प्रलयान्तोन्मिषिते विलोचने Ku.4.2. -6 (In Rhet.) Loss of consciousness, considered as one of the 33 subordinate feelings; प्रलयः सुखदुःखाद्यै- र्गाढमिन्द्रियमूर्छनम् Pratāparudra. -7 The mystic syllable om. -8 Spiritual unification (लय); बुद्धिः कर्मगुणैर्हीना यदा मनसि वर्तते । तदा संपद्यते ब्रह्म तत्रैव प्रलयं गतम् ॥ Mb.12.24. 17. -9 Sleepiness. -Comp. -कालः the time of universal destruction. -घनः, -जलधरः a cloud at the dissolution of the world. -दहनः the fire at the dissolution of the world. -पयोधिः the ocean at the dissolution of the world.

pralīna	प्रलीन p. p. 1 Melted, dissolved; तथा प्रलीनस्तमसि मूढ- योनिषु जायते Bg.14.15. -2 Annihilated, destroyed. -3 Insensible, unconscious. -4 Concealed; hidden; इति प्रलीनां नलिनीवने सखीं विदांबभूवुः सुचिरेण योषितः Ki.8.36. -5 Lost, died.

pralopaḥ	प्रलोपः Destruction, annihilation.

pravāhaḥ	प्रवाहः 1 Flowing or streaming forth. -2 A stream, course, current; प्रवाहस्ते वारां श्रियमयमपारां दिशतु नः G. L.2; R.5.46;13.1,48; Ku.1.54; Me.48. -3 Flow, running water. -4 Continuous flow, unbroken succession, continuity. -5 Course of events (rolling onward like a stream). -6 Activity, active occupation. -7 A pond, lake. -8 Course or direction towards. -9 An excellent horse. (प्रवाहेमूत्रितम् means (lit.) making water in a stream; (fig.) doing a useless action).

praveśakaḥ	प्रवेशकः 'The introducer', an interlude acted by inferior characters (such as servants, buffoon &c.) for the purpose of acquainting the audience with events not represented on the stage, but a knowledge of which is essential for the proper understanding of what follows; (like the Viṣkambhaka it connects the story of the drama and the subdivisions of the plot, by briefly referring to what has occurred in the intervals of the acts, or what is likely to happen at the end; it never occurs at the beginning of the first act or at the end of the last). S. D. thus defines it:-प्रवेशको$नु- दात्तोक्त्या नीचपात्रप्रयोजितः । अङ्कद्वयान्तर्विज्ञेयः शेषं विष्कम्भके यथा ॥ 39; see विष्कम्भक; cf. Ve.3.

pravartanam	प्रवर्तनम् 1 Going on, moving forward. -2 Beginning, commencement. -3 Setting on foot, founding, establishing, instituting. -4 Prompting, urging, simulating, inciting. -5 Engaging in, applying oneself to. -6 Happening, coming to pass. -7 Activity, action. -8 Behaviour, conduct, procedure. -9 Directing, superintending. -1 Employment. -11 Exhortation. -ना Inciting or prompting to action; अस्ति प्रवर्तनारूपमनुरूपं चतुर्ष्वपि Bh.

pravṛtta	प्रवृत्त p. p. 1 Begun, commenced, proceeded with. -2 Set in; अचिरप्रवृत्तं ग्रीष्मसमयमधिकृत्य Ś.1. -3 Engaged in, occupied with. -4 Going to, bound for. -5 Fixed, settled, determined. -6 Unimpeded, undisputed. -7 Round. -8 Flowing, running; प्रवृत्तमुदकं वायु सर्वं वानेय- माश्रयेत् Mb.14.46.12. -9 Circulated (as a book). -1 Offending, hurting. -त्तः A round ornament. -त्तम् An action, undertaking. -Comp. -चक्रता f. sovereign power; प्रवृत्तचक्रतां चैव वाणिज्यप्रभृतीनपि Y.1.266. -वाक् of fluent speeh, eloquent; Mb.5.33.28.

prasaraṇam	प्रसरणम् 1 Going forth, running or streaming forth. -2 Escaping, running away. -3 Spreading forth or abroad. -4 Surrounding an enemy. -5 Amiability. -6 Morbid displacement of the humours of the body.

prastāvaḥ	प्रस्तावः 1 Beginning, commencement. -2 An introduction. -3 Mention, allusion, reference; नाममात्रप्रस्तावः Ś.7. -4 An occasion, opportunity, time, season; fit or proper time; त्वराप्रस्तावोयं न खलु परिहासस्य विषयः Māl.9. 45; शिष्याय बृहतां पत्युः प्रस्तावमदिशद् दृशा Śi.2.68. -5 The occasion of a discourse, subject, topic. -6 The prologue of a drama; see प्रस्तावना below. -7 The prelude or introductory words of a Sāman; लोकेषु पञ्चविधं सामोपासीत पृथिवी हिंकारो$ग्निः प्रस्तावः˚ Ch. Up.2.2.1. -8 An introductory praise. (प्रस्तावे ind. on a suitable occasion, seasonably. प्रस्तावेन 1 incidentally, occasionally. -2 suitably). -Comp. -यज्ञः a conversation in which each interlocutor takes a part. -सदृश a. suited to the occasion, appropriate.

prastāvanā	प्रस्तावना 1 Causing to be praised or mentioned, praising, praise. -2 Beginning, commencement; आर्य बालचरितप्रस्तावनाडिण्डिमः Mv.1.54. -3 An introduction, preface, exordium (in general); प्रस्तावना इयं कपटनाटकस्य Māl.2. -4 Sounding forth. -5 An introductory dialogue (the prologue) at the beginning of a drama between the manager and one of the actors, which, after giving an account of the author and his qualifications &c., introduces the audience to the incidents of the drama; (for definition, see आमुख).

prasvāraḥ	प्रस्वारः Ved. An epithet of the sacred syllable om (repeated at the beginning of a Pāṭha or lesson).

prāyaṇam	प्रायणम् 1 Entrance, beginning, commencement. -2 The path of life. -3 Voluntary death; पुत्रे राज्यं समासृज्य कुर्वीत प्रायणं रणे Ms.9.323. -4 Taking refuge, refuge; प्रायणं हि सतामहम् Bhāg.11.11.48;6.5.31. -5 Death; मनुष्येषु प्रायणान्तमोङ्कारमभिध्यायीत Praśna Up.5.1. -6 A kind of food (prepared in milk); प्रायणं भगवत्प्रोक्तं भुञ्जते वा$ग्रभोजनम् Mb.12.335.25.

prārabdhiḥ	प्रारब्धिः f. 1 Beginning, commencement. -2 A post to which an elephant is fastened; or a rope for fastening him.

prārambhaḥ	प्रारम्भः 1 Beginning, commencement; प्रारम्भे$पि त्रियामा तरुणयति निजं नीलिमानं वनेषु Māl.5.6; R.1.9;18.49. -2 An undertaking, deed, enterprize; फलानुमेयाः प्रारम्भाः संस्काराः प्राक्तना इव R.1.2.

prārambhaṇam	प्रारम्भणम् Commencing, beginning.

pronmathin	प्रोन्मथिन् a. Destroying, annihilating.

bakaḥ	बकः 1 The Indian crane; न प्रयत्नशतेनापि शुकवत् पाठ्यते बकः H. -2 A cheat, rogue, hypocrite (the crane being a very cunning bird that knows well how to draw others into its clutches). -3 N. of a demon killed by Bhīma. -4 N. of another demon killed by Kṛiṣṇa. -5 N. of Kubera. -6 An apparatus for subliming metals or minerals. -की = पूतना q. v. अहो बकी यं स्तनकालकूटं जिघांस- यापाययदप्यसाध्वी Bhāg.3.2.23. -2 A female crane. -Comp. -चरः, -वृत्तिः, -व्रतचरः, -व्रतिकः, -व्रतिन् m. 'acting like a crane', a false devotee, religious hypocrite; अधोदृष्टिर्नैष्कृतिकः स्वार्थसाधनतत्परः । शठो मिथ्याविनीतश्च बकव्रतचरो द्विजः ॥ Ms.4.196. -चिञ्चिका, -चिञ्ची a kind of fish. -जित् m., -निषूदनः epithets of 1 Bhīma. -2 of Kṛiṣṇa. -धूपः a kind of perfume. -पञ्चकम् the last five days of the bright half of the month of Kārtika (during which even the heron no fish). -यन्त्रम् a kind of retort. -व्रतम् 'crane-like conduct', hypocrisy; ये बकव्रतिनो विप्राः Ms.4.197; see also 196 (बकव्रतचर). -सहवासिन् a lotus flower; Kuval.

bādh	बाध् 1 Ā. (बाधते, बाधित) 1 To harass, oppress, torment, press hard, annoy, trouble, disturb, vex, pain (persons or things); ऊनं न सत्त्वेष्वधिको बबाधे R.2.14; भूरिभारभराक्रान्तः स्कन्ध एष नु बाधति । न तथा बाधते स्कन्धो यथा बाधति बाधते Subhāṣ.; Me.55; Ms.9.226;1.129; Bk.14.45. -2 To resist, oppose, thwart, check, obstruct, arrest, interfere with; गुणानुरागादिव सख्यमीयिवान् न बाधते$स्य त्रिगणः परस्परम् Ki.1.11; U.5.19. -3 To attack, assault, assail; स तदा लब्धतीर्थो$पि न बबाधे निरायुधम् Bhāg.3.19.4. -4 To wrong, violate. -5 To hurt, injure. -6 To drive away, repel, remove; उष्णेन बाध्यते शीतं शीतेनोष्णं प्रबाध्यते Mb.12.16.12. -7 To suspend, set aside, annul, annihilate, abolish (as a rule &c.); न धर्ममर्थकामाभ्यां बबाधे न च तेन तौ R.17.57. -Caus. -1 To oppress, torment, harass &c. -2 To subdue, conquer. -With अभि 1 to hurt, injure. -2 to vex, harass, torment. -आ to vex, torment, injure. -परि to trouble, afflict; मोहान्मया सुतनु पूर्वमुपेक्षितस्ते यो बाष्पबिन्दुरधरं परिबाध- मानः Ś.7.25. -सम् to trouble, torment.

bāla	बाल a. 1 Young, infantine, not full-grown or developed (of persons or things); बालेन स्थविरेण वा Ms. 8.7; बालाशोकमुपोढरागसुभगं भेदोन्मुखं तिष्ठति V.2.7; so बालमन्दारवृक्षः Me.77; R.2.45;13.24. -2 Newly risen, young (as the sun or its rays); बालार्कप्रतिमे- वाप्सु वीचिभिन्ना पतिष्यतः R.12.1. -3 New, waxing (as the moon); पुपोष वृद्धिं हरिदश्वदीधितेरनुप्रवेशादिव बाल- चन्द्रमाः R.3.22; Ku.3.29. -4 Puerile. -5 Ignorant, unwise; अनर्थकुशला ह्येते बालाः पण्डितमानिनः Rām.2.1.38. -6 Pure (as an animal fit for sacrifice). -लः 1 A child, an infant; बालादपि सुभाषितम् (ग्राह्यम्); Ms.2.239. -2 A boy, youth, young person. -3 A minor (under 16 years of age); बाल आषोडशाद्वर्षात् Nārada. -4 A colt, foal. -5 A fool, simpleton; नीरसायां रसं बालो बालिकायां विकल्पयेत् Pt.4.91. -6 (a) A tail. (b) An elephant's or a horse's tail. -7 Hair; तं केशपाशं प्रसमीक्ष्य कुर्युर्बालप्रियत्वं शिथिलं चमर्यः Ku.1.48. -8 An elephant five years old; 'पञ्चवर्षो गजो बालः पोतस्तु दशवार्षिकः' Vaijayantī. According to Mātaṅga L. (5.2.) however it means an elephant in the first year. -9 A kind of perfume. -1 The cocoa-nut. -Comp. -अग्रम् 1 the point of a hair. -2 A dove-cot; प्रासादबालाग्रकपोतपालिकायामुपविष्टः शृणोमि Mk.1.51/ 52. -अध्यापकः a tutor of youths or children. -अपत्यम् youthful progeny. -अभ्यासः study during childhood, early application (to study). -अरुण a. red like early dawn. (-णः) early dawn; morning sun. -अर्कः the newly-risen sun; R.12.1. -अवबोधः, -नम् instruction of the young; Pt.1. -अवस्थ a. juvenile, young; भुवमधिपतिर्बालाबस्थो$प्यलं परिरक्षितुम् V.5.18. -अवस्था childhood. -आतपः morning sunshine. -आमयः a child's disease. -इन्दुः the new or waxing moon; बालेन्दुवक्राप्य- विकाशभावाद् बभुः पलाशान्यतिलोहितानि Ku.3.29. -इष्टः the jujube tree. -उपचारः, -चरणम् (medical) treatment of children. -उपवीतम् 1 a piece of cloth used to cover the privities. -2 The sacrificial cord. -कदली a young plantain tree. -काण्डम् the first book of the Rāmāyaṇa. -कुन्दः, -दम् a kind of young jasmine. (-दम्) a young jasmine blossom; अलके बालकुन्दानुविद्धम् Me.67. -कृमिः a louse. -कृष्णः Kṛiṣṇa as a boy. -केलिः, -ली f. child's play or amusement. -क्रीडनम् a child's play or toy. -क्रीडनकम् a child's toy. -कः 1 a ball. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -क्रीडा a child's play, childish or juvenile sport. -खिल्यः a class of divine personages of the size of a thumb and produced from the creator's body and said to precede the sun's chariot (their number is said to be sixty thousand); cf. R.15.1; क्रतोश्च सन्ततिर्भार्या बालखिल्यानसूयत । षष्टिर्यानि सहस्राणि ऋषिणामूर्ध्व- रेतसाम् ॥ Mārk. P. -गर्भिणी a cow with calf for the first time. -गोपालः 'the youthful cowherd', an epithet of Kṛiṣṇa, as the boycowherd. -ग्रहः any demon (or planetary influence) teasing or injuring children; बालग्रहस्तत्र विचिन्वती शिशून् Bhāg.1.6.7. -घ्नः a childslayer, infanticide; Ms.11.19. -चन्द्रः -चन्द्रमस् m. 1 the young or waxing moon; इह जगति महोत्सवस्य हेतुर्नयनवतामुदियाय बालचन्द्रः Māl.2.1. -2 a cavity of a particular shape; Mk.3.13. -चरितम् 1 juvenile sports. -2 early life or actions; U.6. -चर्यः N. of Kārtikeya. (-र्या) the bahaviour of a child. -चुम्बालः a fish; Nigh. Ratn. -चतः a young mango-tree; धत्तेचक्षुर्मुकुलिनि रणत्कोकिले बालचूते Māl.3.12. -ज a. produced from hair. -जातीय a. childish, foolish, simple. -तनयः the Kha- dira tree. -तन्त्रम् midwifery. -तृणम् young grass. -दलकः the Khadira. -धनम् the property of a minor; Ms.8.149. -धिः (also बालधिः) a hairy tail; तुरंगमैरा- यतकीर्णवालधिः Śi.12.73; Ki.12.47. -नेत्र a. guided or steered by a fool. -पत्रः, -पत्रकः the Khadira tree. -पाश्या 1 an ornament worn in the hair when parted. -2 a string of pearls binding or intertwining the braid of hair. -पुष्टिका, -पुष्टी, -पुष्पी a kind of jasmine. -बोधः 1 instructing the young. -2 any work adapted to the capacities of the young or inexperienced. -भद्रकः a kind of poison. -भारः a large bushy tail; बाधेतोल्का- क्षपितचमरीबालभारो दवाग्निः Me.55. -भावः 1 child-hood, infancy. -2 a hairy growth; एतद्भ्रुवौ जन्म तदाप युग्मं लीलाचलत्वोचितबालभावम् N.7.26. -3 inattention; Ms. 8.118. (Kull.) -4 children (collectively). -5 recent rise (of a planet). -भृत्यः a servant from childhood. -भैषज्यम् a kind of collyrium. -भोज्यः pease. -मनो- रमा N. of several grammars. -मरणम् (with Jainas) a fool's manner of dying (12 in number). -मित्रः a friend from boyhood. -मृगः a fawn. -मूलम् a young radish. -मूषिका a small mouse. -मृणालः a tender filament or fibre (of lotus); व्यालं बालमृणालतन्तुभिरसौ रोद्धुं समुज्म्भते Bh.2.6. -यज्ञोपवीतकम् the sacred thread worn across the breast. -राजम् lapis lazuli. -रोगः a child's disease; अथ बालरोगाणां निदानानि लक्षणानि चाह । धात्र्यास्तु गुरुभिर्भोज्यैर्विषमैर्दोषलैस्तथा ...... Bhāva. P. -लता a young creeper; अवाकिरन् बाललताः प्रसूनैः R.2.1. -लीला child's play, juvenile pastime. -वत्सः 1 a young calf. -2 a pigeon. -वायजम् lapis lazuli. -वासस् n. a woollen garment. -वाह्यः a young or wild goat. -विधवा a child-widow. -वैधव्यम् child-widowhood. -व्यजनम् a chowrie or fly-flapper (usually made of the tail of the yāk or Bos Grunniens and used as one of the royal insignia); यस्यार्थयुक्तं गिरिराजशब्दं कुर्वन्ति बाल- व्यजनैश्चमर्यः Ku.1.13; R.9.66;14.11;16.33,57. -व्रतः an epithet of a Buddha saint Mañjughoṣa. -सखि m. a friend from childhood. -संध्या early twilight. -सात्म्यम् milk. -सुहृद् m. a friend of one's youth. -सूर्यः, -सूर्यकः lapis lazuli. -स्थानम् 1 childhood. -2 youth. -3 inexperience. -हत्या infanticide. -हस्तः a hairy tail.

bodhiḥ	बोधिः [बुध्-इन्] 1 Perfect wisdom or enlightenment; इत्यभिहितो बोधौ जिनः पातु वः Nāg.1.1. स रतिमुपसिषेवे बोधि- मापन्न यावत् Bu. Ch.2.56. -2 The enlightened intellect of a Buddha. -3 The sacred fig-tree. -4 A cock. -5 An epithet of Buddha. -Comp. -अङ्गम् a requisite for attaining perfect knowledge. -तरुः, -द्रुमः, -वृक्षः the sacred fig-tree, -दः an arhat (of the Jainas). -मण्डलम् N. of the place where Gautama Buddha attained to perfect wisdom. -सत्त्वः 1 a Buddhist saint, one who is on the way to the attainment of perfect knowledge and has only a certain number of births to undergo before attaining to the state of a Supreme Buddha and complete annihilation (this position could be attained by a long series of pious and virtuous deeds); एवंविधैर्विलसितैरतिबोधिसत्त्वैः Māl.1.21; उद्योतयन्नुत्त- मबोधिसत्त्वः Bu. Ch.1.16. -2 N. of the principal Buddha of the present era.

brahman	ब्रह्मन् n. [बृंह्-मनिन् नकारस्याकारे ऋतो रत्वम्; cf. Uṇ.4.145.] 1 The Supreme Being, regarded as impersonal and divested of all quality and action; (according to the Vedāntins, Brahman is both the efficient and the material cause of the visible universe, the all-pervading soul and spirit of the universe, the essence from which all created things are produced and into which they are absorbed; अस्ति तावन्नित्यशुद्धबुद्धमुक्तस्वभावं सर्वज्ञं सर्वशक्तिसमन्वितं ब्रह्म Ś. B.); ... यत्प्रयन्त्यभिसंविशन्ति । तद् विजिज्ञा- सस्व । तद् ब्रह्मेति Tai. Up.3.1; समीभूता दृष्टिस्त्रिभुवनमपि ब्रह्म मनुते Bh.3.84; Ku.3.15; दर्शनं तस्य लाभः स्यात् त्वं हि ब्रह्ममयो निधिः Mb. -2 A hymn of praise. -3 A sacred text; मैवं स्याद् ब्रह्मविक्रिया Bhāg.9.1.17. -4 The Vedas; ब्रह्मणः प्रणवं कुर्यात् Ms.2.74; यद् ब्रह्म सम्यगाम्नातम् Ku.6.16; U.1.15; समस्तवदनोद्गीतब्रह्मणे ब्रह्मणे नमः Bm.1.1; Bg.3.15. -5 The sacred and mystic syllable om; एकाक्षरं परं ब्रह्म Ms.2.83. -6 The priestly of Brahmanical class (collectively); तदेतद् ब्रह्म क्षत्रं विट् शूद्रः Bṛi. Up.1.4.15; ब्रह्मैव संनियन्तृ स्यात् क्षत्रं हि ब्रह्मसंभवम् Ms.9.32. -7 The power or energy of a Brāhmaṇa; पवनाग्निसमागमो ह्ययं सहितं ब्रह्म यदस्त्रतेजसा R.8.4. -8 Religious penance or austerities. -9 Celibacy, chastity; शाश्वते ब्रह्मणि वर्तते Ś.1. -1 Final emancipation or beatitude. -11 Theology, sacred learning, religious knowledge. -12 The Brāhmaṇa portion of the Veda. -13 Wealth. -14 Food. -15 A Brāhmaṇa. -16 Truth. -17 The Brāhmaṇahood (ब्राह्मणत्व); येन विप्लावितं ब्रह्म वृषल्यां जायतात्मना Bhāg.6.2.26. -18 The soul (आत्मा); एतदेषां ब्रह्म Bṛi. Up.1.6.1-3. -19 See ब्रह्मास्त्र. अब्राह्मणे न हि ब्रह्म ध्रुवं तिष्ठेत् कदाचन Mb.12.3.31. -2 The गायत्री mantra; उभे सन्ध्ये च यतवाग्जपन् ब्रह्म समाहितः Bhāg.7. 12.2. -m. 1 The Supreme Being, the Creator, the first deity of the sacred Hindu Trinity, to whom is entrusted the work of creating the world. [The accounts of the creation of the world differ in many respects; but, according to Manu Smṛiti, the universe was enveloped in darkness, and the self-existent Lord manifested himself dispelling the gloom. He first created the waters and deposited in them a seed. This seed became a golden egg, in which he himself was born as Brahmā-the progenitor of all the worlds. Then the Lord divided the egg into two parts, with which he constructed heaven and earth. He then created the ten Prajāpatis or mind-born sons who completed the work of creation. According to another account (Rāmāyaṇa) Brahmā sprang from ether; from him was descended marīchi, and his son was Kaśyapa. From Kaśyapa sprang Vivasvata, and Manu sprang from him. Thus Manu was the procreator of all human beings. According to a third account, the Supreme deity, after dividing the golden egg, separated himself into two parts, male and female, from which sprang Virāj and from him Manu; cf. Ku.2.7. and Ms.1.32 et seq. Mythologically Brahman is represented as being born in a lotus which sprang from the navel of Viṣṇu, and as creating the world by an illicit connection with his own daughter Sarasvatī. Brahman had originally five heads, but one of them was cut down by Śiva with the ring-finger or burnt down by the fire from his third eye. His vehicle is a swan. He has numerous epithets, most of which have reference to his birth, in a lotus.] -2 A Brāhmaṇa; Ś.4.4. -3 A devout man. -4 One of the four Ritvijas or priests employed at a Soma sacrifice. -5 One conversant with sacred knowledge. -6 The sun. -7 Intellect. -8 An epithet of the seven Prajāpatis :-मरीचि, अत्रि, अङ्गिरस्, पुलस्त्य, पुलह, क्रतु and वसिष्ठ. -9 An epithet of Bṛihaspati; ब्रह्मन्नध्ययनस्य नैष समयस्तूष्णीं बहिः स्थीयताम् Hanumannāṭaka. -1 The planet Jupiter; ब्रह्मराशिं समावृत्य लोहिताङ्गो व्यवस्थितः Mb. 3.6.18. -11 The world of Brahmā (ब्रह्मलोक); दमस्त्यागो- $प्रमादश्च ते त्रयो ब्रह्मणो हयाः Mb.11.7.23. -1 Of Śiva. -Comp. -अक्षरम् the sacred syllable om. -अङ्गभूः 1 a horse. -2 one who has touched the several parts of his body by the repetition of Mantras; स च त्वदेकेषुनिपात- साध्यो ब्रह्माङ्गभूर्ब्रह्मणि योजितात्मा Ku.3.15 (see Malli. thereon). -अञ्जलिः 1 respectful salutation with folded hands while repeating the Veda. -2 obeisance to a preceptor (at the beginning and conclusion of the repetition of the Veda); अपश्यद्यावतो वेदविदां ब्रह्माञ्जलीनसौ N.17.183; ब्रह्मारम्भे$वसाने च पादौ ग्राह्यौ गुरोः सदा । संहत्य हस्तावध्येयं स हि ब्रह्माञ्जलिः स्मृतः ॥ Ms.2.71. -अण्डम् 'the egg of Brahman', the primordial egg from which the universe sprang, the world, universe; ब्रह्माण्डच्छत्रदण्डः Dk.1. ˚कपालः the hemisphere of the world. ˚भाण्डोदरम् the hollow of the universe; ब्रह्मा येन कुलालवन्नियमितो ब्रह्माण्ड- भाण्डोदरे Bh.2.95. ˚पुराणम् N. of one of the eighteen Purāṇas. -अदि(द्रि)जाता an epithet of the river Godāvarī. -अधिगमः, अधिगमनम् study of the Vedas. -अम्भस् n. the urine of a cow. -अभ्यासः the study of the Vedas. -अयणः, -नः an epithet of Nārāyaṇa. -अरण्यम् 1 a place of religious study. -2 N. of a forest. -अर्पणम् 1 the offering of sacred knowledge. -2 devoting oneself to the Supreme Spirit. -3 N. of a spell. -4 a mode of performing the Śrāddha in which no Piṇḍas or rice-balls are offered. -अस्त्रम् a missile presided over by Brahman. -आत्मभूः a horse. -आनन्दः bliss or rapture of absorption into Brahma; ब्रह्मानन्दसाक्षात्क्रियां Mv.7.31. -आरम्भः beginning to repeat the Vedas; Ms.2.71. -आवर्तः N. of the tract between the rivers Sarasvatī and Dṛiṣavatī (northwest of Hastināpura); सरस्वतीदृषद्वत्योर्देवनद्योर्यदन्तरम् । तं देवनिर्मितं देशं ब्रह्मावर्तं प्रचक्षते Ms.2.17,19; Me.5. -आश्रमः = ब्रह्मचर्याश्रमः; वेदाध्ययननित्यत्वं क्षमा$थाचार्यपूजनम् । अथोपाध्यायशुश्रूषा ब्रह्माश्रमपदं भवेत् ॥ Mb.12.66.14. -आसनम् a particular position for profound meditation. -आहुतिः f. 1 the offering of prayers; see ब्रह्मयज्ञ. -2 the study of the Vedas. -उज्झता forgetting or neglecting the Vedas; Ms.11.57 (अधीतवेदस्यानभ्यासेन विस्मरणम् Kull.). -उत्तर a. 1 treating principally of Brahman. -2 consisting chiefly of Brāhmaṇas. -उद्यम् explaining the Veda, treatment or discussion of theological problems; ब्राह्मणा भगवन्तो हन्ताहमिमं द्वौ प्रश्नौ प्रक्ष्यामि तौ चेन्मे वक्ष्यति न वै जातु युष्माकमिमं कश्चिद् ब्रह्मोद्यं जेतेति Bṛi. Up. -उपदेशः instruction in the Vedas or sacred knowledge. ˚नेतृ m. the Palāśa tree. -ऋषिः (ब्रह्मर्षिः or ब्रह्माऋषिः) a Brahmanical sage. ˚देशः N. of a district; (कुरुक्षेत्रं च मत्स्याश्च पञ्चालाः शूरसेनकाः । एष ब्रह्मर्षिदेशो वै ब्रह्मावर्तादनन्तरः Ms.2.19). -ओदनः, -नम् food given to the priests at a sacrifice. -कन्यका an epithet of Sarasvatī. -करः a tax paid to the priestly class. -कर्मन् n. 1 the religious duties of a Brāhmaṇa, the office of Brahman, one of the four principal priests at a sacrifice. -कला an epithet of Dākṣāyaṇī (who dwells in the heart of man). -कल्पः an age of Brahman. -काण्डम् the portion of the Veda relating to spiritual knowledge. -काष्ठः the mulberry tree. -किल्बिषम् an offence against Brāhmaṇas. -कूटः a thoroughly learned Brāhmaṇa. -कूर्चम् a kind of penance; अहोरात्रोषितो भूत्वा पौर्णमास्यां विशेषतः । पञ्चगव्यं पिबेत् प्रातर्ब्रह्मकूर्चमिति स्मृतम् ॥. -कृत् one who prays. (-m.) an epithet of Viṣṇu. -कोशः the treasure of the Vedas, the entire collection of the Vedas; क्षात्रो धर्मः श्रित इव तनुं ब्रह्मकोशस्य गुप्त्यै U.6.9. -गायत्री N. of a magical mantra composed after the model of गायत्री mantra. -गिरिः N. of a mountain. -गीता f. The preaching of Brahmā as included in the Anuśāsana parva of the Mahābhārata. -गुप्तः N. of an astronomer born in 598. A. D. -गोलः the universe. -गौरवम् respect for the missile presided over by Brahman; विष्कम्भितुं समर्थो$पि ना$चलद् ब्रह्मगौरवात् Bk.9.76 (मा भून्मोघो ब्राह्मः पाश इति). -ग्रन्थिः 1 N. of a particular joint of the body. -2 N. of the knot which ties together the 3 threads of the यज्ञोपवीत. -ग्रहः, -पिशाचः, -पुरुषः, -रक्षस् n., -राक्षसः a kind of ghost, the ghost of a Brāhmaṇa, who during his life time indulges in a disdainful spirit and carries away the wives of others and the property of Brāhmaṇas; (परस्य योषितं हृत्वा ब्रह्मस्वमपहृत्य च । अरण्ये निर्जले देशे भवति ब्रह्मराक्षसः ॥ Y.3.212; cf. Ms.12.6 also). -ग्राहिन् a. worthy to receive that which is holy. -घातकः, -घातिन् m. the murderer of a Brāhmaṇa. -घातिनी a woman on the second day of her courses. -घोषः 1 recital of the Veda. -2 the sacred word, the Vedas collectively; U.6.9 (v. l.). -घ्नः the murderer of a Brāhmaṇa. -चक्रम् 1 The circle of the universe; Śvet. Up. -2 N. of a magical circle. -चर्यम् 1 religious studentship, the life of celibacy passed by a Brāhmaṇa boy in studying the Vedas, the first stage or order of his life; अविप्लुतब्रह्मचर्यो गृहस्थाश्रममाचरेत् Ms.3.2;2. 249; Mv.1.24; यदिच्छन्तो ब्रह्मचर्यं चरन्ति तत्ते पदं संग्रहेण ब्रवीम्योमित्येतत् Kaṭh. -2 religious study, self-restraint. -3 celibacy, chastity, abstinence, continence; also ब्रह्म- चर्याश्रम. (-र्यः) a religious student; see ब्रह्मचारिन्. (-र्या) chastity, celibacy. ˚व्रतम् a vow of chastity. ˚स्खलनम् falling off from chastity, incontinence. -चारिकम् the life of a religious student. -चारिन् a. 1 studying the Vedas. -2 practising continence of chastity. (-m.) a religious student, a Brāhmaṇa in the first order of his life, who continues to live with his spiritual guide from the investiture with sacred thread and performs the duties pertaining to his order till he settles in life; ब्रह्मचारी वेदमधीत्य वेदौ वेदान् वा चरेद् ब्रह्मचर्यम् Kaṭhaśrutyopaniṣad 17; Ms.2.41,175;6.87. -2 one who vows to lead the life of a celibate. -3 an epithet of Śiva. -4 of Skanda. -चारिणी 1 an epithet of Durgā. -2 a woman who observes the vow of chastity. -जः an epithet of Kārtikeya. -जन्मन् n. 1 spirtual birth. -2 investiture with the sacred thread; ब्रह्मजन्म हि विप्रस्य प्रेत्य चेह च शाश्वतम् Ms.2.146,17. -जारः the paramour of a Brāhmaṇa's wife; Rāmtā. Up. -जिज्ञासा desire to know Brahman; अयातो ब्रह्मजिज्ञासा Brahmasūtra. -जीविन् a. living by sacred knowledge. (-m.) a mercenary Brāhmaṇa (who converts his sacred knowledge into trade), a Brāhmaṇa who lives by sacred knowledge. -ज्ञानम् knowledge about Brahman; वेदान्तसाङ्ख्यसिद्धान्त- ब्रह्मज्ञानं वदाम्यहम् Garuḍa. P. -ज्ञ, -ज्ञानिन् a. one who knows Brahma. (-ज्ञः) 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya. -2 of Viṣṇu. -ज्ञानम् true or divine knowledge, knowledge of the identity of the universe with Brahma; ब्रह्मज्ञान- प्रभासंध्याकालो गच्छति धीमताम् Paśupata. Up.7. -ज्येष्ठः the elder brother of Brahman; ब्रह्मज्येष्ठमुपासते T. Up.2.5. (-a.) having Brahmā as first or chief. -ज्योतिस् n. 1 the light of Brahma or the Supreme Being. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -तत्त्वम् the true knowledge of the Supreme Spirit. -तन्त्रम् all that is taught in the Veda. -तालः (in music) a kind of measure. -तेजस् n. 1 the glory of Brahman. -2 Brahmanic lustre, the lustre or glory supposed to surround a Brāhmaṇa. -दः a spiritual preceptor; Ms.4.232. -दण्डः 1 the curse of a Brāhmaṇa; एकेन ब्रह्मदण्डेन बहवो नाशिता मम Rām. -2 a tribute paid to a Brāhmaṇa. -3 an epithet of Śiva. -4 N. of a mythical weapon (ब्रह्मास्त्र); स्वरस्य रामो जग्राह ब्रह्मदण्डमिवापरम् Rām.3.3.24. -5 magic, spells, incantation (अभिचार); ब्रह्मदण्डमदृष्टेषु दृष्टेषु चतुरङ्गिणीम् Mb.12. 13.27. -दर्मा Ptychotis Ajowan (Mar. ओवा). -दानम् 1 the imparting of sacred knowledge. -2 sacred knowledge, received as an inheritance or hereditary gift; सर्वेषामेव दानानां ब्रह्मदानं विशिष्यते Ms.4.233. -दायः 1 instruction in the Vedas, the imparting of sacred knowledge. -2 sacred knowledge received as an inheritance; तं प्रतीतं स्वधर्मेण ब्रह्मदायहरं पितुः Ms.3.3. -3 the earthly possession of a Brāhmaṇa. -दायादः 1 one who receives the Vedas as his hereditary gift, a Brāhmaṇa. -2 the son of a Brāhmaṇa. -दारुः the mulberry tree. -दिनम् a day of Brahman. -दूषक a. falsifying the vedic texts; Hch. -देय a. married according to the Brāhma form of marriage; ब्रह्मदेयात्मसंतानो ज्येष्ठसामग एव च Ms.3.185. (-यः) the Brāhma form of marriage. (-यम्) 1 land granted to Brahmaṇas; श्रोत्रियेभ्यो ब्रह्मदेयान्यदण्डकराण्यभिरूपदायकानि प्रयच्छेत् Kau. A.2.1.19. -2 instruction in the sacred knowledge. -दैत्यः a Brāhmaṇa changed into a demon; cf. ब्रह्मग्रह. -द्वारम् entrance into Brahmā; ब्रह्मद्वारमिदमित्येवैतदाह यस्त- पसाहतपाप्मा Maitra. Up.4.4. -द्विष्, -द्वेषिन् a. 1 hating Brāhmaṇas; Ms.3.154 (Kull.). -2 hostile to religious acts or devotion, impious, godless. -द्वेषः hatred of Brāhmaṇas. -धर a. possessing sacred knowledge. -नदी an epithet of the river Sarasvatī. -नाभः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -निर्वाणम् absorption into the Supreme Spirit; स्थित्वास्यामन्तकाले$पि ब्रह्मनिर्वाणमृच्छति Bg.2.72. -2 = ब्रह्मानन्द q. v.; तं ब्रह्मनिर्वाणसमाधिमाश्रितम् Bhāg.4.6.39. -निष्ठ a. absorbed in or intent on the contemplation of the Supreme Spirit; ब्रह्मनिष्ठस्तथा योगी पृथग्भावं न विन्दति Aman. Up.1.31. (-ष्ठः) the mulberry tree. -नीडम् the resting-place of Brahman. -पदम् 1 the rank or position of a Brāhmaṇa. -2 the place of the Supreme Spirit. -पवित्रः the Kuśa grass. -परिषद् f. an assembly of Brāhmṇas. -पादपः, -पत्रः the Palāśa tree. -पारः the final object of all sacred knowledge. -पारायणम् a complete study of the Vedas, the entire Veda; याज्ञवल्क्यो मुनिर्यस्मै ब्रह्मपारायणं जगौ U.4.9; Mv.1.14. -पाशः N. of a missile presided over by Brahman; अबध्नादपरिस्कन्दं ब्रह्मपाशेन विस्फुरन् Bk.9.75. -पितृ m. an epithet of Viṣṇu. -पुत्रः 1 a son of Brahman. -2 N. of a (male) river which rises in the eastern extremity of the Himālaya and falls with the Ganges into the Bay of Bengal. (-त्रा) 1 a kind of vegetable poison. -2 See ब्रह्मपुत्रः (2). (-त्री) an epithet of the river Sarasvatī. -पुरम् the heart; दिव्ये ब्रह्मपुरे ह्येष व्योम्न्यात्मा प्रतिष्ठितः Muṇḍ.2.2.7. -2 the body; Ch. Up. -पुरम्, -पुरी 1 the city of Brahman (in heaven). -2 N. of Benares. -पुराणम् N. of one of the eighteen Purāṇas. -पुरुषः a minister of Brahman (the five vital airs). -प्रलयः the universal destruction at the end of one hundred years of Brahman in which even the Supreme Being is supposed to be swallowed up. -प्राप्तिः f. absorption into the Supreme spirit. -बलम् the Brahmanical power. -बन्धुः 1 a contemptuous term for a Brāhmaṇa, an unworthy Brāhmaṇa (cf. Mar. भटुर्गा); वस ब्रह्मचर्यं न वै सोम्यास्मत्कुलीनो$ननूज्य ब्रह्मबन्धुरिव भवतीति Ch. Up.6.1.1; ब्रह्मबन्धुरिति स्माहम् Bhāg.1.81.16; M.4; V.2. -2 one who is a Brāhmaṇa only by caste, a nominal Brāhmaṇa. -बिन्दुः a drop of saliva sputtered while reciting the Veda. -बीजम् 1 the mystic syllable om; मनो यच्छेज्जितश्वासो ब्रह्मबीजमविस्मरन् Bhāg.2.1.17. -2 the mulberry tree. -ब्रुवः, -ब्रुवाणः one who pretends to be a Brāhmaṇa. -भवनम् the abode of Brahman. -भागः 1 the mulberry tree. -2 the share of the chief priest; अथास्मै ब्रह्मभागं पर्याहरन्ति Śat. Br. -भावः absorption into the Supreme Spirit -भावनम् imparting religious knowledge; छेत्ता ते हृदयग्रन्थिमौदर्यो ब्रह्मभावनः Bhāg.3.24.4. -भिद् a. dividing the one Brahma into many. -भुवनम् the world of Brahman; आ ब्रह्म- भुवनाल्लोकाः पुनरावर्तिनो$र्जुन Bg.8.16. -भूत a. become one with Brahma, absorbed into the Supreme Spirit; आयुष्मन्तः सर्व एव ब्रह्मभूता हि मे मताः Mb.1.1.14. -भूतिः f. twilight. -भूमिजा a kind of pepper. -भूयम् 1 identity with Brahma, absorption or dissolution into Brahma, final emancipation; स ब्रह्मभूयं गतिमागजाम R.18.28; ब्रह्मभूयाय कल्पते Bg.14.26; Ms.1.98. -2 Brahmanahood, the state or rank of a Brāhmaṇa. धृष्टाद्धार्ष्टमभूत् क्षत्र ब्रह्मभूयं गतं क्षितौ Bhāg.9.2.17. -भूयस n. absorption into Brahma. -मङ्गलदेवता an epithet of Lakshmī. -महः a festival in honour of Brāhmaṇas. -मित्र a. having Brāhmaṇas for friends. -मीमांसा the Vedānta philosophy which inquires into the nature of Brahma or Supreme Spirit. -मुहूर्तः a particular hour of the day. -मूर्ति a. having the form of Brahman. -मूर्धभृत् m. an epithet of Śiva. -मेखलः the Munja plant. -यज्ञः one of the five daily Yajñas or sacrifices (to be performed by a householder), teaching and reciting the Vedas; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः Ms.3.7 (अध्यापनशब्देन अध्य- यनमपि गृह्यते Kull.) -योगः cultivation or acquisition of spiritual knowledge. -योनि a. 1 sprung from Brahman; गुरुणा ब्रह्मयोनिना R.1.64. (-निः) f. 1 original source in Brahman. -2 the author of the Vedas or of Brahman; किं पुनर्ब्रह्मयोनेर्यस्तव चेतसि वर्तते Ku.6.18. ˚स्थ a. intent on the means of attaining sacred knowledge; ब्राह्मणा ब्रह्मयोनिस्था ये स्वकर्मण्यवस्थिताः Ms.1.74. -रत्नम् a valuable present made to a Brāhmaṇa. -रन्ध्रम् an aperture in the crown of the head through which the soul is said to escape on its leaving the body; आरोप्य ब्रह्मरन्ध्रेण ब्रह्म नीत्वोत्सृजेत्तनुम् Bhāg.11.15.24. -राक्षसः See ब्रह्मग्रह; छिद्रं हि मृगयन्ते स्म विद्वांसो ब्रह्मराक्षसाः Rām. 1.8.17. -रवः muttering of prayers. -रसः Brahma's savour. ˚आसवः Brahma's nectar. -रातः an epithet of Śuka; Bhāg.1.9.8. -रात्रः early dawn. -रात्रिः an epithet of Yājñavalkya, (wrong for ब्रह्मरातिः) -राशिः 1 the whole mass or circle of sacred knowledge. -2 an epithet of Paraśurāma. -3 a particular constellation. -रीतिः f. a kind of brass. -रे(ले)खा -लिखितम्, -लेखः lines written by the creator on the forehead of a man which indicate his destiny, the predestined lot of any man. -लोकः the world of Brahman. -लौकिक a. inhabiting the ब्रह्मलोक. -वक्तृ m. an expounder of the Vedas. -वद्यम् knowledge of Brahma. -वधः, -वध्या, -हत्या the murder of a Brāhmaṇa. -वर्चस् n., -वर्चसम् 1 divine glory or splendour, spiritual pre-eminence or holiness resulting from sacred knowledge; स य एवमेतद्रथन्तरमग्नौ प्रोतं वेद ब्रह्मवर्चस्यन्नादो भवति Ch. Up.2.12.2; (तस्य) हेतुस्त्वद्ब्रह्मवर्चसम् R.1.63; Ms.2.37;4.94. -2 the inherent sanctity or power of a Brāhmaṇa; Ś.6. -वर्चसिन्, -वर्चस्विन् a. holy or sanctified by spiritual pre-eminence, holy; अपृथग्धीरुपा- सीत ब्रह्मवर्चस्व्यकल्मषः Bhāg.11.17.32. (-m.) an eminent or holy Brāhmaṇa; ब्रह्मवर्चस्विनः पुत्रा जायन्ते शिष्टसंमताः Ms. 3.39. -वर्तः see ब्रह्मावर्त. -वर्धनम् copper. -वाच् f. the sacred text. -वादः a discourse on the sacred texts; ब्रह्मवादः सुसंवृत्तः श्रुतयो यत्र शेरते Bhāg.1.87.1. -वादिन् m. 1 one who teaches or expounds the Vedas; U.1; Māl.1. -2 a follower of the Vedānta philosophy; तस्याभिषेक आरब्धो ब्राह्मणैर्ब्रह्मवादिभिः Bhāg.4.15.11. (-नी) an epithet of Gāyatrī; आयाहि वरदे देवि त्र्यक्षरे ब्रह्मवादिनि Gāyatryāvāhanamantra. -वासः the abode of Brāhmaṇas. -विद्, -विद a. 1 knowing the Supreme Spirit; ब्रह्मविद् ब्रह्मैव भवति. (-m.) a sage, theologian, philosopher. -विद्या, -वित्त्वम् knowledge of the Supreme Spirit. ब्रह्मविद्यापरिज्ञानं ब्रह्मप्राप्तिकरं स्थितम् Śuka. Up.3.1. -विन्दुः see ब्रह्मबिन्दु. -विवर्धनः an epithet of Indra. -विहारः a pious conduct, perfect state; Buddh. -वीणा a particular Vīṇā. -वृक्षः 1 the Palāśa tree. -2 the Udumbara tree. -वृत्तिः f. livelihood of a Brāhmaṇa; ब्रह्मवृत्त्या हि पूर्णत्वं तया पूर्णत्वमभ्यसेत् Tejobindu Up.1.42. -वृन्दम् an assemblage of Brāhmaṇas. -वेदः 1 knowledge of the Vedas. -2 monotheism, knowledge of Brahma. -3 the Veda of the Brāhmaṇas (opp. क्षत्रवेद). -4 N. of the Atharvaveda; ब्रह्मवेदस्याथर्वर्णं शुक्रमत एव मन्त्राः प्रादु- र्बभूवुः Praṇava Up.4. -वेदिन् a. knowing the Vedas; cf. ब्रह्मविद्. -वैवर्तम् N. of one of the eighteen Purāṇas -व्रतम् a vow of chastity. -शल्यः Acacia Arabica (Mar. बाभळ). -शाला 1 the hall of Brahman. -2 a place for reciting the Vedas. -शासनम् 1 a decree addressed to Brāhmaṇas. -2 a command of Brahman. -3 the command of a Brāhmaṇa. -4 instruction about sacred duty. -शिरस्, -शीर्षन् n. N. of a particular missile; अस्त्रं ब्रह्मशिरस्तस्मै ततस्तोषाद्ददौ गुरुः Bm.1.649. -श्री N. of a Sāman. -संसद् f. an assembly of Brāhmaṇas. -संस्थ a. wholly devoted to the sacred knowledge (ब्रह्म); ब्रह्मसंस्थो$मृतत्वमेति Ch. Up.2.23.1. -सती an epithet of the river Sarasvatī. -सत्रम् 1 repeating and teaching the Vedas (= ब्रह्मयज्ञ q. v.); ब्रह्मसत्रेण जीवति Ms.4.9; ब्रह्मसत्रे व्यवस्थितः Mb.12.243.4. -2 meditation of Brahma (ब्रह्मविचार); स्वायंभुव ब्रह्मसत्रं जनलोके$भवत् पुरा Bhāg.1.87.9. -3 absorption into the Supreme Spirit. -सत्रिन् a. offering the sacrifice of prayer. -सदस् n. the residence of Brahman. -सभा the hall or court of Brahman. -संभव a. sprung or coming from Brahman. (-वः) N. of Nārada. -सर्पः a kind of snake. -सवः distillation of Soma. -सायुज्यम् complete identification with the Supreme Spirit; cf. ब्रह्मभूय. -सार्ष्टिता identification or union or equality with Brahma; Ms.4.232. -सावर्णिः N. of the tenth Manu; दशमो ब्रह्मसावर्णिरुपश्लोकसुतो महान् Bhāg.8.13.21. -सुतः 1 N. of Nārada, Marīchi &c. -2 a kind of Ketu. -सुवर्चला f. 1 N. of a medicinal plant (ब्राह्मी ?). -2 an infusion (क्वथितमुदक); पिबेद् ब्रह्मसुवर्चलाम् Ms.11.159. -सूः 1 N. of Aniruddha. -2 N. of the god of love. -सूत्रम् 1 the sacred thread worn by the Brāhmaṇas or the twice-born (द्विज) over the shoulder; Bhāg. 1.39.51. -2 the aphorisms of the Vedānta philosophy by Bādarāyaṇa; ब्रह्मसूत्रपदैश्चैव हेतुमद्भिर्विनिश्चितैः Bg.13.4. -सूत्रिन् a. invested with the sacred thread. -सृज् m. an epithet of Śiva. -स्तम्बः the world, universe; ब्रह्मस्तम्बनिकुञ्जपुञ्जितघनज्याघोषघोरं धनुः Mv.3.48. -स्तेयम् acquiring holy knowledge by unlawful means; स ब्रह्मस्तेयसंयुक्तो नरकं प्रतिपद्यते Ms.2.116. -स्थली a place for learning the Veda (पाठशाला); ...... ब्रह्मस्थलीषु च । सरी- सृपाणि दृश्यन्ते ... Rām.6.1.16. -स्थानः the mulberry tree. -स्वम् the property or possessions of a Brāhmaṇa; परस्य योषितं हृत्वा ब्रह्मस्वमपहृत्य च । अरण्ये निर्जले देशे भवति ब्रह्मराक्षसः ॥ Y.3.212. ˚हारिन् a. stealing a Brāhmaṇa's property. -स्वरूप a. of the nature of the Supreme Spirit. -हत्या, -वधः Brahmanicide, killing a Brāhmaṇa; ब्रह्महत्यां वा एते घ्नन्ति Trisuparṇa. हन् a. murderer of a Brāhmaṇa; ब्रह्महा द्वादश समाः कुटीं कृत्वा वने वसेत् Ms.11.72. -हुतम् one of the five daily Yajñas or sacrifices, which consists in offering the rites of hospitality to guests; cf. Ms.3.74. -हृदयः, -यम् N. of a star (Capella).

bha	भः 1 N. of the planet Venus. -2 Error, delusion, mere semblance. -3 An epithet of Śukra. -4 N. given to the base of nouns before the vowel terminations beginning with accusative plural; cf. अङ्ग and पद. -5 A bee. -भम् 1 A star; ननु भान्यमूनि Rām. Ch.6.33; भगणो भाति यद्भयात् Bhāg.3.29.4. -2 A lunar mansion or asterism. -3 A planet. -4 A sign of the zodiac. -5 The number twenty-seven. -Comp. -ईनः, -ईशः 1 the sun. -2 the regent of an asterism. -कक्षा the path of the asterisms. -गणः, वर्गः 1 the group of stars or asterisms. -2 the zodiac. -3 revolution of the planets in the zodiac. -गमः the revolution of a planet; Hch. -गोलः the starry sphere. -चक्रम्, -पञ्जरः, -मण्डलम् the zodiac. ˚नाभिः the centre of the zodiac. -प a. the regent of an asterism. -पतिः the moon. -भ्रमः a sidereal day. -लता Pæderia Foetida (Mar. हरणवेल). -वासरः a sidereal day. -सन्धिः N. of the last quarters of the asterisms, आश्लेषा, ज्येष्ठा and रेवती. -सूचकः an astrologer.

bhaṅgaḥ	भङ्गः [भञ्ज्-भावादौ घञ्] 1 Breaking, breaking down, shattering, tearing down, splitting, dividing; भङ्गः स जिष्णोर्धृतिमुन्ममाथ Ki.17.29. वार्यर्गलाभङ्ग इव प्रवृत्तः R.5.45. -2 A break, fracture, breach. -3 Plucking off, lopping; आम्रकलिकाभङ्ग Ś.6. -4 Separation, analysis. -5 A portion, bit, fragment, detached portion; पुष्पोच्चयः पल्लवभङ्गभिन्नः Ku.3.61; R.16.16. -6 Fall, downfall, decay, destruction, ruin; as in राज्य˚, सत्त्व˚ &c. -7 Breaking up, dispersion; यात्राभङ्ग Māl.1. -8 Defeat, overthrow, discomfiture, rout; भग्ने भग्नमवाप्नुयात् Pt.4.41; प्रसभं भङ्गमभङ्गुरोदयः (नयति) Śi.16.72. -9 Failure, disappointment, frustration; तत्पूर्वभङ्गे वितथप्रयत्नः R.2.42. (v. l.); आशाभङ्ग &c. -1 Rejection, refusal; अभ्यर्थनाभङ्गभयेन साधुर्माध्यस्थमिष्टे$- प्यवलम्बते$र्थे Ku.1.52. -11 A chasm, fissure. -12 Interruption, obstacle, disturbance; निद्रा˚, गति˚ Ki.17.29. -13 Non-performance, suspension, stoppage. -14 Taking to flight, flight. -15 (a) A bend, fold. (b) A wave; क्षौमे भङ्गवती तरङ्गतरले फेनाम्बुतुल्ये वहन् Nāg.5.2; ज्वालाभङ्गैः (= Wavelike flames) Nāg.5.21. -16 Contraction, bending, knitting; ग्रीवाभङ्गाभिरामम् Ś1.7; so भ्रूभङ्ग U.5.36. -17 Going, motion. -18 Paralysis. -19 Fraud, deceit. -2 A canal, water-course. -21 A circumlocutory or round-about way of speaking or acting; see भङ्गि. -22 Hemp. -23 (With Buddhists) The constant decay taking place in the universe; constant change. -24 (With Jainas) A dialectical formula beginning with स्यात्. -Comp. -नयः removal of obstacles. -वासा turmeric. -सार्थ a. dishonest, fraudulent.

bharjana	भर्जन a. [भ्रस्ज् ल्यु ल्युट् वा] Roasting, frying, baking. -2 Annihilating. -नम् 1 The act of roasting or frying; भर्जनं भवबीजानामर्जनं सुखसंपदाम् Rāmarakṣā 36. -2 A frying-pan.

bhedaḥ	भेदः [भिद् घञ्] 1 Breaking; splitting, cleaving; hitting (as a mark). -2 Rending, tearing. -3 Dividing, separating. -4 Piercing through, perforation. -5 (a) Breach, rupture. (b) Breaking open, bursting; V.2.7. -6 Disturbance, interruption. -7 Division, separation. -8 A chasm, gap, fissure, cleft. -9 A hurt, injury, wound. -1 Difference, distinction; तयोर्न भेदप्रतिपत्तिरस्ति मे Bh.3. 99; अगौरवभेदेन Ku.6.12; Bg.18.19,22. रस˚, काल˚ &c.; भेदाभेदयोर्भेदो ग्रहीतव्यः ŚB. on MS.1.6.3. -11 A change, modification; न बुद्धिभेदं जनयेदज्ञानां कर्मसङ्गिनाम् Bg.3.26. -12 Dissension, disunion. -13 Disclosure, betrayal; as in रहस्यभेदः. -14 Treachery, treason; भेदाधीनं कृतं शत्रोः सैन्यं शत्रुबलं स्मृतम् Śukra.4.876. -15 A kind, variety; भेदाः पद्मशङ्खादयो निधेः Ak.; शिरीषपुष्पभेदः &c. -16 Dualism. -17 (In politics) Sowing dissensions in an enemy's party and thus winning him over to one's side, one of the four Upāyas or means of success against an enemy; see उपाय and उपायचतुष्टय; परम्परं तु ये द्विष्टाः क्रुद्धभीतावमानिताः । तेषां भेदं प्रयुञ्जीत परमं दर्शयेद् भयम् ॥ Agni P. -18 Defeat. -19 (In medicine) Evacuation of the bowels. -2 Shooting pain (in the limbs). -21 Paralysis. -22 Contraction. -23 A conjunction of the planets. -24 The hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle. -Comp. -अभेदौ (dual) 1 disunion and union, disagreement and agreement. -2 difference and sameness; भेदाभेद- ज्ञानम्. -उन्मुख a. on the point of bursting forth or opening; बालाशोकमुपोढरागसुभगं भेदोन्मुखं तिष्ठति V.2.7. -कर, -कृत् sowing dissensions. -दर्शिन्, -दृष्टि, -बुद्धि a. considering the universe as distinct from the Supreme Spirit. -प्रत्ययः belief in dualism. -वादिन् m. one who maintains the doctrine of dualism. -विधिः the faculty of discriminating. -सह a. 1 capable of being divided or separated. -2 corruptible, seducible.

bhedikā	भेदिका Destruction, annihilation.

bhojaḥ	भोजः [भुज्-अच्] N. of a celebrated king of Mālvā (or Dhārā); (supposed to have flourished about the end of the tenth or the beginning of the eleventh century, and to have been a great patron of Sanskṛit learning; he is also supposed to have been the author of several learned works, such as सरस्वतीकण्ठाभरण &c.). -2 N. of a country. -3 N. of a king of the Vidarbhas; भोजेन दूतो रघवे विसृष्टः R.5.39;7.18,29,35. -जाः (m. pl.) N. of a people. -Comp. -अधिपः an epithet of 1 Kamsa. -2 Karṇa. -इन्द्रः a king of the Bhojas. -कटम् N. of a town founded by Rukmin. -कुलम् the dynasty of the Bhojas who ruled over the country of Vidarbha or Berar; अभोजयद् भोजकुलाङ्कुरः क्वचित् N.16.48. -देवः, -राजः king Bhoja; धन्यः श्रीभोजराजस्त्रिभुवनविजयी Udb; see (1) above. -पतिः 1 king Bhoja. -2 an epithet of Kamsa.

bhraṃśaḥ	भ्रंशः सः [भ्रंश् भावे घञ्] 1 Falling off, dropping down, fall, slipping or falling down; सेहे$स्य न भ्रंशमतो न लोभात् R.16.74; कनकवलयभ्रंशरिक्तप्रकोष्ठः Me.2. -2 Decline, decrease, decay. -3 Fall, destruction, ruin, overthrow. -4 Running away. -5 Disappearance. -6 Losing, loss, deprivation; स्मृतिभ्रंशाद् बुद्धिनाशः Bg.2.63; so जातिभ्रंश, स्वार्थभ्रंश. -7 Straying, swerving, or deviating from. -8 Abandoning, deserting. -9 (In drama) A slip of the tongue (due to excitement).

maṅgala	मङ्गल a. [मङ्ग्-अलच्; Uṇ.5.7] 1 Auspicious, lucky, propitious, fortunate; मङ्गलदिवसः, मङ्गलवृषभः &c. -2 Prosperous, doing or faring well. -3 Brave. -लम् 1 (a) Auspiciousness, propitiousness; जनकानां रघूणां च यत् कृत्स्नं गोत्रमङ्गलम् U.6.42; R.6.9;1.67. (b) Happiness, good luck or fortune, bliss, felicity; भद्रं भद्रं वितर भगवन् भूयसे मङ्गलाय Māl.1.3; U.3.48. (c) Wellbeing, welfare, good; सङ्गः सतां किमु न मङ्गलमातनोति Bv. 1.122; (also m. in these senses). -2 A good omen, anything tending to an auspicious issue. -3 A blessing, benediction. -4 An auspicious or lucky object. -5 An auspicious occasion or event, a festivity. -6 Any solemn or auspicious ceremony or rite (such as marriage). -7 Any ancient custom. -8 Turmeric. -9 (In music) A particular composition. -लः 1 The planet Mars. -2 N. of Agni. -ला, -ली 1 A faithful wife -2 Dūrvā grass. -3 N. of Durgā. -Comp. -अक्षताः (m. pl.) rice thrown over persons by Brāhmaṇas when pronouncing blessings. -अगरु n. a variety of sandal. -अयनम् the way to happiness or prosperity; परममङ्गलायनगुणकथनो$सि Bhāg.5.3.11. -अलंकृत a. decorated with auspicious ornaments; आददे वचसामन्ते मङ्गलालंकृतां सुताम् Ku.6.87; M.1.14. -अष्टकम् a benedictory verse or verses repeated by priests over a youth and maiden, when being married, to promote their good luck. -अह्निकम् 1 any daily religious rite performed for good luck. -2 a vase full of water carried in front of a procession. -आचरणम् 1 an auspicious introduction in the form of a prayer (for the attainment of success) at the beginning of any undertaking or of any work of composition. -2 pronouncing a blessing. -आचारः 1 an auspicious or pious ceremony or usage. -2 a benediction, pronouncing a blessing. -3 (in music) a particular composition. -आतोद्यम् a drum beaten on festive occasions. -आदेशवृत्तिः a fortune-teller; Ms.9.258. -आरम्भः an epithet of Gaṇeśa. -आलम्भनम् touching anything auspicious. -आलयः, -आवासः a temple. -आवह a. auspicions. -इच्छा benediction, felicitation. -इच्छु a. desirous of happiness or prosperity. -करणम् repeating a prayer for the success of any undertaking. -कलशः a vessel used at festivals. -कारक, -कारिन् a. auspicious. -कार्यम् any festive occasion, a religious or auspicious ceremony. -कालः an auspicious occasion; Ś.4. -क्षौमम् a silken cloth worn on occasions of festivity; दधतो मङ्गलक्षौमे वसानस्य च वल्कले R.12.8. -गृहम् an auspicious house or temple. -ग्रहः an auspicious planet. -घटः, -पात्रम् a pot filled with water offered to the gods on festive occasions. -चण्डिका, -चण्डी N. of Durgā; मङ्गलेषु च या दक्षा सा च मङ्गलचण्डिका Brav. P. -छायः the plakṣa tree. -तूर्यम् a musical instrument, such as a trumpet, drum &c, played on festive or auspicious occasions; सुखश्रवा मङ्गलतूर्यनिस्वनाः R.3.19. -देवता an auspicious or tutelary deity. -ध्वनिः an auspicious music (at the time of some festival). -पत्रम् a leaf serving as an amulet. -पाठकः a bard, minstrel, professional panegyrist; आः दुरात्मन् वृथामङ्गलपाठक शैलूषापसद Ve.1. -पुष्पम् an auspicious flower. -पूजित a. honoured with a sacrificial offering. -प्रतिसरः 1 an auspicious cord or string, the auspicious thread worn by a married woman round her neck as long as her husband lives; अन्त्रैः कल्पितमङ्गलप्रतिसराः (अङ्गनाः) Māl.5.18. -2 the cord of an amulet. -प्रद a. auspicious. (-दा) turmeric. -प्रस्थः N. of a mountain. -भेरी a drum beaten on festive occasions. -मात्रभूषण a. decked in auspicious ornaments only, such as the auspicious thread, saffronmark &c.; सितांशुका मङ्गलमात्रभूषणा V.3.12. -मालिका marriage-music. -वचस् n., -वादः a benedictory or congratulatory expression, benediction, blessing. -वादिन् a. expressing blessings or congratulations, wishing joy. -वाद्यम् see मङ्गलतूर्य. -वारः, -वासरः Tuesday. -विधिः 1 a festive or auspicious rite. -2 preparations for a festival. -वृषभः an ox with auspicious signs. -शब्दः greeting, a benedictory expression. -समालम्भनम् an auspicious unguent. -सूत्रम् see मङ्गलप्रतिसर. -स्नानम् a solemn or auspicious ablution. -स्वरः a sea-shell.

maṭusphaṭiḥ	मटुस्फटिः 'Beginning of pride', incipient pride.

mad	मद् A form of the first personal pronoun in the singular number used chiefly at the beginning of comps.; as मदर्थे 'for me', 'for my sake'; मच्चित्त 'thinking of me'; मद्वचनम्, मत्संदेशः, मत्प्रियम् &c. &c.; मन्मना भव मद्भक्तो मद्याजी मां नमस्कुरु Bg.18.65.

manth	मन्थ् मथ् 1, 9 P. (मन्थति, मथति, मथ्नाति, मथित; pass. मथ्यते) To churn, produce by churning; (oft. with two acc.) सुधां सागरं ममन्थुः or देवासुरैरमृतम्बुनिधिर्ममन्थे Ki.5. 3. -2 To agitate, shake, stir round or up, turn up and down; (fig. also); तस्मात् समुद्रादिव मथ्यमानात् R.16. 79. -3 (a) To crush, grind. (b) To grind down, oppress, afflict, trouble, distress sorely; मन्मथो मां मथ्नन् निजनाम सान्वयं करोति Dk.; जातां मन्ये शिशिरमथितां पद्मिनीं वान्यरूपाम् Me.85 (v. l.). -4 To hurt, injure. -5 To destroy, kill, annihilate, crush down; मथ्नामि कौरवशतं समरे न कोपात् Ve.1.15; अमन्थीच्च परानीकम् Bk.15.46; 14.36. -6 To tear off, dislocate. -7 To mix, mingle.

mayūraḥ	मयूरः [मी ऊरन् Uṇ 1.67] 1 A peacock; स्मरति गिरिमयूर एष देव्याः U.3.2; फणी मयूरस्य तले निषीदति Ṛs. 1.13. -2 A kind of flower. -3 N. of a poet (author of the सूर्यशतक); यस्याश्चोरश्चिकुरनिकरः कर्णपूरो मयूरः P. R.1. 22. -4 A kind of instrument for measuring time. -5 (In music) A kind of gait. -री A pea-hen; (Proverb :- वरं तत्कालोपनता तित्तिरी न पुनर्दिवसान्तरिता मयूरी Vb.1., or वरमद्य कपोतो न श्वो मयूरः 'a bird in the hand is worth two in the bush'). -रम् A particular posture in sitting. -Comp. -अरिः a lizard. -उल्लासकः the rainy season. -केतुः an epithet of Kārtikeya. -गतिः N. of a metre. -ग्रीवकम् blue vitriol. -घृतम् a kind of medicine. -चटकः the domestic cock. -चूडा 1 a peacock's crest. -2 = मयूरीशिखा q. v. -तुत्थम् blue virtriol. -नृत्यम् the dance of a peacock; a position comparable to it; तदेतन्म- यूरनृत्यमापद्यते । तद्यथा मयूरस्य नृत्यतो$न्यदपाव्रियते$न्यत् संव्रियते । एवमिहापि इदं संव्रियते तदपाव्रियते । ŚB. on MS.7.4.1. -पत्रिन् a. feathered with peacock's feathers (as an arrow); जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनिध्वजम् R.3.56. -पदकम् a scratch in the form of a peacock's foot (made with the fingernails). -पिच्छम् a peacock's tail or feather. -रथः an epithet of Kārtikeya. -व्यंसकः a cunning peacock. -शिखा 1 a peacock's crest. -2 a cock's comb. -3 N. of a medicinal plant, Celosia Cristata; cf. नीलकण्ठशिखा लध्वी पित्तश्लेष्मातिसारजित् Bhāva. P.; Mātaṅga L.1.1. -सारिन् a. strutting like a peacock.

maryādā	मर्यादा [मर्यायां सीमायां दीयते दा-घञर्थे क] 1 A limit, boundary (fig. also); bound, border, frontier, verge; मर्यादाव्यतिक्रमः Pt.1. -2 End, termination, terminus. -3 A shore, bank. -4 A mark, land-mark. -5 The bounds of morality, any fixed usage or established rule, moral law; मर्यादानां च लोकस्य कर्ता कारयिता च सः Rām.5. 35.11. -6 A rule of propriety or decorum, bounds or limits of propriety, propriety of conduct; आस्तातापवाद- भिन्नमर्याद U.5; मर्यादायाममर्यादाः स्त्रियस्तिष्ठन्ति सर्वदा Pt.1.142. -7 A contract, covenant, an agreement; गृह्यतां पाणिना पाणिर्मर्यादा बध्यतां ध्रुवा Rām.4.5.11. -Comp. -अचलः, -गिरिः, -पर्वतः a frontier-mountain. -धावनम् running towards a mark. -बन्धः keeping within limits; Buddh. -भेदकः a destroyer of land-marks; मर्यादाभेदकश्चैव विकृतं प्राप्नुयाद्वधम् Ms.9.291. -वचनम् statement of the limit; P.III.3.136. -व्यतिक्रमः overstepping limits.

mahā	महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note : The number of compounds of which महा is the first member is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.) -Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives. -अङ्ग a. huge, bulky. -(ङ्गः) 1 a camel. -2 a kind of rat. -3 N. of Śiva. -अञ्जनः N. of a mountain. -अत्ययः a great danger or calamity. -अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead. -अध्वरः a great sacrifice. -अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage. -2 cooking utensils. (-सी) a kitchen-maid. (-सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2. -अनिलः a whirlwind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59. -अनुभाव a. 1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3. -2 virtuous, righteous, just. (-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person. -2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century. -अन्तकः 1 death. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness. -2 gross (spiritual) ignorance. -अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country. -अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (-यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent. -अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma. -अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king). -अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva. -अम्बुजम् a billion. -अम्ल a. very sour. (-म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest. -अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (-र्घः) a kind of quail. -अर्घ्य a. 1 valuable, precious. -2 invaluable; inestimable; see महार्ह below. -अर्चिस् a. flaming high. -अर्णवः 1 the great ocean. -2 N. of Śiva. -अर्थ a. 1 rich. -2 great, noble, dignified. -3 important, weighty. -4 significant. -अर्बुदम् one thousand millions. -अर्ह a. 1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12. -2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (-र्हम्) white sandal-wood. -अवरोहः the fig-tree. -अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56. -अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4. -अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby. -अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता ...... -असिः a large sword. -असुरी N. of Durgā. -अह्नः the afternoon. -आकार a. extensive, large, great. -आचार्यः 1 a great teacher. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (-ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree. -आत्मन् a. 1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63. -2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4. -3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.) 1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54. -2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्). -आनकः a kind of large drum. -आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss. -2 especially, the great bliss of final beatitude. (-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor. -2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha. -आपगा a great river. -आयुधः an epithet of Śiva. -आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (-म्भः) any great enterprize. -आलयः 1 a temple in general. -2 a sanctuary, an asylum. -3 a great dwelling. -4 a place of pilgrimage. -5 the world of Brahman. -6 the Supreme Spirit. -7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity. -8 N. of a particular dark fortnight. -9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādrapada. (-या) N. of a particular deity. -आशय a. highsouled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्. (-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7. -2 the ocean. -आस्पद a. 1 occupying a great position. -2 mighty, powerful. -आहवः a great or tumultuous fight. -इच्छ a. 1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33. -2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां ...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37. -इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7. -2 a chief or leader in general. -3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52. -इभ्य a. very rich. -इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16. -इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4. -ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree. -ईशानी N. of Pārvatī. -ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74. -2 N. of Śiva. -3 of Viṣṇu. -4 a god (opp. प्रकृति). -5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55. (-री) 1 N. of Durgā. -2 a kind of bell-metal. -उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63. -उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (-लः) the Sārasa bird. -उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36. -2 the god of love. -उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि ...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं ...... Mb.3.91.2. (-हः) 1 perseverance. -2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38. -उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17. -2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conchshell, shell. -उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity. (-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence. -2 final beatitude. -3 a lord, master. -4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App. -5 N. of the capital of Kanouja. -6 sour milk mixed with honey. -7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या). -उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent. -(रम्) 1 a big belly. -2 dropsy. -उदार a. 1 very generous or magnanimous. -2 mighty, powerful. -उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते. -उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hardworking. -उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs). -उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (-तः) the palmyra tree. -उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank. -उपकारः a great obligation. -उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher. -उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98. -उरस्क a. broad-chested. (-स्कः) an epithet of Śiva. -उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17. -उल्का 1 a great meteor. -2 a great fire-brand. -ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacrificial priests. -ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence. -ऋषभः a great bull. -ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage'). -2 N. of Sacute;iva. -3 of Buddha. -ओघ a. having a strong current. -घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37. -ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (-ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva. -ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour. -ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (-सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी). -ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी). -ओषधिः f. 1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug. -2 the Dūrvā grass. -3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं... . -औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea. -2 ginger. -3 garlic. -4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ). -कच्छः 1 the sea. -2 N. of Varuṇa. -3 a mountain. -कन्दः garlic. -कपर्दः a kind of shell. -कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree. -2 red garlic. -कम्बु a. stark naked. (-म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva. -कर a. 1 large-handed. -2 having a large revenue. -कर्णः an epithet of Śiva. -कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva. -कला the night of the new moon. -कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69. -कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c. -2 an epithet of Śukra. -कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ). -कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (-ता) the earth. -काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky. (-यः) 1 an elephant. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -3 of Viṣṇu. -4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि). -कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate. -कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika. -कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram. -2 N. of a celebrated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1. -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -4 N. of a kind of gourd. -5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29. -काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form. -काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas). -कीर्तनम् a house. -कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent. -कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (-लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent. -कुहः a species of parasitical worm. -कृच्छ्रम् a great penance. -केतुः N. of Śiva. -केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 a large sheath. -क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46. -क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva. -क्षत्रपः a great satrap. -क्षीरः sugar-cane. -क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara. -खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?). -गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्. -गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa. -गदः fever. -गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (-न्धः) a kind of cane. (-न्धम्) a kind of sandalwood. (-न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā. -गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva. -गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी. -गल a. longnecked. -गवः Bos gavaeus. -गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (-णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue. -गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः). -गुल्मा the Soma plant. -गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump. -ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu. -2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6. -ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama. -ग्रीवः 1 a camel. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -ग्रीविन् m. a camel. -घूर्णा spirituous liquor. -घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes). -घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (-षम्) a market, fair. (-षः) a loud noise, clamour. -चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial. -चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch. -चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā. -चपला a kind of metre. -चमूः f. a large army. -छायः the fig-tree. -जङ्घः a camel. -जटः an epithet of Śiva. -जटा 1 a great braid of hair. -2 the matted hair of Śiva. -जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (-त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva. -जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25. -2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7. -3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6. -4 the chief of a caste or trade. -5 a merchant, tradesman. -जवः an antelope. -जातीय a. 1 rather large. -2 of an excellent kind. -जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी) -जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva. -ज्ञानिन् m. 1 a very learned man. -2 a great sage. -3 N. of Śiva. -ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63. -ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva. -ज्वरः great affliction. -ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining. (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva. -2 a sacrificial fire. -डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.). -तपस् m. 1 a great ascetic. -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल. -तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess. -तिक्तः the Nimba tree. -तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation. -तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (-क्ष्णा) the markingnut plant. -तेजस् a. 1 possessed of great lustre or splendour. -2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.) 1 a hero, warrior. -2 fire. -3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver. -त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva. -दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger. -दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -दण्डः 1 a long arm. -2 a severe punishment. -दम्भः an epithet of Śiva. -दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet. -दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्. -दारु n. the devadāru tree. -दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt. -दूषकः a kind of grain. -देवः N. of Śiva. (-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī. -2 the chief queen. -द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree. -द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple. -धन a. 1 rich. -2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13. (-नम्) 1 gold. -2 incense. -3 a costly or rich dress. -4 agriculture, husbandry. -5 anything costly or precious. -6 great booty. -7 a great battle (Ved.). -धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva. -धातुः 1 gold. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -3 lymph. -4 N. of Meru. -धी a. having a great understanding. -धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox. -ध्वजः a camel. -ध्वनिक a. dead. -नग्नः an athlete; Buddh. -नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु ...... तनोति ...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās. -नदः a great river. -नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1. -2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal. -नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor. -2 N. of a river. -3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता ... . -नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells. -नलः a kind of reed. -नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता. -नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D. :-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥ -नाडी sinew, tendon. -नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar. -2 a great drum. -3 a thunder-cloud. -4 a shell. -5 an elephant. -6 a lion. -7 the ear. -8 a camel. -9 an epithet of Śiva. (-दम्) a musical instrument. -नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda. -2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा. -नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls. -2 a great head or chief. -नासः an epithet of Śiva. -निद्र a. fast asleep. (-द्रा) 'the great sleep', death. -निम्नम् intestines, abdomen. -नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists). -निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम् -2 an epithet of Durgā. -नीचः a washerman. -नील a. dark-blue. (-लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire. -नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva. -नेमिः a crow. -न्यायः the chief rule. -पक्ष a. 1 having many adherents. -2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179. (-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa. -2 a kind of duck. (-क्षी) an owl. -पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre. -पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥ -पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥ -पटः the skin. -पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3. -2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death. -3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven. -4 an epithet of Śiva. -5 the long pilgrimage to mount Kedāra. -6 the way to heaven. -7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra. -पथिक a. 1 undertaking great journeys. -2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः) -पद्मः 1 a particular high number. -2 N. of Nārada. -3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera. -4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world. -5 an epithet of Nanda. -6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera. (-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus. -2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda. -पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch. -पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon. -पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे ... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324. -पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58. -पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154. -2 any great sin or transgression. -पात्रः a prime minister. -पादः an epithet of Śiva. -पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked. -पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P. -पुंसः a great man. -पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7. -2 the Supreme Spirit. -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1. -पुष्पः a kind of worm. -पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions. -पृष्ठः a camel. -पोटगलः a kind of large reed. -प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu. -प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper. -प्रपञ्चः the great universe. -प्रभ a. of great lustre. (-भः) the light of a lamp. -प्रभुः 1 a great lord. -2 a king, sovereign. -3 a chief. -4 an epithet of Indra. -5 of Śiva -6 of Viṣṇu. -7 a great saint or holy man. -प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inhabitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत ...... Ve.3.4. -प्रश्नः a knotty question. -प्रसादः 1 a great favour. -2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः -प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death. -2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365. -प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates. -2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्. -3 a raven. -प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K. -प्रेतः a noble departed spirit. -प्लवः a great flood, deluge; ... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71. -फल a. 1 bearing much fruit. -2 bringing much reward. (-ला) 1 a bitter gourd. -2 a kind of spear. (-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward. -2 a testicle. -फेना the cuttle-fish bone. -बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet. -बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes. -बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām (-लः) 1 wind, storm. -2 a Buddha. -3 a solid bamboo. -4 a palm. -5 a crocodile. -बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (-लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara. -बाध a. causing great pain or damage. -बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (-हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu. -बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere. -2 the heart. -3 a water-jar, pitcher. -4 a hole, cave. -बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas. -बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva. -बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum. -बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain). -बुशः barley. -बृहती a kind of metre. -बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha. -2 a Buddha. -ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit. -ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa. -2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa. -भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg. -भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā. -भाग a. 1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous. -2 illustrious, distinguished, glorious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192. -3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16. -भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity. -2 great excellence or merit. -भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (-तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu. -भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous. -भाण्डम् a chief treasury. -भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते -भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary. -2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini. -भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni. -भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू). -भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu. -भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly. -भुज a. long-armed, powerful. -भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6. (-तः) 1 the Supreme Being. -2 a great creature. -भोगः 1 a great enjoyment. -2 a great coil or hood; great winding. -3 a serpent. (-गा) an epithet of Durgā. -मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5. -2 N. of Śiva. -मति a. 1 high-minded. -2 clever. (-तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter. -मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster. -मद a. greatly intoxicated. (-दः) an elephant in rut. -मनस्, -मनस्क a. 1 high-minded, nobleminded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7. -2 liberal. -3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v. -मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas. -2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell. -मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier. -मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess. -मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi. -महः a great festive procession; Sinhās. -महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky). -महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor. -2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c. -मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.). -माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha. -मात्र a. 1 great in measure, very great or large. -2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37. (-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high stateofficial, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1. -2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161. -3 a superintendent of elephants. (-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister. -2 the wife of a spiritual teacher. -मानसी N. of a Jain goddess. -मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6. -मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 of Viṣṇu. -माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent. -2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya. -मायूरम् a particular drug. (-री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh. -मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic. -2 an epithet of Durgā. -मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads. -मालः N. of Śiva. -माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva. -मुखः a crocodile. -मुद्रा a particular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga). -मुनिः 1 a great sage. -2 N. of Vyāsa. -3 an epithet of Buddha. -4 of Agastya. -5 the coriander plant. (-नि n.) 1 coriander seed. -2 any medicinal herb or drug. -मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu. -मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -मूलम् a large radish. (-लः) a kind of onion. -मूल्य a. very costly. (-ल्यः) a ruby. -मृगः 1 any large animal. -2 an elephant, -3 the fabulous animal called शरभ. -मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva. -मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug. -मृधम् a great battle. -मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P. -मेधा an epithet of Durgā. -मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (-हा) an epithet of Durgā. -यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.). -2 N. of Viṣṇu. -यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19. -यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated. -यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares. -यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promulgated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान). -याम्यः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men. -योगिन् m. 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 of Viṣṇu. -3 a cock. -योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ. -रक्तम् coral. -रङ्गः a large stage. -रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28. -2 the thorn-apple. -रजनम् 1 safflower. -2 gold. -3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6. -रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56. -रथः 1 a great chariot. -2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥). -3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ. -रवः a frog. -रस a. very savoury. (-सः) 1 a sugarcane. -2 quicksilver. -3 a precious mineral. -4 the fruit of the date tree. -5 any one of the eight substances given below :-दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (-सम्) sour ricewater. -राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184. -2 a respectful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb. -3 a deified Jaina teacher. -4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, paramount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree. -राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu. -राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.). -राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign. -राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king. -2 N. of Durgā. -रात्रम् midnight, dead of night. -रात्रिः, -त्री f. 1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः. -2 midnight. -3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina. -राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās. -2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (-ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34. -रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains. -रुज्, -ज a. very painful. -रुद्रः a form of Śiva. -रुरुः a species of antelope. -रूप a. mighty in form. (-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 resin. -रूपकम् a kind of drama. -रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva. -रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight :-उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥). -रौद्र a. very dreadful. (-द्री) an epithet of Durgā. -रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9. -लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्. -2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival. -लयः 1 a great world destruction. -2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्). -लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (-ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva. -लोलः a crow. -लोहम् a magnet. -वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century). -वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva. -वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana. -वरा Dūrvā grass. -वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation. -वर्तनम् high wages; -वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper. -2 a large creeping plant. -वसः the porpoise. -वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa. -वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence. -2 any continuous composition or literary work. -3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c. -4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25. -वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावातातैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22. -वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant. -वायुः 1 air (as an element). -2 stormy wind, hurricane, tempest. -वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras. -विडम् a kind of factitious salt. -विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy. -विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः ... ॥ -विपुला a kind of metre. -विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः. -विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva. -विषः a serpent having two mouths. -विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries). -विस्तर a. very extensive or copious. -वीचिः N. of a hell. -वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior. -2 a lion. -3 the thunderbolt of Indra. -4 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -5 of Garuḍa. -6 of Hanumat. -7 a cuckoo. -8 a white horse. -9 a sacrificial fire. -1 a sacrificial vessel. -11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti. -वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful. (-र्यः) 1 N. of Brahman. -2 the Supreme Being. (-र्या) the wild cotton shrub. -2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun. -वृषः a great bull. -वेग a. 1 very sw

māsaḥ	मासः सम् [मा एव अण्] 1 A month, (it may be चान्द्र, सौर, सावन, नाक्षत्र or बार्हस्पत्य); न मासे प्रतिपत्तासे मां चेन्मर्तासि मैथिलि Bk.8.95. -2 The moon (Ved.). -3 The number 'twelve'. -Comp. -अधिपः, -अधिपतिः the planet presiding over a month. -अनुमासिक a. monthly; पिण्डान्वाहार्यकं श्राद्धं कुर्यान्मासानुमासिकम् Ms.3.122. -अन्तः the day of new moon. -अवधिक a. lasting for or occurring in a month. -आहार a. eating only once a month. -उपवासिनी 1 a woman who fasts for a whole month. -2 a procuress, a lascivious or lewd woman (ironically.). -ऋक्षम् the constellation after which a month (like चैत्र, वैशाख) is named; माघे च सितसप्तम्यां मघाराकासमागमे । राकया चानुमत्वा वा मासार्क्षाणि व्युतान्यपि ॥ Bhāg.7.14.22. -कालिक a. monthly, lasting for a month. -चारिक a. practising (any thing) for a month. -जात a. a month old, born a month ago. -ज्ञः a kind of gallinule. -देय a. to be paid in a month. -पाक a. maturing in a month. -प्रमितः the new-moon. -प्रवेशः the beginning of a month. -भुक्तिः (the sun's) monthly course. -मानः a year. -संचयिक a. having provisions for a month; सद्यः प्रक्षालको वा स्यान्माससंचयिको$पि वा Ms.6.18.

mitraḥ	मित्रः [मिद्यति स्निह्यति, मिद्-त्र, मि-त्र वा] 1 The sun; तद्दिनं दुर्दिनं मन्ये यत्र मित्रागमो हि ना Subhāṣ. -2 N. of an Āditya and usually associated with Varuṇa; cf. Ṛv. 3.59. -3 The deity presiding over the part of rectum (गुदस्थान); गुदं पुंसो विनिर्भिन्नं मित्रो लोकेश आविशत् Bhāg.3.6.2. -त्रम् 1 A friend; तन्मित्रमापदि सुखे च समक्रियं यत् Bh.2.68; Me.17. -2 An ally, the next neighbour of a king; cf. मण्डल. -Comp. -अनुग्रहणम् the act of favouring friends. -अमित्रम् friend and foe; मित्रा$मित्रस्य चार्जनम् Ms.12.79. -आचारः conduct towards a friend. -उदयः 1 sun-rise. -2 the welfare or prosperity of a friend. -उपस्थानम् worship of the sun (part of the morning संध्या). -कर्मन्, -कार्यम्, -कृत्यम् the business of a friend, a friendly act or service; मित्रकृत्यमपदिश्य पार्श्वतः (प्रस्थितम्) R.19.31. -घ्न a. treacherous. -द्रुह्, -द्रोहिन् a. hating a friend, treacherous to a friend, a false or treacherous friend. -भम् the अनुराधा constellation. -भावः friendship. -भेदः breach of friendship. -युद्धम् a contest between friends. -लाभः 1 acquisition of friends, contracting of friendship. -2 N. of the first book of the Hitopadeśa. -वत्सल a. kind to friends, of winning manners. -विन्दः an epithet of Agni. -विषयः friendship. -सप्तमी N. of the seventh day in the bright half of मार्गशीर्ष. -साह a. kind or indulgent to friends; स्वैर्दौहित्रैस्तारितो मित्रसाहः Mb.1.93.28. -हत्या the murder of a friend.

mitrayu	मित्रयु a. 1 Friendly-minded. -2 Winning friends. -युः A friend.

mithyā	मिथ्या ind. [मिथ्-क्यप्] 1 Falsely, deceitfully, wrongly, incorrectly; oft. with the force of an adjective; मणौ महानील इति प्रभावादल्पप्रमाणे$पि यथा न मिथ्या R.18.42; यदुवाच न तन्मिथ्या 17.42; मिथ्यैव व्यसनं वदन्ति मृगयामीदृग्विनोदः कुतः Ś.2.5. -2 Invertedly, contrarily. -3 To no purpose, in vain, fruitlessly; मिथ्या कारयते चारैर्घोषणां राक्षसाधिपः Bk.8.44; मिथ्यैष व्यवसायस्ते प्रकृतिस्त्वां नियोक्ष्यति Bg.18.59. (मिथ्या वद्-वच् to tell a falsehood, lie. मिथ्या कृ 1 to falsify. -2 to contradict. मिथ्या भू to turn out false, be false. मिथ्या ग्रह् to misunderstand, mistake.) At the beginning of comp. मिथ्या may be translated by 'false, untrue, unreal, sham, pretended, feigned' &c. -Comp. -अध्यवसितिः f. a figure of speech, an expression of the impossibility of a thing by making it depend upon an impossible contingency; किंचिन्मिथ्यात्वसिद्ध्यर्थं मिथ्या- र्थान्तरकल्पनम् । मिथ्याध्यवसितिर्वेश्यां वशयेत् खस्रजं वहन् ॥ Kuval. -अपवादः a false charge. -अभिधानम् a false assertion. -अभियोगः a false or groundless charge. -अभिशंसनम् calumny, false accusation. -अभिशापः 1 a false prediction. -2 a false or unjust claim. -आचार a. 1 acting falsely. -2 hypocritical. (-रः) 1 wrong treatment (in medic.). -2 wrong or improper conduct. -3 a rogue, hypocrite; इन्द्रियार्थान् विमूढात्मा मिथ्याचारः स उच्यते Bg.3.6. -आहारः wrong diet. -उत्तरम् a false or prevaricating reply. -उपचारः 1 pretended kindness or service; मिथ्योपचारैश्च वशीकृतानां किमर्थिनां वञ्चयितव्यमस्ति H. -2 (in medic.) a wrong treatment of a malady. -कर्मन् n. a false act. -कारुणिक a. pretending to be kind; मिथ्याकारुणिको$सि निर्घृणतरस्त्वत्तः कुतो$न्यः पुमान् Pt. 5.14. -क्रोपः, -क्रोधः feigned anger. -क्रयः a false price. -ग्रहः useless obstinacy or persistence. -ग्रहः, ग्रहणम् misconception, misunderstanding. -चतुर्विधम् four types of lying; मिथ्यैतन्नाभिजानामि तदा तत्र न संनिधिः । अजातश्चास्मि तत्काटे इति मिथ्याचतुर्विधम् ॥ -चर्या hypocrisy. -जल्पितम् a false report or speech. -ज्ञानम् a mistake, error, misapprehension. -दर्शनम् heresy. -दृष्टिः f. heresy, holding heretic or atheistic doctrines. -निरसनम् denial by oath. -पण्डित a. educated or learned only in appearance. -पुरुषः a man only in appearance. -प्रतिज्ञ a. false to one's promise, perfidious. -प्रत्ययः an erroneous perception; यो हि जनित्वा प्रध्वंसते नैतदेवमिति स मिथ्याप्रत्ययः ŚB. on MS.1.1.2. -फलम् an imaginary advantage. -मतिः f. delusion, mistake, errror. -योगः wrong use or application. -लिङ्गधर a. being anything only in appearance. -वचनम्, -वाक्यम्, -वादः an untrue speech, a falsehood, lie. -वाक्, -वादिन् a. lying, false, untruthful; मिथ्यावादिनि दूति ...... K. P. -वार्ता a false report. -व्यापारः meddling with another's affairs. -वृत्त a. of vicious conduct; उद्योगं तव संप्रेक्ष्य मिध्यावृत्तं च रावणम् Rām.6.17.66. -साक्षिन् m. a false witness.

mukham	मुखम् [खन् अच् डित् धातोः पूर्वं मुट् च cf. Uṇ.5.2] 1 The mouth (fig. also); प्रजासृजा यतः खातं तस्मादाहुर्मुखं बुधाः; ब्राह्मणो$स्य मुखमासीत् Ṛv.1.9.12; सभ्रूभङ्गं मुखमिव Me.24; त्वं मम मुखं भव V.1 'be my mouth or spokesman'. -2 The face, countenance; परिवृत्तार्धमुखी मयाद्य दृष्टा V.1.17; नियमक्षाममुखी धृतैकवेणिः Ś.7.21; so चन्द्रमुखी, मुखचन्द्रः &c; ओष्ठौ च दन्तमूलानि दन्ता जिह्वा च तालु च । गलो गलादि सकलं सप्ताङ्गं मुखमुच्यते ॥ -3 The snout or muzzle (of any animal). -4 The front, van, forepart; head, top; (लोचने) हरति मे हरिवाहनदिङ्मुखम् V.3.6. -5 The tip, point, barb (of an arrow), head; पुरारि- मप्राप्तमुखः शिलीमुखः Ku.5.54; R.3.57. -6 The edge or sharp point (of any instrument). -7 A teat, nipple; मध्ये यथा श्याममुखस्य तस्य मृणालसूत्रान्तरमप्य- लभ्यम् Ku.1.4; R.3.8. -8 The beak or bill of a bird. -9 A direction, quarter; as in अन्तर्मुख. -1 Opening, entrance, mouth; नीवाराः शुकगर्भकोटरमुखभ्रष्टास्तरूणामधः Ś.1.14; नदीमुखेनेव समुद्रमाविशत् R.3.28; Ku.1.8. -11 An entrance to a house, a door, passage. -12 Beginning, commencement; सखीजनोद्वीक्षणकौमुदीमुखम् R.3.1; दिनमुखानि रविर्हिमनिग्रहैर्विमलयन् मलयं नगमत्यजत् 9.25;5.76; Ghaṭ.2. -13 Introduction. -14 The chief, the principal or prominent (at the end of comp. in this sense); बन्धोन्मुक्त्यै खलु मखमुखान् कुर्वते कर्मपाशान् Bv.4.21; so इन्द्रमुखा देवाः &c. -15 The surface or upper side. -16 A means. -17 A source, cause, occasion. -18 Utterance; as in मुखसुख; speaking, speech, tongue; आत्मनो मुखदोषेण बध्यन्ते शुकसारिकाः Pt.4.44. -19 The Vedas, scripture. -2 (In Rhet.) The original cause or source of the action in a drama. -21 The first term in a progression (in alg.). -22 The side opposite to the base of a figure (in geom.). -Comp. -अग्निः 1 a forest conflagration. -2 a sort of goblin with a face of fire. -3 the consecrated or sacrificial fire. -4 fire put into the mouth of a corpse at the time of lighting the funeral pile. -5 a Brāhmaṇa. -अनिलः, -उच्छ्वासः breath. -अस्त्रः a crab. -आकारः look, mien, appearance. -आक्षेपः 1 an invective. -2 the act of throwing up soil with the ploughshare. -आसवः nectar of the lips. -आस्रवः, -स्रावः spittle, saliva. -आस्वादः kissing the mouth; Y. -इन्दुः a moon-like face, i. e. a round lovely face. -उच्छ्वासः breath. -उल्का a forest-conflagration. -कमलम् a lotuslike face. -खुरः a tooth. -गन्धकः an onion. -गोपनम् concealment of the face; अवधीरितमुखमण्डलमुखगोपनं किमिति Udb. -ग्रहणम् kissing the mouth. -घण्टा f. hurraying of women in festivities. -चन्द्रः a moon-like face. -चपल a. talkative, garrulous. -चपेटिका a slap on the face. -चालिः an introductory dance; -चीरिः f. the tongue. -चूर्णम् scented powder to smear the face with; छविकरं मुखचूर्णमृतुश्रियः R.9.45. -जः 1 a Brāhmaṇa. -2 a tooth. -जाहम् the root of the mouth. -दूषणः an onion. -दूषिका an eruption disfiguring the face. -दोषः fault of the tongue; आत्मनो मुखदोषेण बध्यन्ते शुकसारिकाः Pt.4.44. -निरीक्षकः a lazy fellow, an idler. -निवासिनी an epithet of Sarasvatī. -पटः a veil; कुर्वन् कामं क्षणमुखपट- प्रीतिमैरावतस्य Me.64. -पाकः inflammation of the mouth; द्राक्षाविपाकसमये मुखपाको भवति काकानाम् Udb. -पिण्डः a mouthful of food; cf. को न याति वशं लोके मुखपिण्डेन पूरितः Bh.2.118. -पुष्पकम् a kind of ornament. -पूरणम् 1 filling the mouth. -2 a mouthful of water, a mouthful in general. -प्रसादः a pleased countenance, graciousness of aspect. -प्रसाधनम् dacorating the face. -प्रियः an orange. (-यम्) cloves. -प्रेक्ष a. observing or watching the face. -फुल्लकम् a kind of ornament. -बन्धः a preface, an introduction. -बन्धनम् 1 a preface. -2 a lid, cover. -भगा (a woman) who suffers her mouth to be used as a vulva. -भङ्गः 1 a blow on the face. -2 wry face, grimace. -भूषणम् a preparation of betel; see ताम्बूल. -भेदः 1 distortion of the face. -2 gaping. -मण़्डनकः a kind of tree (तिलक). -मण्डलम् the (round) face. -मधु a. honey-mouthed, sweet-lipped. -माधुर्यम् a particular disease of the phlegm. -मारुतः breath. -मार्जनम् washing the face. -मुद्रा silence; यापदृष्टिरपि या मुखमुद्रा N.5.12. -मोदः Hyperanthera Moringa (Mar. शेवगा). -यन्त्रणम् the bit of a bridle. -रज्जुः f. the bridle of a horse. -रसः speech, talk; मधुरमुखरसामृतकलया चान्तस्तापमनघार्हसि क्षमयितुम् Bhag.6.9.41. -रागः the colour or complexion of the face; ददृशुर्विस्मितास्तस्य मुखरागं समं जनाः R.12.8;17.31; तव खलु मुखरागो यत्र भेदं प्रयातः Śi.11.31. -रेखा feature, mien, air. -रोगः a disease of the mouth or face. -लाङ्गलः a hog. -लेपः 1 anointing the face or upper side (of a drum); मृदङ्गो मुखलेपेन करोति मुखरध्वनिम् Bh. 2.118. -2 a disease of the phlegmatic humour. -वल्लभः the pomegranate tree. -वस्त्रिका a piece of fine cloth (net) held before the face (Mar. बुरखा). -वाद्यम् 1 an instrument of music sounded with the mouth, any wind-instrument. -2 a sound made with the mouth; (Mar. बोंब). -वासः, -वासनम् a perfume used to scent breath. -विलुण्ठिका a she-goat. -विषमः one of the ways of embezzlement namely misrepresentation of the source of income; Kau. A.2.8. -विष्ठा a species of cockroach. -वैरस्यम् bad taste in the mouth. -व्यादानम् gaping, yawning. -शफ a. abusive, foul-mouthed, scurrilous. -शाला entrance-hall, vestibule. -शुद्धिः f. washing or purifying the mouth. -शृङ्गः a rhinoceros. -शेषः an epithet of Rāhu. -शोधन a. 1 cleansing the mouth. -2 pungent, sharp. (-नः) the sharp flavour, pungency. (-नम्) 1 cleansing the mouth. -2 cinnamon. -शोधिन् m. the citron tree. -शोषः dryness of the mouth. -श्रीः f. 'beauty of countenance', a lovely face. -संदंशः forceps. -संधिः m. A kind of fugue; S. D. 6th Parichcheda. -संभवः a Brāhmaṇa. -सुखम् facility of pronunciation, phonetic ease. -सुरम् the nectar of the lips (अधरामृत). -स्रावः saliva. -हासः cheerfulness or liveliness of countenance; सकमलमुखहासं वीक्षितः पद्मिनीभिः Śi.11.47.

muca	मुच (चु) कुन्दः 1 N. of a tree (Pterospermum Suberifolium). -2 N. of an ancient king, son of Māndhātṛi. [For having assisted the gods in their wars with the demons he got, as a reward, the boon of long and unbroken sleep. The gods also decreed that whosoever dared to interrupt his sleep should be burnt to ashes. When Kṛiṣṇa wanted to kill the mighty Kālayavana, he cunningly decoyed him to the cave of Muchukunda, and on his entering it, he was burnt down by the fire which emanated from the king's eye.] -Comp. -प्रसादकः an epithet of Kṛiṣṇa.

mūlam	मूलम् [मूल्-क] 1 A root (fig also); तरुमूलानि गृहीभवन्ति तेषाम् Ś.7.2; or शिखिनो धौतमूलाः 1.15; मूलं बन्ध् to take or strike root; बद्धमूलस्य मूलं हि महद्वैरतरोः स्त्रियः Śi.2.38. -2 The root, lowest edge or extremity of anything; कस्याश्चिदासीद्रशना तदानीमङ्गुष्ठमूलार्पितसूत्रशेषा R.7.1; so प्राचीमूले Me.91. -3 The lower part or end, base, the end of anything by which it is joined to something else; बाह्वोर्मूलम् Śi.7.32; so पादमूलम्, कर्णमूलम्, ऊरुमूलम् &c. -4 Beginning, commencement; आमूलाच्छ्रोतुमिच्छामि Ś.1. -5 Basis, foundation, source, origin, cause; सर्वे गार्हस्थ्यमूलकाः Mb.; रक्षोगृहे स्थितिर्मूलम् U.1.6; इति केना- प्युक्तं तत्र मूलं मृग्यम् 'the source or authority should be found out'; पुष्पं पुष्पं विचिन्वीत मूलच्छेदं न कारयेत् Mb.5.34. 18; समूलघातमघ्नन्तः परान्नोद्यन्ति मानवाः Śi.2.33. -6 The foot or bottom of anything; पर्वतमूलम्, गिरिमूलम् &c. -7 The text, or original passage (as distinguished from the commentary or gloss). -8 Vicinity, neighbourhood; सा कन्दुकेनारमतास्य मूले विभज्यमाना फलिता लतेव Mb.3.112.16. -9 Capital, principal, stock; मूलं भागो व्याजी परिघः क्लृप्तं रूपिकमत्ययश्चायमुखम् Kau. A.2.6.24. -1 A hereditary servant. -11 A square root. -12 A king's own territory; स गुप्तमूलमत्यन्तम् R.4.26; Ms.7.184. -13 A vendor who is not the true owner; Ms.8.22 (अस्वामिविक्रेता Kull.). -14 The nineteenth lunar mansion containing 11 stars. -15 A thicket, copse. -6 The root of long pepper. -17 A particular position of the fingers. -18 A chief or capital city. -19 An aboriginal inhabitant. -2 A bower, an arbour (निकुञ्ज). -21 N. of several roots पिप्पली, पुष्कर, शूरण &c. -22 A tail; मूलो मूलवता स्पृष्टो धूप्यते धूमकेतुना Rām.6.4.51. (In comp. मूल may be translated by 'first, prime, original, chief, principal' e. g. मूलकारणम् 'prime cause', &c. &c.) -Comp. -आधारम् 1 the navel. -2 a mystical circle above the organs of generation; मूलाधारे त्रिकोणाख्ये इच्छाज्ञानक्रियात्मके. -आभम् a radish. -आयतनम् the original abode. -आशिन् a. living upon roots. -आह्वम् a radish. -उच्छेदः utter destruction, total eradication. -कर्मन् n. magic; Ms.9.29. -कारः the author of an original work. -कारणम् the original or prime cause; क्रियाणां खलु धर्म्याणां सत्पत्न्यो मूलकारणम् Ku.6.13. -कारिका a furnace, an oven. -कृच्छ्रः -च्छ्रम् a kind of penance, living only upon roots; मूलकृच्छ्रः स्मृतो मूलैः. -केशरः a citron. -खानकः one who lives upon root-digging (मूलोत्पाटनजीवी); Ms.8.26. -गुणः the co-efficient of a root. -ग्रन्थः 1 an original text. -2 the very words uttered by Śākyamuni. -घातिन् a. destroying completely; (नहि...कर्मसु) मूलघातिषु सज्जन्ते बुद्धिमन्तो भवद्विधाः Rām.5.51.18; see मूलहर. -छिन्न a. nipped in the bud; सा$द्य मूलच्छिन्ना Dk. 2.2. -छेदः uprooting. -ज a. 1 radical. -2 growing at the roots of trees (as an ant-hill). -3 born under the constellation Mūla. (-जः) plant growing from a root. (-जम्) green ginger. -त्रिकोणम् the third astrological house. -देवः an epithet of Kaṁsa. -द्रव्यम्, धनम् principal, stock, capital. -धातुः lymph. -निकृन्तन a. destroying root and branch. -पुरुषः 'the stock-man', the male representative of a family. -प्रकृतिः f. the Prakṛiti or Pradhāna of the Sāṅkhyas (q. v.); मूल- प्रकृतिरविकृतिः Sāṅ. K.3. (-pl.) the four principal sovereigns to be considered at the time of war विजि- गीषु, अरि, मध्यम, and उदासीन); see Ms.7.155. -प्रतीकारः protection of wives and wealth (धनदाररक्षा); कृत्वा मूल- प्रतीकारम् Mb.5.151.61. -फलदः the bread-fruit tree. -बन्धः a particular position of the fingers. -बर्हणम् the act of uprooting, extermination. -बलम् the principal or hereditary force; विन्ध्याटवीमध्ये$वरोधान् मूलबलरक्षितान् निवेशयामासुः Dk.1.1. [Kāmandaka enumerates six divisions of the army and declares that मौल (hereditary) is the best of them (Kām.13.2-3.)] -भद्रः an epithet of Kaṁsa. -भृत्यः an old or hereditary servant. -मन्त्रः 1 a principal or primary text (such as आगम); जुहुयान्मूलमन्त्रेण पुंसूक्तेनाथवा बुधः A. Rām.4.4.31. -2 a spell. -राशिः a cardinal number. -वचनम् an original text. -वापः 1 one who plants roots. -2 A field where crops are grown by sowing roots; पुष्पफलवाटषण्ड- केदारमूलवापास्सेतुः Kau. A.2.6.24. -वित्तम् capital stock. -विद्या the twelve-worded (द्वादशाक्षरी) spell :-- ओं नमो भगवते वासुदेवायः; जुहुयान्मूलविद्यया Bhāg.8.16.4. -विभुजः a chariot. -व्यसनवृत्तिः the hereditary occupation of executing criminals; चण्डालेन तु सोपाको मूलव्यसन- वृत्तिमान् Ms.1.38. -व्रतिन् a. living exclusively on roots. -शकुनः (in augury) the first bird. -शाकटः, -शाकिनम् a field planted with edible roots. -संघः a society, sect. -साधनम् a chief instrument, principal expedient. -स्थानम् 1 base, foundation. -2 the Supreme Spirit. -3 wind, air. -4 Mooltan. (-नी) N. of Gaurī. -स्थायिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -स्रोतस् n. the principal current or fountain-head of a river. -हर a. uprooting completely; सो$यं मूलहरो$नर्थः Rām.6.46.15. -हरः a prodigal son; मूलहरतादात्विककदर्यांश्च प्रतिषेधयेत् Kau. A.2.9.27.

mauryaḥ	मौर्यः [मुर-ण्य] N. of a dynasty of kings beginning with Chandragupta; मौर्ये नवे राजनि Mu.4.15; मौर्यौर्हिरण्या- र्थिभिरर्चाः प्रकल्पिताः Mbh.; (there is a difference of opinion among scholars as to the meaning of the word मौर्य in this passage).

mlāta	म्लात p. p. 1 Faded, withered. -2 Made white by tanning.

yathā	यथा ind. [यद् प्रकारे थाल्] 1 Used by itself यथा has the following senses :-- (a) as, in the manner mentioned; यथाज्ञापयति महाराजः 'as Your Majesty orders;' (b) namely, as follows; तद् यथानुश्रूयते Pt.1; U.2.4; (c) as, like (showing comparison, and used to express the point of similarity); आसीदियं दशरथस्य गृहे यथा श्रीः U.4.6; Ku.4.34; प्रभावप्रभवं कान्तं स्वाधीनपतिका यथा (न मुञ्चति) K. P.1; (d) as, as for example, for instance; यत्र यत्र धूमस्तत्र तत्र वह्निर्यथा महानसे T. S. कुर्युः कृत्यमकृत्यं वा उष्ट्रे काकादयो यथा Pt.1.288; (e) that (used to introduce direct assertions with or without इति at the end); अकथितो$पि ज्ञायत एव यथायमाभोगस्तपोवनस्येति Ś.1; विदितं खलु ते यथा स्मरः क्षणमप्युत्सहते न मां विना Ku.4.36; (f) so that, in order that; दर्शय तं चौरसिंहं यथा व्यापादयामि Pt.1. -2 Used correlatively with तथा, यथा has the following senses :-- (a) as, so (in which case एवम् and तद्वत् often take the place of तथा); यथा वृक्षस्तथा फलम् or यथा बीजं तथाङ्कुरः; Bg.11.29; in this case एव is frequently added to either यथा or तथा or to both to make the equality of relation more marked or striking; वधूचतुष्के$पि यथैव शान्ता प्रिया तनूजास्य तथैव सीता U.4.16; न तथा बाधते स्कन्धो (or शीतम्) यथा बाधति बाधते; (as much-as, as-as); Ku.6.7; U.2.4; V.4.33. In this sense तथा is often omitted, in which case यथा has sense (c) in 1 above. (b) so-that, तथा standing for 'so', and यथा for 'that'; यथा बन्धुजनशोच्या न भवति तथा निर्वाहय Ś.3; तथा प्रयतेथा यथा पहस्यसे जनैः K.19; तस्मान्मुच्ये यथा तात संविधातुं तथार्हसि R.1.72;3.66;14.66;15.68. (c) since-therefore, as (because) -so; यथा इतोमुखागतैरपि कलकलः श्रुतस्तथा तर्कयामि &c. Māl.8; sometimes तथा is omitted; मन्दं मन्दं नुदति पवनश्चानुकूलो यथा त्वां ... सेविष्यन्ते भवन्तं बलाकाः Me.9. (d) if-then, as surely as-so surely (a strong form of assertion or adjuration); वाङ्मनःकर्मभिः पत्यौ व्यभिचारो यथा न मे । तथा विश्वंभरे देवि मामन्तर्धातुमर्हसि R.15.81; यथा यथा- तथा तथा the more-the more, the less-the less; यथा यथा भाषसि धर्मसंमितं तथा तथा मे त्वयि भक्तिरुत्तमा Mb.; Śi.17.43; यथा यथा यौवनमतिचक्राम तथा तथावर्धतास्य संतापः K.59; Ms. 8.286;12.73; यथा तथा in any manner, in whatever way; यथा तथा यापयंस्तु सा ह्यस्य कृतकृत्यता Ms.4.17; यथैव just as; यथा तथा as much as; यथा तथा भवतु whatever may be the case; यथा कथंचित् anyhow, somehow or other. N. B. As the first member of Avyayībhāva comp. यथा is usually translated by 'according to, according as, in accordance with, in conformity to, in proportion to, not exceeding'; see compounds below. -Comp. -अंशम्, -अंशतस् ind. in due proportions, proportionately. -अधिकारम् ind. according to authority. -अधीत a. as read or studied, conformable to the text. (-तम्) ind. according to the text. -अनुपूर्वम्, -अनुपूर्व्यम्, -अनुपूर्व्या ind. in regular order or succession, successively. -अनुभूतम् ind. 1 according to experience. -2 by previous experience. -अनुरूपम् ind. in exact conformity, properly. -अनूक्तम् ind. as said or told; मया यथानूक्तमवादि ते हरेः कृतावतारस्य सुमित्र चेष्टितम् Bhāg.3.19.32. -अभिप्रेत, -अभिमत, -अभिलषित, -अभीष्ट a. as wished, intended or desired, agreeably to desire. (-तम् &c.) ind. according to one's wish, at pleasure, agreeably to one's desire. -अभिरुचित a. pleasant, agreeable. -अर्थ a. 1 conformable to truth, true, real, correct; सौम्येति चाभाष्य यथार्थभाषी R.14.44; so यथार्थानुभवः 'correct or right perception'; यथार्थवक्ता &c. -2 conformable to the true meaning; true to the sense, right, appropriate, significant; करिष्यन्निव नामास्य (i. e. शत्रुघ्न) यथार्थमरिनिग्रहात् R.15.6; (करिष्यते) युधि सद्यः शिशुपालतां यथार्थाम् Śi.16.85; Ki.8.48; Ku.2.16. -3 fit suitable. (-र्थम्, -अर्थतः ind. truly, rightly; fitly, suitably, properly.) ˚अक्षर a. signficant or true to the syllable; यस्मिन्नीश्वर इत्यनन्यविषयः शब्दो यथार्थाक्षरः V.1.1. ˚नामन् a. one whose name is true to its meaning or fully significant (whose deeds are according to his name); ध्रुवसिद्धेरपि यथार्थनाम्नः सिद्धिं न मन्यते M.4; परंतपो नाम यथार्थनामा R.6.21. ˚वर्णः a spy (see यथार्हवर्ण). (यथार्थता 1 suitableness, fitness. -2 propriety. -3 accuracy, genuineness, correctness.) -अर्ह a. 1 according to merit, as deserving. -2 appropriate, suitable, just. -3 as agreeable; यथार्हजलेन हृद्यगन्धेन स्नातः Dk.2.7. ˚वर्णः a spy, an emissary. -अर्हम्, -अर्हतः ind. according to merit or worth; यथार्हमन्यैरनुजीविलोकं संभावयामास यथाप्रधानम् R.16.4. -अर्हणम् ind. 1 according to propriety. -2 according to worth or merit. -अवकाशम् ind. 1 according to room or space. -2 as occasion may occur, according to occasion, leisure or propriety. -3 in the proper place; प्रालम्बमुत्कृष्य यथावकाशं निनाय R.6.14. -अवस्थम् ind. according to the condition or circumstances. -आख्यात a. as mentioned before, before mentioned. -आख्यानम् ind. as before stated. -आगत a. foolish, stupid. (-तम्) ind. as one came, by the same way as one came; यथागतं मातलिसारथिर्ययौ R.3.67. -आगमम् ind. according to tradition, as handed down from generation to generation. -आचारम् ind. as customary or usual. -आम्नातम्, आम्नायम् ind. as laid down in the Vedas. -आरम्भम् ind. according to the beginning, in regular order or succession. -आवासम् ind. according to one's dwelling, each to his own dwelling. -आशयम् ind. 1 according to wish or intention. -2 according to the agreement. -आश्रमम् ind. according to the Āśrama or period in one's religious life. -आश्रयम् ind. according to substratum; चित्रं यथाश्रयमृते Sāṅkhya K.41. -इच्छ, -इष्ट, -ईप्सित a. according to wish or desire, agreeably to one's desire, as much as desired, as desired or wished for. (-च्छम्, -ष्टम्, -तम्) ind. 1 according to wish or desire, at will or pleasure; यथेष्टं चेष्टन्ते स्फुटकुचतटाः पश्य कुलटाः Udb. -2 as much as may be wanted, to the heart's content; यथेष्टं बुभुजे मांसम् Ch. P.3. -ईक्षितम् ind. as personally seen, as actually perceived. -उक्त, -उदित a. as said or told above, aforesaid, above-mentioned; यथोक्ताः संवृत्ताः Pt.1; यथोक्त- व्यापारा Ś.1; R.2.7; ततः स्वगृहमेत्य यथोक्तमर्थत्यागं कृत्वा Dk.2.2. -उचित a. suitable, proper, due, fit. (-तम्) ind. duly, suitably, properly; आगतं तु भयं वीक्ष्य नरः कुर्याद् यथोचितम् H. -उत्तरम् ind. in regular order or succession, one after another; संबन्धो$त्र यथोत्तरम् S. D. 729; श्रैष्ठ्यमेषां यथोत्तरम् Ms.12.38; यथोत्तरेच्छा हि गुणेषु कामिनः Ki.8.4. -उत्साहम् ind. 1 according to one's power or might. -2 with all one's might. -उद्गत a. without sense, stupid. -उद्गमनम् in ascending proportion. -उद्दिष्ट a. as indicated or described. (-ष्टम्) or -उद्देशम् ind. in the manner indicated. -उपचारम् ind. as politeness or courtesy requires. -उपजोषम् ind. according to pleasure or desire; यथोपजोषं वासांसि परिधाया- हतानि ते Bhāg.8.9.15. -उपदिष्ट a. as indicated. -उपदेशम् ind. as advised or instructed. -उपपत्ति ind. 1 as may be fit. -2 as may happen. -उपपन्न a. just as happened to be at hand, natural; यथोपपन्नरज्जुबद्धः Dk.2.4. -उपमा (in Rhet.) a comparison expressed by यथा. -उप- -योगम् ind. according to use or requirements, according to circumstances. -उपाधि ind. according to the condition or supposition. -औचित्यम् propriety, suitableness, fitness. -ऋतु ind. according to the right season; यथर्तुवर्षी भगवान् न तथा पाकशासनः Mb.3.188.5. -कथित a. as already mentioned. -कर्तव्यम् what is right to be done. -कर्म ind. according to one's duties or circumstances. -कल्पम् ind. according to rule or ritual. -काम a. conformable to desire. (-मम्) ind. agreeably to desire, at will or pleasure, to the heart's content; यथाकामार्चितार्थिनाम् R.1.6;4.51. -कामिन् a. free, unrestrained. -कारम् ind. in whatever way; P.III.4.28. -कालः the right or due time, proper time; यथाकालप्रबोधिनाम् R.1.6. (-लम्) ind. at the right time, opportunely, seasonably; सोपसर्पैर्जजागार यथाकालं स्वपन्नपि R.17.51. -कृत a. as agreed upon, done according to rule or custom, customary; स यदि प्रतिपद्येत यथान्यस्तं यथाकृतम् Ms.8.183. (-तम्) ind. according to the usual practice. -क्लृप्ति ind. in a suitable way. -क्रमम्, -क्रमेण ind. in due order or succession, regularly, in due form, properly; यथाक्रमं पुंसवनादिकाः क्रियाः R.3.1;9.26. -क्षमम् ind. according to one's power, as much as possible. -क्षिप्रम् ind. as quickly as possible. -क्षेमेण ind. safely, comfortably. -खेलम् ind. playfully; V. -गुणम् ind. according to qualities or endowments; Ch. Up. -चित्तम् ind. according to will; Māl. -जात a. 1 foolish, senseless, stupid. -2 barbarous, outcast. -ज्ञानम् ind. to the best of one's knowledge or judgment. -ज्येष्ठम् ind. according to rank, by seniority. -तत्त्वम् ind. 1 according to actual facts, actually, as the case really may be. -तथ a. 1 true, right. -2 accurate, exact. (-थम्) a narrative of the particulars or details of anything, a detailed or minute account. (-थम्) ind. 1 exactly, precisely; विभाव्यन्ते यथातथम् Bhāg. -2 fitly, properly, as the case really may be; Mb.3. -तथ्यम्, -तथ्येन ind. truly, really. -तृप्ति ind. to the heart's content. -दर्शनम् ind. according to observation. -दिक्, -दिशम् ind. in all directions. -निकायम् ind. according to body; Śvet. Up. -निर्दिष्ट a. 1 as mentioned before, as specified above; यथानिर्दिष्टव्यापारा सखी. -2 as prescribed or laid down; यथानिर्दिष्टं संपादितं व्रतम् V.3. -न्यायम् ind. justly, rightly, properly; प्रतिपूज्य यथान्यायम् Ms.1.1. -न्यासम् ind. according to the text of a Śūtra, as written down. -न्युप्त a. as placed on the ground or offered; अवजिघ्रेच्च तान् पिण्डान् यथान्युप्तान् समाहितः Ms.3.218. -पण्यम् ind. according to the (value or kind of) commodities; शुल्क- स्थानेषु कुशलाः यथापण्यविचक्षणाः Ms.8.398 (v. l.). -पुरम् ind. as before, as on previous occasions; यथापुरमविज्ञाय स्वार्थलिप्सुमपण्डिताम् Rām.2.1.2. -पूर्व, -पूर्वक a. being as before, former; R.12.41. (-र्वम्) -पूर्वकम् ind. 1 as before; सर्वाणि ज्ञातिकार्याणि यथापूर्वं समाचरेत् Ms.11.187. -2 in due order or succession, one after another; एते मान्या यथापूर्वम् Y.1.35. -प्रत्यर्हम् ind. according to merit. -प्रदिष्टम् ind. as suitable or proper. -प्रदेशम् ind. 1 in the proper or suitable place; यथाप्रदेशं विनिवेशितेन Ku. 1.49; आसञ्जयामास यथाप्रदेशं कण्ठे गुणम् R.6.83; Ku.7.34. -2 according to direction or precept. -3 on all sides. -प्रधानम्, -प्रधानतः ind. according to rank or position, according to precedence; आलोकमात्रेण सुरानशेषान् संभावया- मास यथाप्रधानम् Ku.7.46. -प्रयोगम् ind. 1 according to usage or practice. -2 as found by experiment. -प्रस्तावम् ind. on the first suitable occasion. -प्रस्तुतम् ind. 1 at last, at length. -2 conformably to the circumstances. -प्राणम् ind. according to strength with all one's might. -प्राप्त a. 1 suitable to circumstances. -2 following from a previous grammatical rule; Kāśi. on P.III.2.135. (-प्तम्) ind. regularly, properly. -प्रार्थितम् ind. as requested. -बलम् ind. 1 to the best of one's power, with all one's might; यथाबलं च विभज्य गृह्णीत Dk.2.8. -2 according to the (condition of) army or number of forces; Ms. -बुद्धि, -मति ind. to the best of one's knowledge. -भक्त्या with entire devotion. -भागम्, -भागशः ind. 1 according to the share of each, proportionately; यथाभागशो$मी वो गन्धाः -2 each in his respective place; यथाभागमवस्थिताः Bg.1.11. -3 in the proper place; यथाभागमवस्थिते$पि R.6.19. -भावः 1 destiny. -2 proper relation. -भूतम् ind. according to what has taken place, according to truth, truly, exactly. -भूयस् ind. according to seniority. -मुखीन a. looking straight at (with gen.); (मृगः) यथामुखीनः सीतायाः पुप्लुवे बहु लोभयन् Bk.5.48. -मूल्य a. worth the price, accordant with the price. -यथम् ind. 1 as in fit, fitly, properly; यथायथं ताः सहिता नभश्चरैः Ki.8.2. -2 in regular order, severally, each in its proper place, respectively; असक्तमाराधयतो यथायथम् Ki.1.11; बीजवन्तो मुखाद्यर्था विप्रकीर्णा यथायथम् S. D.337. -3 by degrees, gradually; सर्वे मायामानवा यथायथमन्तर्भावं गताः Dk.1.5. -युक्तम्, -योगम् ind. according to circumstances, fitly, suitably. -योग्य a. suitable, fit, proper, right. -रसम् ind. according to the sentiments. -रुचम्, -रुचि ind. according to one's liking or taste; वदन्ति चैतत् कवयो यथारुचम् Bhāg.2.5.21. -रूपम् ind. 1 according to form or appearance. -2 duly, properly, fitly. -लब्ध a. as actually in hand. -वस्तु ind. as the fact stands, exactly, accurately, truly. -विध a. of such kind or sort. -विधि ind. according to rule or precept, duly, properly; यथाविधि हुताग्नीनाम् R.1.6; संचस्कारोभयप्रीत्या मैथिलेयौ यथाविधि 15.31;3.7; Ms.11.191. -विनियोगम् ind. in the succession or order stated. -विभवम् ind. in proportion to one's income, according to means. -वीर्य a. of whatever strength. (-र्यम्) ind. in respect of manliness or courage. -वृत्त a. as happened, done or acted. (-त्तम्) 1 the actual facts, the circumstances or details of an event.-2 a former event. -वृद्धम् ind. according to age or seniority; गगनादवतीर्णा सा यथावृद्धपुरःसरा Ku.6. 49. -व्युत्पत्ति ind. 1 according to the degree of education or culture. -2 according to the derivation. -शक्ति, -शक्त्या ind. to the best of one's power, as far as possible. -शब्दार्थम् ind. in keeping with or according to the sense conveyed by the (sacred) text; इह शब्द- लक्षणे कर्मणि यथाशब्दार्थं प्रवृत्तिः ŚB. on MS.11.1.26. -शास्त्रम् ind. according to the scriptures, as the law ordains; सर्वे$पि क्रमशस्त्वेते यथाशास्त्रं निषेविताः Ms.6.88. -शीघ्रम् ind. as quickly as possible. -शीलम् ind. in accordance with one's temper. -श्रुत a. according to the report. -श्रुतम् -ति ind. 1 as heard or reported. -2 (यथाश्रुति) according to Vedic precepts; अस्मात् परं बत यथाश्रुति संभृतानि को नः कुले निवपनानि करिष्यतीति Ś.6.25. -श्रेष्ठम् ind. in order of precedence or merit. -श्लक्ष्ण a. behaving in such a way that the weaker is placed first. -संस्थम् ind. according to circumstances. -संख्यम् a figure of speech in Rhetoric; यथासंख्यं क्रमेणैव क्रमिकाणां समन्वयः K. P.1; e. g. शत्रुं मित्रं विपत्तिं च जय रञ्जय भञ्जय Chandr.5.17. (-ख्यम्), -संख्येन ind. according to number, respectively, number for number; हृत्कण्ठतालुगाभिस्तु यथासंख्यं द्विजातयः (शुध्येरन्) Y.1.21. -समयम् ind. 1 at the proper time. -2 according to agreement or established usage. -संभव a. possible. -संभावित a. suitable, appropriate. -सर्वम् ind. in all particulars. -सवनम् ind. according to the time or season. -सारम् ind. according to quality or goodness. -सुखम् ind. 1 at will or pleasure. -2 at ease, comfortably, pleasantly, so as to give pleasure; अङ्के निधाय करभोरु यथासुखं ते संवाहयामि चरणावुत पद्मताम्रौ Ś.3.2; R.9.48; Ms.4.43. -स्थानम् the right or proper place. (-नम्) ind. 1 in the proper place; duly, properly. -2 instantly. -3 according to rank. -स्थित a. 1 according to circumstances or actual facts, as it stands; रामं यथास्थितं सर्वं भ्राता ब्रूते स्म विह्वलः Bk.6.8. -2 right, proper, fit. (-तम्) ind. 1 truly, properly. -2 according to circumstances. -स्थिति ind. as usual, according to state or circumstances. -स्थूलम् ind. without details. -स्व a. each according to (his or her) own; यथास्वान् जग्मुरालयान् Mb.12.44.14. -स्वम् ind. 1 each his own, respectively; अध्यासते चीरभृतो यथास्वम् R.13.22; Ki.14.43. -2 individually; यथास्वमाश्रमैश्चके वर्णैरपि षडंशभाक् R.17.65. -3 duly, properly, rightly; यथास्वं ग्राहकान्येषां शब्दादीनामिमानि तु Mb.3.211.13.

yuṣmad	युष्मद् The base of the second personal pronoun; (nom. त्वम्, युवाम्, यूयम्) Thou, you; (at the beginning of several compounds). -Comp. -अर्थम् ind. for you. -आयत्त a. at your disposal. -वाच्यम् (in gram.) the second person. -विध a. like you.

raṃhiḥ	रंहिः f. Ved. 1 A running stream, spring. -2 Running, flowing. -3 Hunting, pursuing. -4 Haste.

raṇḍa	रण्ड a. [रम्-ड तस्य नेत्वम् Uṇ.1.17] 1 Maimed, Mutilated. -2 Faithless. -ण्डः 1 A man who dies without male issue. -2 A barren tree. -3 Cunning; L. D. B. -ण्डा 1 A slut, whore; a term of abuse used in addressing women; रण्डे पण्डितमानिनि Pt.1.392 v. l.; प्रतिकूलामकुलजां पापां पापानुवर्तिनीम् । केशेष्वाकृष्य तां रण्डां पाखण्डेषु नियोजय ॥ Prab.2. -2 A widow; रण्डाः पीनपयोधराः कति मया नोद्गाढमालिङ्गिताः Prab.3. -3 A kind of metre. -Comp- -आश्रमिन् m. one who loses his wife after the forty-eighth year.

rātrau	रात्रौ शयनम् A festival on the 11th day of the first half of आषाढ, regarded as the night of the gods, beginning with the summer solstice.

rāma	राम a. [रम् कर्तरि घञ् ण वा] 1 Pleasing, delighting, rejoicing, -2 Beautiful, lovely, charming. -3 Obscure; dark-coloured, black. -4 White. -मः 1 N. of three celebrated personages; (a) Paraśurāma, son of Jamadagni; (b) Balarāma, son of Vasudeva and brother of Kṛiṣṇa, q.q.v.v.; (c) Rāmachandra or Sītārāma, son of Daśaratha and Kausalyā and the hero of the Rāmāyaṇa; (the word is thus derived in Purāṇas:-- राशब्दो विश्ववचनो मश्चापीश्वरवाचकः । विश्वाधीनेश्वरो यो हि तेन रामः प्रकीर्तितः ॥) cf. also राकारोच्चारमात्रेण मुखान्निर्याति पातकम् । पुनः प्रवेशशङ्कायां मकारो$स्ति कपाटवत् ॥ [When quite a boy, he with his brother was taken by Viśvāmitra, with the permission of Daśaratha, to his hermitage to protect his sacrifices from the demons that obstructed them. Rāma killed them all with perfect ease, and received from the sage several miraculous missiles as a reward. He then accompanied Viśvāmitra to the capital of Janaka where he married Sītā having performed the wonderful feat of bending Siva's bow, and then returned to Ayodhyā. Daśaratha, seeing that Rāma was growing fitter and fitter to rule the kingdom, resolved to install him as heir-apparent. But, on the eve of the day of coronation, his favourite wife Kaikeyī, at the instigation of her wicked nurse Mantharā, asked him to fulfil the two boons he had formerly promised to her, by one of which she demanded the exile of Rāma for fourteen years and by the other the installation of her own son Bharata as Yuvarāja. The king was terribly shocked, and tried his best to dissuade her from her wicked demands, but was at last obliged to yield. The dutiful son immediately prapared to go into exile accompanied by his beautiful young wife Sītā and his devoted brother Lakṣmana. The period of his exile was eventful, and the two brothers killed several powerful demons and at last roused the jealousy of Rāvaṇa himself. The wicked demon resolved to try Rāma by carrying off his beauteous wife for whom he had conceived an ardent passion, and accomplished his purpose being assisted by Mārīcha. After several fruitless inquiries as to her whereabouts, Hanumat ascertained that she was in Laṅkā and persuaded Rāma to invade the island and kill the ravisher. The monkeys built a bridge across the ocean over which Rāma with his numerous troops passed, conquered Laṅkā, and killed Rāvaṇa along with his whole host of demons. Rāma, attended by his wife and friends in battle, triumphantly returned to Ayodhyā where he was crowned king by Vasiṣṭha. He reigned long and righteously and was succeeded by his son Kuśa. Rāma is said to be the seventh incarnation of Viṣṇu; cf. Jayadeva:-- वितरसि दिक्षु रणे दिक्पतिकमनीयं दशमुखमौलिबलिं रमणीयम् । केशव धृतरघुपति- रूप जय जगदीश हरे Gīt.1.]. -2 A kind of deer. -3 N. of Aruṇa. -4 A lover; cf. Śi.4.59. -5 A horse. -6 Pleasure, joy. -मम् 1 Darkness. -2 Leprosy (कृष्ठम्). -3 A tamāla leaf. -Comp. -अनुजः N. of a celebrated reformer, founder of a Vedāntic sect and author of several works. He was a Vaiṣṇava. -अयनम् (-णम्) 1 the adventures of Rāma. -2 N. of a celebrated epic by Vālmīki which contains about 24 verses in seven Kāṇḍas or books. -ईश्वरः N. of a sacred place of pilgrimage. -काण्डः a species of cane. -किल्बिषम् an offence against Rāma. -कृत् (in music) N. of a Rāga. -क्री N. of a Rāga. -गिरिः N. of a mountain; (चक्रे) स्निग्धच्छाया- तरुषु वसतिं रामगिर्याश्रमेषु Me.1. -चन्द्रः, -भद्रः N. of Rāma, son of Daśaratha. -जन्मन् n. the birth or birth-day of Rāma. -तापन, -तापनी, -तापनीय उपनिषद् N. of a well-known उपनिषद् (belonging to the अथर्ववेद). -दूतः 1 N. of Hanumat. -2 a monkey. (-ती) a kind of basil. -नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Chaitra, the anniversary of the birth of Rāma. -पूगः a kind of betel-nut tree. -लीला N. of a dramatic performance, on the story of Rāma. -वल्लभः the birch-tree. (-भम्) cinnamon. -शरः a kind of sugar cane. -सखः N. of Sugrīva. -सेतुः the bridge of Rāma', a bridge of sand between the Indian peninsula and Ceylon, now called Adam's bridge.

rāyaḥ	रायः A king, prince (often at the beginning or end of proper names; it is a corruption of राजन्). -Comp. -रङ्गालम् a kind of dance.

rāvaṇa	रावण a. [रु-णिच् ल्यु] Crying, screaming, roaring, bewailing; इत्युक्त्वा परुषं वाक्यं रावणः शत्रुरावणः Rām.3.56. 26 (com. शत्रून् रावयति क्रोशयति शत्ररावणः). -णः N. of a celebrated demon, king of Laṅkā and the chief of the Rākṣhasas; स रावणो नाम निकामभीषणं बभूव रक्षः क्षतरक्षणं दिवः Śi.1.48. [He was the son of Viśravas by Keśinī or Kaikaśī and so half-brother of Kuber. He is called Paulastya as being a grandson of the sage Pulastya. Laṅkā was originally occupied by Kubera, but Rāvaṇa ousted him from it and made it his own capital. He had ten heads (and hence his names Daśagrīva, Daśa- vadana &c.) and twenty arms, and according to some, four legs (cf. R.12.88 and Malli.). He is represented to have practised the most austere penance for ten thousand years in order to propitiate the god Brahman, and to have offered one head at the end of each one thousand years. Thus he offered nine of his heads and was going to offer the tenth when the God was pleased and granted him immunity from death by either god or man. On the strength of this boon he grew very tyrannical and oppressed all beings. His power became so great that even the gods are said to have acted as his domestic servants. He conquered almost all the kings of the day, but is said to have been imprisoned by Kārtavīrya for some time when he went to attack his territory. On one occasion he tried to uplift the Kailāsa mountain, but Śiva pressed it down so as to crush his fingers under it. He, therefore, hymned Śiva for one thousand years so loudly that the God gave him the name Rāvaṇa and freed him from his painful position. But though he was so powerful and invincible, the day of retribution drew near. While Rāma who was Viṣṇu descended on earth for the destruction of this very demon was passing his years of exile in the forest, Rāvaṇa carried off his wife Sītā and urged her to become his wife but she persistently refused and remained loyal to her husband. At last Rāma assisted by his monkey-troops invaded Laṅkā, annihilated Rāvaṇa's troops and killed the demon himself. He was a worthy opponent of Rāma, and hence the expression:-- रामरावणयोर्युद्धं रामरावणयोरिव ।]. -णम् 1 The act of screaming. -2 N. of a Muhūrta. -Comp. -अरिः N. of Rāma. -गङ्गा N. of a river in Laṅkā.

lū	लू 9 U. (लुनाति, लुनीते, लून; caus. लावयति-ते; desid. लुलूषति-ते) 1 To cut, lop, clip, sever, divide, pluck, reap, gather (flowers &c.); शरासनज्यामलुनाद् बिडौजसः R.3. 59;7.5;12.43; पुरीमवस्कन्द लुनीहि नन्दनम् Śi.1.51; क्रीडन्ति काकैरिव लूनपक्षैः Pt.1.187; Ku.3.61; Bk.9.8. -2 To cut off, destroy completely, annihilate; लोकान- लावीद्विजितांश्च तस्य Bk.2.53. -With आ to pluck (gently); तेनामरवधूहस्तैः सदयालूनपल्लवाः Ku.2.41. -विप्र to cut, lop or pluck off; किसलयमिव मुग्धं बन्धनाद्विप्रलूनम् U.3.5.

lokaḥ	लोकः [लोक्यते$सौ लोक्-घञ्] 1 The world, a division of the universe; (roughly speaking there are three lokas स्वर्ग, पृथ्वी and पाताल, but according to fuller classification the lokas are fourteen, seven higher regions rising from the earth one above the other, i. e. भूर्लोक, भुवर्लोक, स्वर्लोक, महर्लोक, जनर्लोक, तपर्लोक, and सत्यलोक or ब्रह्मलोक; and seven lower regions, descending from the earth one below the other; i. e. अतल, वितल, सुतल, रसातल, तलातल, महातल, and पाताल). -2 The earth, terrestrial world (भूलोक); इह- लोके in this world (opp. परत्र). -3 The human race, mankind, men, as in लोकातिग, लोकोत्तर &c. q. v. -4 The people or subjects (opp. the king); स्वसुखनिरभिलाषः खिद्यसे लोकहेतोः Ś.5.7; R.4.8. -5 A collection, group, class, company; आकृष्टलीलान् नरलोकपालान् R.6.1; or शशाम तेन क्षितिपाल- लोकः 7.3. -6 A region, tract, district, province. -7 Common life, ordinary practice (of the world); लोकवत्तु लीलाकैवल्यम् Br. Sūt.II.1.33; यथा लोके कस्यचिदाप्तैषणस्य राज्ञः &c. S. B. (and diverse other places of the same work). -8 Common or worldly usage (opp. Vedic usage or idiom); वेदोक्ता वैदिकाः शब्दाः सिद्धा लोकाच्च लौकिकाः, प्रियतद्धिता दाक्षिणात्या यथा लोके वेदे चेति प्रयोक्तव्ये यथा लौकिक- वैदिकेष्विति प्रयुञ्जते Mbh. (and in diverse other places); अतो$स्मि लोके वेदे च प्रथितः पुरुषोत्तमः Bg.15.18. -9 Sight, looking. -1 The number 'seven', or 'fourteen'. -11 Ved. Open space; space, room. -12 One's own nature (निजस्वरूप); नष्टस्मृतिः पुनरयं प्रवृणीत लोकम् Bhāg.3. 31.15. -13 Enlightenment (प्रकाश); इच्छामि कालेन न यस्य विप्लवस्तस्यात्मलोकावरणस्य मोक्षम् Bhāg.8.3.25. -14 Recompense (फल); अग्नावेव देवेषु लोकमिच्छन्ते Bṛi. Up.1.4.15. -15 An object of enjoyment (भोग्यवस्तु); अथो अयं वा आत्मा सर्वेषां भूतानां लोकः Bṛi. Up 1.4.16. -16 Sight, the faculty of seeing (चक्षुरिन्द्रिय); अग्निर्लोकः Bṛi. Up.3.9. 1. -17 An object of sense (विषय); उपपत्त्योपलब्धेषु लोकेषु च समो भव Mb.12.288.11. (In compounds लोक is often translated by 'universally', 'generally', 'popularly'; as लोकविज्ञात so ˚विद्विष्ट). -Comp. -अक्षः space, sky. -अतिग a. extraordinary, supernatural. -अतिशय a. superior to the world, extraordinary. -अधिक a. extraordinary, uncommon; सर्वं पण्डितराजराजितिलकेनाकारि लोकाधिकम् Bv.4.44; Ki.2.47. -अधिपः 1 a king. -2 a god or deity. -अधिपतिः a lord of the world. -अनुग्रहः prosperity of mankind. -अनुरागः 'love of mankind', universal love, general benevolence, philanthropy. -अनुवृत्तम् obedience of the people. -अन्तरम् 'another world', the next world, future life; लोकान्तरसुखं पुण्यं तपोदानसमुद्भवम् R.1.69;6.45; लोकान्तरं गम्-प्राप् &c. 'to die'. -अन्तरित a. dead. -अपवादः public scandal, popular censure; लोकापवादो बलवान् मतो मे R.14.4. -अभि- भाविन् a. 1 overcoming the world. -2 pervading the whole world (as light). -अभिलक्षित a. generally liked. -अभ्युदयः public weal or welfare. -अयनः N. of Nārāyaṇa. -अलोकः N. of a mythical mountain that encircles the earth and is situated beyond the sea of fresh water which surrounds the last of the seven continents; beyond लोकालोक there is complete darkness, and to this side of it there is light; it thus divides the visible world from the regions of darkness; प्रकाशश्चा- प्रकाशश्च लोकालोक इवाचलः R.1.68; लोकालोकव्याहतं धर्मराशेः शालीनं वा धाम नालं प्रसर्तुम् Śi.16.83; Mv.5.1,45; ऊर्ध्व- मालोकयामासुः लोकालोकमिवोच्छ्रितम् Parṇāl.3.3; (for further explanation see Dr. Bhāṇḍārkar's note on l. 79 of Māl. 1th Act). (-कौ) the visible and the invisible world. -आकाशः 1 space, sky. -2 (with Jains) a worldly region. -आचारः common practice, popular or general custom, ways of the world; अपि शास्त्रेषु कुशला लोकाचारविवर्जिताः Pt.5.43. -आत्मन् m. the soul of the universe. -आदिः 1 the beginning of the world. -2 the creator of the world. -आयत a. atheistical, materialistic. (-तः) a materialist, an atheist, a follower of Chārvāka. (-तम्) materialism, atheism; (for some account see the first chapter of the Sarvadarśanasaṁgraha). -आयतिकः an atheist, a materialist; कच्चिन्न लोकायतिकान् ब्राह्मणांस्तात सेवसे Rām. 2.1.38. -ईशः 1 a king (lord of the world). -2 Brahman. -3 quick-silver. -उक्तिः f. 1 a proverb, popular saying; लोके ख्यातिमुपागतात्र सकले लोकोक्तिरेषा यतो दग्धानां किल वह्निना हितकरः सेको$पि तस्योद्भवः Pt.1.371. -2 common talk, public opinion. -उत्तर a. extraordinary, uncommon, unusual; लोकोत्तरा च कृतिः Bv.1.69.7; U.2.7. (-रः) a king. ˚वादिन् m. pl. N. of a Buddhist school. -उपक्रोशनम् circulating evil reports among the people; असारस्य वाक्संतक्षणैर्लोकोपक्रोशनैः ... अपवाहनम् Dk.2.2. -एकबन्धुः an epithet of Śākyamuni. -एषणा 1 desire for heaven; या वितैषणा सा लोकैषणोभे ह्येते एषणे एव भवतः Bṛi. Up.3.5.1. -2 desire for the good opinion of the public. -कण्टकः 1 a troublesome or wicked man, the curse of mankind. -2 an epithet of Rāvaṇa; see कण्टक. -कथा a popular legend, folk-tale. -कर्तृ, -कृत् m. the creator of the world. -कल्प a. 1 resembling the world. -2 regarded by the world. (-ल्पः) a period or age of the world. -कान्त a. liked by the people, popular; भव पितुरनुरूपस्त्वं गुणैर्लोककान्तैः V.5.21. (-न्ता) a kind of medical herb (Mar. मुरुढशेंग). -कारणकारणः an epithet of Śiva. -क्षित् a. inhabiting heaven. -गतिः f. actions of men. -गाथा a song handed down among people, folk-song. -चक्षुस् n. the sun. -चारित्रम् the ways of the world. -जननी an epithet of Lakṣmī. -जित् m. 1 an epithet of Buddha. -2 any conqueror of the world. -3 a sage. -a. winning heaven; तद्धैतल्लोकजिदेव Bṛi. Up.1.3.28. -ज्ञ a. knowing the world. -ज्येष्ठः an epithet of Buddha. -तत्त्वम् knowledge of mankind. -तन्त्रम् course of the world; निर्मितो लोकतन्त्रो$यं लोकेषु परिवर्तते Bhāg.12.11.29. -तुषारः camphor. -त्रयम्, -त्रयी the three worlds taken collectively; उत्खात- लोकत्रयकण्टकेपि R.14.73. -दम्भक a. cheating mankind; Ms.4.195. -द्वारम् the gate of heaven. -धर्मः 1 a worldly matter. -2 (with Buddhists) worldly condition. -धातुः a particular division of the world (जम्बु- द्वीप). -धातृ m. an epithet of Śiva. -धारिणी N. of the earth. -नाथः 1 Brahman. -2 Viṣṇu. -3 Śiva. -4 a king, sovereign. -5 a Buddha -6 the sun. -नेतृ m. an epithet of Śiva. -पः, -पालः 1 a regent or guardian of a quarter of the world; ललिताभिनयं तमद्य भर्ता मरुतां द्रष्टुमनाः सलोकपालः V.2.18; R.2.75;12.89;17.78; (the lokapālas are eight; see अष्टदिक्पाल). -2 a king, sovereign. -पक्तिः f. esteem of mankind, general respectability. -पतिः 1 an epithet of Brahman. -2 of Viṣṇu. -3 a king, sovereign. -पथः, -पद्धतिः f. the general or usual way, the universally accepted way. -परोक्ष a. hidden from the world. -पितामहः an epithet of Brahman. -प्रकाशनः the sun. -प्रत्ययः universal prevalence. -प्रवादः general rumour, current report, popular talk. -प्रसिद्ध a. well-known, universally known. -बन्धुः, -बान्धवः 1 the sun. -2 Śiva. -बाह्य, -वाह्य 1 excluded from society, excommunicated. -2 differing from the world, eccentric, singular; उन्मादवन्नृत्यति लोकबाह्यः Bhāg.11.2.4. (-ह्यः) an outcast. -भर्तृ a. supporter of the people. -भावन, -भाविन् a. promoting the welfare of the world. -मर्यादा an established or current custom. -मातृ f. an epithet of Lakṣmī. -मार्गः an established custom. -यज्ञः desire for the good opinion of the people (लोकैषणा); Mb.1. 18.5. (com. लोकयज्ञो लोकैषणा सर्वो मां साधुमेव जानात्विति वासनारूपः). -यात्रा 1 worldly affairs, the course of worldly life, business of the world; तस्माल्लोकयात्रार्थी नित्यमुद्यत- दण्डः स्यात् Kau. A.1.4; Mb.3.15.31; Dk.2.8; एवं किलेयं लोकयात्रा Mv.7; यावदयं संसारस्तावत् प्रसिद्धैवेयं लोकयात्रा Ve.3. -2 a popular usage or custom; एषोदिता लोकयात्रा नित्यं स्त्रीपुंसयोः शुभा Ms.9.25 -3 worldly existence, career in life; Māl.4,6. -4 support of life, maintenance. -रक्षः a king, sovereign. -रञ्जनम् pleasing the world, popularity. -रवः popular talk or report. -रावण a. tormentor of the people; रावणं लोकरावणम् Rām.3.33.1; Mb.3.148.12. -लेखः 1 a public document. -2 an ordinary letter. -लोचनम् the sun. -वचनम् a popular rumour or report. -वर्तनम् the means by which the world subsists. -वादः public rumour; common talk, popular report; मां लोकवादश्रवणादहासीः R.14.61. -वार्ता popular report, public rumour; कश्चिदक्षर्धूतः कलासु कवित्वेषु लोकवार्तासु चातिवैचक्षण्यान्मया समसृज्यत Dk.2.2. -विद्विष्ट a. disliked by men, generally or universally disliked. -विधिः 1 a mode of proceeding prevalent in the world. -2 the creator of the world. -विनायकाः a class of deities presiding over diseases. -विभ्रमः see लोकव्यवहार; हृष्यत्तनुर्विस्मृतलोकविभ्रमः Bhāg.1.71.26. -विरुद्ध a. opposed to public opinion; यद्यपि शुद्धं लोकविरुद्धं नाकरणीयम् नाचरणीयम्. -विश्रुत a. farfamed, universally known, famous, renowned. -विश्रुतिः f. 1 world-wide fame. -2 unfounded rumour, mere report. -विसर्गः 1 the end of the world; Mb. -2 the creation of the world; Bhāg. -वृत्तम् 1 the way of the world, a custom prevalent in the world; लोकवृत्तमनुष्ठेयं कृतं वो बाष्पमोक्षणम् Rām.4.25.3. -2 an idle talk or gossip; न लोकवृत्तं वर्तेत वृत्तिहेतोः कथंचन Ms.4.11. -वृत्तान्तः, -व्यवहारः 1 the course or ways of the world, general custom; Ś.5. -2 course of events. -व्यवहार a. commonly used, universally current. -व्रतम् general practice or way of the world. -श्रुतिः f. 1 a popular report. -2 world-wide fame. -संसृतिः f. 1 fate, destiny. -2 course through the world. -संकरः general confusion in the world. -संग्रहः 1 the whole universe. -2 the welfare of the world; लोकसंग्रहमेवापि संपश्यन् कर्तुमर्हसि Bg.3.2. -3 worldly experience. -4 propitiation of mankind. -संपन्न a. possessed of worldly wisdom. -संबाधः a throng of men, going and coming; इतस्ततः प्रवेशनिर्गमप्रवृत्तलोकसंबाधम् Dk.2.3. -साक्षिक a. 1 having the world as a witness; in the face of the world; प्रत्यक्षं फलमश्नन्ति कर्मणां लोकसाक्षिकम् Mb.3.32.6. -2 attested by witnesses. -साक्षिन् m. 1 an epithet of Brahman. -2 fire. -साधक a. creating worlds. -साधारण a. common (as a topic); Dk. -सिद्ध a. 1 current among the people, usual, customary. -2 generally received or accepted. -सीमातिवर्तिन् a. extraordinary, supernatural. -सुन्दर a. generally admired. -स्थलम् common occurrence. -स्थितिः f. 1 existence or conduct of the universe, worldly existence; the stability or permanence of the world; ये चैवं पुरुषाः कलासु कुशलास्तेष्वेव लोकस्थितिः Bh.2.22. -2 a universal law. -हास्य a. world-derided, the butt of general ridicule. -हित a. beneficial to mankind or to the world. (-तम्) general welfare.

vaktram	वक्त्रम् [वक्ति अनेन वच्-करणे ष्ट्रन् Uṇ.4.177] 1 The mouth. -2 The face; यद्वक्त्रं मुहुरीक्षसे न धनिनां ब्रूषे न चाटून् मृषा Bh.3.147. -3 Snout, muzzle, beak. -4 Beginning. -5 The point (of an arrow), the spout of a vessel. -6 A sort of garment. -7 N. of a metre similar to anuṣṭubh; see S. D.567; Kāv.1.26. -8 The first term of a progression. -Comp. -आसवः saliva. -खुरः a tooth. -जः 1 a tooth. -2 a Brāhmaṇa. -तालम् a musical instrument played with the mouth. -तुण्डः N. of Gaṇeṣa. -दलम् the palate. -पटः a veil. -पट्टः a bag of corn tied round a horse's neck. -परिस्पन्दः speech. -भेदिन् a. pungent, sharp. -रन्ध्रम् the aperture of the mouth. -वासः an orange. -शोधनम् 1 clean- sing the mouth. -2 lime, citron. -शोधिन् n. a citron. (-m.) a citron tree.

vakriman	वक्रिमन् m. [वक्र-इमनिच्] 1 Crookedness, curvature. -2 Equivocation, evasion, ambiguity; tortuous, roundabout or indirect nature (as of a speech); तद्वक्त्राम्बुज- सौरभं स च सुधास्यन्दी गिरां वक्रिमा Gīt.3. -3 Cunningness, duplicity, craftiness.

vardhana	वर्धन a. [वृध्-णिच् ल्यु ल्युट् वा] 1 Increasing, growing. -2 Causing to increase, enlarging, magnifying. -नः A bestower of prosperity. -2 A tooth growing over another tooth. -3 N. of Śiva. -नी 1 A broom. -2 A bier. -3 A water-jar of a particular shape. -नम् 1 Growing, thriving. -2 Growth, increase, prosperity, magnifying, enlargement. -4 Elevation. -5 Exhilaration (of spirits), animation. -6 Educating, rearing. -7 Cutting, dividing; as in नाभिवर्धनम्; प्राङ्नाभिवर्धनात् पुंसो जातकर्म विधीयते Mb.3.18.34; annihilation; ततो राजन् महानासीत् संग्रामो भूरिवर्धनः Mb.7.153.44. -8 A means of strengthening. restorative. -9 Filling.

vaśa	वश a. [वश् कर्तरि अच् भावे अप् वा] 1 Subject to, influenced by, under the influence or control of, usually in comp; शोकवशः, मृत्युवशः &c. -2 Obedient, submissive, compliant. -3 Humbled, tamed. -4 Charmed, fascinated. -5 Subdued by charms. -शः, -शम् 1 Wish, desire, wil; Ait. Up.5.2. -2 Power, influence, control, mastership, authority, subjection, submission; स्ववश 'subject to oneself', independent; परवश 'under the influence of others'; अनयत् प्रभुशक्तिसंपदा वशमेको नृपती- ननन्तरान् R.8.19; वशं नी, or आनी to reduce to subjection, subdue, win over; वशं गम्-इ-या &c. to become subject to, give way, yield, submit; विषमालोड्य पास्यामि मा कीचकवशं गमम् Mb.4.21.48; न शुचो वशं वशिनामुत्तम गन्तुमर्हसि R.8.9; वशे कृ or वशीकृ to subdue, overcome, win over; to fascinate, bewitch; वशात् (abl.) is frequently used adverbially in the sense of 'through the force, power or influence of', 'on account of', 'for the purpose of'; दैववशात्, वायुवशात्, कार्यवशात् &c. -3 Being tamed. -4 Birth. -शः The residence of harlots. -Comp. -अनुग, -ग, -वर्तिन् (so वशंगत) a. obedient to the will of another, submissive, subject; नमस्यामो देवान्ननु हतविधेस्ते$पि वशगाः Bh.2.94. (-m.) a servant. -आढ्यकः a porpoise. -इन्द्रिय a. one who has the command of his senses. -उपनयनम् an instrument to bring people under control; न ह्येवंविधं वशोपनयनमस्ति भूतानां यथा दण्डः Kau. A.1.4. -कारक a. leading to subjection. -क्रिया winning over, subjection. -ग a. subject, obedient; नमस्यामो देवान्ननु हतविधेस्ते$पि वशगाः Bh.2.94; Pt.1.139. (-गा) an obedient wife.

vā	वा ind. 1 As an alternative conjunction it means 'or'; but its position is different in Sanskrit, being used either with each word or assertion or only with the last, but it is never used at the beginning of a clause; cf. च. -2 It has also the following senses:-- (a) and, as well as, also; वायुर्वा दहनो वा G. M.; अस्ति ते माता स्मरसि वा तातम् U.4. (b) like, as; जातां मन्ये तुहिनमथितां पद्मिनीं वान्यरूपाम् Me.85 (v. l.); मणी वोष्ट्रस्य लम्बेते Sk.; हृष्टो गर्जति चाति- दर्पितबलो दुर्योधनो वा शिखी Mk.5.6; स्नानीयवस्त्रक्रियया पत्रोर्णं वोपयुज्यते M.5.12; Śi.3.63;4.35;7.64; Ki.3.13. (c) optionally; (in this sense mostly in grammatical rules as of Pāṇini); दोषो णौ वा चित्तविरागे P.VI.4. 99,91. (d) possibility; (in this sense वा is usually added to the interrogative pronoun and its derivatives like इव or नाम), and may be translated by 'possibly', 'I should like to know'; कस्य वान्यस्य वचसि मया स्थातव्यम् K.; परिवर्तिनि संसारे मृतः को वा न जायते Pt.1.27. (e) sometimes used merely as an expletive. (f) indeed, truly. (g) only. -3 When repeated वा has the sense of 'either-or,' 'whether-or'; सा वा शंभोस्तदीया वा मूर्तिर्जल- मयी मम Ku.2.6; तदत्र परिश्रमानुरोधाद्वा उदात्तकथावस्तुगौर- वाद्वा नवनाटकदर्शनकुतूहलाद्वा भवद्बिरवधानं दीयमानं प्रार्थये Ve.1; एक एक खगो मानी सुखं जीवति चातकः । म्रियते वा पिपासायां याचते वा पुरंदरम् ॥ Subhāṣ. (अथवा or, or rather, or else; see under अथ; न वा not, neither, nor; यदि वा or if; यद्वा or, or else; किं वा whether, possibly &c.; किं वा शकुन्तलेत्यस्य मातुराख्या Ś.7.2/21; को वा or के वा followed by a negative means 'everyone, all'; के वा न स्युः परिभवफला निष्फलारम्भयत्नाः Me.56.

vāc	वाच् f. [वच्-क्विप् दीर्घो$संप्रसारणं च Uṇ.2.67] 1 A word, sound, an expression (opp. अर्थ); वागर्थाविव संपृक्तौ वागर्थप्रतिपत्तये R.1.1. -2 Words, talk, language, speech; वाचि पुण्यापुण्यहेतवः Māl.4; लौकिकानां हि साधूनामर्थं वागनुवर्तते । ऋषीणां पुनराद्यानां वाचमर्थो$नुधावति U.1.1; विनिश्चितार्थामिति वाचमाददे Ki.1.3 'spoke these words', 'spoke as follows'; R.1.49; Śi.2.13,23; Ku.2.3. -3 A voice, sound; अशरीरिणी वागुदचरत् U.2; मनुष्यवाचा R.2.33. -4 An assertion, a statement. -5 An assurance, a promise. -6 A phrase, proverb, saying. -7 N. of Sarasvatī, the goddess of speech. -Comp. -अपहारकः (वागपहारकः) 1 a 'stealer of speech', a reader of prohibited texts; Ms.11.51. -2 a liar (मिथ्यावादी). -अपेत (वागपेत) a. dumb. -अर्थः (वागर्थः) a word and its meaning; वागर्थाविव संपृक्तौ R.1.1; see above. -असिः cutting speech (cutting like a sword); स्फुरन्नसाधोर्विवृणोति वागसिः Ki.14.12. -आडम्बरः, (-वागाडम्बरः) verbosity, bombast. -आत्मन् a. (वागात्मन्) consisting of words; ऋषे प्रबुद्धो$सि वागात्मनि ब्रह्मणि U.2. -ईशः (वागीशः) 1 an orator, an eloquent man. -2 an epithet of Bṛihaspati, the preceptor of the gods; वागीशाद्याः सुमनसः Nyāyamāla. -3 an epithet of Brahman; वागीशं (धातारं) वाग्भिरर्थ्याभिः प्रणिपत्योपतस्थिरे Ku.2.3. -4 the lunar mansion called Puṣya. (-शा) N. of Sarasvatī. -ईश्वरः (वागीश्वरः) 1 an orator, eloquent man. -2 an epithet of Brahman. (-री) Sarasvatī, the goddess of speech. -उत्तरम् (वागु- त्तरम्) end of speech. -ऋषभः, (वागृषभः) 'eminent in speech', an eloquent or learned man. -कलहः- (वाक्कलहः) a quarrel, strife. -कीरः (वाक्कीरः) a wife's brother. -केलिः, -ली (वाक्केलिः -ली) witty conversation. -गुदः (वाग्गुदः) a kind of bird; Ms.12.64. -गुणः (वाग्गुणः) a merit or excellence of speech; (35 such merits are enumerated by Hemachandra). -गुम्फः (pl.) artificial language. -गुलिः, -गुलिकः (वाग्गुलिः &c.) the betel-bearer of a king &c.; cf. ताम्बूलकरङ्कवाहिन्. -चपल a. (-वाक्चपल) chattering, frivolous or inconsiderate in talk. -चापल्यम् (वाक्चापल्यम्) idle or frivolous talk, chattering, gossiping. -छलम् (वाक्छलम्) 'dishonesty in words', an evasive reply, a prevarication; एतावदेवास्ति मे वाक्छलम् Mu.2; केनेदममृतं मे वाक्छलाद् वृष्टम् K.33. -जालम् (वाग्जालम्) bombast, empty talk; अनिर्लोडितकार्यस्य वाग्जालं वाग्मिनो वृथा Śi.2.27. -जीवमः (वाग्जीवनः) a buffon; Kau. A.2.1. -डम्बरः (वाग्ड- म्बरः) 1 bombast. -2 eloquent language. -दण्डः (वाग्दण्डः) 1 reproachful words, reprimand, reproof. -2 restraint of speech, control over words; cf. त्रिदण्ड Ms.12.1. -दत्त (वाग्दत्त) a. promised, affianced, betrothed. (-त्ता) an affianced or betrothed virgin; Kull. on Ms.5.72. -दरिद्र (वाग्दरिद्र) a. 'poor in words', i. e. speaking little. -दलम् (वाग्दलम्) a lip. -दानम् (वाग्दानम्) betrothal; Ms.5.72 (Kull.). -दुष्ट a. (वाग्दुष्ट) 1 abusive, scurrilous, using abusive words; Ms.8.345. -2 using ungrammatical language. (-ष्टः) 1 a defamer. -2 a Brāhmaṇa not invested with the sacred thread at the proper time of his life. -देवता, -देवी (वाग्देवता, वाग्देवी) Sarasvatī, the goddess of speech; वाग्देवतायाः सांमुख्यमाधत्ते S. D.1. ˚कुलम् science, learning. -दोषः (वाग्दोषः) 1 the utterance of a (disagreeable) sound; द्वीपिचर्मपरिच्छन्नो वाग्दोषाद् गर्दभो हतः H. B. -2 abuse, defamation. -3 an ungrammatical speech. -निबन्धन (वाग्निबन्धन) a. depending on words. -निमि- त्तम् (वाङ्निमित्तम्) Prognostications; तच्चाकर्ण्य वाङ्- निमित्तज्ञः पितरि सुतरां जीविताशां शिथिलीचकार Hch. V. -निश्चयः (वाङ्निश्चयः) affiance by word of month, marriage contract. -निष्ठा (वाङ्निष्ठा) faithfulness (to one's word or promise). -पटु a. (वाक्पटु) skilful in speech, eloquent. -पति a. (वाक्पति) eloquent; oratorical. (-तिः) 1 N. of Bṛihaspati (in this sense वाचसांपतिः is also used). -2 the constellation Puṣya. -पथः(वाक्पथः) 1 a moment fit for speech. -2 the range of speech. -पाटवम् (वाक्पाटवम्) eloquence. -पारीणः (वाक्पा- रीणः) beyond the range of speech; वाक्पारीणरुचिः स चेन्मुखमयं पद्मः प्रिये तावकम् N.22.14. -पारुष्यम् (वाक्पारु- ष्यम्) 1 severity of language. -2 violence in words, abusive or scurrilous language, defamation; एवं दण्डविधिः प्रोक्तो वाक्पारुष्यस्य तत्त्वतः Ms.8.278. -प्रचोदनम् (वाक्प्रचो- दनम्) an order expressed in words. -प्रतोदः (वाक्प्र- तोदः) 'the goad of words', goading or taunting language. -प्रलापः (वाक्प्रलापः) eloquence. -बन्धनम् (वाग्बन्धनम्) stopping the speech, silencing; व्रीडार्ता प्रकरोति दाडिमपलव्याजेन वाग्बन्धनम् Amaru.16. -भट (वाग्भटः) N. of a writer on medicine. -मनस n. (the duel -वाङ्मनसी in Vedic language) speech and mind; अथैनं तुष्टुवुः स्तुत्यमवाङ्मनसगोचरम् R.1.15; अतीतः पन्थानं तव च महिमा वाङ्मनसयोः Śiva-mahimna 2. -मात्रम् (वाङ्मात्रम्) mere words. -मुखम् (वाङ्मुखम्) the beginning or introduction of a speech, an exordium, a preface. -यत a. (-वाग्यत) one who has controlled or curbed his speech, silent. -यमः (वाग्यमः) one who has controlled his speech, a sage. -यामः (वाग्यामः) a dumb man. -युद्धम् (वाग्युद्धम्) a war of words, (hot) debate or discussion, controversy. -रोधः (वाग्रोधः) stopping the speech, silencing. -वज्रः (वाग्वज्रः) 1 adamantine words; अहह दारुणो वाग्वज्रः U.1. -2 harsh or severe language. -विद् a. (वाग्विद्) eloquent. -विदग्ध a. (वाग्विदग्ध) skilled in speech. (-ग्धा) a sweet-speaking or fascinating woman. -विनिःसृत a. (वाग्विनिःसृत) put forth by speech; वाच्यर्था नियताः सर्वे वाङ्मूला वाग्वि- निःसृताः । तां तु यः स्तेनयेद्वाचं स सर्वस्तेयकृन्नरः ॥ Ms.4.256. -विभवः (वाग्विभवः) stock or provision of words, power of description, command of language; नास्ति मे वाग्विभवः प्रशंसितुम् V.3; रघूणामन्वयं वक्ष्ये तनुवाग्विभवो$पि सन् R.1.9; Māl.1.26. -विलासः (वाग्विलासः) graceful or elegant speech. -विलासिन् m. (वाग्विलासिन्) pigeon, dove. -विस्तरः (वाग्विस्तरः) prolixity. -वीरः (वाग्वीरः) master of speech. -व्ययः (वाग्व्ययः) waste of breath. -व्यवहारः (वाग्व्यवहारः) verbal or oral discussion; प्रयोगप्रधानं हि नाट्यशास्त्रं किमत्र वाग्व्यवहारेण M.1. -व्यापारः (वाग्व्यापारः) 1 the manner of speaking. -2 the style or habit of speaking. -3 customary phraseology or mode of talking. -शलाका (वाक्शलाका) injurious speech. -शल्यम्(वाक्शल्यम्) = वाक्शलाका. -शस्त्रम् (वाक्शस्त्रम्) a curse; वाक्शस्त्रं वै ब्राह्मणस्य तेन हन्यादरीन् द्विजः Ms.11.33. -संतक्षणम् sarcastic remarks; असारस्य वाक्संतक्षणैः ... अपवाहनम् Dk.2.2. -संयमः (वाक्संयमः), -संवरः (वाक्संवरः) restraint or control of speech. -संगः (वाक्संगः) 1 impeded or slow speech. -2 paralysis of speech. -सारः (वाक्सारः) eloquence. -सिद्धम् (वाक्सिद्धम्) supernatural perfection of speech. -स्तम्भः (वाक्स्तम्भः) paralysis of speech.

vātāyamāna	वातायमान a. Running like wind; वातायमानैस्तैरश्वैर्नीतो वृष्णिशरार्दितैः Mb.7.117.34.

vāmila	वामिल a. 1 Beautiful, handsome. -2 Proud, haughty. -3 Cunning, deceitful.

vidravaḥ	विद्रवः 1 Running away, flight, retreat; तैः शरैस्तव सैन्यस्य विद्रवः सुमहानभूत् Bhāg.7.18.4. -2 Panic. -3 Flowing out. -4 Melting, liquefaction. -5 Censure, abuse. -6 Intellect, understanding.

vidrutiḥ	विद्रुतिः Running, flight.

vidhiḥ	विधिः [विधा-कि] 1 Doing, performance, practice, an act or action; ब्रह्मध्यानाभ्यसनविधिना योगनिद्रां गतस्य Bh.3.41; योगविधि R.8.22; अस्याः सर्गविधौ V.1.8; लेखाविधि Māl. 1.35. -2 Method, manner, way, means, mode; निः- साराल्पफलानि ये त्वविधिना वाञ्छन्ति दण्डोद्यमैः Pt.1.376. -3 A rule, commandment, any precept which enjoins something for the first time (as distinguished from नियम and परिसंख्या q. q. v. v.); विधिरत्यन्तमप्राप्तौ; चिकीर्षाकृतिसाध्यत्व- हेतुधीविषयो विधिः; वहति विधिहुतं या हविः Ś.1.1. -4 A sacred precept or rule, ordinance, injunction, law, a sacred command, religious commandment (opp. अर्थवाद which means 'an explanatory statement coupled with legends and illustrations'; see अर्थवाद); प्रवृत्तिपरं वाक्यं विधिः, as ज्योतिष्टोमेन स्वर्गकामो यजेत; श्रद्धा वित्तं विधिश्चेति त्रितयं तत् समागतम् Ś.7.29; R.2.16. -5 Any religious act or ceremony, a rite, ceremony; स चेत् स्वयं कर्मसु धर्मचारिणां त्वमन्तरायो भवसि च्युतो विधिः R.3.45;1.34. -6 Behaviour, conduct. -7 Condition; V.4. -8 Creation, formation; सामग्ऱ्यविधौ Ku.3.28; कल्याणी विधिषु विचित्रता विधातुः Ki.7.7. -9 The creator. -1 Fate, destiny, luck; विधौ वामारम्भे मम समुचितैषा परिणतिः Māl.4.4. -11 The food of elephants. -12 Time. -13 A physician. -14 N. of Viṣṇu. -15 Use, application. -16 A means, expedient for; अक्षरं गन्तुमनसो विधिं वक्ष्यामि शीघ्रगम् Mb.12. 236.13. -17 Any act, action. -Comp. -अन्तः The end or the concluding portion of an injunctive text, all the other portion of the प्रयोगविधि (pertaining to an act) except the प्रधान or मुख्य विधि which is called विध्यादि; विध्यन्तो वा प्रकृतिवत्˚ MS.7.4.1; सोमेन यजेत इति विध्यादिः । सौमिकमपि ब्राह्मणं विध्यन्तः ŚB. ibid. Also see विध्यादि. -आदिः m. the beginning of a विधि or injunction; the main or प्रधान injunction; वेदे$पि दर्शपूर्णमासाभ्यां यजेत इति विध्यादिः । विध्यन्तो$पि प्रधानविधिवर्जितं कृत्स्नं पौरोडाशिकं ब्राह्मणम् ŚB. on MS.7.4.1. -कर a. executing commands; विधिकरीरिमा वीर मुह्यतीरधरसीधुनाप्याययस्व नः Bhāg.1.31.8. -m. a servant; सो$यं ते विधिकर ईश विप्रशप्तस्तस्येदं निधन- मनुग्रहाय विद्मः Bhāg.7.8.57. -घ्नः a. disregarding prescribed rites or rules. -ज्ञ a. knowing the ritual. (-ज्ञः) a Brāhmaṇa versed in the ritual, a ritualist. -दर्शकः a priest at a sacrifice who sees that everything is done according to the precepts, and corrects any deviation from them. -दृष्ट, -विहित a. prescribed by rule, enjoined by law. -देशकः 1 = विधिदर्शक above. -2 a preceptor, teacher. -द्वैधम् diversity of rules, variance of precept or commandment. -पूर्वकम् ind. according to rule. -प्रयोगः application of a rule. -यज्ञः 1 a sacrifice performed according to rule; Ms.2. 85-86. -2 a ceremonial act of worship. -योगः 1 the force or influence of fate. -2 the observance of a rule; अनेन विधियोगेन कर्तव्यांशप्रकल्पना Ms.8.211. -लोपः transgression of a commandment. -वधूः f. an epithet of Sarasvatī. -विपर्ययः misfortune. -विभक्तिः f. a potential termination; a termination which lays down an injunction; विधिविभक्तिं हि विधायिकां लिङं मन्यमानाः श्लोकमिमं समामनन्ति ŚB. on MS.4.3.3. The श्लोक referred to here is; कुर्यात् क्रियेत कर्तव्यं भवेत् स्यादिति पञ्चमम् । एतत् स्यात् सर्ववेदेषु नियतं विधिलक्षणम् ॥ This श्लोक speaks of the five forms which the विधिविभक्ति takes in the Vedic literature. -हीन a. devoid of rule, unauthorised, irregular.

vidhvaṃs	विध्वंस् 1 Ā. 1 To fall to pieces. -2 To be dispersed or scattered. -3 To perish, be destroyed or ruined. -Caus. 1 To destroy, crush, annihilate. -2 To injure, hurt.

vinaś	विनश् 4 P. 1 To be destroyed, perish, die. -2 To disappear, vanish. -3 To be lost or ruined. -4 To be frustrated or foiled. -Caus. 1 To destroy, annihilate. -2 To suffer to be lost; स्थातुं नियोक्तुर्न हि शक्यमग्रे विनाश्य रक्ष्यं स्वयमक्षतेन R.2.56.

vināśanam	विनाशनम् Destruction, ruin, annihilation. -नः A destroyer.

viparyaya	विपर्यय a. Reversed, inverted, perverse; यदा वृश्चिका- दिषु पञ्चसु वर्तते तदाहोरात्राणि विपर्ययाणि भवन्ति Bhāg.5.21.5. -यः 1 Contrariety, reverse, inversion; आहितो जयविपर्ययो$पि मे श्लाध्य एव परमेष्ठिना त्वया R.11.86. स्वशरीरशरीरिणावपि श्रुतसंयोगविपर्ययौ यदा 8.89; नभसः स्फुटतारस्य रात्रेरिव विपर्ययः (न भाजनम्) Ki.11.44; विपर्यये तु Ś.5 'if it be otherwise', if contrary be the case; विपर्यये त्वस्याधिपतेरुल्लङ्घितः क्षात्रधर्मः स्यात् Ve.5. -2 Change (of purpose, dress &c.); कथमेत्य मतिर्विपर्ययं करिणी पङ्कमिवावसीदति Ki.2.6; so वेषविपर्ययः Pt.1. -3 Absence or non-existence; समुद्रगारूपविपर्यये$पि Ku.7.42; त्यागे श्लाघाविपर्ययः R.1.22. -4 Loss; राघवाणा- मयुक्तो$यं कुलस्यास्य विपर्ययैः Rām.1.21.2; निद्रा संज्ञाविपर्ययः Ku.6.44 'loss of consciousness'. -5 Complete destruction, annihilation; दुःशासनवधं श्रुत्वा कर्णस्य च विपर्ययम् Mb. 11.1.16; Rām.7.6.5. -6 Exchange, barter. -7 Error, trespass, mistake, misapprehension. -8 A calamity, misfortune, adverse fate; प्रियं त्वत्कृतमिच्छामि मम गर्भविपर्यये Rām.1.47.3. -9 Hostility, enmity. -1 Perverseness, opposition. -11 The destruction of the world (प्रलय); हरिं विशन्ति स्म शरा लोका इव विपर्यये Rām.7. 7.4. -12 Misapprehension; भयं द्वितीयाभिनिवेशतः स्यादीशा- दपेतस्य विपर्ययो$स्मृतिः Bhāg.11.2.37; Mv.3.35.

vipalāyanam	विपलायनम् Running away, fleeing in different directions.

vipralayaḥ	विप्रलयः Complete destruction or dissolution; annihilation; विद्याकल्पेन मरुता मेघानां भूयसामपि । ब्रह्मणीव विवर्तानां क्वापि विप्रलयः कृतः ॥ U.6.6.

vibhraṃś	विभ्रंश् 1 Ā., 4 P. 1 To drop or fall down. -2 To go to ruin, decay. -3 To fall, stray from, go astray. -4 To lose. -5 To disappear, vanish. -6 To fail. -Caus. 1 To strike off, knock down. -2 To lead astray, seduce. -3 To destroy, ruin, annihilate. -4 To deprive (one) of.

vimath	विमथ् विमन्थ् 9 P. 1 To disperse, scatter. -2 To destroy, annihilate. -3 To confound, confuse.

virala	विरल a. 1 Having interstices, separated by intervals, thin, not thick or compact; विपर्यासं यातो घनविरलभावः क्षितिरुहाम् U.2.27;1.2; भवति विरलभक्तिर्म्लानपुष्पापहारः R.5.74. -2 Fine, declicate. -3 Loose, wide apart. -4 Rare, scarcely found, unfrequent; विरला हि तेषामुप- देष्टारः K.; स्तिमितोन्नतसंचारा जनसंतापहारिणः । जायन्ते विरला लोके जलदा इव सज्जनाः ॥ Pt.1.29. -5 Few, little (referring to number or quantity); तत्त्वं किमपि काव्यानां जानाति विरलो भुवि Bv.1.117; विरलातपच्छविः Śi.9.3. -6 Remote, distant, long (as time, distance &c.). -लम् Curds, coagulated milk. -लम् ind. Scarcely, rarely, not frequently. -Comp. -जानुक a. bandy-legged, bow-kneed. -द्रवा a kind of gruel. -पातक a. sinning rarely. -पार्श्वग a. having scanty retinue. -भक्ति a. monotonous.

viśrambhaṇa	विश्रम्भण a. Winning confidence; कृष्णस्त्वन्यतमं रूपं गोपविश्रम्भणं गतः Bhāg.1.24.35. -णम् Confidence.

viha	विह (Only in the beginning of a compound) The sky, air.

vihan	विहन् 2 P. 1 To kill, slay, destroy, destroy completely, annihilate; (अलं) सहसा संहतिमंहसां विहन्तुम् Ki. 5.17;14.23. -2 To strike, beat violently. -3 To obstruct, impede, oppose, resist; विघ्नन्ति सक्षांसि वने क्रतूंश्च Bk.1.19; Śi.14.8; R.5.27. -4 To reject, refuse, decline; तद् भूतनाथानुग नार्हसि त्वं संवन्धिनो मे प्रणयं विहन्तुम् R.2.58; न व्यहन्यत कदाचिदर्थिता 11.2. -5 To disappoint, foil, frustrate. -6 To separate.

vīj	वीज् I. 1 Ā. (वीजते) To go. -II.1 U. (वीजयति-ते) 1 To fan, cool by fanning; खं वीज्यते मणिमयैरिव तालवृन्तैः Mk.5.13; Ku.2.42. -2 To stroke, caress. -With अभि, उप, परि to fan; संलक्ष्यते पवनवेगचलैः पयोदै राजेव चामरवरैरुप- वीज्यमानः Ṛs.3.4; Ś.3.

vījanaḥ	वीजनः 1 The ruddy goose. -2 A sort of pheasant. -नम् 1 Fanning; तदनु ज्वलनं मदर्पितं त्वरयेर्दक्षिणवातवीजनैः Ku.4.36; Śi.17.6. -2 A fan. -3 A thing, substance. वीज, वीजक, वीजल, वीजिक, वीजिन, वीज्य See बीज, बाजक, बीजल, बीजिक, बीजिन्, and बीज्य.

vṛthā	वृथा ind. [वृ-थाल् किच्च] 1 To no purpose, in vain, uselessly, unprofitably; often with the force of an adjective; व्यर्थं यत्र कपीन्द्रसख्यमपि मे वीर्यं हरीणां वृथा U.3. 45; दिवं यदि प्रार्थयसे वृथा श्रमः Ku.5.45. -2 Unnecessarily. -3 Foolishly, idly, wantonly. -4 Wrongly; improperly. (At the beginning of comp. वृथा may be translated by 'vain, useless, improper, false, idle' &c.). -Comp. -अट्या strolling about idly, walking for pleasure; Ms.7.47. -अन्नम् food for one's own use only. -आकारः a false form, an empty show; पश्येद्दारान् वृथा- कारान् स भवेद्राजवल्लभः Pt.1.58. -आर्तवा a barren woman. -आलम्भः Cutting unnecessarily; (ओषधीनां) वृथालम्भे$नु- गच्छेद्गां दिनमेकं पयोव्रतः Ms.11.144. -उत्पन्न a. born in vain; तं (पुत्रं) कामजमरिक्थीयं वृथोत्पन्नं प्रचक्षते Ms.9.147. -कथा idle talk. -जन्मन् n. unprofitable or vain birth. -दानम् a gift that may be revoked, or not made good if promised; देवपितृविहीनं यदीश्वरेभ्यः स्वदोषतः । दत्वानुकीर्तनाच्चैव वेदाग्निव्रतत्यागिने ॥ अन्यायोपार्जितं दानं व्यर्थं ब्रह्महणे तथा । गुरवे$- नृतवक्त्राया स्तेनाय पतिताय च ॥ कृतघ्नाय च यद्दत्तं सर्वदा ब्रह्मविद्विषे । याजकाय च सर्वस्य वृषल्याः पतये तथा ॥ परिचारकाय भृत्याय सर्वत्र पिशुनाय च । इत्येतानि तु राजेन्द्र वृथादानानि षोडश ॥ Vahni Purāṇa; Ms.8.159. -मति a. foolish-minded. -मांसम् flesh not intended for the Gods or Manes. -वादिन् a. speaking falsely.

vaidaḥ	वैदः A wise man, learned man. -दी The wife of a wise man. वैदग्धम् vaidagdham वैदग्धी vaidagdhī वैदग्ध्यम् vaidagdhyam वैदग्धम् वैदग्धी वैदग्ध्यम् 1 Skill, dexterity, proficiency, cleverness; अहो वैदग्ध्यम् Māl.1; प्रबन्धविन्यास- वैदग्ध्यनिधिः Vās.; Śi.4.16. Bh.2.18. -2 Skill in arrangement, beauty; वैदग्ध्यं जहति कपोलकुङ्कुमानि Māl. 1.37. -3 Shrewdness, smartness, cunningness; Ratn. 2. -4 Wit.

vaiśvānara	वैश्वानर a. (-री f.) 1 Relating or common to all mankind, fit for all men; तान् होवाचैते वै खलु यूयं पृथगिवेम- मात्मानं वैश्वानरं विद्वांसो$न्नमत्थ Ch. Up.5.18; स एष वैश्वानरो विश्वरूपः प्राणो$ग्निरुदयते Praśṇa Up.1.7; हिरण्यगर्भः स्थूले$स्मिन् देहे वैश्वानरो भवेत् Pañchadaśī 1.28; -2 Universal, general, common. -2 Zodiacal; गगने तान्यनेकानि वैश्वानरपथाद्वहिः Rām.1.6.31. -रः 1 An epithet of fire; त्वत्तः खाण्डव- रङ्गताण्डवनटो दूरे$स्तु वैश्वानरः Bv.1.57. -2 The fire of digestion (in the stomach); अहं वैश्वानरो भूत्वा प्राणिनां देह- माश्रितः । प्राणापानसमायुक्तः प्रचाम्यन्नं चतुर्विधम् ॥ Bg.15.14. -3 General consciousness (in Vedānta phil.). -4 The Supreme Being. -5 The Chitraka tree. -री 1 N. of a particular division of the moon's path; also वैश्वानरपथ; Rām.1.6.31. -2 N. of a particular sacrifice performed at the beginning of every year; इष्टिं वैश्वानरीं नित्यं निर्वपेदब्दपर्यये Mb.12.165.15.

vyajanam	व्यजनम् A fan; निर्वाते व्यजनम् H.2.165; R.8.4;1. 62; cf. बालव्यजन -Comp. -क्रिया the act of fanning. -चामरम् a chowrie.

vyājaḥ	व्याजः 1 Deciet, trick, deception, fraud. -2 Art, cunning; अव्याजमनोहरं वपुः Ś.1.18 'artlessly lovely'; Māl.5.12. -3 A pretext, pretence, semblance; ध्यान- व्याजमुपेत्य Nāg.1.1; R.4.25,58;1.76;11.66. -4 An artifice, a device, contrivance; व्याजार्धसंदर्शितमेखलानि R.13.42. -5 Wickedness, depravity. -Comp. -आह्वयः a false name. -उक्तिः f. 1 a figure of speech in which what is apparently the effect of one cause is intentionally ascribed to another; in other words, where a feeling is dissembled by being attributed to a different cause; see K. P.1 under व्याजोक्ति. -2 covert allusion, insinuation. -गुरुः a teacher, only in appearance. -निद्रित a. feigning sleep. -निन्दा artful censure. -पूर्व a. having only the appearance of anything. -व्यवहारः artful conduct. -सुप्त a. feigning to be asleep. -स्तुतिः f. a figure of speech resembling the English 'irony', wherein censure is implied by apparent praise; or praise by apparent censure; व्याजस्तुतिर्मुखे निन्दा स्तुतिवी रूढिरन्यथा K. P.1.

śabdaḥ	शब्दः [शब्द्-घञ्] 1 Sound (the object of the sense of hearing and property of आकाश); अथात्मनः शब्दगुणं गुणज्ञः पदं विमानेन विगाहमानः R.13.1. -2 Sound, note (of birds; men &c.), noise in general; विश्वासोपगमादभिन्नगतयः शब्दं सहन्ते मृगाः Ś.1.14; स शब्दस्तुमुलो$भवत् Bg.1.13; Ś.3.1; Ms.4.31; Ku.1.45. -3 The sound of a musical instrument; वाद्यशब्दः Pt.2; Ku.1.45. -4 A word, sound, significant word (for def. &c. see Mbh. introduction); एकः शब्दः सम्यगधीतः सम्यक् प्रयुक्तः स्वर्गे लोके कामधुग्भवति; so शब्दार्थौ. -5 A declinable word, a noun, substantive. -6 A title, an epithet; यस्यार्थुक्तं गिरिराज- शब्दं कुर्वन्ति बालव्यजनैश्चमर्यः Ku.1.13; Ś.2.15; नृपेण चक्रे युवराजशब्दभाक् R.3.35;2.53,64;3.49;5.22;18.42; V.1.1. -7 The name, mere name as in शब्दपति q. v. -3 Verbal authority (regarded by the Naiyāyikas as a Pramāṇa. -9 Grammar; Dk.1.1. -1 Fame; लब्धशब्देन कौसल्ये कुमारेण धनुष्मता Rām.2.63.11; स्वर्गाय शब्दं दिवमात्महेतोर्धर्मार्थमात्मंस्थितिमाचकाङ्क्ष Bu. Ch.2.53; (cf. also 'शब्दो$क्षरे यशोगीत्योः' -हैमः). -11 The sacred syllable ओम्. -12 A technical term. -Comp. -अक्षरम् the sacred syllable ओम् uttered aloud. -अतीत a. beyond the power or reach of words, indescribable. -अधिष्ठानम् the ear. -अध्याहारः supplying a word (to complete an ellipsis). -अनुकृतिः onomatopœia. -अनुरूप a. proportionate or corresponding to the sound; शब्दानुरूपेण पराक्रमेण भवि- तव्यम् Pt.1. -अनुशासनम् the science of words; i. e. grammar. -अर्थः the meaning of a word. (-र्थौ dual) a word and its meaning; अदोषौ शब्दार्थौ K.P.1; न त्वयं शब्दार्थः, व्यामोहादेषा प्रतीतिः ŚB. on MS.4.1.14. -अलं- कारः a figure of speech depending for its charmingness on sound or words and disappearing as soon as the words which constitute the figure are replaced by others of the same meaning (opp. अर्थालंकार); e. g.; see K. P. 9. -आख्येय a. to be communicated in words; शब्दाख्येयं यदपि किल ते यः सखीनां पुरस्तात् Me.15. (-यम्) an oral or verbal communication. -आडम्बरः bombast, verbosity, high-sounding or grandiloquent words. -आदि a. beginning with शब्द (as the objects of sense); शब्दादीन् विषयान् भोक्तुं चरितुं दुश्चरं तपः R.1.25. -इन्द्रियम् the ear. -कार a. sounding, sonorous. -कोशः a lexicon, dictionary. -ग a. 1 perceiving sounds. -2 uttering sounds. -गत a. inherent or residing in a word. -गतिः music, song. -गुण a. having sound for its quality; अथात्मनः शब्दगुणं गुणज्ञः R.13.1. -गोचरः the aim or object of speech. -ग्रहः 1 catching the sound. -2 the ear. -ग्रामः the range or reach of sound. -चातुर्यम् cleverness of style, eloquence. -चित्रम् one of the two subdivisions of the last (अवर or अधम) class of poetry (wherein the charm lies in the use of words which please the ear simply by their sound; see the example given under the word चित्र). -चोरः 'a word-thief', a plagiarist. -तन्मात्रम् the subtle element of sound. -नेतृ m. N. of Pāṇini. -पतिः a lord in name only, nominal lord; ननु शब्दपतिः क्षितरेहं त्वयि मे भावनिबन्धना रतिः R.8.52. -पातिन् a. hitting an invisible mark the sound of which is only heard, tracing a sound; शब्दपातिनमिषुं विससर्ज R.9.73. -प्रमाणम् verbal or oral evidence. -बोधः knowledge derived from verbal testimony. -ब्रह्मन् n. 1 the Vedas; शब्द- ब्रह्मणि निष्णातः परं ब्रह्माधिगच्छति Maitra. Up.6.22. -2 spiritual knowledge consisting in words, knowledge of the Supreme Sprit or the Spirit itself; शब्दब्रह्मणस्तादृशं विवर्तमितिहासम् U.2;7.2. -3 a property of words called स्फोट q. v. -भाव्यत्वम् the state of becoming known through scriptural word only; कर्मणः शब्दभाव्य- त्वात्... Ms.7.1.9. (on which Śabara writes अथेह कर्मणः शब्दभाव्यत्वम् । नान्यतः शक्यमेतज्ज्ञातुं कस्यापूर्वस्य धर्मा इति ॥ -भिद् f. perversion of words. -भेदिन् a. hitting a mark merely by its sound. (-m.) 1 an epithet of Arjuna. -2 the anus. -3 a kind of arrow. -योनिः f. a root, radical word. -लक्षण a. what is determined by the sacred word; इह शब्दलक्षणे कर्मणि यथाशब्दार्थं प्रवृत्तिः ŚB. on Ms.11.1.26. -वारिधिः a vocabulary. -विद्या, -शास्त्रम् the science of words; i. e. grammar; अनन्तपारं किल शब्द- शास्त्रम् Pt.1; Śi.2.112;14.24. -विरोधः opposition of words (in a sentence). -विशेषः a variety of sound. -विशेषणम् (in gram.) an adjective, adjectival word. -वृत्तिः f. 1 the function of a word (in Rhet.). -2 the power of a word (to convey sense), indicative power (लक्षणा); अदृष्टार्थाच्छब्दवृत्तिर्लघीयसी ŚB. on MS.11.1.48. -वेधिन् a. hitting an invisible mark the sound of which is only heard; see शब्दपातिन्; अभ्याससाध्यं निखिलं मत्वा संतमसे व्यधात् । इषुपातानभूद्येन शब्दवेधविशारदः ॥ Bm.1.632. (-m.) 1 a kind of arrow. -2 an archer. -3 a warrior who pierces his enemies by mere sounds; Rām.2.63.11. -4 an epithet of king Daśaratha. -5 an epithet of Arjuna. -वेध्य a. to be shot at without being seen; एवं मयाप्यविज्ञातं शब्दवेध्यमिदं फलम् Rām.2.63.13. -वैलक्ष्यण्यम् verbal difference. -शक्तिः f. the force or expressive power of a word; signification of a word; see शक्ति. -शासनम् 1 a rule of grammar. -2 the science of grammar. -शुद्धिः f. 1 purity of words. -2 the correct use of words. -श्लेषः a play or pun upon words, a verbal equivoque; (it differs from अर्थश्लेष in-as-much as the pun dissappears as soon as the words which constitute it are replaced by others of the same signification, whereas in अर्थश्लेष the pun remains unchanged; शब्दपरि- वृत्तिसहत्मर्थश्लेषः.) -संग्रहः a vocabulary, lexicon. -संज्ञा (in gram.) a technical term; P.I.1.68. -साधन, -साह a. See शब्दवेधिन्; ततो$स्त्रं शब्दसाहं वै त्वरमाणो महारणे Mb.3.22. 5. -सौष्ठवम् elegance of words, a graceful or elegant style. -सौकर्यम् ease of expression. -स्मृतिः f. philology. -हीनम् the use of a word in a form or meaning not sanctioned by standard authors.

śāṭhyam	शाठ्यम् [शठस्य भावः ष्यञ्] (a) Dishonesty, perfidy, guile; trickery, fraud, villainy; आजन्मनः शाठ्यमशिक्षितो यः Ś.5.25; दाक्षिण्यं स्वजने दया परजने शाठ्यं सदा दुर्जने Bh.2.22. (b) Art, skill, cunning; देव्या निह्नोतुमिच्छोरिति सुरसरितं शाठ्यमव्याद्विभोर्वः Mu.1.1.

śīlaḥ	शीलः [शील्-अच्] 1 A large serpent (the boa). -लम् 1 Disposition, nature, character, tendency, inclination, habit, custom; सा तस्य शीलमाज्ञाय तस्माच्छापाच्च बिभ्यती Mb.3.136.4; समानशीलव्यसनेषु सख्यम् Subhāṣ frequently at the end of comp. in the sense of 'disposed or habituated to', 'indulging in', 'prone to', 'addicted to', 'attached to'; &c.; as कलहशील 'disposed to quarrel, quarrelsome'; भावनशील 'disposed or apt to think'; so दान˚, मृगया˚, दया˚, पुण्य˚, आश्वासन˚ &c. -2 Conduct, behaviour in general. -3 Good disposition or character, good nature; शीलं परं भूषणम् Bh.2.82; Pt. 5.2. -4 Virtue, morality, good conduct, virtuous life, chastity, uprightness; दौर्मन्त्र्यान्नृपतिर्विनश्यति ... शीलं खलोपा- सनात् Bh.2.42,39; तथा हि ते शीलमुदारदर्शने तपस्विनामप्युप- देशतां गतम् Ku.5.36; Ki.11.25; Pt.1.169; R.1.7. -5 Beauty, good form. -Comp. -अङ्क a. characterized by virtue. -आढ्य a. most honourable. -खण्डनम् violation of morality or chastity; Pt.1. -गुप्त a. cunning, crafty. -धारिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -भाज् a. honourable. -भ्रंशः loss of virtue. -वञ्चना violation of chastity; प्राप्तेयं शीलवञ्चना Mk.1.44. -वृत्त a. well-behaved, virtuous. (-त्तम्) good or virtuous conduct, good breeding. -वृत्तिः f. virtue. -वृद्ध a. honourable, moral.

śrī	श्री f. [श्रि-क्विप् नि˚ Uṇ.2.57] 1 Wealth, riches, affluence, prosperity, plenty; अनिर्वेदः श्रियो मूलम् Rām.; साहसे श्रीः प्रतिवसति Mk.4 'fortune favours the brave'; कर्माव्यारभमाणं हि पुरुषं श्रीर्निषेवते Ms.9.3; Ki.7.28. -2 Royalty, majesty, royal wealth; श्रियः कुरूणामधिपस्य पालनीम् Ki.1.1. -3 Dignity, high position, state; श्री- लक्षण Ku.7.45 'the marks or insignia of greatness or dignity'; दुराराध्याः श्रियो राज्ञां दुरापा दुष्परिग्रहाः Pt.1.67; विद्युल्लेखाकनकरुचिरं श्रीवितानं ममाभ्रम् V.4.13. -4 Beauty, grace, splendour, lustre; (मुखं) कमलश्रियं दधौ Ku.5.21; 7.32; R.3.8. -5 Colour, aspect; तेषामाविरभूद् ब्रह्मा परि- म्लानमुखश्रियाम् Ku.2.2. -6 The goddess of wealth, Lakṣmī, the wife of Viṣṇu; आसीदियं दशरथस्य गृहे यथा श्रीः U.4.6; Ś.3.14; Śi.1.1. -7 Any virtue or excellence. -8 Decoration. -9 Intellect, understanding. -1 Superhuman power. -11 The three objects of human existence taken collectively (धर्म, अर्थ and काम). -12 The Sarala tree. -13 The Bilva tree. -14 Cloves. -15 A lotus. -16 The twelfth digit of the moon. -17 N. of Sarasvatī, (the goddess of speech). -18 Speech. -19 Fame, glory. -2 The three Vedas (वेदत्रयी); श्रिया विहीनैरधनैर्नास्तिकैः संप्रवर्तितम् Mb.12.1.2. ('ऋचः सामानि यजूंषि । सा हि श्रीरमृता सताम्' इति श्रुतेः । com.). -m. N. of one of the six Rāgas or musical modes. -a. Splendid, radiant, adorning. (The word श्री is often used as an honorific prefix to the names of deities and eminent persons; श्रीकृष्णः, श्रीरामः, श्रिवाल्मीकिः, श्रीजयदेवः; also celebrated works, generally of a sacred character; श्रीभागवत, श्रीरामायण &c.; it is also used as an auspicious sign at the commencement of letters, manuscripts &c; Māgha has used this word in the last stanza of each canto of his Śiśupālavadha, as Bhāravi has used लक्ष्मी). -Comp. -आह्लम् a lotus. -ईशः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -कण्ठः an epithet of Śiva; श्रीकण्ठपदलाञ्छनः (भवभूतिः) Mv.1.4/5. -2 of the poet Bhavabhūti; श्रीकण्ठपदलाञ्छनः U.1. ˚सखः an epithet of Kubera. -करः an epithet of Viṣṇu. (-रम्) the red lotus. -करणम् a pen. -करणादिः a chief secretary; Inscr. -कान्तः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -कारः the word 'श्री' written at the top of a letter, (as an auspicious beginning). -कारिन् m. a kind of antelope. -कृच्छ्रः a kind of penance. -खण़डः, -ण्डम् sandal wood; श्रीखण्डविलेपनं सुखयति H.1.97. -गदितम् a kind of minor drama. -गर्भः 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 a sword. -ग्रहः a trough or place for watering birds. -ग्रामरः an epithet of Nārāyaṇa. -घनम् sour curds. (-नः) a Buddhist saint. -चक्रम् 1 the circle of the earth, the globe. -2 a wheel f Indra's car. -3 A diagram for the worship of त्रिपुरसुन्दरी in Tantra rituals. -4 An astrological division of the body (representing the public region). -जः an epithet of Kāma. -तालः a kind of palm tree. -दः an epithet of Kubera. -दयितः, -धरः epithets of Viṣṇu. -नगरम् N. of two old towns (one in Cawnpur district and the other in Bundelkhand); Raj. T.; H. -नन्दनः 1 an epithet of Kāma. -2 (in music) a kind of measure. -निकेतनः, -निवासः epithets of Viṣṇu. -पञ्चमी the fifth day of the bright half of Māgha (a festival in honour of the goddess of learning, Sarasvatī). -पतिः 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu; श्रीपतिः पतिरसाववनेश्च परस्परन् Śi.13.69. -2 a king, sovereign. -पथः a main road, high way. -पर्णम् a lotus. -पर्णी the silk-cotton tree. -पर्वतः N. of a mountain; Māl.1. -पिष्टः turpentine. -पुत्रः 1 N. of Cupid; निर्जेतुं निखलजगत्सु मानुषाणि श्रीपुत्रे चरति पदैव शीतरश्मिः Rām. ch.7. 11. -2 the moon. -3 N. of the horse of Indra. -पुष्पम् 1 cloves. -2 a fragrant wood (पद्मकाष्ठ). -प्रसूनम् cloves. -फलः the Bilva tree. (-लम्) 1 the Bilva fruit; स्तनयुगलं श्रीफलश्रीविडम्बि Vikr.; Ms.5.12. -2 a cocoanut. -फला, -फली 1 the indigo plant. -2 emblic myrobalan. -भ्रातृ m. 1 the moon. -2 a horse. -मकुटम् gold. -मस्तकः garlic. -मुद्रा a particular mark on the forehead by the Vaiṣṇavas. -मूर्तिः f. 1 an idol of Viṣṇu or Lakṣmī. -2 any idol. -युक्त, -युत a. fortunate, happy. -2 wealthy, prosperous (often used as an honorific prefix to the names of men). -3 famous, illustrious. -रङ्गः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -रसः 1 turpentine. -2 resin. -वत्सः 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 a mark or curl of hair on the breast of Viṣṇu; प्रभानुलिप्त- श्रीवत्सं लक्ष्मीविभ्रमदर्पणम् R.1.1. -3 a hole in a wall made by a house-breaker. ˚अङ्कः, ˚धारिन्, ˚मृत्, ˚लक्ष्मन्, ˚लाञ्छन m. epithets of Viṣṇu; तमभ्यगच्छत् प्रथमो विधाता श्रीवत्सलक्ष्मा पुरुषश्च साक्षात् Ku.7.43. -वत्सकिन् m. a horse having a curl of hair on his breast. -वरः, -वल्लभः epithets of Viṣṇu. -वर्धनः an epithet of Śiva. -वल्लभः a favourite of fortune, a happy or fortunate person; Pt.1.45. -वासः 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 of Śiva. -3 a lotus. -4 turpentine. -वासस् m. turpentine. -वृक्षः 1 the Bilva tree. -2 the Aśvattha or sacred fig-tree; वक्षः श्रीवृक्षकान्तं मधुकरनिकरश्यामलं शार्ङ्गपाणेः Viṣṇu. S.28. -3 a curl of hair on the breast and forehead of a horse. ˚किन् having such mark; श्रीवृक्षकी पुरुषकोन्नमिताग्रकायः Śi.5.56. -वेष्टः 1 turpentine. -2 resin. -संझम् cloves. -सहोदरः the moon. -सिद्धिः N. of the 16th Yoga (in astrol.). -सूक्तम् N. of a Vedic hymn (Ṛv.1.165). -हरिः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -हस्तिनी the sun-flower.

śvas	श्वस् ind. 1 Tomorrow; श्वः कार्यमद्य कुर्वीत पूर्वाह्णे चापरा- ह्णिकम् । नहि प्रतीक्षते मृत्युः कृतमस्य न वा कृतम् ॥ Subhāṣ; वरमद्य कपोतो न श्वो मयूरः Subhāṣ. -2 Future (at the beginning of comp.); पृथूदके जप्यपरो नैनं श्वोमरणं तपेत् Mb.9.39.34. -3 A particle implying auspiciousness. -Comp. -प्रभृति ind. from tomorrow onwards. -भूत a. (-श्वोभूत) being tomorrow; यौवराज्ये$भिषेक्ष्यामि श्वोभूते रघुनन्दनम् A. Rām. 2. 2.7; श्वोभूते स्वपुरं यातः Bhāg.9.2.17. -वसीय, -वसीयस् (श्वोवसीय, श्वोवसीयस्) a. happy, auspicious, fortunate. (-n.) happiness, good fortune; 'श्वोवसीयं शिवं शुभम्' इति हलायुधः; Dk.2.2. -श्रेयस (श्वःश्रेयस) a. happy, prosperous. (-सम्) 1 happiness, prosperity. -2 an epithet of Brahman or the Supreme Spirit.

saṃrambhaḥ	संरम्भः 1 Beginning. -2 Turbulence, impetuosity, violence; न संरम्भेण सिध्यन्ति सर्वे$र्थाः सान्त्वया यथा Bh¯g. 8.6.24; हन्त वर्धते ते संरम्भः Ś.7. -3 Agitation, excitement, flurry; अवृष्टिसंरम्भमिवाम्बुवाहम् Ku.3.48; Māl.6.1. -4 Energy, zeal, ardent desire; अन्योन्यजयसंरम्भो ववृधे वादिनोरिव R.12.92. -5 Anger, rage, wrath; प्रणिपातप्रती- कारः संरम्भो हि महात्मनाम् R.4.64;12.36; V.2.21;4.28; Ku.3.76. -6 Pride, arrogance; संरम्भो हि सपत्नीत्वाद्वक्तुं कुन्तिसुतां प्रति Mb.1.124.6. -7 Swelling with heat and inflammation. -8 Hatred; संरम्भभययोगेन विन्दते तत्सरूपताम् Bhāg.7.1.28. -9 Adopting hostile measures; त्वया$पि तस्मिन् संरम्भो न कार्यः Dk.2.3. -1 Intensity, high degree; निनादस्य च संसम्भो नैतदल्पं हि कारणम् Rām.4.15.12. -11 The brunt (of battle); Raj. T. -Comp. -ताम्र a. red with fury. -वृश् a. having angry eyes. -परुष a. harsh through rage. -रस a. excessively enraged. -रूक्ष a. exceedingly harsh; संरम्भरूक्षमिव सुन्दरि यद्यदासीत् V.3.2. -वेगः the impetuosity of anger.

saṃvargaṇam	संवर्गणम् Attracting, winning (friends); Dk.2.8.

saṃsarjanam	संसर्जनम् 1 Commingling. -2 Leaving, abandoning. -3 Discharging, voiding. -4 Attracting, winning over.

saṃhṛ	संहृ 1 P. (sometimes Ā. also) 1 To bring or draw together. -2 To draw out, suck; नृपदीपो धनस्नेहं प्रजाभ्यः संहरन्नपि Pt.1.221. -3 (a) To contract, abridge, compress; महिमानं यदुत्कीर्त्य तव संह्रियते वचः R.1.32. (b) To drop; संह्रियतामियम् K. -4 To bring together, collect, accumulate. -5 To destroy, annihilate (opp. सृज्); अमुं युगान्तोचितकालनिद्रः संहृत्य लोकान् पुरुषो$धिशेते R.13.6. -6 To withdraw, withhold, draw or take back; यदा संहरते चायं कूर्मो$ङ्गानीव सर्वशः Bg.2.58; अभिमुखे मयि संहृतमीक्षितम् Ś.2.11; 6.3; न हि संहरते ज्योत्स्नां चन्द्रश्चाण्डालवेश्मनि H.1.58; R.4. 16;12.13. -7 To curb, restrain, suppress; क्रोधं प्रभो संहर संहरेति यावद्गिरः खे मरुतां चरन्ति Ku.3.72. -8 To wind up, close; अभिषेकविधानं तु तस्मात् संहृत्य लक्ष्मण Rām.2.22.11. -9 To seize, take. -1 To unite, bind by obligations. -11 To lead astray, corrupt; शूरान् भक्तानसंहार्यान् कुले जातानरोगिणः Mb.12.57.23 (com. असंहार्यान् परैरप्रतार्यान्).

saṃkṣi	संक्षि 1, 5, 9 P. 1 To decay, wane. -2 To be emeciated or lean. -3 To destroy completely, annihilate.

sattiḥ	सत्तिः 1 Sitting down. -2 Beginning.

sadā	सदा ind. Always, ever, perpetually, at all times. -Comp. -आनन्द a. ever happy. (-दः) an epithet of Śiva. -उत्थायिन् ever exerting; त्रिभिर्वर्षैः सदोत्थायी कृष्ण- द्वैपायनो मुनिः । महाभारतमाख्यानं कृतवानिदमद्भुतम् ॥ Mb.1.62. 52. -गतिः 1 wind; पाशैः केन सदागतेरगतिता सद्यः समापादिता Mu.7.6. -2 the universal spirit. -3 the sun. -4 everlasting happiness, final beatitude. -तोया, नीरा 1 N. of the Karatoyā river. -2 a river always bearing water, a running stream. -दान a. always making gifts or exuding rut; सदादानः परिक्षीणः शस्त एव करीश्वरः Pt.2.7. (-नः) 1 a ruttish elephant. -2 a scent-elephant (-गन्धद्वीप q. v.). -3 N. of the elephant of Indra. -4 N. of Gaṇeśa. -नर्तः a kind of bird, the wagtail. -पुष्प a. everflowering. (-ष्पः) the cocoa-nut tree. -प्रसूनः N. of various plants :-- रोहित, अर्क and कुन्द. -फल a. always bearing fruit. (-लः) 1 the Bilva tree. -2 the jack tree. -3 the glomerous fig-tree. -4 the cocoa-nut tree. -भव a. perpetual, continual. -भव्य a. always present. -भ्रम a. always wandering. -योगिन् m. an epithet of Kṛiṣṇa. -शिवः N. of Śiva.

saṃnidhātṛ	संनिधातृ m. 1 One who brings near. -2 One who deposits. -3 A receiver of stolen goods; संनिधातॄंश्च मोषस्य हन्याच्चौरमिवेश्वरः Ms.9.278. -4 An officer who introduces people at court; संनिधातृचेयकर्म Kau. A.1. also 2.5. -5 One who receives in charge. संनिधानम् sannidhānam संनिधिः sannidhiḥ संनिधानम् संनिधिः 1 Putting down together, juxtaposition. -2 Proximity, vicinity, presence; असत्यामा- काङ्क्षायां संनिधानमकारणम् ŚB. on MS.6.4.23; N.2.53. -3 Perceptibility, appearance. -4 A receptacle. -5 Receiving, taking charge of. -6 Combination, aggregate; दोषाणां संनिधानम् (स्त्रीयन्त्रम्) Pt.1.191. -7 Depositing. -8 The object of an organ of sense (इन्द्रियविषय).

saṃnipatya	संनिपत्य ind. Immediately, directly. संनिपत्योपकारिन् sannipatyōpakārin संनिपत्योपकारिन् a. 1 That अङ्ग which serves the purpose of its प्रधान directly. See सामवायिक a.; संनिपत्योप- कारिण एते मन्त्रा उपस्थितं कर्माभिदधति ŚB. on MS.12.1.19. -2 Acting immediately.

samārambhaḥ	समारम्भः 1 Beginning, commencement. -2 An enterprise, undertaking, a work, an action; यस्य सर्वे समारम्भाः कामसंकल्पवर्जिताः Bg.4.19; Mb.3.125.4; भव्यमुख्याः समा- रम्भाः ...... तस्य गूढं विपेचिरे R.17.53. -3 An unguent; see समालम्भ. -4 Spirit of enterprise; व्यूहानां च समारम्भान् देवगान्धर्वमानुषान् Mb.5.165.1.

samāhṛ	समाहृ 1 P. 1 To bring, convey, carry; सर्व एव समा- हारि तदा शैलः सहौषधिः Bk.15.17. -2 To collect, bring together, convene; तत्र स्वयंवरसमाहृतराजलोकम् R.5.64; Bk. 8.63. -3 To draw, attract. -4 To destroy, annihilate; लोकान् समाहर्तुमिह प्रवृत्तः Bg.11.32. -5 To complete (as a sacrifice). -6 To return, restore to one's proper place; स दण़्डं प्राप्नुयान्माषं तच्च तस्मिन् समाहरेत् Ms.8.319. -7 To curb, restrain. -8 To offer. -9 To contract, abridge.

saṃpāka	संपाक a. 1 Reasoning well, a reasoner. -2 Cunning, subtle. -3 Lustful, lewd. -4 Small, little. -कः 1 Maturing. -2 N. of a tree (आरग्वध).

saṃpravartanam	संप्रवर्तनम् Undertaking, beginning.

saraṇa	सरण a. [सृ-ल्युट्] Going, moving, flowing. -णम् 1 Proceeding, going or flowing. -2 Running, quick motion; आजेः सरणम् Ch. Up.1.3.5; आरोहे पर्यवस्कन्दे सरणे सान्तरप्लुते Mb.6.76.8;7.114.5. -3 Locomotion. -4 Iron rust.

savyāja	सव्याज a. 1 Artful, pretended. -2 Plausible, cunning. -जम् ind. Artfully, under a pretext.

sādhana	साधन a. (-नी f.) [साध् णिच् ल्यु ल्युट् वा] 1 Accomplishing, effecting &c. -2 Procuring. -3 Conjuring up (a spirit). -4 Denoting, expresssive of. -नम् 1 Accomplishing, effecting, performing, as in स्वार्थसाधनम्. -2 Fulfilment, accomplishment, complete attiainment of an object; प्रजार्थसाधने तौ हि पर्यायोद्यतकार्मुकौ R.4.16. -3 A means, an expedient, a means of accomplishing anything; असाधना अपि प्राज्ञा बुद्धिमन्तो बहुश्रुताः । साधयन्त्याशु कार्याणि Pt.2.1; शरीरमाद्यं खलु धर्मसाधनम् Ku.5.33,52; R.1.19; 4.36,62. -4 An instrument, agent; कुठारः छिदिक्रिया- साधनम् -5 The efficient cause, source, cause in general. -6 The instrumental case. -7 Implement, apparatus. -8 Appliance, materials. -9 Matter, ingredients, substance. -1 An army or a part thereof; व्यावृत्तं च विपक्षतो भवति यत्तत्साधनं सिद्धये Mu.5.1. -11 Aid, help, assistance (in general). -12 Proof, substantiation, demonstration. -13 The hetu or middle term in a syllogism, reason, that which leads to a conclusion; साध्ये निश्चितमन्वयेन घटितं बिभ्रत् सपक्षे स्थितिं । व्यावृत्तं च विपक्षतो भवति यत्तत् साधनं सिद्धये ॥ Mu.5.1. -14 Subduing, overcoming. -15 Subduing by charms. -16 Accomplishing anything by charms or magic. -17 Healing, curing. -18 Killing, destroying; फलं च तस्य प्रतिसाधनम् Ki.14.17. -19 Conciliating, propitiating, winning over. -2 Going out, setting forward, departure. -21 Going after, following. -22 Penance, self-mortification. -23 Attainment of final beatitude. -24 A medicinal preparation, drug, medicine. -25 (In law) Enforcement of the the delivery of anything, or of the payment of debt, infliction of fine. -26 A bodily organ. -27 The penis. -28 An udder. -29 Wealth. -3 Friendship. -31 Profit, advantage. -32 Burning a dead body. -33 Obsequies. -34 Killing or oxydation of metals. -35 Proof, argument. -36 Conflict, battle. -37 (In gram.) Instrument, agent. -38 Making ready, preparation. -39 Gain, acquisition. -4 Calculation. -Comp. -अध्यक्षः Superintendent or captain of the military forces. -अर्ह a. worthy of being proved or accomplished. -क्रिया 1 a finite verb. -2 an action connected with a Kāraka. -क्षम a. admitting proof. -निर्देशः production of proof. -पत्रम् a document used as evidence.

sāyaḥ	सायः [सो-घञ्] 1 End, close, termination. -2 Close of day, evening. -3 An arrow, a missile. (साये 'in the evening, at the close of the day'.) -Comp. -अशनम् an evening meal. -अहन् m. (forming सायाह्नः) evening, evening time; सायाहनि प्रणयिनो भवनं व्रजन्त्याश्चेतो न कस्य हरते गतिरङ्गनायाः Bv.2.157. -आरम्भ a. beginning in the evening. -धूर्तः 1 a rogue, a cheat or deceiver in the form of evening. -2 The moon; आदत्त दीप्रं मणिमम्बरस्य दत्त्वा यदस्मै खलु सायधूर्तः N.22.52. -मण्डनम् sunset.

su	सु ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhī compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the following senses:-1 Well, good, excellent; as in सुगन्धि. -2 Beautiful, handsome; as in सुमध्यमा, सुकेशी &c. -3 Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; सुजीर्णमन्नं सुविचक्षणः सुतः सुशासिता स्त्री नृपतिः सुसेवितः ......सुदीर्घकाले$पि न याति विक्रियाम् H.1.22. -4 Easily, readily, as in सुकर or सुलभ q. v. -5 Much, very much, exceedingly; सुदारुण, सुदीर्घ &c. -6 Worthy of respect or reverence. -7 It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and distress. -Comp. -अक्ष a. 1 having good eyes. -2 having keen organs, acute. -अङ्ग a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely. -अच्छ a. see s. v. -अन्त a. having happy end, ending well. -अल्प, -अल्पक a. see s. v. -अस्ति, -अस्तिक see s. v. -आकार, -आकृति a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful. -आगत see s. v. -आदानम् taking justly or properly; स्वादानाद्वर्णसंसर्गात्त्वबलानां च रक्षणात् । बलं संजायते राज्ञः स प्रेत्येह च वर्धते ॥ Ms.8.172. -आभास a. very splendid or illustrious; सारतो न विरोधी नः स्वाभासो भरवानुत Ki.15. 22. -इष्ट a. properly sacrificed; स्विष्टं यजुर्भिः प्रणतो$स्मि यज्ञम् Bhāg.4.7.41. ˚कृत् m. a form of fire; धर्मादिभ्यो यथान्यायं मन्त्रैः स्विष्टकृतं बुधः Bhāg.11.27.41. -उक्त a. well-spoken, well-said; अथवा सूक्तं खलु केनापि Ve.3. (-क्ता) a kind of bird (सारिका). (-क्तम्) 1 a good or wise saying; नेतुं वाञ्छति यः खलान् पथि सतां सूक्तैः सुधा- स्यन्दिभिः Bh.2.6; R.15.97. -2 a Vedic hymn, as in पुरुषसूक्त &c. ˚दर्शिन् m. a hymn-seer, Vedic sage. ˚वाकन्यायः A rule of interpretation according to which some thing that is declared as being subordinate to something else should be understood to signify a part or whole on the basis of expediency or utility. This is discussed by जैमिनि and शबर at MS.3.2.15-18. ˚वाच् f. 1 a hymn. -2 praise, a word of praise. -उक्तिः f. 1 a good or friendly speech. -2 a good or clever saying. -3 a correct sentence. -उत्तर a. 1 very superior. -2 well towards the north. -उत्थान a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. (-नम्) vigorous effort or exertion. -उन्मद, -उन्माद a. quite mad or frantic. -उपसदन a. easy to be approached. -उपस्कर a. furnished with good instruments. -कण्टका the aloe plant. -कण्ठ a. sweetvoiced. (-ण्ठी) the female cuckoo. -कण्डुः itch. -कन्दः 1 an onion. -2 a yam. -3 a sort of grass. -कन्दकः onion. -कर a. (-रा or -री f.) 1 easy to be done, practicable, feasible; वक्तुं सुकरं कर्तुं (अध्यवसातुं) दुष्करम् Ve.3 'sooner said than done'. -2 easy to be managed. (-रः) a good-natured horse. (-रा) a tractable cow. (-रम्) charity, benevolence. -कर्मन् a. 1 one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good. -2 active, diligent. (-m.) N. of Visvakarman. -कल a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in giving and using (money &c,) -कलिल a. well filled with. -कल्प a. very qualified or skilled; कालेन यैर्वा विमिताः सुकल्पैर्भूपांसवः खे मिहिका द्युभासः Bhāg.1.14.7. -कल्पित a. well equipped or armed. -कल्य a. perfectly sound. -काण्डः the Kāravella plant. -काण्डिका the Kāṇḍīra creeper. -काण्डिन् a. 1 having beautiful stems. -2 beautifully joined. (-m.) a bee. -काष्ठम् fire-wood. -कुन्दकः an onion. -कुमार a. 1 very delicate or soft, smooth. -2 beautifully young or youthful. (-रः) 1 a beautiful youth. -2 a kind of sugar-cane. -3 a kind of grain (श्यामाक). -4 a kind of mustard. -5 the wild Champaka. (-रा) 1 the double jasmine. -2 the plantain. -3 the great-flowered jasmine. -कुमारकः 1 a beautiful youth. -2 rice (शालि). (-कम्) 1 the Tamālapatra. -2 a particutar part of the ear. -कुमारी the Navamallikā jasmine. -कृत् a. 1 doing good, benevolent. -2 pious, virtuous, righteous. -3 wise, learned. -4 fortunate, lucky. -5 making good sacrifices or offerings. (-m.) 1 a skilful worker. -2 N. of Tvaṣṭri. -कृत a. 1 done well or properly. -2 thoroughly done; कच्चिन्नु सुकृतान्येव कृतरूपाणि वा पुनः । विदुस्ते सर्वकार्याणि Rām.2.1.2. -3 well made or constructed. -4 treated with kindness, assisted, befriended. -5 virtuous, righteous, pious. -6 lucky, fortunate. (-तम्) 1 any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service; नादत्ते कस्यचित् पापं न चैव सुकृतं विभुः Bg.5.15; Me.17. -2 virtue, moral or religious merit; स्वर्गाभिसंधिसुकृतं वञ्चनामिव मेनिरे Ku.6.47; तच्चिन्त्यमानं सुकृतं तवेति R.14.16. -3 fortune, auspiciousness. -4 recompense, reward. -5 Penance; तदभूरिवासरकृतं सुकृतैरुप- लभ्य वैभवमनन्यभवम् Ki.6.29. -कृतिः f. 1 well-doing, a good act. -2 kindness, virtue. -3 practice of penance. -4 auspiciousness. -कृतिन् a. 1 acting well or kindly. -2 virtuous, pious, good, righteous; सन्तः सन्तु निरापदः सुकृतिनां कीर्तिश्चिरं वर्धताम् H.4.132; चतुर्विधा भजन्ते मां जनाः सुकृतिनो$र्जुन Bg.7.16. -3 wise, learned. -4 benevolent. -5 fortunate, lucky. -कृत्यम् a good action; सुकृत्यं विष्णु- गुप्तस्य मित्राप्तिर्भार्गवस्य च Pt.2.45. -केश(स)रः the citron tree. -क्रतुः 1 N. of Agni. -2 of Śiva. -3 of Indra. -4 of Mitra and Varuṇa. -5 of the sun. -6 of Soma. -क्रयः a fair bargain. -क्षेत्र a. sprung from a good womb. -खल्लिका luxurious life. -ग a. 1 going gracefully or well. -2 graceful, elegant. -3 easy of access; अकृत्यं मन्यते कृत्यमगम्यं मन्यते सुगम् । अभक्ष्यं मन्यते भक्ष्यं स्त्रीवाक्यप्रेरितो नरः ॥ Pt.2.148. -4 intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. दुर्ग). (-गः) a Gandharva; गीतैः सुगा वाद्यधराश्च वाद्यकैः Bhāg.1.12.34. (-गम्) 1 ordure, feces. -2 happiness. -गण् m. a good calculator; L. D. B. -a. counting well. -गणकः a good calculator or astronomer. -गत a. 1 well-gone or passed. -2 well-bestowed. (-तः) an epithet of Buddha. -गतिः 1 Welfare, happiness. -2 a secure refuge. -गन्धः 1 fragrance, odour, perfume. -2 sulphur. -3 a trader. (-न्धम्) 1 sandal. -2 small cumin seed. -3 a blue lotus. -4 a kind of fragrant grass. (-न्धा) sacred basil. -गन्धकः 1 sulphur. -2 the red Tulasee. -3 the orange. -4 a kind of gourd, -गन्धमूला a land-growing lotus-plant; L. D. B. -गन्धारः an epithet of Śiva. -गन्धि a. 1 sweet-smelling, fragrant, redolent with perfumes. -2 virtuous, pious. (-न्धिः) 1 perfume, fragrance. -2 the Supreme Being. -3 a kind of sweet-smelling mango. (-न्धि n.) 1 the root of long pepper. -2 a kind of fragrant grass. -3 coriander seed. ˚त्रिफला 1 nutmeg. -2 areca nut. -3 cloves. ˚मूलम् the root Uśīra. ˚मूषिका the musk-rat. -गन्धिकः 1 incense. -2 sulphur. -3 a kind of rice. (-कम्) the white lotus. -गम a. 1 easy of access, accessible. -2 easy. -3 plain, intelligible. -गरम् cinnabar. -गहना an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane access. ˚वृत्तिः f. the same as above. -गात्री a beautiful woman. -गृद्ध a. intensely longing for. -गृह a. (-ही f.) having a beautiful house or abode, well-lodged; सुगृही निर्गृहीकृता Pt.1.39. -गृहीत a. 1 held well or firmly, grasped. -2 used or applied properly or auspiciously. ˚नामन् a. 1 one whose name is auspiciously invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhiṣṭhira), a term used as a respectful mode of speaking; सुगृहीतनाम्नः भट्टगोपालस्य पौत्रः Māl.1. -ग्रासः a dainty morsel. -ग्रीव a. having a beautiful neck. (-वः) 1 a hero. -2 a swan. -3 a kind of weapon. -4 N. of one of the four horses of Kṛiṣṇa. -5 of Śiva. -6 of Indra. -7 N. of a monkey-chief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha, Rāma went to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therfore, killed vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.] ˚ईशः N. of Rāma; सुग्रीवेशः कटी पातु Rāma-rakṣā.8. -ग्ल a. very weary or fatigued. -घोष a. having a pleasant sound. (-षः) N. of the conch of Nakula; नकुलः सहदेवश्च सुघोषमणपुष्पकौ Bg.1.16. -चक्षुस् a. having good eyes, seeing well. (-m.) 1 discerning or wise man, learned man. -2 The glomerous fig-tree. -चरित, -चरित्र a. 1 well-conducted, well-behaved; वृषभैकादशा गाश्च दद्यात् सुचरितव्रतः Ms.11.116. -2 moral, virtuous; तान् विदित्वा सुचरितैर्गूढैस्तत्कर्मकारिभिः Ms.9.261. (-तम्, -त्रम्) 1 good conduct, virtuous deeds. -2 merit; तव सुचरितमङ्गुलीय नूनं प्रतनु Ś.6.1. (-ता, -त्रा) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife. -चर्मन् m. the Bhūrja tree. -चित्रकः 1 a king fisher. -2 a kind of speckled snake. -चित्रा a kind of gourd. -चिन्ता, -चिन्तनम् deep thought, deep reflection or consideration. -चिरम् ind. for a very long time, very long. -चिरायुस् m. a god, deity. -चुटी a pair of nippers or tongs. -चेतस् a. 1 well-minded. -2 wise. -चेतीकृत a. with the heart satiated; welldisposed; ततः सुचेतीकृतपौरभृत्यः Bk.3.2. -चेलकः a fine cloth. -च्छद a. having beautiful leaves. -छत्रः N. of Śiva. (-त्रा) the river Sutlej. -जन a. 1 good, virtuous, respectable. -2 kind, benevolent. (-नः) 1 a good or virtuous man, benevolent man. -2 a gentleman. -3 N. of Indra's charioteer. -जनता 1 goodness, kindness, benevolence, virtue; ऐश्वर्यस्य विभूषणं सुजनता Bh.2. 82. -2 a number of good men. -3 bravery. -जन्मन् a. 1 of noble or respectable birth; या कौमुदी नयनयोर्भवतः सुजन्मा Māl.1.34. -2 legitimate, lawfully born. -जलम् a lotus. -जल्पः 1 a good speech. -2 a kind of speech thus described by Ujjvalamaṇi; यत्रार्जवात् सगाम्भीर्यं सदैन्यं सहचापलम् । सोत्कण्ठं च हरिः स्पृष्टः स सुजल्पो निगद्यते ॥ -जात a. 1 well-grown, tall. -2 well made or produced. -3 of high birth. -4 beautiful, lovely; सुजातं कल्याणी भवतु कृत- कृत्यः स च युवा Māl.1.16; R.3.8. -5 very delicate; खिद्यत् सुजाताङ्घ्रितलामुन्निन्ये प्रेयसीं प्रियः Bhāg.1.3.31. -डीनकम् a kind of flight of birds; Mb.8.41.27 (com. पश्चाद् गतिः पराडीनं स्वर्गगं सुडीनकम्). -तनु a. 1 having a beautiful body. -2 extremely delicate or slender, very thin. -3 emaciated. (-नुः, -नूः f.) a lovely lady; एताः सुतनु मुखं ते सख्यः पश्यन्ति हेमकूटगताः V.1.1; Ś.7.24. -तन्त्री a. 1 well-stringed. -2 (hence) melodious. -तपस् a. 1 one who practises austere penance; a वानप्रस्थ; स्विष्टिः स्वधीतिः सुतपा लोकाञ्जयति यावतः Mb.12.71.3. -2 having great heat. (-m.) 1 an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite. -2 the sun. (-n.) an austere penance. -तप्त a. 1 greatly harassed, afflicted. -2 very severe (as a penance); तपसैव सुतप्तेन मुच्यन्ते किल्बिषात्ततः Ms.11.239. -तमाम् ind. most excellently, best. -तराम् ind. 1 better, more excellently. -2 exceedingly, very, very much, excessively; तया दुहित्रा सुतरां सवित्री स्फुरत्प्रभामण्डलया चकाशे Ku.1.24; सुतरां दयालुः R.2.53;7.21;14.9;18.24. -3 more so, much more so; मय्यप्यास्था न ते चेत्त्वयि मम सुतरा- मेष राजन् गतो$ स्मि Bh.3.3. -4 consequently. -तर्दनः the (Indian) cuckco. -तर्मन् a. good for crossing over; सुतर्माणमधिनावं रुहेम Ait. Br.1.13; (cf. also यज्ञो वै सुतर्मा). -तलम् 1 'immense depth', N. of one of the seven regions below the earth; see पाताल; (याहि) सुतलं स्वर्गीभिः प्रार्थ्यं ज्ञातिभिः परिवारितः Bhāg.8.22.33. -2 the foundation of a large building. -तान a. melodious. -तार a. 1 very bright. -2 very loud; सुतारैः फूत्कारैः शिव शिव शिवेति प्रतनुमः Bh.3.2. -3 having a beautiful pupil (as an eye). (-रः) a kind of perfume. (-रा) (in Sāṁkhya) one of the nine kinds of acquiescence. -तिक्तकः the coral tree. -तीक्ष्ण a. 1 very sharp. -2 very pungent. -3 acutely painful. (-क्ष्णः) 1 the Śigru tree. -2 N. of a sage; नाम्ना सुतीक्ष्णश्चरितेन दान्तः R.13.41. ˚दशनः an epithet of Śiva. -तीर्थः 1 a good preceptor. -2 N. of Śiva. -a. easily crossed or traversed. -तुङ्ग a. very lofty or tall. (-ङ्गः) 1 the cocoa-nut tree. -2 the culminating point of a planet. -तुमुल a. very loud. -तेजन a. well-pointed, sharpened. (-नः) a well-pointed arrow. -तेजस् a. 1 very sharp. -2 very bright, or splendid. -3 very mighty. (-m.) a worshipper of the sun. -दक्षिण a. 1 very sincere or upright. -2 liberal or rich in sacrificial gifts; यज्ञैर्भूरिसुदक्षिणैः सुविहितैः संप्राप्यते यत् फलम् Pt.1. 31. -3 very skilful. -4 very polite. (-णा) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; तस्य दाक्षिण्यरूढेन नाम्ना मगधवंशजा पत्नी सुदक्षिणेत्यासीत् R.1.31;3.1. -दण्डः a cane, ratan. -दत् a. (-ती f.) having handsome teeth; जगाद भूयः सुदतीं सुनन्दा R.6.37. -दन्तः 1 a good tooth. -2 an actor; a dancer. (-न्ती) the female elephant of the north-west quarter. -दर्श a. lovely, gracious looking; सुदर्शः स्थूललक्षयश्च न भ्रश्येत सदा श्रियः Mb.12.56.19 (com. सुदर्शः प्रसन्नवक्त्रः). -दर्शन a. (-ना or -नी f.) 1 good-looking, beautiful, handsome. -2 easily seen. (-नः) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in कृष्णो$प्यसु- दर्शनः K. -2 N. of Śiva. -3 of mount Meru. -4 a vulture. (-नी, -नम्) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra's capital. (-नम्) N. of Jambudvīpa. -दर्शना 1 a handsome woman. -2 a woman. -3 an order, a command. -4 a kind of drug. -दास् a. very bountiful. -दान्तः a Buddhist. -दामन् a. one who gives liberally. (-m.) 1 a cloud. -2 a mountain. -3 the sea. -4 N. of Indra's elephant. -5 N. of a very poor Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvārakā with only a small quantity of parched rice as a present to his friend Kṛiṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and glory. -दायः 1 a good or auspicious gift. -2 a special gift given on particular solemn occasions. -3 one who offers such a gift. -दिनम् 1 a happy or auspicious day. -2 a fine day or weather (opp दुर्दिनम्); so सुदिनाहम् in the same sense. -दिह् a. well-polished, bright. -दीर्घ a. very long or extended. (-र्घा) a kind of cucumber. -दुराधर्ष a. 1 very hard to get. -2 quite intolerable. -दुरावर्त a. a very hard to be convinced. -दुरासद a. unapproachable. -दुर्जर a. very difficult to be digested. -दुर्मनस् a. very troubled in mind. -दुर्मर्ष a. quite intolerable. -दुर्लभ a. very scarce or rare. -दुश्चर a. 1 inaccessible. -2 very painful. -दुश्चिकित्स a. very difficult to be cured. -दुष्प्रभः a chameleon. -दूर a. very distant or remote. (-सुदूरम् means 1 to a great distance. -2 to a very high degree, very much; सुदूरं पीडयेत् कामः शरद्गुणनिरन्तरः Rām.4.3.12. -सुदूरात् 'from afar, from a distance'). -दृढ a. very firm or hard, compact. -दृश् a. having beautiful eyes. (-f.) a pretty woman. -देशिकः a good guide. -धन्वन् a. having an excellent bow. (-m.) 1 a good archer or bowman. -2 Ananta, the great serpent. -3 N. of Viśvakarman. ˚आचार्यः a mixed caste; वैश्यात्तु जायते व्रात्यात् सुधन्वाचार्य एव च Ms.1.23. -धर्मन् a. attentive to duties. (-f.) the council or assembly of gods. (-m.) 1 the hall or palace of Indra. -2 one diligent in properly maintaining his family. -धर्मा, -र्मी 1 the council or assembly of gods (देवसभा); ययावुदीरितालोकः सुधर्मानवमां सभाम् R.17.27. -2 (सुधर्मा) N. of Dvārakā; दिवि भुव्यन्तरिक्षे च महोत्पातान् समु- त्थितान् । दृष्ट्वासीनान् सुधर्मायां कृष्णः प्राह यदूनिदम् ॥ Bhāg.11.3. 4;1.14.34. -धात a. well cleaned. -धार a. well-pointed (as an arrow). -धित a. Ved. 1 perfect, secure. -2 kind, good. -3 happy, prosperous. -4 well-aimed or directed (as a weapon). -धी a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. (-धीः) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (-f.) a good understanding, good sense, intelligence. ˚उपास्यः 1 a particular kind of royal palace. -2 N. of an attendant on Kṛiṣṇa. (-स्यम्) the club of Balarāma. ˚उपास्या 1 a woman. -2 N. of Umā, or of one of her female companions. -3 a sort of pigment. -ध्रूम्रवर्णा one of the seven tongues of fire. -नन्दम् N. of Balarāma's club; प्रतिजग्राह बलवान् सुनन्देनाहनच्च तम् Bhāg.1.67.18. -नन्दः a kind of royal palace. -नन्दा 1 N. of a woman. -2 N. of Pārvatī; L. D. B. -3 yellow pigment; L. D. B. -नयः 1 good conduct. -2 good policy. -नयन a. having beautiful eyes. (-नः) a deer. (-ना) 1 a woman having beautiful eyes. -2 a woman in general. -नाभ a. 1 having a beautiful navel. -2 having a good nave or centre. (-भः) 1 a mountain. -2 the Maināka mountain, q. v. (-भम्) a wheel, discus (सुदर्शन); ये संयुगे$चक्षत तार्क्ष्यपुत्रमंसे सुनाभायुधमापतन्तम् Bhāg.3.2.24. -नालम् a red water-lily. -निःष्ठित a. quite ready. -निर्भृत a. very lonely or private. (-तम्) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately. -निरूढ a. well-purged by an injection; Charaka. -निरूहणम् a good purgative. -निर्णिक्त a. well polished. -निश्चलः an epithet of Śiva. -निषण्णः (-कः) the herb Marsilea Quadrifolia (Mar. कुऱडू). -निहित a. well-established. -नीत a. 1 well-conducted, well-behaved. -2 polite, civil. (-तनि) 1 good conduct or behaviour. -2 good policy or prodence. -नीतिः f. 1 good conduct, good manners, propriety. -2 good policy. -3 N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v. -नीथ a. well-disposed, well conducted, righteous, virtuous, good. (-थः) 1 a Brāhmaṇa. -2 N. of Śiśupāla, q. v.; तस्मिन्नभ्यर्चिते कृष्णे सुनीथः शत्रुकर्षणः Mb.1.39.11. -3 Ved. a good leader. -नील a. very black or blue. (-लः) the pomegranate tree. (-ला) common flax. (-लम्), -नीलकः a blue gem. -नु n. water. -नेत्र a. having good or beautiful eyes. -पक्व a. 1 well-cooked. -2 thoroughly matured or ripe. (-क्वः) a sort of fragrant mango. -पठ a. legible. -पत्नी a woman having a good husband. -पत्र a. 1 having beautiful wings. -2 well-feathered (an arrow). -पथः 1 a good road. -2 a good course. -3 good conduct. -पथिन् m. (nom. sing. सुपन्थाः) a good road. -पद्मा orris root. -परीक्षित a. well-examined. -पर्ण a. (-र्णा or -र्णी f.) 1 well-winged; तं भूतनिलयं देवं सुपर्णमुपधावत Bhāg.8.1.11. -2 having good or beautiful leaves. (-र्णः) 1 a ray of the sun. -2 a class of bird-like beings of a semi-divine character. -3 any supernatural bird. -4 an epithet of Garuḍa; ततः सुपर्णव्रजपक्षजन्मा नानागतिर्मण्डलयन् जवेन Ki.16.44. -5 a cock. -6 the knowing (ज्ञानरूप); देहस्त्वचित्पुरुषो$यं सुपर्णः क्रुध्येत कस्मै नहि कर्ममूलम् Bhāg.11.23.55. -7 Any bird; द्वा सुपर्णा सयुजा सखाया समानं वृक्षं परिषस्वजाते Muṇd. 3.1.1. ˚केतुः N. of Viṣṇu; तमकुण्ठमुखाः सुपर्णकेतोरिषवः क्षिप्तमिषुव्रजं परेण Śi.2.23. -पर्णकः = सुपर्ण. -पर्णा, -पर्णी f. 1 a number of lotuses. -2 a pool abounding in lotuses. -3 N. of the mother of Garuḍa. -पर्यवदात a. very clean. -पर्याप्त a. 1 very spacious; तस्य मध्ये सुपर्याप्तं कारयेद् गृहमात्मनः Ms.7.76. -2 well-fitted. -पर्वन् a. welljointed, having many joints or knots. (-m.) 1 a bamboo. -2 an arrow. -3 a god, deity; विहाय या सर्वसुपर्व- नायकम् N.4.9;14.41,76. -4 a special lunar day (as the day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight). -5 smoke. (-f.) white Dūrvā grass. -पलायित a. 1 completely fled or run away. -2 skilfully retreated. -पाक्यम् a kind of medicinal salt (Mar. बिडलोण). -पात्रम् 1 a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle. -2 a fit or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person. -पाद् (-पाद् or -पदी f.) having good or handsome feet. -पार्श्वः 1 the waved-leaf fig-tree (प्लक्ष). -2 N. of the son of Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu. -पालि a. distinguished. -पीतम् 1 a carrot. -2 yellow sandal. (-तः) the fifth Muhūrta. -पुंसी a woman having a good husband. -पुरम् a strong fortress. -पुष्प a. (-ष्पा or -ष्पी f.) having beautiful flowers. (-ष्पः) 1 the coral tree. -2 the Śirīṣa tree. (-ष्पी) the plantain tree. (-ष्पम्) 1 cloves. -2 the menstrual excretion. -पुष्पित a. 1 well blossomed, being in full flower. -2 having the hair thrilling or bristling. -पूर a. 1 easy to be filled; सुपूरा स्यात् कुनदिका सुपूरो मूषिकाञ्जलिः Pt.1.25. -2 well-filling. (-रः) a kind of citron (बीजपूर). -पूरकः the Baka-puṣpa tree. -पेशस् a. beautiful, tender; रत्नानां पद्मरागो$स्मि पद्मकोशः सुपेशसाम् Bhāg.11.16.3. ˚कृत् m. a kind of fly; Bhāg.11.7.34. -प्रकाश a. 1 manifest, apparent; ज्येष्ठे मासि नयेत् सीमां सुप्रकाशेषु सेतुषु Ms.8.245. -2 public, notorious. -प्रतर्कः a sound judgment. -प्रतिभा spirituous liquor. -प्रतिष्ठ a. 1 standing well. -2 very celebrated, renowned, glorious, famous. (-ष्ठा) 1 good position. -2 good reputation, fame, celebrity. -3 establishment, erection. -4 installation, consecration. -प्रतिष्ठित a. 1 well-established. -2 consecrated. -3 celebrated. (-तः) the Udumbara tree. -प्रतिष्णात a. 1 thoroughly purified. -2 well-versed in. -3 well-investigated, clearly ascertained or determined. -प्रतीक a. 1 having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome; भगवान् भागवतवात्सल्यतया सुप्रतीकः Bhāg.5.3.2. -2 having a beautiful trunk. (-कः) 1 an epithet of Kāmadeva. -2 of Śiva. -3 of the elephant of the north-east quarter. -4 An honest man; स्तेयोपायैर्विरचितकृतिः सुप्रतीको यथास्ते Bhāg.1.8.31. -प्रपाणम् a good tank. -प्रभ a. very brilliant, glorious. (-भा) one of the seven tongues of fire. -प्रभातम् 1 an auspicious dawn or day-break; दिष्टथा सुप्रभातमद्य यदयं देवो दृष्टः U.6. -2 the earliest dawn. -प्रभावः omnipotence. -प्रमाण a. large-sized. -प्रयुक्तशरः a skilful archer. -प्रयोगः 1 good management or application. -2 close contact. -3 dexterity. -प्रलापः good speech, eloquence. -प्रसन्नः N. of Kubera. -प्रसाद a. very gracious or propitious. (-दः) N. of Śiva. -प्रातम् a fine morning. -प्रिय a. very much liked, agreeable. (-यः) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables. (-या) 1 a charming woman. -2 a beloved mistress. -प्रौढा a marriageable girl. -फल a. 1 very fruitful, very productive. -2 very fertile. (-लः) 1 the pomegranate tree. -2 the jujube. -3 the Karṇikāra tree. -4 a kind of bean. (-ला) 1 a pumpkin, gourd. -2 the plantain tree. -3 a variety of brown grape. -4 colocynth. -फेनः a cuttle-fish bone. -बन्धः sesamum. -बभ्रु a. dark-brown. -बल a. very powerful. (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva. -2 N. of the father of Śakuni. -बान्धवः N. of Śiva. -बाल a. very childish. -बाहु a. 1 handsomearmed. -2 strong-armed. (-हुः) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma. and Lakṣmaṇa; यः सुबाहुरिति राक्षसो$परस्तत्र तत्र विससर्प मायया R.11.29. -बीजम् good seed; सुबीजं चैव सुक्षेत्रे जातं संपद्यते तथा Ms.1.69. (-जः) 1 N. of Śiva. -2 the poppy. -बोध a. 1 easily apprehended or understood. (-धः) good information or advice. -ब्रह्मण्यः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya. -2 N. of one of the sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice. -भग a. 1 very fortunate or prosperous, happy, blessed, highly favoured. -2 lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; न तु ग्रीष्मस्यैवं सुभगमपराद्धं युवतिषु Ś.3.9; Ku.4.34; R.11.8; Māl.9. -3 pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; दिवसाः सुभगा- दित्याश्छायासलिलदुर्भगाः Rām.3.16.1; श्रवणसुभग M.3.4; Ś.1.3. -4 beloved, liked, amiable, dear; सुमुखि सुभगः पश्यन् स त्वामुपैतु कृतार्थताम् Gīt.5. -5 illustrious. (-गः) 1 borax. -2 the Aśoka tree. -3 the Champaka tree. -4 red amarnath. (-गम्) good fortune. ˚मानिन्, सुभगं- मन्य a. 1 considering oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; वाचालं मां न खलु सुभगंमन्यभावः करोति Me.96. -2 vain, flattering oneself. -भगा 1 a woman beloved by her husband, a favourite wife. -2 an honoured mother. -3 a kind of wild jasmine. -4 turmeric. -5 the Priyaṅgu creeper. -6 the holy basil. -7 a woman having her husband alive (सौभाग्यवती); जयशब्दैर्द्विजाग्र्याणां सुभगानर्तितै- स्तथा Mb.7.7.9. -8 a five-year old girl representing Durgā at festivals. -9 musk. ˚सुत the son of a favourite wife. -भङ्गः the cocoa-nut tree. -भटः a great warrior, champion, soldier. -भट्टः a learned man. -भद्र a. very happy or fortunate. (-द्रः) N. of Viṣṇu; साकं साकम्पमंसे वसति विदधती बासुभद्रं सुभद्रम् Viṣṇupāda S.31. (-द्रा) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛiṣṇa, married to Arjuna q. v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu. -भद्रकः 1 a car for carrying the image of a god. -2 the Bilva tree. -भाषित a. 1 spoken well or eloquent. (-तम्) 1 fine speech, eloquence, learning; जीर्णमङ्गे सुभाषितम् Bh.3.2. -2ल a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite saying; सुभाषितेन गीतेन युवतीनां च लीलया । मनो न भिद्यते यस्य स वै मुक्तो$थवा पशुः Subhāṣ. -3 a good remark; बालादपि सुभाषितम् (ग्राह्यम्). -भिक्षम् 1 good alms, successful begging. -2 abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c. -भीरकः the Palāśa tree. -भीरुकम् silver. -भूतिः 1 well-being, welfare. -2 the Tittira bird; Gīrvāṇa. -भूतिकः the Bilva tree. -भूषणम् a type of pavilion where a ceremony is performed on a wife's perceiving the first signs of conception; सुभूषणाख्यं विप्राणां योग्यं पुंसवनार्थकम् Māna.34.354. -भृत a. 1 well-paid. -2 heavily laden. -भ्रू a. having beautiful eyebrows. (-भ्रूः f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this word is strictly सुभ्रूः; but सुभ्रु is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi. Kālidāsa, and Bhavabhūti; हा पितः क्वासि हे सुभ्रु Bk.6.17; so V.3.22; Ku.5.43; Māl.3.8.) -मङ्गल a. 1 very auspicious. -2 abounding in sacrifices. -मति a. very wise. (-तिः f.) 1 a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence, friendship. -2 a favour of the gods. -3 a gift, blessing. -4 a prayer, hymn. -5 a wish or desire. -6 N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of 6, sons. -मदनः the mango tree. -मदात्मजा a celestial damsel. -मधुरम् a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words. -मध्य, -मध्यम a. slender-waisted. -मध्या, -मध्यमा a graceful woman. -मन a. very charming, lovely, beautiful. (-नः) 1 wheat. -2 the thorn-apple. (-ना) the great-flowered jasmine. -मनस् a. 1 good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent; शान्तसंकल्पः सुमना यथा स्याद्वीतमन्युर्गौतमो माभिमृत्यो Kaṭh.1.1. -2 well-pleased, satisfied; (hence -सुमनीभू = to be at ease; जिते नृपारौ समनीभवन्ति शद्बायमानान्यशनैरशङ्कम् Bk.2.54.). (-m.) 1 a god, divinity. -2 a learned man. -3 a student of the Vedas. -4 wheat. -5 the Nimba tree. (-f., n.; said to be pl. only by some) a flower; मुमुचुर्मुनयो देवाः सुमनांसि मुदान्विताः Bhāg.1.3.7; रमणीय एष वः सुमनसां संनिवेशः Māl.1. (where the adjectival; sense in 1 is also intended); किं सेव्यते सुमनसां मनसापि गन्धः कस्तू- रिकाजननशक्तिभृता मृगेण R.G; Śi.6.66. ˚वर्णकम् flowers, unguent or perfume etc. for the body; सा तदाप्रभृति सुमनो- वर्णकं नेच्छति Avimārakam 2. (-f.) 1 the great-flowered jasmine. -2 the Mālatī creeper. ˚फलः the woodapple. ˚फलम् nutmeg. -मनस्क a. cheerful, happy. -मन्तु a. 1 advising well. -2 very faulty or blameable. (-m.) a good adviser. -मन्त्रः N. of the charioteer of Daśāratha. -मन्दभाज् a. very unfortunate. -मर्दित a. much harassed. -मर्षण a. easy to be borne. -मित्रा 1 N. of one of the wives of Daśāratha and mother of Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna. -मुख a. (-खा or -खी f.) 1 having a beautiful face, lovely. -2 pleasing. -3 disposed to, eager for; सुरसद्मयानसुमुखी जनता Ki.6.42. -4 favourable, kind. -5 well-pointed (as an arrow). -6 (सुमुखा) having a good entrance. (-खः) 1 a learned man. -2 an epithet of Garuḍa. -3 of Gaṇeśa; सुमुखश्चैकदन्तश्च कपिलो गजकर्णकः Maṅgal. S.1. -4 of Śiva. (-खम्) 1 the scratch of a finger-nail. -2 a kind of building. (-खा, -खी) 1 a handsome woman. -2 a mirror. -मूलकम् a carrot. -मृत a. stone-dead. -मेखलः the Muñja grass. -मेधस a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent; इमे अङ्गिरसः सत्रमासते$द्य सुमेधसः Bhāg.9.4.3. (-m.) a wise man. (-f.) heart-pea. -मेरुः 1 the sacred mountain Meru, q. v. -2 N. of Śiva. -यन्त्रित a. 1 well-governed. -2 self-controlled. -यमाः a particular class of gods; जातो रुचेरजनयत् सुयमान् सुयज्ञ आकूति- सूनुरमरानथ दक्षिणायाम् Bhāg.2.7.2. -यवसम् beautiful grass, good pasturage. -यामुनः 1 a palace. -2 N. of Viṣṇu. -युक्तः N. of Śiva. -योगः 1 a favourable juncture. -2 good opportunity. -योधनः an epithet of Duryodhana q. v. -रक्त a. 1 well coloured. -2 impassioned. -3 very lovely. -4 sweet-voiced; सुरक्तगोपी- जनगीतनिःस्वने Ki.4.33. -रक्तकः 1 a kind of red chalk. -2 a kind of mango tree. -रङ्गः 1 good colour. -2 the orange. -3 a hole cut in a house (सुरङ्गा also in this sense). (-ङ्गम्) 1 red sanders. -2 vermilion. ˚धातुः red chalk. ˚युज् m. a house-breaker. -रङ्गिका the Mūrvā plant. -रजःफलः the jack-fruit tree. -रञ्जनः the betel nut tree. -रत a. 1 much sported. -2 playful. -3 much enjoyed. -4 compassionate, tender. (-तम्) 1 great delight or enjoyment. -2 copulation, sexual union or intercourse, coition; सुरतमृदिता बालवनिता Bh.2. 44. ˚गुरुः the husband; पर्यच्छे सरसि हृतें$शुके पयोभिर्लोलाक्षे सुरतगुरावपत्रपिष्णोः Śi.8.46. ˚ताण्डवम् vigorous sexual movements; अद्यापि तां सुरतताण्डवसूत्रधारीं (स्मरामि) Bil. Ch. Uttara.28. ˚ताली 1 a female messenger, a go-between. -2 a chaplet, garland for the head. ˚प्रसंगः addiction to amorous pleasures; कालक्रमेणाथ योः प्रवृत्ते स्वरूपयोग्ये सुरत- प्रसंगे Ku.1.19. -रतिः f. great enjoyment or satisfaction. -रस a. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury. -2 sweet. -3 elegant (as a composition). (-सः, -सा) the plant सिन्धुवार. (-सा) N. of Durgā. (-सा, -सम्) the sacred basil. (-सम्) 1 gum-myrrh. -2 fragrant grass. -राजन् a. governed by a good king; सुराज्ञि देशे राजन्वान् Ak. (-m.) 1 a good king. -2 a divinity. -राजिका a small house-lizard. -राष्ट्रम् N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). ˚जम् a kind of poison. -2 a sort of black bean (Mar. तूर). ˚ब्रह्मः a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra. -रूप a. 1 well-formed, handsome, lovely; सुरूपा कन्या. -2 wise, learned. (-पः) an epithet of Śiva. -रूहकः a horse resembling an ass. -रेतस् n. mental power (चिच्छक्ति); सुरेतसादः पुनराविश्य चष्टे Bhāg. 5.7.14. -रेभ a. fine-voiced; स्यन्दना नो चतुरगाः सुपेभा वाविपत्तयः । स्यन्दना नो च तुरगाः सुरेभा वा विपत्तयः ॥ Ki.15.16. (-भम्) tin. -लक्षण a. 1 having auspicious or beautiful marks. -2 fortunate. (-णम्) 1 observing, examining carefully, determining, ascertaining. -2 a good or auspicious mark. -लक्षित a. well determined or ascertained; तुलामानं प्रतीमानं सर्वं च स्यात् सुलक्षितम् Ms.8.43. -लग्नः, -ग्नम् an auspicious moment. -लभ a. 1 easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable, feasible; न सुलभा सकलेन्दुमुखी च सा V.2.9; इदमसुलभवस्तुप्रार्थनादुर्नि- वारम् 2.6. -2 ready for, adapted to, fit, suitable; निष्ठ्यूतश्चरणोपभोगसुलभो लाक्षारसः केनचित् Ś.4.4. -3 natural to, proper for; मानुषतासुलभो लघिमा K. ˚कोप a. easily provoked, irascible. -लिखित a. well registered. -लुलित a. 1 moving playfully. -2 greatly hurt, injured. -लोचन a. fine-eyed. (-नः) a deer. (-ना) 1 a beautiful woman. -2 N. of the wife of Indrajit. -लोहकम् brass. -लोहित a. very red. (-ता) one of the seven tongues of fire. -वक्त्रम् 1 a good face or mouth. -2 correct utterance. (-क्त्रः) N. of Śiva. -वचनम्, -वचस् n. eloquence. -a. eloquent. -वयस् f. a hermaphrodite. -वर्चकः, -वर्चिकः, -का, -वर्चिन् m. natron, alkali. -वर्चला 1 N. of the wife of the sun; तं चाहमनुवर्तिष्ये यथा सूर्यं सुवर्चला Rām.2.3.3. -2 linseed. -वर्चसः N. of Śiva. -वर्चस्क a. splendid, brilliant. -वर्ण see s. v. -वर्तित 1 well rounded. -2 well arranged. -वर्तुलः a water-melon. -वसन्तः 1 an agreeable vernal season. -2 the day of full moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of Kāmadeva in that month (also सुवसन्तकः in this sense). -वह a. 1 bearing well, patient. -2 patient, enduring. -3 easy to be borne(-हा) 1 a lute. -2 N. of several plants like रास्ना, निर्गुण्डी &c.; Mātaṅga L.1.1. -वासः 1 N. of Śiva. -2 a pleasant dwelling. -3 an agreeable perfume or odour. -वासकः a water-melon. -वासरा cress. -वासिनी 1 a woman married or single who resides in her father's house. -2 a married woman whose husband is alive. -विक्रान्त a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous; सुविक्रान्तस्य नृपतेः सर्वमेव महीतलम् Śiva. B.16.45. (-न्तः) a hero. (-न्तम्) heroism. -विग्रह a. having a beautiful figure. -विचक्षण a. very clever, wise. -विद् m. a learned man, shrewd person. (-f.) a shrewd or clever woman. -विदः 1 an attendant on the women's apartments. -2 a king. -विदग्ध a. very cunning, astute. -विदत् m. a king -विदत्रम् 1 a household, family. -2 wealth. -3 grace, favour. -विदल्लः an attendant on the women's apartments (wrongly for सौविदल्ल q. v.). (-ल्लम्) the women's apartments, harem. -विदल्ला a married woman. -विध a. of a good kind. -विधम् ind. easily. -विधिः a good rule, ordinance. -विनीत a. 1 well trained, modest. -2 well executed. (-ता) a tractable cow. -विनेय a. easy to be trained or educated. -विभक्त a. well proportioned, symmetrical. -विरूढ a. 1 fully grown up or developed. -2 well ridden. -विविक्त a. 1 solitary (as a wood). -2 well decided (as a question). -विहित a. 1 well-placed, well-deposited. -2 well-furnished, wellsupplied, well-provided, well-arranged; सुविहितप्रयोगतया आर्यस्य न किमपि परिहास्यते Ś.1; कलहंसमकरन्दप्रेवशावसरे तत् सुविहितम् Māl.1. -3 well done or performed. -4 well satisfied (by hospitality); अन्नपानैः सुविहितास्तस्मिन् यज्ञे महात्मनः Rām.1.14.16. -वी(बी)ज a. having good seed. (-जः) 1 N. of Śiva. -2 the poppy. (-जम्) good seed. -वीरकम् 1 a kind of collyrium. -2 sour gruel (काञ्जिक); सुवीरकं याच्यमाना मद्रिका कर्षति स्फिचौ Mb.8.4.38. -वीराम्लम् sour rice-gruel. -वीर्य a. 1 having great vigour. -2 of heroic strength, heroic, chivalrous. (-र्यम्) 1 great heroism -2 abundance of heroes. -3 the fruit of the jujube. (-र्या) wild cotton. -वृक्तिः f. 1 a pure offering. -2 a hymn of praise. -वृत्त a. 1 well-behaved, virtuous, good; मयि तस्य सुवृत्त वर्तते लघुसंदेशपदा सरस्वती R. 8.77. -2 well-rounded, beautifully globular or round; मृदुनातिसुवृत्तेन सुमृष्टेनातिहारिणा । मोदकेनापि किं तेन निष्पत्तिर्यस्य सेवया ॥ or सुमुखो$पि सुवृत्तो$पि सन्मार्गपतितो$पि च । महतां पादलग्नो$पि व्यथयत्येव कष्टकः ॥ (where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). (-त्तम्) a good or virtuous con

sūtram	सूत्रम् [सूत्र्-अच्] 1 A thread, string, line, cord; पुष्पमालानुषङ्गेण सूत्रं शिरसि धार्यते Subhās.; मणौ वज्रसमुत्कीर्णे सूत्रस्येवास्ति मे गतिः R.1.4. -2 A fibre; सुराङ्गना कर्षति खण्डिताग्रात् सूत्रं मृणालादिव राजहंसी V.1.18; Ku.1.4. -3 A wire. -4 A collection of threads. -5 The sacred thread or sacrificial cord worn by members of the first three classes; शिखासूत्रवान् ब्राह्मणः Tarka K.; विप्रत्वे सूत्रमेव हि Bhāg.12.2.3. -6 The string or wire of a puppet. -7 A short rule or precept, an aphorism. -8 A short or concise technical sentence used as a memorial rule; it is thus defined:-- स्वल्पाक्षरमसंदिग्धं सारवद् विश्वतोमुखम् । अस्तोभमनवद्यं च सूत्रं सूत्रविदो विदुः. -9 Any work or manual containing such aphoristic rules; e. g. मानवकल्पसूत्र, आपस्तम्बसूत्र, गृह्यसूत्र &c. -1 A rule, canon, decree (in law). -11 A girdle; वासः ससूत्रं लघुमारुतो$हरद् भवस्य देवस्य किलानुपश्यतः Bhāg.8.12.23. -12 A line, stroke. -13 A sketch, plan; त्वमेव धर्मार्थदुघाभिपत्तये दक्षेण सूत्रेण ससर्जिथा- ध्वरम् Bhāg.4.6.44. -14 Indication, prelude; विशङ्क्य सूत्रं पुरुषायितस्य तद् भविष्यतो$स्मायि तदा तदालिभिः N.16.15. -Comp. -अध्यक्षः superintendent of weaving; Kau. A.2. -आत्मन् a. having the nature of a string or thread. (-m.) the soul. -आली a string of beads &c. worn round the neck, a necklace. -कण्ठः 1 a Brāhmaṇa. -2 a pigeon, dove. -3 a wag-tail. -कर्मन् n. carpentry; अथ भूमिप्रदेशज्ञाः सूत्रकर्मविशारदाः Rām.2.8.1. ˚विशेषज्ञः a weaver; Rām.2.83.12. -कारः, -कृत् m. 1 an author or composer of Sūtras. -2 a carpenter. -कोणः, -कोणकः a small drum shaped like an hourglass (डमरु). -कोशः a skein of yarn. -क्रीडा a particular game with strings (one of the 64 kalās). -गण्डिका a kind of stick used by weavers in spinning threads. -ग्रन्थः a book of a phorisms. -ग्राह a. seizing a thread. -ग्राहिन् m. a draftsman, an architect. -चरणम् N. of a class of Charaṇas or Vedic schools which introduced various Sūtra-works. -तन्तुः 1 a thread, string. -2 perseverance, energy. -तर्कुटी a distaff, spindle. -दरिद्र a. 'poor in threads', having a small number of threads, thread-bare; अयं पटः सूत्रदरिद्रतां गतः Mk.2.9. -धरः, -धारः 1 'the threadholder', a stage-manager, the principal actor who arranges the cast of characters and instructs them, and takes a prominent part in the Prastāvanā or prelude; he is thus defined:-- नाट्यस्य यदनुष्ठानं तत् सूत्रं स्यात् सबीजकम् । रङ्गदैवतपूजाकृत् सूत्रधार इति स्मृतः ॥ -2 a carpenter, an artisan. -3 the author of a set of aphorisms. -4 an epithet of Indra. -धृक् m. 1 an architect. -2 a stage-manager. -पातः applying the measuring line. -पिटकः N. of one of the three collections of Buddhistic writings. -पुष्पः the cotton plant. -प्रोत a. fastened. with wires (as puppets). -भिद् m. a tailor. -भृत् m. = सूत्रधार q. v. -यन्त्रम् 1 'a thread-machine', shuttle. -2 a weaver's loom; सूत्रयन्त्रजविशिष्टचेष्टयाश्चर्यसञ्जिबहुशालभञ्जिकः N.18.13. -3 a shuttle. -वापः weaving (threads). -वीणा a kind of lute. -वेष्टनम् 1 a weaver's shuttle. -2 the act of weaving. -शाखम् the body. -स्थानम् (in medic. works) the first general section (treating of the physician, disease, remedies &c).

skandhaḥ	स्कन्धः [स्कन्द्यते आरुह्यते$सौ सुखेन शाखया वा कर्मणि घञ् पृषो˚; cf. Uṇ.4.26] 1 The shoulder; महर्षभस्कन्ध- मनूनकन्धरम् Ki.14.4. -2 The body; सूक्ष्मयोनीनि भूतानि तर्कगम्यानि कानिचित् । पक्ष्मणो$पि निपातेन येषां स्यात् स्कन्धपर्ययः ॥ Mb.12.15.26. -3 The trunk or stem of a tree; तीव्राघातप्रतिहततरुस्कन्धलग्नैकदन्तः Ś.1.32; R.4.57; Me.55. -4 A branch or large bough; स्कन्धाधिरूढोज्ज्वलनीलकण्ठान् Śi.4.7. -5 A department or branch of human knowledge; Śi.2.28. -6 A chapter, section, division (of a book). -7 A division or detachment of an army; द्वितीयं प्रेषयामास बलस्कन्धं युधिष्ठिरः Mb.5.196. 9; R.4.3. -8 A troop, multitude, group; 'स्कन्धः स्यान्नृपतौ वंशे साम्परायसमूहयोः' इति मेदिनी; Mb.14.45.1. -9 The five objects of sense. -1 The five forms of mundane consciousness (in Buddhistic phil.); सर्वकार्यशरीरेषु मुक्त्वाङ्गस्कन्धपञ्चकम् Śi.2.28. -11 War, battle. -12 A king. -13 An agreement. -14 A road, way; Mb.3. -15 A wise or learned man. -16 A heron. -17 Articles used at the coronation of a king. -18 A part (अंश); तदवध्यानविस्रस्तपुण्यस्कन्धस्य भूरिदः Bhāg.11.23.1. -न्धा 1 A branch. -2 A creeper. -Comp. -अग्निः, -अनलः the trunk of a tree set on fire, fire made with thick logs. -आवारः 1 an army or a division of it; स्कन्धावारमसौ निवेश्य विषमे सौवेलमूर्ध्नि स्वयम् Mv.6.17; Dūtavākyam 1. -2 a royal capital or residence; तत्तु दृष्ट्वा पुरं तच्च स्कन्धावारं च पाण्डवाः Mb.1.185. 6. -3 a camp; स्कन्धावारनिवेशः Kau. A.1; उपप्लव्यं स गत्वा तु स्कन्धावारं प्रविश्य च Mb.5.8.25. -उपानेय a. to be carried on the shoulders. (-यः) a form of peaceoffering in which fruit or grain is presented, as a mark of submission. -घनः cognition; अन्यस्मिन् स्कन्धघने- $न्येन स्कन्धघनेन यज्ज्ञानं तत् तत्संततिजेनान्येनोपलभ्यते नातत्सं- ततिजेनान्येन । तस्मात् शून्याः स्कन्धघना इति ŚB. on MS.1.1.5. -चापः a sort of pole or yoke for carrying burdens; cf. शिक्य (Mar. काव़ड). -जः a tree growing from a principal stem. -तरुः the cocoa-nut-tree. -देशः 1 the shoulder; इदमुपहितसूक्ष्मग्रन्थिना स्कन्धदेशे Ś.1.19. -2 that part of the elephant's body, where the driver sits. -3 the stem of a tree. -परिनिर्वाणम् the annihilation of the elements of being (with Buddhists). -पीठम् the shoulder-blade. -फलः 1 the cocoa-nut tree. -2 the Bilva tree. -3 the glomerous fig-tree. -बन्धना a sort of fennel. -मल्लकः a heron. -रुहः the (Indian) fig-tree. -वाहः, -वाहकः an ox trained to carry burdens, pack-bullock. -शाखा a principal branch, the forked branch issuing from the upper stem of a tree. -शृङ्गः a buffalo. -स्कन्धः every shoulder.

sphūrjaḥ	स्फूर्जः 1 The crashing sound of a thunder-clap. -2 Indra's thunder-bolt. -3 Sudden burst or rise, as in नर्मस्फूर्ज. -4 First union of lovers characterized by joy in the beginning and some expectation of fear in the end.

svasti	स्वस्ति f., n. Welfare; समारम्भान्वुभूषेत हतस्वस्तिरकिच्चनः Mb.12.8.6; जितं त आत्मविद्धुर्य स्वस्तये स्वस्तिरस्तु में Bhāg. 4.24.33. -ind. A particle meaning 'may it be well with (one)', 'fare-well', 'hail', 'adieu' (with dat.); स्वस्ति ते$स्त्वान्तरिक्षेभ्यः पार्थिवेभ्यश्च भारत Mb.3.37.35; स्वस्ति भवते Ś.2; स्वस्त्यस्तु ते R.5.17; it is also used in expressing one's approbation; (often used at the beginning of letters). -Comp. -अयनम् 1 a means of securing prosperity. -2 the averting of evil by the recitation of mantras or performance of expiatory rites. -3 the benediction of a Brāhmaṇa after presentation of offerings; प्रास्थानिकं स्वस्त्ययनं प्रयुज्य R.2.7. -a. Auspicious; इदं स्वस्त्ययनं श्रेष्ठम् Ms.1.16; Mb.1.75.2. -कर्मन् n. causing welfare. -कारः a bard. -दः, -भावः an epithet of Śiva. -मुखः 1 a letter. -2 a Brāhmaṇa. -3 a bard, panegyrist. -वाचकः benediction, congratulation. -वाचनम्, -वाचनकम्, -वाचनिकम् 1 a religious rite preparatory to a sacrifice or any religious or solemn observance. -2 a complimentary or congratulatory present of flowers &c. to any one attended with good wishes and blessings. -वाच्यम् congratulation, invoking blessings.

hayaḥ	हयः [हय्-हि-वा अच्] 1 A horse; ततः श्वेतैर्हयैर्युक्ते महति स्यन्दने स्थितौ Bg.1.14; Ms.8.296; R.9.1 -2 A man of a particular class; see under अश्व. -3 The number 'seven'. -4 N. of Indra. -5 (In prosody) A foot of four short syllables. -6 The zodiacal sign Sagittarius. -7 The Yak (Bos Grunniens). -Comp. -अङ्गः Sagittarius (धनुराशि). -अध्यक्षः a superintendent of horses. -अरिः the fragrant oleander. -आनन्दः green grain of Phaselous Mungo (Mar. हिरवे मूग). -आयुर्वेदः veterinary science. -आरूढः a horseman, rider. -आरोहः 1 a rider. -2 riding (also आरोहम् in this sense). -आलयः a horse-stable. -आसनी the gum-olibanum tree. -इष्टः barley -उत्तमः an excellent horse. -कर्मन् n. knowledge of horses. -कातरा, -कातरिका N. of a plant; (Mar. घोडे काथर). -कोविद a. versed in the science of horses-their management, training &c. -गन्धः N. of a plant (Mar. आसंध). -ग्रीव 1 N. of a form of Viṣṇu. -2 N. of a demon; ज्ञात्वा तद्दानवेन्द्रस्य हयग्रीवस्य चेष्टितम् Bhāg.8.24.9. (-वा) N. of Durgā. -च्छटा a troop of horses. -ज्ञः a horse-dealer, groom, jockey. -द्विषत् m. the buffalo. -पः, -पतिः a groom. -पुच्छिका, -पुच्छी Glycine Debilis (Mar. रानउडीद). -प्रियः barley. -प्रिया the Kharjuri tree. -मारः, -मारकः the fragrant oleander. -मारणः the sacred fig-tree. -मुखः N. of a form of Viṣṇu; Mb. 1.23.16. -मेधः a horse sacrifice; सर्वान् कामानवाप्नोति हय- मेधफलं तथा Y.1.181. -वाहनः 1 an epithet of Kubera. -2 Revanta, the son of the sun. -शाला a stable for horses. -शास्त्रम् the art or science of training and managing horses. -शिक्षा hippology. -संग्रहणम्, -संयानम् the restraining or curbing of horses; driving horses; पश्य मे हयसंयाने शिक्षां केशवनन्दन Mb.3.19.5.

hi	हि ind. (Never used at the beginning of a sentence) It has the following senses:-1 For, because (expressing a strict or logical reason); अग्निरिहास्ति धूमो हि दृश्यते G. M.; R.5.1. -2 Indeed, surely; देव प्रयोगप्रधानं हि नाठ्यशास्त्रम् M.1; न हि कमलिनीं दृष्ट्वा ग्राहमवेक्षते मतङ्गजः M. 3. -3 For instance, as is well known; प्रजानामेव भूत्यर्थ स ताभ्यो बलिमग्रहीत् । सहस्रगुणमुत्स्रष्टुमादत्ते हि रसं रविः R.1.18. -4 Only, alone (to emphasize an idea); मूढो हि मदनेना- यास्यते K.155. -5 Sometimes it is used merely as an expletive.

hurcchakam	हुर्च्छकम् Dishonesty, cunning.

Macdonell Vedic Search

2 results


agra	ág-ra, n. front; beginning; top, x. 135, 6; lc. ágre in the beginning, x. 129. 3. 4.

agratas	agra-tás, adv. in the beginning, x. 90, 7.

Macdonell Search

191 results


agratas	ad. in front, forward; at the head, in the beginning, first of all; --kri, place in front; prp. before, in presence of (g.).

agra	n. front; beginning; point, tip, top, main thing: -m, before (g., --°ree;); in. before (ac.); lc. before, in presence of (g., --°ree;); in the beginning, at first, in the first place; after (ab.): -bhû, come forward.

agraśas	ad. from the beginning.

acchidra	a. intact; uninterrupted; faultless: -m, in., ad. uninterruptedly, from beginning to end.

atiraktatā	f. excessive liking for (lc.); -ratita, n. violent shrieking; -ratna, n. precious gem; jewel of the first water; -ratha, m. great champion; -rabhasa, a. very wild, -impetuous; -m, ad.; -ramanîya, fp. extremely charming: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -ramya, fp. id.; -raya, a. running extremely fast; -rasa, a. very palatable; m. too strong a key-note (rh.); violent desire: -tas, ad. too eagerly.

atya	a. running; m. steed; f. â, mare.

adāditva	n. appertaining to the verbs beginning with &open;ad&close; (=Ad-class).

adharottara	a. losing or winning; high and low; earlier and later; n. address and answer; gradation; topsy-turviness.

anādi	a. having no beginning; -tâ, f. abst. n.

anudhāvana	n. running after; cleansing; -dhyâna, n. meditation; -dhyâ yin, a. reflecting; indulging in longing; -dhye ya, fp. to be reflected on.

apavikṣata	pp. unhurt; -vi ghna, a. free from hindrances; -viddha, pp. √ vyadh; -vidyâ, f. bad knowledge; igno rance; -vritta, pp. ill-behaved; -vritti, f. running down, coming to an end; -vedha, m. faulty perforation.

abhyudaya	m. rise; beginning; success, fortune, prosperity; wealth; festi val, esp. sacrifice to the Manes; -udayin, a. arising, imminent; -udgati, f. going to meet; -udgama, m. rising to greet.

ayoni	m. f. what is not pudendum muliebre; a. lacking an origin or beginning; -ga, a. not born of the womb: -tva, n. abst. n.; -ganman, a. not born of the womb.

arṇasāti	f. winning of streams.

avidāsin	a. unfailing, perennial.

avilīna	pp. not annihilated: with bhû, remain alive.

aśeṣaya	den. P. end entirely: pp. annihilated.

ādi	m. [taking in hand: â+√ dâ] beginning: lc. in the --, at first; --°ree;, beg. with= and the rest, etc. (often -ka); -kartri, m. original creator; -kesava, m. ep. of Vishnu; -tas, ad. from or in the beg., at first; --°ree;, from onwards: -tâ, f. being the beginning, origin.

ādima	a. first; -mat, a. having a beginning; -mûla, n. original cause; -va râha, m. original boar, ep. of Vishnu.

ādiparvata	m. chief mountain; -purusha, m. original ancestor; primeval spirit; -pûrusha, m. primeval spirit, ep. of Vishnu; -bhava, a. produced in the beginning; -bhûta, pp. being the first among (g.).

ādyanta	n. sg., m. du. beginning and end; --°ree;, a. beginning and ending with: -vat, a. having a beginning and an end.

ārādha	m. homage; -ana, a. con ciliating, winning; n. prospering, success; accomplishment; propitiation, gratification; adoration; -anîya, fp. to be conciliated or adored; -ayitri, m. adorer, devotee;-ayish- nu, a. adoring (ac.); -ya, fp. to be accom plished; to be conciliated; pleasing to (in.).

ārambha	m. setting about; under taking; beginning; -na, n. taking hold; handle; support; make-shift; -nîya, fp. to be begun with: â, f. N. of certain verses; -tâ, f. beginning; -ruki, a. enterprising: -tâ, f. de light in undertakings.

ārabhya	gd. beginning with (ab. or --°ree;).

āvarjana	n. conciliating, winning.

āsamāpti	ad. up to the end, from beginning to end.

idamādi	a. beginning with this.

ityādi	a. beginning thus=and so on; n. this and the like, and so on, &c.

utkarṇa	a. pricking up the ears; -tâla, a. beginning to flap its ears.

uṇādi	m. pl. Unâdi suffixes, class of primary suffixes beginning with u (gr.).

utkoṭi	a. running to a point.

udaka	n. water; ablution; libation to the Manes: -m kri, dâ, or pra-dâ, present libation of water to the dead (d., g.); -m kri, perform the prescribed ablutions; -m upa-spris, touch various parts of the body with water as prescribed; -karman, n. libation of water to the Manes; -kârya, n. id.; ablution; -kriyâ, f.=udaka-karman; -tarpana, n. li bation with water; -dâna, n. id.; -dâyin, a. offering the funeral libation ofwater; -pûr va, a. beginning with a pouring out of water; -maya, a. consisting of water only; (á)-vat, a. supplied with water; -vatî, f. girl's N.; -sparsana, n. contact with water; ablution.

udaya	m. rising; rise (of sun or moon), break (of dawn); gathering (of clouds); N. of the mythical mountain behind which sun and moon are supposed to rise; appearance, arising, production, beginning; consequence, result; success; prosperity; gain; income, revenue; interest; -giri, m. sunrise mountain; -gupta, m. N. of a man; -tata, m. slope of Mount Udaya.

udaghāta	m. blow; jolt, shock; dis cussion; beginning; -in, a. rough, rugged.

upakrama	m. approach; applica tion, treatment; beginning; design, scheme; first project of a work; means, expedient; -anîya, fp. to be begun; -krânta, (pp.) n. beginning; -krâmya, fp. to be treated (disease).

upākaraṇa	n. preparation; be ginning of Vedic study; -karman, n. id.

upodghāta	m. introduction; be ginning; apt instance.

kathodaya	m. beginning of a story; statement; -½udghâta, m. beginning of a narrative.

kapaṭa	m. n. fraud: °ree;--, fictitious; -nât aka, m. N.; -prabandha, m. cunning device; -sata-maya, a. consisting of a hundred kinds of fraud; -½îsvara, m. N. of a temple of Siva.

kṛtrima	a. artificial, factitious; spurious; fictitious, feigned; casual, accidental; adopted (son): -tâ, f. cunning; -dhûpaka, m. compound incense; -bhâva, m. feigned affec tion; -mânikya-maya, a.consisting of false rubies; -mitra-tâ, f. friendship contrary to nature; -½ârti, a. feigning distress.

gajadanta	m. ivory; -nimîlita, n. elephant's wink=connivance; -pati, m. lordly elephant; -pumgava, m. lordly elephant; -pura, n. N. of a city=Hastinâpura; -mada, m. elephant's temple-juice; -muktâ, f. pearl said to be sometimes found in an elephant's forehead; -mauktika, n. id.; -yûtha, m. herd of elephants; -râga-muktâ, f.=gaga-muktâ; -vat, a. provided with elephants; -vadana, m. Elephant-face, ep. ofGanesa.

garbhāgāra	n. womb; bed chamber; lying-in room; inner sanctuary; -½âdi, a. beginning with conception; -½âdhâ na, n. impregnation; a certain ceremony preceding impregnation; -½ashtama,m. eighth year after conception.

guptadhana	n. money hoarded; a. hoarding his money; -sîla, a. wily, crafty, cunning; -½âryaka, m. N. of a prince.

camara	m. (î, f.) yak (bos grunniens); m. n. yak's tail, used as a fly whisk, one of the insignia of royalty: -vâla, m. N. of a prince.

carācara	a. moving, running; 2. kara½akara, a. moving and stationary; n. animals and plants, the whole world.

cāturmāsī	f. day of full moon at the four-monthly sacrifices; -mâsyá, n. period of four months; sacrifice to be offered every four months (at the beginning of the three seasons).

cāmara	a. relating to the yak (bos grunniens); n. tail of the yak, used as a fly-whisk, also as an ornament on the heads of horses and elephants; one of the insignia of royalty: -grâhinî, f. female whisk-bearer.

cittākarṣaṇa	n. winning of the heart; -½âkarshin, a. charming the heart; -½anuvartin, a. gratifying (g., --°ree;); -½anu vritti, f. gratification.

curādi	m. pl. list of verbs of the tenth class beginning with kur.

ghaṭādi	pl. the gana beginning with ghat (gr.).

chandaka khanda-ka, -˚na	a. pleasing, winning.

jalārthin	a. thirsty; -½ârdra, a. wet, moist: â, f. wet garment; damp cloth (used for fanning); -ârdrikâ, f. id. (--°ree; a.); -½âsaya, m. reservoir, pond, lake; sea; a. rest ing in the water; stupid.

javādhika	a. running faster.

tāradīrgha	a. loud and protracted (sound); -nâtha, m. N. of a historian of Bud dhism who lived at the beginning of the 17th century; -mûla, n. N. of a locality.

tripṛṣṭha	a. having or occupying three backs, ridges, or heights; m. Vishnu; -prakâra, a. threefold; -phala, a. bearing three fruits; -bâhu, a. three-armed; -bhâga, m. third part (esp. of the eye in a side-glance); -bhuvana, n. the three worlds: heaven, sky or lower regions, and earth; m. N.: -guru, m. ep. of Siva, -pati, m. ep. of Vishnu; -bhauma, a. three-storied; -madhu, a. who knows or recites the three versesbeginning with madhu (RV. I, xc, 6-8); -mâtra, a. containing three morae; -mârga-gâ, f. ep. of the Ganges; -mûrti, a. having three forms; °ree;--, the trinity, i. e. Brahma, Vishnu, Siva.

tvaca	n. id. (esp. --°ree; a.); -ana, n. skinning.

dala	n. fragment, piece; part; half; leaf, petal (that which unfolds itself); -ana, n. bursting (int.); breaking, crushing, shat tering; annihilation.

duṣkṛti dushkriti, ˚n	a. sinning; m. miscreant, sinner.

daivādyanta	a. beginning and ending with a rite in honour of the gods.

drava	a. running; fluid; feeling, tender; dripping or overflowing with (--°ree;); m. swift motion, flight; fluidity; fluid, juice; -ana, n. running; melting.

drāk	ad. [n. of drâ½añk, running to wards], instantly.

dravara	a. running swiftly.

dvipravrājinī	a. f. running after two men, unchaste; -bâhu, a. two-armed; m. man; -bhâga, m. half; -bhâdra, a. having two months of Bhâdra; -bhuga, a. two-armed; -mâtra, a. twice as great; con taining two morae; -mukha, a. (î) two-mouthed; -mûrdhan, a. two-headed; -rada, a. having two tusks; m. elephant; -râtrá, a. lasting two days; m. feast lasting two days.

dhanaṃjaya	a. winning booty; victorious in fight; m. fire; vital air that fattens; ep. of Arguna; N.: -vigaya, m. Victory of Arguna, T. of a play.

dhana	n. [deposit: √ dhâ], V.: prize of a contest; booty; stake or winnings in play; contest; V. C.: chattels, goods, property, wealth, treasure, money; reward, gift; --°ree;, abundance in; --°ree; a.possessing.

dhāvin	a. 1. running (--°ree;); 2. wash ing (--°ree;).

dhāvana	n. 1. running, galoping; attack; 2. washing; rubbing.

dhūrta	pp. [√ dhvri] cunning, knav ish, fraudulent; m. knave, rogue, cheat; gamester; thorn-apple: -ka, a. cunning, fraudulent; m. cheat.

nāman	n. (f. --°ree; a. -mnî or less commonly -man) mark, token; form, manner; name, appellation; mere name (opp. reality), trace; personal name (opp. family name or gotra); nature; kind, race; good name, fame (only --°ree; a.); noun (gr.): nâma kri, Â. take a name; -grah, mention the name; -bhri, bear a name; -kri, -dâ, or -dhâ, give a name; nâmnâ kri or vi-dhâ, name (2 ac.); n&asharp;ma, ad. by name (sts. nâmnâ or nâmatas is redun dantly added); indeed, certainly, of course; perhaps; with inter. then, pray; with impv. ever so much, no matter if; api nâma, with pot. at the beginning of a sentence, perhaps;emphasizes a preceding word more strongly than api; mâ nâma, ± pot. would that not, if only not; nanu nâma, surely.

nidhana	n. [putting down], abode; conclusion, end; annihilation; death; musical finish of a Sâman.

nirbhaya	a. fearless; not afraid of (--°ree;); secure: -m, ad. fearlessly; m. N. of a warrior; n. security; -bhara, a. vehement, ardent; excessive; deep (sleep); full of (--°ree;): -m or °ree;--, ardently, excessively, soundly, fast; -bhartsana, n. menace, reproach; -bhas mita, pp. burned to ashes, annihilated; -bhâgya, pp. to be excluded from his share (ab.); -bhî-ka, a. fearless, not afraid of (ab.); -bhîta, pp. id.; -bheda,m. cracking, burst ing; splitting; blurting out, betrayal; -bhed in, a. cleaving, shattering; -bhedya, fp. free from chinks; missing its mark.

niṣkiṃcana	a. having nothing, penniless: -tva, n. poverty; -kilvisha, a. free from sin.

niṣpāṇḍava	a. delivered from the Pândavas; -pâda-ka, a. accomplishing; -pâdana, n. accomplishment; -pâdya, fp. to be accomplished, -brought about: -½abda sahasra, full millennium; -pâpa,a. sinless; -pâlaka, a. having no guardian; -pîdana, n. pressure; -putra, a. sonless, childless; -pu rusha, a. having no males; -pulâka, a. free from shrivelled grain: î-kri, free from shrivelled grain; -pesha, m. impact; clash ing sound; -paurusha½âmarsha, a. desti tute of manliness and anger; -prakâra-ka, a. free from specifications; -prakâsa, a. dark; -pragña, a. witless, stupid; -pratâpa, a. destitute of dignity; -pratikriya, a. not to be saved, past help: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -prati graha, a. accepting no gifts: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -pratigha, a. unobstructed; -pratipaksha, a. having no adversary: -tâ, f., -tva, n. abst. n.; -pratibandha, a. free from ob stacles; unobjectionable; -pratîkâra, a. that cannot be helped; irremediable; unhindered; -pratyâsa, a. having given up all hope of (lc. or upari): î-bhu, lose all hope of (prati); -pratyûha, a. free from obstacles: -m, ad. without hindrance; -pradesa, a. having no fixed place; -prapañka, a. unevolved, exempt from multiformity: -sad-âtman, a. having real existence without being evolved; -pra bha, a. deprived of radiance or splendour: -tâ, f., -tva, n. abst. n.; -prabhâva, a. powerless: -tva, n. -ness; -pramâna-ka, a. supported by no authority; -prayogana, a. disinterested (spectator); useless: -m, ad. uselessly; needless, uncalled for; -pravâni, a. fresh from the loom; quite new.

padvat	a. having feet, running; n. running animals.

paripaṇa	n. playing for (--°ree;); -pat ana, n. flying about, hovering; -pantha-ka, m. (obstructor of one's path), adversary, enemy; -pantha-ya, den. P. oppose, resist (ac.); -panthín, a. besetting one'spath; m. waylayer, opponent, enemy; -panthî-bhû, become the adversary of, oppose (g.); -pava na, n. cleansing (of grain), winnowing; flail; -pasavya, a. relating to the sacrificial animal; -pâka, m. becoming fully cooked; digestion; ripening; maturity; perfection; consequence, effect; fulness, fulfilment (of time): -tas, ab. in consequence of; -pâkana, a. cooking fully; maturing; -pâkayitri, a. id.; -pâtala, a. very pale-red; -pât&ibrevcirc;, f. succession; -pâtha, m. complete enumeration: in. (know) com pletely; -p&asharp;na, n. hiding-place; -pândiman, m. extreme whiteness; -pându, a. very white or pale: -ra, a. very white; -pârsva, a.being at the side, close at hand: -vartin, a. remain ing at one's side, standing beside (g.); -pâ laka, a. protecting; maintaining; -pâlana, n. protection; maintenance; nurture: â, f. protection, nurture, î-ya, fp. to be guarded; -maintained; -pâlya, fp. to be protected; -maintained or observed; -pi&ndot;gî-kri, colour deep red-brown; -piñga, a. full of (in.); -piñg ara, a. brownish-red, orange-coloured; -pi pâlayishâ, f. desire to maintain; -pîdana, n. squeezing out; injuring, prejudicing (--°ree;); -pushta-tâ, f. being nourished by, feeding on (--°ree;); -pûti, f. complete purification; -pûra ka, a. fulfilling; bestowing abundance; -pûr ana, n. filling; completion; -pûrin, a. be stowing abundantly; -pûrna, pp. (√ 1. pri) filled with (--°ree;); -pûrnendu, m. full moon; -pûrti, f. becoming full of (--°ree;); completion; -pelava, a. very delicate, tiny; -pothaka, a.furthering, confirming; -poshanîya, fp. to be cherished; -prasna, m. enquiry, after (--°ree;); -prâpti, fp. obtainment; -prepsu, des. a. wishing to reach or obtain, seeking after, de siring (ac.); -plavá, a. running to and fro;m. fluctuation; -pluta, pp. (√ plu) over whelmed; bathed (in tears: --°ree;).

parisaṃvatsara	m. full year; a. a full year old; waiting a full year; -sakhya, n. true friendship; -samkhyâ, f. complete tale or enumeration; full number, totality, sum, number; exhaustive statement (i. e. excluding everything not specified): -na, n. complete enumeration, full number; exhaustive statement; just examination or estimate; -samghushta, pp. resonant on all sides; -samâpti, f. conclusion, completion, end; extension to (lc. or ad. with prati); -sara, a. adjacent; bordering on (--°ree;); m. neighbourhood, region, proximity; -sarpana, n. creeping about; walking about; running to and fro, continual change from place to place; -sarpin, a. moving about; -sâdhana, n. accomplishment; settlement, exaction (of debts); -sântvana, n. consoling: pl. blandish ments; -sâraka, n. N. of a place on the Sarasvatî.

pariṣattva	n. legal assembly; -shád, a. encompassing, besetting; f. assem bly; audience; council; -sheka, m. sprinkling, dousing with water, shower-bath; bathing appliances, such as water-can, etc.; -shoda- sa, a. pl. full sixteen; -shkandá, m. servant, esp. one running beside a carriage; temple; -shkâra, m. adornment; ornament; -shkri ta, pp. (√ kri) embellished, adorned, highly finished; -shkriyâ, f.adornment; attend ance on the sacred fire (--°ree;).

pariskanda	m. servant, esp. one running beside a carriage; -skhalita, (pp.) n. staggering; -stara, m. layer of sacrificial grass; -stárana, n. strewing about; -stoma, m. cover, bolster; -spanda, m.motion; -spand ita, (pp.) n. quivering; flaming up; manifes tation; -spardhin, a. vying with (--°ree;); -sphu- ta, a. quite evident; -m, ad.; -syanda, m. flow, stream (fig.); -srava, m. flow, effusion; overflow; river; birth (of a child); -srút, a. overflowing, foaming; f. kind of intoxicant.

palāyana	n. running away, flight, escape: -para, a. intent on flight.

pāta	m. manner of flying, flight; throw ing oneself into (lc.); fall, into (lc.), from (ab.); cast, shot, stroke; collapse, death; falling=direction (of the eye or gaze); drop (of blood); application (of ointment, of a knife); case, possibility; entrance, appear ance; --°ree;, falling from, to, into, upon or at: -ka, a. causing to fall (--°ree;); (m.) n. crime or sin depriving of caste; -k-in, a. sinning; wicked; m. criminal.

pipīlikā	f. id.: a, m. id.: -ma- dhya, a. slender in the middle like an ant: â, f. any metre the middle pâda of which is shorter than the preceding and following; â-madhya, n. ant-waist fast (beginning with fifteen mouthfuls at full moon, decreasing daily by one till new moon, and increasing similarly till full moon).

puṃsavana	a. causing the birth of a male child; n. (±vrata) domestic rite (at the beginning of conception) for the obtain ment of a son.

purastāt	ad. forward; before, in front, in one's presence; in or from the east; above or below (in a book); in the beginning, at first; previously, formerly; prp. with ac., ab., g., or --°ree;, before (of time or place).

pūrvākṣara	a. accompanied by the previous letter; -½agní, m. original, i. e. domestic, fire; -½a&ndot;ga, n. former body; com ponent of what precedes; m. first day in the civil month; -½akala,m. eastern or sunrise mountain; -½âkârya, m. ancient or former teacher; -½âdya, a. beginning in the east; -½adri, m. eastern or sunrise mountain; -½a dhika, a. greater than before; -½anubhûta, pp. formerly experienced; -½anta, m. end of the preceding word; anticipation; -½apara, a. being before and behind, directed forward and backward; eastern and western; earlier and later; preceding and following, follow ing in succession, relatively connected: -dak shina, a. eastern, western, and southern, -dina, n. forenoon and afternoon, -râtri, f. former and latter half of the night.

pauṃścalīya	a. referring to courtesans; -ya, n. running after men.

prakrama	m. stride (Br., S.); C.: beginning (also S.); proportion, measure; right sequence of words, grammatical construction; -kramana, n. striding forward; advancing towards (--°ree;); going forth;-krama-bha&ndot;ga, m. violation of grammatical construction; -krânta, pp. √ kram; n. setting out, departure: -tva, n. state of being meant; -kriyâ, f. procedure, method, manner; ceremony; formality; privilege, prerogative, precedence, high position (ord. mg.); insignia of high rank; characterization; chapter; -krîdá, m. sport; playground; -krîdín, a. playing, gambolling (RV.1).

pragraha	m. holding forth, stretching out; grasping, seizing; seizure of the sun or moon, beginning of an eclipse; kindness; obstinacy (rare); rein, bridle (ord. mg.); leader, guide; companion, satellite; -grahana, m. leader, guide (only --°ree; a. = led by); n. grasping, seizing; commencement of an eclipse; -grâham, abs. keeping the words separate (i. e. not combining them according to the rules of Sandhi: Br.); -grîva, m.railing or fence enclosing a house.

prajana	m. (n.) procreation, impregnation; parturition; m. procreator; -gánana, a. generating, procreative; n. impregnation; parturition, procreation; birth, propagation; production, of (--°ree;); genital member; progeny, children; -gaya, m. victory; -galpa, m. conversation; prattle; -galpana, n. speaking, talking; -gavá, m. haste, speed; -gav ana, a. running very fast; -gavin, a. hurry ing, running fast, quick;-gas, a. --°ree;=pragâ, progeny; -gahitá, pp. given up, abandoned.

pratijñāntara	n. change of the proposition in an argument; -paripâl ana, n. adherence to a promise, keeping one's word; -pûrvakam, ad. beginning with the prosecution; -virodha, m.contradiction between proposition and argument; -sam nyâsa, m. abandonment of one's own pro position after hearing the argument of one's opponent; -hâni, f. abandonment of a pro position in a disputation.

pratyagra	a. [being at the beginning], new, fresh; young; early (rays); recent; renewed, repeated: °ree;-or -m, ad. recently; -prasavâ, a. f. having recently brought forth, -calved; -yauvana, a. being in early youth; -rûpa, a. youthful; -vayas, a. of youthful years.

prathamaka	a. first; -kalpa, m. primary ordinance; -kalpita, pp. first in rank; -garbha, m. first pregnancy; a. f. â, pregnant for the first time; -ga or -g&asharp;, a. first-born; original; firstling; born in the first (i. e. first mentioned) wedlock; -gâta, pp. first-born; -tara, °ree;-or -m, (cpv.) ad. first; -tas, ad. first; forthwith; before, in preference to (g.); be fore, previously to (--°ree;); -darsana, n. first sight (lc. at --): -dina, n. first day of seeing any one (g.); -dugdhá, pp. just milked; -dhâra, m. (?) first drop; -nirdishta, pp. first stated or mentioned; -purusha, m. first (our third) person (gr.); -pravada, a. utter ing the first sound (child); -prasûtâ, pp. f. having calved for the first time; -bh&asharp;g, a. obtaining the first share; -yagñá, m. first sacrifice; -râtra, m. beginning of the night; -vayas-ín, a. young; -vasati, f. original or old home; -vittâ, f.first wife; -samgama, m. N.; -samâvritta, pp. only just turned to wards (lc.); -½âgâmin, a. coming or men tioned first; -½âdesa, m. initial position (of a word); -½abhidheya, n. fundamental meaning: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -½ardha, m. n. first half; -½ava ra-tva, n. higher and lower rank, seniority and juniority; -½astamita, n. recent setting of the sun; -½ahám, ad. on the first day; -½âhâra, m. first employment; -½itara, a. re verse of the first, second.

pradhyāna	n. reflexion, absorp tion; -dhvamsa, m. annihilation, destruc tion; disappearance (of a disease); -dhváms ana, a. destroying; m. destroyer; -dhvams a½abhâva, m. (non-existence in consequence of annihilation), cessation of existence; -dhvamsin, a. perishable, transitory; --°ree;, de stroying.

pramaṃhiṣṭhīya	n. N. of RV. I. 57 (which begins with the words &open;pra mamhishthâya&close;); (á)-mati, f. care, protection; provider, protector; -matta, pp. (√ mad) inattentive, careless, heedless, negligent, remiss: -sakiva, a. having a careless minister; -matha, m. Teazer, kind of sprite attendant on Siva; -mathana, a. (î) tor menting, harassing; destroying, removing; m. N. of a Dânava; n.destruction; -ma tha-nâtha, m. ep. of Siva; -matha½adhipa, m. id.; -mathin, a. tormenting, racking, harassing; -mada, m. pleasure, joy; a. intoxicated, wild, mad: â, f. handsome, buxom, lively woman; woman; -madana, n. joy of love; place of amusement, playground; -ma da-vana, n. pleasure-grove (of a prince); -madâ-gana, m. womankind, the female sex, woman; -madâ-vana, n. pleasure-grove of the women (of a prince); -madâ½âspada, n. harem, gynaeceum; -maditavya, fp. n. imps. one should be negligent regarding (ab.); -madvara, a. foolish; m. fool: â, f. N. of the wife of Ruru; -mánas, a. careful, tender; pleased, joyful; willing; -mantha, m. fire-drill (by the rotation of which fire is produced from wood); -manyu, a. indignant with, incensed against (lc.); very sad; -maya, m. death; -mará, m. death; -marana, n. dying, death; -mardaka, a. crushing, destroying; -mardana, a. crushing, destroying, annihi lating (g. or --°ree;); m. N. of a fairy; -mardi tri, m. crusher, destroyer; -mardin, a. crush ing, destroying (--°ree;); (á)-mahas, a. of great might.

prabhṛti	f. offering (of praise or sacrifice); throw, stroke, blow; beginning: --°ree; a. having as its beginning=beginning with, and the remainder, and so forth (±an accompanying substantive in the pl.); ad. --°ree; or immediately following an ad. in -tas or an ad. of time, from -onwards: ganma prabhriti, from birth; tatah or tadâ pra bhriti, from that time onwards, thenceforth; adya --, from now or to-day (the pcl.eva as a rule follows prabhriti, not the preceding ad.): -ka, a. --°ree;=prabhriti, beginning with, and so forth.

pramukti	f. liberation; -mukha, a. having the face turned towards (ac.); foremost, first, chief, principal: gnly. --°ree;, having as the foremost=preceded or led by, and so forth; n. beginning (of a chapter); present time: lc. in front, opposite (w. g. or --°ree;): °ree;--, before one's face, in one's presence; -tas, ad. in front, at the head; opposite; in the presence of, before (g. or --°ree;); -múd, f. pleasure, de light; joy of love; -mudita, pp. √ mud; n. mirth, gaiety: -vat, act. pp. (he) rejoiced.

prayāga	m. Place of sacrifice: cele brated place of pilgrimage at the confluence of the Yamunâ and the Ganges; also known as a kingdom: pl. inhabitants of Prayâga; N.; -yâkaka, a. entreating (-artham); -yâkana, n. imploration; -yâgá, m. preliminary offer ing (gnly., five, sts. nine or eleven); -y&asharp;na, n. setting out, going forth, departure; march, journey; day's journey; gait; attack (--°ree;); riding on (in.); expiration of life, decease; beginning; back of a horse (where the rider sits): -ka, n. march, journey, day's march, -kâla, m. time of death, -pataha, m. march ing drum, -bha&ndot;ga, m. interruption of a journey.

pralopa	m. destruction, annihila tion; -lobha, m. allurement: -ka, m. enticer, N. of a jackal; -lobhana, a. enticing; n. allurement; -lobhin, a. alluring, seductive; -lobhya, a. alluring, enticing; -lola, a.vio lently agitated (ocean).

pralaghu	a. very small or insignificant (retinue): -tâ, f. excessive smallness; -lap ana, n. prattling, chattering; -lapita, pp. √ lap; n. prattle, chatter; lament; -lab dhavya, fp. to be made sport of, to be de ceived; -lamba, a. hanging down, pendulous; stooping; m. N. of a Daitya slain by Bala deva or Krishna: -tâ, f. pendulousness, -bâhu, a. having pendulous arms, -bhuga, a. id.; -lambin, a. pendulous; -lambha, m.obtainment; deception; -lambhana, n. taking in, deceiving; -laya, m. dissolution, destruction, death; annihilation or end of the world; setting (of stars); cause of dissolu tion; swoon: -ghana, m. cloud producing the dissolution of the world, -m-kara, a. (î) causing destruction, -tâ, f. dissolution: -m gam, be annihilated, -tva, n. id.: â-ya klip, go to ruin, -dahana, m. conflagration causing the destruction of the world, -½anta-ga, a.perishing only at the end of the world (sun).

pravilambin	a. prominent; -laya, m. melting; dissolution, complete dis appearance; -lâpana, n. annihilation; -lâpayitavya, fp. to be annihilated; -lâpita-tva, n. complete annihilation; -lâpin, a.lament ing; -lâpya, fp. to be completely destroyed; -vâda, m. quarrel; -vikta, pp. √ vik; n. (?) solitude (only lc. pl.); -vikshu, des. a. being about to enter; -veka, m. complete retirement.

prasakala	a. very full (bosom); -sakta, pp. √ sañg: °ree;-or -m, ad. incessantly; -saktavya, fp. to be attached to (lc.); -sak ti, f. attachment, devotion, or addiction to, indulgence in, occupation with (lc.), occur rence of a case; bearing, applicability; practicableness: -m pra-yâ, be practicable; -sa&ndot;ktavya, fp. to be allowed to occur; -sa&ndot;khyâ, f. sum total; consideration; -sam khyâna, n. enumeration; reflexion, medita tion; fame, reputation; -sa&ndot;ga, m. attach ment, inclination; fondness for, addiction to; indulgence in (lc. or --°ree;); gratification, of (g.); association or intercourse with (--°ree;); illicit pursuit; applicability; contingency; opening, opportunity, occasion; connexion (pl. all that is connected with or results from anything): in. assiduously, with one's whole soul; in the course of (--°ree;); occasionally, in cidentally (also ab., °ree;--, or -tas); amunâ or tat-prasa&ndot;gena, on that occasion; etat prasa&ndot;ge, on this occasion; prasa&ndot;ge ku tra½api, on a certain occasion: -vat, a. occa sional, incidental, -vinivritti, f. non-recur rence of a contingency, prevention of the re currence; -sa&ndot;gin, a. attached or devoted to (--°ree;); connected with anything; contin gent, occurring; secondary, unessential; -sag ya, fp. applicable: -tâ, f. -ness,-pratishe dha, m. negative form of an applicable (posi tive) statement: -tva, n. abst. n.; -satti, f. graciousness; favour, complacency; -sam dhâna, n. combination, union; -sanna, pp. (√ sad) clear; bright; pleased, soothed, de lighted; complacent; gracious, propitious, kindly disposed; plain (meaning); distinct (impression); correct (supposition): -tâ, f. clearness, purity; brightness; perspicuity; complacence, good humour, -tva, n.clearness, brightness, -mukha, a. of a placid counte nance, looking pleased, -salila, a. having clear water; -sabha, °ree;-or -m, ad. forcibly; violently; exceedingly, very much; importu nately: -damana, n. forcible subjugation; -sara, m. advance; diffusion, expansion, ex tension; range; issue (of smoke); free scope, ample space; motion (of the eye); appear ance, manifestation; prevalence, influence; stream, flood; multitude, quantity: -na, n. running away, escaping; coming into force; complaisance, amiability; -sárga (or á), m. gushing forth; dismissal; -sárpana, n. going forward, advancing; betaking oneself to (lc.); -sarpin, a. issuing from (--°ree;); slinking away.

prastāra	m. strewing, spreading out; abundance; litter, bed of straw; couch; layer; stair (leading down to water); flat surface; table of all the possible combinations in a metre: -pa&ndot;kti, f.combination-pa&ndot;kti, a metre (12+12+8+8 syllables); -stârin, a. spreading out, extending to; -stâva, m. pre liminary mention, allusion, propounding or introducing a topic; subject of conversation, topic; opportunity, occasion, season, proper time; beginning, commencement; introduc tion; -of a Sâman sung by the Prastotri priest: in. at any one's convenience; lc. on a suitable occasion, opportunely, -tas, ad. in the course of (--°ree;); -stâvanâ, f. blazing abroad, through (in.); beginning, commencement; introduction, (dramatic) prologue (the scene between the benediction and beginning of the first act); -stâva-sadrisa, a. suited to the occasion, seasonable, appropriate; -stâvita, cs. pp. commenced, begun; referred to.

prācya	a. being in front; situated, living, prevailing, or spoken in the east, eastern; prior, previous; preceding (in a book); former, ancient, old; m. pl. people of the east, eastern country; the ancients: -pada-vritti, f. the euphonic combination e½a; -ratha, m. car used in the eastern country; -½udañk, a. (f. -½udîkî) running from east to west.

prāyaṇa	n. entrance, commence ment; course of life, career; departure from life, death; refuge: -m kri, seek death; -tas, ad. in the beginning; -½anta, m. end of life: -m, till death; lc. at the end of life.

prārambha	m. beginning of a task, undertaking, enterprise; commencement.

prāvarṣin	a. beginning to rain.

prāvṛṣ	f. rainy season, rains (as a division of the calendar embracing the months Âshâdha and Srâvana, which are the first half of the actual rains); -vrishi-ga, a. produced or occurring in the rainy season; -vrish-&isharp;na, a. belonging to or beginning the rainy season (day); -vrish-enya, a. referring or belonging to the rainy season.

bata	ij. (of astonishment or regret), ah! alas! (following the idea producing the emotion at the beginning of a sentence; in C. often in the middle of a sentence); bata½are, id.; aho bata and ayi bata, id. (C. at the beginning of a sentence).

balādhika	a. superior in strength (e.g. in running); -½adhikarana, n. pl. affairs of the army; -½adhyaksha, m. inspector of the forces, minister of war; -½anuga, m. younger brother of Baladeva,ep. of Krishna; -½anvita, pp. endowed with power, mighty; suggestive of power; -½abala, n. strength or weakness, comparative strength, importance, or significance; relative highness (of price); a. now strong, now weak; -½abhra, n. army in the shape of a cloud.

buddha	pp. (√ budh) awakened, fully awake; expanded (flower); enlightened, wise; known, observed; m. enlightened person who is qualified by good works and knowledge of the truth for Nirvâna and reveals the true doctrine of salvation to the world before his decease (B.); the historical Buddha, named Sâkya-muni Gautama, the founder of the Buddhist religion, who was born in Magadha and died about 477 b. c.; -gayâ, f. Buddha's Gayâ, the Buddhistic name of the town of Gayâ (so called because Buddha obtained true knowledge there); -ghosha, m. N. of a celebrated Buddhist scholar who lived at the beginning of the fifth century a. d. (the N. is not quotable in Sanskrit); -tva, n. Buddha hood; -datta, m. N. of a minister; -dharma, m. Buddha's law; -pâlita, m. N. of a pupil of Nâgârguna; -mârga, m. way or doctrine of Buddha; -rakshita, m. N.: â, f. N.; -½âgama, m. Buddha's doctrine; -½anta, m. waking condition.

bodha	a. understanding, knowing; m. awaking (int.); waking state, conscious ness; expanding, blooming (of flowers); call ing forth (a perfume); beginning to take effect (of a spell); apprehension, knowledge, understanding; designation; N.; -aka, a. (ikâ) awakening, rousing; causing to know, teaching, explaining; designating, indicating (--°ree;); enlightening, instructing; m. teacher, instructor; N.; -ana, a. (î) causing to awake, i.e. to expand (of a flower); arousing, excit ing; instructing, informing, teaching; m. planet Mercury; n. awaking, waking; per ceiving, understanding, knowledge; arous ing; causing to take effect (spell); causing to perceive or understand; instructing, in forming, enlightening; designating, indicat ing; ninth day of the dark fortnight in Bhâ dra, on which Durgâ awakes: î, f. eleventh day of the light fortnight of the month Kârttika, on which Vishnu awakes from his sleep; -anîya, fp. to be admonished; -un derstood; -regarded as.

brahmāyus	n. Brahman's life time; a. living as long as Brahman; m. N. of a Brâhman; -½aranya, n. N. of a forest; -½ârambha, m. beginning of Vedic recitation; -½arpana, n. offering of sacred knowledge; -½âvarta, m. N. of the sacred tract between the Sarasvatî and the Drishadvatî, north west of Hastinâpura; -½âsana, n. seat of the Brahman priest; a sitting posture suitable for sacred meditation; -½astra, n. Brahman's missile (a mythical weapon); -½âsya, n. a Brâhman's mouth; -½âhuti, f. offering of devotion.

brahmāṇḍa	n. egg of Brahman, universe, world (sts. pl.): -kapâla, m. hemi sphere of the world=inhabited earth; -½âdya, 1. fp. eatable for Brâhmans; 2. a. beginning with Brahman; -½adhigamika, a. relating to Vedic study; -½ânanda, m. rapturous joy in Brahman; -½apeta, (pp.) m. N. of a Râk shasa; -½abhyâsa, m. Vedic study.

bhavatputra	m. your son; -pûrva, a. preceded by &open;bhavat&close;: -m, ad. with &open;bha vat&close; at the beginning.

bhavabhaṅga	m. annihilation of mundane existence; -bhâva, m. love of the world; -bhâvana, a. bestowing welfare: â, f. regarding anything as good fortune (--°ree;); -bhîru, a. fearing rebirth; -bhûti, f. for tunate existence; m. N. of a dramatic poet, author of the Mâlatîmâdhava, the Mahâvîra karita, and the Uttararâmakarita, who lived in the eighth century a.d.; -bhoga, m. plea sures of the world; -manyu, m. resentment against the world; -maya, a. proceeding from Siva; -mokana, a. releasing from mundane existence; -sarman, m. N.; -sa&ndot;gin, a. at tached to worldly existence; -samtati, f. continuous series of transmigrations; -sâyu- gya, n. union with Siva (after death); -sâra, m. ocean of existence.

bheda	m. 1. act. vbl. n. breaking, splitting, cleaving, bursting, piercing, per forating, rending; division, separation; be trayal (of a secret); disturbance, interruption, infringement; sowing dissension, winning over an ally (one of the four Upâyas); lead ing astray, seduction; 2. ps. vbl. n. (being broken etc.), bursting, rupture, breach; in jury, hurt; bursting open, blossoming; sprout ing (of the beard); contraction (of the brows); disunion, dissension, between (in.), in (--°ree;); change, alteration, modification; distinction, difference; 3. concrete: division, part; cleft, fissure, chasm; variety, species, kind.

bhauvādika	a. belonging to the class of roots beginning with bhû (bhû½âdi), i. e. to the first conjugational class (gr.).

ma	base of the prn. of the 1st prs.: mâ (ac.) and me (d., g.) being unaccented never occur at the beginning of a sentence.

madakara	a. intoxicating; -karin, m. elephant in rut; -kala, a. passionately sweet (note); uttering soft sounds of love; drunk with passion; reeling with intoxica tion; being in rut, beginning to rut (elephant); -kârin, -krit, a. intoxicating; -kyút, a. 1. (V.) reeling with excitement, exhilarated with Soma; gladdening, exhilarating; 2. distilling temple-juice (elephant); -gala, n. temple juice (of elephants); -gvara, m.fever of pas sion or pride; -durdina, n. stream of temple juice; -dvipa, m. rutting elephant.

maryādā	f. [giving a clear sign: √ mar*, shine], mark, landmark; boundary, limit; end; goal; verge of the ocean, coast; strictly defined relation; bounds of morality, moral law; established usage; limits of pro priety; definite or fixed rule; fast alliance or contract: -giri, -½akala, m. frontier moun tain; -dhâvana, n. running towards a goal; -bhedaka, m. destroyer of landmarks; -maya, a. forming the bounds of morality; -vakana, n. statement of the limit.

mahāpakṣa	a. having many ad herents, having a large following; -pa&ndot;ka, n. (?) deep mud; -pa&ndot;kti, f. a metre of forty-eight syllables; -pandita, a. extremely learned; m. great scholar; -patha, m. prin cipal street; high road; the great journey, pilgrimage to the other world (-m yâ, die); a certain hell; a. having a great path: -giri, m. N. of a mountain; -padma, n. a certain high number; m. one of the eight treasures connected with the magic art padminî; N. of a Nâga: -pati, m. lord of millions, ep. of Nanda, -saras, n. N. of a lake, -salila, n. id.; -padya-shatka, n. T. of a poem (at tributed to Kâlidâsa) consisting of six classi cal verses; -½aparâdha, m. great crime or injury; -parvata, m. high mountain; -pasu, m. large cattle; -pâta, m. long flight; a. flying far (arrow); -pâtaka, n. great crime or sin (of which there are five: killing a Brâhman, drinking spirituous liquor, theft, adultery with a teacher's wife, and asso ciation with persons guilty of those four crimes); -pâtakin, a. guilty of a capital sin; -pâtra, n. prime minister; -pâda, a. large footed; -pâpa, n.great crime; -pâpman, a. very harmful; -pâra, 1. m. a certain per sonification; 2. a. having distant banks, wide (sea); -pârsva, a. having broad sides (leech); N.; -pâsupata, a. with vrata, n. the great vow of a worshipper of Siva Pasupati; m. zealous worshipper of Siva Pasupati; -pîtha, n. high seat; -pumsa, m. great man; -punya, a. very auspicious (day); very good or beau tiful; very holy; -purá, n. great fortress: î, f. great citadel; -purusha, m. great or eminent man; supreme spirit; -pûta, pp. extremely pure; -prishtha, a. broad-backed; -pai&ndot;gya, n. T. of a Vedic text; -prakarana, n. main treatment of a subject; -pragâpati, m. great lord of creatures, ep. of Vishnu; -pratâpa, m. of great dignity, majestic; -pratîhâra, m. head janitor; -pradâna, n. great gift; -prapañka, m. the great world; -prabha, a. of great lustre, very splendid; -prabhâ, f. great brightness;-prabhâva, a. very mighty; -prabhu, m. great lord, sovereign; chief; ep. of Vishnu; -pramâna, a. very exten sive; -pralaya, m. great dissolution of the universe at the end of a cosmic age: -kâla, m. time of the --; -prasna,m. great or im portant question; -prasâda, m. great pre sent; a. very gracious; -prasthâna, n. great departure, decease; -prâgña, a. very wise or prudent (person); -prâna, m. hard breath ing, aspirate sound; great strength; a. pro nounced with a hard breathing, aspirated; of great endurance or physical strength; -plava, m. great flood, deluge; -phala, n. large fruit; great reward; a. producing a great reward; -bala, a. very strong, power ful, or effective; m. N.; -bâdha, a. very in jurious; -bâhu, a. long-armed, strong-armed; m. ep. of Vishnu; N.; -bila, n. deep hole; -buddhi, a. of great intellect, extremely clever; m. N. of an Asura; N.; -brihatî, f. a metre (8+8+8+8+12 syllables); -brah ma: -n, m. the great Brahman (the god); -brâhmaná, m. great Brâhman (also used sarcastically); n. Great (=Tândya) Brâh mana; -bhata, m. great warrior; N.; -bha ya, n. great danger or straits; -bhâga, a. having great good fortune, very lucky, greatly blessed; greatly distinguished, very illus trious (frequently used as a term of address); -bhâgin, a. very fortunate, greatly blessed; -bhâgya, n.high position, great importance or power; a. extremely fortunate: -tâ, f. great good fortune; -bhânda½agâra, n. chief treasury; -bhârata, a. (± a word meaning &open;battle&close;), the Great Battle of the Bharatas; n.(± âkhyâna), the Great Story of the Bharatas, T. of the well-known great Epic (which contains about 100,000 slokas); -bhâshya, n. the Great Commentary of Patañgali on the Sûtras of Pânini and the Vârttikas of Kâtyâyana (probably composed in the second century b. c.); -bhikshu, m. the great mendicant, ep. of Sâkyamuni; -½abhi- gana, m. high descent, noble birth; -½abhi yoga, m. great plaint or charge; -½abhishava, m. N. of a prince; -½abhisheka, m. great inauguration; T. of the fourteenth Lambaka of the Kathâsaritsâgara; -bhîta, pp. greatly terrified; -½abhîsu, a. brilliant, lustrous; -bhuga, a. long-armed; -bhûta, pp. being great, large (E.); m. great creature; n. gross element (ether, air, fire, water, earth); -bhû mi, f. great realm; whole territory (of a king); -½âbhoga, a. of great extent, wide spreading; -bhoga, 1. a. having great coils (serpent); m. serpent; -bhoga, 2. m. great enjoyment; -bhoga, m. great prince; -½abhra, n. great or thick cloud; -makha, m. great sacrifice (=-yagña); -mani, m. costly jewel; -mati, a. of great wit, clever; m. N.; (&asharp;) manas, a. lofty-minded, proud, haughty; high-minded, magnanimous; -manushya, m. great man, man of rank; -mantra, m. very efficacious spell (esp. against snake-poison); -mantrin, m. chief counsellor, prime minister; -mahá, a. high and mighty (RV.); -mah as, n. great luminary; -mahiman, m. true greatness; a. truly great; -mahima-sâlin, a. possessed of true greatness; -mahâ½upâ dhyâya, m. very great preceptor (a desig nation applied to great scholars, e.g. Malli nâtha); -mâmsa, n. delicious flesh (esp. human flesh); -½amâtya, m. prime minister; -mâtra, a. of great measure, great; greatest, best (of, --°ree;); m. man of high rank, high state official, king's minister; elephant-driver; -mânin, a. extremely proud; -mâya, a. at tended with great deception; practising great deception; m. N.; -mâyâ, f. the great illu sion (which makes the world appear really existent and thus in a sense creates it); -mây ûra, n. a kind of medicine; kind of prayer (--°ree;); -mârga, m. main road: -pati, m. chief inspector of roads; -mâhesvara, m. great worshipper of Mahesvara or Siva; -mukha,n. large mouth (also of rivers); a. (î) large mouthed; -muni, m. great sage; -mûdha, a. very stupid; m. great simpleton; -mûrkha, m. great fool; -mûrdhan, a. large-headed (Siva); -mriga, m. large wild animal; ele phant;-mridha, n. great battle; -megha, m. great or dense cloud; -medha, m. great sacrifice; (&asharp;)-meru, m. the great Mount Meru; -moha, m. great mental confusion or infatuation; -mohana, a. causing great men tal confusion; -moha-mantra, m. very effi cacious spell: -tva, n. abst. n.; -yaksha, m. great Yaksha, prince of the Yakshas; -yag- ñá, m. great or chief sacrifice (one of the five daily sacrifices of the householder, called bhûta-, manushya-, pitri-, deva-, and brah ma-yagña); -yantra, n. great mechanical work: -pravartana, n. execution of great mechanical works; -yama-ka, n. a great Yamaka (a stanza, all the four lines of which contain identically the same words but differ in meaning, e.g. Kirâtârgunîya XV, 52); -yasas, a. very famous, illustrious (person); -yâna, n. the Great Vehicle (a later form of Buddhistic doctrine originated by Nâgâr guna: opp.hîna-yâna); N. of a prince of the fairies (having a great car); -yuga, n. a great Yuga (equal to four ordinary Yugas or 4,320,000 years); -yuddha, n. great battle; -½âyudha, a. bearing great weapons (Siva); -ragana, n.saffron; a. coloured with saffron; -rana, m. great battle; -½aranya, n. great forest; -ratna, n. precious jewel: -maya, a. consisting of costly jewels, -vat, a. adorned with costly jewels; -rathá, m. great chariot; great warrior; N.; -rathyâ, f. main road; -½ârambha, m. great under taking; a. enterprising, active; -rava, m. great roar or yell; a. making a loud noise, shouting loud; m. N.; -rasa, a. extremely savoury; -râgá, m. great king, reigning prince, sovereign: -½adhirâga, m. lord of great kings, emperor; -râgñî, f. reigning princess, queen; ep. of Durgâ; -râgya, n. sovereign rule; -râtra, n. advanced time of night, end of the night; -râtri, f. id.; great night follow ing the dissolution of the world; -râva, m. loud yell; -râshtra, m. pl. the Mahrattas: î, f. Mahratta language, Mahrattî: a-ka, a. (ikâ) belonging to the Mahrattas; m. pl. the Mahrattas; -rug, -ruga, a. very painful; -roga, m. dangerous disease; -roman, a. very hairy (Siva); -raudra, a. extremely terrible; -½argha, a. of great price, precious, valuable; expensive: -tâ, f. preciousness, great value, -rûpa, a. having a splendid form; -½arghya, a. precious, valuable: -tâ, f. preciousness; -½arnava, m. great sea, ocean; -½artha, m. great matter; a. having great wealth, rich; of great significance, important; m. N. of a Dânava; -½arha, a.valuable, costly, splen did; -lakshmî, f. the Great Lakshmî, Nârâ yana's Sakti; also=Durgâ or Sarasvatî; -li&ndot;ga, n. a great Li&ndot;ga; -vamsya, a. of high lineage; -vanig, m. great merchant; -vada, m. great teacher (i.e. of the most essential Vedic knowledge); (&asharp;)-vadha, a. having a mighty weapon (RV.); -vana, n. great forest; -varâha, m. great boar (i.e. Vishnu's incarnation as a boar); N. of a prince; -vallî, f. great creeper; -vâkya, n. long composition, literary work; great pro position; -vâta, m. violent wind, gale; -vâyu, m. id.; -vârttika, n. the Great Vârttika, N. of Kâtyâyana's Vârttikas to the Sûtras of Pânini; -vâstu, n. great space; a. occupy ing a great space; -vikrama, a. of great courage, very valiant; m. N. of a lion; -vighna, m. n. great obstacle; -vigña, a. very sensible; -vidagdha, pp. very clever; -viraha, m. grievous separation; -visha,a. very poisonous; -vistara, a. very prolix (book); -vîki, m. (having great waves), a certain hell; -vîrá, m. great hero; large earthenware fire-pot (mostly used at the Pravargya cere mony); N. of various princes; N. of an Arhat, founder of the Jain sect: -karita, n. life of the great hero (Râma), T. of a play by Bhavabhûti, -karitra, n. life of Mahâ vîra (the Arhat), T. of a work; (&asharp;)-vîrya, a. mighty, very potent; -vrikshá, m. great tree; -vriddha, pp. very aged; -vrishá, m. great bull: pl. N. of a people in the western Himâlayas; -vega, a. greatly agitated (sea); very swift; -vaipulya, n. great extent; -vaira, n. great enmity; -vairâga, n. N. of a Saman;-vyâdhi, m. serious disease; -vyâhriti, f. the great exclamation (i.e. bh&usharp;r bhúvah svãh); -vratá, n. great or fundamental duty; great vow; great religious observance; N. of a Sâ man or Stotra to be chanted on the last day but one of the Gavâmayana (also applied to the day and the ceremony); rules of the worshippers of Siva Pasupati; a. having undertaken great duties or a great vow, practising great aus terity, very devotional; following the rules of the Pâsupatas; m. a Pâsupata; -vratika, a. following the rules of the Pâsupatas; m. a Pâsupata; -vratin, a., m., id.; a. practis ing the five fundamental duties of the Jains; -vratîya, a. relating to the Mahâvrata cere mony (day); -vrîhi, m. large rice; -sakti, a. very mighty (Siva); -sa&ndot;kha, m. great conch; -½asana, a. eating much, voracious (leech); m. great eater, glutton; -½asani dhvaga, m. flag with a great thunderbolt; -sabda, m. loud sound; title beginning with &open;mahâ&close; or the corresponding office; -½âsaya, 1. m. ocean; 2. a. high-minded, noble; -sayyâ, f. splendid couch; -sarîra, a. having a large body; -salka,m. kind of sea-crab; -salkalin, a. having large scales (fish); -sastra, n. mighty weapon; -sâka, n. kind of vegetable; -sâkya, m. great or distinguished Sâkya; -sânti, f. great appeasement (a kind of rite to avert evil);(&asharp;)-sâla, possessor of a great house, great householder; -sâlîna, a. very modest; -sâsana, n. great sway; a. exer cising great sway; -siras, a. large-headed; m. kind of serpent; -sûdra, m. Sûdra in a high position, upper servant; -saila, m. great rock or mountain; -½asman, m. precious stone; -smâsâna, n. large cemetery; ep. of Benares; -srotriya, m. great theologian or spiritual teacher; -½asva, m. N.: -sâlâ, f. great stable; office of head groom; -svetâ, f. N. of a god dess; N.; -samkata, n. great danger or straits; -satî, f. extremely faithful wife, pattern of wifely fidelity; -sattrá, n. great Soma sacrifice; -sattva, m. great creature; a. strong-minded; high-minded, noble; very courageous; containing large animals: -tâ, f. strength of character and containing large animals; -½âsana, n. splendid seat; -samdhi- -vigraha, m. office of chief minister of peace and war; -sabhâ, f. great dining hall; -samudra, m. ocean; -sarga, m. great crea tion (after a great dissolution); -sâdhana bhâga, m. head of the executive; -sâdhu, a. extremely good: v-î, f. pattern of wifely fidelity; -sâmtâpana,m. kind of penance; -sâmdhi-vigrah-ika, m. chief minister of peace and war; -sâmânya, n. generality in the widest sense; -sâra, a. strong; valuable, costly; -sârtha, m. great caravan; -sâhas ika, a. very daring, excessively rash; m. highwayman, robber: -tâ, f. great energy: in. with the utmost decision; -simha, m. great lion; N.; -siddha, (pp.) m. great saint; -siddhânta, m. great manual of as tronomy, T. of a work by Âryabhata the younger; -siddhi, f. great magical power; -subhiksha, n. great abundance of provisions, very good times (pl.); -sûkta, n. great hymn: pl. the great hymns of the tenth book of the Rig-veda (1 to 128); m. composer of the great hymns of RV. X; -sûkshma, a. extremely minute; -sûki, a. w. vyûha, m. kind of array of troops in battle; (&asharp;)-sena, a. having a large army; m. ep. of Skanda; N. of various princes; -senâ, f. great army; -stoma, a. having a great Stoma (day); -½astra, n. great or mighty missile; -sthâna, n. high place or position; -sthûla, a. very gross; -snâna, n. great ablution; -½âspada, a. mighty; -sva na, m. loud sound; a. loud-sounding, shout ing loud; loud (noise); -½âsvâda, a. very savoury; -hanu, a. having great jaws; -harm ya, n. great palace; -½âhava, m. great battle; -hava, m. great sacrifice; -hasta, a. large handed (Siva); -hâsa, m.loud laughter; a. laughing loud; -½ahí, m. great serpent: -sayana, n. sleep (of Vishnu) on the great serpent (Sesha); -½ahna, m. advanced day time, afternoon; -hrada, m. great pond.

	a. (î) relating to or pro duced from the mind, mental, spiritual; performed in thought (prayer etc.), conceived in the mind, conceivable; n. mental faculty, mind, heart; N. of a sacred lake and place of pilgrimage on mount Kailâsa, whither the wild swans repair in the breeding season at the beginning of the monsoons.

mānuṣaka	a. human; -tâ, f. human condition: -m gam, become a man; -tva, n. id.; -daivika, a. relating to men and to gods; manhood; -râkshasa, m. human devil: î, f. she-devil in human form; -lauk ika, a. belonging to the world of men, human; -½âda, m. man-eater: -tva, n. cannibalism.

māyika	a. illusory; -ín, a. skilled in art or enchantment; full of guile, wily, cunning; possessed by delusion; m. magi cian, sorcerer, juggler; n. magical art: (-i) tâ, f. deceitfulness.

māyākapota	m. phantom pigeon: -vapus, a. having the body of a --; -kâra, a. acting deceitfully; -kkhadma para, a. intent on deceit and fraud; -devî, f. N. of the mother of Buddha; -dhara, a.versed in jugglery or witchcraft; m. N. of a prince of the Asuras; -½adhika, a. abound ing in magic arts; -patu, a. skilled in witch craft; -pur, -purî, f. N. of a town; -prayoga, m. trickiness; versatility; -batu, m. N. of aprince of the Sabaras; -½abhyudayana, m. N. of a Kâyastha; -maya, a. (î) illusory, unreal; m. N. of a Râkshasa; -yantra, n. en chantment: °ree;--=magical; -vakana, n. hypo critical speech; (&asharp;)-vat, a. practising sorcery (RV.); deceitful, cunning; attended with magical arts: -î, f. kind of personified magi cal art; N. of a fairy's wife; N. of a prin cess; -vâda, m. doctrine of illusion (a term applied to Buddhism and Vedântism); -vid,a. familiar with magical arts; -vín, a. skilled in magic; fraudulent; guileful, deceitful; illusory; m. magician, sorcerer, juggler; -sîla, a. deceitful, fraudulent.

mārgāvalokin	a. scanning the road, anxiously expectant.

mitajñu	a. strong-kneed; -dru, a. strong-legged, running well (RV.).

mukha	n. (--°ree; a. â, î) mouth; jaws; face; snout, muzzle (of an animal), beak (of a bird); direction, quarter; spout (of a vessel: rare); mouth, opening, entrance, into (g. or --°ree;); forepart, tip, point, head (of an arrow); edge (of a sharp instrument); surface, top, upper side; head, chief; beginning; original cause of the action of a drama; source, occa sion, of (g., --°ree;); means; --°ree; a. having in the or as a mouth; having a (pale, etc., attribu tive a.) face; having a face like (e. g. goat faced); having a face covered with or show ing (e.g. tears, frowns, anger); facing or looking towards (-m, ad.); having as a be ginning, beginning with.

mūlaka	a. (ikâ) having its root in, produced or derived from; n. radish; root; -karman, n. magic rites with roots; -kâr ana, n. original or prime cause; -krikkhra, m. n. penance consisting in eating onlyroots; -khânaka, m. digger of roots; -grantha, m. original text; -kkhinna, pp. cut off with the root, dissipated (hope); -kkheda, m. cutting down (a tree) by the root; -kkhedin, a. de stroying the text (super-cleverness);-ga, a. growing from the root (plant); formed on roots of trees (ant-hill); -tás, ad. below: w. â, from the root onwards; from the begin ning (relate); -tâ, f. being the root or source of (--°ree;); -tva, n. id.; -deva, m. N.; -dvâra, n. main door; -nikrintana, a. (î) cutting off by the root, destroying root and branch (--°ree;); -purusha, m. (root-man), male repre sentative of a family; -prakriti, f. primeval or unevolved matter (in the Sâ&ndot;khya phil.; also called pradhâna): pl. principal sovereigns to be considered in time of war; -pranihita, pp. known through spies from the beginning (thieves); -phala, n. roots and fruits; interest of capital; -bhava, a. growing from roots; -bhâga, m. lower part; -bhritya, m. heredi tary servant; -mantra, m. main or heading text; spell; -mantra-maya, a. formed of spells, taking effect like a spell; -râmâyana, n. original (i. e. Vâlmîki's) Râmâyana; -vakana, n. original words or text; -vat, a. supplied with (esculent) roots (place); stand ing upright; -vâpa, m. planter of (esculent) roots; -vinâsana, n. radical destruction; -vyasana-vritti-mat, a.following a calling which is a hereditarily vile occupation; -vyâdhi, m. main disease; -vratin, a. sub sisting exclusively on roots; -sâdhana, n. main instrument; -sthâna, n. base, founda tion; chief place; Multan; -sthâyin,a. ex isting from the beginning (Siva); -srotas, n. main stream of a river; -hara, a. taking away the roots, completely destroying (g.): -tva, n. complete ruin; -½âyatana, n. original abode or seat; -½âsin, a. subsisting on roots.

yathāyatham	ad. fitly, properly, in due order; one after the other, gradually; -yukta, pp. regarding (lc.): -m, ad. accord ing to circumstances, suitably; -yukti, ad. id.: -tas, ad. id.; -yogam, ad. id.; according to usage; -yogena, in. ad. according to cir cumstances, suitably; -yogyam, ad. as is fit, properly, suitably; -½ârabdha, pp. previously begun; -½ârambham, ad. according to the beginning, in the same order; -rukam, -ruk i, ad. according to taste; -rûpa, a. of what kind; having a suitable appearance, extremely beautiful; very great: (á)-m, ad. suitably; rightly, truly; according to appearance.

yātrā	f. going, to (--°ree;); departure, journey; march, military expedition; festive train, procession; (annual, biennial, etc.) pilgrimage (to the shrine of a deity); fes tivity, festival; livelihood; maintenance; intercourse; kind of dramatic entertain ment: -mdâ, undertake an expedition; -kara, a. affording maintenance; -karana, n. set ting forth on a journey or march; -gam ana, n. military expedition; -mahotsava, m. great festive procession; -½artham, ad. for marching.

yāyin	a. going, moving, riding, running, flying, journeying, marching (to etc. --°ree;).

yukti	f. union, connexion; combination of words, sentence (rare); preparation for (lc. or --°ree; of vbl. n.); application, employ ment, use; means, expedient, contrivance, artifice, trick (w. d. or lc. of vbl. n., or yathâ and pot.); magical agency; reasoning, argu ing; argument, proof; reason, motive (rare); suitableness, propriety, aptness, correctness; sensible reflexion, contemplation of the cir cumstances (dr.): -m kri, discover an ex pedient, employ or point out a device; --°ree;, in. sg. & pl., -tas, by means of (--°ree;); °ree;-or in. pl. subtilely, artfully; by means of a cunning device, under some pretext; in. and -tas, suitably, properly, justly; -tas, ad. by means of an argument.

yugādi	m. beginning of (an age=) the world; -½adhyaksha, m. surveyor of a cosmic age, ep. of Pragâpati; -½anta, m. end of the yoke; end of a generation; end of an age or of the world; meridian: -m adhirû- dhah savitâ, the sun has reached the meri dian, it is noon; -½antara, n. another or later generation; second half of the sun's arc divided by the meridian: -m ârûdhah savitâ, the sun has entered the second part of his course, it is past midday.

raghu	] a. (v-&isharp;) speed ing, fleet (V.); m. courser (V.); N. of an ancient king, ancestor of Râma: pl. descend ants of Raghu; -tilaka, m. ep. of Râma; -drú, a. running swiftly (RV.); -nandana, m. descendant of Raghu, ep. of Râma; -nâ tha, m. ep. of Râma; -pati, m. lord of the Raghus, ep. of Râma; -pátvan, a. flying swiftly (RV.); -vamsa, m. Raghu's race: T. of a well-known poem by Kâlidâsa: -samgîv anî, f. T. of Mallinâtha's commentary on the Raghuvamsa; -shyád, a. gliding swiftly (V.); -svâmin, -½uttama, -½udvaha, m. ep. of Râma.

raudhādika	a. belonging to the class of roots beginning with rudh (i.e. to the seventh class).

laghukoṣṭha	a. having an empty stomach; -kaumudî, f. the short Kaumudî (an abridgement of the Siddhânta-kaumudî); -krama, a. having a quick step, hurrying: -m, ad. quickly; -gati, a. swift-paced; -kit ta, a. light-minded, fickle; -ketas, a. little minded, mean-spirited; -kkhedya, fp. easy to destroy (prob. incorr. for -½ukkhedya); -tâ, f., tva, n. activity, nimbleness; lightness; buoyancy, light-heartedness;prosodical shortness; smallness, shortness; insignificance; levity, thoughtlessness; lack of dignity, con tempt, degradation; -patana-ka, m. (swift flying), N. of a crow; -parikrama, a. mov ing quickly; -pâka, a. growing old quickly; easily digested; -pâtin, a. (flying quickly), N. of a crow; -pramâna, a. short; -pra yatna, a. pronounced with slight effort; -bhâ va, m. ease; -bhug, a. eating little; -mûla, a. having insignificant roots, insignificant at the beginning; -vikrama, m. quick step; a. quick-footed; -vivara-tva, n. narrowness of aperture; -vritti, a. of a light nature, light; frivolous: -tâ, f. levity; -sattva, a. having a weak character; -samutthâna,a. rising up quickly, prompt; -sâra, a. insignificant, worthless; -hasta, a. light-handed, adroit (of archers, scribes, etc.): -tâ, f., -tva, n. adroitness of hand, dexterity; -hârîta, m. abridged Hârîta (author of a law-book).

lokācāra	m. ways of the world, general custom; -½âtman, m. soul of the world; -½âdi, m. (beginning=) creator of the world; -½âdhâra, a. supported by or depen dent on the people; -½adhipa,m. lord of the world, god; -½anugraha, m. welfare of the world or people; -½anurâga, m. love of man kind, universal love; -½anuvritta, n. obedi ence of the people; -½anuvritti, f. dependence on other people; -½antara, n. the other world: -m gam or yâ, go to the other world, die: -sukha, n. felicity in the next world; -½an tarika, a. (î) dwelling or situated between the worlds; -½antarita, pp. deceased; -½apa vâda, m. censure of the world, public re proach; -½abhyudaya, m. welfare of the world; -½âyata, pp. (restricted to the material world), materialistic; m. materialist; n. ma terialism, doctrine of Kârvâka: i-ka, m. materialist; man of the world, î-kri, regard as materialistic; -½aloka, n. sg. & m. du. the world and the non-world; m. N. of the mythi cal mountainous belt (light on the one side and dark on the other) which separates the visible world from the world of darkness; -½âlokin, a. surveying the worlds; -½aveksha- na, n. care of the people.

lokaṃpṛṇa	a. filling the world, all-pervading: &asharp;, f. N. of the ordinary bricks used in building the fire-altar (consecrated with the verse beginning lokám prina).

lokakaṇṭaka	m. thorn=curse of mankind, pernicious man; -kartri, m. creator of the world, ep. of Brahman, Vishnu, or Siva; -kânta, pp. beloved of the world, dear to all mankind; -kâma, a.desirous of a certain world; -kâra, m. creator of the world, ep. of Siva; -krit, m. creator of the world; -kshit, a. inhabiting heaven; -gâ thâ, f. popular (traditional) verse; -guru, m. teacher of the world or people;-kakshus, n. pl. eyes of the people; -kâritra, n. ways of the world; -gít, a. winning territory (Br.); gaining heaven; -gña, a. knowing the world or men: -tâ, f. knowledge of the world; -tattva, n. id.; -tantra, n. course of the world; -tas, ad. from people, from popular talk; in accordance with usage; -traya, n., î, f. the three worlds (heaven, earth, air or lower regions); -dambhaka, a. cheating the people; -dvaya, n. the two worlds (heaven and earth); -dvâra, n. gate of heaven; -nâ tha, m. lord of the worlds, ep. of Brahman, Vishnu, Siva, of the gods, and of the sun; protector of the people, king; N. of Avalo kitesvara; a. protected by mankind; -nind ita, pp.blamed by every one; -pa, m. regent of a world; world-guardian (of whom there are eight); -pati, m. lord of the world, ep. of Brahman or Siva; lord of the people, king; -patha, m. general or usual way; -paddhati, f. id.; -pâlá, m. world-guardian (of whom from Manuonwards four or eight are assumed according as four or eight quarters are counted; exceptionally five); guardian of the people, king; -pitâmaha, m. great forefather of mankind, ep. of Brahman; -punya, N. of a locality; -pûgita, pp. universally honoured; -pravâda, m. common report, popular or current saying; -prasiddha, pp. generally known; -prasiddhi, f. general prevalence: in.according to prevailing usage; -bhartri, m. supporter of the people; -mahesvara, m. great lord of the world, ep. of Krishna, -mâ tri, f. mother of the world, ep. of Gaurî

vadha	m. vanquisher, slayer (V.); deadly weapon, esp. Indra's bolt (V.); slay ing, slaughter, murder, destruction (of or by, --°ree;); capital or (more commonly) corporal punishment (in law-books); annihilation (of things); prevention (rare): -ka, m. murderer; executioner; -karma½adhikârin, m. execu tioner; -kâma, a. desirous of killing; -kâm yâ, f. intention of striking or killing; -gîvin, a. living by the killing ofanimals, butcher; hunter.

varṣā	f. rain (rare): (sg.) pl. rains, rainy season (very common): (â)-kâla, m. rainy season; -½âgama, m. beginning of the rains; -½ambu, n. rain water; -samaya, m. rainy season.

vaśakara	a. (î) subduing, winning over; -kâraka, a. leading to subjection; -ga, a. subject, obedient, being in the power of, dependent on (g., --°ree;); -gata, pp. id.; -ga tva, n. dependence on (--°ree;);-tâ, f. id. (g., --°ree;); command of (lc.).

vā	encl. pcl. or (following, but metr. sts. preceding); either or not, optionally; (= iva), like, as, as it were; (=eva), just, etc. (rare); but, however (rare); even, even sup posing (with ft.; rare); after inter. or rel.= possibly, pray: vâ -vâ, either -or (when there are two clauses, the vb. of the first only is as a rule accented); na ± vâ -vâ, kim vâ -kim vâ or na vâ, neither -nor; vâ na vâ, either -or not; perhaps -or perhaps not; whether -or not; yadi vâ -vâ, whether -or; in a sentence containing more than two members vâ is nearly always repeated, while a negative at the beginning of the series need not be repeated as its sense runs through all the remaining members (=not, either -or or); in this case vâ often interchanges with ka and api, or is combined with the pcls. api (± punah), atha (± u, api, or punah), yad, yadi, or utá.

vājasāti	f. (V.) winning of booty; battle, victory.

vājasani	a. winning booty or wealth (RV.); invigorating, victorious (RV.); bestowing food, also ep. of Siva (C.); -san-e yá, m. pat. of Yâgñavalkya; (a), m. pl. school of Vâgasaneya: -ka, a. relating to, composed by, or belonging to the school of Vâgasaneya; n. the Satapatha-brâhmana; -saney-in, a. belonging to the school of Vâgasaneya; m. pl. school of Vâgasaneya.

vājayu	a. (RV.) racing, swift; eager for battle; vigorous; winning booty.

vādya	a. beginning with v.

vāladhi	m. tail; -maya, a. con sisting of hair; -vâya-ga, n. cat's eye (the stone; lit. produced on Mount Vâlavâya); -vâs as, n. garment of hair; -vyagana, n. fly-whisk made of tail-hair, esp. of the tailof the Yak (Bos grunniens; = kâmara): î-bhû, be come a fly-whisk.

vidadvasu	a. winning wealth (V.).

vidyādharī	f. female fairy, sylph; -dharî-bhû, become a fairy; -dha ra½indra, m. prince of the fairies: -tâ, f., -tva, n. abst. n.; -dhâra, m. receptacle of knowledge, great scholar; -½adhidevatâ, f.tutelary deity of the sciences, Sarasvatî; -½ânanda, m. delight in knowledge; -½anu pâlin, a. faithfully preserving (traditional) learning; -½anta, m. end of apprenticeship; -pati, m. chief scholar at a court: -tva, n. abst.n.; -phala, n. fruit of learning; -bala, n. power of enchantment; -matha, m. mon astic school, college; -mada, m. pride of learning; -mandira, n. school-house, college; -maya, a. consisting or absorbed in know ledge; -½aranya, m. N. of various scholars, esp. of Mâdhavâkârya; -ratna, n. jewel of knowledge; -½ârambha, m. beginning of study; -½artha, a. desirous of knowledge; -½arthin, a. id.; -vamsa, m. chronological list of teachers; -vat, a. learned; -½ava tamsa, m. N. of a fairy; -vadhû, f. muse; -vayo-vriddha, pp. old in learning and years; -vikraya, m. instruction for pay; -vid, a. learned; -viruddha, pp. conflicting with science; -vriddha,pp. old in know ledge; -vesman, n. school-house, college; -vrata-snâta: -ka, a. having concluded Vedic study and his vows; -sampradâna, n. imparting of knowledge; -sâgara, m. ocean of knowledge, ep. of a great scholar; -sthâ na, n. branch of knowledge; -snâta: -ka, a. having finished Vedic study; -hîna, pp. destitute of knowledge, unlearned, illiterate.

vidvala	a. clever, cunning (V.).

vindhya	m. N. of a mountain range running from east to west and separating the Deccan from Madhya-desa: -ketu, m. N. of a prince of Pulinda; -giri, m. the Vindhya range; -para, m. N. of a prince of the fairies; -vana, n. forest in the Vindhya; -vâsin, a. dwelling in the Vindhya: -î, f. (± devî) a form of the goddess Durgâ; -stha, a. resid ing in the Vindhya; -½akala, m. the Vindhya range; -½atavî, f. forest in the Vindhya; -½adri, m. the Vindhya range.

vipariṇāma	m. transforma tion, change; exchange; ripening; -nâmin, a. changing into (in. of abst. n.); -dhâna, n. exchange; -dhâvaka, a. running about every where; -bhramsa, m. failure; loss of (--°ree;); -lopá, m. loss; -vartana, a. (î) causing to turn round; n. turning (int.) round; -vritti, f. return; -hâra, m. exchange.

vidhātavya	fp. to be fixed (place); -procured; -performed or done; -enter tained (anxiety); -thought of; -employed or appointed; n. it should be so (tathâ) arranged or managed that (yathâ); -dhâtrí, m. dispenser, bestower; disposer, creator; ordainer of destiny, Brahman; personified fate: -trî, f. female author or creator; -dh&asharp; na, a. (î) regulating (rare); n. order, ordi nance, prescription, precept, rule, regulation; method, treatment, diet (in medicine); des tiny, fate (rare); arrangement, disposition, measure, for (--°ree;); means, expedient (rare); erection (of machines); creation, formation (rare); work (RV.); execution, performance; food of elephants (very rare); in. sg. & pl., or -tas, according to rule or precept; anena vidhânena, according to this rule, in this manner; desa-kâla-vidhânena, in the right place and at the right time; -dhânaka, n. rules to be observed; -dhâya-ka, a. prescrib ing, containing rules about (--°ree;); performing, executing; manifesting; m. founder, builder; -dhâyin, a. prescribing, regulating, contain ing rules regarding (--°ree;); performing, execut ing; causing, producing; m. builder, founder; -dhârana, n. stopping (a car); suppression or repression of (--°ree;); carrying; bearing, sup porting; -dhârin, a. checking, suppressing; -dhâvana,n. running about.

vid	a. (--°ree;) finding, winning, gain ing, procuring.

vījana	n. fanning; wafting; n. fan (rare).

vedāṅga	n. member of the Veda, subsidiary Vedic treatise (six are enumer ated: Sikshâ, Kalpa, Vyâkarana, Nirukta, Khandas, Gyotisha); -½âdi, m. beginning of the Veda; m. n. sacred syllable om; -½adhi gama, m. Vedic study; -½adhyayana, n. id.; -½adhyâya, a. studying or having studied the Veda; -½adhyâyin, a. id.; -½anadhyay ana, n. neglect of Vedic study; -½anuvak aná, n. repetition orrecitation of the Veda; Vedic doctrine.

vai	post positive pcl. emphasizing the preceding word: rare in the Samhitâs, very common in Br. (often indicating the beginning of a clause) and E.; in S. gnly. only in the combination yadi½u vai; in E. and Manu vai is very common at the end of a pâda as a mere expletive; with other pcls.: vâ u (RV.); ha vaí, ha sma vai, eva vai (Br.); api vai, tu vai (C.).

vaināśika	a. believing in com plete annihilation (vinâsa); m. Buddhist: -tantra, n., -samaya, m. doctrine or system of the Buddhists.

vyajana	n. fanning; fan, whisk (often du.): -kriyâ, f. action of fanning; -kâmara, n. tail of the Yak as a fan; î-kri, use as a fan; î-bhû, become a fan or whisk.

śatika	a. consisting of or amount ing to a hundred; hundredth: -vriddhi, a. winning a hundred at play; -ín, a. contain ing a hundred, hundredfold (RV.); possess ing a hundred (C.).

śataka	a. (ikâ) consisting of a hun dred; hundredth; n. a hundred, century (construed like sata); -kritvas, ad. a hun dred times; -koti, 1. f. pl. a thousand mil lions; 2. m. (having a hundred points), In dra's thunderbolt; (á)-kratu, a. having a hundredfold power or counsel (V.); con taining a hundred sacrifices (Br.); m. N. of Indra (C.).: --°ree; with kshitietc., lord of earth, prince, king; -khanda-maya, a. (î) consist ing of a hundred rays; -gu, a. possessing a hun dred cows; -guna, a. a hundredfold, increased a hundred times, a hundred times stronger, more valuable or efficacious etc.: -m, ad. ahun dred times more than (ab.); -gunita,pp. in creased a hundredfold, a hundred times longer; -gunî-bhâva, m. hundredfold increase; -gunî-bhû, be multiplied a hundredfold; -gvín, a. hundredfold (RV.); -ghn&isharp;, f. of -han; (á)-kakra, a. hundred-wheeled (RV.1); -tamá, a. (&asharp;, î) hundredth; -traya, n., î, f. three hundred; -dala, n. lotus flower; -dru (-kâ), -drû, f. N. of a river (=V. sutu drî), now Sutlej; -dvâra, a. having a hundred exits (hole); -dhara, m. N. of a king;-dh&asharp;, ad. a hundredfold; into a hundred parts or pieces: with bhû, be divided into a hundred parts consisting of (g.); (á)-dhâra, a. 1. having a hundred streams; 2. having a hundred points or edges; m.thunderbolt (C.); -dhriti, m. ep. of Brahman and of Indra; -dhauta, pp. cleansed a hundredfold, perfectly clean; 1. -pattra, n. (°ree;--) a hundred leaves; a hundred vehicles; 2. (á)-pattra, a. having a hundred feathers orleaves (RV.1); m. woodpecker; peacock; n. day-lotus: -yoni, m. ep. of Brahman, -½âyata½îkshana, a. having long lotus-like eyes; -patha, a. hav ing a hundred paths, very many-sided; m. T. of a Brâhmana: -brâhmana,n. id.; (á)-pad, a. (-î; strg. base -pâd) hundred-footed; m., -î, f. centipede; (á)-parvan, a. hundred-jointed; (á)-pavitra, a. purifying a hundredfold (RV.1); -pâdaka, m. centipede; -pâla, m. overseer of a hundred (vil lages, g.); -buddhi, a. hundred-witted; m. N. of a fish; -brâhmana-ghâta-ga, a. (arising from=) equal to the guilt produced by the murder of a hundred Brâhmans; -bha&ndot;gî bhû, be varied in a hundred ways; -makha, m. ep. of Indra; (á)-manyu, a. having a hundredfold wrath; m. ep. of Indra (C.): -kâpa, m. n. rainbow; -mayûkha, m. (hundred-rayed) moon; (á)-mâna, a. hundredfold (V.); weighing a hundred (Raktikâs, comm.; V.); m.gold object weighing a hun dred Mânas; m. n. weight (or gift) of a hundred Mânas in gold or silver; -mukha, a. having a hundred openings or entrances; possible in a hundred ways (fall); (á)-yâtu, m. N.; -yogana-yâyin,a. travelling a hundred Yoganas; -râtra, m. n. festival of a hundred days; -rudríya, a. belonging or sacred to a hundred Rudras; -½rikin, m. pl. designation of the composers of Mand. I. of the Rig-veda; -laksha, n. a hundred lacs; -varsha, a. a hundred years old; lasting a hundred years; -sarkara, n. sg. hundred globules: -tâ, f. condition of a --; -sás, ad. in a hundred ways, in hundreds (referring to a nm., ac., or in.); a hundred times;(á)-sâkha, a. (â, î) having a hundred branches (also fig.); (á)-sârada, a. containing, be stowing etc. a hundred autumns (V.); n. period or age of a hundred years (V.); -sri&ndot;ga, a. hundred-peaked; -samkhya, a.numbering a hundred; -sani, a. gaining a hundred; -sahasra, n. sg. pl. a hundred thousand (w. g., app., or --°ree;); -s&asharp;, a. winning a hundred (RV.); -sâhasra, a. (î) amount ing to a hundred thousand, hundred thou sandfold; -séya, n. hundredfold gain (RV.1); -svín, a. possessing a hundred (RV.1); -hán, a. (-ghnî) slaying a hundred (V.): -ghnî, f. kind of deadly weapon; -hali, a. possess ing a hundred large ploughs; (á)-hima, a.living a hundred winters (V.); -hradâ, f. lightning.

śālibhavana	n. rice-field; -bhû, f. id.; -vâhana, m. (rice-bearer), N. of a king, adversary of Vikramâditya, the date of his birth, 78 a. d., being the beginning of the Saka era; -samrakshikâ, f.female guardian of a rice-field; -hotra, m. poetical N. of the horse (receiving offerings of=fed on, rice); N. of a Rishi, regarded as the first authority on the horse; n. Sâlihotra's work on the horse: -gña, a. familiar with --.

śīghra	a. quick, speedy, swift: (á)m, ad. quickly, rapidly: -kârin, a. operating quickly; -kritya, fp. to be performed quickly; -ga, a. moving rapidly, running swiftly; m. N. of a hare (-tva, n. rapid motion);-gâmin, a. id.; -ketana, a. quickly coming to its senses (dog); -tâ, f., -tva, n. quickness, speediness; -pâtin, a. flying swiftly, pro ceeding quickly; -pâyin, a. sucking rapidly (leech); -yâna, n. swift motion; a. moving swiftly;-vâhin, a. driving swiftly.

śīla	n. habit, custom; disposition, character; behaviour; good conduct or habits, noble character, uprightness, morality: very common --°ree; a. habituated, disposed, prone, or addicted to, practising: -khandana, n. viola tion of morality or honour; -gupta, pp. crafty by character, cunning; -tata, a. having good conduct for its bank; -tas, ad. in regard to character, in conduct; -tâ, f. nobility, vir tuousness; -tyâga, m.abandonment of moral ity or integrity; -dhara, a. honourable; m. N.; -nidhi, m. treasure of her virtue.

sa	prn. that, sts. weakened to an article, the (only nm. m. sá, f. s&asharp;, and in RV. lc. sasmin; the s of the nm. m. is always dropped before consonants except once in RV. before p and once before t; sa sts. coalesces with a following vowel); often strengthened by other prns. of the third person, ayám, eshá, and bhavân; often combined with the first and second pers. sg. (± ahám or tvám), so &zip; hám, I as such; in Br. it is frequently combined with the relatives, yáh, yád, yádi, and yáthâ, at the beginning of a sentence, and owing to this common initial usage, is often retained with relatives either pleonastically or where the construction requires another gender or number; in the Sâ&ndot;khya sa is used to designate Purusha (like esha, ka, and ya).

saṃsādhana	n. preparation; per formance, accomplishment; -sâdhya, fp. to be accomplished; -obtained; conquerable; -sâra, m. transmigration, perpetual succes sion of births, cycle of existence, mundane existence (with all its sorrows): â samsârât, from the beginning of the world: -mandala, m. n. cycle of mundane existence, -mârga, m. path of life, -sâgara, m. ocean of worldly existence; -sârin, a. far-extending, compre hensive (intellect); transmigratory; m. living or human being; -siddhi, f. completion, ac complishment, fulfilment, success; perfection, in (--°ree;); -sûkana, n. manifestation, utterance (of a speech); -sríg, f. concussion (of battle; RV.1); -sriti, f.=-sâra, transmigration, etc.; -srishta, pp. √ srig; n. intimacy: -m kar, enter on intimate relations with (lc.); (sám) srishti, f. union (V.); combination of two figures of speech in one passage (C.); -srish- tin, a. again living in common after the partition of property.

saṃdhyārāga	m. twilight glow; -vandana, n. morning or evening prayers; -vâsa, m. N. of a village; -vidhi, m. morn ing or evening prayers; -sa&ndot;kha-dhvani, m. sound of a shell blown at the beginning of twilight; -samaya, m. period of twilight, evening-tide; -½upasthâna, n. worship of twilight.

saptanavata	a. ninety-seventh; -pattra, a. seven-leaved; yoked with seven horses; m. a tree (Alstonia scholaris; = -kkhada); (á)-pad, a. (-î) taking seven steps (with which an alliance or marriage is con cluded); concluded, confirmed; (á)-pada, a. taking seven steps (with which an alliance or marriage is concluded); consisting of seven Pâdas: î, f. seven steps: -karana, n. ratification of a marriage by the seven steps taken by the bride; -parna, m. (seven leaved) a tree (Alstonia scholaris = -kkhada); -palâsa, a. consisting of seven leaves; -bha&ndot; g&ibrevcirc;-naya, m. method of the seven formulas beginning with &open;perhaps&close; (syât) in the scep tical dialectics of the Jains; -bhûmika, a. id.

samābhāṣaṇa	n. conversa tion with (--°ree;); -mnâta, pp. √ mnâ; n. enu meration; -mnâtri, m. editor of the Veda; -mnâna, n. enumeration, list; -mnâya, m. id.; literary work; edition of the Veda; sacred scripture; -½ay-ín, a. (Br.) occurring at the same time; attainable by many at the same time (world: in a-); -yoga, m. union, connexion, conjunction, contact, with (in.± saha, --°ree;; ord. mg.); equipment, preparation: -vidheh, conjuncture of fate; ab. by con nexion with = by means of, owing to (--°ree;); -rambha, m. undertaking, enterprise; en terprising spirit (rare); beginning, com mencement (rare); -rambhana, n. grasping; unguent (=-lambhana).

samudrakallola	m. (ocean wave) N. of an elephant; -ga, a. going or flowing to the sea: â, f. river; -ga, a. pro duced or found in the sea; (á)-gyeshtha, a. having the ocean as their chief (waters, RV.1); -tîra, n. sea-shore; -datta, m. N.; -nemi, a. (f. id.) sea-girt (earth); f. earth; -patnî, f. spouse of the sea, river; -paryanta, a. sea bound (earth); -phena, m. (foam of the sea), bones of the cuttle-fish (so light that they float); -mathana, n. churning of the ocean; -yâtrâ, f., -yâna, n. sea-voyage; -yâyin, m. seafarer; -yoshit, f. (wife of the sea), river; -rasana, a. sea-girt (earth); -var man, m. N. of a prince; -vallabhâ, f. (mis tress of the sea), river; -vasana, a. sea-clad, sea-girt (earth); (á)-vâsas, a. (clad=) lurk ing in the (heavenly) waters (Agni, RV.2); -velâ, f. flood-tide; -vyavahârin, a. trading by sea; -sukti, f. sea-shell; -sûra, m. N. of a merchant; -sena, m. N.; -½anta, m. sea shore; a. reaching to the sea (earth); -½abhi sârinî, f. girl running after the god of the sea; -½ambarâ, f. (sea-clad), earth.

saraṇa	a. running; n. id.; locomo tion; following: -gîvin, a. living by running.

saṃpratipatti	f. obtainment, acquirement; correct conception, understand ing; agreement, with (--°ree;); admission, con fession; -pâdana, n. bestowal; -rodhaka, m. suppression (of robbers etc.); -shthâ, f. per manence, continuance (opp. beginning or end); -sava, m. admission (v. r. -prasava).

sarala	a. [running on: √ sri] straight; outstretched (hand); right, correct; upright, honest, sincere, artless; real (not seeming, rare); m. a kind of pine (Pinus longifolia): -tâ, f. simplicity; honesty; -tva, n. straight ness; -syanda, m. exudation of the Sarala, resin.

sarga	m. [√ srig] RV.; shot; jet, stream; gust (of wind); starting a courser, racing; herd let loose; V., C.: great host; C.: emission, discharge; creation (ord. mg.); creature (w. daiva, divine being, god); innate disposition, nature (rare); resolve, purpose, will (rare); section, canto (in an epic poem): lc. in the world; â sargât, from the beginning of the world; (sárga)-takta, pp. speeding like a missile (waters, RV.); -pratakta, pp. id. (steed; RV.1); -bandha, m. composition in cantos, epic poem.

sarvadeva	m. pl. all the gods; -devatâ-maya, a. (î) containing all deities; -devatyã, a. sacred to or representing all the gods; -deva-maya, a. (î) containing or representing all gods; -desîya, a. coming from every country; -daivatya, a. representing all gods; -dravya, n. pl. all things; -dhar ma-maya, a. containing --, -vid, a. knowing all laws; -nara, m. every one; -nâma-tva, n. pronominal nature; -nâman, n. (general name), pronoun; -nâma-sthâna, n. case termination added to the strong base; -nâsa, m. complete lack; loss of everything, com plete ruin: -m kri, lose everything; -niyan tri, m. all-subduer: -tva, n. abst. n.; -patta maya,a. made of fabrics of all kinds; -path îna, a. occupying the whole road; -prabhu, m. lord of all; -prâna, m.: in. with all one's might; -prâyaskittá, a. (&isharp;) atoning for every thing (Br.); n. (V.) expiation for everything; a certain libation in the Âhavanîya; -prâ yaskitti, f. complete atonement; -bhaksha, a. eating or devouring everything, omnivor ous; -bhakshin, a. id.; -bhâva, m. whole heart or soul; complete satisfaction:in., °ree;--, with one's whole soul (love etc.): pl. all ob jects; -bhûta, pp. being everywhere; n. pl. °ree;--, all beings: with na, no being: -krit, a. framing all beings, -maya, a. (î) containing or representing all beings, -½âtman, m. soul of all beings; -bhûmi, a. owning the whole earth; -bhogya, fp. advantageous to all; -ma&ndot;gala, a. universally auspicious: â, f. ep. of Durgâ (sts. also of Lakshmî); -manorama, a. delighting every one; -máya, a. (î) con taining everything; -mahat, a. greatest of all: -tara, cpv. greater than all the rest; -mâmsa½ada, a. eating every kind of flesh; -mâya, m. N. of a Râkshasa; -medhá, m. universal offering (a ten days' Soma sacrifice); -medhya-tva, n. universal purity; -yagña, m. every sacrifice: pl. all sacrifices; -yatna, m. every effort: in. with all one's might, to the best of one's ability; -yatna- vat, a. making every possible effort; -yoni, f. source of all; -yoshit, f. pl. all women; -ratna, m. N.: -maya, a. formed of all gems; entirely studded with jewels, -samanvita, pp. possessed of all jewels; -rasa, m. all kinds of juices or fluids (pl. or °ree;--); every taste: pl. all kinds of palatable food; -râtra, m. (?) the whole night: °ree;-or -m, ad. the whole night through; (sárva- AV., or sarvá- SB.)-rûpa, a. (V.) having all colours; having or assum ing all forms; of all kinds; -½ritu-ka, a. habitable in every season (house); -li&ndot;ga, a. having all genders, adjectival; -loká, m. V., C.: the whole world; C.: the whole people; every one: pl. or °ree;--, all beings; every one: -bhayamkara, a. appalling to the whole world, -mahesvara, m. ep. of Siva and of Krishna; -loha, a. entirely red; n. metals of all kinds (°ree;--): -maya, a. (î) entirely of iron; -vâram, ad. all at once, simultaneously; -vikrayin, a. selling all kinds of things; -vigñân-in, a. knowing everything: (-i)-tâ, f. omniscience; -víd, a. omniscient; -vinâsa, m. entire destruction; -vinda, m. a certain mythical being; -vishaya, a. relating to everything, general; (sárva)-vîra, a. all-heroic, consisting of, relating to, accompanied by or leading all men or heroes (V.); -ved asá, a. attended by a gift of all one's goods (sacrifice; V.); bestowing all his property on priests after a sacrifice (C., rare); n. en tire property (V.): -dakshina, a. attended with a gift of all one's property as a sacrificial fee (sacrifice; V., C.); -vedin, a. omniscient; knowing all the Vedas; -vainâsika, a. be lieving in complete annihilation; m. Bud dhist; -vyâpad, f. complete failure; -vyâp in, a. all-pervading; -vrata, n. universal vow; a. all-vowing; -sakti, f. entire strength: in. with all one's might; -sa&ndot;kâ, f. suspicion of every one.

sasni	a. [sá-s(a)n-i: √ san] (V.) pro curing, bestowing; gaining, winning.

sahasra	m. (rare), n. thousand (also used to express a large number or great wealth); sp. a thousand cows, -Panas: con strued with an app. (sg. or pl.), g., sg. or pl., --°ree; (rarely °ree;--); in an a. cpd. it is always --°ree;: -ka, 1. n. thousand: --°ree; a. (ikâ) having or amounting to a thousand; 2. thousand-headed; -kara, m. (thousand-rayed), sun: -pan-netra, a. having a thousand hands, feet, and eyes; -kalâ, f. N.; -kirana, m. (thousand-rayed), sun; -kritvas, ad. a thou sand times; (sahásra)-ketu, a. having a thousand forms (RV.1); -gu, a. possessing a thousand cows; thousand-rayed; m. sun; -guna, a. thousandfold: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -gunita, pp. multiplied a thousand times; -kakshu, a. thousand-eyed (AV.); -git, a. con quering or winning a thousand (RV.); (-hás ra)-nîtha, a. having a thousand expedients or shifts (V.); m. N. (C.); -tama, spv. (î) thou sandth; -taya, n. a thousand; -da, a. giving a thousand (cows); (sahásra)-dakshina, a. attended with a fee of a thousand (kine; V.); -dîdhiti, m. sun; (á)-dvâr, a. thousand-doored (RV.1); -dhâ, ad. a thousand-fold; in a thousand ways or parts; -dhî, a. thousand-witted; m. N. of a fish; -nayana, a. thousand-eyed; m. ep. of Indra; -netra, a., m. id.; -pati, m. chief of a thousand (vil lages); -pattra, n. (having a thousand petals), lotus; -pûrana, a. thousandth; receiving a thousand; -poshá, m. thousandfold welfare (V.); a. thriving a thousandfold (S.); -buddhi, a. thousand-witted; m. N. of a fish; -bhakta, n. a certain festival at which thousands are fed; -bhânu, a. thousand-rayed; -bhrishti, a. thousand-pointed (V.); -ma&ndot;gala, N. of a locality; -mukha, a. having a thousand exits; -rasmi, a. thousand-rayed; m. sun; -li&ndot;gî, f. a thousand Li&ndot;gas; -lokana,a. thousand-eyed; m. ep. of Indra; -vartman, a. thousand-pathed; -vâka, a. containing a thousand verses or words; -satá-dakshina, a. attended with a fee of a hundred thousand (cows); -sás, ad. by thousands (referring to a nm., ac., in.); -sîrsha, a. thousand-headed: â, f. a certain verse (according to comm. the hymn RV. X, 90); (hásra)-sri&ndot;ga, a. thou sand-horned (RV.); -saní, a. gaining a thou sand (V.); -sâ, a. id.; -sâvá, m.thousand-fold Soma-pressing.

sahasrin	a. thousandfold (V.); winning a thousand (V.); having a thousand (also --°ree;; C.); paying a thousand Panas (as a fine, C.).

sānasi	(RV.) a. [√ san] winning or laden with spoils, victorious (steed, car); bringing blessings.

sāvitra	a. (&isharp;) belonging or sacred to, derived from, Savitri; m. son or descend ant of Savitri: &isharp;, f. (sc. rik) Savitri verse, sp. that beginning &open;Tát savitúr várenyam&close; (RV.III, 62, 10: also called Gâyatrî); ini tiation into caste with the Sâvitrî verse, inves titure of the twice-born castes (C.); (daugh ter of Savitri) N. of Sûryâ, of Brahman's wife, of a daughter of Asvapati (wife of Sat yavat), and of various other women; N. of a river: (î)-patita, pp. excluded from initia tion with the Sâvitrî; -paribhrashta, pp. id.

sāti	f. (RV.) acquisition, gain, pro perty; winning of spoil.

sukha	a. having a good axle-hole, running easily (only of cars in RV.); com fortable, pleasant, mild (rare in V., very common in C.); C.: soothing, agreeable to (the ear etc., --°ree;), by reason of (--°ree;); easy to (lc. of vbl. n.); m. (sc. danda) kind of mili tary array (C.); n. ease, comfort, pleasure, enjoyment, happiness, joy (C.; rare in V.): (á)-m, in., °ree;--, happily, comfortably, agree ably, easily, without trouble (C.; rare in V.); -m, easy to (inf.); -m -na punah, more easily -than; kadalî-sukham, as easily as a Kadalî; mahatâ sukhena, with great enjoyment: -kara, a. (î) giving pleasure; easy to be done or performed, by (g.); -kârin, -krit, a. giv ing pleasure; -kârya, a. having pleasure as an object; -gamya, fp. easy to traverse; -grâhya, fp. easy to seize or catch; easy to comprehend; -ghâtya, fp. easy to kill; -kkhedya, fp. easy to destroy; -gâta,n. any thing pleasant; -tara, cpv. easier: -m, ad. more easily; -tva, n. pleasantness, enjoyable ness; -da, a. giving pleasure; -duhkha, n. du. pleasure and pain: -maya, a. (î) con sisting of or feeling joy or sorrow; -dhana,m. N. of a merchant; -para, a. intent on enjoyment, pleasure-seeking; -peya, fp. to be drunk easily; -prasna, m. enquiry as to welfare; -prasupta, pp. sleeping placidly; -prâpya, fp. easy to win or obtain (girl); -bandhana,a. (fettered by=) addicted to worldly pleasure; -bodha-rûpa, a. easily un derstood; -bhâgin, -bhâg, a. participating in fortune; lucky, happy; -bhedya, fp. easily broken; easy to separate, prone to faithless ness; -bhogya,fp. easy to enjoy or dispose of (wealth); -maya, a. (î) full of enjoyment; -m-edhas, a. prospering well.

su	ad. [perh. for vasu= Gk. eu)=: cp. u shu, û shu, and u loka] good, well, indeed, right, very, thoroughly (never used in dependently at the beginning of a verse; rarely as an independent ad. in C.; very common °ree; with a. or n., in C. also with gd.).

suvitta	a. having abundant wealth, rich; -vidagdha, pp. very cunning; -vidátra, a. noticing kindly, benevolent, propitious (V.); n. benevolence, favour (V.); -vidatr-íya, a. id. (RV.1); (sú)-vidita, pp.well-known; -vidyâ, f. good knowledge; -vidha, a. of a good kind; -vidhâna, n. good order or arrangement: -tas, ad. duly; -vidhi, m. suitable manner: in. suitably; -vinîta, pp. well-trained (horses); well-bred; -vipula, a.very great, abundant, etc.; (sú)-vipra, a. very devout (RV.1); -vimala, a. very clear or pure; -virûdha, pp. (√ ruh) fully developed; -visada, a. very distinct or intelligible; -visâla, a. very ex tensive; m. N. of an Asura;-visuddha, pp. perfectly pure; -visvasta, pp. full of confi dence, quite unconcerned; -vistara, m. great extent; great diffuseness: ab. very fully, in great detail: -m yâ, be filled (treasury); a. very extensive or large; very great, intense, or intimate etc.: -m, ad. in great detail, at full length; very vehemently; -vistîrna, pp. very extensive or great: -m, ad. in a very detailed manner; -vismaya, a. greatly sur prised or astonished; -vismita, pp. id.; -vi hita, pp. well carried out or fulfilled; well provided, with (in.); -vihvala, a. greatly exhausted, perturbed or distressed; -vîthî patha, m. a certain entrance to a palace; -v&isharp;ra, V. a. very mighty, heroic; having, abounding, or consisting in, retainers or heroes; m. hero (V.); -v&isharp;rya, n. manly vigour, heroism (V., very rare in E.): pl. heroic deeds; abundance of brave men, host of heroes (V.); a. (C.) very efficacious (herb); -v-riktí, f. [for su½rikti: √ rik] excellent praise, hymn (RV.); a. praising excellently (RV.); praiseworthy (V.); -vriksha, m. fine tree; -vrigána, a. dwelling in fair regions (RV.1); -vrít, V. a. (revolving=) running well (car); -vritta, pp. well-rounded; well conducted, virtuous (esp. of women; ord. mg.); composed in a fine metre; n. good conduct: â, f. N.: (a)-tâ, f. round shape and good conduct; -vriddha, pp. very old (family); -vrídh, a. glad, joyful (RV.); -vega, a. run ning, moving, or flying very fast; -vena, m. N.; -véda, a. easy to find or obtain (V.); -vesha, a. beautifully dressed or adorned: -vat, a. id.; -vyakta, pp. very clear or bright; quite distinct: -m, ad. quite clearly, manifestly; -vyasta, pp. thoroughly dis persed (army); -vyâhrita, (pp.) n. fine say ing; -vratá, a. ruling well (V.); fulfilling one's duties well, very virtuous (C.: often vc.); quiet, gentle (of animals; C., rare); m. N.; -samsa, a. (RV.) blessing bountifully (god); saying good things, pronouncing bless ings (men); -sákti, f. easy possibility, easy matter (RV.1); -sám&ibrevcirc;, in. ad. carefully, dili gently (V.);-saraná, a. granting secure refuge (RV.); -sárman, a. id. (V.); very pleasant (C.); m. frequent N.; -sasta, pp. well-recited (Br.); -sastí, f. good hymn of praise (V.); a. praiseworthy (RV.); -sânta, pp. very calm (water);-sâsita, pp. well controlled, well-disciplined (wife); -sikha, a. having a bright flame (lamp); -sithilî-kri, greatly relax; -siprá (sts. -sípra), a. having beautiful cheeks (RV.); (sú)-si-sv-i, a. √ sû: cp. sisu] growing well (in the womb; RV.1); (sú)-sishti, f. excellent aid (RV.1); -sishya, m. good pupil; -sîghrá, °ree;-or -m, ad. very swiftly; -sîta, a. quite cool or cold; -sîtala, a. id.; -s&isharp;ma, a. [√ sî] pleasant to recline on (Br., rare); -sîma-kâma, a. [hav ing deep-seated love] deeply in love; -sîla, n. good disposition; a. having a good dispo sition, good-tempered; m. N.: -guna-vat, a. having good nature and other good quali ties, -tâ, f. good nature, -vat, a. good natured; -subha, a. very fine (arm); very auspicious (day); very noble (deed); -séva, a. very kindly, loving, tender, or dear (V.); very prosperous (path; Br.); -sóka, a. shin ing brightly (RV.1);-sobhana, a. very hand some or beautiful; most excellent; -skandrá, a. very brilliant (V.); -srávas, a. very famous (V., P.); hearing well or gladly (V.); m. N.; N. of a Nâga; -srânta, pp. greatly exhausted; -sr&isharp;, a.splendid; rich; (sú)-sruta, pp. very famous (RV.1); C.: correctly heard; gladly heard; m. N. of a celebrated medical writer; N. of a son of Padmodbhava; -sronî, a. f. hav ing beautiful hips; -slakshna, a. very smooth, soft,or delicate; -slishta, pp. well-joined or united; well-ratified, very close (alliance); very convincing (argument): -guna, a. hav ing a well-fastened band: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -slesha, a. attended with a close embrace, with a euphonious coalescence of words, or with the rhetorical figure termed slesha; (sú-)-sloka, a. sounding, speaking etc. well (V., P.); famous (P.); -slok-ya, n. fame or well-sounding speech.

sūtra	n. [√ sîv] V., C.: thread, string, cord (ord. mg.); C.: sacred cord (worn over the left shoulder by the three upper castes); measuring line; fibre; line; sketch, plan; (thread running through and holding toge ther=) concise rule or aphorism; manual consisting of aphoristic rules: -ka, n. thread, cord; -kâra, m. author of a Sûtra work or manual; -tantu, m. thread; -daridra, a. (poor in threads=) threadbare: -tâ, f. thread bare condition; -dhâra, m. [holder of the measuring line] carpenter, builder, architect; wire-puller=] stage-manager; --°ree; m., î, f. leading spirit in; -pâta, m. drop of the measuring line: -m kri or kar, measure, compare; -pitaka, m. n. (basket=) collec tion of the Buddhistic Sûtras; -prota, pp. attached to (=worked by) strings (puppet); -bhrit, m. stage-manager.

sṛt	a. (--°ree;) running fast.

svarjit	a. winning light or heaven (V.); m. kind of sacrifice (C.).

svarvat	a. bright, celestial (V.); -vâhinî, f. celestial river, Ganges; -víd, a. winning or possessing light or heaven, celes tial (V.); -vesyâ, f. celestial courtesan, Ap saras; -vaidya, m. du. the two celestial physicians, Asvins; -sh&asharp;, RV. a. [√ sâ= √ san]=-víd; (svãr)-shâti, f. winning of light or heaven (RV.).

haviṣkṛt	a. preparing the oblation (V.); (ísh)-kriti, f. preparation of the oblation (RV.); (ísh)-pa&ndot;kti, f. aggregate of five oblations (Br.); (ish)-pa&ndot;kti, a. consisting of five oblations (V.); (ísh)-pati, m. lord of the oblation; -p&asharp;, a. drinking the oblation (RV.1); -pânt-îya, a. beginning with havísh p&asharp;ntam (RV. X, 88, 1); (ísh) mat, V. a. having the oblation prepared, offering an oblation; attended with or con taining oblations; m. N. of various Rishis (V., C.); pl. N. of certain Manes, sons of A&ndot;giras (C.); -yã, a. suitable or prepared for the oblation (esp. of rice and other kinds of grain); m. n.sacrificial offering of grain.

himāṃśu	m. moon: -mâlin, m. id.; -½âgama, m. beginning of (the cold=) winter; -½akala, m. snow-mountain, Himâ laya: -½indra, m. chief of snow-mountains, Himâlaya; -½atyaya, m. end of the cold sea son; -½adri, m. Himâlaya.

Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance

191 results0 results27 results


agnir	vanaspatīnām adhipatiḥ (AVP. adhyakṣaḥ) sa māvatu (AVP. has sa māvatu at the beginning of the following formula) # AVś.5.24.2; AVP.15.7.8. P: agnir vanaspatīnām Vait.8.13.

adhvaryantā	yad unninītho apām # RV.1.181.1b.

āsann	eṣām apsuvāho mayobhūn # SV.1.341c. See āsanniṣūn.

idam	ahaṃ tān valagān ud vapāmi yān nas sanābhir yān asanābhir (also yān nas svo yān araṇo) nicakhāna # KS.2.11. Cf. items beginning with idam ahaṃ taṃ valagam.

idam	ahaṃ tān valagān ud vapāmi yān me bhrātṛvyo yān abhrātṛvyo nicakhāna ye aṃsadaghne # MS.1.2.10: 20.6. Cf. items beginning with idam ahaṃ taṃ valagam.

idam	ahaṃ tān valagān ud vapāmi yān me sajanyo yān asajanyo (KS. vapāmi yān nas samāno yān asamāno) nicakhāna ye śīrṣadaghne (KS. omits ye śīrṣadaghne) # MS.1.2.10: 20.7; KS.25.9. Cf. items beginning with idam ahaṃ taṃ valagam.

indraḥ	karmaṇām adhyakṣaḥ (with sa māvatu at the beginning of the following formula) # AVP.15.7.9. Cf. indro divo 'dhipatiḥ.

indrāgacha	hariva āgacha (JB. also indrāgacha haribhyām āyāhi) medhātither meṣa vṛṣaṇaśvasya mene gaurāvaskandinn ahalyāyai jāra kauśika brāhmaṇa gautama bruvāṇa (JB. also kauśika brāhmaṇa kauśika bruvāṇa) # JB.2.79--80; śB.3.3.4.18; TA.1.12.3; Lś.1.3.1. P: indrāgacha ṣB.1.1.10,11 (followed by the rest, 1.1.12--23). Designated as subrahmaṇyā AB.6.3.1; KB.27.6; śB.4.6.9.25; TB.3.8.1.2; 12.9.6; Aś.8.13.28; 12.4.19; Vait.15.4; 34.4; Apś.20.1.7; 21.12.10; 22.6.6; MDh.9.12.6; see also the formulas beginning subrahmaṇya upa. Cf. agna āgacha.

ut	tiṣṭha prehi pra drava # AVś.18.3.8a; TA.6.4.2a. Ps: ut tiṣṭha prehi Kauś.80.35; ut tiṣṭha Kauś.8.31. The stanzas beginning here are designated as utthāpanyaḥ (sc. ṛcaḥ) Vait.37.23; Kauś.82.31; 83.20,23; 84.13. Cf. under ud īrṣva nāry.

unnīyamānāyānubrūhi	# Apś.12.26.4; Mś.2.4.1.51. P: unnīyamānāya śś.7.7.1; Kś.9.12.12.

unnīyamānebhyo	'nubrūhi # Apś.12.21.13; 13.4.9; Mś.2.4.1.3; 2.4.4.23; 2.5.1.29. P: unnīyamānebhyaḥ śś.7.4.1.

ūrjasvāṃś	ca payasvāṃś ca # AVś.19.46.6d. AVP.4.23.6 divides differently, putting ūrjasvāṃś ca at the end of pāda c, and payasvāṃś ca at the beginning of pāda d. See śaṃbhūś ca, and payasvāṃś cāstṛtas.

aindrāgna	unnītaḥ # KS.34.16.

candramā	nakṣatrāṇām adhipatiḥ (AVP. adhyakṣaḥ) sa māvatu (AVP. has sa māvatu at the beginning of the following formula) # AVś.5.24.10; AVP.15.7.5. See prec.

taṃ	gūrtayo nemanniṣaḥ parīṇasaḥ # RV.1.56.2a.

tvaṣṭā	rūpāṇām adhyakṣaḥ (with sa māvatu at the beginning of the following formula) # AVP.15.8.2. Cf. under tvaṣṭaḥ samidhāṃ.

dadhnā	yad īm unnītā yaśasā gavām # RV.9.81.1c.

dvau	yad-yad vadataḥ sanniṣadya # AVP.5.32.4c. Cf. next but one.

dhruvoḥ	# Mś.4.6.4 (a magic formula or its beginning).

pitaraḥ	pare 'varas tatas tatāmahas (with te māvantu at the beginning of the following formula) # AVP.15.9.4. Cf. next two, and AVś.5.24.15--17.

puruṣasūkta	pauruṣasūkta, and the like # GDh.19.12; ViDh.56.15,26; 64.23,38; 65.15; 86.12; VāDh.22.9; 26.7; 28.13; BDh.3.10.10; MDh.11.252; LHDh.4.55; VHDh.2.13; 4.30,85,127; 5.136,195,211,216,378,404,406,555,566; 7.69,103,258; 8.31; LAtDh.2.6; VAtDh.2.6; SaṃvartaDh.224; BṛhPDh.9.319; Rvidh.3.26.3; 29.5; 35.1. Designation of the hymn beginning sahasraśīrṣā, q.v.

bhindhi	śiraḥ kṛmer jāyāṃ nyasya (the edition puts nyasya at the beginning of pāda d) # AVP.1.87.1c.

mahānāmnyaḥ	(sc. ṛcaḥ) # AVś.11.7.6; VS.23.35; KS.10.10; TS.5.2.11.1; AB.4.4.1; 5.7.1; 6.24.7; KB.23.2; śB.13.5.1.10; PB.13.4.1; ṣB.3.11; TA.1.1.2; 21.1; Aś.7.12.10; 8.2.23; 14.2; śś.10.6.10; 12.6.9; 16.8.1,2; Lś.3.5.13; 7.5.2,5; 10.2.1,2; Apś.20.13.1; śG.2.12.13; GG.3.2.6,28; GDh.19.12; BDh.3.10.10; Rvidh.4.25.1; Svidh.1.4.6,12; 2.7.1. Designation of the mantras beginning with vidā maghavan, q.v. See the prec. three, and next.

mā	yajamānaṃ tamo vidat (Kś. vidan martvijaḥ: the additional words figure as the beginning of the second pāda in the other texts) # TB.3.7.8.3a; Kś.25.12.5a; Apś.14.30.3a. See memaṃ yajñaṃ tamo.

yamaḥ	pitṝṇām adhipatiḥ (AVP. adhyakṣaḥ) sa māvatu (AVP. has sa māvatu at the beginning of the following formula) # AVś.5.24.14; AVP.15.9.3.

yaṃ	bahava upajīvanti yo janānām asad vaśī taṃ videya prajāṃ videya # Aś.1.11.1. Two metrical pādas at the beginning.

yas	te bharād anniyate cid annam # RV.4.2.7a.

Dictionary of Sanskrit Search

"nni" has 117 results

jinnirdeśa	mention as जित्: confer, compare जिन्निर्देशः कर्तव्यः M.Bh. on I.1.68 Vart. 7.See जित्.

a(1)	the first letter of the alphabet in Sanskrit and its derived languages, representing the sound a (अ): (2) the vowel a (अ) representing in grammatical treatises, except when Prescribed as an affix or an augment or a substitute,all its eighteen varieties caused by accentuation or nasalisation or lengthening: (3) personal ending a (अ) of the perfeminine. second.pluraland first and third person.singular.; (4) kṛt affix c (अ) prescribed especially after the denominative and secondary roots in the sense of the verbal activity e. g. बुभुक्षा, चिन्ता, ईक्षा, चर्चा et cetera, and othersconfer, compare अ प्रत्ययात् et cetera, and others (P.III 3.102-106); (5) sign of the aorist mentioned as añ (अङ्) or cañ (चङ्) by Pāṇini in P. III i.48 to 59 exempli gratia, for example अगमत्, अचीकरत्; (6) conjugational sign mentioned as śap (शप्) or śa (श) by Pāṇini in P. III.1.68, 77. exempli gratia, for example भवति, तुदति et cetera, and others; (7) augment am (अम्) as prescribed by P. VI.1.58; exempli gratia, for example द्रष्टा, द्रक्ष्यति; (8) augment aṭ (अट्) prefixed to a root in the imperfeminine. and aorist tenses and in the conditional mood e. g. अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् confer, compare P. VI.4.71; (8) kṛt affix a (अ) prescribed as अङ्, अच्, अञ्, अण्, अन्, अप्, क, ख, घ, ञ, ड् , ण, et cetera, and others in the third Adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.; (9) taddhita affix. affix a (अ) mentioned by Pāṇini as अच्, अञ् अण्, अ et cetera, and others in the fourth and the fifth chapters of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini; (10) the samāsānta affix a (अ), as also stated in the form of the samāsānta affixes (डच् , अच्, टच्, ष्, अष् and अञ्) by Pāṇini in V.4.73 to 121;(11) substitute a (अश्) accented grave for इदम before case-affixes beginning with the inst. instrumental case. case: (12) remnant (अ) of the negative particle नञ् after the elision of the consonant n (न्) by नलोपो नञः P. vi.3.73.

akṣarasamāmnāya	alphabet: traditional enumeration of phonetically independent letters generally beginning with the vowel a (अ). Although the number of letters and the order in which they are stated differ in different treatises, still, qualitatively they are much the same. The Śivasūtras, on which Pāṇini's grammar is based, enumerate 9 vowels, 4 semi-vowels, twenty five class-consonants and 4 \| sibilants. The nine vowels are five simple vowels or monothongs (समानाक्षर) as they are called in ancient treatises, and the four diphthongs, (सन्ध्यक्षर ). The four semi-vowels y, v, r, l, ( य् व् र् ल् ) or antasthāvarṇa, the twenty five class-consonants or mutes called sparśa, and the four ūṣman letters ś, ṣ, s and h ( श् ष् स् ह् ) are the same in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works although in the Prātiśākhya works the semi-vowels are mentioned after the class consonants.The difference in numbers, as noticed, for example in the maximum number which reaches 65 in the VājasaneyiPrātiśākhya, is due to the separate mention of the long and protracted vowels as also to the inclusion of the Ayogavāha letters, and their number. The Ayogavāha letters are anusvāra, visarjanīya,jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya, nāsikya, four yamas and svarabhaktī. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya does not mention l (लृ), but adding long ā (अा) i (ई) ，ū (ऊ) and ṛ (ऋ) to the short vowels, mentions 12 vowels, and mentioning 3 Ayogavāhas (< क्, = प् and अं) lays down 48 letters. The Ṛk Tantra Prātiśākhya adds the vowel l (लृ) (short as also long) and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semivowels, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz. 4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya, jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya and two kinds of anusvāra, and thus brings the total number to 57. The Ṛk Tantra makes a separate enumeration by putting diphthongs first, long vowles afterwards and short vowels still afterwards, and puts semi-vowels first before mutes, for purposes of framing brief terms or pratyāhāras. This enumeration is called varṇopadeśa in contrast with the other one which is called varṇoddeśa. The Taittirīya prātiśākhya adds protracted vowels and lays down 60 letters : The Ṣikṣā of Pāṇini lays down 63 or 64 letters, while the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya gives 65 letters. confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 1-25. The alphabet of the modern Indian Languages is based on the Varṇasamāmnāya given in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya. The Prātiśākhyas call this enumeration by the name Varṇa-samāmnāya. The Ṛk tantra uses the terms Akṣara samāmnāya and Brahmarāśi which are picked up later on by Patañjali.confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्समाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः । सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाप्तिश्चास्य ज्ञाने भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लोके महीयेते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika.2-end.

aṭ(1)	token term standing for vowels and semi-vowels excepting l ( ल्) specially mentioned as not interfering with the substitution of ṇ ( ण् ) for n ( न् ) exempli gratia, for example गिरिणा, आर्येण, खर्वेण et cetera, and others Sec P.VIII.4.2; (2) augment a (अट्) with an acute accent, which is prefixed to verbal forms in the imperfect and the aorist tenses and the conditional mood. exempli gratia, for example अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् Sec P.IV.4.71; (3) augment a ( अट् ) prescribed in the case of the roots रुद्, स्वप् et cetera, and others before a Sārvadhātuka affix beginning with any consonant except y ( य्), exempli gratia, for example अरोदत्, अस्वपत्, अजक्षत्, आदत् et cetera, and others; see P.VII.3, 99, 100;(4) augment a ( अट् ) prefixed sometimes in Vedic Literature to affixes of the Vedic subjunctive (लेट्) exempli gratia, for example तारिवत्, मन्दिवत् et cetera, and others see P.III.4.94.

anaḍ(1)	substitute अन् as Samāsānta at the end of a Bahuvrīhi compound in the feminine for the last letter of the word ऊधस् and for that of धनुस् in all genders exempli gratia, for example कुण्डोघ्नी (by applying ई to कुण्डोधन्), शार्ङ्गधन्वा, अधिज्यधन्वा; confer, compare P V.4.131, 132; (2) substitute अन् for the last letter of the words अस्थि, दधि et cetera, and others before the affixes of the instrumental and the following cases beginning with a vowel e. g. अस्थ्ना, दध्ना, अक्ष्णा et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VII. 1.75; (3) substitute अन् for the last letter of the word सखि, of words ending in ऋ,as also of उशनस् and others before the nominative singular. affix सु. e. g. सखा, कर्ता, उशना confer, compare P. VII.1.93, 94.

avivakṣā	non-intention: connivance; confer, compare सतोऽप्यविवक्षा भवति । अलोभिका एडका । अनुदरा कन्या । also confer, compare प्रसिद्धेरविवक्षातः कर्मणोऽकर्मिका क्रिया.

avṛddha	literallynot beginning with the vowel अा, ऐ or औ; a word which has got no अा or ऐ， or औ as its first vowel, as for example ग्लुचुक, अहिचुम्बक et cetera, and others इरावती, नर्मदा यमुना etc; confer, compare प्राचामवृद्धात् फिन् बहुलम् P.IV.1.160. also अवृद्धाभ्यो नदीमानुषीभ्यस्तन्नामिकाभ्यः P.IV. 1.113.

aś(1)	Pratyāhāra or a brief term standing for all vowels, semivowels, and the fifth, fourth and third of the class-consonants; all letters excepting the surds and sibilants; (2) substitute अ for the word इदम् before affixes of cases beginning with the instrumental, and for एतद् before the taddhita affix. affixes त्र and तस्; see P.II.4.32 and 33; (3) substitute अ for the genitive case singular. case-affix ङस् after the words युष्मद् and अस्मद्; see P.VII.1.27.

asiddha	invalid; of suspended validity for the time being: not functioning for the time being. The term is frequently used in Pāṇini's system of grammar in connection with rules or operations which are prevented, or held in suspense, in connection with their application in the process of the formation of a word. The term (असिद्ध) is also used in connection with rules that have applied or operations that have taken place, which are, in certain cases, made invalid or invisible as far as their effect is concerned and other rules are applied or other operations are allowed to take place, which ordinarily have been prevented by those rules which are made invalid had they not been invalidatedition Pāṇini has laid down this invalidity on three different occasions (1) invalidity by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. which makes a rule or operation in the second, third and fourth quarters of the eighth chapter of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. invalid when any preceding rule is to be applied, (2) invalidity by the rule असिद्धवदत्राभात् which enjoins mutual invalidity in the case of operations prescribed in the Ābhīya section beginning with the rule असिद्धवत्राभात् (VI. 4.22.) and going on upto the end of the Pāda (VI.4.175), (3) invalidity of the single substitute for two letters, that has already taken place, when ष् is to be substituted for स्, or the letter त् is to be prefixed, confer, compare षत्वतुकोरसिद्धः (VI. 1.86). Although Pāṇini laid down the general rule that a subsequent rule or operation, in case of conflict, supersedes the preceding rule, in many cases it became necessary for him to set, that rule aside, which he did by means of the stratagem of invalidity given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. Subsequent grammarians found out a number of additional cases where it became necessary to supersede the subseguent rule which they did by laying down a dictum of invalidity similar to that of Pāṇini. The author of the Vārttikas, hence, laid down the doctrine that rules which are nitya or antaraṅga or apavāda, are stronger than, and hence supersede, the anitya, bahiraṅga and utsarga rules respectively. Later gram marians have laid down in general, the invalidity of the bahiraṅga rule when the antaraṅga rule occurs along with it or subsequent to it. For details see Vol. 7 of Vvyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya(D. E. Society's edition) pages 217-220. See also Pari. Śek. Pari. 50.

ākusmīya	a group of 43 roots of the चुरादि class of roots beginning with the root चित् and ending with कुस्म् which are Ātmanepadin only.

aāgantuka	literally adventitious, an additional wording generally at the end of roots to show distinctly their form exempli gratia, for example वदि, एधि, सर्ति et cetera, and others; confer, compare इन्धिभवतिभ्यां च P I.2.6: confer, compare also भावलक्षणे स्थेण्कृञ्वदिचरिहृतभिजनिभ्यस्तोमुन्, P.III.4.16, सृपिवृदो. कसुन् P. III.4.17 and a number of other sūtras where इ or तिं is added to the root confer, compare इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे, वर्णात्कारः, रादिफः P.III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.3. 4, where such appendages to be added to the roots or letters are given. The word अागन्तु is an old word used in the Nirukta, but the term आगन्तुक appears to be used for the first time for such forms by Haradatta; confer, compare ह्वरोरिति ह्वृ कौटिल्ये, आगन्तुकेकारे गुणेन निर्देशः Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on VII.2.31. In the traditional oral explanations the second part of a reduplicated word is termed अागन्तुक which is placed second i. e. after the original by virtue of the convention आगन्तूनामन्ते निवेशः, although in fact, it is said to possess the sense of the root in contrast with the first which is called abhyāsa.A nice distinction can, however be drawn between the four kinds of adventitious wordings found in grammar viz.आगन्तु, इत्, अभ्यास and आगम which can be briefly stated as follows; The former two do not form a regular part of the word and are not found in the actual use of the word; besides, they do not possess any sense, while the latter two are found in actual use and they are possessed of sense. Again the agantu word is simply used for facility of understanding exactly and correctly the previous word which is really wanted; the इत् wording, besides serving this purpose, is of use in causing some grammatical operations. अभ्यास, is the first part of the wording which is wholly repeated and it possesses no sense by itself, while, āgama which is added to the word either at the beginning or at the end or inserted in the middle, forms a part of the word and possesses the sense of the word.

āgarvīya	a class of roots forming a subdivision of the Curādigaṇa or the tenth conjugation beginning with पद् and ending with गर्व् which are only ātmanepadin; exempli gratia, for example पदयते, मृगयते, अर्थयते, गर्वयते.

aāṭ(1)	augment अा prefixed to roots beginning with a vowel in the imperfect, aorist and conditional, which is always accented (उदात्त); confer, compare P.VI.4.72; (2) augment अा prefixed to the imperative first person terminations, exempli gratia, for example करवाणि, करवै et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.III.4.92: (3) augment अा to be prefixed to caseaffixes which are डित् after nouns called nadī: exempli gratia, for example कुमार्यं; cf P.VII. 3.112.

ādyudātta	a word beginning with an acute-accent id est, that is which has got the first vowel accented acute: words in the vocative case and words formed with an affix marked with a mute ञ् or न् are ādyudātta; confer, compareP. VI.1.197, 198: for illustrations in detail see P.VI.1.189-216.

ādhṛṣīya	a sub-division of roots belonging to the चुरादिगण or tenth conjugation beginning with युज् and ending with धृष् which take the Vikaraṇa णिच् optionally id est, that is which are also conjugated like roots of the first conjugation; exempli gratia, for example यीजयति,योजयते, योजति;साहयति-ते, सहति.

ānupūrvyasaṃhitā	the saṁhitā-pāṭha or recital of the running Vedic text in accordance with the constituent words;exempli gratia, for example शुनः शेपं चित् निदितम् or नरा शंसं वा पूषणम्, as opposed to the अनानुपूर्व्यसंहिता which is actually found in the traditional recital exempli gratia, for example शुनश्चिच्छेपं निदितम् Ṛk saṁh. V 2.7 or नरा वा शंसं पूषणम् Ṛk saṁh. X.64.3. See R. Prāt. II 43.

āp(1)	common term for the feminine. endings टाप्, डाप् and चाप् given by Pāṇini in Adhy. IV, Pāda 1; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II.4.82. P.IV.1.1.; P.VI.1.68; confer, compare also P.VI.3.63. P.VII.3.44; P.VII.3.106, 116; P.VII.4.15. et cetera, and others; (2) a brief term for case-affixes beginning with the inst. sing and ending with the locative case plural confer, compare अनाप्यकः P. VII.2.112.

ārdhadhātukādhikāra	the topic or section in Pāṇini's grammar where operations, caused by the presence of an ārdhadhātuka affix ahead, are enumerated, beginning with the rule आर्धधातुके VI.4.46 and ending with न ल्यपि VI.4.69, Such operations are summed up in the stanza अतो लोपो चलोपश्च णिलोपश्च प्रयोजनम् । आल्लोप इत्वमेत्वं च चिण्वद्भावश्च सीयुटि; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). as also Kāś, on VI.4.46.

āsvadīya	a sub-division of the चुरादि (Xth conjugation) roots, beginning with the root ग्रस् and ending with the root स्वद्, which take the Vikaraṇa णिच् id est, that is which are conjugated like roots of the tenth conjugation, only if they are transitive in sense.

it(1)	a letter or a group of letters attached to a word which is not seen in actual use in the spoken language: cf अप्रयोगी इत्, Śāk. I.1.5, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.1.1.37. The इत् letters are applied to a word before it, or after it, and they have got each of them a purpose in grammar viz. causing or preventing certain grammatical operations in the formation of the complete word. Pāṇini has not given any definition of the word इत् , but he has mentioned when and where the vowels and consonants attached to words are to be understood as इत्; (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् , हलन्त्यम् । et cetera, and others P. I.3.2 to 8) and stated that these letters are to be dropped in actual use, confer, compareP.I.3.9. It appears that grammarians before Pāṇini had also employed such इत् letters, as is clear from some passages in the Mahābhāṣya as also from their use in other systems of grammar as also in the Uṇādi list of affixes, for purposes similar to those found served in Pāṇini 's grammar. Almost all vowels and consonants are used as इत् for different purposes and the इत् letters are applied to roots in the Dhātupāṭha, nouns in the Gaṇapāṭha, as also to affixes, augments and substitutes prescribed in grammar. Only at a few places they are attached to give facility of pronunciation. Sometimes the इत् letters, especially vowels, which are said to be इत्, when uttered as nasalized by Pāṇini, are recognised only by convention; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः(S.K.on P.I.3.2).The word इत्, which literally means going away or disappearing, can be explained as a mute indicatory letter. In Pāṇini's grammar, the mute vowel अ applied to roots indicates the placing of the Ātmanepada affixes after them, if it be uttered as anudātta and of affixes of both the padas if uttered svarita; confer, compare P.I.3. 12, 72. The mute vowel आ signifies the prevention of इडागम before the past part, affixes; confer, compare P. VII. 2. 16. Similarly, the mute vowel इ signfies the augment न् after the last vowel of the root; confer, compareP.VII.1.58; ई signifies the prevention of the augment इ before the past participle.affixes cfP.VII.2.14;उ signifies the inclusion of cognate letters; confer, compareP.I.1.69, and the optional addition of the augment इ before त्वा; confer, compare P.VII.2. 56; ऊ signifies the optional application of the augment इट्;confer, compareP.VII. 2.44; क signifies the prevention of ह्रस्व to the vowel of a root before the causal affix, confer, compareVII.4.2: लृ signifies the vikarana अङ् in the Aorist cf P.III.1.55; ए signifies the prevention of vrddhi in the Aorist,confer, compare P.VII.2.55; ओ signifies the substitution of न् for त् of the past participle. confer, compare P VIII.2.45; क् signifies the Prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compareP, I. 1.5; ख् signifies the addition of the augment मुम्(म्)and the shortening of the preceding vowel: confer, compareP.VI.3 65-66: ग् signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5 घ् signifies कुत्व, confer, compare P.VII.3.62; ङ्, applied to affixes, signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5; it causes संप्रसारणादेश in the case of certain roots, confer, compare P. VI.1.16 and signifies आत्मनेपद if applied to roots; confer, compare P.I. 3.12, and their substitution for the last letter if applied to substitutes. confer, compare P I.1.53. च् signifies the acute accent of the last vowel;confer, compareP.VI.1. 159; ञ् signifies उभयपद i.e the placing of the affixes of both the podas after the root to which it has been affixed;confer, compareP.I.3.72, ट् in the case of an augment signifies its application to the word at the beginning: confer, compareP I.1.64, while applied to a nominal base or an affix shows the addition of the feminine. affix ई (ङीप्) confer, compareP.IV.1. 15;ड् signifies the elision of the last syllable; confer, compare P.VI.4.142: ण् signifies वृद्धि, confer, compareP.VII.2.115;त् signifies स्वरित accent, confer, compare VI.1.181, as also that variety of the vowel ( ह्रस्व, दीर्ध or प्लुत) to which it has been applied confer, compare P.I.1.70; न् signifies आद्युदात्त, confer, compare P.VI.1.193:प् signifies अनुदात्त accent confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III.1.4. as also उदात्त for the vowel before the affix marked with प् confer, compare P.VI.1.192: म् signifies in the case of an augment its addition after the final vowel.confer, compareP.I.1.47,while in the case of a root, the shortening of its vowel before the causal affix णि,confer, compare P.VI.4.92: र् signifies the acute accent for the penultimate vowel confer, compare P.VI.1.217，ल् signifies the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix marked with ल्; confer, compareP.VI. 193; श् implies in the case of an affix its सार्वधातुकत्व confer, compare P. II1.4.113, while in the case of substitutes, their substitution for the whole स्थानिन् cf P.I.1.55; प् signifies the addition of the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् ) confer, compareP.IV-1.41 ;स् in the case of affixes signifies पदसंज्ञा to the base before them, cf P.I.4.16. Sometimes even without the actual addition of the mute letter, affixes are directed to be looked upon as possessed of that mute letter for the sake of a grammatical operation exempli gratia, for example सार्वधातुकमपित् P.I.2.4; असंयेागाल्लिट कित् P.I.2.5: गोतो णित् P.VII.1.90 et cetera, and others (2) thc short vowel इ as a substitute: confer, compare शास इदङ्हलोः P.VI.4.34.

iṣṭhavadbhāva	possession of the same properties for causing grammatical operations as the taddhita affix. affix इष्ठन् possesses, as for instance, the elision of the syllable beginning with the last vowel ( टिलोप ), substitution of the masculine gender. base for the feminine. base (पुंवद्भाव) et cetera, and others, before the denom affix णिच्; exempli gratia, for example एतयति in the sense of एनीं आचष्टे; similarly प्रथयति, पटयति, दवयति, confer, compare M.Bh. on. P.VI.4. 155 Vārt, 1.

īṭ	augment ई prefixed to a Sārvadhātuka (strong) affix beginning with a consonant after the roots ब्रू, रु, स्तु, and others exempli gratia, for example अब्रवीत्, रोरवीति, स्तवीति, अकार्षीत्, अवादीत् et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VII. 3.93-98.

upasarga	preposition, prefix. The word उसपर्ग originally meant only 'a prefixed word': confer, compare सोपसर्गेषु नामसु Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI. 38. The word became technically applied by ancient Sanskrit Gratmmarians to the words प्र, परा, अप, सम् et cetera, and others which are always used along with a verb or a verbal derivative or a noun showing a verbal activity; confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I. 4.59. 'These prefixes are necessariiy compounded with the following word unless the latter is a verbal form; confer, compare कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18. Although they are not compounded with a verbal form, these prepositions are used in juxtaposition with it; sometimes they are found detached from the verbal form even with the intervention of one word or more. The prefixes are instrumental in changing the meaning of the root. Some scholars like Śākaṭāyana hold the view that separated from the roots, prefixes do not express any specific sense as ordinary words express, while scholars like Gārgya hold the view that prefixes do express a sense e. g. प्र means beginning or प्रारम्भ; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः । नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति । उच्चावचाः पदार्था भवन्तीति गार्ग्यः । तद्य एषु पदार्थः प्राहुरिमं तं नामाख्यातयोरर्थविकरणम् Nirukta of Yāska.I. 8. It is doubtful, however, which view Pāṇini himself held. In his Ātmanepada topic, he has mentioned some specific roots as possessing some specific senses when preceded by some specific prefixes (see P. I. 3.20, 24, 25, 40, 4l, 46, 52, 56, et cetera, and others), which implies possibly that roots themselves possess various senses, while prefixes are simply instrumental in indicating or showing them. On the other hand, in the topic of the Karmapravacanīyas,the same words प्र, परा et cetera, and others which, however, are not termed Upasargas for the time being, although they are called Nipātas, are actually assigned some specific senses by Pāṇini. The Vārttikakāra has defined उपसर्ग as क्रियाविशेषक उपसर्गः P. I. 3.I. Vārt 7, leaving it doubtful whether the उपसर्ग or prefix possesses an independent sense which modifies the sense of the root, or without possessing any independent sense, it shows only the modified sense of the root which also is possessed by the root. Bhartṛhari, Kaiyaṭa and their followers including Nāgeśa have emphatically given the view that not only prefixes but Nipātas, which include प्र, परा and others as Upasargas as well as Karmapravacanīyas, do not denote any sense, but they indicate it; they are in fact द्योतक and not वाचक. For details see Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3, Vākyapadīya II. 190, Mahābhāṣya on I. 3.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7 and Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya has discussed the question in XII. 6-9 where, as explained by the commentator, it is stated that prefixes express a sense along with roots or nouns to which they are attachedition It is not clear whether they convey the sense by denotation or indication, the words वाचक in stanza 6 and विशेषकृत् in stanza 8 being in favour of the former and the latter views respectively; cf उपसर्गा विंशतिरर्थवाचकाः सहेतराभ्यामितरे निपाताः; क्रियावाचकभाख्यातमुपसर्गो विशेषकृत्, सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. st. 6 and 8. For the list of upasargas see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 6, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 15, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI.24, and S. K. on P. I.4.60.

ūt(1)	long vowel ऊ which cannot be combined by rules of saṁdhi with the following vowel when it comes at the end of the forms of the dual number e. g. साधू अत्र et cetera, and others; confer, compare ईदूदेद्विवचनं प्रगृह्यम् P.I.1.11, as ， also ईदूतौ च सप्तम्यर्थे I.1.19; (2) long vowel ऊ substituted for the short उ of the root गोह् before an affix beginning with a vowel e. g. निगूहति; confer, compare ऊदुपधाया गोहः P. VI.4.89.

ekahalādi	having a single consonant at the beginning; cf एकहलादौ पूरयितव्येSन्यतरस्याम् P.VI.3.59.

oṃkāra	the syllable ओं called by the term प्रणव and generally recited at the beginning of Vedic works. Patañjali has commented upon the word briefly as follows; पादस्य वा अर्धर्चस्य वा अन्त्यमक्षरमुपसंहृत्य तदाद्यक्षरशेषस्य स्थाने त्रिमात्रमोंकारं त्रिमात्रमोंकारं वा विदधति तं प्रणव इत्याचक्षते M.Bh. on VIII.2.89.

auṣṇiha	beginning with a stanza of the Uṣṇih metre; confer, compare उष्णिहापूर्वः सतोबृहत्यन्तः प्रगाथः औष्णिह इत्युच्यते । यथा यमादित्यासो अद्रुहः Uvaṭa on R.Pr.XVIII.5.

kārakaviveka	known as कारकवाद also; a short work on the meaning and relation of words written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya who lived in the beginning of the eighteenth century. The work forms the concluding portion of a larger work called कारकविवेक which was written by शिरोमणिभट्टाचार्य.. The work कारकवाद has a short commentary written by the author himselfeminine.

koṇḍabhaṭṭa	a reputed grammarian who wrote an extensive explanatory gloss by name Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa on the Vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakārikā of Bhaṭṭoji Dīkṣita. Another work Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra. which is in a way an abridgment of the Bhūṣaṇa, was also written by him. Koṇḍabhaṭṭa lived in the beginning of the l7th century. He was the son of Raṅgojī and nephew of Bhaṭṭojī Dīkṣita. He was one of the few writers on the Arthavicāra in the Vyākaraṇaśāstra and his Bhūṣaṇasāra ranks next to the Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari. Besides the Bhūṣaṇa and Bhūṣaṇasāra, Koṇḍabhaṭṭa wrote two independent works viz. Vaiyākaraṇsiddhāntadīpika and Sphoṭavāda.

kta	kṛt affix त in various senses, called by the name निष्ठा in Pāṇini's grammar along with the affix क्तवतू confer, compare क्तक्तवतू निष्ठा P.I.1.26.The various senses in which क्त is prescribed can be noticed below : (1) the general sense of something done in the past time as past passive voice.participle e. g. कृत:, भुक्तम् et cetera, and others: cf P. III.2.102; (2) the sense of the beginning of an activity when it is used actively: e. g. प्रकृतः कटं देवदत्तः, confer, compare P.III.2.102 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3; (3) the sense of activity of the present tense applied to roots marked with a mute ञ् as also to roots in the sense of desire, knowledge and worship; exempli gratia, for exampleमिन्नः, क्ष्विण्ण:, धृष्ट: as also राज्ञां मतः, राज्ञामिष्टः, राज्ञां बुद्धः; confer, compare P.III.2.187, 88; (4) the sense of mere verbal activity (भाव) e. g. हसितम् , सहितम् , जल्पितम् , (used always in the neuter gender); confer, compare P.III.3. 114: (5) the sense of benediction when the word ending in क्त is used as a technical term, exempli gratia, for example देवदत्तः in the sense of देवा एनं देयासुः. The kṛt affix क्तिन् is also used similarly exempli gratia, for example सातिः भूतिः मन्ति:; confer, compare Kāś. on P. III.3.174.

govinda	writer of a commentary known as अम्बाकर्त्री by reason of that work beginning with the stanza अम्बा कर्त्रींó, on the Paribhasendusekhara of Nagesa.

gh(1)	fourth consonant of the guttural class of consonants having the properties कण्ठसंवृतत्व, घोष, नादानुप्रदानत्व and महाप्राणत्व; (2)the consonant घ at the beginning of a taddhita affix. affix which is always changed into इय्; confer, compare P. VII. 1. 9; (3) substitute for ह् at the end of roots beginning with द्, as also of the root नह् under certain conditions; confer, compare P.VIII.2.32,33,34; (4) substitute for the consonant व् of मतुव् placed after the pronouns किम् and इदम् which again is changed into इय् by VII.1.9: exempli gratia, for example कियान्, इयान्: confer, compare P.V. 2.40.

ṅamud	augment ङम् i. e. ङ्, ण् or न् prefixed to a vowel at the beginning of a word provided that vowel is preceded by ङ्, ण् or न् standing at the end of the preceding word. See ङ् (3).

c	first consonant of palatal class of consonants, possessed of the properties, श्वास, अघोष, अल्पप्राण and कण्ठविवृतत्व. च् at the beginning of an affix is mute e. g. च्फञ्, confer, compare चुट् P. I. 3.7; words, having the mute letter च् (dropped), have their last vowel accented acute e. g. भङ्गुरम् । भासुरम् । confer, compare चित: VI. 1.163.

carcā(1)	splitting up of a word into its component parts, which is generalty shown in the Padaptha by अवग्रहं (S). The word, hence means पदपाठ or recital by showing separately the constitutent words of the Samhita or the running text of the Veda. The word is used almost in the same sense in the Mahabhasya in respect of showing the words of a sutra separately; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऐजिति । किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति M.Bh. on Mahesvara Sutra 1 Wart. 6l ; (2) a repeated word; confer, compare इतिकरणात् पुरतो यत् पुनः पदवचनं तत् चर्चाशब्देनोच्यते. Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.20; (3) a discussion or a debate where consideration is given to each single word; confer, compare प्रर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par. Sek. Pari. 115.

caṃrcāpada	component words of a running text or of a compound word.

cullibhaṭṭi	a grammarian who is supposed to have written a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini; confer, compare तत्र च वृतिः पाणिनिप्रणीतानां सूत्राणां विवरणं चुल्लिभट्टिनल्लूरादि( V. 1. निर्लूरादि-) विरचितम् , Nyasa, on the benedictory verse of Kasika: वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा घातुनामपारायणादिषु at the very beginning.

ch	the second consonant of the palatal class of consonants ( चवर्ग ), which is possessed of the properties श्वास, अघोष, मह्याप्राण and कण्ठविवृतकारित्व. छ् , placed at the beginning of affixes, is mute; while ईय् is substituted for छ् standing at the beginning of taddhita affixes; confer, compare P. I. 3.7 and VII. 1.2. छ् at the end of roots has got ष्， substituted for it: confer, compare P. VIII. 2.36.

cha	taddhita affix. affix ईय, added ( 1 ) to the words स्वसृ, भ्रातृ and to words ending with the taddhita affix. affix फिञ्: confer, compare P. IV. 1.143,144 and 149; (2) to the dvandva compound of words meaning constellations,to the words अपोनप्तृ, अपांनप्तृ, महेन्द्र, द्यावापृथिवी, शुनासीर et cetera, and others as also to शर्करा, उत्कर , नड et cetera, and others in certain specified senses, confer, compare P. IV. 2.6, 28, 29, 32, 48, 84, 90 &91 ;(3) to words beginning with the vowel called Vrddhi (आ,ऐ or औ),to words ending with गर्त, to words of the गह class, and to युष्मद् and अस्मद् in the शैषिक senses, confer, compare P. IV. 3.114, 137-45 and IV. 3.1 ; (4) to the words जिह्वामूल, अङ्गुलि, as also to words ending in वर्ग in the sense of 'present there '; confer, compare P.IV.3.62-64; (5) to the words शिशुक्रन्द, यमसम, dvandva compounds, इन्द्रजनन and others in the sense of 'a book composed in respect of', confer, compare P.IV. 3.88; (6)to words meaning warrior tribes, to words रैवतिक etc, as also अायुध, and अग्र, in some specified senses: cf P.IV. 3.91, 131, IV. 4.14, 117; (7) to all words barring those given as exceptions in the general senses mentioned in the second. V.I.1-37; (8) to the words पुत्र, कडङ्कर, दक्षिण, words ending in वत्सर, अनुप्रवचन et cetera, and others होत्रा, अभ्यमित्र and कुशाग्र in specified senses; confer, compare P. V. 1. 40, 69,70,91,92, 111,112,135, V. 2.17, V.3.105; (9) to compound words in the sense of इव; e. g. काकतालीयम् , अजाकृपाणीयम् et cetera, and others confer, compare V. 3. 106;and (10) to words ending in जति and स्थान in specified senses; confer, compare P. V.4, 9,10.

j	third consonant of the palatal class of consonants, possessed of the properties नाद, घोष, अल्पप्राण and कण्ठसंवृत्तकारित्व. ज् at the beginning of affixes is mute in Panini's grammar.

jh	fourth consonant of the palatal class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व, and महाप्राणत्व; झ् at the beginning of an affix in Panini Sutras is mute; e. g. the affixes झि, झ et cetera, and others; cf चुटूं P. I. 3.7.

ñyaṅ	taddhita affix. affix in the sense of 'a descendant' added to words beginning with अा, ऐ, ओ or ending with इ, as also to the words कौसल and अजाद् provided they mean a country and a Ksatriya too; exempli gratia, for example सौवीर्यः, आवन्त्यः, कौन्त्यः कौसल्यः, अाजाद्यः; confer, compare P. IV.1.171.

ṭāṅ	short term for affixes beginning with टाप् in P. IV. 1.4 and ending with ष्यङ् in P. IV. 1.78: confer, compare टाङिति प्रत्याहारग्रहणम् । टापः प्रभृति आ ष्यङो ङकारात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 2.48 V. 2.

ṭi	the final syllable beginning with a vowel; part of a word consisting of the final vowel in a word and the consonants following the final vowel; cf अचेन्त्यादि टि P. I. 1.64.

ṭilopa	deletion or elision of the final syllable beginning with a vowel, as prescribed by Panini in certain rules; confer, compare भस्य टेर्लोपः VII. 1.88, टे: P. VI, 4.143, 155 नस्तद्धिते P. VI. 4.144 and अह्नष्टखोरेव P. VI. 4.145.

ṭh	the second consonant of the lingual class possessed of the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्टत्व and महाप्राणत्व. For the syllable ठ at the beginning of taddhita affixes, the syllable इक is substituted; if however the affix (beginning with ठ ) follows upon a word ending in इस्, उस्, उ, ऋ, लृ and त् then क is added instead of इक; e. g. धानुष्क:, औदश्वित्कः et cetera, and others; confer, compare टस्येकः, इसुसुक्तान्तात् कः, P. VII. 3.50, 51. Some scholars say that इक् and क् are substituted for ठ् by the sutras quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare KS. on VII. 3.50.

ṭhakpāda	a popular name given to the fourth pada of the fourth adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi.The pada begins with the rule प्राग्वहतेष्ठक् P.IV.4.1 prescribing the taddhita affix ठक् in the senses prescribed in rules be. ginning with the next rule ' तेन दीव्यति खनति जयति जितम् ' and ending with the rule 'निकटे वसति' P.IV.4.73.

ṭhaca	taddhita affix. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51) with the vowel अ accented acute applied to (1) कुमुद and others as a Caturarthika affix; confer, compare P. IV.2.80; (2) to multisyllabic words and words beginning with उप which are proper nouns for persons; confer, compare P. V.3.78, 80; and (3) to the word एकशाला in the sense of इव; confer, compare P. V.3.109. The base, to which टच् is added, retains generally two syllables or sometimes three, the rest being elided before the affix ठच् e. g. देविकः, वायुकः, पितृकः शेबलिकः et cetera, and others from the words देवदत्त, वायुदत्त, पितृदत्त, शेवलदत्त et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. V,3.83, 84.

ḍvit	a root marked with the mute syllable डु (at the beginning) to Signify the application of the krt affix त्रि which is invariably followed by the addition of म ( मप् ), in the sense of 'achieved by' e. g. पक्त्रिमम् ; कृत्रिमम्: confer, compare P. III. 3.88 ; and IV. 4.20.

ḍ(1)	fourth consonant of the lingual class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व and महृाप्राणत्व; (2) the consonant ढ् which is elided when followed by ढ् and the preceding vowel is lengthened; e. g. गाढा, confer, compare P. VIII. 3.13 and VI. 3.111 ; (3) substitute ढ् for ह् at the end of a पद, or, if followed by any consonant excepting a semivowel or a nasal excepting in the cases of roots beginning with द् or the roots द्रुह्, मुह् et cetera, and others as also वह् and अाह् confer, compare P. VIII. 2.31, 32, 33, 34; (4) ढ् at the beginning of a taddhita affix. affix which has got एय् substituted for it; confer, compare गाङ्गेय:, वैनतेयः ; confer, compare P. V. 3.102.

ṇ(1)	fifth consonant of the lingual class of consonants possessed of the properties, नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनासिक्यः (2) the mute letter ण् indicating the substitution of vrddhi ( confer, compare P. VII. 2. 115-117) when attached to affixes; (3) the consonant ण् at the beginning of roots which is changed into न्; the roots, having ण् at the beginning changeable to न्, being called णोपदेशः (4) ण् as a substitute for न् following the letters ऋ, ॠ, र्, and ष् directly, or with the intervention of consonants of the guttural and labial classes, but occurring in the same word, Such a substitution of ण् for न् is called णत्व; confer, compare P.VIII.4. I-39. For णत्व in Vedic Literature; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)V.20-28, T.Pr.VII.1-12. V.Pr.III.84-88;(5) the consonant ण् added as an augment to a vowel at the beginning of a word when it follows the consonant ण् at the end of the previous word; confer, compare P. VIII. 3. 32. In the Vedic Pratisakhyas this augment ण् is added to the preceding ण् and looked upon as a part of the previous word.

ṇopadeśa	a root mentioned in the Dhatupatha by Panini as beginning with ण् which subsequently is changed to न् ( by P. VI. 1.65) in all the forms derived from the root; e. g. the roots णम, णी and others. In the case of these roots the initial न् is again changed into ण् after a prefix like प्र or परा having the letter र् in it and having a vowel or a consonant of the guttural or labial class intervening between the letter र् and the letter न्; e. g. प्रणमति, प्रणयकः et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VIII. 4.14.

ṇya	taddhita affix.affix य (l) applied in the sense of 'descendant' as also in a few other senses, mentioned in rules from IV. 1. 92 to IV.3.168, applied to the words दिति, अदिति, अादित्य and word; with पति as the उत्तरपद in a compound, c. g. दैत्यः, आदित्यः, प्राजापत्यम् et cetera, and others confer, compareKāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. IV.1 84; (2) applied in the sense of a descendant ( अपत्य ) applied to the words कुरु, गर्ग, रथकार, कवि, मति, दर्भ et cetera, and others, e.gकौरव्यः, गार्ग्यः et cetera, and others confer, compare Kas:, on P. IV. I.15I ; (3) applied in the sense of अपत्य or descendant to words ending in सेना,to the word लक्षण and to words in the sense of artisans, e.gकारिषेण्यः, लाक्षण्यः, तान्तुवाय्यः, कौम्भकार्यः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.1.152; (4) applied in the Catuararthika senses to the words संकाश, काम्पिल्थ, कश्मीर et cetera, and others, exempli gratia, for example साङ्काश्यम्, काम्पिल्यम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2.80; (5) applied to the word परिषद् and optionally with the affix ठक् to the word सेना in the specified senses; e. g. परिषदं समवैति, परिषदि साधुर्वा पारिषद्य्ः, सेनां समवेति सैन्यः सैनिको वा; confer, compare Kas on P. IV. 44, 45, 101 ; (6) applied as a taddhita affix. affix called ' tadraja , to the word कुरु and words beginning with न e. g. कौरव्यः नैषध्यः; confer, compare Kas on P. IV. 1.172; कुरवः, निषधाः et cetera, and others are the nominative case. plural formanuscript.

tattvavimarśinī	name of a commentary on the Kasikavrtti by a grammarian named Nandikeśvarakārikā.kārikābhāṣya by Upamanyu.in the beginning of the nineteenth century A. D.

tadādividhi	a convention similar to the तदन्तविधि of Panini,laid down by the Varttikakara laying down that in case an operation is prescribed for something followed by a single letter, that single letter should be taken to mean a word beginning with that single letter: confer, compare यस्मिन्विधिस्तदादावल्ग्रहणे P.I.1.72 Vart. 29: Par. Sek. Pari. 33.

tṛn(1)	krt affix तृ with the acute accent on the first vowel of the word formed by its application, applied to any root in the sense of 'an agent' provided the agent is habituated to do a thing, or has his nature to do it, or does it well; exempli gratia, for example वदिता जनापवादान् , मुण्डयितारः श्राविष्ठायना -भवन्ति वधूमूढाम् , कर्ता कटम्; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III.2.135; words ending with तृन् govern the noun connected with them in the accusative case; (2) the term तृन् , used as a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) standing for krt affixes beginning with those prescribed by the rule लटः शतृशानचौ (P.III.2.124) and ending with the affix तृन् (in P.III.3.69); confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.4.69.

durghaṭavṛtti	name of a grammar work explaining words which are difficult to derive according to rules of Panini. The work is written in the style of a running commentary on select sutras of Panini, devoted mainly to explain difficult formations. The author of it, Saranadeva, was an eastern grammarian who, as is evident from the number of quotations in his work, was a great scholar of the 12th or the 13th century.

dvitīyadvirvacana	the reduplication of a root beginning with a vowel prescribed by the rule अजादेर्द्वितीयस्य P. VI. 1.2.

dvitva	doubling, reduplication prescribed for (I) a root in the perfect tense excepting the cases where the affix अाम् is added to the root before the personal ending: exempli gratia, for example बभूव, चकार, ऊर्णुनाव et cetera, and others cf P. VI. 1.1,2; (2) a root before the vikarana affixes सन्, यङ्, श्लु and चङ् e. g. बुभूषति, चेक्रीयते, चर्करीति, जुहोति, अचीकरत् et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VI. 1.9l l ; (3) a word ending in अम् . ( णमुल् ) in the sense of repetition, e. g. स्मारं स्मारं वक्ष्ये, भोजं भोजं व्रजति confer, compare आभीक्ष्ण्ये द्वे भवतः P. VIII. 1.12 Vart. 7; (4) any word (a) in the sense of constant or frequent action, (b) in the sense of repetition, (c) showing reproach, or scorn, or quality in the sense of its incomplete possess-, ion, or (d) in the vocative case at the beginning of a sentence in some specified senses; reduplication is also prescribed for the prepositions परि, प्र, सम्, उप, उद्, उपरि, अधि, अघस् in some specified senses confer, compare P. VIII. 1.1 to 15. A letter excepting हृ and र्, is also repeated, if so desired, when (a) it occurs after the letter ह् or र् ， which is preceded by a vowel e g. अर्क्कः अर्द्धम् et cetera, and others cf VIII. 4.46; or when (b) it is preceded by a vowel and followed by a consonant e. g. दद्ध्यत्र, म्द्धवत्र confer, compare P. VIII. 4.47. For details see Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on VIII. 4.46-52. The word द्वित्व is sometimes used in the sense of the dual number; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I.2.51. The words द्वित्व, द्विर्वचन and द्विरुक्त are generally used as synonymanuscript. Panini generally uses the word द्वे. For द्वित्व in Vedic Literature confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 1.4; Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIV. 1-8 V, Pr. IV. 101-118.

nandyādi	name giver to the class of roots beginning with the root नन्द्, which includes the roots वाश्, मद् , दूष्， वृध् , शुभ् and others as given in the Ganapatha.These roots have the affix ल्यु id est, that is अन added to them in the sense of agent. exempli gratia, for example नन्दनः, वाशनः, मदनः, वर्धनः, शोभनः, रमणः, दर्पणः, जनार्दनः, यवनः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.III.1.134.

nādi(a root)	beginning with न् in the Dhatupatha as contrasted with one beginning with ण् ( णादि ) whose ण् is, of course, changed into न् when conjugational and other forms are arrived at; confer, compare सर्वे नादयो णोपदेशा नृतिनन्दिनदिनक्किनाटिनाथृनाधृनॄवर्जम् M.Bh. on VI. 1.65.

num	augment न् inserted after the last vowel (1) of a root given in the Dhātupātha as ending with mute इ; exempli gratia, for example निन्दति, क्रन्दति, चिन्तयति, जिन्वति et cetera, and others; confer, compare P VII.1.58; (2) of roots मुच् and others before the conjugational sign अ ( श ); e. g. मुञ्चति, लुम्पति; confer, compare P. VII.1.59; (3) of the roots मस्ज्, नश्, रध्, जभ् and लभ् under certain specified conditions, exempli gratia, for exampleमङ्क्त्वा, नंष्टा, रन्धयति, जम्भयति, लम्भयति, आलम्भ्यः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.VII. 1.60-69; (4) of declinable bases marked with the mute indicatory letter उ, ऋ or ऌ as also of the declinable wording अञ्च् from the root अञ्च् and युज्, exempli gratia, for exampleभवान्, श्रेयान् , प्राङ्, युङ्, confer, compare Kās. on P. VII.1. 70, 71; (5) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with a vowel or with any consonant excepting a semivowel or a nasal, before a case-ending termed Sarvanāmasthāna; exempli gratia, for example यशांसि, वनानि, जतूनि et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās. on VII.1.72; (6) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with इ, उ,ऋ or ऌ before a case-ending beginning with a vowel; exempli gratia, for example मधुने, शुचिने et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās, on P. VII.1.73; (7) of the affix शतृ ( अत् of the present tense. participle.) under certain conditions याती यान्ती; पचन्ती, सीव्यन्ती, confer, compare I .VII.78-8 : (8) of the word अनडुह् before the nominative case. and vocative case. singular. affix सु;exempli gratia, for example अनड्वान् , हे अनड्वन्, confer, compare P. VII.1. 82; (9) of the words दृक्, स्ववस् and स्वतवस् before the nominative case. and vocative case.singular.affix सु in Vedic Literature, e. g. यादृङ्, स्ववान् , स्वतवान् , confer, compare P.VII.1.83.

paṇḍita	writer of Citprabhā, a commentary on the Paribhāșenduśekhara. A commentary on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara is also ascribed to him. He was a Gauda Brāhmaņa whose native place was Kurukșetra. He lived in the beginning of the nineteenth century.

padapāṭha	the recital of the Veda text pronouncing or showing each word separately as detached from the adjoining word. It is believed that the Veda texts were recited originally as running texts by the inspired sages, and as such, they were preserved by people by oral tradition. Later on after several centuries, their individually distinct words were shown by grammarians who were called Padakāras. The पदपाठ later on had many modifications or artificial recitations such as क्रम, जटा, घन et cetera, and others in which each word was repeated twice or more times, being uttered connectedly with the preceding or the following word, or with both. These artificial recitations were of eight kinds, which came to be known by the term अष्टविकृतयः.

padavākyaratnākara	a disquisition on grammar dealing with the different ways in which the sense of words is conveyedition The work consists of a running commentary on his own verses by the author Gokulanātha Miśra who, from internal evidence, appears to have flourished before Koņdabhațța and after Kaiyața.

padādi(1)	beginning of a word, the first letter of a word; confer, compare सात्पदाद्योः P. VIII.3.111; confer, compare also स्वरितो वानुदात्ते पदादौ P. VIII.2.6. Patañjali, for the sake of argument has only once explained पदादि as पदादादिः confer, compare M.Bh.on I. 1. 63 Vāŗt. 6; (2) a class of words headed by the word पद् which is substituted for पद in all cases except the nominative case. and the acc. singular and dual; this class, called पदादि, contains the substitutes पद् , दत्, नस् et cetera, and others respectively for पाद दन्त, नासिका et cetera, and others confer, compare Kās on P. VI. 1.63; (3) the words in the class, called पदादि, constiting of the words पद्, दत्, नस्, मस् हृत् and निश् only, which have the case affix after them accented acute; confer, compare P. VI. 1.171.

parāṅgavadbhāva	behaviour as having become a part and parcel of another ; treatment of a word as a part of another. The term is used by Panini in connection with a word followed by and connected with a word in the vocative case of which it is looked upon as a part for purposes of accent, e. g. कुण्डेनाटन् , मद्राणां राजन् et cetera, and others Here the words अटन् and राजन् , being in the vocative case, are अाद्युदात्त, id est, that is अ ( at the beginning of अटन्) and अा (in राजन्) are acute and as a result all the other vowels in कुण्डेनाटन् and मद्राणां राजन् become अनुदात्त or grave; confer, compare सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे P.II.1.2.

paribhāṣenduśekhara	the reputed authoritative work on the Paribhasas in the system of Paanini's grammar written by Nagesabhatta in the beginning of the 18th century A.D. at Benares. The work is studied very widely and has got more than 25 commentaries written by pupils in the spiritual line of Nagesa. Well-known among these commentaries are those written by Vaidyanatha Payagunde ( called गदा ), by BhairavamiSra ( called मिश्री), by Raghavendraacaarya Gajendragadakara ( called त्रिपथगा ), by Govindacarya Astaputre of Poona in the beginning of the nineteenth century (called भावार्थदीपिका), by BhaskaraSastri Abhyankar of Satara (called भास्करी ), and by M. M. Vaasudevasaastri Abhyankar of Poona (called तत्त्वादर्श ). Besides these, there are commentaries written by Taatya Sastri Patawardhana,Ganapati Sastri Mokaate, Jayadeva Misra, VisnuSastri Bhat, Vishwanatha Dandibhatta, Harinaatha Dwiwedi Gopaalacarya Karhaadkar, Harishastri Bhagawata, Govinda Shastri Bharadwaja, Naarayana Shastri Galagali, Venumaadhava Shukla, Brahmaananda Saraswati, ManisiSeSaSarma,Manyudeva, Samkarabhatta, Indirapati, Bhimacarya Galagali, Madhavacarya Waikaar, Cidrupasraya, Bhimabhatta, LakSminrsimha and a few others. Some of these works are named by their authors as Tikaas, others as Vyaakhyaas and still others as Tippanis or Vivrtis.

pum.	or पुंस् masculine. It appears that both पुभ्, and पुंस् were current terms meaning 'masculine ' in ancient days. confer, compare पुमः खय्यम्परे P.VIII. 3.12. and पुंसोसुङ् P. VII. 1.89. Although पुभ् is changed to पुंस् before a word beginning with a hard consonant, still पुंस् is given as an independent word derived from the root पा confer, compare पातेर्डुम्सुन् Unādi S IV. 177; confer, compare also the expressions पुंवचन, पुंलिङ्ग and पुंयोग.

pratyārambhaḥ(1)	statement after prohibition literally commencing again; inducing a person to do something after he has refused to do it by repeating the order or request for generally by beginning the appeal with the word नह; exempli gratia, for example नह भोक्ष्यसे ? नह अध्येप्यसे; confer, compare नह प्रत्यारम्भे P. VIII. 1.31 and Kasika and Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. thereon. (2) commencement or laying down again in spite of previous mention; confer, compare शेषवचनात्तु योसौ प्रत्यारम्भात्कृतो बहुव्रीहिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI-3.46.

pratyāhāra	literally bringing together; bringing together of several letters ( or words in a few cases, such as roots or nouns ) by mentioning the first and the last only for the sake of brevity; the term प्रत्याहार is generally used in connection with brief terms such as अण्, अक् , अच् , हल् and the like, created by Panini in his grammar by taking any particular letter and associating it with any mute final letter ( अनुबन्ध ) of the fourteen Sivasutras, with a view to include all letters beginning with the letter uttered and ending with the letter which precedes the ( mute ) letter. The practice of using such abbreviations was in existence before Panini, possibly in the grammar attributed to Indra. The term प्रत्याहार is not actually used by Panini; it is found in the Rk. Tantra; confer, compare प्रत्याहारार्थो वर्णोनुबन्धो व्यञ्जनम् R.T.I.3. The term appears to have come into use after Panini. Panini has not given any definition of the term प्रत्याहार. He has simply given the method of forming the Pratyaharas and he has profusely used them; confer, compare आदिरन्त्येन सहेता P. I. 1.71. The word कृञ् in P. III.1.40 and तृन् in P. II. 3.69 are used as Pratyaharas. For a list of the Pratyharas which are used by Panini see Kasika on the Maheswara Sutras.

prāgghitīya	name given to taddhita affix. affixes prescribed by rules beginning with प्राग्हिताद्यत् P. IV. 4.75 and ending with सोदराद्यः P. IV. 4.109.

prāgdīvyatīya	name given to taddhita affix. affixes prescribed by rules beginning with तस्य विकारः P. IV. 3.134 and ending with the rule कंसीयपरशव्ययोर्यञञौ लुक् च P. IV. 3.168.

prātiśākhya	a work on Vedic grammar of a specific nature, which is concerned mainly with the changes, euphonic and others, in the Pada text of the Samhita as compared with the running text, the Samhita itselfeminine. The Pratisakhya works are neither concerned with the sense of words, nor with their division into bases and affixes, nor with their etymology. They contain, more or less,Vedic passages arranged from the point of view of Samdhi. In the Rk Pratisakhya, available to-day, topics of metre, recital, phonetics and the like are introduced, but it appears that originally the Rk Pratisakhya, just like the Atharva Pratisakhya, was concerned with euphonic changes, the other subjects being introduced later on. The word प्रातिशाख्य shows that there were such treatises for everyone of the several Sakhas or branches of each Veda many of which later on disappeared as the number of the followers of those branches dwindledition Out of the remaining ones also, many were combined with others of the same Veda. At present, only five or six Pratisakhyas are available which are the surviving representatives of the ancient ones - the Rk Pratisakhya by Saunaka, the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, the Vajasaneyi PratiSakhya by Katyayana, the Atharva Pratisakhya and the Rk Tantra by Sakatayana, which is practically a Pratisakhya of the Sama Veda. The word पार्षद or पारिषद was also used for the Pratisakhyas as they were the outcome of the discussions of learned scholars in Vedic assemblies; cf परिषदि भवं पार्षदम्. Although the Pratisakhya works in nature, are preliminary to works on grammar, it appears that the existing Pratisakhyas, which are the revised and enlarged editions of the old ones, are written after Panini's grammar, each one of the present Prtisakhyas representing, of course, several ancient Pratisakhyas, which were written before Panini. Uvvata, a learned scholar of the twelfth century has written a brief commentary on the Rk Pratisakhya and another one on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. The Taittiriya PratiSakhya has got two commentaries -one by Somayarya, called Tribhasyaratna and the other called Vaidikabharana written by Gopalayajvan. There is a commentary by Ananta bhatta on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. These commentaries are called Bhasyas also.

prātihata	name given to the circumflex vowel, standing at the beginning of a word and following the final vowel of the previous word which is acute ( उदात्त ); confer, compare अपि चेन्नानापदस्थमुदात्तमथ चेत्सांहितेन स्वर्यते स प्रतिहतः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.xx. 3.

prādi	a group of words beginning with प्र, which are all prefixes or upasargas e. g, प्र, परा, अप et cetera, and others cf कुगतिप्रादयः P. II. 2. 18.

phak(1)	taddhita affix.affix फ marked with mute क् for effecting the वृद्धि substitute for the initial vowel of the word to which it is appliedition The initial letter फ् of all the affixes beginning with फ् in Panini's grammar is always changed into आयन्. The taddhita affix. affix फक् is affixed (1) in the sense of गोत्रापत्य grandchild and his issues, to the words नड and others as also to the words ending with the affixes यञ् and इञ् and words शरद्वत्, दर्भ, द्रोण et cetera, and others exempli gratia, for example नाडायनः, शालङ्कायनः, दाक्षायणः प्लाक्षायणः, द्रोणायनः, वैदः, अौर्वः et cetera, and others; cf P.IV. 1.99-103; (2) as a caturarthika affix in the four senses mentioned in P. IV. 2.67-70 to the words पक्ष and others e. g. पाक्षायणः, तौषायणः; confer, compare P.IV. 2.80.

phin	taddhita affix. affix आयनि in the sense of offspring added according to the Eastern grammarians to words not beginning with आ, ऐ or औ, exempli gratia, for example ग्लुचुकायनिः,confer, compare IV.1.160.

ba	or बकार the letter ब्, the vowel अ as also the word कार being added for facility of utterance; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.17.21, The letter ब् is sometimes used for व् especially when it stands at the beginning of a word, for which scholars use the expression वबयेारभेद:

bha(1)	the letter or sound भ् with the vowel अ added for facility of utterance; (2) a technical term in the Grammar of Panini given to a noun base before such case and taddhita affixes as begin with any vowel or with the consonant य्. The utility of this designation of भ to the base is (l) to prevent the substitutes which are enjoined for the final vowel or consonant of a pada (a word ending with a case-affix or a base before case and taddhita affix. affixes beginning with any consonant excepting य् ) just as the substitution of Visarga, anusvara, the first or third consonant, and others given in P. VIII. 4.37 and the following. For the various changes and operations for a base termed भ see P. VI. 4.129 to 175.

maṅgalārtha	for the sake of auspiciousness at the beginning of a treatise or work; confer, compare भूवादीनां वकारोयं मङ्गलार्थः प्रयुज्यते M.Bh. on P.I.3.1.;confer, compareमङ्गलादीनि हि शास्त्राणि \| M.Bh. on P.I.1.1.

maya	taddhita affix. affix मयट् (1) in the sense of proceeding therefrom (तत आगत: P. IV.3.92) added to words showing cause or meaning human being; exempli gratia, for example सममयम्, देवदत्तमयम्: (2) in the sense of product (विकार) or part (अवयव) added optionally with अण् to any word, exempli gratia, for example अश्ममयम् , आश्मनम् मूर्वामयम् मौर्वम्, and necessarily to words beginning with आ, ऐ and औ, words of the class headed by the word शर and the words गो, पिष्ट, व्रीहि, तिल and some others: confer, compare P. IV. 3. 143-150; (3) in the sense of proportion, added to a numeral; e. g. द्विमयमुदश्विद्यवानाम्; confer, compare P. V. 2.47; (4) in the sense of "made up of' added to the thing of which there is a large quantity; exempli gratia, for example अन्नमयम्, अपूपमयम् cf; तत्प्रकृतवचने मयट् P.V.4.21,22.

mācākīya	an ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work, who is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya as one, holding the view that य and व् preceded by अ and followed by उ and ओ respectively, are dropped provided they stand at the beginning of a Pada ( word ). माचाकीय, who belonged to the Yajurveda school, is said to have held this view which is generally held by the followers of the Rgveda: confer, compare उकारौकारपरौ लुप्यते माचाकी यस्य(Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.X.29) on which the commentator adds वह्वृचानामयं पक्षः.

mutva	the substitution of मु for the syllable beginning with द् in certain cases; confer, compare अदसोसेर्दादु दो मः P. VIII.2.80.

munitraya	the popular and honorific term for the three prominent grammarians of the Paninian system of grammar wiz. पाणिनि, कात्यायन and पतञ्जलि who were the pioneers of that system; confer, compare मुनित्रयं नमस्कृत्य Siddhanta-Kaumud beginning.

metreyarakṣita	a recognised scholar of Paninis' grammar who belonged to the Eastern part of India and fourished in the beginning of the twelfth century. As it appears from the name Maitreya Raksita he appears to have been a Buddhist grammarian. Subsequent writers in their works refer to him by the name Raksita alone, as also by the name Maitreya, but very rarely by the name Maitreya Raksita.He wrote many works on grammar of which the 'tantrapradipa'a learned commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Nyasa on Kasika was a reputed one, which, although available in a fragmentary manuscript form today, has been profusely quoted by prominent grammarians after him.

y(1)	the consonant य् with अ added to it merely for the sake of facility in pronunciation; यकार is also used in the same sense: e. g. लिटि वयो यः: P.VI.1.38 confer, compare T.Pr.I: 17,21;(2) krt affix (यत्) prescribed as कृत्य or potential passive participle; exempli gratia, for exampleचेयम्, गेयम्, शाप्यम् , शक्यम् , गद्यम् , अजर्यम् पण्यम् et cetera, and others: confer, compare अचो यत्...अजर्यं संगतम् P.III. 1.97-105; (3) krt. affix क्यप् which is also an affix called krtya; e. gब्रह्मोद्यम् , भाव्यम्, घात्यम् , स्तुत्यम् , कल्प्यम् , खेयम् , भृत्यः:, भिद्यः, पुष्य:, कृत्यम्,also कार्यम् ; confer, compare P. III. 1.106-128:(4) krt affix ण्यत् ( which is also कृत्य ), e. g कार्यम् , हार्यम् , वाक्यम् , लाव्यम्, कुण्डपाय्यम्. et cetera, and others: cf P. III. 1.124-132: (5) taddhita affix. affix य affixed (a) in the sense of collection to पाश, वात et cetera, and others, as also to खल, गो and रथ, e. g. पाद्या, रथ्या et cetera, and others confer, compare P. IV. 2. 49, 50ः (b) in the चातुरर्थिक senses to बल, कुल, तुल et cetera, and others e. g. वल्यः,.कुल्यम् efeminine. P V.2. 80, (c) as a Saisika taddhita affix. affix to ग्राम्यहः' along with the affix खञ्ज e. g. ग्राम्यः, ग्रामीणः: cf P: IV. 2.94 (d) in the sense of 'good therein' ( तत्र साधुः ) and other stated senses affixed to सभा, सोदर पूर्व, and सोम: e. g. सभ्य:, पूर्व्यः; .et cetera, and others. confer, compare P. IV. 4.105, 109, 133, 137, 138: (e) in the sense of 'deserving it' to दण्ड and other words, e. g. दण्ड्य, अर्ध्र्य, मध्य, मेध्य, et cetera, and others: cf P. V. 1.66: ( f ) in the sense of quality or action to सखि e. g. सख्यम् ; cf P. V. 1.126: (6) taddhita affix. affix यत् applied to (a) राजन् श्वशुर, कुल, मनु in the sense of offspring, (b) शूल्, उखा, वायु, ऋतु and others, under certain conditions; confer, compare P. IV. 2.17, 31, 32, 101, (c) to अर्ध, परार्ध, words in the class headed by दि्श, छन्दस and others in specific senses; cf P. IV. 3-46, 54 et cetera, and others and (d) in specific senses to specific words mentioned here and there in a number of sUtras from IV.4, 75 to V.4.25; (e) to शाखा, मुख, जघन and others in the sense of इव (similar to) exempli gratia, for example शाख्यः, मुख्य:, et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. V. 3. 103; (7) case-ending य substituted for ङे of the dative sing; e. g. रामाय confer, compare P. VII. 3.102: (8) verb-affix यक् applied to the nouns कण्डू and others to make them ( denominative ) roots; e. g. कण्डूय,सन्तूय et cetera, and others confer, compare कण्ड्वादिभ्यो यक् P. III. 1.27 (9) \| Vikarana य ( यक् ) applied to any root before the Saarvadhaatuka personal endings to form the base for the passive voice as also the base for the 'Karmakartari' voice e g क्रियते, भूयते, confer, compare सार्वधातुके यक् P. III. 1.67 (10) Unaadi affix य ( यक् ) applied to the root हृन् to form the Vedic word अघ्न्य: cf अघ्न्यादयश्च: ( 11 ) augment य ( यक् ) added to the affix क्त्वा in Vedic Literature: e. g. दत्त्वायः confer, compare क्त्वो यक् P. VII.1.47; (12) verb affix यङ् added to a root to form its Intensive base ( which sometimes is dropped ) and the root is doubledition e. g. चेक्रीयते,चर्करीति;. confer, compare P. III. 1.22,24; (13) short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) supposed to be beginning with य in the affix यइ in the sUtra धातेरेकाचो ... यङ् III. 1.22, and ending with ङ् in the sUtra लिड्याशिष्यङ्क III. 1.86, with a view to include the various verb affixes and conjugational signs.

yaḍanta	a secondary root formed by adding the affix यङ् in the sense of repetition and intensity, to roots having one syllable and beginning with a consonant: confer, compare धातोरेकाचो हृलादे: क्रियासमभिहारे यङ् P. III. 1.22, 23,24. See य (12) a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

yay	short term (प्रत्याहार) for sonants beginning with य् ( in हयवरट्) and ending before the ; mute letter य् ( in कपय् ) id est, that is all consonants except! श्, ष्, स्, and ह्; confer, compare अनुस्वारस्य ययि परसवर्णः P.VIII 4. 58 by which an anusvara is changed into a cognate letter of the following which is a letter included in यय्.

yuc	krt affix यु changed into अन, (1) applied in the sense of 'a habituated agent' to intransitive roots in the sense of movement or utterance, to Atmanepadi roots beginning with a consonant, to the roots जु, चेकम् सृ, शुच्, कुघ्, as also to roots in the sense of decoration: exempli gratia, for example चलन:, शब्दन:: cf P.III. 2. 148-15I: (2) applied to causal roots, as also to the roots आस् श्रन्थ् and others in the sense of verbal activity when the word so formed has always the feminine gender; exempli gratia, for example कारणा, हृरणा, आसना, घट्टना,वेदना et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.III.3.107 and the Varttikas thereon; (3) applied to roots ending in अा and preceded by the indeclinables ईषद्, दुस् or सु in the sense of easy or difficult for obtainment and, wherever seen to any root in the Vedic language, as also to some other roots as found in actual use in the classical literature; e. g. ईषद्दानो गौर्मवता, दु्ष्पानः, सुपान: et cetera, and others सूपसदन:, दुर्योधनः, दुर्मर्षण: et cetera, and others, confer, compare P.III.8.128-130.

radhādi	a class of eight roots headed by the root रध् which allow the addition of the augment इ ( इट् ) optionally to the ardhadhatuka affix beginning with any consonant except य्, placed , after them; exempli gratia, for example रघिता रद्धा, त्रता , तर्त्पा तर्पिता et cetera, and others confer, compare P.VII.2.35 and VII.2.45.

riṅ	substitute रि for a verbal base ending in ऋ before श (the sign of the 6th conjugation) यक् (sign of the passive voice. voice) and a लिङ् affix beginning with य which is not a Sārvadhātuka affix; e. g. अाद्रियते, क्रियते, क्रियात्; confer, compare रिङ् शयग्लिङ्क्षु P.VII.4.28.

l(1)	a consonant of the dental class which is a semi-vowel ( यण् ) with liquid contact in the mouth, and which is inaspirate ( अल्पप्राण ),voiced ( घोष ) and both nasalised and unnasalised; (2) name in general ( लकार ) given to the personal endings applied to roots in the ten tenses and moods which take different substitutes ति, त:, अन्ति et cetera, and others and have various modifications and augments in the different tenses and moods; (3) substituted as a semi-vowel ( यण् ) for the vowel ऌ followed by any other vowel in the euphonic combinations; (4)applied at the beginning of nontaddhita affixes as a mute letter indicating the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix; confer, compare लिति; P. VI. 1.193; ( 5 ) substituted for त्, थ्, द्, घ् or न् before ल्， confer, compare P.VIII.4. 60; (6) substituted under certain conditions for the consonant र् (a) of the root कृप्, (b) of prefixes प्र and परा before the root अय्, (c) of the root गॄ in frequentative forms and optionally before affixes beginning with a vowel, and (d ) of the word परि before घ and अङ्क; confer, compare P. VIII. 2. 18 to 22. _ ल (1) consonant ल्; see ल् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.' (2) a general term usually used by ancient grammarians to signifyलोप (elision or disappearance) of a letter or a syllable or a word; confer, compare सर्वसादेर्द्विगोश्च ल: \| सवार्तिक:, द्वितन्त्र: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.IV.2.60; (3) taddhita affix. affix ल added to the word क्लिन्न when चिल् and पिल् are substituted for the word क्लिन्न; e.g, चिल्लः, पिल्ल: confer, compare P. V. 2.33 Vārt 2.

v(1)	fourth letter of the class of consonants headed by य्, which are looked upon as semi-vowels; व् is a dental, soft, non-aspirate consonant pronounced as ब् in some provinces and written also sometimes like ब्, especially when it stands at the beginning of a word; (2) substitute for उ which is followed by a vowel excepting उ; e. g, मधु+अरि: = मध्वरि:; confer, compare इको यणचि P. VI. I. 77; (3) the consonant व्, which is sometimes uttered with very little effort when it is at the end of a word and followed by a vowel or a semivowel, or a fifth, fourth or third consonant or the consonant ह्. In such cases it is called लघूच्चारण; confer, compare यस्योच्चारणे जिह्वाग्रोपाग्रमध्यमूलानां शैथिल्यं जायते स लघूच्चारण: S. K. on P.VIII.3. 18;(4) solitary remnant of the affixes क्विप्,क्विन्, ण्वि and the like, when the other letters which are mute are dropped and the affix क्वप् or the like becomes a zero affix. This व् also is finally dropped; confer, compare वेरपृक्तस्य P. VI.1.67.

varṇasamāmnāya	a collection of letters or alphabet given traditionally. Although the Sanskrit alphabet has got everywhere the same cardinal letters id est, that is vowels अ, इ et cetera, and others, consonants क्, ख् etc : semivowels य्, र्, ल्, व, sibilants श् ष् स् ह् and a few additional phonetic units such as अनुस्वार, विसर्ग and others, still their number and order differ in the different traditional enumerations. Panini has not mentioned them actually but the fourteen Siva Sutras, on which he has based his work, mention only 9 vowels and 34 consonants, the long vowels being looked upon as varieties of the short ones. The Siksa of Panini mentions 63 or 64 letters, adding the letter ळ ( दुःस्पृष्ट ); confer, compare त्रिषष्टि: चतुःषष्टिर्वा वर्णाः शम्भुमते मताः Panini Siksa. St.3. The Rk Pratisakhya adds four (Visarga, Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya and Anusvara ) to the forty three given in the Siva Sutras and mentions 47. The Taittiriya Pratisakhya mentions 52 letters viz. 16 vowels, 25class consonants, 4 semivowels,six sibilants (श्, ष् , स्, ह् , क्, प् , ) and anusvara. The Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya mentions 65 letters 3 varieties of अ, इ, उ, ऋ and लृ, two varieties of ए, ऐ, ओ, औ, 25 class-consonants, four semivowels, four sibilants, and जिह्वामूलीय, उपध्मानीय, अनुस्वार, विसर्जनीय, नासिक्य and four यम letters; confer, compare एते पञ्चषष्टिवर्णा ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाचः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 25. The Rk Tantra gives 57 letters viz. 14 vowels, 25 class consonants, 4 semivowels, 4 sibilants, Visarga,.Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya, Anunasika, 4_yamas and two Anusvaras. The Rk Tantra gives two different serial orders, the Uddesa (common) and the Upadesa (traditional). The common order or Uddesa gives the 14 vowels beginning with अ, then the 25 class consonants, then the four semivowels, the four sibilants and lastly the eight ayogavahas, viz. the visarjanya and others. The traditional order gives the diphthongs first, then long vowels ( अा, ऋ, लॄ, ई and ऊ ) then short vowels (ऋ, लृ, इ, उ, and lastly अ ), then semivowels, then the five fifth consonants, the five fourths, the five thirds, the five seconds, the five firsts, then the four sibilants and then the eight ayogavaha letters and two Ausvaras instead of one anuswara. Panini appears to have followed the traditional order with a few changes that are necessary for the technigue of his work.

vardhamāna(1)	a long vowel;(2)name of a famous ]ain grammarian, disciple of Govindasuri, who lived in the beginning of the twelfth century A.D.and wrote a metrical work on ganas or groups of words in grammar, named गणरत्नमहोदधि, and also a commentary on it. The work consists of 8 chapters and has got some commentaries besides the well-known one by the author himselfeminine. He also wrote two other works on grammar कातन्त्रविस्तर and क्रियागुप्तक as also a few religious books.

vāsudeva dīkṣita	son of महादेव दीक्षित, the author of the Balamanorarma, a commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi. Vasudevadiksita was a resident of Tanjore who lived in the beginning of the eighteenth century A.D. and wrote a few works on Purvamimamsa.

viṭhṭhala	or विठ्ठलेश grandson of रामचन्द्रशेष the author of the प्राक्रियाकौमुदी. He was aTelagu Brahmana of Andhra who lived in the beginning of the sixteenth century and wrote a commentary named प्रसाद on the Prakriya-Kaumudi and two small works अव्ययार्थनिरूपण and पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति.

vuk(1)	augment वु added (a) to the word भ्रू after it, when the taddhita affix. affix ढक् ( एय ) in the sense of अपत्य is affixed to it; confer, compare भ्रुवो वुक् च P. IV.1.125; (b) to the root भू before an affix beginning with a vowel in the perfect and the aorist tenses; exempli gratia, for example बभूव, अभूवन् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. VI.4.88: (c) to the root सू in the Perfect third person. singular.; exempli gratia, for example ससूव, P.VII.4.74; (2) taddhita affix. affix अक applied to the word कन्था as seen in use in the Bannu ( वर्णु ) district; e. g. कान्थकम् , confer, compare P.IV.2.103.

vṛddhipāda	name given to the first pada of Panini's Astadhyayi by grammarians, as the beginning of the pada is made by the Sutra वृद्धिरादैच्.

vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāravṛtti	a commentary on the Vaiyākaranabhusana, written by Mahānanda in the beginning of the nineteenth century.

ś(1)	a sibilant letter of the palatal class, possessed of the properties, श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष and कण्ठविवृतत्व; (2) the initial indicatory ( इत् ) letter श् of a non-taddhita affix in Panini's grammar, which is dropped; (3) substitute for च्छ् when followed by an affix beginning with a nasal consonant; e.g प्रश्न:, confer, compare P.VI.4.19;(4) substitute for स् when followed by श् or any palatal letter;exempli gratia, for example वृक्षश्छादयति वृक्षश्शेते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. VIII. 4.40.

śatṛsvara	the acute accent specifically stated for the vowel of the caseaffix beginning with a vowel et cetera, and others prescribed by the rule शतुरनुमे। नद्यजादी P. VI. 1.173: confer, compare शतृस्वर , तुदती नुदती ... शतुरनुमो नद्यजादिरन्तांदात्तादित्वेष स्वरो यथा स्यात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII. 2.6. Vart 2.

śavarga	class of letters beginning with श् i.e the consonants श् , ष् , स् and ह् .

ṣ(l)	a sibilant letter of the cerebral class of consonants possessed of the properties श्वास, अघोष, कण्ठविवार and महाप्राण ; (2) mute indicatory letter ष्, attached to nouns as also to affixes with which nouns are formed, such as ष्वुन्, ष्कन्, ष्टरच्, ष्ट्रन् et cetera, and others showing the addition of the feminine affix ई ( ङीष् ); confer, compare षिद्गौरादिभ्यश्च P. IV. 1.41 ; (3) changeable to स् when placed at the beginning of roots in the Dhatupatha except in the case of the roots formed from nouns and the roots ष्ठिव् and ष्वष्क्; (4) substitute for the last consonant of the roots ब्रश्च, भ्रस्ज्, सृज्, मृज्, यज्, राज्, भ्राज्, as also of the roots ending in छ् and श् before a consonant excepting a nasal and a semivowel, as also when the consonant is at the end of the word; e. g. भ्रष्टा, स्रष्टा, यष्टुम् सम्राट् et cetera, and others cf P. VIII.2.36 (5) substitute for a visarjaniya preceded by a vowel except अ and followed by a consonant of the guttural or the labial class which does not begin a different word, as also before the words पाश, कल्प, क, काभ्य et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VIII. 3.39: confer, compare also P. VIII 3.41, 43, 44, 45 and 48 for some specified cases; (6) substitute for स् when placed near a consonant of the cerebral class or near the consonant ष्; e. g. वृक्षष्षण्डे , वृक्षष्टकार: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VIII. 4.41.

ṣatva	change of the consonant स् into ष् in certain conditions in the formation of a word, or after prepositions in the case of verbs beginning with स्. This cerebralization of स् was a peculiar phonetic change which naturally occurred when स् in utterance came after a vowel excepting अ. Some of the Pratisakhya works have exhaustively treated this change and Panini has also mentioned many rules in connection with it.

saṃkhyāpūrva	with a numeral word placed first or at the beginning; a term used for defining the Dvigu compound cf संख्यापूर्वो द्विगुः P. II. 1.52.

saṃdhi	euphonic combination; phonetic combination of two vowels or two consonants or one vowel and one consonant resulting from their close utterance; many kinds of such combinations and varieties are given in the Pratisakhya works. In the Siddhantakaumudi, Bhattoji Diksita has given five kinds of such Sandhis at the beginning of his work; confer, compare पदान्तपदाद्योः संधिः । यः कश्चिद्वैदिकशास्त्रसंधिरुच्यते स पदान्तपदाद्योर्वेदितव्यः।ते संधयश्चत्वारो भवन्ति । स्वरयोः व्यञ्जनयो: स्वरव्यञ्जनयोश्च Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III. 3.

saṃskṛtamañjarī	a short handbook on declension and case-relations written by a grammarian named Sadhusundara, who lived in the beginning of the eighteenth century.

saṃhitā	position of words or parts of words in the formation ofa word quite near each other which results into the natural phonetic coalescence of the preceding and the following letters. Originally when the Vedic hymns or the running prose passages of the Yajurveda were split up into their different constituent parts namely the words or padas by the Padakaras, the word संहिता or संहितापाठ came into use as contrasted with the पदपाठ. The writers of of the Pratisakhyas have conseguently defined संहिता as पदप्रकृतिः संहिता, while Panini who further split up the padas into bases ( प्रकृति ) and affixes ( प्रत्यय ) and mentioned several augments and substitutes, the phonetic combinations, which resulted inside the word or pada, had to be explained by reason of the close vicinity of the several phonetic units forming the base, the affix, the augment, the substitute and the like, and he had to define the word संहृिता rather differently which he did in the words परः संनिकर्षः संहिता; cf P.I.4.109: confer, compare also संहितैकपदे नित्या नित्या धातूपसर्गयोः । नित्य समासे वाक्ये तु सा विवक्षामपेक्षते Sabdakaustubha on Maheshvara Sutra 5.1.

saṃhitāpāṭha	the running text or the original text of the four Vedas as originally composedition This text, which was the original one, was split up into its constituent padas or separate words by ancient sages शौनक, अात्रेय and others,with a view to facilitating the understanding of it, and consequently to preserving it in the oral tradition.The original was called मूलप्रकृति of which the पदपाठ and the क्रमपाठ which were comparatively older than the other artificial recitations such as the जटापाठ, घनपाठ and others, are found mentioned in the Pratisakhya works.

sarvādi	literally a group or a class of words beginning with the word सर्व as the first word in the list; the term is used in general as a synonymous term with Sarvanaman; confer, compare संज्ञोपसर्जनीभूतास्तु न सर्वादयः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.I.1.27. सर्वादेश a substitute for the entire wording instead of the final letter as prescribed by the rule अलेान्त्यस्य P.I.1.52; confer, compare अनेकाल्शीत्सर्वस्य P.I.1.55.

sāyaṇa,sāyaṇācārya	the celebrated Vedic scholar and grammarian of Vijayanagar who flourished in the 14th century and wrote, besides the monumental commentary works on the Vedas, a grammatical work on roots and their forms known by the name माधवीया धातुवृत्ति. As the colophon of the work shows, the Dhatuvrtti was written by Sayanacarya, but published under the name of Madhava, the brother of Sayanacarya: confer, compare इति महामन्त्रिणा मायणसुतेन माधवसहोदरेण सायणाचार्येण विरचितायां माधवीयायां धातुवृत्तौ...Madhaviya Dha tuvrtti at the end; cf also तेन मायणपुत्रेण सायणेन मनीषिणा । व्याख्येया माधवी चेयं धातुवृत्तिर्विरच्यते । Mad. Dhatuvrtti at the beginning.

siddha(1)	established; the term is used in the sense of नित्य or eternal in the Varttika सिद्धे शब्दार्थसंबन्धे where, as Patanjali has observed, the word सिद्ध meaning नित्य has been purposely put in to mark an auspicious beginning of the शब्दानुशासनशास्त्र which commences with that Varttika; confer, compare माङ्गलिक आचार्यो महतः शास्त्रौघस्य मङ्गलार्थे सिद्धशब्दमादितः प्रयुङ्क्ते M.Bh.on Ahnika 1; (2) established, proved, formed; the word is many times used in this sense in the Mahabhasya, as also in the Varttikas especially when a reply is to be given to an objection; confer, compare P.I. 1.3 Vart. 17, I.1. 4. Vart. 6: I. I. 5, Vart.5,I.1.9 Vart. 2 et cetera, and others

sup(l)	locative case affix सु: (2) short term for case-affixes, as formed by the syllable सु (the nominative case. singular. affix) at the beginning and the final consonant प् of सुप्, the locative plural case-affix in the rule स्वौजसमौट्...ङ्योस्सुप् P. IV. 1.2. These case afixes are called 'vibhakti' also. These सुप् affixes are elided after an indeclinable word; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुप: P. II. 4.82; in Veda स्, शे ( ए ), या, डा, ड्या, याच् and अाल् as seen, are substituted for these case affixes, which sometimes are even dropped or assimilated with the previous vowel of the base: e. g. सन्तु पन्थाः, आर्द्रे चर्मन् et cetera, and others cf, P. VII. 1.39. These caseaffixes are as a rule, grave-accented (अनुदात्त) excepting in such cases as are mentioned in P. VI.1. 166 to 184 and 19l.

seṭka	सेट् together with the augment 'iț' prescribed in general for being prefixed to an Ardhadhatuka affix beginning with any consonant except य्. The word is also used in the sense of a root which allows the augment इट् ( इ ) to be prefixed to valadi Ardhadhatuka affixes placed after it, in contrast with such roots which do not allow it and hence which are termed अनिट्.

halādi	beginning with a consonant; confer, compare हलादयो विभक्तय:, M.Bh. on P. II. 4.32 Vart. 2; धातुर्य एकाज् हलादि: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. l . 22. Vart. 2. et cetera, and others हलादिशेष a term frequently used by commentators for the omission of all consonants except the initial one in the reduplicative syllable as prescribed by the rule of Panini इलादिः शेष: VII. 4. 60. The word 'इलादिःशेषः' as one word, is also found used in the same sense

Vedabase Search

1084 results


ā-brahma	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 5.14.29

ā-viriñcāt	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 5.15.13

ā-kalpa-antam	up to the end of the millennium	SB 5.19.9

ā-kalpāt	from the very beginning of Lord Brahmā's day	SB 10.87.6

a-kāra-ādyāḥ	beginning with the letter a	SB 12.6.42

ā-bāla-vṛddha	beginning from the children up to the old persons	CC Madhya 4.83

abhadrāṇi	all inauspiciousness or annihilation	SB 10.2.29

abhāvāya	for the annihilation	SB 8.14.9

abhidhāvataḥ	of he who was running very forcefully	SB 9.15.34

abhidhāvataḥ	of the one running at him	SB 10.59.10

abhidravate	running	SB 6.11.9

abhidrutya	running to	SB 6.9.19

abhidrutya	running toward	SB 10.43.6

abhiṣeka	the bathing of the Deity at the beginning of the installation ceremony	CC Madhya 4.59

abhyadravan	running very fast	SB 8.1.17

mańgala-ācaraṇe	in the performance of auspiciousness in the beginning	CC Antya 1.182

ācārya-ādi	beginning with Advaita Ācārya	CC Antya 19.16

ādau	in the beginning	BG 3.41

ādau	in the beginning	BG 4.4

kalpa-ādau	in the beginning of the millennium	BG 9.7

ādau	in the beginning	SB 1.3.1

ādau	in the beginning	SB 3.11.35

arcā-ādau	beginning with worship of the Deity	SB 3.29.25

ādau	in the beginning of creation	SB 4.17.31

ādau	in the beginning (the Second and Third Cantos)	SB 5.26.38

ādau	in the beginning	SB 6.1.1

ādau	in the beginning	SB 6.4.49-50

ādau	in the beginning	SB 6.16.36

ādau	in the beginning	SB 6.18.30

ādau	in the beginning	SB 7.15.57

kṛta-ādau	at the beginning of the next Satya-yuga	SB 9.22.11

ādau	in the beginning	SB 11.3.23

ādau	in the beginning, before creation	SB 11.3.37

ādau	in the beginning	SB 11.4.5

ādau	in the beginning (of the millennium)	SB 11.17.10

ādau	in the beginning	SB 11.22.17

ādau	in the beginning	SB 11.24.2

dvāpara-ādau	at the end of the Dvāpara millennium	SB 12.6.46

ādau	in the beginning	CC Madhya 11.78

ādau	in the beginning	CC Madhya 11.139

jihvā-ādau	beginning with the tongue	CC Madhya 17.136

ādau	in the beginning	CC Madhya 20.266

ādau	in the beginning	CC Madhya 23.14-15

ādau	in the beginning	CC Madhya 24.329

ādau	in the beginning	CC Antya 5.100

dakṣa-ādayaḥ	beginning with Dakṣa	SB 5.5.21-22

dāra-apatya-ādayaḥ	beginning with the wife and children	SB 5.14.3

brahma-ādayaḥ	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 6.9.21

saubhaga-ādayaḥ	sons beginning with Saubhaga	SB 6.18.8

brahma-ādayaḥ	the demigods, beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 7.5.13

brahma-ādayaḥ	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 7.8.7

brahmā-ādayaḥ	the demigods, beginning with Brahmā, Śiva, Indra and Candra	SB 8.3.30

pāyasa-ādayaḥ	beginning with sweet rice	SB 10.24.26

kha-ādayaḥ	beginning with ether	SB 11.22.19

ādhāvataḥ	who was running after Him with great force	SB 8.19.10

ādhāvataḥ	running toward Him	SB 10.77.35

chandāṃsi adhyāpayiṣyan	desiring to teach him Vedic mantras during the months beginning with Śrāvaṇa or during the period of Cāturmāsya	SB 5.9.5

ādhyātmika-ādi	beginning with those pertaining to the body and mind	CC Madhya 22.13

ādi	beginning	BG 5.22

ādi-sarge	in the beginning of creation	SB 3.4.13

ādi-daityau	demons in the beginning of creation	SB 3.17.16

ādi-kṛt	beginning of everything	SB 4.11.19

ādi	beginning with	SB 4.29.54

vanitā-ādi	beginning with the wife	SB 4.29.54

ādi-anta-vat	everything material has a beginning and an end	SB 5.10.11

paramāṇu-ādi	beginning from the time of minute atoms	SB 5.14.29

upanayana-ādi	beginning with offering the sacred thread or training the conditioned soul to qualify as a bona fide brāhmaṇa	SB 5.14.30

meru-ādi-giri-duhitaraḥ	daughters of the mountains beginning with Meru	SB 5.17.10

praṇava-ādi	beginning with the oṃkāra	SB 6.8.7

ādi-anta	in both the beginning and the end	SB 6.16.36

ādi	in the beginning	SB 7.9.30

ādi-anta-vantaḥ	who all have a beginning and end	SB 7.9.49

ādi	in the beginning of the millennium	SB 7.10.42

niṣeka-ādi	the beginning of life (the purificatory process of garbhādhāna, performed when the father begets a child by discharging semen into the womb of the mother)	SB 7.15.52

ādi	a beginning	SB 8.1.12

janma-ādi	the creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 8.1.13

duḥsvapna-ādi	beginning with sleeping badly at night	SB 8.4.15

ādi	the beginning	SB 8.12.5

ādi	beginning	SB 10.54.45

ādi	in its beginning	SB 10.87.50

ādi	a beginning	SB 11.8.36

ādi-anta-vantaḥ	possessing a beginning and end	SB 11.14.11

ādi	in the beginning	SB 11.19.7

ādi	in the beginning	SB 11.19.7

ādi-anta-vat	having a beginning and an end	SB 11.28.9

ādi	in the beginning	SB 11.28.18

ādi-anta-vat	which has a beginning and an end	SB 12.4.23

ādi-anta-vat	subject to beginning and end	SB 12.4.28

brahma-ādi	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 12.6.67

bīja-ādi	beginning from the seed (i.e., from the time of conception)	SB 12.7.20

ādi	in the beginning	SB 12.13.11-12

ādi	beginning with	CC Adi 3.81

matsya-ādi	beginning with Matsya	CC Adi 4.11-12

rāsa-ādi	beginning with the rāsa dance	CC Adi 4.114

ādi	beginning with	CC Adi 4.147

sālokya-ādi	the five types of liberation, beginning from sālokya (residing on the same spiritual planet as the Lord)	CC Adi 4.204

sālokya-ādi	liberation, beginning sālokya	CC Adi 4.208

sṛṣṭi-ādi-nimitte	for the cause of creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Adi 5.81

tārkika-ādi-gaṇa	all persons, beginning with the logicians	CC Adi 7.35

ādi	beginning with	CC Adi 7.48

śravaṇa-ādi	devotional service, beginning with hearing	CC Adi 7.141

sālokya-ādi	beginning with sālokya	CC Madhya 6.267

ādi	beginning	CC Madhya 7.153

śrīvāsa-ādi	beginning with Śrīvāsa	CC Madhya 10.117

ādi	beginning with	CC Madhya 14.92

kila-kiñcita-ādi	beginning with the ecstasy named kila-kiñcita	CC Madhya 14.170

vilāsa-ādi	beginning with transcendental enjoyment	CC Madhya 14.183

ādi	beginning with	CC Madhya 15.41

mayūra-ādi	beginning with peacocks	CC Madhya 17.44

ādi	beginning with	CC Madhya 18.68

ākāśa-ādi	beginning with the sky	CC Madhya 19.233

veda-ādi	beginning with the Vedas	CC Madhya 20.144

saubhari-ādi	beginning with the sage named Saubhari	CC Madhya 20.169

keśava-ādi	beginning with Lord Keśava	CC Madhya 20.194

pūrva-ādi	beginning from the east	CC Madhya 20.211

cakra-ādi	of weapons, beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.221

cakra-ādi	beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.222

cakra-ādi-dhāraṇa	holding of the weapons, beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.223

vāsudeva-ādi	beginning with Lord Vāsudeva	CC Madhya 20.226

cakra-ādi-dhāraṇa	the holding of weapons, beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.237

sahasra-śīrṣā-ādi kari'	by the Vedic hymns beginning with sahasra-śīrṣā (ṛg Veda-saṃhitā 10.90.1)	CC Madhya 20.292

pūtanā-vadha-ādi	killing the demons, beginning from Pūtanā	CC Madhya 20.394

ādhyātmika-ādi	beginning with those pertaining to the body and mind	CC Madhya 22.13

śānta-ādi rasera	of the mellows beginning from neutrality	CC Madhya 23.56

sālokya-ādi	liberation, beginning with sālokya	CC Madhya 24.183

mṛga-ādi	animals, beginning with the deer	CC Madhya 24.263

brahmā-ādi	beginning from Lord Brahmā	CC Madhya 24.307

advaita-ādi	beginning with Advaita Ācārya	CC Antya 2.41

brahma-ādi jīva	all living entities, beginning from Lord Brahmā	CC Antya 3.251

kṛṣṇa-ādi	beginning from Kṛṣṇa	CC Antya 3.268

deha-tyāga-ādi	beginning with giving up the material body	CC Antya 4.57

ādi	beginning with	CC Antya 4.60

ādi	beginning with	CC Antya 4.226

brahmā-ādi-devera	of the demigods, beginning with Lord Brahmā	CC Antya 5.75

vāṇīnātha-ādi	beginning with Vāṇīnātha	CC Antya 9.34

svarūpa-ādi	beginning with Svarūpa Dāmodara	CC Antya 9.36

harṣa-ādi	beginning with jubilation	CC Antya 15.86

vījana-ādi kari'	fanning and so on	CC Antya 15.92

ācārya-ādi	beginning with Advaita Ācārya	CC Antya 19.16

brahma-ādi	beginning from Lord Brahmā	Bs 5.53

nārada-ādi	beginning with Nārada	MM 7

ādi	beginning with	MM 47

pūrva-ādibhiḥ	beginning with the front	SB 3.12.37

pūrva-ādibhiḥ	beginning from the front face	SB 3.12.38

yama-ādibhiḥ	beginning with yama	SB 3.27.6

ādibhiḥ	beginning with	SB 4.26.12

grahaṇa-ādibhiḥ	beginning with chanting	SB 6.3.22

prokṣaṇa-ādibhiḥ	by the various prescriptions beginning with sprinkling of water for purification	SB 11.27.29

padmaja-ādibhiḥ	beginning with Lord Brahmā	SB 12.11.4

dharma-ādibhyaḥ	to the demigods, beginning with Yamarāja	SB 11.27.38-41

ādiḥ	the beginning	BG 10.32

ādiḥ	beginning	BG 15.3-4

ādiḥ	beginning from	SB 3.11.39

ādiḥ	beginning	SB 8.6.10

nimeṣa-ādiḥ	beginning with minute parts of time	SB 10.3.26

ādiḥ	the beginning	SB 10.82.45

ādiḥ	the beginning	SB 11.24.17

ādiḥ	the beginning	SB 11.24.18

ādiḥ	beginning with	SB 12.4.1

rāsa-ādika	beginning with the rāsa dance	CC Adi 4.81

prema-ādika	love of Godhead, beginning with śānta, dāsya and so on	CC Madhya 23.47

brahmā-śiva-ādika	demigods, beginning from Lord Brahmā and Śiva	CC Antya 8.2

ramā-ādika	beginning with the goddess of fortune	CC Antya 17.40

ādikam	beginning with	SB 10.55.36

ādim	beginning	BG 11.16

ādīnām	beginning from	SB 3.5.37

mahat-ādīnām	beginning with Lord Brahmā	SB 3.29.37

kṣiti-ādīnām	of the five elements, beginning with the earth	SB 7.15.59

brahma-ādīnām	beginning with Lord Brahmā	SB 12.4.35

avyakta-ādīni	in the beginning unmanifested	BG 2.28

ādīni	beginning with	SB 3.20.13

ādīni	from the very beginning	SB 4.21.7

oṃkāra-ādīni	beginning with oṃkāra	SB 6.8.4-6

śravaṇa-ādīni	the activities of bhakti-yoga, beginning with hearing and chanting	SB 10.6.3

kalpa-ādiṣu	in different millenniums	SB 3.10.30

ādiṣu	beginning with	SB 4.8.56

jambū-ādiṣu	beginning with Jambū	SB 5.1.33

sthāvara-ādiṣu	beginning with the nonmoving forms of life, the trees and plants	SB 7.6.20-23

niṣeka-ādiṣu	beginning from the happiness derived from sex life	SB 7.7.46

tretā-ādiṣu	beginning from Tretā-yuga	SB 7.14.39

asura-ādiṣu	beginning with the asuras	SB 8.16.14

brāhmaṇa-ādiṣu	beginning with the brāhmaṇas	SB 10.89.64

madhu-ādiṣu	beginning with Madhu	SB 12.11.32

dhyāna-ādite	by processes beginning with meditation	CC Madhya 20.343

advaita-ādi	beginning with Advaita Ācārya	CC Antya 2.41

adya	in this millennium	SB 3.11.34

adya	beginning from today	SB 10.4.31

adya prabhṛti	beginning from now	SB 10.73.18

ādya-upānta	from beginning to end	CC Madhya 18.226

ādya-upānta	from beginning to the end	CC Madhya 20.65

ādyaḥ	the beginning	SB 5.17.22-23

janma-ādyāḥ	beginning with birth	SB 7.7.18

ādyāḥ	beginning with the sun and followed by the other planets	SB 8.18.5

ādyāḥ	beginning with	SB 9.24.15

nanda-ādyāḥ	beginning from Nanda Mahārāja	SB 10.1.61

ādyaḥ	without beginning	SB 10.14.23

ādyāḥ	beginning with	SB 11.7.48

a-kāra-ādyāḥ	beginning with the letter a	SB 12.6.42

sarga-ādyāḥ	bringing about creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Madhya 20.113

māyā-ādyaiḥ	beginning with the unmanifest stage of nature	SB 12.11.5

ādyam	beginning with	SB 10.61.5

ādyam	the beginning	Bs 5.33

ādye	before the beginning of	SB 1.6.2

darpaṇa-ādye	beginning in a mirror	CC Adi 4.144

ahaḥ-āgame	at the beginning of the day	BG 8.18

āgata-sādhvasaḥ	in the beginning becoming afraid	SB 6.4.40

āge	in the beginning	CC Adi 4.54

āge	in the beginning	CC Adi 14.33

āge	in the beginning	CC Adi 17.84

āge haite	from the very beginning	CC Madhya 11.149

āge	in the beginning	CC Madhya 18.196

āge	in the beginning	CC Antya 19.87

agha-ogha-nāśaḥ	who annihilates all kinds of inauspicious offenses for a devotee	CC Madhya 25.128

yuga-anta-agni	like the fire at the end of every millennium	SB 6.12.2

agrajān	all his elder brothers, beginning from Yadu	SB 9.19.23

agre	in the beginning	BG 18.37

agre	in the beginning	BG 18.38

agre	in the beginning	BG 18.39

agre	in the beginning	SB 3.7.21

agre	in the beginning	SB 3.10.13

agre	in the beginning	SB 3.13.30

agre	in the beginning, before the creation	SB 6.4.47

agre	in the beginning	SB 8.1.14

agre	in the beginning	SB 8.6.10

agre	in the beginning	SB 10.3.14

agre	in the beginning	SB 10.87.37

ahaḥ-āgame	at the beginning of the day	BG 8.18

ajaḥ	unborn, beginningless	SB 8.1.13

ājanma	from the very beginning of his life	CC Adi 10.74

ājanma	from the very beginning of life	CC Adi 12.13

āji-mukhe	in the very beginning of the battle	SB 6.10.29

ākāśa-ādi	beginning with the sky	CC Madhya 19.233

akṛta	beginningless	SB 10.16.49

anādeḥ	of the beginningless	SB 3.11.38

anādi	without beginning	BG 11.19

anādi	beginningless	BG 13.13

anādī	without beginning	BG 13.20

anādi-nidhanam	without beginning and end	SB 1.8.28

anādi	without any beginning	SB 2.6.40-41

anādi	without beginning	SB 2.10.34

anādi-saṃsāra-anubhavasya	of the perception of the beginningless process of transmigration	SB 5.14.1

anādi	beginningless	SB 10.77.32

anādi	without beginning	SB 11.3.8

anādi	without beginning	SB 11.16.1

anādi	without beginning	SB 11.22.10

anādi	without beginning	SB 12.4.15-19

anādi-anta-vatā	without beginning or end	SB 12.4.37

anādi	who has no beginning	SB 12.6.2

anādi	beginningless	SB 12.11.29

anādi	without beginning	SB 12.11.50

anādiḥ	without a beginning	SB 3.26.3

anādiḥ	without beginning	SB 3.29.45

anādiḥ	without beginning	SB 4.11.19

anādiḥ	without beginning	SB 7.3.30

anādiḥ	beginningless	SB 11.11.4

anādiḥ	without beginning	CC Adi 2.107

anādiḥ	without beginning	CC Madhya 8.137

anādiḥ	without beginning	CC Madhya 20.154

anādiḥ	without beginning	CC Madhya 21.35

anādiḥ	without beginning	Bs 5.1

anādim	without beginning	BG 10.3

anādim	without a beginning	Bs 5.33

kā stry ańga te ślokera	of the verse beginning with the words kā stry ańga te	CC Antya 20.132

ańguli	on the fingers, beginning with the index finger	SB 6.8.7

anīnaśat	drove away or annihilated	SB 9.15.15

yuga-anta	at the end of the millennium	SB 2.7.12

yuga-anta	at the end of the millennium	SB 3.8.17

kalpa-anta	in the beginning of the devastation	SB 3.11.31

anta-karaḥ	annihilator	SB 4.11.19

ādi-anta-vat	everything material has a beginning and an end	SB 5.10.11

yuga-anta-arṇave	in the water of devastation at the end of the millennium	SB 5.18.28

yuga-anta	at the end of the millennium	SB 6.8.23

yuga-anta	of the end of the millennium	SB 6.9.12

yuga-anta-agni	like the fire at the end of every millennium	SB 6.12.2

ādi-anta	in both the beginning and the end	SB 6.16.36

ādi-anta-vantaḥ	who all have a beginning and end	SB 7.9.49

anta-kāle	at the time of annihilation	SB 8.7.32

yuga-anta	at the end of the millennium	SB 9.6.18

yuga-anta	at the end of a millennium	SB 10.59.7

ādi-anta-vantaḥ	possessing a beginning and end	SB 11.14.11

anta	and its annihilation	SB 11.22.12

ādi-anta-vat	having a beginning and an end	SB 11.28.9

ādi-anta-vat	which has a beginning and an end	SB 12.4.23

ādi-anta-vat	subject to beginning and end	SB 12.4.28

anādi-anta-vatā	without beginning or end	SB 12.4.37

yuga-antaḥ	the end of the millennium	SB 7.8.41

kula-antakam	the annihilator of the dynasty	SB 9.15.14

antakam	for her own annihilation	SB 10.6.8

ā-kalpa-antam	up to the end of the millennium	SB 5.19.9

antam	and annihilation	SB 10.50.29

manu-antara	of the manvantara millennium	SB 5.1.28

mānasottara-mervoḥ antaram	the land between Mānasottara and Meru (beginning from the middle of Mount Sumeru)	SB 5.20.35

antaram	in this millennium	SB 8.5.1

yuga-manu-antare	in the ages and millenniums of Manu	CC Adi 5.113

yuga-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 3.33.4

kalpa-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 4.9.14

yuga-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 5.18.6

kalpa-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 7.3.11

atīta-kalpa-ante	at the end of the period of the last Manu, or at the end of the last millennium	SB 9.1.2-3

kalpa-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 9.1.8

ante	in the annihilation	SB 10.14.19

kalpa-ante	at the time of annihilation	SB 11.9.16

nidhanāt anu	after its annihilation	SB 10.87.37

anu-yugam	according to the millennium	CC Madhya 20.331

anubhava-ātmani	which is always thought of (beginning from the lotus feet and gradually progressing upward)	SB 6.2.41

anādi-saṃsāra-anubhavasya	of the perception of the beginningless process of transmigration	SB 5.14.1

anudhāvatī	running after	SB 9.9.11

anugatiḥ	beginning	SB 2.8.13

anunaya	in winning over	SB 5.2.17

anupūrvaśaḥ	from the beginning	SB 2.8.24

anupūrvaśaḥ	according to order, or from the beginning to the end	SB 7.5.52

ānupūrvyeṇa	the beginning to the end	SB 2.8.29

ānupūrvyeṇa	from beginning to end	SB 3.10.2

yuga-anuvṛttam	according to the different millenniums	SB 7.9.38

anuyugam	according to different millenniums	SB 4.1.26-27

anvadhāvat	running after	SB 11.5.34

apāṇi-pāda-śruti	the śruti-mantra beginning apāni-pādaḥ	CC Madhya 6.150

pūrva-aparam	the beginning and the end	SB 10.9.13-14

dāra-apatya-ādayaḥ	beginning with the wife and children	SB 5.14.3

guṇa-apāya	the cause of the annihilation of everything made of the material modes of nature	SB 6.4.29

apāya	and annihilation	SB 11.24.22-27

apyaya-bhāvayoḥ	of annihilation and generation	SB 4.12.3

apyaya	and annihilation	SB 7.10.43-44

apyayaḥ	annihilation	SB 2.8.10

apyayāḥ	and annihilation	SB 4.29.79

apyayaḥ	and annihilation	SB 11.16.9

apyayam	and annihilation	SB 11.18.45

apyayam	and annihilation	SB 12.12.4

sarga-sthiti-apyayān	creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 8.7.23

apyayān	and annihilation	SB 11.19.15

apyayau	annihilation	SB 11.20.22

apyayāya	annihilation	SB 9.24.58

apyayāya	for annihilation	SB 11.4.5

apyaye	during the annihilation	SB 11.4.18

apyayeṣu	and annihilation	SB 11.31.13

ārabdhaḥ	beginning from	SB 3.11.23

ārabdhaḥ	beginning	SB 4.23.4

ārabdhāḥ	beginning	SB 10.21.4

ārabhya	beginning	SB 3.31.10

ārabhya	beginning	SB 5.1.26

ārabhya	beginning	SB 5.7.3

ārabhya	beginning	SB 7.1.18

ārabhya	beginning	SB 8.16.48

ārabhya	beginning	SB 9.13.1

tataḥ ārabhya	beginning from that time	SB 10.5.18

ārabhya	beginning from	SB 11.3.10

ārabhya	beginning from	SB 12.2.26

ārambha	beginning	CC Adi 8.77

vidyā-ārambha	the beginning of education	CC Adi 15.4

rāsa-ārambha-vidhau	in the matter of beginning the rāsa dance	CC Adi 17.293

ārambha	beginning	CC Madhya 6.120

ārambha	beginning	CC Madhya 9.253

ārambha	beginning	CC Madhya 11.213

ārambha	the beginning	CC Antya 1.35

divya-unmāda-ārambha	the beginning of the spiritual trance of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Antya 20.123

ārambhaḥ	the beginning of	SB 2.8.7

stambha-ārambham	the beginning of stupefaction	CC Adi 4.202

ārambhana	the beginning	CC Madhya 25.147

ārambhe	in the beginning	CC Adi 1.20

grantha-ārambhe	in the beginning of the book	CC Adi 13.6

kīrtana-ārambhe	in the beginning of the sańkīrtana	CC Madhya 11.218

bhāgavata-ārambhe	in the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam	CC Madhya 20.358

ārambhe	from the beginning	CC Antya 3.183

ārambhe	by the beginning	CC Antya 3.185

arcā-ādau	beginning with worship of the Deity	SB 3.29.25

yuga-anta-arṇave	in the water of devastation at the end of the millennium	SB 5.18.28

utsādana-artham	for the sake of causing annihilation	BG 17.19

asmat	unto us, beginning from Brahmā down to the insignificant ant	SB 2.7.23

galat-aśru-dhārayā	by streams of tears running down	CC Antya 20.36

asura-ādiṣu	beginning with the asuras	SB 8.16.14

asyataḥ	for the supreme annihilator	SB 8.22.20

ati-rabhasān	running very swiftly	SB 10.44.41

atīta-bhave	in the previous millennium	SB 1.5.23

atīta-kalpa-ante	at the end of the period of the last Manu, or at the end of the last millennium	SB 9.1.2-3

vilaya-udaya-ātmane	in whom everything is annihilated and from whom everything is again manifested	SB 5.17.24

anubhava-ātmani	which is always thought of (beginning from the lotus feet and gradually progressing upward)	SB 6.2.41

ātmārāma iti	beginning with the word ātmārāma	CC Madhya 24.1

atsi	annihilate	SB 4.6.43

avati atti	maintains and annihilates	SB 1.3.36

avati atti	annihilates	SB 1.5.6

avati atti	also maintains and annihilates	SB 1.10.24

atti	annihilates	SB 3.29.38

atti	annihilates	SB 4.11.26

atti	annihilates	SB 10.84.17

kalā-atyaye	after the annihilation of the material world	SB 4.24.29

kalpa-avadhi	until the end of the millennium	CC Madhya 20.145

avalumpate	annihilates	SB 7.2.39

prathama-avasare	in the beginning of the day	CC Madhya 15.5

bhūta-āvāsāya	who are the shelter of the material elements (beginning with the ethereal sky)	SB 10.16.39

yuga-avatāra	incarnation of millenniums	CC Madhya 20.329

avati atti	maintains and annihilates	SB 1.3.36

avati atti	annihilates	SB 1.5.6

avati atti	also maintains and annihilates	SB 1.10.24

āviriñcyān	beginning from the topmost planet	SB 9.5.25

āviriñcyāt	beginning from Lord Brahmā (down to the small ant)	SB 7.9.24

avyakta-ādīni	in the beginning unmanifested	BG 2.28

ayam	this process of creation and annihilation	SB 2.10.46

ayuge	and before that, during the time of annihilation	SB 11.24.2

ā-bāla-vṛddha	beginning from the children up to the old persons	CC Madhya 4.83

bālya haite	from the very beginning of my childhood	CC Madhya 24.253

bhāgavata-ārambhe	in the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam	CC Madhya 20.358

bhāgi'	running away	CC Antya 4.149

bhava-kṣaya	annihilation of material existence	CC Madhya 20.142

apyaya-bhāvayoḥ	of annihilation and generation	SB 4.12.3

atīta-bhave	in the previous millennium	SB 1.5.23

mura-bhidi	in the annihilator of the demon Mura	MM 9

huta-bhuk	the fire (of universal annihilation)	SB 10.66.17

bhūta-āvāsāya	who are the shelter of the material elements (beginning with the ethereal sky)	SB 10.16.39

bīja-ādi	beginning from the seed (i.e., from the time of conception)	SB 12.7.20

bisa-ūrṇa-vat	like the fiber running up the lotus stalk	SB 11.14.34

brahma-kalpe	the millennium in which Brahmā was first generated	SB 2.8.28

ā-brahma	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 5.14.29

brahma	mantras beginning with oṃ (such as oṃ tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padaṃ sadā paśyanti sūrayaḥ)	SB 6.5.26

brahma-ādayaḥ	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 6.9.21

brahma-ādayaḥ	the demigods, beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 7.5.13

brahma-ādayaḥ	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 7.8.7

brahmā-ādayaḥ	the demigods, beginning with Brahmā, Śiva, Indra and Candra	SB 8.3.30

brahma-ādīnām	beginning with Lord Brahmā	SB 12.4.35

brahma-ādi	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 12.6.67

brahmā-ādi	beginning from Lord Brahmā	CC Madhya 24.307

brahma-ādi jīva	all living entities, beginning from Lord Brahmā	CC Antya 3.251

brahmā-ādi-devera	of the demigods, beginning with Lord Brahmā	CC Antya 5.75

brahmā-śiva-ādika	demigods, beginning from Lord Brahmā and Śiva	CC Antya 8.2

brahma-ādi	beginning from Lord Brahmā	Bs 5.53

brāhmaṇa-ādiṣu	beginning with the brāhmaṇas	SB 10.89.64

madhyataḥ ca	also in the middle (the duration between the beginning and end)	SB 7.9.30

cakra-ādi	of weapons, beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.221

cakra-ādi	beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.222

cakra-ādi-dhāraṇa	holding of the weapons, beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.223

cakra-ādi-dhāraṇa	the holding of weapons, beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.237

nāśayām cakruḥ	began to annihilate	SB 7.10.54-55

calantyāḥ	who was running about	SB 12.8.26-27

vyajana-cāmara	white yak-tail hair for fanning	SB 4.7.21

cāpalya	cunning behavior	CC Adi 14.61

catuḥ-yugam	four millenniums	SB 3.11.18

caturaḥ	cunning	CC Madhya 23.72

chandāṃsi adhyāpayiṣyan	desiring to teach him Vedic mantras during the months beginning with Śrāvaṇa or during the period of Cāturmāsya	SB 5.9.5

dahana	O annihilator	SB 1.8.43

dahana	O annihilator	SB 12.11.25

ādi-daityau	demons in the beginning of creation	SB 3.17.16

dakṣa-ādayaḥ	beginning with Dakṣa	SB 5.5.21-22

dānava-sańkṣayam	the total annihilation of the demons	SB 8.11.43

dāra-apatya-ādayaḥ	beginning with the wife and children	SB 5.14.3

darpaṇa-ādye	beginning in a mirror	CC Adi 4.144

deha-tyāga-ādi	beginning with giving up the material body	CC Antya 4.57

brahmā-ādi-devera	of the demigods, beginning with Lord Brahmā	CC Antya 5.75

dhāiyā	running	CC Adi 17.92

dhāiyā	running	CC Madhya 14.55

dhāñā	running	CC Adi 7.29-30

dhāñā	running	CC Adi 17.245

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 2.9

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 7.84

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 9.231

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 10.134

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 11.105

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 11.153

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 11.164

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 11.218

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 13.86

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 15.273

dhāñā	running	CC Madhya 24.270

dhāñā	running	CC Antya 9.41

dhāñā	running	CC Antya 15.29

tāra śata śata dhāra	the flow of that eternal bliss is running in hundreds of branches	CC Madhya 25.271

cakra-ādi-dhāraṇa	holding of the weapons, beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.223

cakra-ādi-dhāraṇa	the holding of weapons, beginning with the disc	CC Madhya 20.237

galat-aśru-dhārayā	by streams of tears running down	CC Antya 20.36

yuga-dharma	acts in terms of the millennium	SB 1.4.16

dharma-ādibhyaḥ	to the demigods, beginning with Yamarāja	SB 11.27.38-41

yuga-dharma	the religion of the millennium	CC Adi 17.316

karena yuga-dharma	manifests His pastimes in different millenniums	CC Madhya 20.330

dhāvadbhiḥ	running away	SB 6.11.4

dhāvamānaḥ	running	SB 5.26.15

dhāvan	running	SB 10.43.11

dhāvan	running	SB 11.2.35

dhāvan	running	CC Antya 14.120

dhāvan	running	CC Antya 18.1

prabhura dhāvana	the running of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Antya 20.125

dhāvantībhiḥ	running	SB 10.46.9-13

dhāvat	running	SB 3.21.18

dhāvataḥ	who is running	SB 5.18.12

dhāvataḥ	running	CC Madhya 22.76

dhāvataḥ	those who are running	Iso 4

dhāvatām	running	SB 4.14.38

dhāvati	was running	SB 10.34.30

jayati te 'dhikam	beginning with the words jayati te 'dhikam	CC Madhya 14.8

dhṛṣṭa-puruṣa	a cunning male	CC Antya 16.125

dhruva-kṣitiḥ	Dhruva, whose planet would not be annihilated	SB 4.9.5

dhūma-ketuḥ	the annihilating fire	SB 11.6.10

sandhyā-dhūpa	dhūpa-ārati just in the beginning of the evening	CC Madhya 11.214

dhvastam	annihilated	SB 4.24.68

dhyāna-ādite	by processes beginning with meditation	CC Madhya 20.343

dīkṣāyāḥ	beginning with the initiation for a sacrifice	SB 10.23.8

se divasa haite	beginning from that day	CC Madhya 25.18

divya-unmāda-ārambha	the beginning of the spiritual trance of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Antya 20.123

dravanti	running away	SB 8.2.21

dṛśya-guṇeṣu	among the visible objects, beginning with the body	SB 10.3.18

meru-ādi-giri-duhitaraḥ	daughters of the mountains beginning with Meru	SB 5.17.10

duḥsvapna-ādi	beginning with sleeping badly at night	SB 8.4.15

dvāpara-ādau	at the end of the Dvāpara millennium	SB 12.6.46

dvāpare	in the second millennium	SB 1.4.14

dvāparera	of Dvāpara millennium	CC Madhya 20.336

stana-dvayāt	beginning from the breast	SB 2.5.39

etaiḥ	by all these (witnesses, beginning from the sun-god)	SB 6.1.43

eteṣu	on these mountains, beginning with Mandara	SB 5.16.12

galat-aśru-dhārayā	by streams of tears running down	CC Antya 20.36

prathama gamana	the beginning of the tour	CC Madhya 7.151

tārkika-ādi-gaṇa	all persons, beginning with the logicians	CC Adi 7.35

gati	movement of the legs (walking, running, etc.)	SB 11.16.36

palāñā gela	left, running away	CC Madhya 24.236

meru-ādi-giri-duhitaraḥ	daughters of the mountains beginning with Meru	SB 5.17.10

grahaṇa-ādibhiḥ	beginning with chanting	SB 6.3.22

graiṣma-vāsantikān	for four months, beginning with Caitra, on the fifteenth of May	SB 5.9.5

grantha-ārambhe	in the beginning of the book	CC Adi 13.6

gudataḥ	beginning from the anus	SB 10.72.43

guhyakau	which in a former millennium had been demigods	SB 10.9.22

guṇa-apāya	the cause of the annihilation of everything made of the material modes of nature	SB 6.4.29

dṛśya-guṇeṣu	among the visible objects, beginning with the body	SB 10.3.18

śrī-gurūn	unto the spiritual masters in the paramparā system, beginning from Mādhavendra Purī down to Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī ṭhākura Prabhupāda	CC Antya 2.1

śrī-gurūn	unto the spiritual masters in the paramparā system, beginning from Mādhavendra Purī down to Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī ṭhākura Prabhupāda	CC Antya 3.1

pura-hā	who annihilated the residences of the asuras	SB 7.10.69

sandhyā ha-ite	beginning from the evening	CC Antya 3.127

āge haite	from the very beginning	CC Madhya 11.149

sūrya-udaya haite	beginning from the sunrise	CC Madhya 20.389

bālya haite	from the very beginning of my childhood	CC Madhya 24.253

se divasa haite	beginning from that day	CC Madhya 25.18

prātaḥ-kāla haite	beginning from the morning	CC Antya 2.59

śiśu-kāla haite	from the beginning of childhood	CC Antya 4.30

haṃsi	You annihilate	SB 9.11.6

śatru-han	O annihilator of enemies	SB 4.4.24

hanti	annihilates	SB 1.8.16

hanti	annihilates	SB 4.11.25

haran	annihilating	SB 4.7.51

harasi	annihilate	SB 6.9.34

harati	annihilates	CC Madhya 20.318

harati	annihilates	CC Madhya 21.37

harer nāma-ślokera	of the verse beginning harer nāma harer nāma	CC Madhya 25.29

harṣa-ādi	beginning with jubilation	CC Antya 15.86

jāta-hāsāḥ	beginning to laugh	SB 10.22.12

huta-bhuk	the fire (of universal annihilation)	SB 10.66.17

iha	in this millennium	SB 3.9.24

īhate	engages in activities of creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 8.1.15

sandhyā ha-ite	beginning from the evening	CC Antya 3.127

ātmārāma iti	beginning with the word ātmārāma	CC Madhya 24.1

jagat saṃhāra	annihilation of the material world	CC Adi 5.105

jambū-ādiṣu	beginning with Jambū	SB 5.1.33

janma-ādyāḥ	beginning with birth	SB 7.7.18

janma-ādi	the creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 8.1.13

sthiti-janma-nāśam	creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 8.12.11

janmanā	from the very beginning of his birth	SB 4.13.7

janmanā	from the very beginning of birth	SB 7.10.8

jāta-hāsāḥ	beginning to laugh	SB 10.22.12

jayati te 'dhikam	beginning with the words jayati te 'dhikam	CC Madhya 14.8

jihvā-ādau	beginning with the tongue	CC Madhya 17.136

jiti'	winning	CC Madhya 5.42

brahma-ādi jīva	all living entities, beginning from Lord Brahmā	CC Antya 3.251

kā stry ańga te ślokera	of the verse beginning with the words kā stry ańga te	CC Antya 20.132

kailuń saba kṣaya	have annihilated all	CC Madhya 13.156

kaiśore	the beginning of youth	CC Madhya 19.103

kalā-atyaye	after the annihilation of the material world	SB 4.24.29

kāla-vikramaḥ	the influence of time or annihilation	CC Madhya 20.270

prātaḥ-kāla haite	beginning from the morning	CC Antya 2.59

śiśu-kāla haite	from the beginning of childhood	CC Antya 4.30

kopa-kālaḥ	the right time for Your anger (for the purpose of annihilating the universe)	SB 7.8.41

kālaḥ	the time element (which creates and annihilates)	SB 7.9.22

kālanaḥ	the annihilator	SB 12.12.66

tat kāle	at the end of the millennium	SB 2.10.43

kāle kāle	in different millenniums	SB 8.5.46

kāle kāle	in different millenniums	SB 8.5.46

anta-kāle	at the time of annihilation	SB 8.7.32

kalpa-kṣaye	at the end of the millennium	BG 9.7

kalpa-ādau	in the beginning of the millennium	BG 9.7

kalpa	millennium	SB 3.9.27-28

kalpa-ādiṣu	in different millenniums	SB 3.10.30

kalpa-anta	in the beginning of the devastation	SB 3.11.31

kalpa-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 4.9.14

kalpa	a day of Brahmā (millennium)	SB 4.9.20-21

ā-kalpa-antam	up to the end of the millennium	SB 5.19.9

kalpa-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 7.3.11

atīta-kalpa-ante	at the end of the period of the last Manu, or at the end of the last millennium	SB 9.1.2-3

kalpa-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 9.1.8

kalpa-ante	at the time of annihilation	SB 11.9.16

nānā-yuga-kalpa	of the different millennia and the days of Brahmā	SB 12.9.28-29

kalpa-avadhi	until the end of the millennium	CC Madhya 20.145

kalpaḥ	the duration of time between creation and annihilation	SB 2.8.12

kalpaḥ	millennium	SB 3.11.35

kalpaḥ	millennium	SB 3.11.36

kalpaḥ	the current millennium	SB 3.11.37

kalpāt	from the millennium	SB 3.11.16

ā-kalpāt	from the very beginning of Lord Brahmā's day	SB 10.87.6

kalpe kalpe	in each and every millennium	SB 2.6.39

kalpe kalpe	in each and every millennium	SB 2.6.39

brahma-kalpe	the millennium in which Brahmā was first generated	SB 2.8.28

mahā-kalpe	great millennium	SB 8.24.11

a-kāra-ādyāḥ	beginning with the letter a	SB 12.6.42

anta-karaḥ	annihilator	SB 4.11.19

vaṣaṭ-kāram	the mantra beginning with the word vaṣaṭ	SB 9.1.15

karena yuga-dharma	manifests His pastimes in different millenniums	CC Madhya 20.330

sahasra-śīrṣā-ādi kari'	by the Vedic hymns beginning with sahasra-śīrṣā (ṛg Veda-saṃhitā 10.90.1)	CC Madhya 20.292

vījana-ādi kari'	fanning and so on	CC Antya 15.92

tava kathāmṛtam	beginning with the words tava kathāmṛtam	CC Madhya 14.10

kautukī	very cunning	CC Antya 1.168

keśava-ādi	beginning with Lord Keśava	CC Madhya 20.194

dhūma-ketuḥ	the annihilating fire	SB 11.6.10

kha-ādayaḥ	beginning with ether	SB 11.22.19

kila-kiñcita-ādi	beginning with the ecstasy named kila-kiñcita	CC Madhya 14.170

kila-kiñcita-ādi	beginning with the ecstasy named kila-kiñcita	CC Madhya 14.170

kīrtana-ārambhe	in the beginning of the sańkīrtana	CC Madhya 11.218

kiśora vayase	just before the beginning of His youthful life	CC Adi 13.31

kopa-kālaḥ	the right time for Your anger (for the purpose of annihilating the universe)	SB 7.8.41

koṭi-yuga	millions of millenniums	CC Antya 18.14

kṛṣṇa-ādi	beginning from Kṛṣṇa	CC Antya 3.268

kṛṣṇa-premera ullāsa	the beginning of the flow of love of Kṛṣṇa	CC Antya 20.11

ādi-kṛt	beginning of everything	SB 4.11.19

kṛta-ādau	at the beginning of the next Satya-yuga	SB 9.22.11

kṛtāntaḥ	personified annihilation	SB 6.9.12

krūrāḥ	cunning	SB 9.14.37

kṣapayati	annihilates	SB 4.24.61

kailuń saba kṣaya	have annihilated all	CC Madhya 13.156

saṃsārera kṣaya	annihilation of entanglement in the material world	CC Madhya 15.109

bhava-kṣaya	annihilation of material existence	CC Madhya 20.142

saṃsāra-kṣaya	annihilation of bondage to the material world	CC Antya 3.70

kṣayaḥ	annihilation	SB 6.16.44

yadu-kula-kṣayam	annihilation of the Yadu dynasty	SB 1.13.12

kalpa-kṣaye	at the end of the millennium	BG 9.7

kṣiti-ādīnām	of the five elements, beginning with the earth	SB 7.15.59

dhruva-kṣitiḥ	Dhruva, whose planet would not be annihilated	SB 4.9.5

yadu-kula-kṣayam	annihilation of the Yadu dynasty	SB 1.13.12

kula-antakam	the annihilator of the dynasty	SB 9.15.14

kvacit	sometimes, at the beginning of a kalpa	SB 8.3.4

lalita-lavańga-latā	beginning with the words lalita-lavańga-latā	CC Antya 19.84

lalita-lavańga-latā	beginning with the words lalita-lavańga-latā	CC Antya 19.84

lalita-lavańga-latā	beginning with the words lalita-lavańga-latā	CC Antya 19.84

laya	annihilation	SB 4.30.23

laya	and annihilation	SB 6.9.42

laya	annihilation	SB 6.12.7

laya	at the time of universal annihilation	SB 10.77.35

laya	to annihilation	CC Madhya 6.143

layaḥ	and annihilation	SB 10.87.24

layaḥ	the annihilation	SB 12.4.22

layaḥ	annihilation	SB 12.4.38

layaḥ	annihilation	SB 12.7.17

layau	annihilation	SB 12.4.1

layeṣu	in annihilation	SB 4.7.39

loka-pālāḥ	the great leaders of the universe, beginning with Lord Brahmā	SB 5.18.27

loka-samplavaḥ	the annihilation of the universe	SB 12.9.34

lopa	and of annihilation	SB 7.9.42

lumpati	annihilates	SB 7.3.26-27

lunanti	annihilate	SB 7.9.40

mādhavāḥ	the dynasty beginning from Madhu	SB 9.23.29

madhu-ādiṣu	beginning with Madhu	SB 12.11.32

madhyam	between the beginning and the end, the sustenance	SB 8.12.5

madhyataḥ ca	also in the middle (the duration between the beginning and end)	SB 7.9.30

mahā-kalpe	great millennium	SB 8.24.11

mahat-ādīnām	beginning with Lord Brahmā	SB 3.29.37

yuga-mānam	the duration of the millennia	SB 12.4.1

mānasottara-mervoḥ antaram	the land between Mānasottara and Meru (beginning from the middle of Mount Sumeru)	SB 5.20.35

mańgala-ācaraṇe	in the performance of auspiciousness in the beginning	CC Antya 1.182

manu-antara	of the manvantara millennium	SB 5.1.28

yuga-manu-antare	in the ages and millenniums of Manu	CC Adi 5.113

prathamei māribā	kill them in the beginning	CC Madhya 24.247

matsya-ādi	beginning with Matsya	CC Adi 4.11-12

māyā-ādyaiḥ	beginning with the unmanifest stage of nature	SB 12.11.5

mayūra-ādi	beginning with peacocks	CC Madhya 17.44

meru-ādi-giri-duhitaraḥ	daughters of the mountains beginning with Meru	SB 5.17.10

mānasottara-mervoḥ antaram	the land between Mānasottara and Meru (beginning from the middle of Mount Sumeru)	SB 5.20.35

mṛga-ādi	animals, beginning with the deer	CC Madhya 24.263

niśā-mukham	the beginning of night	SB 10.34.22

tretā-mukhe	in the beginning of Tretā-yuga	SB 6.10.16

āji-mukhe	in the very beginning of the battle	SB 6.10.29

tretā-mukhe	in the beginning of the Tretā-yuga	SB 9.14.49

tretā-mukhe	at the beginning of Tretā-yuga	SB 11.17.12

śarvarī-mukhe	in the beginning of evening	CC Antya 1.170

mura-bhidi	in the annihilator of the demon Mura	MM 9

harer nāma-ślokera	of the verse beginning harer nāma harer nāma	CC Madhya 25.29

nānā-yuga-kalpa	of the different millennia and the days of Brahmā	SB 12.9.28-29

nanda-ādyāḥ	beginning from Nanda Mahārāja	SB 10.1.61

nandāt	beginning from Nanda	SB 12.2.32

nārada-ādi	beginning with Nārada	MM 7

nāśa	annihilation	CC Adi 6.85

nāśa	annihilation	CC Madhya 20.141

yāya nāśa	becomes annihilated	CC Antya 6.125

sarva-nāśa	total annihilation	CC Antya 17.37

nāśāḥ	the annihilation	SB 6.3.12

nāśaḥ	the annihilation	SB 11.6.31

agha-ogha-nāśaḥ	who annihilates all kinds of inauspicious offenses for a devotee	CC Madhya 25.128

prajā-nāśam	annihilation of the living entities	SB 4.27.29

nāśam	to annihilation	SB 6.8.31

sthiti-janma-nāśam	creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 8.12.11

pāpa-saṃsāra-nāśana	annihilation of materialistic life resulting from sins	CC Antya 20.13

utpatha-nāśanāya	f or the sake of annihilating the upstarts	SB 3.1.44

nāśayām cakruḥ	began to annihilate	SB 7.10.54-55

nāśe	annihilated	CC Adi 8.35

naṣṭa-prāyam	virtually annihilated	SB 11.6.26-27

naṣṭam	was annihilated	SB 9.15.16

naṣṭe	after the annihilation	SB 10.3.25

naśvaram	although the body is destined to be annihilated	SB 10.10.9

naśyatsu	being annihilated	BG 8.20

sei nava sańgama	We are meeting in the same new spirit as in the beginning	CC Madhya 13.126

nāyam	beginning with the word nāyam	CC Madhya 9.137

anādi-nidhanam	without beginning and end	SB 1.8.28

nidhanam	annihilation	SB 7.9.31

nidhanam	the annihilation	SB 10.79.22

nidhanasya	of the annihilation	SB 2.6.11

nidhanāt anu	after its annihilation	SB 10.87.37

nikṛtiḥ	Cunning	SB 4.8.3

nimeṣa-ādiḥ	beginning with minute parts of time	SB 10.3.26

sṛṣṭi-ādi-nimitte	for the cause of creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Adi 5.81

nirākṛtiḥ	annihilation	SB 1.6.4

nirmāṇe	the beginning of creation	CC Adi 6.19

nirodha	annihilation	SB 1.5.20

nirodha	of the annihilation	SB 5.18.5

prāṇa-nirodham	and annihilation	SB 11.11.20

nirodhāya	for annihilation	SB 10.59.29

nirodhayoḥ	and the annihilation	SB 10.71.8

nirodhe	also at the time of annihilation	SB 1.6.24

nirupakramāya	who has no beginning	SB 6.9.45

vibhava-nirvāṇam	the annihilation of that opulence	SB 9.4.15-16

niśā-mukham	the beginning of night	SB 10.34.22

niṣeka-ādiṣu	beginning from the happiness derived from sex life	SB 7.7.46

niṣeka-ādi	the beginning of life (the purificatory process of garbhādhāna, performed when the father begets a child by discharging semen into the womb of the mother)	SB 7.15.52

niṣkiñcanasya	always penniless	SB 9.21.2

niṣṭhām	annihilation	SB 5.12.8

niyacchati	annihilates	SB 2.10.43

agha-ogha-nāśaḥ	who annihilates all kinds of inauspicious offenses for a devotee	CC Madhya 25.128

oṃ	beginning with oṃ	BG 17.24

oṃkāra-ādīni	beginning with oṃkāra	SB 6.8.4-6

apāṇi-pāda-śruti	the śruti-mantra beginning apāni-pādaḥ	CC Madhya 6.150

padmaja-ādibhiḥ	beginning with Lord Brahmā	SB 12.11.4

pahile	in the beginning	CC Madhya 8.268

pahilehi	in the beginning	CC Madhya 8.194

loka-pālāḥ	the great leaders of the universe, beginning with Lord Brahmā	SB 5.18.27

palāiyā	running away	CC Adi 14.72

palāñā	running away	CC Madhya 4.42

palāñā gela	left, running away	CC Madhya 24.236

palāñā	running away	CC Antya 6.36

palāyā	running away	CC Adi 17.252

palāyan	running (as soon as a serpent is seen, everyone runs away, fearing immediate death)	SB 10.3.27

pañcatvam	when everything illusory is annihilated	SB 8.3.5

pāpa-saṃsāra-nāśana	annihilation of materialistic life resulting from sins	CC Antya 20.13

param-tapa	O annihilator of enemies	SB 4.1.14

satya-param	who is the Absolute Truth (as stated in the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, satyaṃ paraṃ dhīmahi)	SB 10.2.26

paramāṇu-ādi	beginning from the time of minute atoms	SB 5.14.29

paridhāvatām	among those who were running about	SB 10.54.58

parikṣīṇeṣu	because of being annihilated in the Kurukṣetra war	SB 9.22.34

parivījayantyā	fanning	SB 10.69.13

paryādravadbhiḥ	running all around	SB 4.5.13

paugaṇḍake	at the age of paugaṇḍa, beginning with the sixth year (one year later)	SB 10.12.37

paugaṇḍe	in later childhood (beginning with His sixth year)	SB 10.14.59

pāyasa-ādayaḥ	beginning with sweet rice	SB 10.24.26

tataḥ prabhṛti	beginning from then	SB 6.3.34

adya prabhṛti	beginning from now	SB 10.73.18

prabhura dhāvana	the running of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Antya 20.125

pradhāvantaḥ	someone running on the ground after the birds	SB 10.12.7-11

prādravan	running away	SB 10.43.10

prajā-nāśam	annihilation of the living entities	SB 4.27.29

prāk	from the very beginning, before the creation of this cosmic manifestation	SB 10.3.14

pralaya	of annihilation	SB 10.40.17-18

pralaya	of universal annihilation	SB 10.66.39

pralaya	of annihilation	SB 12.3.17

pralaya	and annihilation	SB 12.4.36

sṛṣṭi-sthiti-pralaya	creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Adi 5.105

pralayaḥ	annihilation	BG 7.6

pralayaḥ	the annihilation	SB 12.4.3

pralayaḥ	annihilation	SB 12.4.4

pralayaḥ	the annihilation	SB 12.4.6

pralayaḥ	the process of annihilation	SB 12.12.44

pralayau	and annihilation	SB 12.4.35

pralayāya	to annihilation	SB 12.4.3

pralaye	in the annihilation	BG 14.2

pralaye	at the time of annihilation	SB 11.14.3

pralaye	at the time of annihilation	CC Madhya 25.112

sṛṣṭi-sthiti-pralayera	of creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Adi 5.80

pralīyante	are annihilated	BG 8.18

pralīyate	is annihilated	BG 8.19

pramukhāḥ	beginning with them	SB 8.1.19

prāṇa-nirodham	and annihilation	SB 11.11.20

praṇava-ādi	beginning with the oṃkāra	SB 6.8.7

prārambhaḥ	the beginning	CC Adi 3.63

prātaḥ-kāla haite	beginning from the morning	CC Antya 2.59

prathama gamana	the beginning of the tour	CC Madhya 7.151

prathama-avasare	in the beginning of the day	CC Madhya 15.5

prathama yauvana	the beginning of youth	CC Antya 3.112

prathame	in the beginning	CC Adi 12.8

prathame	in the beginning	CC Adi 13.7

prathame	at the beginning	CC Madhya 7.6

prathame	in the beginning	CC Madhya 14.173

prathame	in the beginning	CC Madhya 24.153

prathame	in the beginning	CC Antya 10.156

prathame	in the beginning	CC Antya 14.91

prathame	in the beginning	CC Antya 18.87

prathamei	in the beginning	CC Adi 10.34

prathamei	at the beginning	CC Madhya 7.112

prathamei	in the beginning	CC Madhya 12.72

prathamei	in the beginning	CC Madhya 17.16

prathamei	from the very beginning	CC Madhya 19.161

prathamei	in the beginning	CC Madhya 20.165

prathamei	in the beginning	CC Madhya 20.250

prathamei māribā	kill them in the beginning	CC Madhya 24.247

prathamete	in the beginning	CC Adi 17.235

prati-yuge	in every age or millennium	CC Madhya 6.100

pratisańkramaḥ	annihilation	SB 3.10.14

pratisańkramaḥ	the annihilation	SB 11.16.35

pratisańkrāme	in the annihilation	SB 11.19.16

pravāhaḥ	is made and annihilated	SB 1.9.32

pravartaye	in beginning	SB 3.8.2

pravṛttiḥ	the beginning	BG 15.3-4

naṣṭa-prāyam	virtually annihilated	SB 11.6.26-27

prema-ādika	love of Godhead, beginning with śānta, dāsya and so on	CC Madhya 23.47

kṛṣṇa-premera ullāsa	the beginning of the flow of love of Kṛṣṇa	CC Antya 20.11

prokṣaṇa-ādibhiḥ	by the various prescriptions beginning with sprinkling of water for purification	SB 11.27.29

purā	from the beginning	SB 1.13.22

purā	in the beginning of creation	SB 2.4.22

purā	in the beginning	SB 7.8.10

pura-hā	who annihilated the residences of the asuras	SB 7.10.69

purā	from beginningless time	CC Adi 1.5

purā	from beginningless time	CC Adi 4.55

puraḥ	from the very beginning	SB 4.28.25

purastāt	as it was in the beginning	SB 4.22.27

dhṛṣṭa-puruṣa	a cunning male	CC Antya 16.125

pūrva-ādibhiḥ	beginning with the front	SB 3.12.37

pūrva-ādibhiḥ	beginning from the front face	SB 3.12.38

pūrva-sarge	in a previous millennium	SB 10.3.32

pūrva-aparam	the beginning and the end	SB 10.9.13-14

pūrva-ādi	beginning from the east	CC Madhya 20.211

pūrvam	in the beginning	SB 3.12.43

pūrvam	in the beginning	SB 6.4.19

pūrvam	beginning	SB 10.9.13-14

pūrve	in the beginning	CC Adi 7.3

pūtanā-vadha-ādi	killing the demons, beginning from Pūtanā	CC Madhya 20.394

ati-rabhasān	running very swiftly	SB 10.44.41

ramā-ādika	beginning with the goddess of fortune	CC Antya 17.40

rāsa-ādika	beginning with the rāsa dance	CC Adi 4.81

rāsa-ādi	beginning with the rāsa dance	CC Adi 4.114

rāsa-ārambha-vidhau	in the matter of beginning the rāsa dance	CC Adi 17.293

śānta-ādi rasera	of the mellows beginning from neutrality	CC Madhya 23.56

rasikatā-utsiktā	being merged in the cunning behavior of the Lord	CC Madhya 14.180

riṣyate	annihilated	SB 8.12.46

sapta ṛṣayaḥ	the seven great sages (beginning with Marīci)	SB 5.17.3

ṛṣi-sargam	the millennium of the ṛṣis	SB 1.3.8

sparśa-rūpiṇā	which exhibits the forms of the different phonemes of the alphabet, beginning with the sparśa letters	SB 11.21.38-40

kailuń saba kṣaya	have annihilated all	CC Madhya 13.156

āgata-sādhvasaḥ	in the beginning becoming afraid	SB 6.4.40

yuga-sahasra-upalakṣaṇena	consisting of one thousand millenniums	SB 5.17.1

sahasra-śīrṣā-ādi kari'	by the Vedic hymns beginning with sahasra-śīrṣā (ṛg Veda-saṃhitā 10.90.1)	CC Madhya 20.292

sālokya-ādi	the five types of liberation, beginning from sālokya (residing on the same spiritual planet as the Lord)	CC Adi 4.204

sālokya-ādi	liberation, beginning sālokya	CC Adi 4.208

sālokya-ādi	beginning with sālokya	CC Madhya 6.267

sālokya-ādi	liberation, beginning with sālokya	CC Madhya 24.183

yuga-sama	like a great millennium	CC Antya 20.40

jagat saṃhāra	annihilation of the material world	CC Adi 5.105

samplavaḥ	annihilation by flood	SB 12.8.2-5

loka-samplavaḥ	the annihilation of the universe	SB 12.9.34

samplavam	annihilation	SB 12.4.34

sampracaratsu	when beginning to perform	SB 5.7.6

sampravṛttāyām	was just on the point of beginning	SB 9.14.43

anādi-saṃsāra-anubhavasya	of the perception of the beginningless process of transmigration	SB 5.14.1

saṃsāra-kṣaya	annihilation of bondage to the material world	CC Antya 3.70

pāpa-saṃsāra-nāśana	annihilation of materialistic life resulting from sins	CC Antya 20.13

saṃsārera kṣaya	annihilation of entanglement in the material world	CC Madhya 15.109

saṃsthā	the annihilation	SB 12.7.9-10

saṃvartakaḥ	of annihilation	SB 11.3.11

sāṃvartakaḥ	annihilating	SB 12.4.8

sāmvartakaḥ	causing annihilation	SB 12.4.11

sāṃvartakam	the name of the fire which devastates during the annihilation of the universe	SB 1.7.31

saṃvījana	fanning	CC Antya 14.97

saṃyama	and annihilation	SB 8.5.22

saṃyamaḥ	annihilation	SB 4.11.16

saṃyamam	annihilation	SB 5.17.21

saṃyamān	and annihilation	SB 7.8.40

saṃyamān	and annihilation	SB 10.3.19

saṃyamānām	and annihilation	SB 11.6.15

saṃyamāya	and annihilation	SB 8.17.9

sanātanam	without beginning	SB 4.21.42

sandeśāt	beginning from his being ordered (by Kaṃsa)	SB 10.38.27

sandhyā-dhūpa	dhūpa-ārati just in the beginning of the evening	CC Madhya 11.214

sandhyā ha-ite	beginning from the evening	CC Antya 3.127

sandhyayoḥ	at the beginning and the end of the day	SB 12.8.7-11

sei nava sańgama	We are meeting in the same new spirit as in the beginning	CC Madhya 13.126

dānava-sańkṣayam	the total annihilation of the demons	SB 8.11.43

sannidhānam	the conservation of all such energy when everything is annihilated	SB 10.2.28

sanniveśaḥ	Sanniveśa	SB 6.6.44

śānta-ādi rasera	of the mellows beginning from neutrality	CC Madhya 23.56

sapta ṛṣayaḥ	the seven great sages (beginning with Marīci)	SB 5.17.3

sapta-tantūn	the seven kinds of Vedic ritualistic ceremonies, beginning from the agniṣṭoma-yajña	SB 7.3.30

sarga-sthiti-apyayān	creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 8.7.23

sarga-ādyāḥ	bringing about creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Madhya 20.113

ṛṣi-sargam	the millennium of the ṛṣis	SB 1.3.8

sarge	in the beginning of the creation	SB 2.7.39

ādi-sarge	in the beginning of creation	SB 3.4.13

pūrva-sarge	in a previous millennium	SB 10.3.32

śarīriṇām	for all embodied beings (beginning with the great demigods)	SB 11.7.10

sarva-nāśa	total annihilation	CC Antya 17.37

śarvarī-mukhe	in the beginning of evening	CC Antya 1.170

tāra śata śata dhāra	the flow of that eternal bliss is running in hundreds of branches	CC Madhya 25.271

tāra śata śata dhāra	the flow of that eternal bliss is running in hundreds of branches	CC Madhya 25.271

yuga-śatam	a hundred millenniums	SB 10.19.16

śaṭha	very cunning	SB 5.6.2

śatru-han	O annihilator of enemies	SB 4.4.24

satya-param	who is the Absolute Truth (as stated in the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, satyaṃ paraṃ dhīmahi)	SB 10.2.26

satya-yuge	in the millennium of Satya-yuga	CC Madhya 20.334

tri-satyam	He is always present as the Absolute Truth, before the creation of this cosmic manifestation, during its maintenance, and even after its annihilation	SB 10.2.26

saubhaga-ādayaḥ	sons beginning with Saubhaga	SB 6.18.8

saubhari-ādi	beginning with the sage named Saubhari	CC Madhya 20.169

se divasa haite	beginning from that day	CC Madhya 25.18

sei nava sańgama	We are meeting in the same new spirit as in the beginning	CC Madhya 13.126

sahasra-śīrṣā-ādi kari'	by the Vedic hymns beginning with sahasra-śīrṣā (ṛg Veda-saṃhitā 10.90.1)	CC Madhya 20.292

śiśu-kāla haite	from the beginning of childhood	CC Antya 4.30

brahmā-śiva-ādika	demigods, beginning from Lord Brahmā and Śiva	CC Antya 8.2

harer nāma-ślokera	of the verse beginning harer nāma harer nāma	CC Madhya 25.29

kā stry ańga te ślokera	of the verse beginning with the words kā stry ańga te	CC Antya 20.132

sparśa-rūpiṇā	which exhibits the forms of the different phonemes of the alphabet, beginning with the sparśa letters	SB 11.21.38-40

śravaṇa-ādīni	the activities of bhakti-yoga, beginning with hearing and chanting	SB 10.6.3

śravaṇa-ādi	devotional service, beginning with hearing	CC Adi 7.141

śrī-gurūn	unto the spiritual masters in the paramparā system, beginning from Mādhavendra Purī down to Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī ṭhākura Prabhupāda	CC Antya 2.1

śrī-gurūn	unto the spiritual masters in the paramparā system, beginning from Mādhavendra Purī down to Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī ṭhākura Prabhupāda	CC Antya 3.1

śrīvāsa-ādi	beginning with Śrīvāsa	CC Madhya 10.117

sṛṣṭi-sthiti-pralayera	of creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Adi 5.80

sṛṣṭi-ādi-nimitte	for the cause of creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Adi 5.81

sṛṣṭi-sthiti-pralaya	creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Adi 5.105

apāṇi-pāda-śruti	the śruti-mantra beginning apāni-pādaḥ	CC Madhya 6.150

stambha-ārambham	the beginning of stupefaction	CC Adi 4.202

stana-dvayāt	beginning from the breast	SB 2.5.39

sthāvara-ādiṣu	beginning with the nonmoving forms of life, the trees and plants	SB 7.6.20-23

sarga-sthiti-apyayān	creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 8.7.23

sthiti-janma-nāśam	creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 8.12.11

sṛṣṭi-sthiti-pralayera	of creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Adi 5.80

sṛṣṭi-sthiti-pralaya	creation, maintenance and annihilation	CC Adi 5.105

kā stry ańga te ślokera	of the verse beginning with the words kā stry ańga te	CC Antya 20.132

sūrya-udaya haite	beginning from the sunrise	CC Madhya 20.389

svarlokaḥ	the higher planetary system, beginning with the heavenly planets	SB 2.5.42

svārociṣe	in the Svārociṣa millennium	SB 4.1.35

svarūpa-ādi	beginning with Svarūpa Dāmodara	CC Antya 9.36

svāyambhuve	the millennium of Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 10.3.32

sapta-tantūn	the seven kinds of Vedic ritualistic ceremonies, beginning from the agniṣṭoma-yajña	SB 7.3.30

param-tapa	O annihilator of enemies	SB 4.1.14

tāra śata śata dhāra	the flow of that eternal bliss is running in hundreds of branches	CC Madhya 25.271

tārkika-ādi-gaṇa	all persons, beginning with the logicians	CC Adi 7.35

tat kāle	at the end of the millennium	SB 2.10.43

tataḥ prabhṛti	beginning from then	SB 6.3.34

tataḥ ārabhya	beginning from that time	SB 10.5.18

tava kathāmṛtam	beginning with the words tava kathāmṛtam	CC Madhya 14.10

jayati te 'dhikam	beginning with the words jayati te 'dhikam	CC Madhya 14.8

kā stry ańga te ślokera	of the verse beginning with the words kā stry ańga te	CC Antya 20.132

traya-vidhuraḥ	although without beginning, end or middle	SB 6.16.36

tretā-mukhe	in the beginning of Tretā-yuga	SB 6.10.16

tretā-ādiṣu	beginning from Tretā-yuga	SB 7.14.39

tretā-mukhe	in the beginning of the Tretā-yuga	SB 9.14.49

tretā-mukhe	at the beginning of Tretā-yuga	SB 11.17.12

tretāyām	when the Tretā millennium	SB 9.14.43

tri-yuga	You who are manifest in all three millenniums	SB 3.16.22

tri-satyam	He is always present as the Absolute Truth, before the creation of this cosmic manifestation, during its maintenance, and even after its annihilation	SB 10.2.26

deha-tyāga-ādi	beginning with giving up the material body	CC Antya 4.57

ubhayam	both (manifestation and annihilation)	SB 8.3.4

uccāṭanam	annihilator	CC Madhya 15.110

udāhṛtaḥ	has already been described (in the beginning of the Ninth Canto)	SB 9.14.14

uḍāñā	fanning	CC Adi 12.12

vilaya-udaya-ātmane	in whom everything is annihilated and from whom everything is again manifested	SB 5.17.24

udaya	of the beginning	SB 8.12.7

sūrya-udaya haite	beginning from the sunrise	CC Madhya 20.389

kṛṣṇa-premera ullāsa	the beginning of the flow of love of Kṛṣṇa	CC Antya 20.11

divya-unmāda-ārambha	the beginning of the spiritual trance of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Antya 20.123

upāgate	just in the beginning	SB 2.8.28

upakrame	in the beginning	SB 7.12.3

yuga-sahasra-upalakṣaṇena	consisting of one thousand millenniums	SB 5.17.1

upanayana-ādi	beginning with offering the sacred thread or training the conditioned soul to qualify as a bona fide brāhmaṇa	SB 5.14.30

ādya-upānta	from beginning to end	CC Madhya 18.226

ādya-upānta	from beginning to the end	CC Madhya 20.65

upekṣitaḥ	not controlled in the beginning	SB 10.4.38

bisa-ūrṇa-vat	like the fiber running up the lotus stalk	SB 11.14.34

utpatha-nāśanāya	f or the sake of annihilating the upstarts	SB 3.1.44

utpatti	beginning	CC Adi 16.80

utpattyā	from the beginning of His appearance	SB 5.4.1

utsādana-artham	for the sake of causing annihilation	BG 17.19

utsarpaṇa	releasing and running in front	SB 10.44.4

rasikatā-utsiktā	being merged in the cunning behavior of the Lord	CC Madhya 14.180

pūtanā-vadha-ādi	killing the demons, beginning from Pūtanā	CC Madhya 20.394

vadhaḥ	annihilation	SB 7.1.25

vadhaḥ	the annihilation	SB 12.12.37

vadham	annihilation	SB 3.4.23

vadham	annihilation	SB 8.11.37

vadhāt	from the annihilation	SB 7.1.25

vaidagdhya-vibheda	the intricacies of cunning behavior	CC Madhya 14.149

vaiṣṇavān	unto all the Vaiṣṇavas, beginning from Lord Brahmā and others coming from the very start of the creation	CC Antya 2.1

vaiṣṇavān	unto all the Vaiṣṇavas, beginning from Lord Brahmā and others coming from the very point of creation	CC Antya 3.1

vāṇīnātha-ādi	beginning with Vāṇīnātha	CC Antya 9.34

vanitā-ādi	beginning with the wife	SB 4.29.54

ādi-anta-vantaḥ	who all have a beginning and end	SB 7.9.49

ādi-anta-vantaḥ	possessing a beginning and end	SB 11.14.11

graiṣma-vāsantikān	for four months, beginning with Caitra, on the fifteenth of May	SB 5.9.5

vaṣaṭ-kāram	the mantra beginning with the word vaṣaṭ	SB 9.1.15

vastrera vātāsa	fanning with the cloth	CC Madhya 17.220

vāsudeva-ādi	beginning with Lord Vāsudeva	CC Madhya 20.226

ādi-anta-vat	everything material has a beginning and an end	SB 5.10.11

bisa-ūrṇa-vat	like the fiber running up the lotus stalk	SB 11.14.34

ādi-anta-vat	having a beginning and an end	SB 11.28.9

ādi-anta-vat	which has a beginning and an end	SB 12.4.23

ādi-anta-vat	subject to beginning and end	SB 12.4.28

anādi-anta-vatā	without beginning or end	SB 12.4.37

vastrera vātāsa	fanning with the cloth	CC Madhya 17.220

kiśora vayase	just before the beginning of His youthful life	CC Adi 13.31

veda-ādi	beginning with the Vedas	CC Madhya 20.144

vibhava-nirvāṇam	the annihilation of that opulence	SB 9.4.15-16

vaidagdhya-vibheda	the intricacies of cunning behavior	CC Madhya 14.149

vibhraṃśita	annihilated	SB 3.23.8

vicchāyābhiḥ	with running shadows	SB 10.12.7-11

vicintayan	planning	SB 9.19.4

vidagdhā	cunning	CC Madhya 23.87-91

rāsa-ārambha-vidhau	in the matter of beginning the rāsa dance	CC Adi 17.293

traya-vidhuraḥ	although without beginning, end or middle	SB 6.16.36

vidyā-ārambha	the beginning of education	CC Adi 15.4

vihāra-yogaḥ	engagement in the pastimes of material creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 6.9.34

vījana	fanning	SB 10.59.45

vījana	fanning	SB 10.61.6

vījana-ādi kari'	fanning and so on	CC Antya 15.92

vījana	fanning	CC Antya 18.108

vījane	in fanning with a cāmara fan	CC Adi 4.202

vījayatī	fanning	SB 10.60.7

vikalpaḥ	subsidiary creation and annihilation	SB 2.8.12

kāla-vikramaḥ	the influence of time or annihilation	CC Madhya 20.270

vilāsa-ādi	beginning with transcendental enjoyment	CC Madhya 14.183

vilaya-udaya-ātmane	in whom everything is annihilated and from whom everything is again manifested	SB 5.17.24

vilumpan	in the matter of annihilation	SB 2.9.27

vināśāya	for the annihilation	BG 4.8

vinaśyati	is annihilated	BG 8.20

viplavaḥ	annihilation	SB 8.3.25

ā-viriñcāt	beginning from Lord Brahmā	SB 5.15.13

ā-bāla-vṛddha	beginning from the children up to the old persons	CC Madhya 4.83

vṛṣṇayaḥ	the dynasty beginning from Vṛṣṇi	SB 9.23.29

vyajana-cāmara	white yak-tail hair for fanning	SB 4.7.21

vyajane	engaged in fanning	SB 1.10.18

vyajanena	by fanning	SB 10.60.1

vyajanena	by fanning	SB 10.80.23

vyatyayaḥ	the annihilation of everything	SB 7.10.43-44

yādavāḥ	the dynasty beginning from Yadu	SB 9.23.29

yadu-kula-kṣayam	annihilation of the Yadu dynasty	SB 1.13.12

yama-ādibhiḥ	beginning with yama	SB 3.27.6

yātudhānāḥ	the cannibals (Rākṣasas)	SB 6.6.28

prathama yauvana	the beginning of youth	CC Antya 3.112

yāya nāśa	becomes annihilated	CC Antya 6.125

yena	by which (annihilation)	SB 12.8.2-5

vihāra-yogaḥ	engagement in the pastimes of material creation, maintenance and annihilation	SB 6.9.34

yuga	millenniums	BG 8.17

yuga	millenniums	BG 8.17

yuga	millennium	SB 1.4.14

yuga-dharma	acts in terms of the millennium	SB 1.4.16

yuga-anta	at the end of the millennium	SB 2.7.12

yuga-anta	at the end of the millennium	SB 3.8.17

tri-yuga	You who are manifest in all three millenniums	SB 3.16.22

yuga-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 3.33.4

yuga-sahasra-upalakṣaṇena	consisting of one thousand millenniums	SB 5.17.1

yuga-ante	at the end of the millennium	SB 5.18.6

yuga-anta-arṇave	in the water of devastation at the end of the millennium	SB 5.18.28

yuga-anta	at the end of the millennium	SB 6.8.23

yuga-anta	of the end of the millennium	SB 6.9.12

yuga-anta-agni	like the fire at the end of every millennium	SB 6.12.2

yuga-antaḥ	the end of the millennium	SB 7.8.41

yuga-anuvṛttam	according to the different millenniums	SB 7.9.38

yuga-anta	at the end of the millennium	SB 9.6.18

yuga-śatam	a hundred millenniums	SB 10.19.16

yuga-anta	at the end of a millennium	SB 10.59.7

yuga-mānam	the duration of the millennia	SB 12.4.1

nānā-yuga-kalpa	of the different millennia and the days of Brahmā	SB 12.9.28-29

yuga-manu-antare	in the ages and millenniums of Manu	CC Adi 5.113

yuga-dharma	the religion of the millennium	CC Adi 17.316

yuga-avatāra	incarnation of millenniums	CC Madhya 20.329

karena yuga-dharma	manifests His pastimes in different millenniums	CC Madhya 20.330

koṭi-yuga	millions of millenniums	CC Antya 18.14

yuga-sama	like a great millennium	CC Antya 20.40

catuḥ-yugam	four millenniums	SB 3.11.18

yugam	millennium	SB 3.11.20

anu-yugam	according to the millennium	CC Madhya 20.331

yugānām	of the millenniums	SB 3.8.12

yugāyate	becomes like an entire millennium	SB 10.31.15

yugāyitam	appearing like a great millennium	CC Antya 20.39

yuge	millennium	BG 4.8

yuge	after millennium	BG 4.8

yuge yuge	in every millennium	SB 6.9.26-27

yuge yuge	in every millennium	SB 6.9.26-27

yuge	millennium	SB 6.10.16

yuge yuge	in different millenniums	CC Adi 5.79

yuge yuge	in different millenniums	CC Adi 5.79

prati-yuge	in every age or millennium	CC Madhya 6.100

satya-yuge	in the millennium of Satya-yuga	CC Madhya 20.334

Ayurvedic MedicalDictionary Dr. Potturu with thanks

Purchase Kindle edition


brāhmi	Plant water hyssop, thyme leaved gratiola, Bacopa monnieri syn. Herpestis monnieria. Indian pennywart. see Centella asiatica.
camari	large long-haired wild and domestiated ox of Tibet; Bos grunniens; yak.
dhāvana	running, jogging.
kaliṅga	Odissi region of India; cunning or clever.
karṇa	ear, karṇanāda tinnitus, karṇapāka otitis externa diffusa, karṇapippali cysts, polyps in the ear; karṇapūrana fill medicated oil in the ear, karṇarog ear disease, karṇaśodha edema; sūla earache, otalgia, karṇavedhi, karṇavyadha ear-boring.
niṣpavana	winnowing; fanning.
parādiguṇa	distant (para), ulterior (apara), planning (yukti), categories (sankhya), combination (samyoya), disjunction (vibhāga), isolation (pṛthakkarana), measurement (parimāṇa), refining (samskāra), usage (abhyāsa).
pradhvamsābhāva	cease to exist, annihilation.
sadātura	perennial patient; patients always suffering from some or other disease.
sannikarṣa	proximity, vicinity, close contact.
sannikṛṣṭa	an aetiological factor that is closer and immeadiate. ex: vitiation of humors.
sannipāta	vitiation of three humors; three humors increased; severe condition of any disease, sannipātabhairavaras herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of complicated fevers.
sannirudhaguda	rectal stricture and difficulty in defecation.

Wordnet Search

"nni" has 22 results.


nni	upasthita, vidyamāna, vartamāna, abhīmukha, pratyakṣa, pārimukhika, upasthāyin, sannihita, aparokṣa, sammukha, sammukhin, sannidhistha, abhimukhastha, antika yaḥ samīpe tiṣṭhati vā sākṣāt vartamānaḥ। adya kakṣāyāṃ daśachātrāḥ upasthitāḥ santi।
nni	samīpam, samīpataḥ, sannidhau, nikaṭe, antikam, upānte, abhitaḥ, ārāt, āsanne, sannikṛṣṭam, nikaṣā, adūre, dūrāt, adūrataḥ svalpe antare। śyāmasya gṛhasya samīpam eva ekaḥ vidyālayaḥ asti।
nni	sammilita, sañcita, upacita, samupacita, samūḍha, saṅgūḍha, sambhṛta, sambhūta, ekīkṛta, ekastha, sannipatita, saṃhata, samaveta, saṅkalita itastata ākṛṣya ekatra kṛtam nibandhanam । aiṣamaḥ kumbhamahāsammelane sammilitānāṃ janānāṃ dhāvaṃ dhāvaṃ jātam।
nni	dūra, dūrastha, dūrasthita, dūrasthāyin, dūravartī, vidūra, viprakṛṣṭa, asannikṛṣṭa, asannihita, daviṣṭha, davīyas, anupasthāyī, anupastha, nopastha adhike antare sthitaḥ। saḥ dūre grāme vasati।
nni	nikaṭavartin, samīpastha, nikaṭastha, samīpavartīn, sannihita kālasthānādidṛṣṭyā yaḥ samīpaḥ asti। asmākaṃ grāmasya nikaṭavarti nagaraṃ kuśīnagaram।
nni	dūram, dūre, dūrataḥ, anikaṭam, asannikṛṣṭam, vidūrataḥ, dūraparyantam, ārāt, āke, parāke, parācaiḥ, āre, parāvataḥ dīrghe antare। mama gṛham asmāt sthānāt atīva dūram asti।
nni	ghaniṣṭhatā, sāmīpyam, nikaṭatā, sānnidhya, samīpatā, sannidhiḥ ghaniṣṭhasya avasthā bhāvo vā। tayoḥ madhye bahu ghaniṣṭhatā asti।
nni	ādā, grah, pragrah, parigrah, nigrah, vinigrah, āsaṅgrah, upagrah, upādā, paryādā, vigrah, pratigrah, samādā, sannigrah, upahan, ābandh, upādhā, upalabh, abhyādā, avaṣṭambh jhaṭiti balapūrvakaṃ gṛhītvā bādhanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ। rakṣakaḥ dhāvantaṃ cauram ādadāt।
nni	pratyāgam, pratigam, punar āgam, nivṛt, pratyāvṛt, pratinivṛt, sannivṛt, paryāvṛt, upāvṛt, vyāvṛt, vinivṛt, āvṛt, punar āvṛt, pratiyā, pratyāyā, punar āyā, pratyupayā, pratye, punar e, pratikram, pratipad, punar abhipad, punar upasthā, pratyupasthā, punar āvraj anyasmāt sthānāt pūrvasthānasaṃyogānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ। mama pitā hyaḥ eva dehalītaḥ pratyāgacchat।
nni	nimantraya, āmantraya, upanimantraya, sannimantraya, āhve, samāhve, upahve, ketaya, saṅketaya, abhyarthaya, ākāraya, āvāhaya sabhādiṣu samārohādiṣu ca sammelituṃ vijñāpanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ। saḥ svasya vivāhasamārohe sarvān nimantrayati।
nni	sammil, saṃgacch, samāgacch, same, sannipat ekasmin sthāne ekatrībhavanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ। sarve bālakāḥ prāṅgaṇe sammilanti।
nni	sannipātaḥ, tridoṣaḥ jvaraviśeṣaḥ yasmin kaphapittavātāśca ugrarūpaṃ dhārayanti। sannipātena pīḍitaḥ jalpati।
nni	pratyāgam, pratigam, pratiyā, pratyāyā, nivṛt, vinivṛt, pratye, pratyāvṛt, pratinivṛt, sannivṛt, paryāvṛt, upāvṛt, vyāvṛt parāvṛtya saṃyogānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ। rāmasya hūtiṃ śrutvā śyāmaḥ pratyāgacchat।
nni	pratibodhaya, unnidraya, jāgaraya, prabodhaya, vibodhaya, samutthāpaya, samprabodhaya nidrākṣayapreraṇānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ। mātā rāhulaṃ prātaḥkāle pratibodhayati।
nni	sannihita, samāhita, samanvita yasya samāveśaḥ kṛtaḥ। asya kāvyasya sannihitān bhāvān spaṣṭīkarotu।
nni	samīpatā, sānnidhyanam, āsannatā, sāmīpyam samīpasya avasthā bhāvo vā। sthānasya samīpatā hṛdayān api vyatiṣajati।
nni	anidrā, nidrānāśaḥ, nirṇidratā, nidrābhāvaḥ, unnidratā, vinidratā, vinidratvam, prajāgaraḥ nidrāyāḥ abhāvaḥ। adhikasamayaṃ yāvat anidrāyāḥ sthitiḥ apāyakāriṇī bhavituṃ śaknoti।
nni	sānnipātakī yonirogaviśeṣaḥ। tridoṣāt sānnipātakī bhavati।
nni	karṇakasannipātaḥ sannipātarogaviśeṣaḥ। karṇakasannipāte karṇau badhirau bhavataḥ।
nni	tandrilasannipātajvaraḥ sannipātajvaraprakāraḥ। tandrilasannipātajvare vāmakukṣiḥ āgacchati।
nni	pratyāgamaya, pratigamaya, punar āgamaya, nivartaya, pratyāvartaya, pratinavartaya, sannivartaya, paryāvartaya, upāvartaya, vyāvartaya, vinivartaya, āvartaya, punar āvartaya, pratiyāpaya, pratyāyāpaya, punar āyāpaya, pratyupayāpaya, pratyāyaya, punar āyaya, pratikrāmaya, punar upasthāpaya, pratyupasthāpaya, punar āvrājaya anyasmāt sthānāt pūrvasthānasaṃyogapreraṇānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ। nagaraṃ gacchantaṃ mohanaṃ patnī samayādhve pratyāgamayati।
nni	vinnibhaṭṭaḥ lekhakaviśeṣaḥ । vivaraṇapustikāyāṃ vinnibhaṭṭaḥ varṇyate

Help

Credits